Shop Manual: PW200-7E0 PW220-7E0

Shop Manual VEBM949100
PW200-7E0
PW220-7E0
MACHINE MODEL SERIAL NUMBER
PW200-7E0 H55051 AND UP
PW220-7E0 H65051 AND UP
• This shop manual may contain attachments and optional equipment that are not available in your area.
Please consult your local Komatsu distributor for those items you may require.
• Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice.
• PW200/PW220-7E0 mount the SAA6D107E-1 engine.
• For details of the engine, see the 107 Series Engine Shop Manual.
© 2008
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Europe 2008-07
10-2 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM370100
CONTENTS
No. of page
00 FOREWORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-1
01 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-1
10 STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND MAINTENANCE

STANDARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-101
20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-301

Troubleshooting when service code
"Electrical system" and failure code
"Mechanical system"are indicated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-401

Troubleshooting of electrical system (E-Mode) . . . . . 20-701

Troubleshooting of electrical system
(Error checking of items without monitor codes). . . . 20-801

Troubleshooting of hydraulic and mechanical system
(H-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-901
30 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1
90 OTHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-1
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 TOC-1

Blank for technical reason
TOC-2 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

00 FOREWORD
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-3
Safety notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-3
General precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-3
Preparations for work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-4
Precautions during work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-4
List of revised pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-7
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-13
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-13
Structure and function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-13
Testing, adjusting and troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-13
Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-13
Maintenance standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-13
How to read the shop manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-14

Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-14
Distribution and updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-14
Filing method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-14
Revised edition mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-14
Revisions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-15
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-15
Hoisting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-16

Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-16
Coating materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-18
Standard tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-20

Standard tightening torque of bolts and nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-20
Tightening torque of hose nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-21
Tightening torque of split flange bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-21
Tightening torques for hoses
(taper seal type and face seal type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-22
Tightening torque for 107 engine series (bolts and nuts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-22
Tightening torque for 107 engine series (eye joints) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-23
Tightening torque for 107 engine series (tapered screws) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-23
Electric wire code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-24

Classification by thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-24
Classification by color and code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-24
Conversion tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-25

Method of using the conversion table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-25
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-30
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-31
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-1

FOREWORD
00-2 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

FOREWORD Safety
Safety
Safety notice
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

Proper service and repair is extremely important for the
safe operation of your machine. The service and repair
techniques recommended and described in this manual are
both effective and safe methods of operation. Some of
these operations require the use of tools specially designed
for the purpose.
To prevent injury to workers, the symbol is used to mark
safety precautions in this manual. The cautions accompa-
nying these symbols should always be followed carefully. If
any dangerous situation arises or may possibly arise, first
consider safety, and take the necessary actions to deal with
the situation.
General precautions
Mistakes in operation are extremely dangerous. Read the OP-
ERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL carefully BEFORE oper-
ating the machine.
1. Before carrying out any greasing or repairs, read all the pre-
cautions given on the decals which are fixed to the machine.
2. When carrying out any operation, always wear safety shoes

and helmet. Do not wear loose work clothes, or clothes with
buttons missing.
• Always wear safety glasses when hitting parts with a

hammer.
• Always wear safety glasses when grinding parts with a

grinder, etc.
3. If welding repairs are needed, always have a trained, experi-

enced welder carry out the work. When carrying out welding
work, always wear welding gloves, apron, glasses, cap and
other clothes suited for welding work.
4. When carrying out any operation with two or more workers,

always agree on the operating procedure before starting. Al-
ways inform your fellow workers before starting any step of
the operation. Before starting work, hang UNDER REPAIR
signs on the controls in the operator's compartment.
5. Keep all tools in good condition and learn the correct way to
use them.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-3

Safety FOREWORD
6. Decide a place in the repair workshop to keep tools and re-

moved parts. Always keep the tools and parts in their correct
places. Always keep the work area clean and make sure
that there is no dirt or oil on the floor. Smoke only in the are-
as provided for smoking. Never smoke while working.
Preparations for work

1. Before adding oil or making repairs, park the machine on
hard, level ground, and block the wheels or tracks to prevent
the machine from moving.
2. Before starting work, lower blade, ripper, bucket or any other

work equipment to the ground. If this is not possible, insert
the safety pin or use blocks to prevent the work equipment
from falling. In addition, be sure to lock all the control levers
and hang warning signs on them.
3. When disassembling or assembling, support the machine

with blocks, jacks or stands before starting work.
4. Remove all mud and oil from the steps or other places used
to get on and off the machine. Always use the handrails, lad-
ders or steps when getting on or off the machine. Never
jump on or off the machine. If it is impossible to use the
handrails, ladders or steps, use a stand to provide safe foot-
ing.
Precautions during work

1. When removing the oil filler cap, drain plug or hydraulic
pressure measuring plugs, loosen them slowly to prevent
the oil from spurting out. Before disconnecting or removing
components of the oil, water or air circuits, first remove the
pressure completely from the circuit.
2. The water and oil in the circuits are hot when the engine is
stopped, so be careful not to get burned. Wait for the oil and
water to cool before carrying out any work on the oil or water
circuits.
3. Before starting work, remove the leads from the battery. AL-
WAYS remove the lead from the negative (-) terminal first.
4. When raising heavy components, use a hoist or crane.

Check that the wire rope, chains and hooks are free from
damage. Always use lifting equipment which has ample ca-
pacity. Install the lifting equipment at the correct places. Use
a hoist or crane and operate slowly to prevent the compo-
nent from hitting any other part. Do not work with any part
still raised by the hoist or crane.
5. When removing covers which are under internal pressure or

under pressure from a spring, always leave two bolts in posi-
tion on opposite sides. Slowly release the pressure, then
slowly loosen the bolts to remove.
00-4 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

FOREWORD Safety
6. When removing components, be careful not to break or

damage the wiring, Damaged wiring may cause electrical
fires.
7. When removing piping, stop the fuel or oil from spilling out. If
any fuel or oil drips on to the floor, wipe it up immediately.
Fuel or oil on the floor can cause you to slip, or can even
start fires.
8. As a general rule, do not use gasoline to wash parts. In par-

ticular, use only the minimum of gasoline when washing
electrical parts.
9. Be sure to assemble all parts again in their original places.

Replace any damaged part with new parts.
• When installing hoses and wires, be sure that they will

not be damaged by contact with other parts when the
machine is being operated.
10. When installing high pressure hoses, make sure that they
are not twisted. Damaged tubes are dangerous, so be ex-
tremely careful when installing tubes for high pressure cir-
cuits. Also check that connecting parts are correctly
installed.
11. When assembling or installing parts, always use the speci-

fied tightening torques. When installing protective parts such
as guards, or parts which vibrate violently or rotate at high
speed, be particularly careful to check that they are installed
correctly.
12. When aligning two holes, never insert your fingers or hand.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught in a hole.
13. When measuring hydraulic pressure, check that the measur-

ing tool is correctly assembled before taking any measure-
ments.
14. Take care when removing or installing the tracks of track-

type machines. When removing the track, the track sepa-
rates suddenly, so never let anyone stand at either end of
the track.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-5

Safety FOREWORD
00-6 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

FOREWORD List of revised pages
List of revised pages

The affected pages are indicated by the use Mark Indication Action required
of the following marks. It is requested that
Page to be newly added Add
necessary actions be taken to these pages
according to the table below. Page to be replaced Replace
() Page to be deleted Discard
NOTE
Pages having no marks are those previously revised or
made additions.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-7

List of revised pages FOREWORD
Time of Time of Time of Time of Time of

Mark Page Mark Page Mark Page Mark Page Mark Page
Revision Revision Revision Revision Revision
00-1 10-7 10-62 10-117 10-172

00-2 10-8 10-63 10-118 10-173
00-3 10-9 10-64 10-119 10-174
00-4 10-10 10-65 10-120 10-175
00-5 10-11 10-66 10-121 10-176
00-6 10-12 10-67 10-122 10-177
00-7 10-13 10-68 10-123 10-178
00-8 10-14 10-69 10-124 10-179
00-9 10-15 10-70 10-125 10-180
00-10 10-16 10-71 10-126 10-181
00-11 10-17 10-72 10-127 10-182
00-12 10-18 10-73 10-128 10-183
00-13 10-19 10-74 10-129 10-184
00-14 10-20 10-75 10-130 10-185
00-15 10-21 10-76 10-131 10-186
00-16 10-22 10-77 10-132 10-187
00-17 10-23 10-78 10-133 10-188
00-18 10-24 10-79 10-134 10-189
00-19 10-25 10-80 10-135 10-190
00-20 10-26 10-81 10-136 10-191
00-21 10-27 10-82 10-137 10-192
00-23 10-28 10-83 10-138 10-193
00-24 10-29 10-84 10-139 10-194
00-25 10-30 10-85 10-140 10-195
00-26 10-31 10-86 10-141 10-196
00-27 10-32 10-87 10-142 10-197
00-28 10-33 10-88 10-143 10-198
00-29 10-34 10-89 10-144 10-199
00-30 10-35 10-90 10-145 10-200
00-31 10-36 10-91 10-146 10-201
00-32 10-37 10-92 10-147 10-202
10-38 10-93 10-148 10-203
01-1 10-39 10-94 10-149 10-204
01-2 10-40 10-95 10-150 10-205
01-3 10-41 10-96 10-151 10-206
01-4 10-42 10-97 10-152 10-207
01-5 10-43 10-98 10-153 10-208
01-6 10-44 10-99 10-154 10-209
01-7 10-45 10-100 10-155 10-210
01-8 10-46 10-101 10-156 10-211
01-9 10-47 10-102 10-157 10-212
01-10 10-48 10-103 10-158 10-213
01-11 10-49 10-104 10-159 10-214
01-12 10-50 10-105 10-160 10-215
01-13 10-51 10-106 10-161 10-216
01-14 10-52 10-107 10-162 10-217
01-15 10-53 10-108 10-163 10-218
01-16 10-54 10-109 10-164 10-219
10-55 10-110 10-165 10-220
10-1 10-56 10-111 10-166 10-221
10-2 10-57 10-112 10-167 10-222
10-3 10-58 10-113 10-168 10-223
10-4 10-59 10-114 10-169 10-224
10-5 10-60 10-115 10-170 10-225
10-6 10-61 10-116 10-171 10-226
00-8 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100


10-227 20-124 20-179 20-309 20-364

10-228 20-125 20-180 20-310 20-365
10-229 20-126 20-181 20-311 20-366
10-230 20-127 20-182 20-312 20-367
10-231 20-128 20-183 20-313 20-368
10-232 20-129 20-184 20-314 20-369
10-233 20-130 20-185 20-315 20-370
10-234 20-131 20-186 20-316 20-371
10-235 20-132 20-187 20-317 20-372
10-236 20-133 20-188 20-318 20-373
10-237 20-134 20-189 20-319 20-374
10-238 20-135 20-190 20-320 20-375
20-136 20-191 20-321 20-376
20-1 20-137 20-192 20-322 20-377
20-2 20-138 20-193 20-323 20-378
20-3 20-139 20-194 20-324
20-4 20-140 20-195 20-325 20-401
20-5 20-141 20-196 20-326 20-402
20-6 20-142 20-197 20-327 20-403
20-7 20-143 20-198 20-328 20-404
20-8 20-144 20-199 20-329 20-405
20-9 20-145 20-200 20-330 20-406
20-10 20-146 20-201 20-331 20-407
20-11 20-147 20-202 20-332 20-408
20-12 20-148 20-203 20-333 20-409
20-13 20-149 20-204 20-334 20-410
20-14 20-150 20-205 20-335 20-411
20-15 20-151 20-206 20-336 20-412
20-16 20-152 20-207 20-337 20-413
20-17 20-153 20-208 20-338 20-414
20-18 20-154 20-209 20-339 20-415
20-155 20-210 20-340 20-416
20-101 20-156 20-211 20-341 20-417
20-102 20-157 20-212 20-342 20-418
20-103 20-158 20-213 20-343 20-419
20-104 20-159 20-214 20-344 20-420
20-105 20-160 20-215 20-345 20-421
20-106 20-161 20-216 20-346 20-422
20-107 20-162 20-217 20-347 20-423
20-108 20-163 20-218 20-348 20-424
20-109 20-164 20-219 20-349 20-425
20-110 20-165 20-220 20-350 20-426
20-111 20-166 20-221 20-351 20-427
20-112 20-167 20-222 20-352 20-428
20-113 20-168 20-223 20-353 20-429
20-114 20-169 20-224 20-354 20-430
20-115 20-170 20-355 20-431
20-116 20-171 20-301 20-356 20-432
20-117 20-172 20-302 20-357 20-433
20-118 20-173 20-303 20-358 20-434
20-119 20-174 20-304 20-359 20-435
20-120 20-175 20-305 20-360 20-436
20-121 20-176 20-306 20-361 20-437
20-122 20-177 20-307 20-362 20-438
20-123 20-178 20-308 20-363 20-439
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-9


20-440 20-495 20-550 20-605 20-723

20-441 20-496 20-551 20-606 20-724
20-442 20-497 20-552 20-607 20-725
20-443 20-498 20-553 20-608 20-726
20-444 20-499 20-554 20-609 20-727
20-445 20-500 20-555 20-610 20-728
20-446 20-501 20-556 20-611 20-729
20-447 20-502 20-557 20-612 20-730
20-448 20-503 20-558 20-613 20-731
20-449 20-504 20-559 20-614 20-732
20-450 20-505 20-560 20-615 20-733
20-451 20-506 20-561 20-616 20-734
20-452 20-507 20-562 20-617 20-735
20-453 20-508 20-563 20-618 20-736
20-454 20-509 20-564 20-619 20-737
20-455 20-510 20-565 20-620 20-738
20-456 20-511 20-566 20-621 20-739
20-457 20-512 20-567 20-622 20-740
20-458 20-513 20-568 20-623 20-741
20-459 20-514 20-569 20-624 20-742
20-460 20-515 20-570 20-625 20-743
20-461 20-516 20-571 20-626 20-744
20-462 20-517 20-572 20-627 20-745
20-463 20-518 20-573 20-628 20-746
20-464 20-519 20-574 20-629 20-747
20-465 20-520 20-575 20-630 20-748
20-466 20-521 20-576 20-631 20-749
20-467 20-522 20-577 20-632 20-750
20-468 20-523 20-578 20-633
20-469 20-524 20-579 20-634 20-801
20-470 20-525 20-580 20-635 20-802
20-471 20-526 20-581 20-636 20-803
20-472 20-527 20-582 20-804
20-473 20-528 20-583 20-701 20-805
20-474 20-529 20-584 20-702 20-806
20-475 20-530 20-585 20-703 20-807
20-476 20-531 20-586 20-704 20-808
20-477 20-532 20-587 20-705 20-809
20-478 20-533 20-588 20-706 20-810
20-479 20-534 20-589 20-707 20-811
20-480 20-535 20-590 20-708 20-812
20-481 20-536 20-591 20-709 20-813
20-482 20-537 20-592 20-710 20-814
20-483 20-538 20-593 20-711 20-815
20-484 20-539 20-594 20-712 20-816
20-485 20-540 20-595 20-713 20-817
20-486 20-541 20-596 20-714 20-818
20-487 20-542 20-597 20-715 20-819
20-488 20-543 20-598 20-716 20-820
20-489 20-544 20-599 20-717 20-821
20-490 20-545 20-600 20-718 20-822
20-491 20-546 20-601 20-719 20-823
20-492 20-547 20-602 20-720 20-824
20-493 20-548 20-603 20-721 20-825
20-494 20-549 20-604 20-722 20-826
00-10 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100


20-827 20-882 20-946 30-46 30-101

20-828 20-883 20-947 30-47 30-102
20-829 20-884 20-948 30-48 30-103
20-830 20-885 20-949 30-49 30-104
20-831 20-886 20-950 30-50 30-105
20-832 20-887 20-951 30-51 30-106
20-833 20-888 20-952 30-52 30-107
20-834 20-889 20-953 30-53 30-108
20-835 20-890 20-954 30-54 30-109
20-836 30-55 30-110
20-837 20-901 30-1 30-56 30-111
20-838 20-902 30-2 30-57 30-112
20-839 20-903 30-3 30-58 30-113
20-840 20-904 30-4 30-59 30-114
20-841 20-905 30-5 30-60 30-115
20-842 20-906 30-6 30-61 30-116
20-843 20-907 30-7 30-62 30-117
20-844 20-908 30-8 30-63 30-118
20-845 20-909 30-9 30-64 30-119
20-846 20-910 30-10 30-65 30-120
20-847 20-911 30-11 30-66 30-121
20-848 20-912 30-12 30-67 30-122
20-849 20-913 30-13 30-68 30-123
20-850 20-914 30-14 30-69 30-124
20-851 20-915 30-15 30-70 30-125
20-852 20-916 30-16 30-71 30-126
20-853 20-917 30-17 30-72 30-127
20-854 20-918 30-18 30-73 30-128
20-855 20-919 30-19 30-74 30-129
20-856 20-920 30-20 30-75 30-130
20-857 20-921 30-21 30-76 30-131
20-858 20-922 30-22 30-77 30-132
20-859 20-923 30-23 30-78 30-133
20-860 20-924 30-24 30-79 30-134
20-861 20-925 30-25 30-80 30-135
20-862 20-926 30-26 30-81 30-136
20-863 20-927 30-27 30-82 30-137
20-864 20-928 30-28 30-83 30-138
20-865 20-929 30-29 30-84 30-139
20-866 20-930 30-30 30-85 30-140
20-867 20-931 30-31 30-86 30-141
20-868 20-932 30-32 30-87 30-142
20-869 20-933 30-33 30-88 30-143
20-870 20-934 30-34 30-89 30-144
20-871 20-935 30-35 30-90 30-145
20-872 20-936 30-36 30-91 30-146
20-873 20-937 30-37 30-92 30-147
20-874 20-938 30-38 30-93 30-148
20-875 20-939 30-39 30-94 30-149
20-876 20-940 30-40 30-95 30-150
20-877 20-941 30-41 30-96 30-151
20-878 20-942 30-42 30-97 30-152
20-879 20-943 30-43 30-98 30-153
20-880 20-944 30-44 30-99 30-154
20-881 20-945 30-45 30-100 30-155
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-11


30-156 30-211 30-266

30-157 30-212 30-267
30-158 30-213 30-268
30-159 30-214 30-269
30-160 30-215 30-270
30-161 30-216 30-271
30-162 30-217 30-272
30-163 30-218 30-273
30-164 30-219 30-274
30-165 30-220 30-275
30-166 30-221 30-276
30-167 30-222 30-277
30-168 30-223 30-278
30-169 30-224 30-279
30-170 30-225 30-280
30-171 30-226 30-281
30-172 30-227 30-282
30-173 30-228 30-283
30-174 30-229 30-284
30-175 30-230 30-285
30-176 30-231 30-286
30-177 30-232
30-178 30-233 90-1
30-179 30-234 90-2
30-180 30-235 90-3
30-181 30-236 90-4
30-182 30-237 90-5
30-183 30-238 90-6
30-184 30-239 90-7
30-185 30-240 90-8
30-186 30-241 90-9
30-187 30-242 90-10
30-188 30-243 90-11
30-189 30-244 90-12
30-190 30-245 90-13
30-191 30-246 90-14
30-192 30-247 90-15
30-193 30-248 90-16
30-194 30-249
30-195 30-250
30-196 30-251
30-197 30-252
30-198 30-253
30-199 30-254
30-200 30-255
30-201 30-256
30-202 30-257
30-203 30-258
30-204 30-259
30-205 30-260
30-206 30-261
30-207 30-262
30-208 30-263
30-209 30-264
30-210 30-265
00-12 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

FOREWORD General
General
This shop manual has been prepared as an aid to improve the
quality of repairs by giving the serviceman an accurate under-
standing of the product and by showing him the correct way to
perform repairs and make judgements. Make sure you under-
stand the contents of this manual and use it to full effect at every
opportunity.
This shop manual mainly contains the necessary technical infor-

mation for operations performed in a service workshop. For
ease of understanding, the manual is divided into the following
sections. These sections are further divided into each main
group of components.
General
This section lists the general machine dimensions, performance
specifications, component weights, and fuel, coolant and lubri-
cant specification charts.
Structure and function

This section explains the structure and function of each compo-
nent. It serves not only to give an understanding of the structure,
but also serves as reference material for troubleshooting.
Testing, adjusting and troubleshooting

This section explains checks to be made before and after per-
forming repairs, as well as adjustments to be made at comple-
tion of the checks and repairs. Troubleshooting charts
correlating “Problems” to “Causes” are also included in this sec-
tion.
Disassembly and assembly

This section explains the order to be followed when removing,
installing, disassembling or assembling each component, as well
as precautions to be taken for these operations.
Maintenance standard
This section gives the judgement standards when inspecting dis-
assembled parts.
NOTE
The specifications contained in this shop manual are subject to
change at any time and without any advance notice. Contact your
distributor for the latest information.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-13

How to read the shop manual FOREWORD
How to read the shop manual
Volumes
Shop manuals are issued as a guide to carrying out repairs.
They are divided as follows:
Chassis volume: Issued for every machine model
Engine volume: Issued for each engine series
Electrical volume: Each issued as one to cover all models
Attachment volume: Each issued as one to cover all models
These various volumes are designed to avoid duplication of in-

formation. Therefore to deal with all repairs for any model, it is
necessary that chassis, engine, electrical and attachment be
available.
Distribution and updating

Any additions, amendments or other changes will be sent to
your distributors. Get the most up-to-date information before you
start any work.
Filing method
1. See the page number on the bottom of the page. File the
pages in correct order.
2. Following examples show how to read the page number.
Example 1 (Chassis volume):
10 - 3
Item number (10. Structure and Function)
Consecutive page number for each item
3. Additional pages: Additional pages are indicated by a point

(.) and number after the page number.
File as in the example.
Example:
10-4
10-4.1
Added Pages
10-4.2
10-5
Revised edition mark

When a manual is revised, an edition mark (123…) is record-
ed on the bottom of the pages.
00-14 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

FOREWORD How to read the shop manual
Revisions
Revised pages are shown at the LIST OF REVISED PAGES be-
tween the title page and SAFETY page.
Symbols
So that the shop manual can be of ample practical use, impor-
tant safety and quality portions are marked with the following
symbols:
Symbol Item Remarks
 Safety Special safety precautions are necessary when performing the work.
Special technical precautions or other precautions for preserving standards are necessary
Caution
when performing the work.
Weight of parts of systems.

Weight
4 Caution necessary when selecting hoisting wire, or when working posture is important, etc.
3 Tightening torque Places that require special attention for the tightening torque during assembly.
2 Coat Places to be coated with adhesives and libricants, etc.
Oil, water Places where oil, water or fuel must be added, and the capacity.
5
Drain Places where oil or water must be drained, and quantity to be drained.
6
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-15

Hoisting instructions FOREWORD
Hoisting instructions
Hoisting
Heavy parts (25kg or more) must be lifted with a

hoist, etc. In the DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
section, every part weigthing 25 kg or more is in-
dicated clearly with the symbol: 4
If a part cannot be smoothly removed from the machine by hoist-

ing, the following checks should be made:
1. Check for removal of all bolts fastening the part to the rela-
tive parts.
2. Check for existence of another part causing interference

with the part to be removed.
Wire ropes
1. Use adequate ropes depending on the weight of parts to be
hoisted, refering to the table below:
Wire ropes
(Standard “Z” or “S” twist ropes without galvanizing)
Rope diameter Allowable load
mm kN tons
10 9.8 1.0
11.2 13.7 1.4
12.5 15.7 1.6
14 21.6 2.2
16 27.5 2.8
18 35.3 3.6
20 43.1 4.4
22.4 54.9 5.6
30 98.1 10.0
40 176.5 18.0
50 274.6 28.0
60 392.2 40.0
The allowable load value is estimated to be 1/6 or 1/7 of the

breaking strength of the rope used.
00-1 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

FOREWORD Hoisting instructions
2. Sling wire ropes from the middle portion of the hook. Sling-
ing near the edge of the hook may cause the rope to slip off
the hook during hoisting, and a serious accident can result.
Hooks have maximum strength at the middle portion.
100% 88% 79% 71% 41%

SAD00479
3. Do not sling a heavy load with one rope alone, but sling with
two or more ropes symmetrically wound on to the load.
Slinging with one rope may cause turning of the load during
hoisting, untwisting of the rope, or slipping of the rope from
its original winding position on the load, which can result in
a dangerous accident.
4. Do not sling a heavy load with ropes forming a wide hanging

angle from the hook. When hoisting a load with two or more
ropes, the force subjected to each rope will increase with the
hanging angles. The table below shows the variation of al-
lowable load (kg) when hoisting is made with two ropes,
each of which is allowed to sling up to 1000 kg vertically, at
various hanging angles. When two ropes sling a load verti-
cally, up to 2000 kg of total weight can be suspended. This
weight becomes 1000 kg when two ropes make a 120°
hanging angle. On the other hand, two ropes are subject to
an excessive force as large as 4000 kg if they sling a 2000
kg load at a lifting angle of 150.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-17

Coating materials FOREWORD
Coating materials
The recommended coating materials prescribed in the shop
manuals are listed below.
Category Code Part No. Quantity Container Main applications, features
• Used to prevent rubber gaskets, rubber cush-

LT-1A 790-129-9030 150 g Tube
ions and cork plugs from coming out
• Used in places requiring an immediately effec-

tive, strong adhesive.
20 g Polyethylene
LT-1B 790-129-9050 • Used for plastics (except polyethylene, polypro-
(2 pes.) container
pylene, tetrafluoroethylene, and vinyl chloride),
rubber, metal and non-metal.
• Features: Resistance to heat, chemicals

Polyethylene
LT-2 09940-00030 50 g • Used for anti-loosening and sealant purposes
container
for bolts and plugs.
Adhesive:
790-129-9060
1 kg
(Set of adhesive • Used as adhesive or sealant for metal, glass or
LT-3 Hardening Can
and hardening plastic.
agent:
agent)
500 g
Adhesives
Polyethylene
LT-4 790-129-9040 250 g • Used as sealant for machined holes.
container
• Used as heat-resisting sealant for repairing en-

Holtz MH 705 790-126-9120 75 g Tube
gine.
• Quick hardening type adhesive.

Three bond Polyethylene • Cure time: within 5 sec. to 3 min.
179-129-9140 50 g
1735 container • Used mainly for adhesion of metals, rubbers,
plastics and woods.
• Quick hardening type adhesive.

• Quick cure type (max. strength after 30 min-
Aronalpha Polyethylene
790-129-9130 2g utes).
201 container
• Used mainly for adhesion of rubbers, plastics
and metals.
• Features: Resistance to heat, chemicals

Loctite Polyethylene
79A-129-9110 50 cc • Used at joint portions subject to high tempera-
648-50 container
ture.
• Used as adhesive or sealant for gaskets and

LG-1 790-129-9010 200 g Tube
packing of power train case, etc.
Gasket sealant
• Features: Resistance to heat

• Used as sealant for flange surfaces and bolts at
high temperature locations; used to prevent sei-
LG-3 790-129-9070 1 kg Can zure.
• Used as sealant for heat resistant gasket for at
high temperature locations such as engine pre-
combustion chamber, exhaust pipe.
00-18 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

FOREWORD Coating materials
Category Code Part No. Quantity Container Main applications, features
• Features: Resistance to water, oil

• Used as sealant for flange surface, thread.
• Also possible to use as sealant for flanges with
LG-4 790-129-9020 200 g Tube
large clearance.
• Used as sealant for mating surfaces of final
drive case, transmission case.
• Used as sealant for various threads, pipe joints,

Polyethylene flanges.
LG-5 790-129-9080 1 kg
container • Used as sealant for tapered plugs, elbows, nip-
sealant
Gasket
ples of hydraulic piping.
• Features: Silicon based, resistant to heat, cold.

LG-6 09940-00011 250 g Tube • Used as sealant for flange surface, thread.
• Used as sealant for oil pan, final drive case, etc.
• Features: Silicon based, quick hardening type.

LG-7 09920-00150 150 g Tube • Used as sealant for flywheel housing, intake
manifold, oil pan, thermostat housing, etc.
Three bond • Used as heat-resisting sealant for repairing en-

790-129-9090 100 g Tube
1211 gines.
• Used as lubricant for sliding parts (to prevent

Molybdenum
LM-G 09940-00051 60 g Can

disulphide
squeaking).
lubricant
• Used to prevent seizure or scuffing of the thread

LM-P 09940-00040 200 g Tube when press fitting or shrink fitting.
• Used as lubricant for linkage, bearings, etc.
SYG2-400LI
SYG2-350LI
G2-LI SYG2-400LI-A Various Various • General purpose type
SYG2-160LI
SYGA160CNLI
SYG2-400CA
SYG2-350CA
• Used for normal temperature, light load bearing
G2-CA SYG2-400CA-A Various Various
Grease
at places in contact with water or steam.

SYG2-160CA
SYG2-160CNCA
disulphide lubricant
Molybdenum
400 g
SYG2-400M Belows type • Used for places with heavy load.
(10 per case)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-19

Standard tightening torque FOREWORD
Standard tightening torque
Standard tightening torque of bolts and

nuts
The following charts give the standard tightening torques of bolts
and nuts. Exceptions are given in DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEM-
BLY.
Thread diameter of bolt Width across flats
mm mm Nm kgm
6 10 13.2 ± 1.4 1.35 ± 0.15
8 13 31.4 ± 2.9 3.20 ± 0.3
10 17 65.7 ± 6.8 6.70 ± 0.7
12 19 112 ± 9.8 11.5 ± 1.0
14 22 177 ± 19 18 ± 2.0
16 24 279 ± 29 28.5 ± 3
18 27 383 ± 39 39 ± 4
20 30 549 ± 58 56 ± 6
22 32 745 ± 78 76 ± 8
24 36 927 ± 98 94.5 ± 10
27 41 1320 ± 140 135 ± 15
30 46 1720 ± 190 175 ± 20
33 50 2210 ± 240 225 ± 25
36 55 2750 ± 290 280 ± 30
39 60 3280 ± 340 335 ± 35
Thread diameter of bolt Width across flats
mm mm Nm kgm
6 10 7.85 ± 1.95 0.8 ± 0.2
8 13 18.6 ± 4.9 1.9 ± 0.5
10 14 40.2 ± 5.9 4.1 ± 0.6
12 27 82.35 ± 7.85 8.4 ± 0.8
00-20 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

FOREWORD Standard tightening torque
Tightening torque of hose nuts

Use these torques for hose nuts.
Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque

Nominal No.
mm mm Nm kgm
02 14 19 24.5 ± 4.9 2.5 ± 0.5
03 18 24 49 ± 19.6 5±2
04 22 27 78.5 ± 19.6 8±2
05 24 32 137.3 ± 29.4 14 ± 3
06 30 36 176.5 ± 29.4 18 ± 3
10 33 41 196.1 ± 49 20 ± 5
12 36 46 245.2 ± 49 25 ± 5
14 42 55 294.2 ± 49 30 ± 5
Tightening torque of split flange bolts

Use these torques for split flange bolts.
Thread diameter Width across flat Tightening torque
mm mm Nm kgm
10 14 65.7 ± 6.8 6.7 ± 0.7
12 17 112 ± 9.8 11.5 ± 1
16 22 279 ± 29 28.5 ± 3
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-21

Standard tightening torque FOREWORD
Tightening torques for hoses

(taper seal type and face seal type)
• Unless there are special instructions, tighten the hoses (ta-
per the hoses (taper seal type and face seal type) to the
torque below.
• Apply the following torque when the threads are coated

(wet) with engine oil.
Tightening torque Nm {kgm} Taper seal Face seal

Nominal Width Nominal No. -
No. of across Thread diam-
Thread size Number of
hose flat Range Target eter (mm)
(mm) threads, type of
(Referenced)
thread
34 - 54 {3.5 - 5.5} - 9/16 - 18UN 14.3

02 19 44 {4.5}
34 - 63 {3.5 - 6.5} 14 - -
22 54 - 93 {5.5 - 9.5} 74 {7.5} - 11/16 - 16UN 17.5

03
24 59 - 98 {6.0 - 10.0} 78 {8.0} 18 - -
04 27 84 - 132 {8.5 - 13.5} 103 {10.5} 22 13/16 - 16UN 20.6
05 32 128 - 186 {13.0 - 19.0} 157 {16.0} 24 1 - 14UNS 25.4
06 36 177 - 245 {18.0 - 25.0} 216 {22.0} 30 1 - 3/16 - 12UN 30.2
(10) 41 177 - 245 {18.0 - 25.0} 216 {22.0} 33 - -
(12) 46 197 - 294 {20.0 - 30.0} 245 {25.0} 36 - -
(14) 55 246 - 343 {25.0 - 35.0} 294 {30.0} 42 - -
Tightening torque for 107 engine series

(bolts and nuts)
• Unless there are special instructions, tighten the metric bolts
and nuts of the 107 engine series to the torque below.
Thread diameter Tightening torque
mm Nm kgm Nm kgm
6 10 ± 2 1.02 ± 0.20 8±2 0.81 ± 0.20
8 24 ± 4 2.45 ± 0.41 10 ± 2 1.02 ± 0.20
10 43 ± 6 4.38 ± 0.61 12 ± 2 1.22 ± 0.20
12 77 ± 12 7.85 ± 1.22 24 ± 2 2.45 ± 0.41
14 - - 36 ± 5 3.67 ± 0.51
00-22 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

FOREWORD Standard tightening torque

(eye joints)
• Use these torque values for eye joints (unit: mm).
mm Nm kgm
6 8±2 0.81 ± 0.20
8 10 ± 2 1.02 ± 0.20
10 12 ± 2 1.22 ± 0.20
12 24 ± 4 2.45 ± 0.41
14 36 ± 5 3.67 ± 0.51

(tapered screws)
• Use these torque values for tapered screws (unit: inch).
inch Nm kgm
1/16 3±1 0.31 ± 0.10
1/8 8±2 0.81 ± 0.20
1/4 12 ± 2 1.22 ± 0.20
3/8 15 ± 2 1.53 ± 0.41
1/2 24 ± 4 2.45 ± 0.41
3/4 36 ± 5 3.67 ± 0.51
1 60 ± 9 6.12 ± 0.92
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-23

Electric wire code FOREWORD
Electric wire code

In the wiring diagrams, various colors and symbols are em-
ployed to indicate the thickness of wires. This wire code table
will help you understand WIRING DIAGRAMS.
EXAMPLE: 05WB indicates a cable having a nominal number

05 and white coating with black stripe.
Classification by thickness
Copper wire
Nominal Cable O.D. Current
Number of Dia. Of Cross sec- Applicable circuit
number (mm) rating (A)
strands strand (mm) tion (mm)
0.85 11 0.32 0.88 2.4 12 Starting, lighting, signal etc.
2 26 0.32 2.09 3.1 20 Lighting, signal etc.
5 65 0.32 5.23 4.6 37 Charging and signal
15 84 0.45 13.36 7.0 59 Starting (Glow plug)
40 85 0.80 42.73 11.4 135 Starting
60 127 0.80 63.84 13.6 178 Starting
100 217 0.80 109.1 17.6 230 Starting
Classification by color and code
Prior- Circuits
Charging Ground Starting Lighting Instrument Signal Other
ity Classification
Code W B B R Y G L
Primary
1
Color White Black Black Red Yellow Green Blue
Code WR — BW RW YR GW LW
2 White & Black & Red & Yellow & Green & Blue &
Color —
Red White White Red White White
Code WB — BY RB YB GR LR
3 White & Black & Yel- Yellow & Green &
Color — Red & Black Blue & Red
Black low Black Red
Code WL — BR RY YG GY LY
Auxiliary
4 White & Red & Yel- Yellow & Green & Blue & Yel-
Color — Black & Red
Blue low Green Yellow low
Code WG — — RG YL GB LB
5 White & Red & Yellow & Green & Blue &
Color — —
Green Green Blue Black Black
Code — — — RL YW GL —
6 Yellow & Green &
Color — — — Red & Blue —
White Blue
00-24 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

FOREWORD Conversion tables
Conversion tables
Method of using the conversion table

The Conversion Table in this section is provided to enable sim-
ple conversion of figures. For details of the method of using the
Conversion Table, see the example given below.
EXAMPLE
Method of using the Conversion Table to convert from millime-
ters to inches.
1. Convert 55 mm into inches.
a. Locate the number 50 in the vertical column at the left

side, take this as (1), then draw a horizontal line from
(1).
b. Locate the number 5 in the row across the top, take this
as (2), then draw a perpendicular line down from (2).
c. Take the point where the two lines cross as (3). This
point (3) gives the value when converting from millime-
ters to inches. Therefore, 55 millimeters = 2.165 inches.
2. Convert 550 mm into inches.
a. The number 550 does not appear in the table, so divide

by 10 (move the decimal one place to the left) to convert
it to 55 mm.
b. Carry out the same procedure as above to convert 55

mm to 2.165 inches.
c. The original value (550 mm) was divided by 10, so multi-

ply 2.165 inches by 10 (move the decimal one place to
the right) to return to the original value. This gives 550
mm = 21.65 inches.
(2)
Millimeters to inches 1 mm = 0.03937 in
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.039 0.079 0.118 0.157 0.197 0.236 0.276 0.315 0.354
10 0.394 0.433 0.472 0.512 0.551 0.591 0.630 0.669 0.709 0.748
20 0.787 0.827 0.866 0.906 0.945 0.984 1.024 1.063 1.102 1.142
30 1.181 1.220 1.260 1.299 1.339 1.378 1.417 1.457 1.496 1.536
40 1.575 1.614 1.654 1.693 1.732 1.772 1.811 1.850 1.890 1.929
(3)
50 1.969 2.008 2.047 2.087 2.126 2.165 2.205 2.244 2.283 2.323
(1)
60 2.362 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.520 2.559 2.598 2.638 2.677 2.717
70 2.756 2.795 2.835 2.874 2.913 2.953 2.992 3.032 3.071 3.110
80 3.150 3.189 3.228 3.268 3.307 3.346 3.386 3.425 3.465 3.504
90 3.543 3.583 3.622 3.661 3.701 3.740 3.780 3.819 3.858 3.898
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-25

Conversion tables FOREWORD
Millimeters to Inches 1 mm = 0.03937 in
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.039 0.079 0.118 0.157 0.197 0.236 0.276 0.315 0.354
10 0.394 0.433 0.472 0.512 0.551 0.591 0.630 0.669 0.709 0.748
20 0.787 0.827 0.866 0.906 0.945 0.984 1.024 1.063 1.102 1.142
30 1.181 1.220 1.260 1.299 1.339 1.378 1.417 1.457 1.496 1.536
40 1.575 1.614 1.654 1.693 1.732 1.772 1.811 1.850 1.890 1.929
50 1.969 2.008 2.047 2.087 2.126 2.165 2.205 2.244 2.283 2.323
60 2.362 2.402 2.441 2.480 2.520 2.559 2.598 2.638 2.677 2.717
70 2.756 2.795 2.835 2.874 2.913 2.953 2.992 3.032 3.071 3.110
80 3.150 3.189 3.228 3.268 3.307 3.346 3.386 3.425 3.465 3.504
90 3.543 3.583 3.622 3.661 3.701 3.740 3.780 3.819 3.858 3.898
Kilogram to Pound 1 kg = 2.2046 lb
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 2.20 4.41 6.61 8.82 11.02 13.23 15.43 17.64 19.84
10 22.05 24.25 26.46 28.66 30.86 33.07 35.27 37.48 39.68 41.89
20 44.09 46.30 48.50 50.71 51.91 55.12 57.32 59.53 61.73 63.93
30 66.14 68.34 70.55 72.75 74.96 77.16 79.37 81.57 83.78 85.98
40 88.18 90.39 92.59 94.80 97.00 99.21 101.41 103.62 105.82 108.03
50 110.23 112.44 114.64 116.85 119.05 121.25 123.46 125.66 127.87 130.07
60 132.28 134.48 136.69 138.89 141.10 143.30 145.51 147.71 149.91 152.12
70 154.32 156.53 158.73 160.94 163.14 165.35 167.55 169.76 171.96 174.17
80 176.37 178.57 180.78 182.98 185.19 187.39 189.60 191.80 194.01 196.21
90 198.42 200.62 202.83 205.03 207.24 209.44 211.64 213.85 216.05 218.26
00-26 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Litre to U.S. Gallon 1 L = 0.2642 U.S. Gal
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.264 0.528 0.793 1.057 1.321 1.585 1.849 2.113 2.378
10 2.642 2.906 3.170 3.434 3.698 3.963 4.227 4.491 4.755 5.019
20 5.283 5.548 5.812 6.076 6.340 6.604 6.869 7.133 7.397 7.661
30 7.925 8.189 8.454 8.718 8.982 9.246 9.510 9.774 10.039 10.303
40 10.567 10.831 11.095 11.359 11.624 11.888 12.152 12.416 12.680 12.944
50 13.209 13.473 13.737 14.001 14.265 14.529 14.795 15.058 15.322 15.586
60 15.850 16.115 16.379 16.643 16.907 17.171 17.435 17.700 17.964 18.228
70 18.492 18.756 19.020 19.285 19.549 19.813 20.077 20.341 20.605 20.870
80 21.134 21.398 21.662 21.926 22.190 22.455 22.719 22.983 23.247 23.511
90 23.775 24.040 24.304 24.568 24.832 25.096 25.361 25.625 25.889 26.153
Litre to U.K. Gallon 1 L = 0.21997 U.K. Gal
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 0.220 0.440 0.660 0.880 1.100 1.320 1.540 1.760 1.980
10 2.200 2.420 2.640 2.860 3.080 3.300 3.520 3.740 3.950 4.179
20 4.399 4.619 4.839 5.059 5.279 5.499 5.719 5.939 6.159 6.379
30 6.599 6.819 7.039 7.259 7.479 7.699 7.919 8.139 8.359 8.579
40 8.799 9.019 9.239 9.459 9.679 9.899 10.119 10.339 10.559 10.778
50 10.998 11.281 11.438 11.658 11.878 12.098 12.318 12.528 12.758 12.978
60 13.198 13.418 13.638 13.858 14.078 14.298 14.518 14.738 14.958 15.178
70 15.398 15.618 15.838 16.058 16.278 16.498 16.718 16.938 17.158 17.378
80 17.598 17.818 18.037 18.257 18.477 18.697 18.917 19.137 19.357 19.577
90 19.797 20.017 20.237 20.457 20.677 20.897 21.117 21.337 21.557 21.777
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-27

kgm to ft. lb. 1 kgm = 7.233 ft. lb.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 7.2 14.5 21.7 28.9 36.2 43.4 50.6 57.9 65.1
10 72.3 79.6 86.8 94.0 101.3 108.5 115.7 123.0 130.2 137.4
20 144.7 151.9 159.1 166.4 173.6 180.8 188.1 195.3 202.5 209.8
30 217.0 224.2 231.5 238.7 245.9 253.2 260.4 267.6 274.9 282.1
40 289.3 296.6 303.8 311.0 318.3 325.5 332.7 340.0 347.2 354.4
50 361.7 368.9 376.1 383.4 390.6 397.8 405.1 412.3 419.5 426.8
60 434.0 441.2 448.5 455.7 462.9 470.2 477.4 484.6 491.8 499.1
70 506.3 513.5 520.8 528.0 535.2 542.5 549.7 556.9 564.2 571.4
80 578.6 585.9 593.1 600.3 607.6 614.8 622.0 629.3 636.5 643.7
90 651.0 658.2 665.4 672.7 679.9 687.1 694.4 701.6 708.8 716.1
100 723.3 730.5 737.8 745.0 752.2 759.5 766.7 773.9 781.2 788.4
110 795.6 802.9 810.1 817.3 824.6 831.8 839.0 846.3 853.5 860.7
120 868.0 875.2 882.4 889.7 896.9 904.1 911.4 918.6 925.8 933.1
130 940.3 947.5 954.8 962.0 969.2 976.5 983.7 990.9 998.2 1005.4
140 1012.6 1019.9 1027.1 1034.3 1041.5 1048.8 1056.0 1063.2 1070.5 1077.7
150 1084.9 1092.2 1099.4 1106.6 1113.9 1121.1 1128.3 1135.6 1142.8 1150.0
160 1157.3 1164.5 1171.7 1179.0 1186.2 1193.4 1200.7 1207.9 1215.1 1222.4
170 1129.6 1236.8 1244.1 1251.3 1258.5 1265.8 1273.0 1280.1 1287.5 1294.7
180 1301.9 1309.2 1316.4 1323.6 1330.9 1338.1 1345.3 1352.63 1359.8 1367.0
190 1374.3 1381.5 1388.7 1396.0 1403.2 1410.4 1417.7 1424.9 1432.1 1439.4
00-28 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

kg/cm2 to lb/in2 1 kg/cm2 = 14.2233lb/in2
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 0 14.2 28.4 42.7 56.9 71.1 85.3 99.6 113.8 128.0
10 142.2 156.5 170.7 184.9 199.1 213.4 227.6 241.8 256.0 270.2
20 284.5 298.7 312.9 327.1 341.4 355.6 369.8 384.0 398.3 412.5
30 426.7 440.9 455.1 469.4 483.6 497.8 512.0 526.3 540.5 554.7
40 568.9 583.2 597.4 611.6 625.8 640.1 654.3 668.5 682.7 696.9
50 711.2 725.4 739.6 753.8 768.1 782.3 796.5 810.7 825.0 839.2
60 853.4 867.6 881.8 896.1 910.3 924.5 938.7 953.0 967.2 981.4
70 995.6 1010 1024 1038 1053 1067 1081 1095 1109 1124
80 1138 1152 1166 1181 1195 1209 1223 1237 1252 1266
90 1280 1294 1309 1323 1337 1351 1365 1380 1394 1408
100 1422 1437 1451 1465 1479 1493 1508 1522 1536 1550
110 1565 1579 1593 1607 1621 1636 1650 1664 1678 1693
120 1707 1721 1735 1749 1764 1778 1792 1806 1821 1835
130 1849 1863 1877 1892 1906 1920 19324 1949 1963 1977
140 1991 2005 2034 2048 2062 2077 2091 2105 2119
150 2134 2148 2162 2176 2190 2205 2219 2233 2247 2262
160 2276 2290 2304 2318 2333 2347 2361 2375 2389 2404
170 2418 2432 2446 2460 2475 2489 2503 2518 2532 2546
180 2560 2574 2589 2603 2617 2631 2646 2660 2674 2688
190 2702 2717 2731 2745 2759 2773 2788 2802 2816 2830
200 2845 2859 2873 2887 2901 2916 2930 2944 2958 2973
210 2987 3001 3015 3030 3044 3058 3072 3086 3101 3115
220 3129 3143 3158 3172 3186 3200 3214 3229 3243 3257
230 3271 3286 3300 3314 3328 3343 3357 3371 3385 3399
240 3414 3428 3442 3456 3470 3485 3499 3513 3527 3542
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-29

Temperature
Fahrenheit Centigrade Conversion; a simple way to convert a
Fahrenheit temperature reading into a Centigrade temperature
reading or vise versa is to enter the accompanying table in the
center or boldface column of figures. These figures refer to the
temperature in either Fahrenheit or Centigrade degrees. If it is
desired to convert from Fahrenheit to Centigrade degrees, con-
sider the center column as a table of Fahrenheit temperatures
and read the corresponding Centigrade temperature in the col-
umn at the left. If it is desired to convert from Centigrade to Fahr-
enheit degrees, consider the center column as a table of
Centigrade values, and read the corresponding Fahrenheit tem-
perature on the right.
°C °F °C °F °C °F °C °F
-40.4 -40 -40.0 -11.7 11 51.8 7.8 46 114.8 27.2 81 117.8
-37.2 .35 -31.0 -11.1 12 53.6 8.3 47 116.6 27.8 82 179.6
-34.4 -30 -22.0 -10.6 13 55.4 8.9 48 118.4 28.3 83 181.4
-31.7 -25 -13.0 -10.0 14 57.2 9.4 49 120.2 28.9 84 183.2
-28.9 -20 -4.0 -9.4 15 59.0 10.0 50 122.0 29.4 85 185.0
-28.3 -19 -2.2 -8.9 16 60.8 10.6 51 123.8 30.0 86 186.8

-27.8 -18 -0.4 -8.3 17 62.6 11.1 52 125.6 30.6 87 188.6
-27.2 -17 1.4 -7.8 18 64.4 11.7 53 127.4 31.1 88 190.4
-26.7 -16 3.2 -7.2 19 66.2 12.2 54 129.2 31.7 89 192.2
-26.1 -15 5.0 -6.7 20 68.0 12.8 55 131.0 32.2 90 194.0
-25.6 -14 6.8 -6.1 21 69.8 13.3 56 132.8 32.8 91 195.8

-25.0 -13 8.6 -5.6 22 71.6 13.9 57 134.6 33.3 92 197.6
-24.4 -12 10.4 -5.0 23 73.4 14.4 58 136.4 33.9 93 199.4
-23.9 -11 12.2 -4.4 24 75.2 15.0 59 138.2 34.4 94 201.2
-23.3 -10 14.0 -3.9 25 77.0 15.6 60 140.0 35.0 95 203.0
-22.8 -9 15.8 -3.3 26 78.8 16.1 61 141.8 35.6 96 204.8

-22.2 -8 17.6 -2.8 27 80.6 16.7 62 143.6 36.1 97 206.6
-21.7 -7 19.4 -2.2 28 82.4 17.2 63 145.4 36.7 98 208.4
-21.1 -6 21.2 -1.7 29 84.2 17.8 64 147.2 37.2 99 210.2
-20.6 -5 23.0 -1.1 30 86.0 18.3 65 149.0 37.8 100 212.0
-20.0 -4 24.8 -0.6 31 87.8 18.9 66 150.8 40.6 105 221.0

-19.4 -3 26.6 0 32 89.6 19.4 67 152.6 43.3 110 230.0
-18.9 -2 28.4 0.6 33 91.4 20.0 68 154.4 46.1 115 239.0
-18.3 -1 30.2 1.1 34 93.2 20.6 69 156.2 48.9 120 248.0
-17.8 0 32.0 1.7 35 95.0 21.1 70 158.0 51.7 125 257.0
-17.2 1 33.8 2.2 36 96.8 21.7 71 159.8 54.4 130 266.0

-16.7 2 35.6 2.8 37 98.6 22.2 72 161.6 57.2 135 275.0
-16.1 3 37.4 3.3 38 100.4 22.8 73 163.4 60.0 140 284.0
-15.6 4 39.2 3.9 39 102.2 23.3 74 165.2 62.7 145 293.0
-15.0 5 41.0 4.4 40 104.0 23.9 75 167.0 65.6 150 302.0
-14.4 6 42.8 5.0 41 105.8 24.4 76 168.8 68.3 155 311.0

-13.9 7 44.6 5.6 42 107.6 25.0 77 170.6 71.1 160 320.0
-13.3 8 46.4 6.1 43 109.4 25.6 78 172.4 73.9 165 329.0
-12.8 9 48.2 6.7 44 111.2 26.1 79 174.2 76.7 170 338.0
-12.2 10 50.0 7.2 45 113.0 26.7 80 176.0 79.4 175 347.0
00-30 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

FOREWORD Units
Units
In this manual, the measuring units are indicated with Interna-
tional System of units (SI).
As for reference, conventionally used Gravitational System of

units are indicated in parentheses { }.
Example:
N {kg}
Nm {kgm}
MPa {kg/cm²}
Pa {mmH²O}
kPa {mmHg}
kw/rpm {HP/rpm}
g/kwh {g/HPh}
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-31

Units FOREWORD
00-32 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

01 GENERAL
Specification dimension drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-3
1 Piece boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-3
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-5
2 Piece boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-5
Working ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-7

1 Piece boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-7
2 Piece boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-8
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-9
PW200-7E0, PW220-7E0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-9
Weight table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11

W200-7E0, PW220-7E0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-11
1 Piece boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-12
2 Piece boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-13
Fuel, coolant and lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 01-14
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 01-1

GENERAL
01-2 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

GENERAL Specification dimension drawings
Specification dimension drawings
Dimensions
1 Piece boom
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 01-3

Specification dimension drawings GENERAL
01-4 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

GENERAL Specification dimension drawings
Dimensions
2 Piece boom
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 01-5

Specification dimension drawings GENERAL
01-6 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

GENERAL Working ranges
Working ranges
1 Piece boom
Arm length mm (Tt/In) 1800 2400 2900 3500
A Max. digging height 9467 9883 10003 10438
B Max. dumping height 6704 7057 7229 7612
C Max. digging depth 4791 5402 5917 6500
D Min. swing radius 3906 3201 3143 3184
E’ Max. digging reach ay GL 8867 9438 9875 10478
E Max. digging reach 9067 9651 10060 10642
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 01-7

Working ranges GENERAL
2 Piece boom
Arm length mm (Tt/In) 1800 2400 2900 3500
A Max.digging height 9532 9842 10168 10434
B Max.dumping height 6670 6982 7298 7574
C Max digging depth 5166 5785 6285 6860
D Min. swing radius 2594 3121 2745 2866
E’ Max. digging reach ay GL 8599 9144 9634 10156
E Max. digging reach 8818 9348 9822 10338
01-8 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

GENERAL Specifications
Specifications
PW200-7E0, PW220-7E0
PW220-7E0
Machine model PW200-7E0 PW220-7E0 (Heavy duty
option)
Serial Number H55051 and up H65051 and up
Bucket capacity m³ 0.8 1.0

Arm size
(m)
Operating weight kg 19,900 20,400 21,160
1.8
138.3 {14,100}
(149.1 {15,200})
Max. digging force 2.4 138.3 {14,100}
kN {kg}
(using power max. function) (149.1 {15,200})
2.9
163 {16,621}
(176 {17,947})
3.5
Performance
Swing speed rpm 12.4
Swing max. slope angle deg. 20
Cr : 0-2
Lo : 0-9
Travel speed km/h
Hi : 10-35
(Germany :10-20)
deg. 35
Gradeability
kPa {kg cm²} 36.3 {0.37}
Standard Tyre Width mm 10.00 - 20 11.00 - 20
★ Weight may vary depending on specification.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 01-9

Specifications GENERAL
Machine model PW200-7E0 PW220-7E0
Model SAA6D107E-1
Type 4-cycle, water-cooled, in-line, vertical, direct injection,
with turbo charger
No. of cylinders - bore x stroke mm 6 - 107 x 124
Piston displacement l {cc} 6.69 {6,690}
Flywheel horsepower kW/rpm {HP/rpm} 125 / 2,000 {167.6 / 2,000}

Performance
Engine
Max. torque Nm/rpm {kgm/rpm} 710 / 1,500 {72.4 / 1,500}

Max. speed at no load rpm 2,160
Min. speed at no load rpm 1,050
Min. fuel consumption g/kWh {g/HPh} 223 {166}
Starting motor 24V, 4.5 kW

Alternator 24V, 60 A
Battery 12V, 120 Ah x 2
Radiator core type Triple Cooler
Type x No. HPV95+95, variable displacement

Hydraulic
pump
Delivery l/min Piston type: 214 x 2

Set pressure MPa (kg/cm²) Piston type: 37.2 {380}
1 Piece Boom 7-spool + 1 service spool type x 1 Hydraulic

Control
valve
Type x No.
Control method 2 Piece Boom 8-spool + 1 service spool type x 1 Hydraulic
Travel motor A6VM140 HAXT/63W-V2B380A-SK, Piston type

Hydraulic
motor
(with counter balance valve): x 1

Swing motor KMF125ABE-5, Piston type
(with safety valve, holding brake): x 1
Type Boom Arm Bucket
Double acting Double acting Double acting

Hydraulic system
1 Piece Boom
piston piston piston

Inside diameter of cylinder mm 120 135 115
Diameter of piston rod mm 85 95 80
Stroke mm 1,334.5 1,490 1,120
Hydraulic culinder
Max. distance between pins mm 3,204.5 3,565 2,800

Min. distance between pins mm 1,870 2,075 1,680
Type Adjust Boom Arm Bucket
Double L.H R.H

acting Double acting Double acting
2 Pice Boom
Double acting piston piston

piston
piston
Inside diameter of cylinder mm 185 135 135 115

Diameter of piston rod mm 120 95 95 80
Stroke mm 626 966 1,490 1,120
Max. distance between pins mm 1,824 2,521 3,565 2,800
Min. distance between pins mm 1,198 1,555 2,075 1,680
Hyrdraulic tank Closed box type

Hydraulic filter Tank return side
Hydraulic cooler Air cooled
01-10 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

GENERAL Weight table
Weight table
W200-7E0, PW220-7E0
This weight table is for use when handling components or

when transporting the machine.
Unit: kg
PW220-7E0
Machine model PW200-7E0 PW220-7E0 (Heavy duty
option)
Engine assembly 749

• Engine 598
• Damper 6
• Hydraulic pump 145
Radiator oil cooler assembly 114
Hydraulic tank, filter assembly (excluding hydraulic oil) 139
Fuel tank (excluding fuel) 121
Revolving frame 2,070
Operator’s cab 286
Mechanical 38
Operator’s seat
Air Suspension 42
Counterweight 3,740 3,740 4,500
Swing machinery 160
Control valve 263
Swing motor 60
Travel motor 75
Center swivel joint 95
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 01-11

Weight table GENERAL
1 Piece boom
Unit: kg
Boom assembly 1,408
1.8m 523.56
2.4m 556.11
Arm assembly
2.9m 643.25
3.5m 740
Bucket assembly 628
Left Hand 250.21

Lift cylinder
Right Hand 250.79
Arm cylinder assembly 215.4
1.8m
159.8
Bucket cylinder 2.4m
135.4
assembly 2.9m
135.4
3.5m
Link assembly 104.2
Boom pin 48 + 8 x 2 + 31 + 10 + 26
Arm pin 26
Bucket pin 20.6
Link pin 20.6
01-12 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

2 Piece boom
Unit: kg
1st Boom 656.48

Boom assembly
2nd Boom 1,050.07
1.8m 523.56
2.4m 556.11
Arm assembly
2.9m 643.25
3.5m 740
Bucket assembly 628
Left Hand 250.21

Lift cylinder
Right Hand 250.79
Adjust cylinder 362.57
Arm cylinder assembly 215.4
1.8m
159.8
Bucket cylinder 2.4m
135.4
assembly 2.9m
135.4
3.5m
Link assembly 104.2
1st Boom 26.5

Boom pin
2nd Boom 26
Arm pin 26
Bucket pin 20.6
Link pin 20.6
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 01-13

Fuel, coolant and lubricants
AMBIENT
CAPACITY
TEMPERATURE
Reservoir Kind of fluid Type of oil
Min. Max Specified Refill
-30° C 30° C Komatsu EOS0W30

Engine oil
Engine oil pan (API CH-4 or -20° C 40° C Komatsu EO10W30DH 25.4 litre 23.1 litre
API CI-4)
-15° C 50° C Komatsu EO15W40DH
0° C 40° C Komatsu EO30DH
Swing machinery case 6.6 litre 6.6 litre

Engine oil -20° C 40° C SAE 30
PTO gear case 0.75 litre 0.75 litre
Bio-oil -20° C 30° C Panolin HLP synth 46
Hydr-oil
-20° C 50° C Komatsu H046-HM
API-CD
Hydraulic system 190 litre 133 litre
Engine oil
-10° C 40° C ASTM D975 No. 2

Fuel tank Diesel fuel -30° C -10° C ASTM D975 No 1 320 litre
(for winter use)
Cooling system Water Add antifreeze 50% Mix 17.6 litre
Wide 13.5 litre

Front
Narrow 11.5 litre
Axles Fuchs titan hydra 20W-40
Wide 14 litre
Rear -30° C 40° C
Narrow 12 litre
Multi oil
BP tractran 8
Transmission + clutch BP Terrac Super Transmis- 2.9 litre 2.9 litre
sion S
Front 2.85 litre

Hubs -20° C 40° C Fuchs titan hydra 20W-40
Rear 2.0 litre
Remark
• We recommend Komatsu genuine oil which has been spe-
cifically formulated and approved for use in engine and hy-
draulic work equipment applications.
• Only use high quality oils which meet internationally recog-

nized specifications.
01-14 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Specified capacity:
Total amount of oil including oil for components and oil in piping.
Refill capacity:
Amount of oil needed to refill system during normal inspection
and maintenance.
Abbreviations
• ASTM:
American Society of Testing and Material
• SAE:
Society of Automotive Engineers
• API:
American Petroleum Institute
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 01-15

01-16 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

10 STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION,
MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Engine related parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Hydraulic pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
HPV95 + 95 (PW200-7E0 ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Radiator – Oil cooler – Charge air cooler . . . . . 10-4
LS valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Power train. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 PC valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Swing circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Pilot pressure control (PPC) system . . . . . . . . 10-69
Swing machinery and motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

PW200E0/220-7E0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Swing motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Operation of swing lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 CLSS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Relief valve portion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Outline of CLSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Main relief valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87
Variable pressure compensation valve . . . . . . . . 10-88
Undercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Centre swivel joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90
Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Travel PPC pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
Travel motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Operation of travel motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Work equipment – Swing PPC valve . . . . . . . . 10-93
Clutch control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Solenoid valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98

Solenoid valve block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
2 Position 3 way valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102
Front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
2 Position 4 way valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104
Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
LS (PC)-EPC valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106
Suspension lock cylinder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Attachment EPC valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-109
Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Boom Safety valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-112
Axle oscillation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Hydraulic cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-114
Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
PW200-7E0, PW200-7E0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-114
Brake/steer pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Boom cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-114
Priority valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Arm cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-114

Bucket cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-114
Power brake valve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38 Adjust cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-115
Accumulator for brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Outrigger cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-116
Steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Dozer cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-118
Steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Work equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120
Orbitrol valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 PW200-7E0/PW220-7E0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-121
Work equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-121
Hydraulic equipment layout drawings . . . . . . 10-44 1. Dimension of arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-122
Hydraulic circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 2. Dimension of bucket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-124
Hydraulic tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47 Air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-126

Air conditioner piping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-126
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-1

Electrical wiring diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-128 Park brake pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-194
Brake accumulator low pressure sensor. . . 10-194
Electrical system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-129
Brake stop light sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-194
Engine control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-129
Engine controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-131 1st attachment circuit hydraulic performance
CN-CE01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-131 (main valve bypassed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-195
CN-CE01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-132 Travel circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-196
CN-CE02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-132 Operational and control features . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-197
CN-CE03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-133 1. Travel motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-199
Engine control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-136 2. Travel pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-207
Machine control system diagram . . . . . . . . . . . 10-138 3. Forward/neutral/reverse switch (F-N-R) . 10-208
1. Engine and pump control function . . . . . 10-140 4. Forward/reverse travel solenoid . . . . . . . 10-209
2. Pump/valve control function . . . . . . . . . . 10-145 5. Travel/neutral solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-210
3. One-touch power maximizing function . . 10-147 6. Travel creep solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-211
4. Auto-deceleration function . . . . . . . . . . . 10-149 7. 2-stage relief solenoid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-212
5. Auto-warm-up/overheat and white 8. Hi/Lo solenoid valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-214
smoke prevention function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-151 9. Back pressure solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-215
6. Swing control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-153
Steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-216
7. Travel control function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-155
Operating principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-216
8. ATT flow control, circuit selector function
(option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-157 Condition 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-217
9. System component parts . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-158 Condition 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-217

Condition 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-218
Machine monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-161 Condition 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-218
Monitor panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-162 Condition 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-219
Monitor gauge displays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-166 Condition 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-219
Keypad layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-169 OLS priority valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-220
Liquid crystal monitor adjustment switch . . 10-180 Load sensing steering unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-220
Overload warning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-186 Service brake and suspension system . . . . . 10-226
Outline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-186 Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-226
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-187 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-229
Coolant temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-188 Quick coupler control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-232
Oil pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-188 Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-232
Rotation sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-189 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-232
Boost pressure and temperature sensor. . . . . . 10-189 Shematic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-233
WIF (Water-In-Fuel detection) sensor. . . . . . . . 10-190
Engine oil level sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-190 ATT EPC valve assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-234
Coolant level sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-191 KOMTRAX terminal system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-235

Coolant temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-191 KOMTRAX terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-236
Hydraulic oil temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . 10-192
Fuel level sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-192
Air cleaner clogging sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-193
Overload Caution sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-193
Swing proximity sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-193
Travel PPC sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-193
PPC pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-194
10-2 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Engine related parts
Engine related parts
1 2
7 6 4 5 3
1. Breather cap 5. Oil catcher tube

2. Muffler 6. Brake/Steer pump
3. Rear engine mount 7. Front engine mount
4. Breather hose
Outline
The damper assembly is a wet type.
Oil capacity: 0.75l
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-3

Radiator – Oil cooler – Charge air cooler STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Radiator – Oil cooler – Charge air cooler
8 12
13
A
14 10
4 3 2
1
11 6
View A
1. Reservoir tank 8. Radiator inlet hose

2. Oil cooler 9. Fan
3. Radiator 10. Charge Air Oil Cooler outlet hose
4. Charge Air Cooler 11. Charge Air Oil Cooler inlet hose
5. Oil Cooler outlet tube 12. Net
6. Oil Cooler inlet tube 13. Shroud
7. Radiator outlet hose 14. Radiator Cap
Specifications
Combination Cooler
Oil Coolant Air

Max working pressure. bar 10 0.5 1.4
o 100 100 155
Max working temperature C
Cooler volume l. 8.15 7.7 9.3
10-4 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Power train
Power train
1 2 3
11
20
10 8 9 19
13
12
18 15 17 16 15 14
1. Centre swivel joint 11. Power brake valve

2. Hydraulic tank 12. Swing circle
3. Main pump 13. Swing motor / machinery
4. Engine 14. Rear axle
5. Gear pump 15. Propshaft
6. Priority valve 16. Travel motor
7. Main control valve 17. Transmission
8. Travel speed solenoid valve 18. Front axle
9. Clutch control valve 19. Clutch control accumulator
10 Accumulators 20. Filter assembly
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-5

Swing circle STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Swing circle
1 Swing circle inner race (No. of teeth: 92)

2 Ball
3 Swing circle outer race
a Inner race soft zone S position
b Outer race soft zone S position
10-6 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Swing circle
Specifications
Reduction ratio:
– 92
--------- = – 7,667
12
 Amount of grease:
15.8l (G2 - LI)
No Check item Criteria Remedy
Axial clearance of bearing Standard clearance Clearance limit

4 Replace
(when mounted on chassis) 0.5 ~ 1.6 3.2
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-7

Swing machinery and motor STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Swing machinery and motor
1. Swing machinery
2. Swing motor
3. Swing pinion
4. Dipstick
10-8 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Swing machinery and motor
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-9

Swing machinery and motor STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
1. Swing pinion (No. of teeth: 12)

2. Spacer
3. Case
4. No. 2 planetary gear
5. No. 2 sun gear
6. Ring gear
7. No. 1 sun gear
8. Swing motor
9. Oil level gauge
10. No. 1 planetary gear
11. No. 1 planetary carrier
12. No. 2 planetary carrier
13. Drain plug
Specifications
Reduction ratio:
17 + 58 X 18 + 58 = 18,627
17 18
Unit: mm
No. Check item Criteria Remedy
Standard
Clearance limit
14 Backlash between swing motor shaft and No. 1 sun gear clearance
0.18 ~ 0.28 —
15 Backlash between No. 1 sun gear and No. 1 planetary gear 0.15 ~ 0.51 1.00
16 Backlash between No. 1 planetary gear and ring gear 0.17 ~ 0.60 1.10
Backlash between No. 1 planetary carrier and No. 2 sun

17 0.40 ~ 0.75 1.20 Replace
gear
18 Backlash between No. 2 sun gear and No. 2 planetary gear 0.16 ~ 0.55 1.00
19 Backlash between No. 2 planetary gear and ring gear 0.17 ~ 0.60 1.10
20 Backlash between coupling and swing pinion 0.08 ~ 0.25 —
21 Backlash between swing pinion and swing circle 0.00 ~ 1.21 2.00
22 Clearance between plate and coupling 0.57 ~ 1.09 —
Standard size Repair limit Apply hard

chrome plating,
23 Wear of swing pinion surface contacting with oil seal 0
145 — recondition, or
-0.100 replace
10-10 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Swing motor
Swing motor
KMF125ABE-5
B From swing lock solenoid valve MA From control valve

S From control valve MB From control valve
T To tank
Specifications
PW200-7E0 PW220-7E0
Model KMF125ABE-5
Theoretical displacement 125.0 cm³/rev
Safety valve set pressure 28.4 MPa {290 kg/cm²}
Rated revolving speed 1,694 rpm 1,879 rpm
Brake release pressure 1.9 MPa {19 kg/cm²}
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-11

Swing motor STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
1. Brake spring 11. Valve plate

2. Drive shaft 12. Reverse prevention valve
3. Spacer 13. Centre shaft
4. Case 14. Centre spring
5. Disc 15. Safety valve
6. Plate 16. Check valve
7. Brake piston 17. Check valve spring
8. Housing 18. Shuttle valve
9. Piston 19. Shuttle valve spring
10. Cylinder block
10-12 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Unit: mm
Standard size Repair limit
Free length x Out- Installed Installed Free Installed

1 Check valve spring side diameter length load length load If damaged or
3.5 N 2.8 N deformed, replace
62.5 x 20.0 35 — spring
{0.36 kg} {0.29 kg}
13.7 N 10.8 N
2 Shuttle valve spring 16.4 x 8.9 11.5 —
{1.4 kg} {1.1 kg}
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-13

Swing motor STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Operation of swing lock

1. When swing lock solenoid valve is deactivated
When the swing lock solenoid valve is deactivated, the pres-
surized oil from the gear pump is shut off and port B is con-
nected to the tank circuit.
As a result, brake piston (7) is pushed down by brake spring

Gear pump
(1), discs (5) and plates (6) are pushed together, and the
brake is applied.
AA
2. When swing lock solenoid valve is excited

When the swing lock solenoid valve is excited, the valve is
switched and the pressure oil from the gear pump enters
port B and flows to brake chamber a.
The pressure oil entering chamber a overcomes brake

Gear pump
spring (1) and pushes brake piston (7) up. As a result, discs
(5) and plates (6) are separated and the brake is released.
AA
10-14 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Relief valve portion

1. Outline
The relief portion consists of check valves (2) and (3), shut-
tle valves (4) and (5), and relief valve (1).
2. Function
When the swing is stopped, the outlet port circuit of the mo-
tor from the control valve is closed, but the motor continues
to rotate under inertia, so the pressure at the output side of
the motor becomes abnormally high, and this may damage
the motor.
To prevent this, the abnormally high pressure oil is relieved

to port S from the outlet port of the motor (high-pressure
side) to prevent any damage.
Operation
1. When starting swing

When the swing control lever is operated to swing right, the
pressure oil from the pump passes through the control valve
and is supplied to port MA. As a result, the pressure at port
MA rises, the starting torque is generated in the motor, and
the motor starts to rotate. The oil from the outlet port of the
motor passes from port MA through the control valve and re-
turns to the tank. (Fig. 1)
2. When stopping swing

When the swing control lever is returned to neutral, the sup-
ply of pressure oil from the pump to port MA is stopped.
With the oil from the outlet port of the motor, the return cir-
cuit to the tank is closed by the control valve, so the pres-
sure at port MB rises. As a result, rotation resistance is
generated in the motor, so the braking effect starts.
If the pressure at port MB becomes higher than the pressure

at port MA, it pushes shuttle valve A (4) and chamber C be-
comes the same pressure as port MB. The oil pressure rises
further until it reaches the set pressure of relief valve (1). As
a result, a high braking torque acts on the motor and stops
the motor. (Fig.2)
When relief valve (1) is being actuated, the relief oil and oil
from port S passes through check valve B (3) and is sup-
plied to port MA. This prevents cavitation at port MA.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-15

Undercarriage STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Undercarriage
0
13
8 2
11
12
10
10-16 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Undercarriage
3
4
1. Undercarriage 8. Double Wheel Assy

2. Step/Wheel Chock 9. Steering Cylinder
3. Front Oscillating Steering Axle 10. Suspension
4. Rear Axle 11. Swivel Joint
5. Propshaft 12. Slew Ring
6. Travel motor 13. Axle Oscillation pin
7. Transmission
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-17

Transmission STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Transmission
A
P
A
Engaged
Disengaged
4
2
3
1. Transmission disengagement pin (for towing)

2. Oil filler plug
3. Oil drain plug
4. Breather
Specifications
Type Single motor two speed automatic power shift
Gear ratio Small clutch (High gear) 1.180: 1.
Large clutch (Low gear) 4.423: 1
Pressure required to disengage clutches (Large & Small) 58 +/- 7 bar.
Output shaft DIN 120 (8stud) fixing.
Oil capacity 2.9 litres.
Oil change interval 1000 hours
10-18 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Transmission
Function
Pressure applied in port P will disengage the small clutch, low
speed will be selected. Pressure applied in port Q will disengage
the large clutch, high speed will be selected. No pressure in port
P and Q will engage both small and large clutches. When both
clutches are engaged this locks the input shaft of the transmis-
sion to the housing locking the transmission, this is used for the
park brake condition.
Steering pump
Park brake switch Park brake solenoid valve
Controller Transmission clutch solenoid valve
Swivel joint
P Q
Power shift Transmission
Travel motor
Small clutch
Large clutch
Transmission Ratios Small clutch 1.18

Large clutch 4.423
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-19

Transmission STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
8 9 10
14
13
7
11
4
12
3
1. Sleeve 8. Roller Bearing

2. Small clutch pack (high gear) 9. Spur Gear
3. Large clutch pack (low gear) 10. Coupling
4. Ball Bearing 11. Bearing
5. Bearing 12. Flange
6. Epicyclic Gearbox 13. Pin
7. Spur Gear 14. Casing
10-20 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Travel motor
Travel motor
A6VM140 HAXT/63W-V2B380A-SK
T1 M1
U
A Service port
B Service port Gext
G1 Port for synchronous control of a number of units and

for remote control pressure
X Pilot pressure port
T1 Case drain port Y
T2
MA:MB
T2 Case drain port G1
X
U Flushing port
S Boosting
B A
MA:MB Gauge ports (one either side)
Gext Brake release port - external
S
M1 Gauge port control pressure
G1 X
ViewYY
Specifications
Type 140cc unit
Min. displacement setting 47cc/rev
Brake relief valve setting 420 bar
Counterbalance valve pressure setting 7 bar
Function
The travel motor is a device for driving the transmission by con-
verting the hydraulic power into mechanical torque.
Oil is delivered via the main valve to ports A/B and this flow ro-
tates a rotary group which is connected to the motor output
splines which are positioned to the transmission input.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-21

Travel motor STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Travel Motor
3 1
1. Counterbalance valve
2. Motor
3. Relief valve
10-22 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Operation of travel motor

1. During normal travel
5 4 6 1
1. Travel motor
2. Transmission and clutch
3. Drive shafts
4. Main control valve
5. Main pump
6. Swivel joint
• Oil is supplied to the travel motor from the control valve by

the travel spool. When the spool is opened the machine ac- 140
celerates from the stationary the pressure at the travel motor Max Angle
Displacement
rises to maximum. This high pressure is used to set the dis-

(cc/rev)
placement of the travel motor to maximum to give maximum

torque.
• As the machine speed increases, so pressure required to

move the machine will reduce. This reducing pressure is 47 Min. Angle
used to reduce the displacement of the travel motor to allow
increasing speed. The travel motor changes from maximum 275 310 380
displacement to preset minimum. Displacement changes Pressure (kg/cm²)
according to the diagram.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-23

Travel motor STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
2. Control of speed downhill
At high speed when the machine is travelling downhill, ma-

chine speed must be limited to prevent overspeed of travel
motor, transmission and axles. In the downhill condition the
machine weight is driving the machine and pressure at the
travel motor inlet becomes low. This low pressure is used to
close the counterbalance valve.This allows the counterbal-
ance valve springs to centralise the spool. The travel motor
will rotate because it is driven from the wheels and so oil in
the travel motor is circulated at high pressure through the
brake valves. This oil circulated at high pressure through the
brake valves slows the machine speed down.
3 4
1. Counterbalance valve
2. Relief valve
3. Swivel joint
4. Main control valve
10-24 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-25

Clutch control circuit STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Clutch control circuit
Gear pump
on Engine
Park brake switch Park brake solenoid valve
Controller Transmission clutch solenoid valve
Swivel joint
P Q
Power shift Transmission
Travel motor
Small clutch
Large clutch
10-26 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Clutch control circuit
Function
The clutches maintain the drive between the travel motor and
the transmission low or high gear. The low and high gear are
combined within the same clutch pack and gear selection is pro-
vided by the Hi/Lo gear transmission clutch solenoid.
A clutch is disengaged by applying pressure to that particular

clutch piston and the system does not allow pressure to be ap-
plied to both clutch pistons at the same time.
1. Pressure applied to transmission port ’P’ dis-engages the

high gear clutch pack meaning the low gear clutch pack is
engaged- low gear has been selected.
2. Pressure applied to transmission port ’Q’ dis-engages the

low gear clutch pack meaning the high gear clutch pack is
engaged - high gear has been selected.
3. When there is no pressure applied to port ’Q’ and port ’P’,

both low gear and high gear clutches are engaged meaning
the parking brake has been applied.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-27

Axle STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Axle
Outline
• Each axle consists of an axle housing supporting the chas-
sis weight, a differential set in the axle housing, a final drive,
and a brake provided at each end.
Front axle
• A trunnion-type axle shaft with a king pin at the final drive
end is used to enable the direction of the machine to be
changed.
5 5
2 1 4 2
6 7 3 6
1. Steer cylinder 3. Axle housing 5. Brake line input 7. Oil level plug
2. Track control arms 4. Drive shaft input 6. Wheel hub
Front Axle Oil Capacity
PW200 2.5m Axle 11.5 Litres

PW220 2.75m Axle 13.5 Litres
Front Hub Oil Capacity
PW200 / PW220 2.85 Litres
10-28 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Axle
3 5 6 7 9 23 25 27 28
2 4 8 10 11 24 26
1
29 30
12
13
14 38 37
15 36
35
22 21 16 34
20 17 33
18 32
19
31
1. Planetary holder 20. Screw

2. O-ring 21. Axle body long steering
3. Seal ring 22. Air valve
4. Screw 23. Screw
5. Pin 24. Shim ring
6. Disk/Washer 25. O-ring
7. Bushing 26. Roller bearing
8. Lip seal 27. Protection cap
9. Bushing 28. Nipple
10. Pressure pad 29. Bevel gear
11. Axle body short steering 30. Shim ring
12. O-ring 31. Planetary holder
13. Disk/Washer 32. Flange
14. Bushing 33. Lip seal
15. Seal ring 34. Roller bearing
16. Ring 35. Shim ring
17. Parallel pin 36. Bushing
18. Pin 37. Shim ring
19. Security dowel 38. Roller bearing
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-29

Axle STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Rear Axle
3 5 3
4 4
1 2
1. Axle housing
2. Drive shaft input
3. Brake line input
4. Wheel hub
5 Oil level plug
Rear Axle Oil Capacity
PW200 2.5m Axle 12 Litres

PW220 2.75m Axle 14 Litres
Rear Hub Oil Capacity
PW200 / PW220 2 Litres
10-30 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Axle
13 15 17 19 34 23
1 2 3 4 5 12 14 16 18 20 21 22 24
11
33 27 25
32 31 29
10 30 28 26
9
8 7 6
1. Screw 18. Hub

2. O-ring 19. O-ring
3. Roller Bearing 20. Plug
4. Beval Gear 21. Circlip
5. Roller Bearing 22. Hollow Wheel
6. Nut 23. Gear Pinion
7. Flange 24. Planetary Holder
8. Lip Seal 25. Screw Plug
9. Roller Bearing 26. Screw
10. Bushing 27. Disk/Washer
11. Roller Bearing 28. Brake
12. Shaft 29. Bushing
13. Adjusting Ring 30. Cylinder Head Screw
14. Tube Fitting 31. Circlip
15. Roller Bearing 32. Gasket
16. Sleeve 33. Seal Ring
17. Roller Bearing 34. Brake Disc
• When the service brake is applied, braking is carried out in

pairs to diagonally opposite wheels, the braking is after the
final gear reduction giving improved axle lock.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-31

Suspension lock cylinder STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Suspension lock cylinder
5
4
2
1. Plunger
2. Cylinder housing
3. Check valve cartridge
4. Switching cylinder
5. Control spool
6. Wiper
1
6
Specifications
Piston Diameter 100mm
Stroke 180mm
Pilot Pressure Min. 2.8 MPa

Plunger cylinder with in built check valve. The check valve is de-
signed as a leak free ball seat valve which is released by a con-
trol spool. The control conduit is connected to the connecting
conduit of both axle lock cylinders so that the pilot pressure pilot-
ing the check valve in the cylinder head is at the same time pre-
loading the cylinders during pendulum motion which means that
only one conduit to the cylinders is necessary.
Circuit
Purpose
The undercarriage of wheeled hydraulic excavators has one of
the two driven axles oscillating mounted. This makes it possible
to fully utilize the excavators rimpull in rough terrain - all of the
wheels being constantly in contract with the ground. A suspen-
sion cylinder is fitted on each side of the undercarriage to block
the axle during digging or lifting work.
10-32 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Suspension lock cylinder
Blocking the axle increases the excavators stability.’

The oscillating axle (3) is mounted on axle mount pin (2) in the
middle of the excavator. The two cylinders (1) which are full of
hydraulic oil are connected through pipelines to the suspension
lock solenoid valve (4).
When the excavator is being moved on the jobsite, the suspen-
sion lock solenoid valve should be energised so that the hydrau-
lic oil in the cylinder can be returned to tank as the axle is
oscillating up and down. Before commencing excavating opera-
tions, the oscillation lock solenoid valve should be energised to
pressurise the oil in the cylinders. This will lock the axle in the
position it is in.
6
7
5
8
9
1. Cylinder 6. Hydraulic tank

2. Axle mount pin 7. Swivel joint
3. Oscillating axle 8. PPC operated check valve
4. Oscillation lock solenoid valve 9. Accumulator
5. PPC pressure reducing valve
Axle oscillation
Axle oscillation: = 10°
Minimum turning radius PW200 = 7.2m / PW220 = 7.4m
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-33

Braking system STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Braking system
LS Signal from
Steering valve
10-34 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Braking system
1. Hydraulic oil filter

2. Gear pump
3. Priority valve
4. Brake control valve
5. Accumulator - service brake (0.75 l.)
6. Accumulator - service brake (0.75 l.)
7. Accumulator - parking brake (0.75 l.)
8. Pressure switch - stop light (5 +/- 2 bar)
9. Pressure switch - accumulator (70 +/- 8 bar)
10. Two stage solenoid
11. Pressure switch (parking brake) - (40 +/- 1 bar) < less than activates
12. Brake pedal
13. Swivel joint
14. Service brake cylinder
15. Service brake cylinder
16. Small (high speed) clutch
17. Large (low speed) clutch
18. In line filter (cartridge type)
19. Accumulator (0.3 l.)

The brake system is fully hydraulic. Hydraulic oil is supplied at
high pressure by gear pump to a priority valve giving priority to
the steering circuit first and secondly to the braking circuit when
the steering is not being used.in the steering circuit. When brak-
ing oil is sent to the brake valve which provides braking pressure
to two separate braking circuits (service brakes). In the event of
failure of the power supply, the accumulators provide brake
pressure to allow the machine to be safely stopped.
A parking brake is provided which is operated by selecting park

brake switch in cab. This de-energises both high and low gear
signals and locks the transmission gears.
If there is no pressure the parking brake will activate.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-35

Brake/steer pump STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Brake/steer pump
3 4
5
1 2
1. Delivery port (outlet)

2. Suction port (inlet)
3. Washer
4. Nut
5. Pump assembly
Specifications
Type gear pump
Rated speed 2500 RPM
Displacement 25cc/REV
Rated pressure 250 bar
Rotation Anti Clockwise*
★ Rotation direction when viewed on shaft.
Function
The brake/steer pumps function is to produce the necessary oil
flow/pressure to operate the brake, steering and pilot pressure
control circuits.
The pump is directly driven off the engine ancillary P.T.O.
5
5
10-36 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Priority valve
Priority valve
LS
EF
CF
P Pressure port (from pump)

EF Output port to brake system
CF Output port to steering system
LS Load sensing port from steering valve
Specification
Priority valve control spring pressure 7 bar
Function
When the steering wheel is turned, the oil flow is distributed in
such a way that the oil flow necessary for steering is led to the
steering unit through the CF connection.
The remaining oil flow is available for the working hydraulics

through the EF connection.
The distribution is controlled by the LS signal from the steering

unit; so that the oil flow to the steering unit is always determined
by the actual steering rate.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-37

Power brake valve STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Power brake valve
A T1 T2
1
X
3 View A
2
5
6 7
R2 N X1
8
R1 F R3
9 10 R
P B
4
T4
N1 T3
1 Brake system support pedal with hook F Accumulator pressure switch

2 Brake module R Accumulator (charging valve stabiliser)
3 Accumulator charging valve R1 Accumulator (service brake)
4 3 ways complete solenoid valve R2 Accumulator (service brake)
5 Pedal rubber T1 Service brake pressure switch
6 Latch pedal T2 Service brake pressure switch (plugged)
7 Latch pedal fixing screw T3 Service brake
8 Latch pin T4 Service brake
9 Latch pin stirrup X Parking brake
10 Brake proximity switch mounting hole X1 Parking brake pressure switch
P Feed from priority valve

B Return
N Tank
N1 Tank (plugged)
R3 Plugged (Accumulator on italian machine)
10-38 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Power brake valve
Specification
(cut in) = 120 +/- 5 bar

Accumulator charge pressure
(cut out) = 155 +0/-2 bar
Service brake pressure 63 bar
Park brake pressure 58 +/- 7 bar
Function
The main function of the power brake valve is to gradually re-
duce the machines travelling speed when the pedal is slowly de-
pressed. The higher the force applied to depress the pedal, the
greater the deceleration of the machine, until the machine is
eventually in a stationary position.
An alternative function of the power brake valve is the digging

brake application, if the machine is to be used for digging, the
power brake valve should be fully depressed until the pedal is
locked and the latching hook is secured on its location pin. This
will prevent the machine from "Travelling" when it is being used
for digging.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-39

Accumulator for brake system STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Accumulator for brake system
Specifications
1. Nominal capacity 0.75L
2. Max working pressure 210 bar
3. Max p dynamic 175 bar
4. Working temperature - 30o to 125o C
5. Diaphragm NBR
6. Fluid Mineral oil
7. Body Forged steel
8. Surface finish Rust preventative coating
9. Pre-charge gas Nitrogen
10. Pre-charge pressure 50 bar

• The accumulators are installed below the operators cab ac-
cessible from the undercover.
• Installed into the brake circuit the accumulators provide

pressure to the brakes in the event of a power failure ensur-
ing the machine is stopped safely.
10-40 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Steering system
Steering system
5
7
3
2
6 4
1. Hydraulic filter 5. Steering cylinder

2. Brake/steer pump 6. Steering wheel
3. Priority valve 7. In-line filter
4. Steering valve

• The steering is fully hydraulic. The oil sent by the brake/
steer pump (2) mounted on the PTO at the front of the en-
gine, flows via the priority valve (3) to the steering valve (4).
From here it is passed through swivel joint to steering cylin-
der (5). the steering cylinder then extends or retracts to
move the tie-rod and steer the machine
• In the event of a failure of the hydraulic system the machine

can be steered by emergency steering. The steering valve
acts as a pump to send oil to the steering cylinder.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-41

Steering column STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Steering column
1
7
1. Steering wheel
2. Steering column
3. Pedal
4. Hose connections
5. Orbitrol valve
6. Mounting bracket
7. Sunshine sensor
10-42 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Orbitrol valve
Orbitrol valve
240 ~ 250 240 ~ 250

BAR BAR
80 CC/REV
160 CC/REV
190 ~ 195
BAR
P Pressure port (from priority valve) R Right turn port

T Tank port LS Load sensing port (to priority valve)
L Left turn port
Specifications
Type: OSPD 80/240 LS (DYN)
Nominal displacement (normal operation) 240cc/rev
Nominal displacement (emergency operation) 80cc/rev
Relief valve setting 190 +5 bar

• The steering is fully hydraulic, the oil sent by the brake/steer
pump on the front of the engine flows via the priority valve to
the orbitrol valve, and finally to the steering cylinder which
controls, extends or retracts the tie rod on the axle to steer
the machine.
In the event of failure of the power supply the machine can
be steered by ‘Emergency steering’, the steering valve acts
as a pump to send oil to the steering cylinders.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-43

Hydraulic equipment layout drawings STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Hydraulic equipment layout drawings
1. L.H. PPC valve 11. Swivel joint

2. Swing motor 12. R.H PPC valve
3. Control valve 13. Safety lock lever
4. Combination cooler 14. 2nd boom adjust pedal
5. Travel motor 10. Hydraulic filter
6. Transmission 11. Swivel joint
7. PPC Accumulator 12. R.H PPC valve
8. Solenoid valve assembly 13. Safety lock lever
8A. PPC hydraulic press lock solenoid 14. 2nd boom adjust pedal
8B. 2 stage relief solenoid 15. HCU pedal (if fitted)
8C. Swing brake solenoid 16. Suspension lock cylinders
8D. Suspension lock solenoid 17. Front axle
8E. Merge flow solenoid 18. Rear axle
8F. Travel neutral solenoid 19. Hydraulic tank
8G. Travel creep solenoid 20. Arm cylinder
8H. PPC pressure reducing valve 21. 1st boom cylinder
9. Hydraulic pump 22. 2nd boom adjust cylinder
10. Hydraulic filter 23. Bucket cylinder
7 1 2 3 4
A5
P1 P2
T2
A5
T0
A8 A6
A3 P0
A2 A1
6 5
10-44 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Hydraulic equipment layout drawings
10
11 12 13
14
9
15
19
18
16 16
20
17
22
21
21
23
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-45

Hydraulic circuit diagram STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Hydraulic circuit diagram

(Please refer to Section 90)
10-46 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Hydraulic tank
Hydraulic tank
3
7 2
5 1
1. Sight gauge 5. Filter element Y filter micron

2. Oil filler cap 6. Strainer
3. Hydraulic tank 7. Bypass valve
4. Suction strainer Y filter micron
Specifications
Tank 200 l
Amount of oil inside tank 143 l
Pressure valve
16.7 +/-6.9 kPa

Relief cracking pressure
{0.17 +/-0.07 kg/cm2}
0 - 0.49 kPa
Suction cracking pressure
{0 - 0.005 kg/cm2}
150 +/- 30 kPa

Bypass valve set pressure
{1.5 +/- 0.3 kg/cm2}
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-47

Hydraulic pump STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Hydraulic pump
HPV95 + 95 (PW200-7E0 )
pm psig rear PEPC

PD1F PBF
1 PENF
PENR
PAR
PLSF 4
PLSFC PAF
PLSR front
PLCRC
PRC
PFC 6 3R
5 3F
isig im PS
10-48 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Hydraulic pump
1 Front main pump

2 Rear main pump
3F LS valve front
3R LS valve rear
4 PC valve
5 LS-EPC valve
6 PC-EPC valve
IM PC mode selector current
ISIG LS set selector current
PAF Front pump delivery port
PFC Front pump delivery pressure detection port
PAR Rear pump delivery port
PRC Rear pump delivery pressure detection port
PBF Pump pressure input port
PD1F Case drain port
PENF Front pump control pressure detection port
PENR Rear pump control pressure detection port
PLSF Front load pressure input port
PLSFC Front load pressure detection point
PLSR Rear load pressure input port
PLSRC Rear load pressure detection point
PS Pump suction port
PSIG LS set selector pressure detection port
PM PC set selector pressure detection port
PEPC PPC basic pressure input port
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-49

Shaft (Front) Cylinder block

1. Cradle 6. Valve plate
2. Case (Front) 7. End cap
3. Rocker cam 8. Shaft (Rear)
4. Shoe 9. Case (Rear)
5. Piston 10. Servo piston
10-50 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

SWP
Function
• The rotation and torque transmitted to the pump shaft are
converted into hydraulic energy, and pressurized oil is dis-
charged according to the load.
• It is possible to change the discharge amount by changing

the swash plate angle.
Structure
• Cylinder block (7) is supported to shaft (1) by a spline, and
shaft (1) is supported by the front and rear bearings.
• The tip of piston (6) is a concave ball, and shoe (5) is

caulked to it to form one unit. Piston (6) and shoe (5) form a
spherical bearing.
• Rocker cam (4) has flat surface A, and shoe (5) is always
pressed against this surface while sliding in a circular move-
ment.
• Rocker cam (4) brings high pressure oil at cylinder surface

B with cradle (2), which is secured to the case, and forms a
static pressure bearing when it slides.
• Piston (6) carries out relative movement in the axial direction

inside each cylinder chamber of cylinder block (7).
• The cylinder block seals the pressure oil to valve plate (8)
and carries out relative rotation. This surface is designed so
that the oil pressure balance is maintained at a suitable lev-
el. The oil inside each cylinder chamber of cylinder block (7)
is sucked in and discharged through valve plate (8).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-51

Operation
1. Operation of pump
• Cylinder block (7) rotates together with shaft (1), and shoe
(5) slides on flat surface A.
When this happens, rocker cam (4) moves along cylindrical

surface B, so angle a between centre line X of rocker cam
(4) and the axial direction of cylinder block (7) changes. (An-
gle a is called the swash plate angle.)
• Centre line X of rocker cam (4) maintains swash plate angle

a in relation to the axial direction of cylinder block (7), and
flat surface A moves as a cam in relation to shoe (5).
In this way, piston (6) slides on the inside of cylinder block

(7), so a difference between volumes E and F is created in-
side cylinder block (7). The suction and discharge is carried
out by this difference F - E.
In other words, when cylinder block (7) rotates and the vol-
ume of chamber E becomes smaller, the oil is discharged
during that stroke. On the other hand, the volume of cham-
ber F becomes larger, and as the volume becomes bigger,
the oil is sucked in.
• If centre line X of rocker cam (4) is in line with the axial di-
rection of cylinder block (7) (swash plate angle = 0), the dif-
ference between volumes E and F inside cylinder block (7)
becomes 0, so the pump does not carry out any suction or
discharge of oil.
(In actual fact, the swash plate angle never becomes 0.)
10-52 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

2. Control of discharge amount
• If the swash plate angle a becomes larger, the difference be-

tween volumes E and F becomes larger and discharge
amount Q increases.
• Swash plate angle a is changed by servo piston (12).
• Servo piston (12) moves in a reciprocal movement (<->) ac-

cording to the signal pressure from the PC and LS valves.
This straight line movement is transmitted through rod (13)
to rocker cam (4), and rocker cam (4), which is supported by
the cylindrical surface to cradle (2), slides in a rotating
movement in direction of arrow.
• With servo piston (12), the area receiving the pressure is dif-
ferent on the left and the right, so main pump discharge
pressure (self pressure) PP is always brought to the cham-
ber receiving the pressure at the small diameter piston end.
• Output pressure Pen of the LS valve is brought to the cham-

ber receiving the pressure at the large diameter end. The re-
lationship in the size of pressure PP at the small diameter
piston end and pressure Pen at the large diameter end, and
the ratio between the area receiving the pressure of the
small diameter piston and the large diameter piston controls
the movement of servo piston (12).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-53

LS valve
1 Plug PP Pump port

2 Locknut PDP Drain port
3 Sleeve PLP LS control pressure output port
4 Spring PLS LS pressure input port
5 Seat PPL PC control pressure input port
6 Spool PSIG LS mode selection pilot port
7 Piston
8 Sleeve
PC valve
1 Servo piston assembly PP1 Pump port

2 Plug PP2 Pump pressure pilot
3 Pin PT Drain port
4 Spool PM PC mode selector pressure pilot port
5 Retainer PPL PC control pressure output port
6 Seat PLP LS control pressure output port
7 Cover
8 Wiring
10-54 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Function
1. LS valve
The LS valve detects the load and controls the discharge

amount.
This valve controls main pump discharge amount Q accord- 09141

ing to differential pressure ∆ PLS (=PP - PLS) [called the LS
differential pressure] (the difference between main pump
pressure PP and control valve outlet port pressure PLS).
Main pump pressure PP, pressure PLS {called the LS pres-

sure} coming from the control valve output, and pressure
Psig {called the LS selector pressure} from the proportional
solenoid valve enter this valve. The relationship between
discharge amount Q and differential pressure ∆PLS, (the dif-
ference between main pump pressure PP and LS pressure
PLS) (= PP - PLS) changes as shown in the diagram at the
right according to LS pressure selector current isig of the
LS-EPC valve.
When isig changes between 0 and 1A, the set pressure of

the spring changes according to this, and the selector point
for the pump discharge amount changes at the rated central
valve between 0.69 <-> 2.2 MPa {7 <-> 22 kg/cm²}.
2. PC valve
When the pump discharge pressure PP1 (self-pressure) and

PP2 (other pump pressure) are high, the PC valve controls
the pump so that no more oil than the constant flow (in ac-
cordance with the discharge pressure) flows even if the
stroke of the control valve becomes larger. In this way, it car- 09142
ries out equal horsepower control so that the horsepower
absorbed by the pump does not exceed the engine horse-
power.
In other words, If the load during the operation becomes

larger and the pump discharge pressure rises, it reduces the
discharge amount from the pump; and if the pump discharge
pressure drops, it increases the discharge amount from the
pump. The relationship between the average of the front and
rear pump discharge pressures (average discharge amount
of F, R pumps (PP1 + PP2)/2) and pump discharge amount
Q is shown on the right, with the current given to the PC-
EPC valve solenoid shown as a parameter. The controller
senses the actual speed of the engine, and if the speed
drops because of an increase in the load, it reduces the
pump discharge amount to allow the speed to recover. In
other words, when the load increases and the engine speed
drops below the set value, the command current to the PC-
EPC valve solenoid from the controller increases according
to the drop in the engine speed to reduce the pump swash
plate angle.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-55

Operation
B
Control circuit
pressure setting
valve
SDP08884
LS valve
1. When control valve is at neutral position
• The LS valve is a three-way selector valve, with pressure

PLS (LS pressure) from the inlet port of the control valve
brought to spring chamber B, and main pump discharge
pressure PP brought to port H of sleeve (8). The size of this
LS pressure PLS + force Z of spring (4) and the main pump
pressure (self pressure) PP determines the position of spool
(6). However, the size of the output pressure PSIG (the LS
selection pressure) of the EPC valve for the LS valve enter-
ing port G also changes the position of spool (6). (The set
pressure of the spring changes).
• Before the engine is started, servo piston (12) is pushed to

the right. (See the diagram on the right)
• When the engine is started and the control lever is at the

neutral position, LS pressure PLS is 0 MPa {0 kg/cm²}. (It is
interconnected with the drain circuit through the control
valve spool.)
At this point, spool (6) is pushed to the left, and port C and
port D are connected. Pump pressure PP enters the large
diameter end of the piston from port K and the same pump
pressure PP also enters port J at the small diameter end of
the piston, so the swash plate is moved to the minimum an-
gle by the difference in the area of the piston (12).
10-56 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

SDP08885
Control circuit
pressure
setting valve
2. Operation in increase direction for pump discharge amount
• When the difference between the main pump pressure PP

and LS pressure PLS, in other words, LS differential pres-
sure ∆ PLS, becomes smaller (for example, when the area
of opening of the control valve becomes larger and pump
PP drops), spool (6) is pushed to the right by the combined
force of LS pressure PLS and the force of spring (4).
• When spool (6) moves, port D and port E are joined and
connected to the PC valve. When this happens, the PC
valve is connected to the drain port, so circuit D - K be-
comes drain pressure PT. (The operation of the PC valve is
explained later).
• For this reason, the pressure at the large diameter end of

servo piston (12) becomes drain pressure PT, and pump
pressure PP enters port J at the small diameter end, so ser-
vo piston (12) is pushed to the right. Therefore, the swash
plate moves in the direction to make the discharge amount
larger. If the output pressure of the EPC valve for the LS
valve enters port G, this pressure creates a force to move
piston (7) to the left. If piston (7) is pushed to the left, it acts
to make the set pressure of spring (4) weaker, and the differ-
ence between PLS and PP changes when ports D and E of
spool (6) are connected.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-57

Control circuit
pressure setting
valve
SDP08886
3. Operation in decrease direction for pump discharge amount
• The following explains the situation if the servo piston (12)

moves to the left (the discharge amount becomes smaller).
When LS differential pressure ∆PLS becomes larger (for ex-
ample, when the area of opening of the control valve be-
comes smaller and pump pressure PP rises), pump
pressure PP pushes spool (6) to the left.
• When spool (6) moves, main port pressure PP flows from

port C and port D and from port K, it enters the large diame-
ter end of the piston.
• Main pump pressure PP also enters port J at the small di-

ameter end of the piston, but because of the difference in ar-
ea between the large diameter end and the small diameter
end of servo piston (12), servo piston (12) is pushed to the
left.
• As a result, the swash plate moves in the direction to make

angle smaller.
• If LS selection pressure PSIG enters port G, it acts to make

the set pressure of spring (4) weaker.
10-58 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

AO
4. When servo piston is balanced
• Let us take the area receiving the pressure at the large di-
ameter end of the piston as A1, the area receiving the pres-
sure at the small diameter end as A0, and the pressure
flowing into the large diameter end of the piston as Pen. If
the main pump pressure PP of the LS valve and the com-
bined force of force Z of spring (4) and LS pressure PLS are
balanced, and the relationship is A0 x PP = A1 x Pen, servo
piston (12) will stop in that position, and the swash plate will
be kept at an intermediate position. (It will stop at a position
where the opening of the throttle from port D to port E and
from port C to port D of spool (6) is approximately the
same.)
• At this point, the relationship between the area receiving the

pressure at both ends of piston (12) is A0: A1 = 3:5, so the
pressure applied to both ends of the piston when it is bal-
anced becomes PP: Pen = 3:5.
• The position where spool (6) is balanced and stopped is the

standard centre, and the force of spring (4) is adjusted so
that it is determined when PP - PLS = 2.2 MPa {22 kg/cm²}.
However, if PSIG (the output pressure of 0 <-> 2.9 MPa {0
<-> 30 kg/cm²} of the EPC valve of the LS valve) is applied
to port G, the balance stop position will change in proportion
to pressure PSIG between PP - PLS = 2.2 <-> 0.69 MPa {22
<-> 7 kg/cm²}.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-59

09143
Control circuit
pressure setting
valve
10-60 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

PC valve
1. When pump controller is normal
When the load on the actuator is small and pump pressures PP1
and PP2 are low
Movement of PC-EPC solenoid (1)
• The command current from the pump controller flows to PC-

EPC solenoid (1).This command current acts on the PC-
EPC valve and outputs the signal pressure. When this signal
pressure is received, the force pushing piston (2) is
changed.
• On the opposite side to the force pushing this piston (2) is

the spring set pressure of springs (4) and (6) and pump
pressure PP1 (self pressure) and PP2 (other pump pres-
sure) pushing spool (3). Piston (2) stops at a position where
the combined force pushing spool (3) is balanced, and the
pressure (pressure of port C) output from the PC valve
changes according to this position.
• The size of command current X is determined by the nature

of the operation (lever operation), the selection of the work-
ing mode, and the set value and actual value for the engine
speed.
Other pump pressure

This is the pressure of the pump at the opposite end.
For the F pump, it is the R pump pressure
For the R pump, it is the F pump pressure
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-61

09144
Control circuit
pressure setting
valve
10-62 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Action of spring
• The spring load of springs (4) and (6) in the PC valve is de-
termined by the swash plate position.
• If piston (9) moves to the left, spring (6) is compressed, and

if it moves further to the left, spring (6) contacts seat (5) and
is fixed in position. In other words, the spring load is
changed by piston (9) extending or compressing springs (4)
and (6).
• If the command circuit input to PC-EPC valve solenoid (1)

changes further, the force pushing piston (2) changes, and
the spring load of springs (4) and (6) also changes accord-
ing to the value of the PC-EPC valve solenoid command
current.
• Port C of the PC valve is connected to port E of the LS valve

(see (1) LS valve). Self pressure PP1 enters port B and the
small diameter end of servo piston (9), and other pump
pressure PP2 enters port A.
• When pump pressures PP1 and PP2 are small, spool (3) is
on the right. At this point, port C and D are connected, and
the pressure entering the LS valve becomes drain pressure
PT. If port E and port G of the LS valve are connected (see
(1) LS valve), the pressure entering the large diameter end
of the piston from port J becomes drain pressure PT, and
servo piston (9) moves to the right. In this way, the pump
discharge amount moves in the direction of increase.
• As servo piston (9) moves further, springs (4) and (6) ex-
pand and the spring force becomes weaker. When the
spring force becomes weaker, spool (3) moves to the left, so
the connection between port C and port D is cut, and the
pump discharge pressure ports B and C are connected. As
a result, the pressure at port C rises, and the pressure at the
large diameter end of the piston also rises, so the movement
of piston (9) to the right is stopped.
• In other words, the stop position for piston (9) (= pump dis-
charge amount) is decided at the point where the force of
springs (4) and (6) and the pushing force from the PC-EPC
valve solenoid and the pushing force created by the pres-
sures PP1 and PP2 are in balance.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-63

09145
Control circuit
pressure setting
valve
10-64 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

When load on actuator is large and pump discharge pressure is

high
• When the load is large and pump discharge pressures PP1

and PP2 are high, the force pushing spool (3) to the left be-
comes larger and spool (3) moves to the position in the dia-
gram above. When this happens, as shown in the diagram
above, part of the pressurized oil from port B flows out
through port C where the LS valve is actuated to port D, and
the pressurized oil flowing from port C to the LS valve be-
comes approximately 2:1 / 3:5 of main pump pressure PP.
• When port E and port G of the LS valve are connected (see

(1) LS valve), the pressure from port J enters the large di-
ameter end of servo piston (9), and servo piston (9) stops.
• If main pump pressure PP increases further and spool (3)

moves further to the left, main pump pressure PP1 flows to
port C and acts to make the discharge amount the minimum.
When piston (9) moves to the left, springs (4) and (6) are
compressed and push back spool (3). When spool (3)
moves to the left, the opening of port C and port D becomes
larger. As a result, the pressure at port C (= J) drops, and
piston (9) stops moving to the left.
• The position in which piston (9) stops when this happens is

further to the left than the position when pump pressures
PP1 and PP2 are low.
• The relation of average pump pressure (PP1 + PP2)/2 and

the position of servo piston (9) forms a bent line because of
the double-spring effect of springs (4) and (6). The relation-
ship between average pump pressure (PP1 + PP2)/2 and
pump discharge amount Q is shown in the figure at the right.
• If command voltage X sent to PC-EPC valve solenoid (1) in-

creases further, the relationship between average pump
pressure (PP1 + PP2)/2, and pump discharge amount Q is
proportional to the pushing force of the PC-EPC valve sole-
noid and moves in parallel. In other words, the pushing force
of PC-EPC solenoid (1) is added to the force pushing to the
left because of the pump pressure applied to the spool (3),
so the relationship between the average pump pressure
(PP1 + PP2)/2 and Q moves from (1) to (2) in accordance
with the increase in X.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-65

09146
Control circuit
pressure setting
valve
10-66 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

2. When pump controller is abnormal and PC prolix switch is

ON
a. When load on main pump is light
• If there is a failure in the pump controller, turn emergen-

cy pump drive switch ON to switch to the resistor side. In
this case, the power source is taken directly from the
battery. But if the current is used as it is, it is too large,
so use the resistor to control the current flowing to PC-
EPC valve solenoid (1).
• When this is done, the current becomes constant, so the

force pushing piston (2) is also constant.
• If the main pump pressure PP1 and PP2 are low, the
combined force of the pump pressure and the force of
PC-EPC valve solenoid (1) is weaker than the spring set
force, so spool (3) is balanced at a position to the left.
• At this point, port C is connected to the drain pressure of

port D, and the large diameter end of the piston of servo
piston (9) also becomes the drain pressure PT through
the LS valve. When this happens, the pressure at the
small diameter end of the piston is large, so servo piston
(9) moves in the direction to make the discharge amount
larger.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-67

09147
Control circuit
pressure setting
valve
b. When main pump load is heavy
• In the same way as in the previous item, when the

emergency pump drive switch is ON, the command cur-
rent sent to PC-EPC valve solenoid (1) becomes con-
stant. For this reason, the force of piston (2) pushing
spool (3) is constant.
• If main pump pressures PP1 and PP2 increase, spool

(3) moves further to the left than when the main pump
load is light, and is balanced at the position in the dia-
gram above.
• In this case, the pressure from port B flows to port C, so

servo piston (9) moves to the left (to make the discharge
amount smaller) by the same mechanism as explained
in item 2)-b, and stops at a position to the left of the po-
sition when the load on the pump is light. In other words,
even when the emergency pump drive switch is ON, the
curve for the pump pressure PP and discharge amount
Q is determined as shown in the diagram for the valve of
the current sent to the PC-EPC valve solenoid through
the resistor.
• The curve when the PC prolix switch is ON is curve (2),

which is to the left of curve (1) for when the pump con-
troller is normal.
10-68 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Pilot pressure control (PPC) system
Pilot pressure control (PPC) system
36 ± 1.5 Bar
4
(Max Flow 531/min)
(Min Flow 101/min)
Damper Branch Hose
From orbitrol valve 3

load sensing signal
To Orbitrol Valve
To low gear / high gear

solenoid valve
1. Gear Pump
2. Steering/Braking priority valve
3. Power Brake Valve
4. Pressure Reducing Valve
Incorporated in Main Solenoid Valve Block
Function
• The PPC Pump less system discharges pressurised oil to
operate the PPC circuit and solenoid valve assemblies.
Operation
• the PPC pump less system utilizes the return line oil from
the power brake valve, oil is supplied to the steering /
braking circuits from a gear pump driven by the engine. Oil
is prioritised to the steering circuit via the priority valve with
the remaining oil flow feeding the power brake valve. The re-
turn line from the brake valve passes through a relief valve
to maintain a pressure of 36 +/- 1.5 BAR.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-69

Control valve STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Control valve
PW200E0/220-7E0
Outline
Control valve consists of an 6-spool valve (unit type), with op- 1 6-spool valve
tional 3 service valves, pump merger divider valve, back pres-
2 Cover 1
sure valve.
3 Cover 2
• Since all valves are assembled together with connecting
bolts and their passages are connected to each other inside 4 Pump merge divider valve
the assembly, the assembly is small in size and easy to 5 Back pressure valve
maintain.
6 Service valve
• Since one spool of the control valve is used for one work 7 Service valve
equipment unit, its structure is simple.
8 Service valve
A1 To bucket cyl head P10 From travel PPC valve

A2 To stabilizer P11 From arm PPC valve
A3 To boom cyl bottom P12 From arm PPC valve
A4 To swing motor LH P-1 From 2p boom PPC valve
A5 To travel P-2 From 2p boom PPC valve
A6 To arm cyl head P-3 From service 1 PPC valve
A-1 To adjust cyl P-4 From service 1 PPC valve
A-2 To clamshell rotate P-5 From service 2 PPC valve
A-3 To 2nd HCU option P-6 From service 2 PPC valve
B1 To bucket cyl bottom BP1 Swing LS separation valve
B2 To stabilizer PLS1 To rear pump control
B3 To boom cyl head PLS2 To front pump control
B4 To swing motor RH PP1 From rear main pump
B5 To travel PP2 From front main pump
B6 To arm cyl bottom PR To sol valve, PPC valve, EPC valve
B-1 To bucket cyl bottom PS From pump merge divider sol valve
B-2 To bucket cyl bottom att PX1 From 2 stage solenoid valve
B-3 To bucket cyl bottom att PX2 From 2 stage solenoid valve
P1 From bucket PPC valve SA Pressure sensor fitting port
P2 From bucket PPC valve SB Pressure sensor fitting port
P3 From stabilizer PPC valve T To tank
P8 From swing PPC valve TS To tank
P9 From travel PPC valve TSW To swing motor
10-70 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Control valve
B-3 B-2 B-1 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 1

6 7 8
PLS1 Bp1
2
PLS2
LS
Bypass
P
3 Ts
A-3 A-2 A-1 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6

SB
P-3 P1 P5 P9
P6 P10 PX P-5 P-1 P3 P7 P11
P-4 P2 PX1
P-6 P-2 P4 P8 P12
PX2
TSW2
PS TSW1
4
Regeneration Valve (Arm)
SA
PP1 PP2 5
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-71

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1. Unload valve 11. Adj. pressure compensation valve (Service)

2. Pressure compensation valve (Arm OUT) 12. Adj. pressure compensation valve (Service)
3. Pressure compensation valve (Travel) 13. Pressure compensation valve (2P Boom)
4. Pressure compensation valve (Left swing) 14. Pressure compensation valve (Bucket CURL)
5. Pressure compensation valve (Boom RAISE) 15. Pressure compensation valve (Stabilizer)
6. Pressure compensation valve (Stabilizer) 16. Pressure compensation valve (Boom LOWER)
7. Pressure compensation valve (Bucket DUMP) 17. Pressure compensation valve (Right swing)
8. Pressure compensation valve (2P Boom) 18. Pressure compensation valve (Travel)
9. Adj. pressure compensation valve (Service) 19. Pressure compensation valve (Arm IN)
10. Adj. pressure compensation valve (Service) 20. Main relief valve
10-72 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

27.5~34.3Nm
(2.8~3.5kgm) 58.8~73.6Nm
(6.0~7.5kgm)
E D
A B
156.9~176.5Nm 156.9~176.5Nm
(16~18kgm) (16~18kgm)
C D E
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-73

11 12 12 12 15 13
15 15 15 14 15 15 15
10 15 15 15 15 12 13 15 15 15
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1. Spool (Arm) 7. Spool (2P Boom)

2. Spool (Travel) 8. Spool (Service)
3. Spool (Swing) 9. Spool (Service)
4. Spool (Boom) 10. Unload valve
5. Spool (Stabilizer) 11. Main relief valve
6. Spool (Bucket) 12. Spool return spring
Unit:mm
No Check Item Criteria Remedy
13 Spool return spring side diameter length load length load
94.18Nm 75.3Nm
54.2 X 34.8 53.5 If damaged or deformed,
9.6kgm 7.6kgm
replace spring
120.6Nm 96.5Nm
14 Spool return spring 54.5 X 34.8 53.5
12.3kgm 9.8kgm
120.6Nm 96.5Nm
15 Spool return spring 54.5 X 34.8 53.5
12.3kgm 9.8kgm
10-74 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
28
34~44Nm
19.6~27.5Nm (3.5~4.5kgm)
(2~2.8kgm)
26
27
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
1. Safety suction valve (Arm OUT) 15. Suction valve (Travel FORWARD)
2. Suction valve (Travel REVERSE) 16. Safety suction valve (Arm IN)
3. Safety suction valve (Boom RAISE) 17. LS shuttle valve (Arm)
4. Suction valve (Stabilizer UP) 18. LS shuttle valve (Travel)
5. Safety suction valve (Bucket DUMP) 19. LS select valve
6. Safety suction valve (2P boom) 20. LS shuttle valve (Boom)
7. Safety suction valve (Service) 21. LS shuttle valve (Stabilizer)
8. Safety suction valve (Service) 22. LS shuttle valve (Bucket)
9. Safety suction valve (Service) 23. LS shuttle valve (2P Boom)
10. Safety suction valve (Service) 24. LS shuttle valve (Service)
11. Suction valve (Stabilizer DOWN) 25. LS shuttle valve (Service)
12. Safety suction valve (Bucket CURL) 26. LS check valve
13. Suction valve (Stabilizer DOWN) 27. Pressure relief plug
14. Safety suction valve (Boom LOWER)

If damaged or deformed,
28 Check valve spring side diameter length load length load
replace spring
1.47Nm 1.2Nm
8.5
(0.15kgm) (0.12kgm)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-75

49~58.8Nm
2 17 (5~6kgm)
18
Arm control valve Travel control valve

372.7~411.9Nm 3
(38~42kgm)
9 19
1 372.7~411.9Nm
147.1~186.3Nm (38~42kgm)
(15~19kgm) 15 16
8
137.2~156.8Nm
137.2~156.8Nm (14~16kgm)
(14~16kgm)
22
24
7
14
20
10
23
21
137.2~156.8Nm
(14~16kgm)
372.7~411.9Nm
6 (38~42kgm) 13
5 4 137.2~156.8Nm
372.7~411.9Nm 12 11 (14~16kgm)
(38~42kgm)
ARM CONTROL VALVE TRAVEL CONTROL VALVE

1. Unload valve 4. Safety suction valve 11. Suction valve
2. Main relief valve 5. Spool 12. Spool
3. Lift check valve 6. Pressure compensation valve 13. Pressure compensation valve
(OUT) (REVERSE)
7. LS shuttle valve 14. LS shuttle valve

8. Pressure compensation valve (IN) 15. Pressure compensation valve
9. Safety suction valve (FORWARD)
10. Check valve for regeneration circuit 16. Suction valve
10-76 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100


Free length x Outside Installed Free
Installed load Installed load
17 Relief spring diameter length length
406.7Nm 325.6Nm
30.7 X 9.6 25.9
(41.5kgm) (33.2kgm)
69.6Nm 55.7Nm
18 Valve spring 24.3 X 8 19.5
(7.1kgm) (5.7kgm)
70.6Nm 56.4Nm If damaged or
19 Unload spring 31.5 X 10.2 26.9
(7.2kgm) (5.8kgm) deformed, replace
Regeneration valve 6.2Nm 4.9Nm spring
20 31.5 X 10.3 19
spring (0.6kgm) (0.5kgm)
17.5Nm 14Nm
21 Piston return spring 48.1 X 10.8 28
(1.8kgm) (1.4kgm)
79.4Nm 63.5Nm
(8.1kgm) (6.5kgm)
17.5Nm 14Nm
(1.8kgm) (1.4kgm)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-77

372.7~411.9Nm
(38~42kgm) 12
5 11
14 6 137.3~156.9Nm
137.3~156.9Nm (15~16kgm)
(15~16kgm)
372.7~411.9Nm
(38~42kgm)
10
4
13
372.7~411.9Nm
(38~42kgm)
372.7~411.9Nm 9
(38~42kgm)
2 8
137.3~156.9Nm
(14~16kgm)
Bucket control valve 1 137.3~156.9Nm Service control valve
(14~16kgm) 7
BUCKET CONTROL VALVE SERVICE VALVE

1. Safety suction valve 7. Safety suction valve
2. Spool 8. Spool
3. Pressure compensation valve (DUMP) 9. Adj. pressure compensation valve
4. LS shuttle valve 10. LS shuttle valve
5. Pressure compensation valve (CURL) 11. Adj. pressure compensation valve
6. Safety suction valve 12. Safety suction valve

13 Piston return spring side diameter length load length load
17.5Nm 14Nm replace spring
48.1 X 10.8 28
(1.8kgm) (1.4kgm)
29.4Nm 23.5Nm
(3kgm) (2.4kgm)
10-78 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-79

372.7~411.9Nm
(38~42kgm)
19 4 Swing control valve
107.9~147.1Nm
(11~15kgm)
21
22
19
Boom control valve Stabilizer control valve
2
372.7~411.9Nm
372.7~411.9Nm (38~42kgm)
(38~42kgm) 1
10 372.7~411.9Nm
9 137.3~156.9Nm (38~42kgm)
20 (14~16kgm) 16 17 137.3~156.9Nm
20 (14~16kgm)
8
15
18
20
14
11
5
20 137.3~156.9Nm 137.3~156.9Nm
7 (14~16kgm) (14~16kgm)
6 372.7~411.9Nm
15
372.7~411.9Nm (38~42kgm)
(38~42kgm) 13
10-80 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

SWING CONTROL VALVE BOOM CONTROL VALVE STABILIZER VALVE

1. Spool 5. Suction valve 12. Suction valve
2. Pressure compensation 6. Spool 13. Spool
valve (Left)
3. LS select valve 7. Pressure compensation 14. Pressure compensation
valve (Raise) valve (Reverse)
4. Pressure compensation 8. LS shuttle valve 15. LS shuttle valve
valve (Right)
9. Pressure compensation 16. Pressure compensation
valve (Lower) valve (Forward)
10. Safety suction valve 17. Suction valve
11. Check valve for regenera-
tion circuit

18 Regeneration valve spring side diameter length load length load
6.2Nm 4.9Nm
31.5 X 10.3 19
(0.6kgm) (0.5kgm)
17.5Nm 14Nm
19 Piston return spring 48.1 X 10.8 28 If damaged or deformed,
(1.8kgm) (1.4kgm)
replace spring
17.5Nm 14Nm
(1.8kgm) (1.4kgm)
428.3Nm 343Nm
21 Load spring 30.4 X 16.7 27
(43.7kgm) (35kgm)
3Nm 2.4Nm
22 Check valve spring 13.6 X 5.5 10
(0.3kgm) (0.25kgm)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-81

372.7~411.9Nm 5 6
(38~42kgm) 372.7~411.9Nm
(38~42kgm)
2P boom control valve 4
137.3~156.9Nm
(14~16kgm)
372.7~411.9Nm
(38~42kgm) 2
1
2P BOOM CONTROL VALVE

1. Safety suction valve
2. Spool
3. Pressure compensation valve (EXTEND)
4. LS shuttle valve
5. Pressure compensation valve (RETRACT)
6. Safety suction valve

7 Piston return spring side diameter length load length load
29.4Nm 23.5Nm replace spring
28
(3kgm) (2.4kgm)
17.5Nm 14Nm
8 Piston return spring 28
(1.8kgm) (1.4kgm)
10-82 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

49~58.8Nm 7 8
65.7~85.3Nm 2 (5~6kgm)
(6.7~8.7kgm)
20 6
3
1 5
65.7~85.3Nm 147.1~186.3Nm
(6.7~8.7kgm) 4
(15~19kgm)
1. Unload valve
2. Main relief valve
3. Pump merge divider valve (Main)
4. Return spring
5. Pump merge divider valve (For LS)
6. Return spring
7. Valve (Sequence valve)
8. Spring (Sequence valve)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-83

CLSS STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
CLSS
Outline of CLSS
Features
• CLSS is an abbreviation for Closed centre Load Sensing
System, and has the following features.
1. Fine control not influenced by load
2. Control enabling digging even with fine control
3. Ease of compound operation ensured by flow divider func-

tion using area of opening of spool during compound opera-
tions
4. Energy saving using variable pump control
Structure
• The CLSS consists of a main pump (2 pumps), control
valve, and actuators for the work equipment.
• The main pump body consists of the pump itself, the PC

valve and LS valve.
10-84 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD CLSS
Basic Principle
1. Control of pump swash plate
• The pump swash plate angle (pump discharge amount) is
controlled so that LS differential pressure ∆PLS (the differ-
ence between pump pressure PP and control valve outlet
port LS pressure PLS) (load pressure of actuator) is con-
stant.
• (LS pressure ∆PLS = Pump discharge pressure PP – LS

pressure PLS)
• If LS differential pressure ∆PLS becomes lower than the set

pressure of the LS valve (when the actuator load pressure is
high), the pump swash plate moves towards the maximum
position; if it becomes higher than the set pressure of the LS
valve (when the actuator load pressure is low), the pump
swash plate moves towards the minimum position.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-85

2. Pressure compensation
• A pressure compensation valve is installed to the outlet port
side of the control valve to balance the load.
• When two actuators are operated together, this valve acts to

make pressure difference DP between the upstream (inlet
port) and downstream (outlet port) of the spool of each valve
the same regardless of the size of the load (pressure).
• In this way, the flow of oil from the pump is divided (compen-
sated) in proportion to the area of opening S1 and S2 of
each valve.
10-86 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Main relief valve
1. Poppet
2. Spring
3. Piston
Function
• The low set pressure and high set pressure can be changed
by external pilot pressure.
• The relief pressure is determined by the pump pressure act-

ing on poppet (1) and the set load of spring (2).
• When the pilot pressure is OFF, the system is set to low

pressure. When the pilot pressure is ON, piston (3) is
pushed fully to the left, so the force of the spring (2) increas-
es and the relief pressure becomes the high set pressure.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-87

Variable pressure compensation valve
1. Valve
2. Spring
3. Sleeve
4. Poppet
5. Spring
6. Screw
7. locknut
8. Plastic cap
Function
• It is possible to adjust the division of the oil flow to the serv-
ice valve when the service valve (for attachment) is operat-
ed together with the main control valve (boom RAISE etc.).
(Variable in proportion to surface area)
• The pump pressure leaving the service valve spool acts on

the left end of valve(1), and at the same time passes
through throttle A and enters chamber G.
The maximum LS pressure passes through throttle D and
enters chamber E. At the same time, the cylinder port pres-
sure passes through passage C and throttle F, and goes to
chamber H.
In addition, the force of spring (2) acts on valve (1), and the
force of spring (5) acts on poppet (4). The force of spring (5)
can be adjusted with screw (6).
10-88 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Operation
Simultaneous operation with work equipment under heavy
load (boom RAISE, etc.)
1. The pump pressure and LS pressure are determined by the
pressure of the other work equipment, but the cylinder port
pressure of the attachment.
When the difference between the pump pressure and the
cylinder pressure is less than the force of spring (5), then
balance of the force acting on valve (1) is as follows.
PxA1=A2++LS (A2-A1) +F
• A1:
Cross-sectional area of diameter D1
• A2:
Cross-sectional area of diameter D2
• F:
Force of spring
2. If the difference between pump pressure P and the cylinder

pressure becomes greater than the force of spring (5), pop-
pet (4) is pushed to the right and the passage opens, so the
pump passage is connected to the cylinder port through
throttle A, chamber G, and passages B and C, and the oil
flows to the cylinder port. When this happens, a differential
pressure is formed between the upstream and downstream
sides of throttle A, and the pressure in the chamber G goes
down, so the force pushing valve (1) to the left is reduced. In
other words, the area ratio becomes smaller, so valve (1)
moves to the right and increases the flow from the pump to
the cylinder.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-89

Centre swivel joint STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Centre swivel joint
F 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 B
A
4 4
14
2
A 11
12
8
6 6
A D C
E 2 4 6 8 10 12 14
1. Steering left 11. Speed sensor signal

2. Drain 12. Transmission large clutch
3. Motor volume pilot 13. Suspension lock
4. Travel motor A 14. Transmission small clutch
5. Undercarriage attachment cylinder head A. Slip ring assembly
6. Travel motor B B. Cover
7. Undercarriage attachment cylinder bottom C. Housing
8. Service brake-1 D. Sealing ring
9. Service brake-2 E. O-ring/backup ring seal
10. Steering right F. Rotor
Unit: mm
Criteria
No. Check Item Remedy
Standard Size Standard clearance Repair limit
-0.02
1 Internal shaft
110-0.06 Max.=0.21
>=0.26 Replace
0.15 Min.=0.12
2 External rotor
110 0.10
10-90 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Travel PPC pedal
Travel PPC pedal
P
3
1. Pedal A. To forward-reverse solenoid

2. Pedal Adjuster P. To travel neutral solenoid
3. Valve T. To tank
Forward pressure switch
Pressure sensor
TRAVEL TRAVEL Control valve

NEUTRAL PEDAL F - R SOLENOID travel spool
SOLENOID
THE PRESSURE SENSOR IS A

PROPORTIONAL DEVICE WHICH
FEEDS TRAVEL PPC PRESSURE
DATA TO THE CONTROLLER
Reverse pressure switch
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-91

Travel PPC pedal STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
MONITOR
TRAVEL PPC TRAVEL
PRESSURE PPC
SENSOR TRAVEL FORWARD
PARK HI PRESSURE SENSOR
F-N-R
BRAKE LO
SWITCH SWITCH
CREEP
F-R
SOL PUMP
PRESSURE
T.R.P.S
SENSOR
ENGINE TRAVEL N
CONTROLLER SOL
ECM
STEERING
PUMP
MAIN
PUMP
TRAVEL
CONTROL
VALVE
CREEP
SOL
PARK BRAKE
SOL
ACCUMULATOR
T/M CLUTCH
SOL UPPER
LOWER
TRAVEL
MOTOR
SPEED PICKUP
SMALL CLUTCH
(ELECTRONIC)
LARGE CLUTCH POWER SHIFT

TRANSMISSION
T.R.P.S - Travel Reverse Pressure Sensor
10-92 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Work equipment – Swing PPC valve
Work equipment – Swing PPC valve
P. From main pump

T. To tank
P1. Left: Arm OUT / Right: Boom LOWER

P2. Left: Arm IN / Right: Boom RAISE
P3. Left: Swing RIGHT / Right: Bucket CURL
P4. Left: SwingLEFT / Right: Bucket DUMP
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-93

Work equipment – Swing PPC valve STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
1. Spool 7. Joint
2. Metering spring 8. Plate
3. Centring spring 9. Retainer
4. Piston 10. Body
5. Disc 11. Filter
6. Nut (For connection of lever)
10-94 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Unit: mm

Free length x Out- Installed Installed Installed
Centring spring Free length
12 side diameter length load load
(For P3 and P4)
9.81 N 7.85 N If damaged or
38.7 x 15.5 34 —
{1.0 kg} {0.8 kg} deformed, replace
spring
Centring spring 17.7 N 14.1 N
13 42.5 x 15.5 34 —
(For P3 and P4) {1.8 kg} {1.44 kg}
16.7 N 13.3 N
14 Metering spring 26.5 x 8.2 24.9 —
{1.7 kg} {1.36 kg}
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-95

Work equipment – Swing PPC valve STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Operation
1. At neutral
Ports A and B of the control valve and ports P1 and P2 of
the PPC valve are connected to drain chamber D through
fine control hole f in spool (1). (Fig. 1)
2. During fine control (neutral → fine control)

When piston (4) starts to be pushed by disc (5), retainer (9)
is pushed; spool (1) is also pushed by metering spring (2),
and moves down.
When this happens, fine control hole f is shut off from drain
chamber D, and at almost the same time, it is connected to
pump pressure chamber PP, so pilot pressure oil from the
main pump passes through fine control hole f and goes from
port P1 to port A.
When the pressure at port P1 becomes higher, spool (1) is
pushed back and fine control hole f is shut off from pump
pressure chamber PP. At almost the same time, it is con-
nected to drain chamber D to release the pressure at port
P1. When this happens, spool (1) moves up or down so that
the force of metering spring (2) is balanced with the pres-
sure at port P1. The relationship in the position of spool (1)
and body (10) (fine control hole f is at a point midway be-
tween drain hole D and pump pressure chamber PP) does
not change until retainer (9) contacts spool (1).
Therefore, metering spring (2) is compressed proportionally
to the amount of movement of the control lever, so the pres-
sure at port P1 also rises in proportion to the travel of the
control lever. In this way, the control valve spool moves to a A
position where the pressure in chamber A (the same as the
pressure at port P1) and the force of the control valve spool
return spring are balanced. (Fig. 2)
10-96 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

3. During fine control (when control lever is returned)

When disc (5) starts to be returned, spool (1) is pushed up
by the force of centring spring (3) and the pressure at port
P1.
When this happens, fine control hole f is connected to drain
chamber D and the pressure oil at port P1 is released.
If the pressure at port P1 drops too far, spool (1) is pushed
down by metering spring (2), and fine control hole f is shut
off from drain chamber D. At almost the same time, it is con-
nected to pump pressure chamber PP, and the pump pres-
sure is supplied until the pressure at port P1 recovers to a
pressure that corresponds to the lever position.
When the spool of the control valve returns, oil in drain
chamber D flows in from fine control hole f in the valve on
the side that is not working. The oil passes through port P2
and enters chamber B to fill the chamber with oil. (Fig. 3)
4. At full stroke
When disc (5) pushes down piston (4), and retainer (9)
pushes down spool (1), fine control hole f is shut off from
drain chamber D, and is connected with pump pressure
chamber PP. Therefore, the pilot pressure oil from the main
pump passes through fine control hole f and flows to cham-
ber A from port P1, and pushes the control valve spool.
The oil returning from chamber B passes from port P2
through fine control hole f and flows to drain chamber D.
(Fig. 4)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-97

Solenoid valves STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Solenoid valves
1. 7 station solenoid
PPC lock, 2-stage relief, travel neutral, swing brake, merge-
divider, suspension lock, travel creep.
TO To tank A1 2 stage relief

T1 To tank A2 Swing brake
P1 From brake valve A3 Suspension lock valve
P2 To: main valve, A5 Merge/flow valve
2 stage back pressure valve,
EPC valve in main pump
PS To: accumulator, A6 Travel neutral
4 station manifold,
2 station manifold
P0 PPC hydraulic pressure lock A8 Travel creep (motor volume pilot)
V01 PPC Pressure solenoid
V02 2 Stage relief solenoid
V03 Swing brake solenoid
V04 Suspension lock solenoid
V05 Merge/divide solenoid
V06 Travel neutral solenoid
V07 Creep solenoid
10-98 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Solenoid valves
2. 4 station manifold
Travel forward/reverse, boom/chassis attachment down,
boom/chassis attachment up, clamshell rotate.
TO1 To tank A4 Rotate clockwise

TO2 To tank B1 Travel reverse
P1 From travel pedal B2 Stabiliser down
P2 From R.H PPC valve B3 Stabiliser up
P3 From R.H PPC valve B4 Rotate anti-clockwise
P4 From service EPC V08 Travel forward/reverse
P5 From 7 station solenoid (PS) V09 Boom down/stabiliser
A1 Travel forward V10 Boom up/stabiliser
A2 Boom down V14 Clamshell
A3 Boom up
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-99

3. 2 station manifold
Clutch control, 2 stage back pressure.
T To tank
P1 7 station solenoid (PS)
P2 Power brake valve
C1 Control valve (PBP)
C2 Swivel joint (Small clutch)
B Swivel joint (High clutch)
V11 Transmission clutch
V15 Back pressure compensation
10-100 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-101

Solenoid valve block
2 Position 3 way valve
4
3
5
This solenoid valve is fitted to the following ports:
V01 PPC lock Solenoid

V02 2 stage relief solenoid
V03 Swing brake solenoid
V04 Suspension lock solenoid
V05 Merge/divide solenoid
V06 Travel neutral solenoid
V07 Travel creep solenoid
1. Connector
2. Plunger
3. Coil
4. Spool
5. Spring
10-102 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Operation
When solenoid is deactivated
Deactivated
• Since the signal current does not flow from the controller, 3 5 4
coil (3) is turned off
Accordingly, spool (4) is pressed by spring (5) against the
left side.
By this operation, the passage from P to A is closed and the
hydraulic oil from the control circuit does not flow into the ac-
tuator.
At this time, the oil from the actuator is drained through ports
A and T into the tank.
P
When solenoid is excited

Excited
• The signal current flows from the controller to coil (3), and 3 5 4
the latter is excited.
Accordingly, spool (4) is pushed to the right side.
By this operation, the hydraulic oil from the control circuit
flows through port P and spool (4) to port A then flows into
the actuator.
At this time, port T is closed and the oil does not flow into the
tank.
P
T
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-103

2 Position 4 way valve
2 5
3 4
This solenoid valve is fitted to the following ports:
V08 Forward / reverse solenoid

V09 Boom / stabiliser down solenoid
V10 Boom / stabiliser up solenoid
V11 Transmission clutch control solenoid
V14 Clamshell solenoid
V15 2 stage back pressure solenoid
1. Connector
2. Plunger
3. Coil
4. Spool
5. Spring
10-104 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Operation
When solenoid is deactivated
• Since the signal current does not flow from the controller, Deactivated
coil (3) is turned off
Accordingly, spool (4) is pressed by spring (5) against the 3 5 4
left side.
By this operation, the passage from P to A is closed and the
hydraulic oil from the control circuit does not flow into the ac-
tuator.
At this time, the oil from the actuator is drained through ports
A and T into the tank.
When solenoid is excited
• The signal current flows from the controller to coil (3), and Excited
the latter is excited.
Accordingly, spool (4) is pushed to the right side. 3 5 4
By this operation, the hydraulic oil from the control circuit
flows through port P and spool (4) to port A then flows into
the actuator.
At this time, port T is closed and the oil does not flow into the
tank.
P
T
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-105

LS (PC)-EPC valve
1. Body 5. Coil PSIG(PM) To LS(PC) valve

2. Spool 6. Plunger PT To tank
3. Spring 7. Connector PEPC From self-reducing pressure valve
4. Rod 8. Filter
10-106 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Function
• The EPC valve consists of the proportional solenoid portion
and the hydraulic valve portion.
• When it receives signal current i from the pump controller, it

generates the EPC output pressure in proportion to the size
of the signal, and outputs it to the LS valve.
Operation
1. When signal current is 0 (coil de-energized)
• When there is no signal current flowing from the controller to

coil (5), coil (5) is generalized.
• For this reason, spool (2) is pushed to the left in the direction
of the arrow by spring (3).
• As a result, port PEPC closes and the pressurized oil from

the main pump does not flow to the LS valve.
At the same time, the pressurized oil from the LS valve
passes from port PSIG(PM) through port PT and is drained
to the tank.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-107

2. When signal current is very small (coil energized)
• When a very small signal current flows to coil (5), coil (5) is
energized, and a propulsion force is generated which push-
es plunger (6) to the right.
• Push pin (4) pushes spool (2) to the left, and pressurized oil
flows from port PEPC to port PSIG(PM).
• When the pressure at port PSIG(PM) rises and the load of

spring (3) + the force acting on surface a of spool (2) be-
comes greater than the propulsion force of plunger (6),
spool (2) is pushed to the left. The circuit between port
PEPC and port PSIG(PM) is shut off, and at the same time,
port PSIG(PM) and port PT are connected.
• As a result, spool (2) is moved up or down until the propul-

sion force of plunger (6) is balanced with the load of spring
(3) + pressure of port PSIG(PM).
• Therefore, the circuit pressure between the EPC valve and

the LS valve is controlled in proportion to the size of the sig-
nal current.
A
3. When signal current is maximum (coil energized)
• When the signal current flows to coil (5), coil (5) is ener-
gized.
• When this happens, the signal current is at its maximum, so

the propulsion force of plunger (6) is also at its maximum.
• For this reason, spool (2) is pushed fully to the right by push
pin (4).
• As a result, the maximum flow of pressurized oil from port

PEPC flows to port PSIG(PM), and the circuit pressure be-
tween the EPC valve and LS valve becomes the maximum.
At the same time, port PT closes and stops the oil from flow-
ing to the tank.
10-108 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Attachment EPC valve
A
A
1 A 2 3 4 5 6
A-A
A. Port C (to LS valve)

B. Port T (to tank)
C. Port P (from PPC pressure reducing valve)
1. Body 5. Coil
2. Spool 6. Plunger
3. Spring 7. Connector
4. Push pin
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-109

Function
• The EPC valve consists of the proportional solenoid portion
and the hydraulic valve portion.
• When it receivers signal current i from the pump controller, it

generates EPC output pressure P in proportion to the size of
the signal, and outputs it to the control valve.
Operation
LS valve
1. When signal current is 0 (coil deactivated)
• There is no signal current flowing from the controller to coil 2 3 5
(5), coil (5) is deactivated. C
• For this reason, spool (2) is pushed to the right in the direc-
tion of the arrow by spring (3).
• As a result, port P closes and the pressurised oil from the

pressure regulating valve does not flow to the Att pedal. T P
PPC pressure
reducing valve
2. When signal current is very small (coil excited)

• When a very small signal current flows to coil (5), coil (5) is LS valve
excited, and a propulsion force is generated, which pushes
plunger (6) to the left in the direction of the arrow.
2 3 4 5 6
C
• Push pin (4) pushes spool (2) to the left in the direction of
the arrow and pressurised oil flows from port P to port C.
• When the pressure at port C rises and the load of spring (3)
+ the force acting on surface a of spool (2) becomes greater
than the proportional force of plunger (6), spool (2) is T P
pushed to the right in the direction of the arrow. The circuit
PPC pressure
between port P and port C is shut off, and at the same time, reducing valve
port C and port T are connected.
• As a result, spool (2) is moved to the left or right until the

propulsion force of plunger (6) is balanced with the load of
spring (3) + pressure of port C.
• Therefore, the circuit pressure between the EPC valve and

the Att pedal is controlled in proportion to the size of the sig-
nal current.
10-110 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

3. When signal current is maximum (coil excited)

• When the signal current flows to coil (5), coil (5) is excited. LS valve
• When this happens, the signal current is at its maximum, so
the propulsion force of plunger (6) is also at its maximum. 2 4 5 6
• For this reason spool (1) is pushed to the left in the direction
of the arrow by push pin (4).
• As a result, the maximum flow of pressurised oil from port P

flows at its maximum to port C, and the circuit pressure be-
tween EPC valve and Att pedal becomes the maximum.
PPC pressure
At the same time, port T closes and stops the oil from flow- reducing valve
ing to the tank.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-111

Boom Safety valve STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Boom Safety valve
High pressure from

1 2 control valve (V port)
Pilot signal
(Pi port)
Overload caution To tank (T port)

signal
To cylinder port
(Cy port)
10-112 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Boom Safety valve
Operation
Boom Raise V port
2
• During boom raising the pilot signal from wrist control oper-
ates control valve spool to direct high pressure oil to port V
of hose burst valve.
• This pressure lifts check valve (4) from seat and high pres- To tank
sure oil flows in the bottom of the cylinder raising the room.
4
Boom control
Cylinder valve
Control lever
PPC pressure
reducing valve
Boom Lower
2
• During boom lowering the pilot signal reverses the flow
through the control valve spool. High pressure oil flows to T port
the head side of the cylinder. Oil in the bottom side of the
cylinder flows through the port Cy of the valve. The pilot sig- To tank
nal also opens the spool (2) of the hose burst valve and al-
lows oil to flow back to tank.
4
Cy port
PPC pressure
reducing valve
When hose burst occurs

V port
(operation to lower safety)
• The sudden loss of pressure at port V will cause check valve

(4) to re-seat and so the valve is locked.
To tank
Cylinder Boom control

valve
Control lever
PPC pressure
reducing valve
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-113

Hydraulic cylinder STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Hydraulic cylinder
PW200-7E0, PW200-7E0
Boom cylinder
380 ± 55Nm 294 ± 29.4Nm

(38.7 ± 4kgm) (30 ± 3kgm)
59 ~ 73Nm
(6 ~ 7.5kgm)
Arm cylinder
373 ± 54Nm 294 ± 29.4Nm

(38 ± 5.5kgm) (30 ± 3kgm)
58.9 ~ 73.6Nm
(6 ~ 7.5kgm)
A
Bucket cylinder
270 ± 39Nm 294 ± 29.4Nm

(27.5 ± 4kgm) (30 ± 3kgm)
58.9 ~ 73.6Nm
(6 ~ 7.5kgm)
10-114 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Hydraulic cylinder
Adjust cylinder
892 +/- 137Nm 294 +/- 30Nm

(90.9 +/- 14 kgm) (29.9 +/- 3 kgm)
58 ~ 73Nm
2 1 (59 ~ 7.4kgm)
Unit: mm
Standard Tolerance Standard clear- Clearance

Cylinder
size Shaft Hole ance limit
-0.036 +0.222
Boom 95 0.083 ~ 0.312 0.412
-0.090 +0.047
Clearance between
-0.036 +0.222 Replace bush-
1 piston rod and bush- Arm 95 0.083 ~ 0.312 0.412
-0.090 +0.047 ing
ing
Bucket 80 -0.030 +0.257
0.078 ~ 0.334 0.447
Large bore 85 -0.076 +0.048
-0.036 +0.054
Adjust 120 0.036 ~ 0.125 ---
-0.071 +0.000
-0.030 +0.188
Boom 100 0.106 ~ 0.248 ---
-0.060 +0.076
-0.030 +0.457
Clearance between Arm 80 0.4 ~ 0.533 ---
-0.076 +0.370
2 piston rod support
pin and bushing Both bucket -0.030 +0.424
70 0.38 ~ 0.5 ---
cylinders -0.076 +0.350
-0.036 +0.457
Adjust 110 0.406 ~ 0.547 ---
-0.090 +0.370 Replace pin or
-0.030 +0.103 bushing
Boom 70 0.071 ~ 0.163 ---
-0.060 +0.041
-0.030 +0.457
Clearance between Arm 80 0.105 ~ 0.251 ---
-0.076 +0.370
3 cylinder bottom sup-
port pin and bushing Both bucket -0.030 +0.424
70 0.100 ~ 0.230 ---
cylinders -0.060 +0.350
-0.036 +0.457
Adjust 110 0.406 ~ 0.547 ---
-0.090 +0.370
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-115

Outrigger cylinder STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Outrigger cylinder
2
10
25
3
23 24
4
27 18 26
22
20 21
18 5
19
17 6
16 17
13
14 15
28 29 13 7
12 8
11
9
10
10-116 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Outrigger cylinder
1. Circlip 16. Cut back-up ring

2. Grease nipple 17. O-ring
3. Piston wear-ring 18. O-ring
4. Piston 19. Cut back-up ring
5. Piston rod 20. Back-up ring
6. Cylinder 21. O-ring
7. Guide 22. Back-up ring
8. O-ring 23. Turcon-Glydring
9. Grub screw 24. O-ring
10. Spherical plain bearing 25. Self locking groove nut
11. Wiper 26. Cut back-up ring
12. O-ring 27. Wiper
13. Rod wear-ring 28. Pilot operated double check valve cartridge
15. Back-up ring
Function
Cylinder head (4) guides the piston rod (2) which is sealed by
seal (9). Seal (9) is protected against dirt by wiper (8).
When oil flows through port I to the piston side of the cylinder the
piston rod (2) extends out of the cylinder (1).
The piston is guided in the cylinder (1) by the piston guide ring
(7). It is sealed by the piston ring (14). The cylinder head is
sealed against the cylinder by O-ring (13).
When oil flows through port II to the rod side of the cylinder the
piston rod retracts.
Important
Depressurising the cylinder
The check valve built into the cylinder prevents any cylinder
movement due to oil leakage within the control block or sudden
loss of hydraulic pressure due to a hose burst.
The built in check valve also holds hydraulic pressure within the
cylinder when the hydraulic hoses are removed from the cylin-
der.
Depressurise the cylinder before opening
To depressurise the cylinder, loosen the plug (23) carefully using

an allen key and wait until the pressure has been released.
To be absolutely sure the plug can be completely removed.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-117

Dozer cylinder STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Dozer cylinder
20
2
19
25 3
24 24 25 24 18
4
17
5
23
26
22
27 6
28 21
7
29
16
15
30 31 32 30
8
14
13
12
1
11
10
10-118 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Dozer cylinder
1. Spherical plain bearing 17. Piston wear-ring

2. Self locking groove nut 18. O-ring
3. Uncut back-up ring 19. Back-up ring
5. Piston 21. Screw plug
6. Cylinder 22. O-ring
7. Piston rod 23. Throttle bolt
8. Guide 24. Back-up ring
9. Grease nipple 25. O-ring
10. Wiper 26. Screw plug
11. Rod wear-ring 27. Pressure spring
12 Grub screw 28. Valve poppet
13. Turcon-glyd-ring 29. Valve seat
14. O-ring 30. Pressure spring
15. O-ring 31. Control spool
16. Uncut back-up ring 32. Valve seat
Function
Function
Cylinder head (4) guides the piston rod (2) which is sealed by
seal (11). Seal (11) is protected against dirt by wiper (10).
When oil flows through port I to the piston side of the cylinder the
piston rod (2) extends out of the cylinder (1).
The piston is guided in the cylinder (1) by the piston guide ring
(18). It is sealed by the piston ring (16). The cylinder head is
sealed against the cylinder by O-ring (20).
When oil flows through port II to the rod side of the cylinder the
piston rod retracts.
Important
Depressurising the cylinder
The check valve built into the cylinder prevents any cylinder
movement due to oil leakage within the control block or sudden
loss of hydraulic pressure due to a hose burst.
The built in check valve also holds hydraulic pressure within the
cylinder when the hydraulic hoses are removed from the cylin-
der.
Depressurise the cylinder before opening
To depressurise the cylinder, loosen the plug (8) carefully using

an allen key and wait until the pressure has been released.
To be absolutely sure the plug can be completely removed.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-119

Work equipment STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Work equipment
F D
G
L
E
J
A
K
B
I
H
L-L M-M
10-120 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Work equipment
PW200-7E0/PW220-7E0
Work equipment
Unit: mm
Standard Tolerance Standard clear- Clearance

Clearance between connecting pin size ance limit
Shaft Hole
1 and bushing of revolving frame and
boom -0.036 +0.131
90 0.110 ~ 0.202 1.0
-0.071 +0.074
Clearance between connecting pin -0.036 +0.166

2 90 0.110 ~ 0.237 1.0
and bushing of boom and arm -0.071 +0.074
Clearance between connecting pin -0.030 +0.158 Replace

3 70 0.108 ~ 0.234 1.0
and bushing of arm and link -0.076 +0.078

4 80 0.104 ~ 0.213 1.0
and bushing of arm and bucket -0.076 +0.074

5 80 0.116 ~ 0.242 1.0
and bushing of link and bucket -0.076 +0.086

6 80 0.104 ~ 0.230 1.0
and bushing of link and link -0.076 +0.074
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-121

1. Dimension of arm
10-122 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Unit: mm
PW200/220-7 Arm Size (M)

Model No.
1.8 2.4 2.9 3.4
1 ∅ 70 +0.1
0
2 107.3 +1.5
0
3 0.3
310-0.8
-0.36
4 ∅ 90-0.071
5 351.3 ±1
6 187.2 ±0.5 226.9 ±0.5 187.2 ±0.5 226.9 ±0.5
7 829.1 ±1 865.5 ±1 829.1 ±1 865.5 ±1
8 1,790 2,400.4 2,919 3,500
9 2,631.9 ±1 2,634.2 ±1 2,631.5 ±1 2,634.5 ±2
10 410 ±1
11 640 ±0.2
12 600 ±0.5
13 458.1
14 1,486
15 80
16 326.5 ±1
17 ∅ 80
Arm as individual part 0

311-0.5
18
When pressfitting bushing 325
Min. 1,680
19
Max. 2,800
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-123

2. Dimension of bucket
10-124 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Unit: mm
Model No. PW200/220-7E0
1 457.6 ±0.5
2 22 ±0.5
3 92° 48’
4 457.6±0.5
5 1,477.3
6 158.6
7 —
8 0
9 ∅ 80 +0.1
0
10 326.5 ±1
11 46
12 106
13 470
14 ∅ 23.5
15 ∅ 140
16 ∅ 190
17 133
18 131.6
19 107
20 85
21 358.5 +20
22 38
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-125

Air conditioner STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Air conditioner
Air conditioner piping
1. Hot water pick-up piping

2. Air conditioner compressor
3. Refrigerant piping
4. Condenser
5. Receiver tank
6. Hot water return piping
7. Air conditioner unit
8. Duct
10-126 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Air conditioner
A. Fresh air
B. Re circulated air
C. Hot air/cold air
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-127

Electrical wiring diagram STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Electrical wiring diagram

Please refer to section 90
10-128 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Electrical system
Electrical system
Engine control
1. Operation of system
Starting engine
• When the starting switch is turned to the START position,

the starting motor. Then, the starting motor turns to start the
engine.
When it happens, the engine controller checks the signal

voltage from the fuel control dial and sets the engine speed
to the speed set by the fuel control dial.
Engine speed control
• The fuel control dial sends a signal voltage corresponding to

the rotation angle to the engine
The engine controller sends a driving signal to the supply

pump depending on the signal voltage to control the fuel in-
jection pump and eventually controls the engine speed.
Stopping engine
• When detecting that the starting switch is set to the STOP

position, the engine controller cuts the signal of the supply
pump drive solenoid to stop the engine.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-129

Electrical system STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
2. Component
Fuel control dial
1. Knob
2. Dial
3. Spring
4. Ball
5. Potentiometer
6. Connector
Function
• The fuel control dial is installed near the monitor panel, and
a potentiometer is installed under the knob. The potentiome-
ter shaft is turned by turning the knob.
• As the potentiometer shaft is turned, the resistance of the

variable resistor in the potentiometer changes and a throttle
signal is sent to the engine throttle and pump controller.
The hatched area in the graph shown at right is the abnor-
mality detection area.
10-130 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Engine controller
CN-CE01
(*: Never connect to NC as malfunctions and errors occur)
Pin No. Signal name Title panel Pin No. Signal name Title panel
1 NC (*) 18 NC (*)
2 Electric power supply for IMA 19 NC (*)
3 Atmosphere sensor 20 NC (*)
4 NC (*) 21 NC (*)
5 NC (*) 22 NC (*)
6 CAN (-) 23 Intake manifold temperature
7 NC (*) 24 NC (*)
8 CAN (+) 25 Accumulator pressure signal
9 NC (*) 26 Position sensor signal B
10 NC (*) 27 Speed sensor signal
11 NC (*) 28 NC (*)
12 NC (*) 29 NC (*)
13 NC (*) 30 NC (*)
14 Water-in-fuel input 31 NC (*)
15 Coolant temperature sensor 32 IMA return
16 5V electric power supply for sensor 33 5V electric power supply for sensor
17 Oil pressure sensor 34 NC (*)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-131

CN-CE01
Pin No. Signal name Title panel Pin No. Signal name Title panel
35 NC (*) 48 Speed sensor return
36 NC (*) 49 NC (*)
37 5V electric power supply for sensor 50 NC (*)
38 Air pressure sensor return 51 NC (*)
39 NC (*) 52 Injector #4 (-)
40 NC (*) 53 Injector #1 (-)
41 NC (*) 54
42 NC (*) 55 Injector #4 (+)
43 NC (*) 56
44 Boost pressure sensor 57 Injector #2 (+)
45 Injector #1 (+) 58
46 Injector #3 (+) 59 Injector #2 (-)
47 Position sensor return 60 Injector #3 (-)
CN-CE02
Input/Out- Input/Out-
Pin No. Signal name Pin No. Signal name
put put
1 NC (*) 26 NC (*)
2 NC (*) 27 NC (*)
3 NC (*) 28 NC (*)
4 NC (*) 29 NC (*)
5 NC (*) 30 NC (*)
6 NC (*) 31 NC (*)
7 NC (*) 32 NC (*)
8 NC (*) 33 GND
9 Fuel control dial (+) 34 NC (*)
10 NC (*) 35 NC (*)
11 NC (*) 36 NC (*)
12 NC (*) 37 NC (*)
13 NC (*) 38 NC (*)
14 NC (*) 39 Key switch (ACC)
15 NC (*) 40 Electrical intake air heater relay drive
16 NC (*) 41 NC (*)
17 NC (*) 42 Electrical intake air heater relay drive
18 NC (*) 43 NC (*)
19 NC (*) 44 NC (*)
20 NC (*) 45 NC (*)
21 NC (*) 46 CAN (+)
22 Fuel control dial (+5V) 47 CAN (-)
23 Fuel control dial (-) 48 NC (*)
24 NC (*) 49 PWM OUTPUT
25 NC (*) 50 NC (*)
10-132 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

CN-CE03
Input/Out-
Pin No. Signal name
put
1 GND
2 NC (*)
3 Electric power supply (+24V constantly)
4 NC (*)
Input and output signals

CN-1
Pin Signal name Input/output
1 Travel PPC pressure sensor Input
2 R pump pressure sensor Input
3 2ND service portion Input
4 Signal GND
5 Abnormality in auto-greasing controller Input
6 Service pressure switch Input
7 Overload sensor (analog) Input
8 F pump pressure sensor Input
9 1st service portion Input
10 Signal GND
11 Knob SW (power max.) Input
12 Travel reverse press. switch Input
13
14 Angle sensor Input
15 NC Input
16 Travel PPC pressure power Output
17 Start Switch (Terminal C) Input
18 Breaker switch Input
19
20
21 GND (analog GND)
22 POT_PWR Output
23 Start switch (terminal ACC) Input
24 Boom/Outrigger select switch Input
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-133

CN-2
1 NC Output
2 Swing emergency switch Input
3 Quick coupler low press. SW Input
4 232C_RxD Input
5 Arm dump pressure switch Input
6 Travel forward pressure switch Input
7 Model selection 4 switch Input
8
9 PPC lock (relay) Output
10 NC Input
11 NC Output
12 CAN shield
13 Model selection 5 Input
14 232C_TxD Output
15 Arm DIG switch Input
16 Swing pressure switch Input
17 Model selection 3 Input
18 Boom/Outrigger sol. relay Output
19 Suspension lock relay Output
20 NC Input
21 S_NET Input/output
22 CAN0_L Input/output
23 CAN1_L Input/output
24 Flash memory write enable signal Input
25 Boom down pressure switch Input
26 Bucket dump pressure switch Input
27 Machine selection 2 Input
28 Swing proximity switch Input
29 GND (pulse GND)
30 Speed pick-up sensor Input
31 GND (S_NET GND)
32 CAN0_H Input/output
33 CAN1_H Input/output
34 GND (232C GND)
35 Boom raise pressure switch Input
36 Bucket DIG pressure switch Input
37 Model selection switch 1 Input
38 Swing lock switch Input
39 Pulse GND
40
10-134 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

CN-3
1 VB (controller power) Input

2 VIS (solenoid power) Input
3 SOL_COM (solenoid common gnd)
4 Battery relay drive signal Output
5 1st service LH flow control EPC Output
6 LS-EPC solenoid Output
7 Merge/Flow divider solenoid Output
8 2 stage relief solenoid Output
9 2nd service neutral SW Input
10 Travel direction F switch Input
11 VB (controller power) Input
14 KEY signal Input
15 1st service RH flow control EPC Output
16 PC-EPC solenoid Output
17 Creep solenoid Output
18
19 Park brake pressure switch Input
20 Travel direction N switch Input
21 GND (controller GND)
24 KEY signal Input
25 2nd service LH flow control EPC Output
26 Suspension lock solenoid Output
27 Transmission clutch solenoid Output
28 Travel FR solenoid Output
29 Tilting pod SW Input
30 Travel direction R switch Input
34 NC
35 2nd service RH flow control EPC Output
36 2 stage back pressure solenoid Output
37 Swing brake solenoid Output
38 Travel N solenoid Output
39 Low brake pressure switch Input
40 1st service neutral SW Input
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-135

Engine control system STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Engine control system
Control function 1
Engine/Pump composite control function
2
Pump/Valve control function
3
One-touch power maximizing function
4
Auto-deceleration function
5
Auto-warm-up/Overheat prevention function
Electronic control system
6
Swing control function
7
Travel control function
8
ATT flow control, ATT direction control
9
System component parts
10
Speed sensing function
• For the self-diagnosis function, see "TROUBLESHOOT-

ING".
10-136 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Engine control system
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-137

Machine control system diagram
Regulated power supply
Wiper position
2
Wiper signal
controller
Wiper drive 3
Swing emergency signal

signal
PPC lock
Susp lock Monitor Panel Swing
Swing position
position
Personal code signal
Swing
signal
sensor
lock
Brake lock Brake
position signal lock
signal
Work mode signal position
Regulated power supply
travel speed selection Travel forward signal 6
Signal Travel reverse signal
Auto-deceleration signal 7
Boom raise/Stabiliser
ATT flow command
up signal
8
PPC lock selection Boom lower/Stabiliser
Swing lock selection down signal
9
Sus. lock selection Arm IN signal
10
Arm OUT signal
11
Bucket CURL signal
12
Bucket DUMP signal
13
Swing signal
14
Service/2PB signal
15
Controller Attachment flow
adjustment signal
19
Boom select signal Travel clutch sol
20
Outrigger select signal Swing parking
Clamshell LH brake signal 21
Clamshell RH 2-Stage relief signal
22
Travel PPC signal
Machine select 23
Park brake signal
25
Low brake signal
26
(Set by monitor) Brake light cut
37
Clamshell solenoid
38
R Pump discharge
Travel Forward
pressure signal
Travel Reverse Select switch 27
Travel Neutral F Pump discharge
Error signal pressure signal
Monitoring information 28
31
Battery relay 2nd throttle command PC-EPC Control signal
drive signal 29 Travel creep
Auto declaration signal LS-EPC Control signal sol.
PPC lock 30
Torque selector signal Travel creep signal
RH lever Engine speed Back press valve signal 32
Relay Travel speed
pick up sensor Back press.
Sus. lock sol. 33
Relay sol.
Relay 34
Travel PPC pressure
Neutral sol 36
Raise Lower
Boom/Stabiliser sol.
Fwd/Rev sol
PPC lock
Relay
Outrigger
Monitor
F.L F.R R.L R.R

Oil level sensor
Outrigger solenoid
35
WIF. Rail press speed,
Boost temp, Atmoshere
Background current press, Boost press
countermeasure
relay Electric intake Oil pressure
air heater sensor
Engine
Throttle
Controlller Water temperature
Starting
sensor
Fuel control dial

Alternator
SJP08906AE
10-138 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

1 Power Max knob switch
2 Swing holding brake signal
6 Travel forward solenoid switch
7 Travel reverse solenoid switch
8 Boom raise/Stabiliser up pressure switch
9 Boom lower/Stabiliser down pressure switch
10
11
Attachment
12 Solenoid
13
14
15 2PBoom extend pressure switch
2PBoom retract pressure switch
Service pressure switch (opt)

Service pressure switch (opt)
19
20
22
23
25 Park brake press. switch

Brake
26 valve
Low brake press. switch
Pump
Merge-Divide
28
Travel clutch Travel neutral Pump
29 solenoid
solenoid valve Merge Divide
30 valve
34
Pressure Main
Travel creep
Back pressure
Sensor Relief
valve
Load
PC valve
Pressure F
Load
Main Valve
Pressure R Travel
LS valve Divider Travel PPC pedal
Valve sensor 31
Servo
35
Trans-
mission
Speed
sensor
32
33
36
37 Relay Brake light SJP08907BF
38 Clamshell
Relay
Solenoid
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-139

1. Engine and pump control function
Engine
throttle
controller
Second throttle signal
Travel
Pedal
Monitor Panel
10-140 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Function
• The operator can set the work mode switch on the monitor
panel to mode A, E, or B (or L) and select proper engine
torque and pump absorption torque according to the type of TRAVEL
work.
• The engine throttle and pump controller detects the speed of

the engine governor set with the fuel control dial and the ac-
tual engine speed and controls them so that the pump will
absorb all the torque at each output point of the engine, ac-
cording to the pump absorption torque set in each mode.
A
TRAVEL
SJP08756
OR
08910
SJP08757
OR TRAVEL
08911
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-141

1. Control method in each mode Mode P

• Matching point in mode P: Rated speed
Model PW200-7E0,PW200-7E0
Mode P
106.6 kW/1,900 rpm {143 HP/1,900 rpm}
Working SJP08758
Mode A Travel 119.8 kW/2,000 rpm {160 HP/2,000 rpm}
OR
08912
• If the pump load increases and the pressure rises, the en-
gine speed lowers.
At this time, the controller lowers the pump discharge so that SJP08759
the engine speed will be near the full output point. If the
pressure lowers, the controller increases the pump dis- OR
charge so that the engine speed will be near the full output
point. 08913
By repeating these operations, the controller constantly us-
es the engine near the full output point.
SJP08760
OR
08914
10-142 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Mode E / Mode B / (Mode L)

Mode Digging Breaker Finishing
Partial output point 85% 75% 70% SJP08761
OR
Mode PW200-7E0, PW200-7E0
08915
Mode E 118 HP / 1,805 RPM
Mode B 108 HP / 1,600 RPM
(Mode L) 99 HP / 1,750 RPM
• At this time, the controller keeps the pump absorption torque

along the constant horsepower curve and lower the engine
speed by the composite control of the engine and pump.
By this method, the engine is used in the low fuel consump- SJP08762
tion area.
OR
08916
SJP08763
OR
08917
• When travel is activated in each mode matching point

TRAVEL
changes to travel matching point.
SJP08761
OR
08915
Ab
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-143

2. Function to control when emergency pump drive switch

is turned ON
• Even if the controller or a sensor has a trouble, the functions
of the machine can be secured with pump absorption torque
almost equivalent to mode E by turning on emergency pump
10
drive switch (10).
In this case, a constant current flows from the battery to the
EPC valve for PC and the oil pressure is sensed by only the
EPC valve for PC.
10-144 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

2. Pump/valve control function
Stabilizer
Service 1
Service 2
2PBoom
Bucket
Boom
Swing
Travel
Arm
Engine
throttle
controller
Monitor Panel
SJP09129B B
Function
• The machine is matched to various types of work properly
with the 2-stage relief function to increase the digging force,
etc.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-145

1. LS control function
• The change point (LS set differential pressure) of the pump

discharge in the LS valve is changed by changing the output
pressure from the LS-EPC valve to the LS valve according
to the operating condition of the actuator.
• By this operation, the start-up time of the pump discharge is 08922

optimised and the composite operation and fine control per-
formance is improved.
2. Cut-off function
⇓
• When the cut-off function is turned on, the PC-EPC current
is increased to near the maximum value.
By this operation, the flow rate in the relief state is lowered
to reduce fuel consumption.
• Operating condition for turning on cut-off function.

550 mA
Condition
• The average value of the front and rear pressure sensors is

above 27.9 MPa {285 kg/cm²} and the one-touch power
maximizing function is not turned on
The cut-off function does not work, however, while the machine
is travelling in mode A or the arm crane operation width swing
lock switch is turned on. 285 345
3. 2-stage relief function A
• The relief pressure in the normal work is 34.8 MPa {355 kg/
cm²}. If the 2-stage relief function is turned on, however, the
relief pressure rises to about 37.2 MPa {380 kg/cm²}.
By this operation, the hydraulic force is increased further.
• Operating condition for turning on 2-stage relief function
Condition Relief pressure
• During travel
34.8 MPa
• When swing lock switch is turned on
{355 kg/cm²}
• When boom is lowered
⇓
• When one-touch power maximizing
37.2 MPa
function is turned on
{380 kg/cm²}
• When L mode is operated
10-146 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

3. One-touch power maximizing function
Engine
throttle
controller
Monitor Panel
BB
Function
• Power can be increased for approximately 8 seconds by de-
pressing the left knob switch on the RH work equipment le-
ver.
• The power max function is available in "A" and "E" working

modes only.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-147

1. One-touch power maximizing function
• When the operator needs more digging force to dig up a

large rock, etc., if the left knob switch is pressed, the hydrau-
lic force is increased about 7% to increase the digging force.
• If the left knob switch is turned on in working mode "P" or

"E", each function is set automatically as shown below.
Software cut-off function
Working mode Engine/Pump control 2-stage relief function Operation time
34.8 MPa {355 kg/cm²}

Automatically reset at 8.5
P, E Matching at rated output point ⇓ sec.
Cancel
37.2 MPa {380 kg/cm²}
10-148 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

4. Auto-deceleration function
Engine
throttle
controller
Travel
pedal
Monitor Panel
Function
• If all the control levers are set in NEUTRAL while waiting for
a dump truck or work, the engine speed is lowered to the
medium level automatically to reduce the fuel consumption
and noise.
• If any lever is operated, the engine speed rises to the set

level instantly.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-149

Operation
When control levers are set in neutral

• If all the control levers are set in NEUTRAL while the engine
speed is above the decelerator operation level (about 1,400
rpm), the engine speed lowers instantly to the first decelera-
tion level about 100 rpm lower than the set speed.
• If 4 more seconds pass, the engine speed lowers to the sec-

ond deceleration level (about 1,400 rpm) and keeps at that
level until any lever is operated again.
When any control lever is operated

• If any control lever is operated while the engine speed is
kept at the second deceleration level, the engine speed ris-
es instantly to the level set with the fuel control dial.
Engine speed instruction
All PPC pressure switched : off

A
10-150 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

5. Auto-warm-up/overheat and white smoke pre-

vention function
Engine
throttle
controller

Monitor Panel
Function
• After the engine is started, if the engine cooling water tem-
perature is low, the engine speed is raised automatically to
warm up the engine. If the engine cooling water temperature
rises too high during work, the pump load is reduced to pre-
vent overheating. To prevent white smoke the heater relay is
activated for 100 seconds if the water temperature is below
30°C.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-151

1. Auto-warm-up function
• After the engine is started, if the engine cooling water tem-
perature is low, the engine speed is raised automatically to
warm up the engine.
Operating condition (All) Operated
Water temperature: Below 30°C.

Engine speed: Max. 1,200 rpm ⇒ Engine speed: Max. 1,200 rpm
⇓
Resetting condition (Any one) Reset
Auto Water temperature: Above 30°C
Auto-warm-up operation time: Min. 10 minutes
⇒ Engine speed: Any level
Manual Fuel control dial: Kept at 70% of full level for 3 sec. or longer
2. Overheat prevention function

• If the engine cooling water temperature rises too high during
work, the pump load and engine speed are reduced to pre-
vent overheating.
• This function is turned on when the water temperature rises

above 95°C.
Operating condition Operation/Remedy Resetting condition

Water temperature: Below 105°C
⇒ ⇒
Work mode: Any mode Fuel control dial: Return to low idle position
Water temperature: Engine speed: Low idle once.
Above 105°C Monitor alarm lamp: Lights up • Under above condition, controller is set to
Alarm buzzer: Sounds condition before operation of function.
(Manual reset)
⇒
Work mode: Mode A, E, OR B Water temperature: Below 102°C
⇒
Water temperature: Engine speed: Keep as is. • Under above condition, controller is set to
Above 102°C Monitor alarm lamp: Lights up. condition before operation of function. (Au-
Lower pump discharge. tomatic reset)
⇒
⇒
Work mode: Mode A
Water temperature: • Under above condition, controller is set to
Engine speed: Keep as is.
Above 100°C condition before operation of function. (Au-
Lower pump discharge.
tomatic reset)
⇒ ⇒
Work mode: Travel
Water temperature: • Under above condition, controller is set to
Engine speed: Keep as is.
Above 95°C condition before operation of function. (Au-
Lower travel speed.
tomatic reset)
10-152 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

6. Swing control function
SJP08769
OR Monitor Panel
08926
SJP09133A
Function
The swing lock and swing holding brake functions are installed.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-153

1. Swing lock and swing holding brake functions
• The swing lock function (manual) is used to lock machine

from swinging at any position. The swing holding brake func-
tion (automatic) is used to prevent hydraulic drift after the
machine stops swinging.
• Swing lock switch and swing lock/holding brake
Lock Lock
Function Operation
switch lamp
If swing lever is set in neutral, swing

Swing
brake operates in about 5 sec. If swing
OFF OFF holding
lever is operated, brake is released and
brake
machine can swing freely.
Swing lock operates and machine is

locked from swinging. Even if swing
ON ON Swing lock
lever is operated, swing lock is not
reset and machine does not swing.
Operation of swing holding brake release switch
• If the controller, etc. has a problem, the swing holding brake

does not work normally, and the machine cannot swing, the
swing lock can be reset with the swing holding brake release
switch
Swing holding ON OFF

brake release (When control has trou- (When controller is normal)
switch ble)
Swing lock ON OFF ON OFF

switch
Swing brake Swing lock Swing Swing lock Swing hold-

is turned lock is is turned ing brake is
on. can- on. turned on.
celled.
• Even if the swing holding brake release switch is turned on,

if the swing lock switch is turned on, the swing brake is not
released.
• If the swing lock is reset, swinging is stopped by only the hy-

draulic brake of the safety valve. Accordingly, if swinging is
stopped on a slope, the upper structure may drift hydrauli-
cally.
2. Quick hydraulic oil warm-up function when swing lock switch

is turned on
• If swing lock switch (4) is turned on, the pump-cut function is

4
cancelled and the relief pressure rises from 34.8 MPa {355
kg/cm²} to 37.2 MPa {380 kg/cm²}. If the work equipment is
relieved under this condition, the hydraulic oil temperature
rises quickly and the warm-up time can be shortened.
10-154 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

7. Travel control function
Monitor
Auto
Hi
F-N-R Lo Travel PPC
Switch Creep Pressure
Sensor Travel
PPC
F-R
sol
Travel N
35kph or 20kph Steering
sol
Seletor Connector
Controller Pump
Parkbrake
Switch PC - EPC
2 Stage
Backpress LS - EPC
sol
Pump
Pressure
2 Stage Sensor
Backpress Main
Valve Pump
Travel
Control
Creep
sol R
Valve
F A
Travel R Travel F
press SW press SW
Parkbrake
sol
Engine
TM Clutch
throttle To
sol
controller Position A
(Throttle signal)
(Second throttle signal)
Swivel Joint
Travel
Motor
2nd Clutch
1st Clutch
Powershift
Transmission
Speed
Pick-up
Function
• The pumps are controlled and the travel speed is changed
manually or automatically, to secure proper travel perform-
ance matched to the type of work and jobsite during travel.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-155

1. Pump control function during travel
• If the machine travels in a work mode other than mode A,

the work mode and the engine speed are kept as they are
and the pump absorption torque is increased.
★ For details, see ENGINE/PUMP COMPOSITE CONTROL

FUNCTION.
2. Travel speed change function
• Manual change with travel speed button monitor.
• If the travel speed switch is changed between CREEP, LO,

and HI, the governor/pump controller controls the pump ca- Travel speed AUTO
CREEP LO HI
pacity and motor capacity at each gear speed as shown at switch (LO~HI)
right to change the travel speed. Pump capac-
60 90 100
ity (%)
• Automatic change by engine speed Motor capacity Max. Max. Min. Min~Max
Travel speed 0 - 35 0 - 35
2.5 0 ~9.5
• If the engine speed is lowered to 1,500 rpm or less with the (km/h) 0 - 20 0 - 20
fuel control dial during travel;
• The travel speed does not change even if the travel speed
switch is changed from CREEP, LO to Hi,
• The travel speed changes to Mi level automatically if the

travel speed has been Hi.
• Automatic change by pump discharge pressure
• While the machine is travelling with the travel speed switch

at Hi, if the load is increased because of an incline ground,
etc. and the travel pressure keeps above 35 MPa {357 kg/
cm²} for 0.5 seconds, the travel motor capacity is changed
automatically and the travel speed is lowered (to the LO lev-
el) (The travel speed switch is kept at Hi, however).
• While the machine is travelling at LO, if the load is reduced

on a flat or downslope ground, etc. and the travel pressure
keeps below 23 MPa {234 kg/cm²} for 0.5 seconds, the trav-
el motor capacity is changed automatically and the travel
speed is set to Hi again.
• Controller does not change the travel mode in travel HI/LO

switch unless a mode continues for more than 0.5 seconds.
• From CREEP to other mode, or from other mode to CREEP,

travel mode should be changed immediately.
• Default mode should be the last mode when starter switch

was turned off.
• Maximum speed 2260 rpm.
Maximum engine speed:

Max. Engine speed
P Mode 2100 rpm
E Mode 1960 rpm
L Mode 1875 rpm
B Mode 1730 rpm
10-156 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

8. ATT flow control, circuit selector function (op-

tion)
Engine
throttle
controller
Monitor Panel
HCU control switch
LH
Att. direction
control
RH
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-157

9. System component parts
1. Engine revolution sensor
1. Sensor
2. Locknut
3. Wiring harness
4. Connector
Function
• The engine revolution sensor is installed to the ring gear of
the engine flywheel. It electrically calculates the number of
the gear teeth which pass in front of it and transmits the re-
sult to the engine throttle and pump controller.
• A magnet is used to sense the gear teeth. Each time a gear

tooth passes in front of the magnet, a current is generated.
10-158 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

2. PPC oil pressure switch
1. Plug
2. Switch
3. Connector
Specifications
Type of contacts: Normally open contacts
Operating (ON) pressure: 0.5 ± 0.1 MPa

{5.0 ± 1.0 kg/cm²}
Resetting (OFF) Pressure: 0.3 ± 0.5 MPa

{3.0 ± 0.5 kg/cm²}
Function
• The junction block has 10 pressure switches, which check
the operating condition of each actuator by the PPC pres-
sure and transmit it to the governor/pump controller.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-159

3. Pump pressure sensor
1. Sensor
2. Connector
Function
• The pump pressure sensor is installed to the inlet circuit of
the control valve. It converts the pump discharge pressure
into a voltage and transmits it to the governor/pump control-
ler.
Operation
• The oil pressure applied from the pressure intake part press-
es the diaphragm of the oil pressure sensor, the diaphragm
is deformed.
SJP08774
• The gauge layer facing the diaphragm measures the defor-
mation of the diaphragm by the change of its resistance, OR
then converts the change of the resistance into a voltage
and transmits it to the amplifier (voltage amplifier). 08930
• The amplifier amplifies the received voltage and transmits it
to the governor/pump controller.
• Relationship between pressure P (MPa {kg/cm²}) and output

voltage (V) is as follows.
V = 0.08 [0.008] x P + 0.5
10-160 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Machine monitor system
Machine monitor system
SJP08775
OR
08931
• The monitor system monitors the condition of the machine

with sensors installed on various parts of the machine. It
processes and immediately displays the obtained informa-
tion on the panel notifying the operator of the condition of
the machine.
The panel is roughly divided as follows.
a. Monitor section to output alarms when the machine has

troubles
b. Gauge section to display the condition constantly (Cool-

ant temperature, hydraulic oil temperature, fuel level,
etc.)
• The monitor panel also has various mode selector switches

and functions to operate the machine control system.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-161

Machine monitor system STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Monitor panel
Outline
• The monitor panel has the functions to display various items
and the functions to select modes and electric parts.
The monitor panel has a CPU (Central Processing Unit) in it
to process, display, and output the information.
The monitor display unit consists of LCD (Liquid Crystal Dis-
play). The switches are flat sheet switches.
10-162 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

CN1 CN2 CN3

Pin Signal name Input/ Pin Signal name Input/ Pin Signal name Input/
No. Out- No. Out- No.
Out-
put put
1 Key ON (Battery) Input 1 Input 1 Input
2 Key ON (Battery) Input 2 Fuel level Input 2 Input
3 Washer Out- 3 Coolant level Input 3 Input
4 Key SW (C) Input 4 Wiper switch (HI) Input 4 Input

5 Wiper (W) Input 5 Air cleaner clogging Input 5 Input
6 GND - 6 NC Input 6 Input
7 GND Input 7 Serial CTS signal Input
8 VB+ (24V) Input 7 Wiper switch (INT) Input 8 Serial RTS signal Input
9 Wiper (+) Out- 8 Engine oil level Input 9 Serial TXD signal Input/
Out-
10 Wiper (-) Input 9 N/W signal Input/
put
Out-
11 10 Serial RXD signal Input/
put
Out-
12 Wiper P Input 10 N/W signal Input/
put
Out-
11 Boot switch Input
put
11 Charge level Input 12 Input
12 Hydraulic-oil temp Input 13 GND -
13 GND (Analog) Input 14 CAN (Shield) Input
14 Starter cut relay output Input 15 CAN (+) Input
15 Window limit switch Input 16 CAN(-) Input
16 Washer switch Input
17 Swing Lock Input
18 Pre-heating Input
19 Light switch input Input
20 N/W GND -
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-163

Monitor control, display portion
MONITOR PORTION 3 2 1 7
8
19 6
11
4 9 12 10 5
13 14
16
15
18
17
10
10
1. Hour meter / Clock 11. Suspension lock (Manual) / Suspension lock

2. Working mode (Auto)
3. Travel modes 12. Parking brake
4. Travel direction 13. Radiator level caution
5. Auto-deceleration 14. Engine oil level caution
6. Engine water temperature gauge 15. Battery charge caution
7. Hydraulic oil temperature gauge 16. Air filter caution
8. Fuel gauge 17. Engine oil pressure caution
9. Pre heating / One touch power up (Power max) / 18. Service interval warning
Upper structure position 19. Overload caution
10. Swing lock / PPC lock
10-164 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Monitor items and display

Item Symbol Display item Display method
No.
Service meter Lights up when service meter is working,
indicator When service meter is
engine not running and ignition is on.
1.
Clock Other than above, clock is shown
Displays set mode in top left hand corner of monitor as shown in diagram below.
2. Working mode
Displays set speed in top right hand corner of monitor.

CR=Creep
Lo=Low speed
Hi=High speed
At=Automatic
3. Travel speed
4. Travel Directions Displays the travel direction set by the 3 way switch on the right hand wrist control lever.
5. Auto-deceleration ON ⇔ OFF Displays actuation status
Engine water tem- See chapter 10 STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION "Monitor gauge displays" on page 10-
6.
perature gauge 166.
Hydraulic oil tem-

7.
perature gauge
See chapter 10 STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION "Monitor gauge displays" on page 10-
166.
8. Fuel gauge
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-165

Monitor gauge displays
B4 B3 B2 B1 C3 C2 C1
A1
A2
A3
A4 C6
A5
A6
B5 B6 C4 C5
Gauge Range Temperature, volume Indicator Buzzer sound
Engine water tempera- A1 105 Red Yes

ture (°C)
A2 102 Red No
A3 100 Green No
A4 80 Green No
A5 60 Green No
A6 30 White No
Hydraulic oil tempera- B1 105 Red Yes

ture (°C)
B2 102 Red No
B3 100 Green No
B4 80 Green No
B5 40 Green No
B6 20 White No
Fuel level (l) C1 325 Green No
C2 270 Green No
C3 216 Green No
C4 108 Green No
C5 78 Green No
C6 48 Red No
10-166 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Continuous set time Pre heating monitor status
Up to 30 sec. ON
Pre-heating 1
From 30 sec. to 40 sec. Flashes
More than 40 sec. OFF
Power Max. switch status Power max. monitor status
Lights up but goes out after approx.

Being pressed
9. Power Max. 9 sec. when kept pressed 2
Not being pressed Flashes
Upper structure When the upper structure is correctly positioned facing forward this display is
3
position constant. If the position is slightly off this display flashes
Swing lock switch Swing lock monitor
OFF OFF
Swing lock 2
ON ON
10.
PPC lock When PPC lock switches in the ON position this display is ON. 1
When displayed:
Automatic sus-
Travel pedal operated - suspension lock OFF
pension lock
Travel pedal not operated - suspension lock ON
11.
Manual suspen- When displayed:

sion lock Suspension lock ON
When displayed: Park brake ON

12.
P Parking brake
When not displayed: Park brake OFF
Checks before starting (caution lamps all light up), when mainte-
nance interval is exceeded.
If the checks before starting or maintenance interval is exceeded
items light up, the display of the hydraulic oil temperature gauge
and the hydraulic oil temperature display are stopped, and the
following cautions are displayed.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-167

Item Symbol Display item Check before When engine is When engine is running
No. starting item stopped
Lights up when abnor- When abnormal, lights

13. Radiator water level Yes
mal up and buzzer sounds
Lights up when
14. Engine oil level Yes --
abnormal
Lights up when abnor-

15. Battery charge Yes --
mal
Lights up when
16. Air filter blocked Yes --
abnormal
When abnormal, lights

17. Engine oil pressure Yes --
up and buzzer sounds
Lights up when maintenance is due. Lights up for

18. Service interval No
only 30 sec. after key is turned ON, then goes out.
When in L mode:
19. Overload caution Yes
Lights up when abnormal and buzzer sounds
The problems that have occurred are displayed in order from the
left.
When the above cautions are displayed, if the hydraulic oil tem-
perature is high or low, only the symbol is displayed.
Condition of hydraulic oil Colour of symbol
Low temperature (below B6 or equivalent) Black on white background
Normal (B6 - B2) No display
High temperature (below B2) White on red letters
10-168 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Keypad layout
17 18
16 19
15
14
13
12
10 11
1. Working mode select 11. Suspension lock

2. Creep speed 12. Accept key
3. High/low speed select 13. Scroll down
4. Control lever lock 14. Scroll up
5. Menu select key 15. Undo key
6. Service menu 16. Rear left outrigger/blade
7. Engine auto deceleration 17. Front left outrigger/blade
8. Buzzer cancel 18. Front right outrigger
9. Brightness adjust 19. Rear right outrigger
10. Suspension auto lock
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-169

1. Working mode selector switch (basic switch)

This switch (1) is used to set the power and movement of the
work equipment.
Operations can be carried out more easily by selecting the mode
to match the type of operation.
A mode:
For heavy-load operations Monitor display
portion
E mode:
For operations with emphasis on fuel economy
L mode:
For fine-control operations and lifting
B mode:
For breaker operations
• When the engine is started, the working mode is set auto- Monitor display portion
matically to A mode. When the switch is pressed, the sys-
tem will scroll through each mode in turn. The display on the
monitor display portion changes for each mode.
• If you require a default setting other than ’A mode’ please

consult your Komatsu distributor or dealership to have the
setting amended.
NOTE
2 seconds
When the mode selector switch is pressed, the mode is displayed
in the centre of the monitor display, and the screen returns to the
normal screen after 2 seconds. (The diagram on the right is an
example of the display for the A mode.)
When using the breaker, do not use A mode. There is dan-

ger that the breaker may be damaged.
10-170 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

2. Creep speed selector switch

This switch (2) is used to set the travel mode to creep.
Display portion
CR lights up:
Creep mode travel (0-2.5kph).
To cancel creep speed, press Hi/Lo switch (3).
NOTE
When creep speed is selected the mode is displayed in the centre
of the screen for 2 seconds before returning to the normal screen
display.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-171

3. High/low speed selector switch

This switch (3) is used to set the travel speed in 3 stages.
Display portion
Lo lights up: Low-mode travel
Hi lights up: Hi-mode travel
AT lights up: Auto mode travel
When the engine is started, the speed is automatically set to the

last value before engine was stopped. Monitor display portion
Each time that the switch is pressed, the display changes
Lo→Hi→At→Lo in turn.
When travelling in auto mode (AT), if more travel torque is need-
ed, such as when travelling on soft ground or on slopes, the
speed automatically switches to low speed (Lo), so there is no
need to operate the switch.
• When loading or unloading from a trailer, always travel at

low speed. Never operate the travel speed selector switch
during the loading or unloading operation. 2 seconds
NOTE
Each time that the travel speed selector switch is operated, the
mode is displayed in the centre of the monitor display, and the
screen returns to the normal screen after 2 seconds.
4. Control lever lock switch

Depressing control lever lock switch will stop lever functionality.
Lever lock switch must be engaged when machine travels on
highway to prevent accidental use of work equipment.
The display will illuminate on the monitor when active.
10-172 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

5. Menu select switch

1. This switch (5) is used to select the attachment hydraulic
flow setting in each of the working modes P, E, and B.
14
13
12
2. When the working mode is P or E
3. Press select switch (5) and the normal screen on the moni-
tor display changes to the screen shown in the diagram on
the right.
4. Select 01 from the screen and the monitor display changes

to the flow setting screen shown on the right (Full flow). By
pressing down switch (13) the flow can be reduced.
OR
Select 02 from screen and the monitor display changes to

the flow setting on the right. Press up switch (14) or down
switch (13) to adjust to the desired flow.
5. After completing the flow setting, press input confirmation

switch (12).
The monitor display will return to the normal screen.
The flow can be adjusted for the attachment installed.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-173

• When the working mode is B mode
1. Press menu select switch (5) and the normal screen on the
monitor display changes to the screen shown in the diagram
on the right.
2. Select 01 from screen and the monitor display changes to

the flow setting screen shown on the right.
3. Press up switch (14) or down switch (13) to adjust to the de-

sired flow.

switch (12).
5. With the operation in Step 3, the flow setting screen chang-

es to the fine flow adjustment screen shown in the diagram
on the right.
6. Press up switch (14) or down switch (13) to adjust to the de-

sired flow.

switch (12).
10-174 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

6. Service menu switch

• This switch (6) is used to check the time remaining to main-
tenance.
• When this switch (6) is pressed, the screen on the monitor

display changes to the maintenance screen shown in the di-
agram below right.
The time remaining to maintenance is indicated by the col-
our of each monitor display. After confirming the mainte-
nance time, carry out the maintenance.
White display:
More than 30 hours remaining to maintenance
Yellow display:
Less than 30 hours remaining to maintenance
Red display:
Maintenance time has already passed
NOTE
Monitor display portion
• If the monitor display changes to the maintenance
warning screen when the engine is started or when the
machine is being operated, stop operations immediate-
ly. When this happens, the monitor corresponding to
the maintenance warning screen will light up red.
• Press switch (6) to display the maintenance screen and

check that there is no abnormality in any other monitor.
• If another monitor is lit up red on the maintenance

screen, carry out maintenance for that item also.
• The maintenance display items are as follows.
Monitor Default set

Maintenance item
No. screen (H)
01 Change engine oil 500
02 Replace engine oil filter 500
03 Replace fuel filter 500
04 Replace hydraulic oil filter 1000
05 Replace hydraulic tank breather 500
07 Check damper case oil level, add oil 1000
09 Change swing machinery case oil 1000
10 Change hydraulic oil 5000
12 Change transmission oil 1000
15 Change axle oil 1000
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-175

If it is desired to change the setting for the maintenance interval,

please contact your Komatsu distributor.
• The method of checking the time remaining to maintenance

is as follows.
1. Look at the maintenance screen, press up switch (14) or

down switch (13) on the monitor switch portion, until re- 15
quired item is highlighted.
14
(The colour of the monitor for the selected item is inverted to
black)
13
It is possible to enter the number of the item from the key
pad (i.e. enter 12 for transmission oil) 12
2. After highlighting the monitor item, press input confirmation
switch (12). The display screen will switch to the time re-
maining to maintenance.
(Press back switch (15) to return to the previous screen.)
3. Check the time remaining to maintenance.
(a): Time remaining to maintenance

a
(b): Default setting for maintenance interval
When only checking the time remaining to maintenance,

press back switch (15) twice. b
The screen will return to the normal operation monitor

screen.
When cancelling the time remaining to maintenance and re-

turning to the default time setting, press input confirmation
switch (12). The screen will switch to the default setting
screen.
4. After checking the time on the default setting screen, press

input confirmation switch (12).
The screen will return to the maintenance screen.
(Press back switch (15) to return to the previous screen.)
10-176 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

7. Auto-deceleration switch
When this auto-deceleration switch (7) is depressed, the auto- Monitor display portion
deceleration is actuated. If the control levers and foot pedals are
in the neutral position, the engine speed is automatically low-
ered to reduce fuel consumption.
Monitor display ON: Auto-deceleration actuated.
Monitor display OFF: Auto-deceleration cancelled.
When the auto-deceleration switch is pressed and the auto-de-

celeration is actuated, the mode is displayed in the centre of the Monitor indicator
monitor display, and the screen returns to the normal screen af-
ter 2 seconds.
Monitor display portion
2 seconds
8. Buzzer cancel switch

This is used to stop the alarm buzzer when it has sounded to
warn of some abnormality that has occurred whilst the machine
is operating.
9. Contrast adjustment switch

When the contrast adjustment switch (9) is depressed this
brings up the adjustment menu.
See chapter 10 STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION "Adjustment

screens" on page 10-180.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-177

10. Automatic suspension lock switch

Release the front axle suspension lock, using switch.
Press switch (10) for Front axle suspension ‘auto’ mode i.e.
when travel pedal is depressed, front axle suspension travels
freely and when travel pedal is not depressed, front axle suspen-
sion is locked, as long as machine is stationary. To disengage
press (10) again. 10
The auto suspension lock indicator will illuminate when automat-

ic suspension lock is selected.
Take care when using undercarriage attachments to stabi-

lize the machine, and suspension lock simultaneously, as
locked front axle may suddenly become free.
NOTE
Permanent and automatic suspension lock cannot be active at
the same time. Each mode can be turned on and off by their indi-
vidual switches.
11. Permanent suspension lock switch

Press switch (11) in order to engage permanent front axle lock.
Front axle will be fixed in place when engaged, the permanent
suspension lock indicator will illuminate. To disengage lock,
press switch (11) again.
When front axle is locked it is not possible to travel in high. If

high speed travel is selected, axle will not lock. 11
12. Input confirmation switch

Press this switch (12) to confirm the selected mode when in the
maintenance mode, brightness/contrast adjustment mode, or
select mode.
12
10-178 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

13. Scroll down
14. Scroll up
14
13
15. Undo switch

Pressing switch (15) whilst in the monitor menu screens, will re-
turn you back to the previous screen displayed. 15
16. Rear left outrigger/blade switch

This switch enables selection of rear left outrigger or rear blade
Light illuminates when active. 17 18
17. Front left outrigger/blade switch 16 19

This switch enables selection of front left outrigger / front blade.
Light illuminates when active.
18. Front right outrigger switch

Allows operation of front right outrigger only.
Light on switch illuminates when activated.
19. Rear right outrigger switch

Allows operation of rear right outrigger.
Light on switch illuminates when activated.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-179

Liquid crystal monitor adjustment switch

Press switch (9) to adjust the brightness and contrast of the
monitor display screen.
Adjustment screens B C
1. When contrast adjustment switch (9) is pressed, the monitor
A
display screen changes to the screen shown in the diagram
on the right. D
A Contrast adjust
B Brightness adjust
C Clock adjust
D Background adjust
(A). Adjusting contrast

2. Use the brightness/contrast screen and press up switch (14)
or down switch (13) to select the contrast monitor.
15
(The selected monitor is inverted to black.)
3. When the screen changes to the contrast adjustment 14

screen, press up switch (14) or down switch (13) to adjust
the contrast.
13
12
4. After completing adjustment of the contrast, press input con-

firmation switch (12). This will store the new setting and re-
turn you to the adjustment menu.
As normal, within any menu, press switch (15) to return to
the previous screen at any time.
10-180 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

(B). Adjusting brightness

1. Use the adjustment screen and press up switch (14) or 15
down switch (13) to select the brightness monitor.
(The selected monitor is inverted to black.) 14
13
12
2. When the screen changes to the brightness adjustment

screen, press up switch (14) or down switch (13) to adjust
the brightness.
3. After completing adjustment of the brightness, press input

confirmation switch (12). This will return you to the above
menu and store the new setting.
(C). Adjusting the clock

down switch (13) to select the clock monitor.
(The selected monitor is inverted to black.)
14
2. When the screen changes to the clock adjustment screen,
press up switch (14) or down switch (13) to adjust the year, 13
to move to the date press input confirmation switch (12), the
order in which the cursor moves is shown below: 12
Year Month Day Hour Minute
3. After completing adjustment of the clock, press input confir-
mation switch (12). This will return you to the above menu
and store the new setting.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-181

D). Adjusting background colour

down switch (13) to select the background colour monitor.
(The selected monitor is inverted to black.) 14
2. When the screen changes to the background colour adjust-
ment screen, press up switch (14) or down switch (13) to ad- 13
just the colour day time and for night time, the different
combinations of colours are shown below: Day time/Night 12
time.
Light blue/Dark blue Dark blue/Light blue
3. After completing adjustment of the background colour, press

input confirmation switch (12). This will return you to the
above menu and store the new setting.
10-182 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Password function
• If the password function is active, the engine will not start
unless the password is input correctly when starting.
• When setting this function or when changing the password,

it is necessary to go from the normal screen to the setup
screen and input the pass word.
• This becomes possible 10 minutes after the starting switch

is turned ON and the monitor screen has changed to the
normal screen.
Method of setting, changing password

1. Turn Starter key switch to ’on’ position (wait 10 minutes).
Press and hold down switch (13). Using the 10 digit key pad,
input the following number sequence: 7->2->9->7->2->9
14
If input correctly, the display screen will change to an 8 digit
numerical input screen.
13
12
13
2. On the input screen, use the 10-key pad to input an 8-digit

number [19210513]. When the final digit [number 3] is input,
the screen will change to the Valid/Invalid screen for the
password function.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-183

3. Press control switch (14) or (13) to set to Valid/Invalid.

Valid
The diagram on the right shows the screen when control
switch (13) is pressed and the screen is set to [Valid].
Invalid
If [Invalid] is selected and input confirmation switch (12) is

pressed, the password function will be made invalid, and the
screen will return to the normal screen.
If [Valid] is selected and input confirmation switch (12) is

pressed, the password function will be made valid, and the
screen will change to the screen for inputting the 4-digit
number.
4. Input a 4-digit number on the input screen (the lock and key
symbol are displayed), then press input confirmation switch
(12).
When the input confirmation switch is pressed, you will be
requested to input the same 4-digit number again, so input
the same 4-digit number, then press input confirmation
switch (12) to confirm the password.
Numerals 1 and 2 are displayed at the top right corner of the

screen to distinguish between the 1st input screen and the
2nd input screen.
When the password is confirmed, the screen will return to

the normal screen.
NOTE
If the number input the second time is different from the number
input the first time, the password will not be confirmed and the
screen will return to the first screen, so input the same 4-digit
password 2 times in succession.
10-184 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Service meter check function

• When the starting switch is in the OFF position, press return 15
switch (15) and control switch (14) of the monitor at the
same time, and the service meter will be shown on the dis- 14
play.
• This display is shown only while the two switches are being
pressed. When the switches are released, the display goes
out.
• It takes 3 - 5 seconds after the switches are pressed for the

service meter display to appear.
Display LCD check function

• On the password input screen or on the normal screen, if
monitor return switch (15) and working mode (A) switch are
kept pressed at the same time, all the LCD display will light
up and the whole screen will become white, so the display
can be checked.
• If any part of the display is black, the LCD has been dam-
aged.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-185

Overload warning device STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Overload warning device
Outline
Function
• This device is installed to warn the operator when the ma-
chine lifts an excessive weight.
Structure
• When an excessive weight is lifted, the oil pressure increas-
es at the bottom side of the boom cylinders. When this hap-
pens, a pressure switch is activated which lights the monitor
lamp to warn the operator. When the monitor lamp lights, im-
mediately lower the weight to the ground or bring the arm
closer in the operator to prevent the machine from tipping
over.
NOTE
The overload caution system can only be activated when the lift-
ing mode (L) is activated on the monitor panel.
Monitor
Lifting mode ‘L’

(Must be selected)
Overload warning
monitor lamp
10-186 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Sensor
Sensor
• The signals from the sensors are input directly to the engine
controller and pump controller monitor.
The contact type sensors are always connected at one end
to the chassis GND
Sensor name Type of sensor When normal When abnormal Input controller
Coolant level Contact ON (Closed) OFF (Open) Monitor
Engine oil level Contact ON (Closed) OFF (Open)
Engine oil pressure Contact ON (Open) OFF (Closed) Engine

controller
Coolant temperature Resistance — —
Fuel level Resistance — — Monitor
Air cleaner clogging Contact OFF (Closed) ON (Open)
Hydraulic oil temperature Resistance — —
Main pump oil pressure Analog — — Pump controller
Overload caution — — Monitor
Engine speed Resistance — — Engine

controller
Transmission speed — —
Swing proximity Inductive — — Monitor
Travel PPC Analog — — Controller
PPC pressure Contact OFF (Open) ON (Closed)
Park brake pressure
Brake accumulator low pressure
Brake stop light
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-187

Sensor STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Coolant temperature sensor
1. Sensor
2. O-ring
3. Connector
Oil pressure switch
1. Connector
2. Sensor
3. O-ring
10-188 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Rotation sensor
1. Connector
2. Sensor
3. O-ring
Boost pressure and temperature sensor
1. Connector
2. Sensor
3. O-ring
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-189

WIF (Water-In-Fuel detection) sensor
1. Connector
2. Tube
3. Sensor
4. O-ring
Engine oil level sensor
1. Connector
2. Bracket
3. Float
4. Switch
10-190 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Coolant level sensor
1. Sub-tank
2. Float
3. Sensor
4. Connector
Coolant temperature sensor
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-191

Hydraulic oil temperature sensor
Structure of
circuit
1. Thermistor
2. Body
3. Tube
4. Tube
5. Wire
6. Connector
Fuel level sensor
1. Float
2. Connector
3. Cover
4. Variable resistor
10-192 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Air cleaner clogging sensor
Structure of
circuit
Overload Caution sensor
Swing proximity sensor
Travel PPC sensor
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-193

PPC pressure sensor
Park brake pressure sensor
Brake accumulator low pressure sensor
Brake stop light sensor
10-194 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD 1st attachment circuit hydraulic performance (main valve bypassed)
1st attachment circuit hydraulic performance (main valve

bypassed)
The performance of the hydraulic system when operating the 1st

attachment circuit is shown below.
The pressure Pa is that which is observed at the inlet to the at-

tachment.
The pressure Pb is the pressure observed in the breaker low

back pressure return line (back pressure) measured at the at-
tachment outlet connection.
The figures below show the pressures at points A and B for var-
ying flow through the attachment in A mode, E mode & B mode.
NOTE
The data given here is intended as a guide only. This is because
the data is typical for an excavator of this type therefore there will
be variation from one machine to another.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-195

Travel circuit STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Travel circuit
10-196 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Travel circuit
Operational and control features

Operational and Control features (1)
• Machine speed relates to hydraulic motor speed
• Hydraulic motor speed depends upon the flow of hydraulic

oil, which depends upon size of the aperture created by the
position of the spool in the control valve.
• The position of the spool in the main control valve relates to

the pressure level created by the pilot pressure control valve
(PPC). This takes the form of a pressure regulating valve
(pressure reducer) operated by the travel pedal. The further
the pedal is pressed the higher the pilot pressure is generat-
ed, resulting in a greater level of proportional spool move-
ment and corresponding oil flow rate to the motor.
• Hydraulic motor direction is controlled by the position of the

travel ’forward and reverse’ solenoid valve which in turn di-
rects the pilot signal from the foot pedal control valve to the
pilot section of the main control valve travel spool. The foot
pedal control valve receives its pressure supply from the
’travel / neutral solenoid valve’.
• Initiation of the ’forward and reverse’ solenoid is via the

switch on the front face of the RH control lever. This is inter-
locked with the travel / neutral solenoid valve.
• For a fixed oil flow the speed of the machine is governed by

the level of motor displacement. Higher the displacement,
the lower the speed and visa versa.
• The level of motor torque per unit of pressure is also a prod-

uct of displacement.
• Motor displacement and the corresponding speed and

torque characteristics are therefore affected by the following
operations:
• Operators Input via travel mode switch

Selection of creep mode by the operation of the travel creep
solenoid. This valve sets the travel motor displacement to
maximum, this in turn represents the lowest speed per litre
of flow and the highest torque per unit of pressure. This rep-
resents a maximum travel speed of 2.5 kph.
• Torque Maximisation
When travel / reverse solenoid is selected the respective
pressure switch in the line initiates the 2 stage relief valve
solenoid valve. This valve directs a pilot signal into connec-
tion Px1 and Px2. This action raises the pressure of the 2
stage relief valves in the main direction control valve to 385
bar. This increase in pressure raises the torque potential of
the hydraulic motor.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-197

Operator’s Input via travel mode switch

• In Hi mode the controller automatically defaults the trans-
mission clutch control solenoid valve in to the off condition.
This gives a travel speed range of 0 - 35 kph.
• In Lo mode the controller energises the transmission clutch

control solenoid valve in the on position. This gives a travel
speed of 0 - 9 kph.
NOTE
Signal on Hi mode enables the drive through to Lo mode.
In both of these operating modes, when the motor pressure

reaches 280 bar this represents the cracking pressure of the
torque / speed control valve.
The valve has a switching range of 36 bar. This gives a pro-

gressive increase in motor displacement, resulting in a con-
trolled increased rate of traction force and corresponding
reduction in motor speed per litre of fluid supplied.
NOTE
OVERRUN PROTECTION. This is dealt with through the ac-
tion of the counterbalance spool in the motor control
block.When the machine begins to overrun the travel motor
momentarily changes its operational mode and becomes a
pump. The change in pressure within the supply and return
line causes the normal pilot signal on the counterbalance
valve to fall, thereby allowing it to slightly close. This action
causes the pressure to rise on the motor return side thereby
providing a braking force and controlled vehicle movement.
• To prevent cavitation of the travel motor a 2 stage back -

pressure valve is incorporated in the main return line. This
valve is part of the main control valve. (Set at 2.5 bar. This is
raised to 12.5 bar during travel.)
• Operation of this valve is initiated via the speed control of

the machine.
• If the travel speed exceeds 1.5 kph the back pressure valve
is supplied with a signal pressure of 36 bar. This pressure
based upon the applied area of the pilot creates a return line
back pressure of 12.5 bar. The normal pressure is 2.5 bar.
10-198 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

1. Travel motor
1. Shown in the neutral position
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-199

2. Flow path representing: Low Torque - High speed with

counterbalance taking up an active position. (Default for
Travel)
The counterbalance valve (3) is activated which allows a
constant flow of oil around the circuit. From port A
through to port B the motor displacement is at minimum
pending maximum speed. the speed of the machine is
governed by the level of motor displacement.
10-200 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

3. Introduction of Creep control: High Torque - Low Speed.

It can be seen from the diagram that the spool moves
across on the torque speed control valve (2) which di-
rects the flow to move the servo and supply the motor
displacement to maximum giving creep speed of 2.5kph
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-201

4. Opposing load torque on motor increases causing

Torque / Speed control valve to react.
Diagram showing Hi speed with minimum displacement
10-202 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

a. Motor displacement is increased progressively towards

maximum: High Torque - Low Speed mode. During trav-
el the travel motor will engage low speed if the spool (2)
moves across which will move the motor displacement
towards maximum providing low speed
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-203

5. Motor begins to overrun and pressure falls on supply

side: This causes counterbalance valve to begin to
close and throttle return flow from motor.
10-204 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

6. Motor begins to overrun and pressure falls on supply

side: This causes counterbalance valve to begin to
close and throttle return to flow motor. Pressure line in
return line rises providing a braking torque.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-205

7. Travel motor performance

a. High Torque - Low Speed
• Represents motor maximum displacement angle usually

35o, Fr represents the radial force developed by the hydrau-
lic oil pressure which in turn develops the corresponding
driving or braking torque.
• Where a high starting torque is required the operation of the

travel creep solenoid valve will move the motor into this
mode via the torque speed control valve at the motor.
• The same action will occur automatically when the motor

load pressure due to the opposing torque reaches the set-
ting of the torque speed control valve.
• In an overrun situation the rise in pressure in the motor re-

turn line as the counterbalance valve closes will also in-
crease and provide an effective braking torque.
b. Low Torque - High Speed
• represents motor minimum displacement angle usually

about 5 to 7o. Fr represents the radial force developed by
the hydraulic oil pressure which in turn develops the corre-
sponding driving or braking torque.
Motor size:
47 - 140cm3 / rev for machines rated at 35 kph.
10-206 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

2. Travel pedal
1. Travel pedal schematic.
2. Travel Pedal: Located to the extreme right of the steering

column on the floor of the Operators cab, a proportional
valve when activated controls the flow of oil to the travel mo-
tor.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-207

3. Forward/neutral/reverse switch (F-N-R)
3 F
N
R
1. F-N-R Switch Schematic.
2. F-N-R Switch: Located on the front of the RH control lever,

this rocker type switch determines whether the travel direc-
tion is forward, reverse or neutral.
NOTE
Machine cannot be started unless the switch is in the neutral po-
sition.
The signals of this switch go to the controller and the controller

operates the travel Neutral solenoid and the travel Forward/Re-
verse solenoid.
F/N/R Status Table
FNR Signal
Status
F N R
0 0 0 N (Error)
0 0 1 N
0 1 0 R
0 1 1 N (Error)
1 0 0 F
1 0 1 N (Error)
1 1 0 N (Error)
1 1 0 N (Error)
10-208 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

4. Forward/reverse travel solenoid
1. Forward/reverse travel solenoid schematic
2. Forward / Reverse Travel Solenoid: Located on the 4-stage

solenoid block in the service compartment at the rear of the
operators cab. This device controls the travel motor direc-
tion (forward or reverse) by a signal from the F-N-R switch.
Solenoid energised ~Forward or Reverse. Travel is en-

gaged, this is interlocked with the travel neutral solenoid. If
travel Reverse is selected, controller drives this valve and
travel PPC pressure spool is reversed.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-209

5. Travel/neutral solenoid
1. Travel neutral solenoid schematic
Travel Neutral
2. Travel Neutral Solenoid: Located on the 7-stage solenoid

manifold in the service compartment at the rear of the opera-
tors cab. This device interlocks with the forward / reverse
solenoid to give supply pressure to the foot pedal control
valve.
Solenoid active - PPC pressure to foot valve
Solenoid inactive - No pressure to foot valve
If the travel neutral signal is selected the controller doesn’t
drive this solenoid so no PPC travel.
10-210 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

6. Travel creep solenoid
1. Travel creep solenoid schematic
Travel Creep
2. Travel Creep Solenoid: Located on the 7-stage solenoid

tors cab. When this device is activated ’CREEP’ mode is se-
lected and travel speed, sends PPC pressure to port X on
travel motor ensure travel motor stays at maximum displace-
ment.
Creep Solenoid Travel Mode Selected Travel Speed (kph)

On Creep 0 - 1.5
Off Low 0-9
Off High 0 - 35
Off Auto 0 - 35
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-211

7. 2-stage relief solenoid
1. 2-stage relief solenoid schematic
2 Stage Relief
10-212 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

2. 2-stage relief solenoid: Located on the 7-stage solenoid

tors cab. This device is activated when the forward / reverse
travel solenoid is selected.
• The relief pressure in the normal working mode is 34.8 Mpa

(355 kg/cm2). If the 2-stage relief function is turned on, how-
ever, the relief pressure rises to about 37.2 MPa
(380 kg/cm2).
By this operation, the hydraulic force is increased further
• Operating condition for turning on 2-stage relief function.
Condition Relief pressure
During travel 34.8 Mpa

When swing lock switch is turned on (355 kg/cm2)
When boom is lowered
When one-touch power maximizing function is 37.2 Mpa

turned on.
(380 kg/cm2)
When L mode is operated
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-213

8. Hi/Lo solenoid valve
1. Hi/Lo solenoid valve schematic
Hi / Lo Solenoid valve
2. Hi/Lo solenoid valve: Located on the 2-stage solenoid block

in the service compartment at the rear of the operators cab.
This device is activated when ‘HI or ’LO’ speeds are select-
ed.
Solenoid On Lo 0 - 9 kph
Solenoid Off Hi 0 - 35 kph *
*: To max speed
10-214 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

9. Back pressure solenoid
1. Back pressure solenoid schematic
Back Pressure Solenoid valve
2. 2-Stage Back Pressure Solenoid: Located on the solenoid

block in the service compartment at the rear of the operators
cab. This device enables the back pressure valve to supply
pressure thus preventing cavitation to the travel motor.: To
max speed
Solenoid Off 12.5 Bar

Solenoid On 2.5 Bar
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-215

Steering system STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Steering system
Operating principles
When the steering wheel is turned the demand for fluid at port
’P’ of the orbitrol valve causes the CF signal level to fall. The pri-
ority spool is now forced upwards by the spring creating a flow
path into the CF port. Turning the steering wheel also connects
the ’P’ port of the orbitrol valve to the service ’A’ and the service
port ’B’ to tank.
Simultaneously the service port pressure is connected to the pri-

ority valve LS connection on its spring side. This action causes
the priority spool to take up a modulation condition balanced by
the pilot pressure ’’pp’’ from the CF line on one side and the
service port pressure and spring on the opposite.
This results in a pressure drop across the metering valve section

of the orbit unit equal to the priority spool spring rating.
Therefore ∆P = pp - LS
= P1 - P2
At this stage the priority valve becomes a pressure compensator

for the steering unit forming a pressure compensated flow con-
trol. This ensures a constant rate of steering irrespective of
changes in steering cylinder forces.
Dynamic Steering
In the static steering unit, the LS connection is drained to tank
via the spool / sleeveset when the steering unit is in the neutral
position.
In the dynamic steering unit the drain connection has been

made active. The spool of the dynamic priority valve has a port
drilled connecting the CF port to the LS port. During normal run-
ning conditions there is approximately 0.5 lpm flowing.
Therefore when the spool in the priority valve is actuated during

steering the spring chamber is filled with oil via the spool drilling.
In the static LS system the LS chamber is filled with oil from the
LS port in the steering unit.
2 - stage principle
Any valve operation in which the main stage is controlled by a pi-
lot stage and involves the application of a control orifice to create
a pressure differential between the ends of the main stage to off-
set the effect of the main stage spring is operating on the 2-
stage principle.
This applies to pressure control valves but also that of flow con-
trol devices incorporating pilot relief valve control.
10-216 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Condition 1
Condition 2
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-217

Condition 3
Condition 4
10-218 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Condition 5
Condition 6
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-219

OLS priority valve
Load sensing steering unit
10-220 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Technical data
Displacement Small gear wheel set 60, 70, 80, 100, 125 cc/rev.
Large gear wheel set 60, 70, 80, 100, 125, 160, 200, 315 cc/rev.
OSPD 80/160 Small gear set 80 cc/rev.
Large gear set 160 cc/rev.
Valve functions Pilot pressure relief valve

Shock valves
Suction valves
Check valves in LS-connection
Check valves in P connection
Pressure Max. pressure in P - port 215 bar

Max. pressure in T - port 40 bar
Max. steering pressure 175 bar
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-221

10-222 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-223

10-224 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-225

Service brake and suspension system STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Service brake and suspension system
Braking system
The hydraulic braking system unit contains the following servic-
es.
• Inlet Bypass Valve:

distributing flow to other services when braking demand is
low or not required.
• Accumulators:
for fluid storage providing a number of brake operations
(usually 5 ~ 8 operations depending upon accumulator ca-
pacity)
• Check Valves:
to isolate the inlet supply from the charged accumulators
and isolate individually charged accumulators from each
other, thereby allowing individual brake circuits to be control-
led.
NOTE
Service brakes1 and 2 are individually supplied but simultane-
ously applied.
• Pressure Limiting Valve:

to control the maximum pressure in the accumulators. This
valve provides relief valve protection and diverts the fluid via
its unloaded valve action.
10-226 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Service brake and suspension system
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-227

10-228 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Operation
• Oil from the steering priority valve passes at a controlled
rate to charge the accumulators. The inlet bypass valve is
spring biased into the position shown and hydraulically bal-
anced.
• When the oil pressure in the accumulators reach the crack-

ing pressure of the pressure limiting valve it begins to open.
The valve in this example has a pressure override of 35 bar.
Between 120 and 155 bar the accumulators continue to

charge until the bottom pilot signal on the inlet bypass valve
is diverted to tank, allowing the inlet bypass valve to move
downwards thereby diverting all the incoming flow to the
auxiliary circuit.
If the break pedal is now operated oil at a controlled pres-
sure will be sent to the service brakes, the brake force being
controlled by the pre-loading of the valve by the action of the
pedal.
As the brakes are applied the accumulator volumes and as-
sociated pressure will fall. This action will allow the pressure
limiting valve to gradually close as the pressure falls below
155 bar.
Eventually, the flow path through the valve will close causing
the pilot signal on the bottom of the inlet bypass valve to be
re-established. This in turn will move the inlet bypass in to its
upper most position, closing off the supply to the auxiliary
circuit and charging the accumulators once again.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-229

10-230 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-231

Quick coupler control valve STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Quick coupler control valve
2a
2
1a
1b
1. Pressure regulating valve 2. Solenoid 4. Block

1a. Lock nut 2a. Nut
1b. Adjustment screw 3. Directional control valve
Specification the cylinder will be the set pressure of the

regulating valve(1).
Min set pressure: 1MPa (10.2 kg/cm²)
Max set pressure: 30+/-5 Mpa (306+/-51kg/cm²) • The pressure regulating valve can be adjust-
Flow: 120l/min. ed according to the specification of the cou-
pler. The minimum setting is 1MPa and the
maximum setting is 30+-5MPa.
Operation
1. When solenoid is switched OFF 2. When solenoid is switched ON
• Since the signal from the operation switch • When the switch (Op Cab RHS Console)is on
(Op Cab RHS Console) is off, solenoid (2) is current will flow to the solenoid (2) energising it.
deenergised. For this reason, directional Accordingly, the directional control valve (3) will
control valve (3) is in the default position and move upwards and oil will flow from port P to port
oil will flow from port P to port B. A.
• Oil returning from the quick coupler will flow • Oil returning from the quick coupler will flow from
from port A to port T. port B to port T.
• The setting of the pressure regulating valve The setting of the pressure regulating valve (1) will
(1) will determine the maximum pressure at determine the maximum pressure at port A. When
port B. When the stroke end of the quick the stroke end of the quick coupler is reached the
coupler cylinder is reached the pressure at pressure at the cylinder will be the set pressure of
the regulating valve (1).
10-232 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD Quick coupler control valve
Shematic
P Supply pressure from main valve

T To tank
B Supply to quick coupler – lock and hold direction
B1 Pressure checking port für B line
B2 Spare
A TSupply to quick coupler – unlock direction
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-233

ATT EPC valve assembly STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
ATT EPC valve assembly
11 11
8 16 4 6 10 7 17 9 5
12 14 1 15 13
2 3
1. Valve Manifold
2. Port "P"
3. Port "T"
4. 1 Att EPC Valve
5. 1 Att EPC Valve
6. To Main Valve Port PA8
7. To Main Valve Port PB8
8. 1 Att EPC Valve Connector V24
10. Blanking Plug
11. Mounting Bolts
12. 2 Att EPC Valve
13. 2 Att EPC Valve
14. To Main Valve Port PA9
15. To Main Valve Port PB9
10-234 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD KOMTRAX terminal system
KOMTRAX terminal system
• The KOMTRAX terminal system transmits various kinds of

machine information wirelessly. Persons to operate the KO-
MTRAX can refer to the information at office to provide vari-
ous kinds of services for customers.
• Information transmittable from the KOMTRAX terminal sys-

tem includes the following.
1) Operation map
2) Service meter
3) Position information
4) Error history
and others.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-235

KOMTRAX terminal system STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
KOMTRAX terminal
1. DRC connector connection (40 poles) 3. GPS antenna connection

2. (Do not connect any cable) 4. Film antenna connection

DRC conector
Pin No. Signal name Input/output
1 — —
2 — —
3 — —
4 — —
5 — —
6 CAN shield GND —
7 CAN signal (L) Input/output
8 CAN signal (H) Input/output
9 S-NET shield GND —
10 S-NET signal Input/output
11 — —
12 — —
13 — —
14 — —
15 — —
16 — —
17 — —
18 — —
19 — —
20 Relay output output
21 Input for check Input
22 Input for check Input
23 — —
24 — —
25 — —
*1: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will occur.
10-236 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD KOMTRAX terminal system
• The KOMTRAX terminal obtains various kinds of machine

information from the network signals and input signals in the
machine and transmits them via the wireless communication
antenna. It contains a CPU (Central Processing Unit) and
has wireless communication function and GPS function.
• This terminal has an LED lamp unit and a 7-segment display

lamp unit used for inspection and troubleshooting.
DRC conector
Pin No. Signal name Input/output
26 — —
27 C-terminal input (Hi side) Input
28 R-terminal input Input
29 — —
30 — —
31 — —
32 — —
33 — —
34 — —
35 — —
36 ACC input (analog) Input
37 Power GND —
38 Power GND —
39 Regular power Input
40 Regular power Input
*1: Never connect to NC or malfunctions or failures will occur.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 10-237

KOMTRAX terminal system STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION, MAINTENANCE STANDARD
10-238 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Standard value table for engine related parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
Standard value table for chassis related parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-4
Flow control characteristic of PC valve (STD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-17
Testing and adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-101
Testing and adjusting – Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-301
Testing and adjusting – Troubleshooting when service code "Electrical system" and
failure code "Mechanical system" are indicated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-401
Testing and adjusting – Troubleshooting of electrical system (E-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-701
Testing and adjusting – Troubleshooting of electrical system

(Error checking of items without monitor codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-801
Testing and adjusting – Troubleshooting of hydraulic and mechanical system (H-Mode) . . . . . . . . . 20-901
Note the following when making judgements using the standard value tables for testing, adjusting, or trouble-
shooting.
1. The standard value for a new machine given in the table is the value used when shipping the machine from
the factory and is given for reference. It is used as a guideline for judging the progress of wear after the ma-
chine has been operated, and as a reference value when carrying out repairs.
2. The service limit value given in the tables is the estimated value for the shipped machine based on the re-
sults of various tests. It is used for reference together with the state of repair and the history of operation to
judge if there is a failure.
3. These standard values are not the standards used in dealing with claims.
• When carrying out testing, adjusting, or troubleshooting, park the machine on level ground, insert the
safety pins, and use blocks to prevent the machine from moving.
• When carrying out work together with other workers, always use signals and do not let unauthorized peo-
ple near the machine.
• When checking the water level, always wait for the water to cool down. If the radiator cap is removed
when the water is still hot, the water will spurt out and cause burns.
Be careful not to get caught in the fan, fan belt or other rotating parts.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-1

TESTING AND ADJUSTING
20-2 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Standard value table for engine related parts
Standard value table for engine related parts
Applicable model PW200, 220-7E0
Engine SAA6D107E-1
Standard value for

Item Measurement condition Unit Service limit value
new machine
High idling (Not possible to check in chas-

2,200 ±70 2,200 ±70
sis)
Engine speed rpm
Low idling 1,040 ±50 1,040 ±50
Rated speed 2,000 ±20 2,000 ±20
At sudden acceleration
Bosch Max. 1.2 —
Exhaust gas colour LO idle - HI idle
index
At high idling Max. 1.2 —
Valve clearance Intake valve 0.25 0.152–0.381

mm
(Normal temperature) Exhaust valve 0.51 0.381–0.762
Oil temperature: 40–60ºC MPa Min. 2.4 1.69

Compression pressure
Engine speed: 250 - 280rpm {kg/cm2} {Min. 24.6} {17.2}
(Water temperature: operating range) At kPa Max. 1.0 1.96

Blow-by pressure
rated output {mmH2O} {Max. 100} {200}
•SAE0W30E0S,
Min. 0.29
SAE5W40E0S, High idle
{Min. 3.0}
SAE10W30DH,
Oil pressure kPa (kg/cm²}
SAE15W40DH,
SAE30DH engine oil Min. 0.10
Low idle
•Coolant temperature : Operating range {Min. 1.0}
Oil temperature Whole speed range (inside oil pan) ºC 80–110 120
Fuel injection timing Electronic
Fan belt tension mm 8 Min. 6, Max. 10

Deflection when pressed with finger force
Air conditioner of approx. 58.8 N{6 kg} mm 5–8 5–8
compressor belt tension
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-3

Standard value table for chassis related parts TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Standard value table for chassis related parts

Category
Item Measurement Condition Unit Standard value Permissible value
• Engine water temperature: Within

operation range
• Hydraulic oil temperature: Within op-
2 pumps at relief
eration range 1,940 ±100 1,940 ±100
P mode
• Engine at high idling
• Arm in relief condition
• Swing Lock ‘OFF’
• Engine water temperature: Within
Engine speed
operation range
• Hydraulic oil temperature: Within op-
At 2-pump relief + one touch rpm
eration range
power up 1,900 ±100 1,900 ±100
P mode
• Arm relief + One-touch power max.
switch in ON condition
• Swing Lock ‘OFF’
• Auto-deceleration switch in ON con-
Speed when auto-
dition 1,380 ±100 1,380 ±100
deceleration is operated
• All control levers in NEUTRAL con-
dition
Boom control valve
Arm control valve
Bucket control valve
Spool stroke
Swing control valve

mm 9.5 ±0.5 9.5 ±0.5
Travel control valve
Adjust control valve
(2PBoom only)
Stabiliser control valve
Boom control lever 60.5 ±3.5 60.5 ±3.5
Travel of control
Arm control lever • Engine stopped 60.5 ±3.5 60.5 ±3.5

• At centre of control lever grip
levers
Bucket control lever 60.5 ±3.5 60.5 ±3.5

• Max. reading up to stroke end mm
Swing control lever (excepting lever play in NEUTRAL 60.5 ±3.5 60.5 ±3.5
Travel control pedal position) 9.2 ±0.2 9.2 ±0.2
Play of control lever Max. 3.0 Max. 3.0
• Hydraulic oil temperature: Within op- 17 ±3.9 Max. 24.5
Boom control lever
eration range {1.7 ±0.4} {Max. 2.5}
• Engine at high idling 17 ±3.9 Max. 24.5
Arm control lever • At centre of control lever grip
{1.6 ±0.4} {Max. 2.5}
Operating force of control levers
• At tip in case of pedal

• Max. reading up to stroke end 14 ±2.9 Max. 21.6
Bucket control lever
{1.4 ±0.3} {Max. 2.2}
14 ±2.9 Max. 21.6
Swing control lever
{1.4 ±0.3} {Max. 2.2}
N{kg}
Travel control pedal 55.4 ±5 {5.5 ±0.5} Max. 65 {Max. 6.5}
Brake pedal 340 ±17 {35 ±3.5} Max. 510 {Max. 52.5}
20-4 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Standard value table for chassis related parts
Applicable model PW200,220-7E0 (Std) PW220-7E0 (Opt HD Cwt)

Category
Standard Permissible Standard Permissible

Item Measurement Condition Unit
value value value value
• Hydraulic oil temperature: Within opera-

tion range
Unload • Engine at high idling 2.9 ±0.5 2.9 ±0.5 2.9 ±0.5 2.9 ±0.5
pressure • Working mode: A mode {30 ±5} {30 ±5} {30 ±5} {30 ±5}
• Hydraulic pump output pressure with all
control levers in NEUTRAL position
Boom 34.8 ±1.0 33.3–36.8 34.8 ±1.0 33.3–36.8
Arm tion range {355 ±10} {340–375} {355 ±10} {340–375}
• Engine at high idling 37.3 ±1.0 36.3–39.2 37.3 ±1.0 36.3–39.2
Bucket • Working mode: A mode {380 ±10} {370–400} {380 ±10} {370–400}
• Hydraulic pump output pressure with all
measurement circuits relieved 30.9 ±1.5 28.9–32.9 30.9 ±1.5 {315 28.9–32.9
Swing
• Values inside parenthesis: Hydraulic oil {315 ±15} {295–335} ±15} {295–335}
Travel pressure with one-touch power max. 38.2 ±1.0 37.3–40.2 38.2 ±1.0 37.3–40.2
switch in ON mode (reference only) {390 ±10} {380–410} {390 ±10} {380–410}
Stabiliser
Hydraulic pressure
Control cir- tion range

3.65 ±0.15 3.5–3.8 3.65 ±0.15 3.5–3.8
cuit source • Engine running at high idling
MPa {37.2 ±1.5} {35.7–38.7} {37.2 ±1.5} {37.2–38.7}
pressure • Control circuit pressure setting valve input
{kg/cm²}
(7 station solenoid valve block port P1)
Front Pump
• Roadwheels
• Hydraulic oil tem- raised off ground
perature: • LO travel speed
Within operation • Service brake dis-
range engaged travel
• Engine at high pedal fully de-
idling pressed
LS control • Working mode: Rear Pump 2.2 ±0.1 2.2 ±0.1 2.2 ±0.1 2.2 ±0.1
circuit L mode • Roadwheels on {22 ±1} {22 ±1} {22 ±1} {22 ±1}
• Disconnect the ground.
LS EPC solenoid • Raise boom slowly
CN V22 • Measure pres-
• Hydraulic pump sures during peri-
pressure - LS od where main
pressure pump pressure is
stabilised. (approx.
12~14MPa)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-5

Applicable model PW200,220-7E0 (Std) PW220-7E0 (Opt HD Cwt)

Category

Swing deg. Max. 100 Max. 130 Max. 100 Max. 130
brake angle (mm) (–) (–) (–) (–)
• Hydraulic oil temperature:
Within operation range
• Engine running at high idling
• Working mode: P mode
• Swing circle misalignment amount when
Swing
stopping after one turn
90° 3.0 ±0.3 Max. 3.6 3.0 ±0.3 Max. 3.6
Time taken
to start sec.
swing • Hydraulic oil temperature:
• Engine running at high idling 180
• Working mode: P mode 4.3 ±0.4 Max. 5.1 4.3 ±0.4 Max. 5.1
°
• Time required for passing points 90
and 180 degrees from starting point
20-6 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100


Category
Time taken to
sec. 25.4 ±2.5 Max. 30
swing
• Hydraulic oil temperature: Within operation range

• Time required for 5 more turns after making initial one
turn
Swing
Hydraulic drift 15° mm 0 0

of swing

• Engine stopped
• Keeping upper structure transverse on slope of 15 de-
grees
• Notching a mating mark on inner and outer races of
swing circle
• Mating mark misalignment amount during 5 minutes
Leakage from • Engine running at high idling
l/min. Max. 5 Max. 10
swing motor • Swing lock switch: ON
• Leakage amount for one minute during swing relief
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-7


Category
CR 2.5km/h 72±10%
LO 9.5km/h 18 +2 / -0
Travel speed
sec.
(1)
• Machine in road travel posture
20km/h 9 + 1/ -0
• Engine running at high idle
• Hydraulic oil temperature 45~55oC
• Run up for at least 200M or until the Hi
max travel speed is stabilised, then
measure time taken to travel the 35km/h 5.1 +0.5 / -0
next 50M on flat ground
Travel
CR 230 ±5%
Travel speed
• Raise machine road wheels off rpm
(2)
ground using work equipment and
chassis attachments LO 930 ±5%
• Service brake and park brake both
disengaged
• Fully depress travel pedal and
measure propshaft rotations.
• Hydraulic oil temperature 45~55°C.

Leakage of travel motor Category

• Hydraulic oil temperature 45~55°C.
Leakage of travel
Within operation range. min 5 ±1 Max. 10
motor
• Apply service brake and relieve travel circuit.
• Disconnect transmission drain line.
20-8 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100


Category
Whole work
equipment (tooth Max. 600 Max. 900
tip fall amount)
Boom cylinder
(cylinder retrac- Max. 18 Max. 27
Hydraulic drift of work equipment
tion amount)
Work equipment
Arm cylinder (cyl-

inder extension Max. 160 Max. 240
amount) mm
★ PW200/220 = 2150kg
(including bucket mass)
Bucket cylinder
(cylinder retrac- • Hydraulic oil temperature: Within operation Max. 40 Max. 58
tion amount) range
• Flat and level ground
• Work equipment in measurement posture as il-
lustrated above
Second Boom
• Engine stopped
adjust cylinder
• Work equipment control lever in NEUTRAL posi- Max. 20 Max. 30
(Cyl retraction
tion
amount)
• Fall amount for 15 minutes as measured every 5
minutes starting immediately after initial setting
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-9

Applicable model PW200-7E0 PW220-7E0

Category

RAISE
3.8 ±0.4 Max. 4.6 3.8 ±0.4 Max. 4.6
Mono
boom
boom lift • Hydraulic oil temperature: Within opera-
tion range
LOWER
• Engine running at high idle 2.9 ±0.5 Max. 3.5 2.9 ±0.5 Max. 3.5
• Working mode: P
• Time required from raise stroke end till
bucket touches ground
RAISE
4.2 ±0.4 Max. 5.0 4.2 ±0.4 Max. 5.0
Two
Work equipment speed
piece
Work equipment
boom
1st boom • Hydraulic oil temperature: Within opera-
lift tion range
LOWER
sec.
• Working mode: P 3.3 ±0.3 Max. 3.9 3.3 ±0.3 Max. 3.9
bucket touches ground
RAISE
5.0 ±0.5 Max. 6.0 5.0 ±0.5 Max. 6.0
Two
piece
boom
2nd boom
adjust
LOWER
• Hydraulic oil temperature: Within opera- 5.0 ±0.5 Max. 6.0 5.0 ±0.5 Max. 6.0
tion range
• Working mode: P
lower stroke end
20-10 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100


Category

RAISE
3.5 ±0.5 Max. 4.5 3.5 ±0.5 Max. 4.5
tion range
Outrigger
• Working mode: P
• Time required for 1 outrigger raise stroke
LOWER
end to lower stroke end.
3.9 ±0.4 Max. 4.7 3.9 ±0.4 Max. 4.7
RAISE
2.1 ±0.3 Max. 2.7 2.1 ±0.3 Max. 2.7
tion range
Dozer
• Working mode: P
Blade
• Time required from raise stroke end to
lower stroke end.
LOWER
•
2.1 ±0.3 Max. 2.7 2.1 ±0.3 Max. 2.7
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-11


Category

IN
3.8 ±0.4 Max. 4.6 3.8 ±0.4 Max. 4.6
Arm
OUT
• Hydraulic oil temperature: Within opera- 3.0 ±0.3 Max. 3.6 3.0 ±0.3 Max. 3.6
tion range
Work equipment speed

• Time required from dumping stroke end to
digging stroke end
CURL
2.5 ±0.3 Max. 3.1 2.5 ±0.3 Max. 3.1

Work equipment
Bucket
DUMP

2.4 ±0.3 Max. 3.0 2.4 ±0.3 Max. 3.0
tion range
• Time required from dumping stroke end to
digging stroke end
Time lag
Mono-
boom sec. Max. 1.0 Max. 1.2
boom lift
• Hydraulic oil temperature: Within operation
range
• Engine running at low idling
• Operate full boom down from stroke end till
bucket touches ground. Measure delay from
bucket touching ground to bucket starting to
push the machine up.
20-12 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100


Category
Arm Max. 1.0 Max. 1.2

• Operate full arm curl from dumping stroke end to full
retraction. Measure delay when arm pauses midway
Time lag
through operation
sec.
Work equipment
Bucket Max. 1.0 Max. 1.2

• Operate full bucket curl from dumping stroke end to
full retraction. Measure delay when bucket pauses
midway through operation
Internal leakage
Cylinders • Hydraulic oil temperature: Within operation range 5 20

• Engine running at high idling cc/
• Leakage amount for one minute with cylinder or travel min
Centre to be measured in relief condition 10 50
swivel joint
Time lag
Two piece
boom 1st sec. Max. 1.0 Max. 1.2
boom lift
• Engine running at low idle
• Operate full boom down from stroke end till bucket
touches ground. Measure delay from bucket touching
ground to bucket starting to push the machine up.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-13


Category
Two piece
boom 2nd Max. 1.0 Max. 1.2
boom adjust

Work equipment

Time lag
• Operate full boom adjust down from stroke end till

sec.
bucket touches ground. Measure delay from bucket
touching ground to bucket starting to push the ma-
chine up.

Outrigger • Raise outrigger off ground then operate full lower Max. 1.0 Max. 1.2
• Measure delay from when outrigger touches ground to
outrigger starting to lift machine up

Blade • Raise blade off ground then operate full lower Max. 1.0 Max. 1.2
• ‘Measure delay from when blade touches ground to
blade starting to lift machine up
Performance of
Hydraulic pump
delivery
See next page l/min See next page
20-14 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Cate
-gory
Discharge amount of hydraulic pump (P mode)

Performance of hydraulic pump
• Pump speed: At 1,950 rpm, PC current 310 mA
Test pump Discharge Average Standard value Judgement

discharge pressure of pressure for discharge standard lower
Check point pressure other pump amount Q limit Q
(MPa {kg/cm2}) (MPa {kg/cm2}) (MPa {kg/cm2}) (L/min) (L/min)
As desired P1 P2 P1+ See graph See graph
★ As far as possible, bring pump discharge pressure P1 and P2 as close as possible to the average pressure when measur-
ing.
The error is large near the point where the graph curves, so avoid measuring at this point.
★ When measuring with the pump mounted on the machine, if it is impossible to set the engine speed to the specified speed
with the fuel control dial, take the pump discharge amount and the engine speed at the point of measurement, and use them
as a base for calculating the pump discharge amount at the specified speed.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-15

Applicable model
Cate
-gory
Discharge amount of hydraulic pump (P mode)

Performance of hydraulic pump
• Pump speed: At 2,050 rpm, PC current 310 mA
Test pump Discharge Average Standard value Judgement

discharge pressure of pressure for discharge standard lower
Check point pressure other pump amount Q limit Q
(MPa {kg/cm2}) (MPa {kg/cm2}) (MPa {kg/cm2}) (L/min) (L/min)
As desired P1 P2 P1+ See graph See graph
★ As far as possible, bring pump discharge pressure P1 and P2 as close as possible to the average pressure when measur-
ing.
The error is large near the point where the graph curves, so avoid measuring at this point.
★ When measuring with the pump mounted on the machine, if it is impossible to set the engine speed to the specified speed
with the fuel control dial, take the pump discharge amount and the engine speed at the point of measurement, and use them
as a base for calculating the pump discharge amount at the specified speed.
20-16 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Flow control characteristic of PC valve (STD)
Flow control characteristic of PC valve (STD)

★ The values in this table are used as reference values when
carrying out troubleshooting.
PW200, 220-7E0
Applicable model
(Std)
Category Item Measurement Condition Unit Reference Value
Mono boom
4.4 ±0.4
Characteristics of Time required for turning
PC flow control from 0 to 90 degrees with sec.
Two piece boom
valve boom raised
4.1 ±0.4
• Rated load applied to bucket
• Solid and flat ground
• Time required till passing spot of 90 degrees starting
from illustrated posture and with boom raised
PW220-7H
Applicable model
(Opt HD Cwt)
Category Item Measurement Condition Unit Reference Value
Mono boom
Characteristics of Time required for turning 4.6 ±0.4
PC flow control from 0 to 90 degrees with sec.
valve boom raised Two piece boom
• Hydraulic oil temperature: Within operation range 4.3 ±0.4
• Rated load applied to bucket
• Solid and flat ground
• Time required till passing spot of 90 degrees starting
from illustrated posture and with boom raised
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-17

Flow control characteristic of PC valve (STD) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
20-18 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Measuring engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-103
Measuring intake air pressure (boost pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-105
Measurement of exhaust gas color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-107
Adjusting valve clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-109
Measuring compression pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-111
Measurement of blow-by pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-114
Measure engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-116
Handling fuel system parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-117
Releasing residual pressure from fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-118
Measuring fuel pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-119
Measuring fuel return rate and leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-121
Bleeding air from fuel circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-124
Checking fuel circuit for leakage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-125
Checking and adjusting air conditioner compressor belt tension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-127
Replacing the fan belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-128
Measurement of clearance in swing circle bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-129
Inspection and adjustment of hydraulic oil pressure in hydraulic circuit for work equipment,
swing and travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-130
Inspection and adjustment of control circuit oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-135

Procedure for pressure reducing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-137
Inspection and adjustment of pump pc (valve inlet) control oil pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-138
Inspection and adjustment of pump ls valve control oil pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-142
Measurement of solenoid valve output pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-149

7 - Stage solenoid block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-151
Measurement of PPC valve output pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-155

Checking Proportional Control PPC Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-156
Adjustment of work equipment and swing PPC valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-157
Measuring and adjusting quick coupler control valve output pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-158
Testing travel motor relief pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-160

Measuring travel motor Relief pressure.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-160
Adjusting travel motor relief pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-161
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-101

Testing propshaft speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-162

Measuring rotating speed of propshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-162
Testing transmission clutch control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-163

Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-163
Inspection of locations of hydraulic drift of work equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-165
Release of remaining pressure in hydraulic circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-167
Measurement of oil leakage amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-169
Air bleeding of various parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-172
Inspection procedures for diode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-174
Special function of monitor panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-176

Operation of operators menu and display (outline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-179
Table for failure code no. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-186
Operation and display of service menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-190
Way of switching to Service Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-190
Table for monitoring items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-193
Procedure for turning on KOMTRAX terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-211

KOMTRAX terminal lamp indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-215
Preparations for troubleshooting of electrical system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-222
20-102 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Measuring engine speed
Measuring engine speed

• Measure the engine speed with the monitoring function of
the machine monitor.
• Measure the engine speed under the following condition.
• Engine coolant temperature: Within operating range
• Hydraulic oil temperature: Within operating range
1. Preparation work
Operate the machine monitor so that the engine speed can be
monitored.
• For the operating method of the machine monitor, see

See chapter 20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING "Special
function of monitor panel" on page20-176.
• Monitoring code: 01002 Engine speed
2. Measuring low idle speed

a. Start the engine and set the fuel control dial in the low
idle (MIN) position.
b. Set all the levers and pedals for work equipment control,
swing control, and travel in neutral and measure the en-
gine speed.
3. Measuring high idle speed

a. Start the engine and set the fuel control dial in the high
idle (MAX) position.
b. Set the working mode in the power mode (P) and turn
the auto-decelerator OFF.
c. Set all the levers and pedals for work equipment control,
gine speed.
4. Measuring 2-pump relief speed

a. Start the engine and operate the arm cylinder to the IN
stroke end.
b. Set the fuel control dial in the high idle (MAX) position
and set the working mode in the power mode (P).
c. Operate the left work equipment control lever to relieve

the arm circuit at the IN stroke end and measure the en-
gine speed.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-103

Measuring engine speed TESTING AND ADJUSTING
5. Measuring 2-pump relief and power maximizing speed

(near rated speed)
a. Start the engine and operate the arm cylinder to the IN
stroke end.
b. Set the fuel control dial in the high idle (MAX) position
and set the working mode in the power mode (P).
c. While operating the left work equipment control lever to

relieve the arm circuit at the IN stroke end and depress-
ing the power maximizing switch, measure the engine
speed.
• The power maximizing function is reset automatically in

about 8.5 seconds even if the switch is kept depressed.
Accordingly, measure the engine speed in that period.
6. Measuring auto-deceleration speed

a. Start the engine, set the fuel control dial in the high idle
position (MAX), and turn the auto-decelerator ON.
b. Set all the levers and pedals for work equipment control,
gine speed when the auto-decelerator operates.
• The engine speed lowers to a certain level about 5 sec-

onds after all the levers and pedals are set in neutral.
This level is the auto-deceleration speed.
20-104 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Measuring intake air pressure (boost pressure)
Measuring intake air pressure (boost pressure)

• Measuring tools for intake air pressure (boost pressure)
Symbol Part No. Part name
R 799-201-2202 Boost gauge kit
Stop the machine on a level ground and lower the work

equipment to the ground.
• Measure the intake air pressure under the following condi-

tion.
1. Open the engine hood and remove intake air pressure pick-
up plug (1) from the intake air connector.
2. Install nipple of boost gauge kit R and connect it to gauge

[2]. View on X
3. Run the engine at middle or higher speed and bleed oil from
the hose.
• Insert the connecting parts of the gauge and hose about 1

a half and open the self-seal on the hose side repeated-
ly, and the oil will be drained.
• If Pm kit (A) is available, you use the air-bleeding cou-

pling (790-261-1130) in that kit.
• If oil is left in the hose, the gauge does not work. Ac-
cordingly, be sure to drain the oil.
4. Set the working mode in the power mode (P) and turn the
swing lock switch ON.
• If the swing lock switch is turned ON, the main relief

valve is set for high-pressure relief.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-105

Measuring intake air pressure (boost pressure) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
5. While running the engine at high idle, relieve the arm circuit
and measure the intake air pressure.
6. After finishing measurement, remove the measuring tools

and return the removed parts.
20-106 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Measurement of exhaust gas color
Measurement of exhaust gas color

★ Exhaust gas colour measurement tool
Mark Part No. Part Name
1 799-201-9000 Handy Smoke Checker

B
2 Commercial product Smoke Meter
Be careful not to touch the highly heated parts, while fitting

and detaching a measurement tool.
★ If no compressed air or power is not available in the field,

use Handy Smoke Checker B1. For recording official data,
use Smoke Meter B2.
1. Measurement with Handy Smoke Checker B1
a. Insert probe of the Smoke Meter B2 into the exhaust

gas pipe outlet, and fasten it to the outlet with a clip.
b. Insert the exhaust gas intake pipe into the exhaust pipe.
c. Start the engine and keep it running until the engine

cooling water temperature comes within the operating
range.
d. Let the exhaust gas stay on the filtering paper by operat-

ing a handle of Handy Smoke Checker B1, when the en-
gine speed is suddenly accelerated or kept at high
idling.
e. Take out the filtering paper and compare it with the at-
tached scale for judgement.
f. Detach the measurement tool after the measurement,

and make sure the machine is back to normal condition.
2. Measurement with Smoke Meter B2
a. Insert probe of the Smoke Meter B2 into the exhaust

gas pipe outlet, and fasten it to the outlet with a clip.
b. Connect the probe hose, accelerator switch outlet and

air hose to the Smoke Meter B2.
★ Keep the pressure of the supplied compressed air below

1.5 MPa {15 kg/cm2}.
c. Connect the power cable to an outlet of AC100V.
★ Confirm that the Smoke Meter power switch is in the

OFF position, before connecting the power cable to an
outlet.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-107

Measurement of exhaust gas color TESTING AND ADJUSTING
d. Fit a filtering paper by loosening the suction pump cap

nut.
★ Fit the filtering paper securely so that air may not leak.
e. Move the Smoke Meter B2 power switch to the ON posi-

tion.
f. Start the engine and keep it running until the engine wa-
ter temperature rises to the operating range.
g. Let the exhaust gas stay on the filtering paper by de-

pressing the accelerator pedal of Smoke Meter B2,
when the engine speed is suddenly accelerated or kept
at high idling.
h. Put the polluted filtering paper on non-polluted filtering

paper (more than 10 sheets) in the filtering paper holder,
and read the indicated value.
i. Detach the measurement tool after the measurement,

and make sure that the machine is back to normal con-
dition.
20-108 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Adjusting valve clearance
Adjusting valve clearance

• Measuring tools for valve clearance
1 795-799-1131 Gear
B
2 Commercially available Thickness gauge

• Measure the valve clearance under the following condition.
• Engine coolant temperature: Normal temperature
1. Open the engine hood and remove the belt guard from the
top of the air conditioner compressor.
2. Remove cylinder head cover (1).
• Since the breather connector on the rear side of the cyl-

inder head cover is connected to the flywheel housing
through the O-ring, pull it together with the cylinder head
cover.
3. Remove plug (2) from the top of the starting motor and insert
gear B1.
4. Rotate the crankshaft forward with gear B1 and set wide slit
(b) of the rotation sensor ring to projection top (a) of front
cover.
• Projection top (a) must be within the range of wide slit

(b) when it is seen from the air conditioner compressor
side.
• If you can see the yellow marks of projection top (a) and
wide slit (b), you may set them to each other.
When the crankshaft is set as above, the piston in the No. 1

or No. 6 cylinder is not set to the compression top dead
center (TDC). Take care.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-109

Adjusting valve clearance TESTING AND ADJUSTING
5. Check the movement of the rocker arm of the No. 1 cylinder

to judge the valve to be adjusted.
• If you can move the rocker arms of air intake valves (IN)
with the hand by the valve clearance, adjust the valves
marked with in the valve arrangement drawing.
• If you can move the rocker arms of exhaust valves (EX)

with the hand by the valve clearance, adjust the valves
marked with in the valve arrangement drawing.
• Valve arrangement drawing
6. Adjust the valve clearance according to the following proce-

dure.
a. While fixing adjustment screw (3), loosen locknut (4).
b. Insert thickness gauge B2 in the clearance between

rocker arm (5) and crosshead (6) and adjust the valve
clearance with adjustment screw (3).
• With the thickness gauge inserted, turn the adjust-

ment screw to a degree that you can move the thick-
ness gauge lightly.
c. While fixing adjustment screw (3), tighten locknut (4).
 Locknut:
24 ± 4 Nm {2.45 ± 0.41 kgm}
• After tightening the locknut, check the valve clear-

ance again.
7. Rotate the crankshaft forward by 1 turn and set wide slit (b)
to projection top (a) according to step 4.
8. Adjust the other valve clearances according to steps (5) and

(6).
• If the valves marked with in the valve arrangement

drawing were adjusted in steps (5) and (6), adjust the
valves marked with .
• If the valves marked with in the valve arrangement

drawing were adjusted in steps (5) and (6), adjust the
valves marked with .
9. After finishing adjustment, remove the adjusting tools and

return the removed parts.
Remove gear B1 without fail.
 Cylinder head cover mounting nut:

24 ± 4 Nm {2.45 ± 0.41 kgm}
20-110 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Measuring compression pressure
Measuring compression pressure

• Measuring tools for compression pressure
1 795-502-1590 Compression gauge
2 795-799-6700 Puller
C
795-790-4410 Adapter
3
6754-11-3130 Gasket

• Measure the compression pressure under the following con-

dition.
• Engine oil temperature: 40 – 60°C
1. Open the engine hood and remove cylinder head cover (1).
• Since the breather connector on the rear side of the cyl-

inder head cover is connected to the flywheel housing
through the O-ring, pull it together with the cylinder head
cover.
2. Remove the mounting bolts of rocker arm assembly (2) on

the exhaust side, and then remove rocker arm assembly (2).
• When removing the injector, you do not need to remove

the rocker arm assembly on the intake side.
3. Remove fuel tube (3), and then remove inlet connector (7) in
the cylinder head.
• The inlet connector is connecting the fuel tube to the in-

jector.
4. Disconnect injector wiring harness. Using tool C2, remove

injector (4).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-111

Measuring compression pressure TESTING AND ADJUSTING
5. Install adapter C3 to the injector mounting part with the in-

jector clamp and connect compression gauge C1.
• Install the gasket to the adapter end without fail.
 Injector clamp mounting bolt:

1st time: 3.5 ± 0.35 Nm {0.36 ± 0.04 kgm}
2nd time: 75 ± 5 û (Angle tightening)
• If a little quantity of engine oil is applied the joint of the

adapter and gauge, air does not leak easily.
6. Install rocker arm assembly (2) on the exhaust side and ad-
just the valve clearance.
★ See “Adjusting valve clearance”.
7. Disconnect CE03 connector (5) of the engine controller.
If the connector is not disconnected, the engine will start

during measurement and it will be dangerous.
Since the CE03 connector is a part of the power supply cir-
cuit of the engine controller, cover the connector on the ma-
chine side with a vinyl sheet, etc. to prevent electric leakage
and ground fault.
8. Rotate the engine with the starting motor and measure the
compression pressure.
★ Read the gauge when the pointer is stabilized.

• Install the injector and inlet connector according to the

following procedure.
a. Apply new engine oil (SAE15W-40) to the O-ring of in-

jector (4) and cylinder head.
b. Install injector (4) with the fuel inlet hole directed to the
air intake manifold.
c. Install injector clamp (6) and tighten the mounting bolt

by 3 – 4 threads.
d. Install inlet connector (7) and tighten inlet connector re-

tainer temporarily.
e. Tighten the mounting bolt of injector clamp (6) securely.
 Injector clamp mounting bolt:

1st time: 3.5 ± 0.35 Nm {0.36 ± 0.04 kgm}
2nd time: 75 ± 5 û (Angle tightening)
f. Tighten inlet connector retainer (8) securely.
20-112 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Measuring compression pressure
 Inlet connector retainer:

50 ± 5 Nm {5.1 ± 0.5 kgm}
• Tighten the bolts and nuts other than the injector and in-
let connector to the following torque.
 Injector wiring harness nut:

1.5 ± 0.25 Nm {0.15 ± 0.026 kgm}
 Fuel tube sleeve nut:

35 ± 3.5 Nm {3.6 ± 0.4 kgm}
 Rocker arm assembly mounting bolt:

36 ± 6 Nm {3.7 ± 0.6 kgm}
• Adjust the valve clearance. For details, see “Adjusting

valve clearance”.
 Cylinder head cover mounting nut:

24 ± 4 Nm {2.45 ± 0.41 kgm}
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-113

Measurement of blow-by pressure TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Measurement of blow-by pressure

★ Blow-by pressure measurement tools
1 799-201-1504 Blow-by Kit

E
2 795-790-1950 Tool (Nozzle)
1. Remove undercover (1), remove breather tube (2) from oil

2
catcher.
2. Fit tool E2 to blow-by hose and connect it with gauge (1) of

blow-by kit E1.
3. Keep engine running until the engine cooling water tempera-

ture rises to the operating range.
20-114 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Measurement of blow-by pressure
4. Measure the blow-by pressure at high idling and under the

following conditions.
1
• Working mode: A mode
• Work equipment, swing and travel:
• Service brake applied, travel in relief.
★ Read off the blow-by pressure value, when the needle of

the gauge steadies itself.
5. Detach the measurement tools after the measurement, and

make sure that the machine is back to normal condition.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-115

Measure engine oil pressure TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Measure engine oil pressure

• Measuring tools for engine oil pressure
799-101-5002 Hydraulic tester

1
E 790-261-1204 Digital hydraulic tester
2 799-401-2320 Hydraulic tester

• Measure the engine oil pressure under the following condi-

tion.
1. Open the side cover of the pump room and remove oil pres-
sure pickup plug (1) from the engine oil filter.
1
2. Install nipple of hydraulic tester E1 and connect hydraulic

tester E2.
3. Start the engine and turn the auto-decelerator OFF.
4. Run the engine and measure the engine oil pressure at high
idle and low idle.

20-116 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Handling fuel system parts
Handling fuel system parts

• Precautions for checking and maintaining fuel system
The common rail fuel injection system (CRI) consists of

more precise parts than the conventional fuel injection pump
and nozzle. If foreign matter enters this system, it can cause
a trouble.
When checking and maintaining the fuel system, take care

more than the past. If dust, etc. sticks to any part, wash that
part thoroughly with clean fuel.
• Precautions for replacing fuel filter cartridge
Be sure to use the Komatsu genuine fuel filter cartridge.
Since the common rail fuel injection system (CRI) consists

of more precise parts than the conventional fuel injection
pump and nozzle, it employs a high-efficiency special filter
to prevent foreign matter from entering it. If a filter other than
the genuine one is used, the fuel system may have a trou-
ble. Accordingly, never use such a filter.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-117

Releasing residual pressure from fuel system TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Releasing residual pressure from fuel system

• Pressure is generated in the low-pressure circuit and high-
pressure circuit of the fuel system while the engine is run-
ning.
Low-pressure circuit:
Feed pump – Fuel main filter – Supply pump
High-pressure circuit:
Supply pump – Common rail – Injector
• The pressure in both low-pressure circuit and high-pressure

circuit lowers to a safety level automatically 30 seconds after
the engine is stopped.
• Before the fuel circuit is checked and its parts are removed,
the residual pressure in the fuel circuit must be released
completely. Accordingly, observe the following.
Before checking the fuel system or removing its parts, wait

at least 30 seconds after stopping the engine until the resid-
ual pressure in the fuel circuit is released. (Do not start the
work just after stopping the engine since there is residual
pressure.)
20-118 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Measuring fuel pressure
Measuring fuel pressure

• Measuring tools for fuel pressure

1
790-261-1204 Digital hydraulic tester
F 6732-81-3170 Adapter (10 × 1.0 mm o R1/8)
2
6215-81-9710 O-ring
3 799-401-2320 Hydraulic tester

• Measure only the fuel pressure in the low-pressure circuit

from the feed pump through the fuel main filter to the supply
pump and the return circuit from the supply pump/common
rail/injector to fuel tank.
Since the pressure in the high-pressure circuit from the

supply pump through the common rail to the injector is very
high, it cannot be measured.
1. Measuring pressure in fuel low-pressure circuit

a. Open the engine hood and remove fuel pressure pickup 1
plug (1) from the fuel main filter (2).
b. Install adapter F2 and nipple of hydraulic tester F1 and

connect them to oil pressure gauge [F3]
• Use the oil pressure gauge of 2.5 MPa {25 kg/cm2}.
c. Run the engine at low idle and measure the pressure in

the fuel low-pressure circuit. 2
• If the pressure in the fuel low-pressure circuit is in
the following range, it is normal.
At low idle 0.5 – 1.3 MPa {5.1 – 13.3 kg/cm2}

During cranking 0.3 – 1.1 MPa {3.1 – 11.3 kg/cm2}
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-119

Measuring fuel pressure TESTING AND ADJUSTING
If the engine cannot be started, you may measure the fuel

pressure while rotating the engine with the starting motor.
Do not rotate for more than 20 seconds continuously, how-
ever, for protection of the starting motor.
d. After finishing measurement, remove the measuring

tools and return the removed parts.
 Fuel pressure pickup plug:

10 ± 2 Nm {1 ± 0.2 kgm}
2. Measuring pressure in fuel return circuit

a. Open the engine hood and remove fuel pressure pickup
plug (2) from the fuel return block.
b. Install nipple [3] of hydraulic tester F1 and nipple [1] and

connect them to hydraulic tester F3.
• Nipple [3]:
790-301-1181, 07002-11223
c. Run the engine at low idle and measure the pressure in

the fuel return circuit.
• If the pressure in the fuel return circuit is in the fol-

lowing range, it is normal.
At low idle Max. 0.02 MPa

During cranking {Max. 0.19 kg/cm2}

pressure while rotating the engine with the starting motor.
d. After finishing measurement, remove the measuring

 Fuel pressure pickup plug:

24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
20-120 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Measuring fuel return rate and leakage
Measuring fuel return rate and leakage

• Measuring tools for fuel return rate and leakage
1 (Not set yet) Supply pump testing tool
2 (Not set yet) Pressure limiter testing tool

G 3 (Not set yet) Injector testing tool
Commercially availa-
4 Measuring cylinder
ble

1. Measuring return rate from supply pump

a. Open the engine hood and disconnect return hose (1) of
the supply pump.
b. Connect testing tool G1 to the supply pump side and in-

sert its end in measuring cylinder G4.
c. Connect blocking tool G1 to the return hose side to pre-

vent the fuel from leaking.
d. Run the engine at low idle and measure the return rate
from the supply pump.
• If the return rate from the supply pump is in the fol-

At low idle Max. 1,000 cc/min

During cranking Max. 140 cc/min

return rate while rotating the engine with the starting motor.
e. After finishing measurement, remove the measuring

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-121

Measuring fuel return rate and leakage TESTING AND ADJUSTING
2. Measuring leakage from pressure limiter

the pressure limiter.
b. Connect testing tool G2 to the pressure limiter side and

insert its end in measuring cylinder G4.

d. Run the engine at low idle and measure the leakage

from the pressure limiter.
• If the leakage from the pressure limiter is in the fol-

At low idle 0 cc (No leakage)

 Joint bolt:
24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
3. Measuring return rate from injector

the cylinder head.
b. Connect testing tool G3 to the cylinder head side and in-

sert its end in measuring cylinder G4.

d. Run the engine at low idle and measure the return rate
from the injector.
• If the return rate from the injector is in the following

range, it is normal.
At low idle Max. 180 cc/min


return rate while rotating the engine with the starting motor.
20-122 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Measuring fuel return rate and leakage

 Joint bolt:
24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-123

Bleeding air from fuel circuit TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Bleeding air from fuel circuit

• If fuel is used up or if a fuel circuit part is removed and in-
stalled, bleed air from the fuel circuit according to the follow-
ing procedure.

1. Fill the fuel tank with fuel.
• Add fuel until the float of the sight gauge reaches the
maximum position.
2. Open the side cover of the pump room.
3. Loosen knob (1) of the feed pump and pull it out, and then
operate it forward and backward.
• Move the knob until it becomes heavy.
• The plug at the top of the fuel main filter does not need
to be removed.
4. After bleeding air, push in and tighten knob (1).
• Air bleeding route of fuel circuit

Fuel tank Pre-filter Feed pump Main filter
Metering unit Fuel tank
20-124 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Checking fuel circuit for leakage
Checking fuel circuit for leakage
• Very high pressure is generated in the high-pressure cir-

cuit of the fuel system. If fuel leaks while the engine is
running, it is dangerous since it can catch fire.
• After checking the fuel system or removing its parts,
check it for fuel leakage according to the following proce-
dure.
• Stop the machine on a level ground and lower the work
• Clean and degrease the engine and the parts around it in

advance so that you can check it easily for fuel leakage.
1. Spray color checker (developer) over the fuel supply pump,

common rail, fuel injector, and joints of the high-pressure
piping.
2. Run the engine at speed below 1,000 rpm and stop it after
its speed is stabilized.
3. Check the fuel piping and devices for fuel leakage.
• Check mainly around the high-pressure circuit parts

coated with the color checker for fuel leakage.
• If any fuel leakage is detected, repair it and check again

from step 2.
4. Run the engine at low idle.
• Check mainly around the high-pressure circuit parts


from step 2.
6. Run the engine at high idle.
• Check around the high-pressure circuit parts coated

with the color checker for fuel leakage.

from step 2.
8. Run the engine at high idle and load it.
• Relieve the arm circuit at the IN stroke end.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-125

Checking fuel circuit for leakage TESTING AND ADJUSTING
★ Check mainly around the high-pressure circuit parts

★ If any fuel leakage is detected, repair it and check again

from step 2.
★ If no fuel leakage is detected, check is completed.
20-126 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Checking and adjusting air conditioner compressor belt tension
Checking and adjusting air conditioner compressor belt

tension

Checking
1. Open the engine hood and remove the belt guard from the
top of the air conditioner compressor.
2. Press the intermediate point of the belt between fan pulley

and compressor pulley with a finger and measure deflection
(a) of the belt.
• Belt pressing force: 98 N {10 kg}
Adjusting
• If the belt deflection is abnormal, adjust it according to the
1. Loosen bolts (1) and (2).
2. Move compressor (3) and bracket (4) together to adjust the

belt tension.
3. After positioning compressor (3), tighten bolts (1) and (2).
• Check each pulley for breakage, wear of the V-groove,

and contact of the V-belt and V-groove.
• If the V-belt is so lengthened that the adjustment allow-

ance is eliminated or it has a cut or a crack, replace it.
• If the belt is replaced, adjust their tension again after op-

erating the machine for 1 hour.
• After tightening the bolts, check the belt tension again

according the above procedure.
4. After finishing measurement, return the removed parts.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-127

Replacing the fan belt TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Replacing the fan belt

★ The auto-tensioner is provided for the fan belt. Thus, testing
and adjustment of the belt is usually not necessary.
★ Disconnect air conditioner compressor belt before replacing

the fan belt.
Parking the machine in a level ground and lower the work

1. Open engine hood and remove fan belt cover (1).
2. Insert a wrench to the portion (A) (width across flats 12.7

mm) of the tensioner assembly (3), and rotate it to the oppo-
site to the winding-up direction to decrease the fan belt (2)
tension.
Make sure that the wrench is secured at the portion (A) of

the tensioner assembly (3) before rotating it. (The spring of
the tensioner assembly (3) is strong. If the wrench is loose-
ly inserted, the wrench may accidentally come off while be-
ing rotated and it is extremely dangerous.)
After removing the fan belt (2), return the tensioner assem-
bly (3) slowly with care.
Be careful not to get your fingers caught between the pulley

and fan belt (2) during work.
3. Replace the fan belt (2).
• Check each pulley for breakage and crack.
20-128 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Measurement of clearance in swing circle bearings
Measurement of clearance in swing circle bearings

★ Swing circle bearing clearance measurement tool
H Commercial Product Dial Gauge
★ Follow the steps explained below, when measuring clear-

ance in the swing circle bearing in the actual machine.
Be careful not to put a hand or foot under the undercar-

riage, while taking measurement.
1. Fasten dial gauge H to swing circle outer race (1) or inner

race (2), and contact the probe with the end surface of inner
race (2) or outer race (1) on the opposite side.
★ Set dial gauge H at the machine front or rear.
2. Keep the work equipment in the max. reach posture and

keep the height of the bucket teeth tip level with the lower
height of the revolving frame.
★ The upper structure is lowered at the front and raised at

the rear at that time.
3. Set dial gauge H at zero point.
4. Hold the arm nearly perpendicular to the ground, and lower

the boom until the machine is raised at the front.
★ The upper structure is raised at the front and lowered at

the rear at that time.
5. Read off the value in dial gauge H in this condition.
★ The value indicated in dial gauge H expresses clear-

ance in the bearings.
150 ~200MM
6. Return the machine to the posture in Item 2, and confirm

reading of dial gauge H is zero.
★ If zero value is not indicated, repeat the steps in Items 3

through 5.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-129

Inspection and adjustment of hydraulic oil pressure in hydraulic circuit for work equipment, swing and travel TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Inspection and adjustment of hydraulic oil pressure in hy-

draulic circuit for work equipment, swing and travel
★ Inspection and adjustment tools for hydraulic oil pressure in
hydraulic circuit for work equipment, swing and travel
799-101-5002 Hydraulic Tester

1 Digital Type
790-261-1203
Hydraulic Tester
J
Grease Fitting
799-101-5220
2 (10 x 1.25 mm)
07002-11023 O-ring
★ Hydraulic oil pressure in the hydraulic circuit for work equip-

ment, swing and travel (hydraulic pump output pressure)
may be also confirmed with a monitoring function in the
monitor panel (special function of monitor panel).
Measurement
1. Pre-measurement work
★ Lower the work equipment to the ground, then release
the remaining pressure in the piping by operating the
control lever several times after stopping the engine,
and release the pressure inside the hydraulic tank by
gradually loosening the oil filler cap. Ignition must be
switched on.
a. Remove hydraulic oil pressure measuring plugs (1) and

(2).
• Plug (1): For the circuit of front hydraulic pump 1
• Plug (2): For the circuit of rear hydraulic pump 2
b. Fit fitting J2 and connect it to oil pressure gauge (1) of

hydraulic tester J1.
J2
★ Use an oil pressure gauge with the capacity of 58
MPa{600 kg/cm2}.
20-130 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Inspection and adjustment of hydraulic oil pressure in hydraulic circuit for work equipment, swing and travel
c. Start the engine and keep it running until the hydraulic

oil temperature rises to the operating range. 1
2. Combination of pump, actuator and valve

★ You will know that when oil flow from the pumps is divid-
ed, the front and rear pumps work independently of
each other for each actuator, as well as that different re-
lief valves are activated then.
★ Oil flow from the pumps is merged in the single pressure

relief when the work equipment swings, while it is divid-
ed in the single pressure relief when the machine is in L
mode.
★ The actuators in the table below are arranged in the or-

der that the control valves are viewed from the machine
front.
Pump Actuator Relieve valve activated
(Unload) R unload valve
Service Safety valve
2P Boom R main relief valve

Rear
pump Bucket R main relief valve
Stabilizer R main relief valve
RAISE: R main relief valve

Boom
LOWER: Safety valve
Swing Swing motor safety valve
Front Travel F main relief valve

pump Arm F main relief valve
(Unload) F unload valve
3. Measurement of Unload Pressure

a. Start the engine.
b. Measure hydraulic oil pressure, when the engine is run-

ning at high idling and all the control levers are moved to
the NEUTRAL position.
★ Hydraulic oil pressure when the unload valve unloads is

displayed.
4. Measurement of work equipment relief pressure

a. Start the engine and move the cylinder to be measured
to its stroke end.
b. Measure hydraulic oil pressure, when the engine is run-

ning at high idling and the cylinder is in relief condition.
★ Hydraulic oil pressure when the main relief valve is in re-

lief condition is displayed.
★ If one-touch power max. switch is depressed, the oil

pressure is turned to high relief pressure, and if re-
leased, it is turned to low relief pressure.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-131

★ Keep the swing lock switch in the OFF position during

the inspection. If it is moved to the ON position, hydrau-
lic oil pressure is turned to high relief pressure, as the
constant 2-stage relief valve is moved to the ON posi-
tion.
5. Measurement of swing relief pressure

a. Start the engine and move the swing lock switch to the
ON position.
b. Measure hydraulic oil pressure when the engine is run-

ning at high idling and the swing circuit is relieved.
★ Hydraulic oil pressure when the swing motor safety

valve is relieved is displayed.
★ The swing motor relief pressure is lower than the main

relief pressure.
6. Measurement of travel circuit relief pressure

a. Start the engine and apply service brake to prevent trav-
el, select forward or reverse travel.
b. Measure hydraulic oil pressure when the engine is run-

ning at high idling and the travel circuit is relieved.
★ Hydraulic oil pressure with the main relief valve in relief

condition is displayed. In the travel circuit relief, the
pressure is high pressure relief all the time.
Adjustment
★ The unload valve and the safety valve for boom LOWER
cannot be adjusted.
1. Adjustment of main relief pressure

(high pressure setting side) 4 3
★ If relief pressure of the high pressure in the work equip-

ment and travel circuits is not normal, adjust the high
pressure setting side of main relief valves (3) and (4) in
the following manner.
• Main relief valve (3): For the front hydraulic pump

circuit
• Main relief valve (4): For the rear hydraulic pump

circuit
★ The relief pressure at high pressure indicates that when

the 2- stage relief valve is ON and pilot pressure is ap-
plied to the switching port.
20-132 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Inspection and adjustment of hydraulic oil pressure in hydraulic circuit for work equipment, swing and travel
a. Disconnect the pilot hose.
b. Loosen lock nut (5) and adjust the pressure by turning

holder (6).
★ If the holder is turned to the right, the pressure rises.

If the holder is turned to the left, the pressure falls.
★ Adjustment amount per turn of holder:

Approx. 12.5 MPa{approx. 128 kg/cm2}
 Lock nut:
53.5±4.9 Nm{5.5±0.5 kgm}
c. Check the pressure again after the adjustment, following

the aforementioned steps for measurement.
★ When measuring the pressure, connect the pilot hose.
★ If high pressure setting side is adjusted, low pressure

setting side is also affected, so adjust it, too.
1. Adjustment of main relief pressure

(low pressure setting side)
★ When low pressure relief pressure of the work equip-

ment is not normal, or when adjustment is made of the
high pressure setting side, adjust the low pressure side
of the main relief valve, too.
★ The relief pressure at high pressure indicates that when

the 2-stage relief valve is OFF and pilot pressure is not
applied to the switching port.
a. Disconnect pilot hose.
b. Loosen lock nut (7) and adjust the pressure by turning

holder (8).
★ If the holder is turned to the right, the pressure rises. If

the holder is turned to the left, the pressure falls.
★ Adjustment amount per turn of holder:

Approx. 12.5 MPa{approx. 128 kg/cm2}
 Lock nut:
53.5±4.9 Nm{5.5±0.5 kgm}
c. Check the pressure again after the adjustment, following

the aforementioned steps for measurement.
• When measuring the pressure, connect the pilot

hose.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-133

1. Adjustment of swing relief pressure
• If the swing relief pressure is not normal, adjust it with

swing motor safety valve (9) in the following manner.
a. Loosen lock nut (10) and adjust the pressure by turning

adjusting screw (11).
★ If the holder is turned to the right, the pressure rises. If

the holder is turned to the left, the pressure falls.
★ Adjustment amount per turn of adjusting screw:

Approx. 6.71 MPa{approx. 68.4 kg/cm2}
 Lock nut:
78–103 Nm{8.0–10.5 kgm}
b. Check the pressure again after the adjustment.
20-134 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Inspection and adjustment of control circuit oil pressure
Inspection and adjustment of control circuit oil pressure

★ Control circuit oil pressure inspection and adjustment tools

1 Digital Type
790-261-1203
Hydraulic Tester
J
Grease Fitting
799-101-5220
2 (10 x 1.25 mm)
07002-11023 O-ring
Measurement
Lower the work equipment to the ground and stop the en-
gine. After the engine stops, operate the control lever sever-
al times to release the remaining pressure in the piping.
Then loosen the oil filler cap to release the pressure inside
the hydraulic tank. Ignition must be switched on.
1. Remove oil pressure measurement plug (1) or (2).
2. Fit fitting J2 and connect it to oil pressure gauge (1) of hy-

draulic tester J1.
★ Use an oil pressure gauge with the capacity of 5.9 MPa

{60 kg/cm²}.
J2
3. Start the engine and keep it running until the hydraulic oil
temperature rises to the operating range.
J1
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-135

Inspection and adjustment of control circuit oil pressure TESTING AND ADJUSTING
4. Measure oil pressure with the engine running at high idling

and all the control levers in the NEUTRAL position. 1
5. Detach all the measurement tools after the measurement,

and make sure that the machine is back to normal condition.
20-136 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Inspection and adjustment of control circuit oil pressure
Procedure for pressure reducing adjust-

ment
1. Remove dust cap (1).
2. Loosen off adjusting screw nut (2).
3. Tighten adjusting screw (3) to increase pressure and loosen

to decrease pressure.
1
4. When at correct pressure tighten adjusting screw nut (2) and 2
replace dust cap (1).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-137

Inspection and adjustment of pump pc (valve inlet) control oil pressure TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Inspection and adjustment of pump pc (valve inlet) control

oil pressure
★ Pump PC control circuit oil pressure inspection and adjust-
ment tools

1 Digital Type
790-261-1203
Hydraulic Tester
J
Grease Fitting
799-101-5220
2 (10 x 1.25 mm)
07002-11023 O-ring
Measurement
★ Implement measuring the pump PC control circuit oil pres-
sure after confirming that the work equipment, swing and
travel circuit oil pressure as well as the control circuit original
oil pressure are normal.
1. Measurement of PC valve output pressure (servo piston in-

let pressure)
★ Measure PC valve output pressure (servo piston inlet

pressure) and pump delivery pressure together, and
compare the two pressures.
20-138 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Inspection and adjustment of pump pc (valve inlet) control oil pressure
a. Remove oil pressure measurement plugs (1), (2), (3)

and (4).
• Plug (1): For measuring the front pump delivery 1

pressure
• Plug (2): For measuring the rear pump delivery 2

pressure
• Plug (3): For measuring the front pump PC valve

delivery pressure
• Plug (4): For measuring the rear pump PC valve de-

livery pressure 3
3 4
b. Fit fitting J2 and connect to oil pressure gauge (1) of hy-

J2
draulic tester J1.
J2
★ Use an oil pressure gauge with the capacity of 58.8 MPa
{600 kg/cm²}
J2
J2
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-139

Inspection and adjustment of pump pc (valve inlet) control oil pressure TESTING AND ADJUSTING

oil temperature rises to the operating range. 1
d. Measure the pump delivery pressure and PC valve out-

put pressure (servo piston inlet pressure) together with
the engine running at high idling, after setting the ma-
chine at the following conditions.
• Working mode: A mode
• Swing lock switch: ON (switched to high pressure

relief with 2-stage relief turned ON)
• Work equipment, swing and travel circuit: Arm dig-

ging relief
★ Judgement method:
When the ratio between the pump delivery pressure
and PC valve output pressure (servo piston output
pressure) reaches the following values, both pres-
sures are judged normal
Pressure to be
Pressure ratio
measured
Pump delivery
1
pressure
PC valve outlet
Approx. 3/5
pressure
★ If there is any abnormality with PC valve or servo

piston, the PC valve output pressure (servo piston
output pressure) equals to the pump delivery pres-
sure, or approximates to 0 pressure.
2. Measurement of PC-EPC output pressure

5
a. Remove oil pressure measurement plug (5).
b. Fit fitting J2 and connect it to oil pressure gauge (1) of

hydraulic tester J1.
★ Use an oil pressure gauge with the capacity of 5.9

MPa{60 kg/cm2}.
J2
20-140 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Inspection and adjustment of pump pc (valve inlet) control oil pressure

oil pressure rises to the operating range. 1
d. Measure the hydraulic oil pressure with all the control le-
vers kept in the NEUTRAL position and the engine run-
ning at high idling and at low idling.
★ If PC-EPC valve output pressure changes to the follow-

ing values, it is judged normal.
Engine Control Hydraulic oil pres-

speed lever sure
2.9 MPa
Low idling
Neutral {30 kg/cm2}
High idling 0{0}
Adjustment
★ If any of the phenomena mentioned below occurs and PC
valve malfunctioning is suspected, adjust PC valves (6) and
(7) in the following manner.
• As workload increases, the engine rpm sharply drops.
• While the engine rpm is normal, the work equipment

moves slowly.
1. Loosen lock nut (8) and make adjustment, turning adjusting

screw (9).
★ If the holder is turned to the right, the pump absorption

torque rises.
If the holder is turned to the left, the pump absorption
torque falls.
★ The adjustable range with the adjusting screw is as

shown below.
• Left turn: Less than 1 turn
• Right turn: Less than 1/2 turn (less than 180 de-
grees)
 Lock nut:
27.50–34.3Nm{2.8–3.5kgm}
2. Confirm that the PC valve output pressure (servo piston inlet

pressure) is normal after the adjustment, following the
measurement steps explained earlier.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-141

Inspection and adjustment of pump ls valve control oil pressure TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Inspection and adjustment of pump ls valve control oil

pressure
★ Pump LS control circuit oil pressure inspection and adjust-
ment tool

1 Digital Type
790-261-1203
Hydraulic Tester
K Grease Fitting
799-101-5220
2 (10 x 1.25 mm)
07002-11023 O-ring
3 799-401-1340 Differential Pressure Gauge
Measurement
★ Measure pump LS control circuit oil pressure after confirm-
ing that the work equipment, swing and travel circuit oil pres-
sure as well as control circuit original pressure are normal.
1. Measurement of LS valve output pressure (servo piston

inlet pressure)
★ Measure LS valve output pressure (servo piston inlet
pressure) and pump delivery pressure together, and
compare both pressures thereafter.

and (4).
• Plug (1): For measuring the front pump delivery pres- 1

sure
• Plug (2): For measuring the rear pump delivery pressure 2
20-142 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Inspection and adjustment of pump ls valve control oil pressure
• Plug (3): For measuring the front pump LS valve deliv-

ery pressure
• Plug (4): For measuring the rear pump LS valve delivery 3

pressure
b. Use fitting K2 and connect it to oil pressure gauge (1) of

hydraulic tester K1.
K1
MPa{600 kg/cm2}.
K2
oil temperature rises to the operating range.
• Fuel dial : Full
• Working mode : L mode.
• Auto decel : Off.
• One touch power max : Off.
• Work equipment operation : Neutral.
Front pump
Raise road wheels clear of ground using work equipment &
chassis attachments.
Release brake.
Select LO travel speed.
Fully depress travel pedal.
Rear pump
Lower road wheels to ground.
Disconnect V22 (LS EPC solenoid).
Select L mode.
Raise boom very slowly by operating wrist levers.
During the period where the main pump pressure is stable at

approx. 12 ~ 14 MPa measure ∆ P.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-143

d. Measure pump delivery pressure and LS valve output

pressure (servo piston inlet pressure). 1
★ Judgement method:
When the ratio between the pump delivery pressure and
LS valve output pressure (servo piston output pressure)
reaches the following values, both pressures are judged
normal.
Oil pressure ratio

Oil pressure to be
measured All control levers in
During test.
NEUTRAL
Pump delivery pres-

1
sure Nearly equal
LS valve delivery pressure
Approx. 3/5
pressure
e. Detach all the measurement tools after the measure-

ment and make sure that the machine is back to normal
condition.
2. Measurement of LS differential pressure

★ LS differential pressure can be obtained by measuring
pump delivery pressure and LS pressure (actuator load-
ed pressure) at the same time and computing the differ-
ence of both pressures.

and (4).
• Plug (1): For measuring the front pump delivery pres- 1

sure
• Plug (2): For measuring the rear pump delivery pressure 2

• Plug (3): For measuring front pump input pressure.
• Plug (4): For measuring rear pump LS pressure.
4
3
20-144 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

b. Fit fitting K2 and connect it to oil pressure gauge (1) of

hydraulic tester K1 or differential pressure gauge K3.
K1
★ When using a differential pressure gauge:
Connect pump delivery pressure to the high pressure
side and LS pressure to the low pressure side.
A differential pressure gauge requires DC 12V power. K2
Connect it with one battery.
★ When using an oil pressure gauge:

Use an oil pressure gauge with the capacity of 58.5
MPa{600 kg/cm2}.
The max. differential pressure is no more than approx.
40 MPa{3.9 kg/cm2}. The same gauge may be used
throughout the measurement.
3 K2
c. Start the engine and keep it running until the hydraulic K2
• Working mode : L mode.
• Work equipment operation : Neutral.
Front pump
Raise road wheels clear of ground using work equipment &
chassis attachments.
Release brake
Rear pump
Lower road wheels to ground.
Disconnect V22 (LS EPC solenoid).
Select L mode.
Raise boom very slowly by operating wrist levers.
During the period where the main pump pressure is stable at

approx. 12 ~ 14 MPa measure data P.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-145

d. Measure pump delivery pressure and LS pressure (ac- 1

tuator loaded pressure). attention to the surroundings
for safety.
★ Calculation of LS differential pressure:

LS differential pressure = Pump delivery pressure – LS
pressure
20-146 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

★ If LS differential pressure is in the following conditions, it

is judged normal.
Control lever position LS differential pressure
All levers in Unload pressure

NEUTRAL (see standard value table)
Max. LS differential pressure

During test
(see standard value table)

ment, and make sure that the machine is back to normal
condition. Reconnect V22 LSPC
3. Measurement of LS-EPC valve output pressure

a. Remove oil pressure measurement plug (5). 5
b. Fit fitting K2 and connect it with oil pressure gauge (1) of

hydraulic tester K1.

MPa{60 kg/cm2}.
K1
K2
K1
c. Start the engine and keep it running until the hydraulic 1

d. Measure the oil pressure under the following conditions:
Working Work Eqpt Hydraulic

Travel Pedal
Mode Operation Pressure
Neutral Neutral {30} 900 mA

A
2 pumps relieved {0} 0 mA
Arm dump relief
L 1 pump relieved {16} 580 mA
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-147

NOTE
Operate the travel pedal slightly to the extent that the PPC hy-
draulic oil pressure is turned ON.(Do not travel the machine.)

ment, and make sure that the machine is back to normal
condition.
Adjustment
★ When LS differential pressure is not normal, adjust it with LS
valves (6) rear and (7) front. 6
1. Loosen lock nut (8) and adjust the pressure by turning ad-
justing screw (9).
★ If the adjusting screw is turned to the right, the differen-

tial pressure rises.
If the adjusting screw is turned to the left, the differential
pressure falls.
★ Adjustment amount (LS differential pressure) per turn of

adjusting screw:
1.3 MPa{13.3 kg/cm²}
 Lock nut:
49–64 Nm{5–7 kgm}
2. After the adjustment, confirm that LS differential pressure is

normal, following the steps for measurement explained earli-
er.
20-148 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Measurement of solenoid valve output pressure
Measurement of solenoid valve output pressure

★ Solenoid valve output pressure measurement tools

1 Digital Type
790-261-1203
Hydraulic Tester
L
Grease Fitting
799-401-2910
2 (Size 02)
07002-01423 O-ring
★ Measure solenoid valve output pressure after confirming

that control circuit original pressure is normal.
the hydraulic tank. Switch must be in the ’ON’ position.
1. Disconnect the hoses of solenoid valve to be measured at

the outlet side.
No. Solenoid valve to be measured
PO PPC hydraulic pressure lock solenoid valve
A1 2 stage relief solenoid valve
A2 Swing brake solenoid valve
A3 Suspension lock solenoid valve
A5 Merge/Divide solenoid valve
A6 Travel neutral solenoid valve
A8 Travel creep solenoid valve
★ Hoses to outlet ports (1 ~ 7) of the 7-station manifold

within the pump compartment.
A1 Travel solenoid valve - forward
B1 Travel solenoid valve - reverse
A2 Boom / Stabilizer solenoid valve - Boom down
B2 Boom / Stabilizer solenoid valve - Stabilizer down
A3 Boom / Stabilizer solenoid valve - Boom up
B3 Boom / Stabilizer solenoid valve - Stabilizer up
A4 Blanked
B4 Blanked
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-149

Measurement of solenoid valve output pressure TESTING AND ADJUSTING
★ Hoses to outlet ports (8 ~ 11) of the 4-station manifold in

PS
the service area at the rear of operator's cab.
A3 A1
C1 2 stage back pressure solenoid valve

B1
C2 Hi / Lo solenoid valve - hi gear
B Hi / Lo solenoid valve - lo gear
★ Hoses to outlet ports (C1), (C2) and (B) of the 2-station B3

manifold in the service area underneath the operator's
cab.
B4 A4 B2
A2
2. Connect fitting L2 to outlet port to be measured.
3. Fit fitting (1) of hydraulic tester L1 and connect it to oil pres-

sure gauge (2).

MPa{60 kg/cm²}.
4. Start the engine and keep it running until the hydraulic oil
2
temperature rises to the operating range.
5. Run the engine at full throttle, then turn each solenoid valve
ON or OFF by operating the control lever switch, and meas-
ure the pressure.
★ For conditions for turning each solenoid valve ON or

OFF, refer to the ensuing "Table for Functioning Condi-
tions" for each solenoid valve.
★ How each solenoid valve functions can be confirmed

with monitoring function in the monitor panel. (Special
Function of Machine Monitor)
★ When each output pressure shows the following values,

it is judged normal
Solenoid Valve Output Pressure
OFF (De-energised) 0{0}
ON (Energised) 3.8MPa {38.7kg/cm2}
6. Detach all the measurement tools after the measurement,

and make sure that the machine is back to normal condition.
20-150 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

7 - Stage solenoid block
Table for Functioning Conditions - PPC lock solenoid valve.
Functioning Condition Functioning
Safety lock lever Locked OFF
Released ON
Table for Functioning Conditions - 2 stage relief solenoid

valve.
Functiong Condition Functioning
When overheat setting of 1st stage is ON OFF
When overheat setting of 2nd stage is ON
When all the signals for work equipment, swing and travel are OFF
When swing lock switch is ON ON
When travel signal is ON
When working mode is L mode
When boom LOWER signal is ON
When working mode is A or E mode When left knob is switched If signals other than swing operation only ON
If swing operation only is ON OFF
In conditions other than above
Table for Functioning Conditions - Swing brake solenoid

valve.
Swing or work equipment lever operated Brake cancelled ON
All levers except travel at neutral (5 seconds after returning to neutral) Brake ON OFF
Swing lock switch in ON position
Table for Functioning Conditions - Suspension lock sole-

noid valve.
Suspension lock switch ON Suspension lock actuated ON
Suspension lock switch OFF Suspension lock cancelled OFF
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-151

Table for Functioning Conditions - Merge / Flow solenoid

valve.
When working mode is B mode When service signal is ON ON
When working mode is L mode When boom RAISE and swing signals are on
When travel signal only is ON
When compound travel marks are ON When steering signal is If front or rear pump pres-
OFF sure is over 19.6 MPa
When travel signal is off When swing lock switch is ON OFF
When working mode is A mode
When swing signal is ON
When swing signal is When service and arm If front or rear pump pres- ON
OFF dumping signal are ON sure is over 19.6MPa
In conditions other than above OFF
Table for Functioning Conditions - Travel neutral solenoid

valve.
Travel Neutral When travel forward selected ON
When travel reverse selected
When travel neutral selected OFF
Safety lock lever raised
Table for Functioning Conditions - Travel creep solenoid

valve.
Travel Creep Creep selected ON
Creep not selected OFF
Stationary ON
20-152 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Table for Functioning Conditions - Travel solenoid valve.

(forward / reverse)
Forward OFF
Reverse ON
Table for Functioning Conditions - Boom / Stabilizer sole-

noid valve. (boom / stabilizer DOWN)
Boom down OFF
Stab down ON
Table for Functioning Conditions - Boom / Stabilizer sole-

noid valve. (boom / stabilizer UP)
Boom up OFF
Stab up ON
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-153

Table for Functioning Conditions - Transmission Clutch

Control Solenoid valve. (HIGH gear / LO gear)
LO gear clutch disengaged (Default = HI speed) OFF
HI gear clutch disengaged (LO speed travel) ON
Table for Functioning Conditions - 2 Stage back pressure

solenoid valve.
Back pressure OFF
No back pressure ON
20-154 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Measurement of PPC valve output pressure
Measurement of PPC valve output pressure

• PPC valve output pressure measurement tools
1 799-101-5002 Hydraulic Tester

M Digital Type
2 790-261-1203
Hydraulic Tester
P 2 799-401-3100 Adapter (Size 02)

equipment to the ground. Then, release the residual pres-
sure from the hydraulic circuit. For details, see “Releasing
residual pressure from hydraulic circuit”.
★ Before measuring the PPC valve output pressure, check

that the basic pressure of the control circuit is normal.
★ Measure the solenoid valve output pressure under the fol-

lowing condition.
1. Remove PPC oil pressure switches in the hydraulic circuits

to be measured.
No. Circuit to be measured Location
S01 Swing right Manifold Block
S02 Swing Left Manifold Block

S02 S05
S03 Bucket Dump Manifold Block S06 S01
S07 S12 S03 S13
S04 Bucket Dig Manifold Block S08
S04
S05 Arm Dump Manifold Block
S06 Arm Dig Manifold Block S09

S10
S07 2nd Boom Extend * Manifold Block
S08 2nd boom Retract * Manifold Block
S09 Travel Reverse Solenoid Valve Block
S10 Travel Forward Solenoid Valve Block
S12 Boom/Stabiliser Down Manifold Block
S13 Boom/Stabiliser Up Manifold Block
* Pressure switch fitted to this port if 2 piece boom fitted
2. Attach fitting (1) of hydraulic tester M and connect oil pres-

sure gauge (2).
• Use an oil pressure gauge with capacity of 5-9 MPa

(60kg/cm3)
3. Start the engine and set the working mode in the power
mode (P).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-155

Measurement of PPC valve output pressure TESTING AND ADJUSTING
4. Run the engine at high idle and measure the oil pressure
with the control switch in neutral and moved to the max posi-
tion.
★ If the output pressure is as follows, the PPC valve is

normal.
Operation of lever Output pressure

Neutral 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
Almost same as control circuit basic pres-
Max Position
sure (See standard values table)

Checking Proportional Control PPC Circuit

1. Disconnect the hose of the Proportional Control PPC circuit
to be measured.
2. Install adapter P2 and connect the disconnected hose again.
3. Install nipple of hydraulic tester M1 into adaptor P2 and con-

nect it to oil pressure gauge [2]. 2
1
• Use the oil pressure gauge of 5.9 MPa {60 kg/cm²}.

4
1. LH 1 Att EPC Valve 5. 1 Att 1st Service Spool 3
6
2. RH 1 Att EPC Valve 6. 1 Att 2nd Service Spool
3. LH 2 Att EPC Valve 7. 2 Att 1st Service Spool
4. RH 2 Att EPC Valve 8. 2 Att 2nd Service Spool 7
5 8
4. Start the engine and set the working mode in the power
mode (P).
5. Run the engine at high idle and measure the oil pressure
with the control switch in neutral and moved to the max posi-
tion.
• If the output pressure is as follows, the PPC valve is

normal.
Operation of lever Output pressure

Neutral 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}
Max Position Almost same as control circuit basic pres-
sure (See standard values table)

20-156 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Adjustment of work equipment and swing PPC valve
Adjustment of work equipment and swing PPC valve

★ If there is excessive play in the work equipment or swing le-
ver, adjust it in the following manner.
1. Take off boot (1).
2. Loosen lock nut (2) and screw in disc (3) until it contacts the
heads of four pistons (4).
★ Do not move the piston while doing this work.
3. Keep disc (3) in place and tighten lock nut (2) to the speci-
fied tightening torque.
 Lock nut:
98–12 7Nm{10–13 kgm}
4. Install boot (1).
NOTE
This adjustment must be carried out in a clean environment. Do
not allow dirt particles under the boot.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-157

Measuring and adjusting quick coupler control valve output pressure TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Measuring and adjusting quick coupler control valve out-

put pressure
★ Measuring and adjusting tools for oil pressure in quick cou-
pler circuit.

1
790-261-1204 Digital hydraulic tester
J
799-101-5220 Nipple (10 × 1.25 mm)
2
07002-11023 O-ring

equipment to the ground. Then, release the residual pres-
sure from the hydraulic circuit. For details, see "Releasing
residual pressure from hydraulic circuit".
Measuring
• Measure quick coupler control valve output pressure after
checking that work equipment, swing and travel circuit pres-
sures are normal.
• Fit nipple J2 to port B2 and connect it to oil pressure gauge

of hydraulic tester.
• Use an oil pressure gauge with the capacity of 59MPa

(600kg/cm·)
• Start the engine. In order to raise the pressure to the set

pressure of the pressure regulating valve it will be necessary J2
to operate one of the main control circuits. Set the swing
lock to ON and operate the swing lever.
NOTE
When delivered from the factory the regulated pressure is set to
4MPa (41kg/cm·.
Adjustment
If the regulated pressure is not suitable for the quick coupler to
be installed adjust the pressure of the regulating valve as fol-
lows:
20-158 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Measuring and adjusting quick coupler control valve output pressure
1. Loosen the locknut (1a). (using a 17mm spanner).
1a
2. Turn the adjustment screw (1b) to adjust the pressure. (Us-

ing a 5mm hexagon key).
• If the screw is turned to the right the pressure increases. 1b
• If the screw is turned to the left the pressure reduces.
• Quantity of adjustment per turn of the screw: Approx

5.5MPa.
1a
3. After required pressure is achieved, hold adjustment screw
(1b) and tighten the lock nut (1a). (Torque of lock nut (1a)
12+/-2Nm)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-159

Testing travel motor relief pressure TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Testing travel motor relief pressure

★ The travel motor has two pressure relief valves which con-
trol the deceleration of the machine. One operates in for-
ward travel and one in reverse.
★ Set pressure = 37.3 MPa (380 kg/m²)
Measuring travel motor Relief pressure.

Oil temperature should be 45 - 50°
★ Fit a 600 kg/cm² pressure gauge to port Mb on the front trav-

el motor.
★ Test the machine on a downhill slope with a smooth surface

and long enough to allow the pressure to stabilize. If the
slope is steep (more than 5 degrees) test in LOW mode, oth-
erwise test in HIGH mode. Mb
★ Travel forward at approximately half maximum speed (for

the selected mode), then release the travel pedal. Read the (Ma opposite side)
pressure gauge after the pressure stabilizes.
NOTE
Always use a gauge which can be read safely when travelling the
machine.
Alternatively use a gauge which records the pressure reading
and study the data after the machine has been stopped.
• If it is necessary to check the other relief valve then swap

the relief cartridges between ports and check the second re-
lief by travelling the machine forward.
• it is extremely dangerous to travel the machine at high

speed in reverse - always check the relief valves as shown
above.
20-160 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Adjusting travel motor relief pressure
Adjusting travel motor relief pressure

The valve controlling deceleration of forwards travel is located
on the left side of the motor (facing forward) the same side as
port Ma.
The valve controlling deceleration of rewards travel (Mb side) of
the motor.
★ Remove seal and cap from the valve.
★ Loosen locking nut.
★ Turn adjustment screw clockwise to increase, and counter-

clockwise to decrease the pressure.
★ Tighten locknut.
NOTE
The set pressure cannot be measured whilst making an adjust-
ment.
Always repeat the measurement to check the set pressure after
adjusting.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-161

Testing propshaft speed TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Testing propshaft speed
Measuring rotating speed of propshaft

• Lift the wheels from the ground using the blade and outrig-
gers or work equipment.
• Set the machine to high idle.
• Measure first in CREEP, then, LO, then HI travel speed.
• Gently depress the travel pedal to full stroke.
Hazard from rotating wheels exists.
• Allow the speed of the propshaft / wheels to stabilize for a

few minutes then measure the rotating speed of the prop-
shaft using an optical tachometer.
• Gently release the travel pedal to stop the wheel rotation.
★ Always change rotating speed slowly. Sudden release of the

travel pedal could damage the transmission or motors.
• Judgement table
Oil temperature 45 ~ 50°C
Check Item Unit Standard Remarks
Travel Speed - CREEP P Mode rpm 230 +/-5% If too high check travel EPC
valve.
Travel Speed - LO P Mode 930 +/-5% If the speed is out of tolerance

refer to troubleshooting section.
Do not attempt to adjust travel
motor displacement.
NOTE
With the machine in ’Travel Speed-Hi’ it is not possible to judge
propshaft speed. In this condition the propshaft speed will appear
to hunt. This phenomenon is caused by the machine overspeed
control logic and is not a fault.
20-162 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Testing transmission clutch control circuit
Testing transmission clutch control circuit
Description
The transmission contains two clutches which engage HI and
LO gear. The clutches are engaged or disengaged by the clutch
control solenoid valve. Energising the clutch control solenoid
valve will select LO gear and de-energising the solenoid valve
will select HI gear. When the solenoid valve is energised, port X
is connected to tank (i.e. no pressure) and port Y is pressurised.
In this condition the LO gear clutch (large diameter) is engaged
and the HI gear clutch (small diameter) is disengaged. If the
clutch control solenoid is de-energised, then port Y is connected
to tank and port X is pressurised. In this condition, the HI gear
clutch is engaged the LO gear clutch is disengaged.
• LO gear = High torque (LO speed)
• HI gear = Low torque (HI speed)
The actuation pressure for the transmission clutches is supplied

from an accumulator via a pressure reducing valve and park
brake solenoid valve mounted in the power brake valve. The
park brake solenoid valve must be energised to feed the actua-
tion pressure to either HI or LO clutch (via another accumulator
to enhance gear shift). With the park brake valve de-energised,
both clutches are engaged and so the park brake is engaged.
1. Measuring clutch actuation pressure

Oil temperature 45 ~ 55°C
Fit the tee’s to clutch ports X and Y on the transmission. Fit 150
kg/cm² pressure gauge to the third leg of the tee. With the en-
gine running and the park brake disengaged measure the pres-
sure at port X and Y in the conditions shown in the judgment
table.
• Judgement table
Travel mode Pressure MPa (kg/cm2)
Port X Port Y
HI (Park brake off) 0 5.8 + / - 0.7 (59 + / - 7)
LO (Park brake off) 5.8 + / - 0.7 (59 + / - 7) 0
CREEP (Park brake off) 5.8 + / - 0.7 (59 + / - 7) 0
PARK BRAKE ON 0 0
If the pressure is low or high then the power brake valve must be
changed (the pressure reducing valve is not adjustable).If the
pressure is 0, check flow to power brake valve and accumulator
charge pressure.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-163

20-164
Accumulator
Accumulator
Clutch control
solenoid valve
Testing transmission clutch control circuit
From
Main Pump
Lo Gear clutch
Park Brake
solenoid valve
Pressure Hi Gear clutch

reducing valve
PW200/PW220-7E0
VEBM949100
TESTING AND ADJUSTING Inspection of locations of hydraulic drift of work equipment
Inspection of locations of hydraulic drift of work equip-

ment
★ If there is any hydraulic drift in the work equipment (cylin-
ders), check in the following manner to determine if the
cause is in the cylinder packing or in the control valve.
1. Inspection of boom and bucket cylinders

a. Set the work equipment in the same posture as when
measuring hydraulic drift, and stop the engine.
★ Fill the bucket with earth or apply the rated load to the
bucket.
b. Operate the control lever to the RAISE position or the

bucket control lever to the CURL position.
• If the lowering speed increases, the cylinder packing is

defective.
• If there is no change, the control valve is defective.
★ Operate the control lever with the engine starting switch

in the ON position.
★ If pressure in the accumulator has dropped, run the en-

gine for approx. 10 seconds to recharge the accumula-
tor again.
2. Inspection of arm cylinder

a. Operate the arm cylinder to move the arm to the position
100 mm before the digging stroke end, and stop the en-
gine.
b. Operate the arm control lever to move the arm to the

digging side.
• If the lowering speed increases, the cylinder packing is

defective.
• If there is no change, the control valve is defective.

in the ON position.

gine for approx. 10 seconds to charge the accumulator
again.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-165

Inspection of locations of hydraulic drift of work equipment TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Reference
If the cause of the hydraulic drift is in the defective packing, and
the above operation is carried out, downward movement is ac-
celerated for the following reasons.
1. If the work equipment is set to the above posture (holding

pressure applied to the bottom end), the oil at the bottom
end leaks to the head end. However, the volume at the head
end is small than the volume at the bottom end by the vol-
ume of the rod end, so the internal pressure at the head end
increases because of the oil flowing in from the bottom end.
2. When the internal pressure at the head end increases, the

pressure at the bottom end also rises in proportion to this.
The balance is maintained at a certain pressure (this differs
according to the amount of leakage) by repeating this proce-
dure.
3. When the pressure is balanced, the downward movement

becomes slower. If the lever is then operated according to
the procedure given above, the circuit at the head end is
opened to the drain circuit (the bottom end is closed by the
check valve), so the oil at the head end flows to the drain cir-
cuit and the downward movement becomes faster.
3. Inspection of PPC valve

Measure the amount of hydraulic drift of the work equipment
when the accumulator is charged with pressure and the
safety lock lever is put to the LOCK and FREE positions.

in the ON position.

gine for approx. 10 seconds to charge the accumulator
again.
★ If there is any difference in the hydraulic drift between

LOCK and FREE positions, the PPC valve is defective
(some internal failure).
20-166 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Release of remaining pressure in hydraulic circuit
Release of remaining pressure in hydraulic circuit
1. Release of residual pressure from hydraulic tank.
The hydraulic tank is enclosed and pressurised. When re-

moving a hose or a plug connected to the hydraulic tank, re-
lease the residual pressure from the hydraulic tank
according to the following procedure.
a. Lower the work equipment to the ground in a stable pos-

ture and stop the engine.
b. Slowly loosen oil filler cap of the hydraulic tank to re-

lease the air from the tank.
2. Release of residual pressure from hydraulic cylinder

circuit.
When disconnecting the piping between a hydraulic cylin-

der and the control valve, release the residual pressure
from the piping according to the following procedure.
a. Referring to previous step "Release of residual pressure

from hydraulic tank"
• Leave the oil filler cap of he hydraulic tank removed.
b. Turn the starting switch to the ON position and set the

safety lock lever in the FREE position, and then operate
the work equipment control levers on both sides forward
backward, to the right and to the left.
• The control valve is driven with the pressure in the accu-

mulator. If it is operated 2-3 times, the pressure lowers.
c. Start the engine and run it at low idling for 5 seconds to

heighten the pressure in the accumulator. Stop the en-
gine.
d. Repeat above steps b and c 2-3 times, and all residual

pressure is released from the piping.
3. Release residual pressure from swing motor circuit.

Release the residual pressure from the swing motor circuit
by performing the procedure for 2. Release of residual pres-
sure from hydraulic cylinder.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-167

Release of remaining pressure in hydraulic circuit TESTING AND ADJUSTING
4. Release of residual pressure from travel motor circuit

Since the control valve spool of the travel motor is open, re-
lease the residual pressure from the travel motor circuit by
performing the procedure for 1. release of residual pressure
from hydraulic tank.
20-168 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Measurement of oil leakage amount
Measurement of oil leakage amount
1. Measurement of oil leakage amount from boom cylinder

a. Start the engine and keep it running until the hydraulic
oil temperature rises to the operating range. Then ex-
tend the boom cylinder to the stroke end.
Release the pressure remaining in the piping, referring to

the foregoing section of "Release of Remaining Pressure in
Hydraulic Circuit".
b. Disconnect hose (1) at the cylinder head end and block

the hose end with a plate. 1
Be careful not to disconnect the hose at the cylinder bottom

end.
c. Start the engine and apply the relief pressure to the bot-
tom end of the cylinder with the engine running at high
idling.
d. Continue this condition for 30 seconds, then measure

the oil leakage amount for one minute.
e. After the measurement, make sure that the machine is

back to normal condition.
2. Measurement of oil leakage amount from arm cylinder

tend the arm cylinder to the digging stroke end.

Hydraulic Circuit".
b. Disconnect hose (2) on the cylinder head end and block

the hose end with a plate.

end.
idling.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-169

Measurement of oil leakage amount TESTING AND ADJUSTING


3. Measurement of oil leakage amount from bucket cylin-

der
tend the bucket cylinder to the digging stroke end.

Hydraulic Circuit".
b. Disconnect hose (3) at the cylinder head end block the

hose end with a plate.
3

end.
idling.


4. Measurement of oil leakage amount from swing motor

a. Disconnect drain hose (4) and fit a blind plug in the
hose.
b. Turn the swing lock switch to the ON position.
c. Start the engine. Apply the swing relief pressure with the
engine running at high idling and measure an oil leak-
age amount under such conditions.
★ After keeping the conditions in 3) above for 30 seconds, 4

measure the oil leakage amount for one minute.
★ After the first measurement, turn the upper structure by

180 degrees and take measurement again in the same
way.
d. After the measurement, make sure that the machine is

20-170 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Measurement of oil leakage amount
5. Measurement of oil leakage amount from travel motor

a. Start the engine run at high idle and apply the service
brake to prevent travel. Hydraulic oil temp 40 ~ 50OC
b. Disconnect flushing hose (1) of the travel motor and fit a

blind plug in the hose end.
c. Lock travel pedal so that rotary group cannot rotate.
d. Port A or B are set under pressure above the setting of

relief valves (i.e. 380 bar)
1
In this measurement, an erroneous operation of the control

lever will likely lead to a serious accident. Make sure that all
the signals and confirmations are followed without fail.
★ After keeping the conditions in 4) above for 30 seconds,

measure the oil leakage amount for one minute.
★ Repeat the measurement several times, slightly rotating

the motor, i.e. shifting the position of valve plate and cyl-
inder, and the position of cylinder and piston, and take
measurement several times

Leakage - 4 ~ 6 litres / min Normal
Leakage > 10 litres / min Abnormal
Repair or replace travel if motor is found to have an abnor-

mal level of oil leakage.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-171

Air bleeding of various parts TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Air bleeding of various parts

Air bleeding item Steps for air bleeding
1 2 3 4 5 6
Bleeding air Bleeding Bleeding air Bleeding air Checking oil

Starting
from hydrau- air from from swing from travel level and
Contents of Work engine
lic pump cylinder motor motor starting work
• Replacement of hydraulic oil

• Cleaning of strainer (See note) (See note)
• Replacement of return filter element
• Replacement or repair of hydraulic pump

• Removing suction piping
• Replacement or repair of control valve

• Removal of control valve piping
• Replacement or repair of cylinder

• Removal of cylinder piping
• Replacement or repair of swing motor

• Removal of swing motor piping
• Replacement or repair of travel motor

• Removing travel motor piping
• Replacement or repair of swivel joint

• Removal of swivel joint
NOTE
Bleed air from the swing motor and travel motor only when oil in
the casing is drained.
1. Air bleeding from hydraulic pump

1
a. Loosen air bleeding plug (1) and confirm that oil seeps
out from the plug.
b. If the oil seepage is confirmed, tighten air bleeding plug

(1).
 Air bleeding plug:

7.8–9.8 Nm{0.8–1.0 kgm}
★ Precautions for starting engine

When starting the engine after the air bleeding work ex-
plained above, run the engine at low idling for 10 min-
utes.
If the engine cooling water temperature is low and an
automatic engine warming-up function is relied on, use
the fuel dial, when it becomes necessary to cancel it.
20-172 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Air bleeding of various parts
2. Air bleeding from hydraulic cylinder

a. Start the engine and kept it running at low idling for 5
minutes.
b. Raise and lower the boom 4 to 5 times with the engine

running at low idling.
★ Be careful not to apply the relief pressure, stopping the

piston rod approx. 100 mm before its stroke end.
c. Repeat the steps in Item a) above, but this time with the
engine running at high idling.
d. Apply the relief pressure by extending the piston rod to

its stroke end and with the engine running at low idling.
e. For bleeding air from the arm cylinder and bucket cylin-
der, follow the same steps explained in Item b) through
d) above.
★ In case a cylinder is replaced with new one, it is advised

to bleed air from the new one before mounting the work
equipment. It is especially so with the boom cylinder, be-
cause its rod does not extend to the stroke end of LOW-
ER side, after the work equipment is mounted.
3. Air bleeding from swing motor

a. Start the engine and run it at low idling.
b. Bleed air from the motor by swinging the upper structure

slowly.
4. Air bleeding from travel motor

a. Start the engine and run it at low idling.
b. Loosen motor drain hose fitting (1) and confirm that oil
seeps out from nipple.
c. If the oil seepage is confirmed, tighten fitting (1).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-173

Inspection procedures for diode TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Inspection procedures for diode

★ Check an assembled-type diode (10 pins) and single diode
(2 pins) in the following manner. 7 1
★ The continuity direction of an assembled-type diode is as

shown in the diagram below.
★ The continuity direction of a single diode is shown on the di-

ode surface.
10 5 A
1. When using digital type circuit tester

a. Switch the testing mode to diode range and confirm the
indicated value.
★ Voltage of the battery inside is displayed with conven-

tional circuit testers.
b. Put the red probe (+) of the test lead to the anode (P)
and the black probe (–) to the cathode (N) of diode, and
confirm the displayed value.
c. Determine if a specific diode is good or no good with the

indicated value.
• No change in the indicated value: No continuity (defec-

tive).
• Change in the indicated value: Continuity established

(normal).
NOTE
A silicon diode shows a value between 400 and 600.
2. When using analog type circuit tester

a. Switch the testing mode to resistance range.
b. Check the needle swing in case of the following connec-

tions.
I. Put the red probe (+) of the test lead to the anode
(P) and the black probe (–) to the cathode (N) of di-
ode.
II. Put the red probe (+) of the test lead to the cathode
(N) and the black probe (–) to the anode (8) of di-
ode.
c. Determine if a specific diode is good or no good by the

way the needle swings.
• If the needle does not swing in Case i), but swings in Case
ii): Normal (but the breadth of swing (i.e. resistance value)
will differ depending on a circuit tester type or a selected
measurement range)
20-174 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Inspection procedures for diode
• If the needle swings in either case of i) and ii): Defective

(short-circuited internally)
• If the needle does not swing in any case of i) and ii): Defec-
tive (short-circuited internally)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-175

Special function of monitor panel TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Special function of monitor panel
[1] Figure input switch 1 [6] Figure input switch 6 Undo switch
[2] Figure input switch 2 [7] Figure input switch 7 Scroll up switch
[3] Figure input switch 3 [8] Figure input switch 8 Scroll down switch
[4] Figure input switch 4 [9] Figure input switch 9 Input confirmation switch
[5] Figure input switch 5 [0] Figure input switch 0
20-176 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Special function of monitor panel
1. Monitor panel functions - conventional and special
The monitor panel is provided with conventional and special

functions, and various kind of information are shown in the multi-
display. Display items consists of automatic display items that
are preset in the monitor panel and others that are shown by
switch operations.
1. Conventional function: Operator's Menu

This is a function by which an operator can set or show dis-
plays by switch operations. The display contents are those
which are normally shown.
Operator's Menu
1 Function for inputting and setting password, see following

pages.
2 Function for showing Komatsu's logo, see following pages.
3 Function for machine inspection before starting day's work, see

following pages.
4 Function for showing machine maintenance, see following

pages.
5 Function for showing precaution items, see following pages.
6 Function for confirming working mode and travel speed, see fol-
lowing pages.
7 Function for display of ordinary items, see following pages.
8 Function for adjusting display luminance and contrast, colour

and clock, see following pages.
9 Function for adjusting breaker and attachment flow rate, see fol-
lowing pages.
10 Function for confirming maintenance information, see following

pages.
11 Function for showing service meter reading or clock, see follow-

ing pages.
12 Function for showing occurrence of caution item, see following

pages.
13 Function for showing users' code No., see following pages.
14 Function for showing service code No. and failure code No., see
following pages.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-177

2. Special function: Service Menu

This is a function by which a service mechanic can set or
show displays by special switch operations. The display
contents are those which are not normally shown. It is main-
ly used for inspection, adjustment, trouble-shooting or spe-
cial setting of machines.
Service Menu
01 Function for monitoring
02 Function for abnor- Electrical system

mality history
Mechanical system
03 Function for maintenance history
04 Function for maintenance mode change
05 Function for recording phone No.
06 Function for initial Mode with key on

value setting and
Language
default
Unit
With/without service circuit
07 Function for adjust- Pump absorbtion torque

ment
Compound Op. ATT. flow adjustment
1st ATT flow R adjustment
1st ATT flow L adjustment
2nd ATT flow R adjustment
2nd ATT flow L adjustment
08 Cylinder cut-out
09 No Injection
20-178 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Operation of operators menu and display

(outline)
• This section introduces only the outline of the operator's
menu. For details on the contents and operation steps of
each menu, refer to the operation and maintenance manual
or section 10 ("STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND MAINTE-
NANCE STANDARDS") in this shop manual chapter on
monitor system.
1. Function for inputting and setting password

When the engine starting switch is turned ON, the password
inputting display is shown.
• This display is shown only when a password is regis-

tered.
2. Function for showing KOMATSU logo

When a password is input, or when the engine starting
switch is turned ON, KOMATSU logo is shown for two sec-
onds.
3. Function for machine inspection before starting day's

work
Following the KOMATSU logo, the display of machine in-
spection before starting day's work is shown for 2 seconds.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-179

4. Function for machine maintenance

Following the display of machine inspection before starting
day's work, the maintenance mark appears for 30 seconds,
if there is a service item whose maintenance time is ap-
proaching or has just passed.
• This display appears only when the maintenance func-

tion is set.
5. Function for showing precaution items

If there is any item of machine inspection before starting
day's work that indicates some abnormality, a corresponding
symbol mark is shown after the display of machine inspec-
tion before starting day's work.
6. Function for confirming working mode and travel speed
7. Function for display of ordinary items

The display of confirming working mode and travel speed is
switched to this display of ordinary items.
• If the working mode setting or travel speed setting is

changed, or auto-deceleration FNR setting is activated
while this is in display, an amplified corresponding sym-
bol mark is shown for two seconds.
• In this display, a symbol mark for preheat monitor is

shown only when preheating is carried out.
8. Function for adjusting display luminance and contrast

Contrast, brightness, clock and background colour of the
display can be adjusted by firstly pressing Maintenance key
[6] on the monitor then selecting item [01], [02], [03] or [04]
to adjust.
20-180 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

9. Function for adjusting breaker and attachment flow rate

(For machines equipped with breaker attachment)
When a breaker or other attachments are used, hydraulic
pump flow rate can be adjusted by operating the select
switch. a
• Note that the symbol mark and contents of display par-

tially differ between the breaker b
Select switch (5) is used to select the hydraulic flow setting

c
in each of the working modes P, E and B.
a. When the working mode is P or E
I. Press switch (5) and normal screen on monitor dis-

play changes to the screen shown in the diagram on
the right
II. Select 01 from the screen and the monitor display

changes to the flow setting screen shown on the
right (Full Flow). By pressing down switch (b) the
flow can be reduced.
OR
Select 02 from screen and the monitor display
changes to the flow setting. Press up switch (a) or
down switch (b) to adjust to the desired flow.
III. After completing the flow setting, press input confir-

mation switch (c).
The flow can be adjusted for the attachment installed.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-181

b. When working mode is B mode.
I. Press menu select switch (5) and the normal screen

on the monitor display changes to the screen shown
in the diagram on the right.
II. Select 01 from screen and the monitor display

changes to the flow setting screen shown on the
right.
III. Press up switch (a) or down switch (b) to adjust to

the desired flow.
IV. After completing the flow setting, press input confir-

mation switch (c).
V. With the operation in step 3, the flow setting screen

changes to the fine flow adjustment screen shown in
the diagram on the right.
VI. Press up switch (a) or down switch (b) to adjust to

the desired flow.
VII. After completing the flow setting press input confir-

mation switch (c).
20-182 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

For approximate flow rate setting look at flow rate table below.
Oil flow EPC Current

Segment
(l/min.) (mA)
1 30 500
2 40 515
3 50 535
4 60 545
5 70 560
6 80 573
7 90 587
8 100 600
9 110 605
10 120 618
11 130 625
12 140 640
13 150 650
14 160 665
15 170 675
10. Function for confirming maintenance information

Detailed information on maintenance items (set time and
elapse of time) can be confirmed and reset after the confir-
mation is feasible by operating the maintenance switch.
• Use service Menu for setting or releasing maintenance

items and setting maintenance time.
11. Function for showing service meter reading or clock

When key is turned to first position, the monitor is switched
on but the engine is not. In this position the service meter
reading is displayed. When starting up the engine, this dis-
play changes to the clock.
12. Function for showing occurrence of caution item

If any of the caution items occurs, the magnified correspond-
ing symbol mark is shown.
A Park brake
B Low Brake Pressure
C Undercarriage Attach Select.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-183

13. Function for showing users' code No.

When a problem occurs on the machine, the user's code is
automatically displayed depending on the magnitude of the
trouble to call attention of the operator for a proper action.
• This display turns to the display of service code and fail-

ure code, if operating the switch (Refer to Item No. 12)
• Relation between User Code and Action Directed to Op-

erator
User Code Failed System Action Directed to Operator
E02 PC-EPC Valve Ordinary work may be resumed by turning the emergency pump drive switch ON, but call for
the inspection service immediately.
E03 Swing Brake Release the brake after turning emergency swing and parking brake switch ON. When apply-
ing the swing brake, operate the swing lock switch manually. The swing brake may not be
released depending on the nature of the trouble. In either case, call for the inspection service
immediately.
E05 Governor The governor control has become inoperable. Operate the governor control lever manually. For
fixing the lever at full throttle position, use a fixing bolt provided at the bracket. In this case, call
for the inspection service immediately.
E20 Travel Emergency travel
20-184 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

14. Function for showing service code No. and failure code
No.
If the following switching operation is made while the users'
code No. is shown, a phone symbol (if registered), phone
numbers (if registered), service code No. and failure code
No. are shown in turn.
• Switching operation:(keep the switch depressed)
• The following display is repeated in turn, while the switch is

depressed.
(1) Telephone symbol mark
(2) Telephone No.
(3) Service code No. and failure code No.
The telephone symbol mark and telephone No. are shown

only when they are registered in the monitor panel.
For registration, correction and deletion of telephone No.,
use Service Menu.
• For details on the displayed service code No. and failure

code No., refer to the Table for Failure Code Nos.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-185

Table for failure code no.
User Trouble (Displayed on screen) Alarm Component Category of record

Failure code
code buzzer in charge
6B2JMA Travel Hydraulic Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
989L00 Engine Controller Lock Caution 1 MON Electrical system
989M00 Engine Controller Lock Caution 2 MON Electrical system
E20 989N00 Engine Controller Lock Caution 3 MON Electrical system
AA10NX Air Cleaner Clogging MON Mechanical system
AB00KE Charge Voltage Low MON Mechanical system
B@BAZG Eng Oil Press. Low ▲ ENG Mechanical system
B@BAZK Eng Oil Level Low MON Mechanical system
B@BCNS Eng Water Overheat ▲ ENG Mechanical system
B@BCZK Eng Water Level Low ▲ MON Mechanical system
B@HANS Hydr Oil Overheat ▲ PUMP Mechanical system
E10 CA111 EMC Critical Internal Failure ENG Electrical system
E10 CA1117 Persistent data lost error ENG Electrical system
E10 CA115 Eng Ne and Bkup Speed Sens Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA122 Chg Air Press Sensor High Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA123 Chg Air Press Sensor Low Error ENG Electrical system
E14 CA131 Throttle Sensor High Error ENG Electrical system
E14 CA132 Throttle Sensor Low Error ENG Electrical system
CA143 Oil, Pressure, Fueling Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA144 Coolant Temp Sens High Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA145 Coolant Temp Sens Low Error ENG Electrical system
CA146 Coolant, Temp, Fueling Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA153 Chg Air Temp Sensor High Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA154 Chg Air Temp Sensor Low Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA155 Chg Air Temp High Speed Derate ENG Electrical system
E0E CA1633 KOMNET Datalink Timeout Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA187 Sens Supply 2 Volt Low Error ENG Electrical system
E14 CA2185 Throt Sens Sup Volt High Error ENG Electrical system
E14 CA2186 Throt Sens Sup Volt Low Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA221 Ambient Press Sens High Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA222 Ambient Press Sens Low Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA2249 Rail Press Very Low Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA227 Sens Supply 2 Volt High Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA2311 IMV Solenoid Error ENG Electrical system
CA234 Eng Overspeed ENG Mechanical system
E15 CA238 Ne Speed Sens Supply Volt Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA2555 Grid Htr Relay Volt Low Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA2556 Grid Htr Relay Volt High Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA271 IMV/PCV1 Short Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA272 IMV/PCV1 Open Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA322 Inj #1 (L#1) Open/Short Error ENG Electrical system
20-186 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100


Failure code
E10 CA342 Calibration Code Incompatibility ENG Electrical system
E10 CA351 Injectors Drive Circuit Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA352 Sens Supply 1 Volt Low Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA386 Sens Supply 1 Volt High Error ENG Electrical system
CA415 Oil, pressure, RPM error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA428 Water in Fuel Sensor High Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA429 Water in Fuel Sensor Low Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA435 Eng Oil Press Sw Error ENG Electrical system
E10 CA441 Battery Voltage Low Error ENG Electrical system
E10 CA442 Battery Voltage High Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA449 Rail Press Very High Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA451 Rail Press Sensor High Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA452 Rail Press Sensor Low Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA488 Chg Air Temp High Torque Derate ENG Electrical system
E15 CA553 Rail Press High Error ENG Electrical system
E11 CA559 Rail Pressure Very Low Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA559 Rail Press Low Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA689 Eng Ne Speed Sensor Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA697 ECM Internal Temperature Sensor High Error PUMP Electrical system
E15 CA698 ECM Internal Temperature Sensor Low Error PUMP Electrical system
E15 CA731 Eng Bkup Speed Sens Phase Error ENG Electrical system
E10 CA757 All Persistent Data Lost Error ENG Electrical system
E15 CA778 Eng Bkup Speed Sensor Error ENG Electrical system
D110KB Battery Relay Short ENG Electrical system
E01 D19JKZ Personal Code Relay Abnormality MON2 Electrical system
D862KA GPS Antenna Discon MON2 Electrical system
E02 DA25KP Pressure Sensor Power Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
DA25KQ Model Selection Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
E0E DA2RMC CAN Discon (Pump Con Detected) PUMP Electrical system
E0E DAFRMC CAN Discon (Monitor Detected) MON Electrical system
E20 DDC3KZ Outrigger Switch Select Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
DDHPAKP Abnormality in Pump Pressure PUMP Electrical system
DDP4KX Travel PPC Pressure Switch Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
E20 DDWCKZ Direction Switch Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
DFB1KZ Service Lever Pot. 1 Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
DFB2KZ Service Level Pot. 2 Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
DFB3L8 Service Lever 1 Potentio Error PUMP Electrical system
DFB4L8 Service Lever 2 Potentio Error PUMP Electrical system
DFB5KZ Service Lever sPot. 1 Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
DFB6KZ Service Lever sPot. 2 Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
DGH2KB Hydr Oil Sensor Short PUMP Electrical system
DH1OKS Pressure Sensor Power Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
DHPAMA Abnormality in F Pump Pressure Sensor PUMP Electrical system
DHPBMA Abnormality in F Pump Pressure Sensor PUMP Electrical system
E20 DHS5KX Travel PPC Sensor Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
DHX1MA Overload Sensor Abnormality (Analog) PUMP Electrical system
E20 DLT4KA Speed Sensor Discon PUMP Electrical system
E20 DW27KA Transmission Clutch Solenoid Discon PUMP Electrical system
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-187


Failure code
E20 DW27KB Transmission Clutch Solenoid Short PUMP Electrical system
E20 DW44KA Travel FR Solenoid Discon PUMP Electrical system
E20 DW44KB Travel FR Solenoid Short PUMP Electrical system
E03 DW45KA Swing Brake Sol Discon PUMP Electrical system
E03 DW45KB Swing Brake Sol Short PUMP Electrical system
E20 DW4AKA Suspension Lock Solenoid Discon PUMP Electrical system
E20 DW4AKB Suspension Lock Solenoid Short PUMP Electrical system
DW4CKA PPC Lock Solenoid Discon PUMP Electrical system
DW4CKB PPC Lock Solenoid Short PUMP Electrical system
E20 DW4MKA Creep Solenoid Discon PUMP Electrical system
E20 DW4MKB Creep Solenoid Short PUMP Electrical system
E20 DW91KA Travel N Sol Discon PUMP Electrical system
E20 DW91KB Travel N Sol Short PUMP Electrical system
DWA2KA Service Sol Short PUMP Electrical system
DWA2KB Service Sol Short PUMP Electrical system
DWK0KA 2-stage Sol Discon PUMP Electrical system
DWK0KB 2-stage Sol Short PUMP Electrical system
DWK2KA 2 Stage Back pressure Solenoid Discon PUMP Electrical system
DWK2KB 2 Stage Back Pressure Solenoid Short PUMP Electrical system
DXA0KA Disconnection in PC-EPC Solenoid System MON Electrical system
DXA0KB Short-Circuiting in PC-EPC Solenoid
E02 DXA8KA PC-EPC Sol Discon PUMP Electrical system
E02 DXA8KB PC-EPC Sol Short PUMP Electrical system
DXE0KA LS-EPC Sol Discon PUMP Electrical system
DXE0KB LS-EPC Sol Short PUMP Electrical system
DXE4KA Service Current EPC Discon PUMP Electrical system
DXE4KB Service Current EPC Short PUMP Electrical system
DXE7KA Service Current EPC 2 Open Circuit PUMP Electrical system
DXE7KB Service Current EPC 2 Open Circuit PUMP Electrical system
DXEAKA Service Current EPC 1 Open Circuit PUMP Electrical system
DXEAKB Service Current EPC 1 Open Circuit PUMP Electrical system
DY20KA Wiper Working Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
DY20MA Wiper Parking Abnormality PUMP Electrical system
DY2CKB Washer Drive Short PUMP Electrical system
DY2DKB Wiper Drive (For) Short PUMP Electrical system
DY2EKB Wiper Drive (Rev) Short PUMP Electrical system
20-188 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

• Entry order of items in table
The items are entered in the order of their failure codes (in-
cremental order).
• User code
Attached: If the failure code is detected, the user code, fail-

ure code, and telephone No. (if registered) are displayed on
the ordinary screen to notify the operator of the abnormality.
Not attached: Even if the failure code is detected, the ma-

chine monitor does not notify the operator of the abnormali-
ty.
• Alarm buzzer
: When occurrence of an error is notified to the operator,

the buzzer sounds (The operator can stop the buzzer with
the alarm buzzer cancel switch).
▲: Since the caution monitor is also turned ON, its function

sounds the buzzer.
• Component in charge
MON: The machine monitor is in charge of detection of ab-

normality.
ENG: The engine controller is in charge of detection of ab-

normality.
PUMP: The pump controller is in charge of detection of ab-

normality.
• Category of record
Mechanical system: Abnormality information is recorded in

the mechanical system abnormality record.
Electrical system: Abnormality information is recorded in the

electrical system abnormality record.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-189

Operation and display of service menu
Way of switching to Service Menu

• When using Service Menu, change the display to Service
Menu display through the following special operation.
1. Confirmation of display
Confirm that the display of ordinary items is shown (Normal-

ly engine stopped).
• Changing to Service Menu cannot be made from dis-

plays other than this.
2. Switch operation
Operate the switch as instructed below.
• Switch operation: [ ] + [1] › [2] › [3]
3. Showing Service Menu display
The display is changed to the initial display of Service Menu

program. Select an appropriate item from among the menu.
No. Service Menu
01 Monitoring
02 Abnormality Record
03 Maintenance Record
04 Maintenance Mode Change
05 Phone Number Entry
06 Default
07 Adjustment
08 Cylinder Cut - Out
09 No Injection
4. Termination of Service Menu function
When terminating the initial display or any subsequent dis- A

play of Service Menu, do that through any one of the follow-
ing methods.
(1) Depress [ ] switch. (This method may be used for ter-

minating any display)
(2) If "Return" switch is shown, depress it.
(3) If "Return" menu is shown, call that menu and depress

[ ] switch.
20-190 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

1. Function of Monitoring [01]

The monitor panel monitors signals from an assortment of
switches, sensors and actuators installed in various parts of
the machine. Monitored information can be put in display or
confirmed on a real time basis through the following opera-
tions.
a. Selection of menu
Select "01 Monitoring" in the initial display of Service
Menu and depress [] switch.
b. Setting of monitoring item

Select or register an item to be monitored through the
following switch operation.
• [ ] switch: Selection
• [ ] switch: Selection
• [ ] switch: Registration
• A monitoring item can be set in any number between the

min. one to the max. four. (Depending upon the selected
item, the max. number maybe less than four)
• In case of monitoring 1 to 3 items, move to the monitored in-

formation display through any of the following switch opera-
tions, after the registration work has been completed.
• Keep [ ] switch depressed. (For about 3 seconds)
• Select Menu 999 and depress [ ] switch.
• The display automatically moves to the display of monitored

information, when all of the registrable items have been duly
registered.
• Monitored information are transmitted via communication

circuits. Thus the number of selected items can impact the
communication speed. If truly real time monitoring is re-
quired, reduce the selected items to the minimum.
• For details on the monitoring items, display unit, etc., refer to

the Table for Monitoring Items.
c. Monitoring operation
Call the monitoring information display and confirm the
monitored information, while operating the machine.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-191

d. Monitored information holding function

If [ ] switch is depressed while monitoring, all the mon-
itored information are put on hold. If [ ] switch is de-
pressed in this condition, information holding is
released.
e. Machine setting mode switching function

If it becomes necessary to change the settings of work-
ing mode, select mode, travel speed and auto-decel
while in the monitoring display windows, for example en-
gine speed (code 01002), depress switch 1 on the mon-
itor keypad, the mode confirmation display is shown.
Then each can be changed as normal.
• An illustration at right shows the display in P mode.

Symbol marks are partially different in B mode.
• When a specific setting is confirmed, depress [ ]

switch, then the display returns to that of monitoring.
• In case a specific setting has been changed while moni-

toring, the new setting is still maintained when returning
from Service Menu to Operator's Menu after the moni-
toring is finished.
20-192 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Table for monitoring items
Code Monitoring item (Display on screen) Unit (Initial setting: ISO) Com-
No. ponent
Remarks
ISO meter inch in
charge
00200 Controller Model Select — PUMP
00201 Machine ID — ENG
01002 Engine speed r/min rpm rpm ENG
01601 2nd Eng. Speed Command r/min rpm rpm PUMP
40011 Travel Speed KpH KpH MpH MON
07101 Travel PPC Pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
01100 Pump Pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
04107 Coolant Temperature °C °C °F ENG
04401 Hydr. Oil Temperature °C °C °F PUMP
01300 PC-EPC Sol. Curr. mA mA mA PUMP
01500 LS-EPC Sol. Curr. mA mA mA PUMP
01701 Service Solenoid 1 Curr. mA mA mA PUMP
03200 Battery Voltage V V V PUMP
03203 Battery Power Supply V V V ENG
04300 Battery Charge Vol. V V V MON
01006 Engine Speed rpm rpm rpm PUMP
36400 Rail Pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi ENG
37400 Ambient Pressure kPa kg/cm2 psi ENG
18500 Charge Temperature °C °C °F ENG
Boost Pressure Absolute value indication

36500 kPa kg/cm2 psi ENG (including atmospheric
pressure)
36700 Engine Torque Ratio % % % ENG
18700 Engine Output Torque Nm kgm lbft ENG
32902 Angle sensor Deg. Deg. Deg. Deg. MON
03000 Fuel Dial Pos Sens Volt V V V ENG
04200 Fuel Level Sensor Vol. V V V MON
04105 Eng. Water Temp. Vol. Lo V V V ENG
04402 Hydr. Temp. Sensor Vol. V V V PUMP
37401 Ambient Press Sens Volt V V V ENG
18501 Charge Temp Sens Volt V V V ENG
36501 Charge Press Sens Volt V V V ENG
36401 Rail Pressure Sens Volt V V V ENG
17500 Engine Power Mode — ENG
31701 Throttle Position % % % ENG
31706 Final Throttle Position % % % ENG
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-193

No. ponent
Remarks
ISO meter inch in
charge
18600 Inject Fueling Command mg/st mg/st mg/st ENG
36200 Rail Press Command MPa kg/cm2 psi ENG
36300 Injection Timing Command CA CA CA ENG
37300 Fuel Rate l/h l/h gal/h ENG
01602 2nd Eng. Speed Command % % % PUMP
13113 Main Pump Absorb Torque Nm kgm lbft PUMP
15900 Boom Bottom Pressure MPa kg/cm2 psi PUMP
Pressure Switch 1 Swing ON•OFF PUMP
Boom Lower ON•OFF PUMP
01900 Boom Raise ON•OFF PUMP
Arm Curl ON•OFF PUMP
Arm Dump ON•OFF PUMP
Pressure Switch 2 Bucket Curl ON•OFF PUMP
Bucket Dump ON•OFF PUMP
01901 Service ON•OFF PUMP
Travel Forward ON•OFF PUMP
Travel Reverse ON•OFF PUMP
Solenoid Valve 1 Travel Junction ON•OFF PUMP
Swing Brake ON•OFF PUMP

02300
2-Stage Relief ON•OFF PUMP
Travel Speed ON•OFF PUMP
Solenoid Valve 2 Suspension Lock ON•OFF PUMP
PPC Lock ON•OFF PUMP
2-Stage Back Pressure ON•OFF PUMP

02301
Travel Neutral ON•OFF PUMP
Travel Forward/Reverse ON•OFF PUMP
Boom/Outrigger ON•OFF PUMP
Switch Input 1 Travel Sw. F ON•OFF PUMP
Travel Sw. R ON•OFF PUMP
Lever Sw. (P.Max) ON•OFF PUMP

02200
Swing Release Sw. ON•OFF PUMP
Swing Brake Sw. ON•OFF PUMP
Travel Sw. N ON•OFF PUMP
Switch Input 2 Model Select 1 ON•OFF PUMP
Model Select 2 ON•OFF PUMP

02201
Overload Alarm ON•OFF PUMP
02202 Switch Input 3 Key Switch (ACC) ON•OFF PUMP
20-194 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

No. ponent
Remarks
ISO meter inch in
charge
Switch Input 4 Boom/Outrigger ON•OFF PUMP
Breaker Sw. ON•OFF PUMP
Service R Sw. ON•OFF PUMP

02203
Service L Sw. ON•OFF PUMP
Safety Lock Sw. ON•OFF PUMP
Quick Coupler ON•OFF PUMP
Switch Input 5 Parking Brake ON•OFF PUMP
Brake Pressure Low ON•OFF PUMP
02204 Travel position ON•OFF PUMP
Lever Neutral 1 ON•OFF PUMP
Lever Neutral 2 ON•OFF PUMP
03700 Controller Output 1 Battery Relay ON•OFF MON
Monitor input 1 Key Switch ON•OFF MON
Start ON•OFF MON
04500 Preheat ON•OFF MON
Light ON•OFF MON
Rad. Level ON•OFF MON
Monitor Input 2 Air cleaner ON•OFF MON
04501 Eng. Oil Level ON•OFF MON
Quick Coupler ON•OFF MON
04502 Monitor Input 3 Swing Brake Sw. ON•OFF MON
Monitor Function F1 ON•OFF MON

Switches
F2 ON•OFF MON
F3 ON•OFF MON
04503
F4 ON•OFF MON
F5 ON•OFF MON
F6 ON•OFF MON
Monitor 1st & 2nd SW1 ON•OFF MON

Row Switches
SW2 ON•OFF MON
SW3 ON•OFF MON

04504
SW4 ON•OFF MON
SW5 ON•OFF MON
SW6 ON•OFF MON
18800 Water In Fuel ON•OFF ENG WIF: Water In Fuel
20216 ECM Build Version — ENG
20217 ECM CAL Data Ver — ENG
18900 ECM Internal Temp °C °C °F ENG
20400 ECM Serial No — ENG
20227 Monitor Ass'y P/N — MON
20402 Monitor Serial No — MON
20200 Monitor Prog. Version — MON
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-195

No. ponent
Remarks
ISO meter inch in
charge
20229 Pump Con. Ass'y P/N — PUMP
20403 Pump Con. Serial No — PUMP
20230 Pump Con. Prog. P/N — PUMP
20212 Pump Con. Prog. Version — PUMP
42008 Lever Potentio 1 Volts (Main) V V V PUMP
42009 Lever Potentio 1 Volts (Sub) V V V PUMP
42010 Lever Potentio 2 Volts (Main) V V V PUMP
42011 Lever Potentio 2 Volts (Sub) V V V PUMP
42012 Lever Potentio 1 Stroke % % % PUMP
42013 Lever Potentio 2 Stroke % % % PUMP
• Select the most favorite display unit from among the pre-
pared three kinds, i.e. ISO, meter and inch. When changing
one display unit for another, refer to "Unit" in the initial value
setting of Service Menu.
• Abbreviations, ABN and NOR, stand for the following condi-

tions.
ABN: Abnormal,
NOR: Normal
2. Function for Abnormality Record [02]

The monitor panel records failures that occurred on the ma-
chines in the past after classifying them into failures in the
electric system and those in the mechanical system. Infor-
mation on them can be displayed through the following oper-
ation.
Select 02 Abnormality Record in the initial display of
Service Menu and depress [ ] switch.
A
b. Selection of Submenu
Select an appropriate item from Submenu in the Abnor-
mality Record display and depress [ ] switch.
No. Abnormality Record Submenu
00 Return
(termination of Abnormality Record)
01 Electrical System
02 Mechanical Systems
20-196 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

c. Information shown in display of Abnormality Record in

the electrical system
(1):
The numerator expresses sequence of failure occur-
rence, counting from the latest one. The denominator
expresses the total number of a specific failure record-
ed.
(2):
Failure Code No. (system in 4 digits and phenomenon in
2 digits)
(3):
Time elapsed since the occurrence of the first failure
(4):
Contents of failure
• See chapter 20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING "Table

for failure code no." on page20-186.
d. Information shown in display of Failure History in the

mechanical systems
(1):
Record No.
(2):
Contents of Failure
(3):
Failure Code No. (system in 4 digits and phenomenon in
2 digits)
(4):
Total number of occurrence
(5):
Service meter reading at the initial occurrence
• See chapter 20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING "Table

for failure code no." on page20-186.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-197

e. Resetting Electrical Systems
• Resetting Electrical Systems (deletion) is possible

only with the electrical system. The failure history in
the mechanical system cannot be reset.
• For resetting any specific or all information in the

Electrical Systems, follow the operation explained
below.
I. Through the following switch operation, call the re-

setting display in the display of Electrical Systems.
• Switch operation:
[ ] +[1] › [2] › [3]
• This is the same switch operation in changing the

display to Service Menu.
II. Operate the switch, following the instructions shown

in the resetting display.
• When resetting specific information only, call the display of

that specific information and reset it with either [ ] switch or
[ ] switch.
• When resetting all the information, a display will be shown

asking you to confirm your choice.
20-198 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

3. Function for Maintenance Record [03]

The monitor panel records information on the maintenance
of filters and oils. The stored information can be displayed
through the following switch operation.
Select 03 Maintenance Record in Service Menu and de-
press [ ] switch.
b. Information to be displayed
(1):
Name of oils and filters
(2):
Times of replacement to date
(3):
Service meter reading at the latest replacement
Code Name Of Oils And Filters A
01 Engine Oil
02 Engine Oil Filter
03 Fuel Main Filter
41 Fuel Pre-Filter
04 Hydraulic Oil Filter
05 Hydraulic Tank Breather
06 Corrosion Resistor
07 PTO Oil
09 Swing machinery
10 Hydraulic Oil
12 Transmission Oil
15 Axle Oil
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-199

4. Function for Maintenance Mode Change [04]

Conditions set for controlling maintenance display function
can be changed in the following manner.
• Turn the function effectual or ineffectual.
• Change the set interval for replacement.
Select 04 Maintenance Mode Change in the initial dis-
play of Service Menu, and depress [ ] switch.
b. Selection of item to be changed

Select an item to be changed in the display of Mainte-
nance Mode Change Selecting Menu.
No. Maintenance mode change item
00 Return
01 Maintenance Mode On/Off
02 Engine Oil Exch. Int.
03 Engine Oil Filter Exch. Int.
04 Fuel Main Filter Exch. Int.
05 Fuel Pre-Filter Exch. Int.
06 Hydr. Oil Filter Exch. Int.
07 H/Tank Breather Exch. Int.
08 Corro. Resis. Exch. Int.
09 PTO Oil Service Int.
10 S/Machinery Oil Exch. Int.
11 Hydraulic Oil Exch. Int.
12 Transmission Oil Exch. Int.
13 Axle Oil Exch. Int.
14 Use Default Values
• 01 and 14 menus are provided for setting the whole

maintenance mode, while those from 02 through 13 are
for setting individual items.
c. Contents of Maintenance Mode On/Off
• Use: The maintenance display function of all oil and fil-

ter-related items are turned effectual. (Irrespective of
whether "On" or "Off" set for individual items, this setting
prevails)
• Do not use: The maintenance display function of all oil

and filter-related items are turned ineffectual. (Irrespec-
tive of whether "On" or "Off" set for individual items, this
setting prevails)
20-200 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

d. Set contents of individual items
(1):
Default: The maintenance time set in the monitor (rec-
ommended by the manufacturer and cannot be
changed).
(2):
Set: Maintenance time that can be freely set. The main-
tenance mode program functions based on this mainte-
nance time. (The maintenance time can be increased or
decreased by 50 hours with [ ] or [ ] switch)
(3):
On: Maintenance display function with this instruction
becomes effectual.
(4):
Off: Maintenance display with this instruction becomes
ineffectual.
• The lowest maintenance time is 50 h.
e. Set contents of "Use Default Values"

When selecting this menu and depressing the switch
[ ], all individual time settings are returned to the facto-
ry settings.
5. Function for Phone Number Entry [05]

In the display of User Code, a telephone number and Error
Code are shown alternately. Phone number can be input or
modified in the following manner.
• If there is no Phone number registered, the display for

Phone numbers does not appear.
Select 05 Phone Number Entry menu in the display of
Service Menu, and depress [ ] switch.
b. Changing the display

Select Entry next to change the display to the Phone
Number Entry display.
• Even if a Phone number is already inputted, it is de-

leted, upon switching to the Phone Number Entry
display.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-201

c. Entry and setting Phone number

Follow the method explained below, enter a Phone
number in the Phone Number Entry display. (Entry auto-
matically begins with a cursor at the left end)
I. Enter a number into a cursor at the left end (using

characters 0-9).
II. Depress [ ] switch when all the numbers have

been entered.
• Numbers can be entered up to the max. 12 digits,

but omit unnecessary digits.
• When entering a wrong number, depress [B] switch,

then the cursor goes back by one digit.
• When input is finished, the display changes to Entry

display shown above. If the inputted Phone number
is shown in this display, the input is connect.
6. Function for Default [06]

It is possible to change the following settings for the monitor
panel as well as the machine. Make changes as required.
B
• Working mode when the engine starting switch is in the
ON position.
• Display unit in the monitoring function
• With/Without Service Circuit.
Select 06 "Default menu" in the initial display of Service
Menu, and depress [ ] switch.
b. Selection of submenu
Select an item to change from the submenu, and de-
press [ ] switch.
No. Default submenu
00 Return (Termination of Default)
01 Key-on Mode
02 Language
03 Unit
04 With/Without Service Circuit
20-202 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

c. Function for Key-on Mode

When the engine starting switch is turned ON, a working
mode can be set that is shown in the monitor panel.
• P, E, L and B Modes: If any of them is set, the ma-

chine always starts up with that working mode,
when turning the engine starting switch ON.
• Mode at Previous Key-off: If this mode is set, the

machine starts up with the same working mode as
when the machine was last used.
• Default Value: If this mode is set, the machine starts

up with the mode (P mode) set at the original factory
setting.
• Irrespective of this setting mode, a machine "With

service circuit" always starts up with B mode, when
the engine starting switch is turned ON at the sub- Language
sequent operation, if that was the working mode
used in the last machine work.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-203

d. Function for unit selection

As the unit to be used in the monitoring function display
of Service Menu, three kinds of unit are provided.
• Unit used for default setting in the monitor panel is

SI, i.e. International System of Units.
e. Function for selecting distinction of With/Without Service

Circuit.
It is possible in this function to set a distinction between
with or without service circuit.
• With Service Circuit: When an attachment is in-

stalled.
• Without Service Circuit: When no attachment is in-

stalled.
• If "With Service Circuit" setting is not made in this

display, when it is actually installed on a specific ma-
chine, the SELECT function in Operator's Mode (at-
tachment oil flow rate adjustment) cannot be used.
7. Function for Adjustment [07]

The monitor panel has a function of making various adjust-
ments of the machine.
Select 07 adjustment in the initial display of Service
Menu, and depress [ ] switch.
b. Selection of submenu
Select an item to change from the submenu and de-
press [ ] switch.
No. Adjustment submenu

Compound Op. ATT Flow Adj.
00 Return (termination of adjustment) 1st ATT. Flow R Adj.
1st ATT. Flow L Adj.
01 Pump Absorbtion Torque 2nd ATT. Flow R Adj.
6 2nd ATT. Flow L Adj.
02 Compound Op. ATT. Flow Adj.
03 1st ATT. Flow R Adj.
04 1st ATT. Flow L Adj.
05 2nd ATT. Flow R Adj.
06 2nd ATT. Flow L Adj.
20-204 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

c. Function for Pump Absorption Torque adjustment.

The pump absorption torque can be adjusted within the
range shown in the table below.
Adjustment value Torque adjustment value
220 +4.0 kgm
221 +3.0 kgm
222 +2.0 kgm
223 +1.0 kgm
224 0.0 kgm
225 –1.0 kgm
226 –2.0 kgm
227 –3.0 kgm
228 –4.0 kgm
d. Function for ATT. Flow Adjust.

When a machine is used for a compound operation i.e Compound Op. ATT. Flow Adj.
Boom raise and service attachment is altered. Distribu-
tion of hydraulic pump oil flow can be adjusted within the
range shown in the table below.
Adjustment value Distribution of oil flow to attachment
370 0.5 x normal flow

Segment No.
Adjustment value 370 (Heavy ATT)
Default
Oil flow
Segment EPC current (mA)
(L/min)
1 30 485
2 35 495
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3 40 504
4 50 532
5 60 540
6 80 582
7 100 615
8 (Default) 115 644
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-205

Adjustment value 371 (Medium ATT)
Oil flow
(L/min)
1 30 485
2 39 504
3 56 533
4 70 558
5 84 585
6 112 638
7 140 688
8 (Default) 160 722
Adjustment value 372 (Light ATT)
Oil flow
(L/min)
1 30 485
2 55 535
3 80 582
4 100 615
5 120 651
6 160 722
7 200 780
8 (Default) 230 900
Adjustment value 373 (Super heavy ATT)
Oil flow
(L/min)
1 30 485
2 30 485
3 35 495
4 40 504
5 48 428
6 64 548
7 80 582
8 (Default) 92 600
20-206 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

8. Function of cylinder cut out mode operation [08]

Operator can operate the machine in the cylinder cut out
mode with the monitor panel.
Cylinder cut out mode operation means to run the engine
with 1 or more fuel injectors disabled electrically to reduce
the number of effective cylinders. This operation is used to
find out a cylinder which does not output power normally (or,
combustion in it is abnormal).
a. Selecting menu.
On the initial screen of the service menu, select "09 cyl- A
inder cut out mode operation" and press the [ ] switch.
b. Setting cylinders to be disabled.

Press switches [1] - [6] on the monitor panel corre-
sponding to the cylinder No. to be disabled. Engine Speed - 825 rpm
Inject Fuelling Compound - 3.0mg/st
• After a switch is pressed, if the cylinder No. corre-
sponding to it on the monitor panel is displayed in a 3
white frame, the cylinder is disabled (If setting is
wrong, press the same switch again). 6
• Only one or more cylinders can be disabled for the

reduced cylinder mode operation.
5
c. Cancellation of disabled cylinders.

Press switches [1] - [6] on the monitor panel corre-
sponding to the disabled cylinder No. to cancel disabling
of those cylinders.
Engine Speed - 1250 rpm
• After a switch is pressed, if the cylinder No. correspond-
ing to it on the monitor panel is displayed black in a
black frame, disabling of the cylinder is cancelled

3
6
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-207

d. Function of holding engine speed.

If the [ ] switch is pressed while the reduced cylinder
mode operation screen is used, the engine speed is
held and displayed on the lower line. Inject Fuelling Compound - 3.0mg/st
If the [ ]] switch is pressed while the engine speed is
held, holding the engine speed is cancelled and the en-
gine speed displayed on the lower line goes off.
• If the holding function is used, the held engine

speed is displayed in () on the lower line and the
current engine speed is displayed on the upper line.
• The holding function can be used both in and out of

the cylinder cut out made.
How to use holding function effectively. Engine Speed - 1250 rpm

(1250 rpm)
The engine speed displayed by the holding function is held (3.0mg/st)
on the screen until the holding function is cancelled, regard-
less of setting and cancellation of the cylinder cut out mode.
Accordingly, a defective cylinder can be found out effectively
according to the following procedure.
I. Run the engine normally (without disabling any cyl-

inder) and hold the engine speed. TJP03157
II. Disable a cylinder to be checked.
III. Run the engine under the same condition as normal Engine Speed - 1480 rpm
operation in step (1) and compare the engine speed (1480 rpm)
at this time with the held engine speed. Inject Fuelling Compound - 3.0mg/st
(3.0mg/st)
IV. Cancel the cylinder cut out mode, regardless of the 3
change of the engine speed.
6
V. Repeat steps (2) - (4) to check the other cylinders
• If the engine speed does not lower at all or lowers

less when the cylinder is selected for the cylinder
cut out mode operation, combustion in that cylinder
must be abnormal.

(1480 rpm)
(3.0mg/st)
3
6
TJP03158
20-208 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

9. Function of no injection cranking [09]

No injection cranking denotes stopping injection of fuel from
the injector even if the engine is run from the starting motor.
This mode is used, for instance, for measurement of com-
pressive pressure.
• This setting must be done after stopping the engine.
a. Selecting menu
Select “09 No Injection Cranking” from the service menu
initial screen and press [P] switch.
A
b. The initial screen for the no injection cranking will ap-

pear.
• “Check Communication” will be displayed in red.
c. As the checkup is over, following screen appears.
d. Select “No Injection” and press [P] switch. “Under Prep-

aration” will be displayed on the screen.
• The letters “Under Preparation” are displayed in red.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-209

e. As the preparation for no injection cranking is complet-

ed, display of “Under Preparation” is replaced with “After
No Injection”.
• The letters “After No Injection” are displayed in

green.
f. From this state, crank the engine using the starting mo-
tor.
• Limit the cranking time to 20 seconds to protect the

starting motor.
g. After the no injection cranking is over, press [ ] switch

from the previous screen and the letters “End” will be
displayed for 3 seconds.
• The letters “End” are displayed in green.
h. Press “Return” when ending the no injection cranking.
• If the no injection cranking function is inadvertently

selected while the engine is running, “Engine Run-
ning” will appear as No Injection in step 4) is select-
ed. This “Engine Running” display remains on the
screen even after the engine is stopped. Restoring
the service menu screen alone deletes the display.
20-210 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Procedure for turning on KOMTRAX terminal
Procedure for turning on KOMTRAX terminal

When the machine is delivered, KOMTRAX terminal is in-
stalled:
★ When the machine is delivered, KOMTRAX terminal is in-
stalled (machine with the standard equipment), implement
the following procedure.
1. Reporting of machine model, model number and serial

number
Report the machine model, model number and serial
number to the person responsible to operation of KOM-
TRAX.
2. Registration of KOMTRAX terminal

The person responsible to operation of KOMTRAX shall reg-
ister the subject terminal using the KOMTRAX client PC.
★ See “KOMTRAX administrator manual” for the proce-

dure.
★ Above completes the necessary operations.
When installing KOMTRAX terminal after the machine is de-

livered:
★ When installing KOMTRAX terminal after the machine is de-
livered (machine with the retrospective equipment), imple-
ment the following procedure.
1. Station opening inspection

★ Referencing “Preparation work for troubleshooting of
electrical system”, confirm the position of KOMTRAX
terminal and the inspecting connector (the inspecting
connector is provided at the bottom of KOMTRAX termi-
nal).
★ Finish the operations of steps d) to g) within 30 seconds.
a. Turn OFF the starting switch and then, after making sure
5 seconds have elapsed, proceed to the next step.
b. Make sure visually that the inspecting connectors 1 and

2 are connected.
• Inspecting connector 1:
G02 (female) and G03 (male)
• Inspecting connector 2:
G04 (female) and G05 (male)
c. Disconnect the inspecting connector 1 and maintain that

state for 5 seconds.
d. Turn ON the starting switch and maintain that state for 5

seconds.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-211

Procedure for turning on KOMTRAX terminal TESTING AND ADJUSTING
e. Disconnect the inspecting connector 2 and maintain that

state for 5 seconds.
f. Connect the inspecting connector 1 again and maintain

that state for 5 seconds.
g. Connect the inspecting connector 2 again and maintain

h. Make sure that the KOMTRAX terminal 7-segment indi-

cator lamp is normally turned on.
★ As [Normal] is indicated, proceed to the next step.
★ If [Abnormal] is indicated, repeat the procedure from

step a).
i. Set the starting switch to START position and maintain it

in that state for 5 seconds. Make sure the engine is not
started.
★ If the engine is started, repeat the procedure from

step a).
j. Return the starting switch to ON position and maintain

★ Don't return it to OFF position.
k. Set the starting switch to START position again and

make sure the engine is started.
20-212 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

l. Make sure that the KOMTRAX terminal indicator lamps

are normally turned on.
NOTE
The third number on the display can be “2” or “3” though “3” is dis-
played in above figure (both for the normal state and when trou-
ble is present).
★ As [Normal] is confirmed, proceed to the next step

(it will take 90 seconds to 15 minutes until normal
display is restored).
★ If [GPS position data sensing error] were displayed,

check the GPS antenna and cable for external trou-
bles. If any, repair the trouble and repeat the proce-
dure from step a).
★ If [Receiving error] were displayed, check the com-

munication antenna and cable for external troubles.
If any, repair the trouble and repeat the procedure
from step a).
★ If [GPS position data sensing error and Receiving

error] were displayed, check the GPS antenna and
cable as well as the communication antenna and
cable for external troubles. If any, repair the trouble
and repeat the procedure from step a).
★ If [Network error] were displayed, check the indica-

tion of [LED-C4] referencing “KOMTRAX terminal
lamp indications”. (When CAN is not recognized,
check KOMTRAX terminal CAN harness for trou-
bles. If any, repair the trouble and repeat the proce-
dure from step a).
m. Turn the starting switch OFF.
n. Make sure that the 7-segment indicator lamp (a) comes

on normally in 10 seconds.
★ As [Normal] is displayed, the station opening in-

spection is complete.
★ If [Abnormal] is displayed, the inspection is incom-

plete and must be repeated from step a).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-213

2. Application for start of use

★ The application for start of use is allowed only after the
terminal station opening inspection has been success-
fully ended.
a. Concerning the machine body for which the station

opening inspection has been completed, report the fol-
lowing information to the person responsible to opera-
tion of KOMTRAX.
I. Information of the machine body for which the sta-

tion opening inspection has been completed (ma-
chine model, model number and serial number)
II. Part number and serial number of KOMTRAX termi-

nal
III. The service meter reading when KOMTRAX termi-

nal was installed (in 0.1 h unit)
b. The person responsible to operation of KOMTRAX shall

register the machine body using the KOMTRAX client
PC.
★ See “KOMTRAX administrator manual” for the pro-

cedure.
★ Above completes the necessary operations.
20-214 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

KOMTRAX terminal lamp indications
LED for communication module LED for CPU 7-segment and dot for CPU
1. LED-A1 (Power lamp) 6. LED-C1 (R signal and ACC signal) 12. 7-segment
2. LED-A2 (Within communication range lamp) 7. LED-C2 (Initial output state) (Number of mails not transmitted yet)
3. LED-A2 (Communication in progress lamp) 8. LED-C3 (S-NET and C signal state) 13. Dot (GPS positioning state)
4. LED-A2 (Internal transmitting lamp) 9. LED-C4 (CAN state)
5. LED-A2 (Internal receiving lamp) 10. LED-C5 (Download writing state)
11. LED-C6 (Download writing state)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-215

KOMTRAX system displays various information in the system as

well as contents of information processing on the LED display
unit located at the top of KOMTRAX terminal. Thus, when a fail-
ure on the system is suspected, implement the following check-
ups.
• Checking antennas
• Checking terminal LED display
Before using Komtrax the application for start of use and the ma-
chine side station opening inspection must be completed.
When above is not completed, all LEDs for the communication

module are turned off. It does not indicate the machine trouble.
Checking antennas
★ Before inspecting display of LED, check the communication
antenna and its vicinity as well as GPS antenna and its vi-
cinity for any trouble.
• The communication antenna shall not be disconnected or

damaged.
• The communication antenna cable shall not be broken and

shall be appropriately connected to KOMTRAX terminal.
• GPS antenna shall not be disconnected or damaged.
• GPS antenna cable shall not be broken and shall be appro-

priately connected to KOMTRAX terminal.
Checking terminal LED indication

1. Display contents of LED for communication module
★ Turn ON the starting switch prior to inspection of LED dis-

play.
No. LED Name and function Display Contents of display
ON
1 LED-A1 Power lamp LED stays turned on as long as power is supplied normally
OFF
Within communica- ON LED comes on as the machine body moves inside the communication range of
2 LED-A2
tion range lamp OFF KOMTRAX system.
ON LED stays turned on as long as KOMTRAX terminal is connected to KOMTRAX

Communication in
3 LED-A3 server.
progress lamp
OFF (Connection is made only needed)
ON LED stays turned on as long as data transmission is continued from CPU to the
Internal transmit-
4 LED-A4 communication module.
ting lamp
OFF (Transmission is made only needed)
ON LED stays turned on as long as the communication module is receiving data from
Internal receiving
5 LED-A5 CPU.
lamp
OFF (Receiving is made only needed)
20-216 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

2. Display contents of LED for CPU
★ Turn ON, START the starting switch or the engine prior to in-
spection of LED display.
No. LED Name and function Display Contents of display
ON Starting switch ACC signal: ON, Alternator R signal: ON
Quick
State of starting switch Starting switch ACC signal: ON, Alternator R signal: OFF
flashing
6 LED-C1 ACC signal, alternator R
signal Slow
Starting switch ACC signal: OFF, Alternator R signal: ON
flashing
OFF Starting switch ACC signal: OFF, Alternator R signal: OFF
State of engine control ON Engine control signal: ON

7 LED-C2
signal OFF Engine control signal: OFF
ON S-NET: Connection and starting switch C signal: OFF
Quick
State of S-NET connec- Starting switch C signal: ON
flashing
8 LED-C3 tion and starting switch C
signal Slow
(Not used)
flashing
OFF S-NET: Non-connection and starting switch C signal: OFF
ON CAN: Present (Fuel sensor: Absent)
Quick
CAN: Present (Fuel sensor: Present)
flashing
9 LED-C4 State of CAN connection
Slow
CAN: Absent (Fuel sensor: Present)
flashing
OFF CAN: Absent (Fuel sensor: Absent)
Single
10 LED-C5 Download writing mode (Special function for system administrator)
side ON
Download writing state Both
11 LED-C6 sides Normal working mode
OFF
★ Types of flashing and flashing duration

Quick flashing: Flashing of approximately 1 second cycle
Slow flashing: Flashing of approximately 4 seconds cycle
3. Display contents of 7-segment and dots for CPU
★ Turn ON the starting switch prior to inspection of LED dis-

play.
No. Display unit Name and function Display Contents of display
Number of mails not

12 7-segment 0–9 Number of mails not transmitted yet
transmitted yet
Positioning with GPS complete (Position is recognized

ON
State of positioning See * mark)
13 Dot
with GPS Positioning with GPS incomplete (Position is not recognized
OFF
See * mark)
* In a outdoor location within radio waves penetration range, it

sometimes takes more than a minute from turning on of the
starting switch to completion of the positioning.
Positioning is not available in a location where radio waves are
extremely weak or unreachable.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-217

( PW200/220-7E0 )
PW200/220
20-218 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
bar bar bar bar bar
PW200/PW220-7E0
[3b]
bar
bar
VEBM949100
[3b] PC-EPC valve output (port PM ) pressure (60 bar)
[5] Control circuit source pressure [LS-EPC valve output -
(port PSIG ) pressure] (60 bar)
[3a] Front servo piston inlet (port PenF ) pressure (600 bar)
[4a] Rear servo piston inlet (port PenR ) pressure (600 bar)
[4a]
[3a]
[1] Front main pump (port PFC ) pressure (600 bar)

[2] Rear main pump (port PRC ) pressure (600 bar)
[3] Front LS pressure (600 bar)

[4] Rear LS pressure (600 bar)
[4]
[3]
KPS00045
20-219
20-220 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

4 Inspection of hydraulic circuit
Condition Setting kg/cm 2 kg/cm 2 kg/cm 2 kg/cm 2
No Part to be checked Fuel Dial Working Auto One-touch main pump main pump LS Control circuit main pump servo Remarks
Work equipment operation
mode decelerator power max switch pressure
/-+ /- +
1 PPC circuit Circuit pressure 3.8 0.2MPa (38 2.0kg/cm 2)
OFF /- /-
2 Main relief valve Arm dumping relief 34.8 + 0.5MPa (355 + 5kg/cm 2)
PW200/PW220-7E0
+/- +/- 2
3 (When power increased) ON 37.2 0.5MPa (380 5kg/cm )
+/- +/- 2
Main - LS = 3.38 1.0MPa (34.5 10kg/cm )
Neutral
LS valve LS differential pressure = Unload pressure
(LS differential Raise road wheels clear of ground using work equipment &
4
pressure valve) Full A OFF chassis attachments.
Main - LS = 2.2 +/- 0.1 MPa (22 +/- 1kg/cm 2)
OFF
+/-
Right relief 30.9 1.5MPa (315 +/- 15kg/cm 2 )
5 Swing safety valve Swing lock switch ON
Left relief
VEBM949100
+/-
Main relief valve, Forward 38.2 1.0MPa (390 +/- 10kg/cm 2)
6 Travel relief
Travel safety valve, Reverse
Connection to be changed at hoses
2
Condition Setting kg/cm 2 kg/cm 2 kg/cm kg/cm 2
No Part to be checked Fuel Dial Working Auto One-touch main pump main pump LS Control circuit main pump servo Remarks
mode decelerator power max switch pressure
Main servo balance pressure balance

7 Servo Full A OFF OFF Arm dumping relief
/ = 3/5
Connection to be changed at hoses and , and guage to be replaced with one

with 60K capacity
2 2
Condition Setting kg/cm 2 kg/cm kg/cm
No Part to be checked Fuel Dial Working Auto One-touch main pump PC LS Remarks < Reference value : kg/cm 2 >
mode decelerator power max switch EPC EPC
Low <34> Delivery variance by switching mode>

A
<3> Q
E <14>
8 PC - EPC valve Neutral
Full
OFF OFF
<21>
P
B <16>
2
Neutral At neutral : MPa (kg/cm )
9 LS - EPC valve Full A 2
Arm dumping relief When pump relieved : 1. 6MPa ( 16 kg/cm )
20-221
Preparations for troubleshooting of electrical system TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Preparations for troubleshooting of electrical system

★ When troubleshooting the electric circuit related to the ma-
chine monitor, pump controller, engine controller or KOM-
TRAX terminal, expose the related connectors according to
the following procedure.
1. Machine monitor
a. Take off cover (1).
★ The cover is fixed with two upper and lower clips.

Pull it up for the removal.
★ If the sunlight sensor is equipped for an air condi-

tioner, disconnect P15 connector at the cover rear
side.
b. Remove the 3 mounting screws to disconnect machine

monitor (2) from the mount.
★ Use care so that the screws may not fall into the
console.
c. Insert or connect troubleshooting T-adapter in or to con-

nectors P01, P02, and P70 of machine monitor.
2. Engine controller
★ The engine controller is installed in the left side of the
engine. ENGINE
CE02
a. Open the engine hood.
b. Insert or connect troubleshooting T-adapter in or to con-

nectors ENGINE, CE02 and CE03 of engine controller
(3).
★ Connectors are fixed with screw. Loosen the screws

before disconnecting them. CE03 3
★ When returning the connectors back to their posi-

tion, tighten them to the specified torque.
 Screw:
2.82 Nm {0.288 kgm}
20-222 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Preparations for troubleshooting of electrical system
3. Pump controller
★ The engine throttle and pump controller are installed in
the cover situated in the rear side of the operator seat.
a. Remove cover (5).

nectors CP01, CP02 and CP03 of pump controller (6).
★ Connectors are fixed with screws. Loosen the

screws before disconnecting them.
★ When returning the connectors back to their posi-

tion, tighten them to the specified torque.
 Screw:
2.82 Nm {0.288 kgm}
4. KOMTRAX terminal
★ KOMTRAX terminal is installed in the cover situated in
the rear side of the operator seat.
a. Remove cover (5).

nector G01 of KOMTRAX terminal (7).
★ The connectors are fixed with screws. Loosen the

screws before disconnecting them.
★ When returning the connectors to their original posi-

tions, fix them by tightening the screws with the
specified torque.
 Screw:
2.82 Nm {0.288 kgm}
★ Cable (8) is used for the communication antenna (2

systems).
★ Cable (9) is used for the GPS antenna.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-223

Preparations for troubleshooting of electrical system TESTING AND ADJUSTING
5. Removing and installing the atmospheric pressure and

temperature sensor, the engine oil pressure switch, and
position sensor (cam and crank)
• Removal
Shift the lever in the arrowhead direction (a) and pull it
out while pushing lock (b).
• Installation
Insert the connector and then shift the lever in the ar-
rowhead direction (f).
20-224 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Troubleshooting
Points to remember when troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-303
Sequence of events in troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-305
Points to remember when carrying out maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-306

Points to remember when handling electric equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-306
Points to remember when troubleshooting electric circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-312
Points to remember when handling hydraulic equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-312
Checks before troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-314
Classification and steps for troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-315

Steps for troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-315
Connector location chart and electrical circuit diagram by system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-322
Connection table for connector pin numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-347

T-boxes and T-adapters table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-376
Testing and adjusting – Troubleshooting when service code "Electrical system" and
failure code "Mechanical system" are indicated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-401
Testing and adjusting – Troubleshooting of electrical system (E-Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-701
Testing and adjusting – Troubleshooting of electrical system

(Error checking of items without monitor codes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-801
Testing and adjusting – Troubleshooting of hydraulic and mechanical system (H-Mode) . . . . . . . . . 20-901
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-301

Troubleshooting TESTING AND ADJUSTING
20-302 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Points to remember when troubleshooting
Points to remember when troubleshooting
• Stop the machine in a level place, and check that the safe-
ty pin, blocks, and parking brake are securely fitted.
• When carrying out the operation with two or more work-
ers, keep strictly to the agreed signals, and do not allow
any unauthorized person to come near.
• If the radiator cap is removed when the engine is hot, hot
water may spurt out and cause burns, so wait for the en-
gine to cool down before starting troubleshooting.
• Be extremely careful not to touch any hot parts or to get
caught in any rotating parts.
• When disconnecting wiring, always disconnect the nega-
tive (–) terminal of the battery first.
• When removing the plug or cap from a location which is
under pressure from oil, water, or air, always release the
internal pressure first. When installing measuring equip-
ment, be sure to connect it properly.
The aim of troubleshooting is to pinpoint the basic cause of the

failure, to carry out repairs swiftly, and to prevent reoccurrence
of the failure.
When carrying out troubleshooting, and important point is of

course to understand the structure and function.
However, a short cut to effective troubleshooting is to ask the op-

erator various questions to form some idea of possible causes of
the failure that would produce the reported symptoms.
1. When carrying out troubleshooting, do not hurry to disas-

semble the components.
If components are disassembled immediately any failure oc-
curs:
• Parts that have no connection with the failure or other

unnecessary parts will be disassembled.
• It will become impossible to find the cause of the failure.
It will also cause a waste of man-hours, parts, or oil or

grease, and at the same time, will also lose the confidence
of the user or operator.
For this reason, when carrying out troubleshooting, it is nec-
essary to carry out thorough prior investigation and to carry
out troubleshooting in accordance with the fixed procedure.
2. Points to ask user or operator
a. Have any other problems occurred apart from the prob-

lem that has been reported?
b. Was there anything strange about the machine before

the failure occurred?
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-303

Points to remember when troubleshooting TESTING AND ADJUSTING
c. Did the failure occur suddenly, or were there problems

with the machine condition before this?
d. Under what conditions did the failure occur?
e. Had any repairs been carried out before the failure?
f. When were these repairs carried out?
g. Has the same kind of failure occurred before?
3. Check before troubleshooting
a. Check the oil level
b. Check for any external leakage of oil from the piping or

hydraulic equipment.
c. Check the travel of the control levers.
d. Check the stroke of the control valve spool.
e. Other maintenance items can be checked externally, so

check any item that is considered to be necessary.
4. Confirming failure
• Confirm the extent of the failure yourself, and judge

whether to handle it as a real failure or as a problem
with the method of operation, etc.
• When operating the machine to re-enact the trou-

bleshooting symptoms, do not carry out any investi-
gation or measurement that may make the problem
worse.
5. Troubleshooting
• Use the results of the investigation and inspection in

Items 2 – 4 to narrow down the causes of failure, then
use the troubleshooting flowchart to locate the position
of the failure exactly.
• The basic procedure for troubleshooting is as fol-

lows.
I. Start from the simple points.
II. Start from the most likely points.
III. Investigate other related parts or information.
6. Measures to remove root cause of failure
• Even if the failure is repaired, if the root cause of the fail-

ure is not repaired, the same failure will occur again.
To prevent this, always investigate why the problem oc-
curred. Then, remove the root cause.
20-304 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Sequence of events in troubleshooting
Sequence of events in troubleshooting
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-305

Points to remember when carrying out maintenance TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Points to remember when carrying out maintenance

To maintain the performance of the machine over a long period,
and to prevent failures or other troubles before they occur, cor-
rect operation, maintenance and inspection, troubleshooting,
and repairs must be carried out. This section deals particularly
with correct repair procedures for mechatronics and is aimed at
improving the quality of repairs. For this purpose, it gives sec-
tions on "Handling electric equipment" and "Handling hydraulic
equipment" (particularly gear oil and hydraulic oil).
Points to remember when handling electric equip-

ment
1. Handling wiring harnesses and connectors
Wiring harnesses consist of wiring connecting one compo-

nent to another component, connectors used for connecting
and disconnecting one wire from another wire, and protec-
tors or tubes used for protecting the wiring.
Compared with other electrical components fitted in boxes
or cases, wiring harnesses are more likely to be affected by
the direct effects of rain, water, heat, or vibration. Further-
more, during inspection and repair operations, they are fre-
quently removed and installed again, so they are likely to
suffer deformation or damage. For this reason, it is neces-
sary to be extremely careful when handling wiring harness-
es.
Main failures occurring in wiring harness
a. Defective contact of connectors (defective contact be-

tween male and female)
Problems with defective contact are likely to occur be-
cause the male connector is not properly inserted into
the female connector, or because one or both of the
connectors is deformed or the position is not correctly
aligned, or because there is corrosion or oxidization of
the contact surfaces.
b. Defective crimping or soldering of connectors

The pins of the male and female connectors are in con-
tact at the crimped terminal or soldered portion, but if
there is excessive force brought to bear on the wiring,
the plating at the joint will peel and cause improper con-
nection or breakage.
20-306 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Points to remember when carrying out maintenance
c. Disconnections in wiring
If the wiring is held and the connectors are pulled apart,
or components are lifted with a crane with the wiring still
connected, or a heavy object hits the wiring, the crimp-
ing of the connector may separate, or the soldering may
be damaged, or the wiring may be broken.
d. High-pressure water entering connector

The connector is designed to make it difficult for water to
enter (drip-proof structure), but if high-pressure water is
sprayed directly on the connector, water may enter the
connector, depending on the direction of the water jet.
As already said, the connector is designed to prevent
water from entering, but at the same time, if water does
enter, it is difficult for it to be drained. Therefore, if water
should get into the connector, the pins will be short-
circuited by the water, so if any water gets in, immedi-
ately dry the connector or take other appropriate action
before passing electricity through it.
e. Oil or dirt stuck to connector

If oil or grease are stuck to the connector and an oil film
is formed on the mating surface between the male and
female pins, the oil will not let the electricity pass, so
there will be defective contact.
If there is oil or grease stuck to the connector, wipe it off
with a dry cloth or blow it dry with compressed air and
spray it with a contact restorer.
• When wiping the mating portion of the connector, be

careful not to use excessive force or deform the
pins.
• If there is oil or water in the compressed air, the con-

tacts will become even dirtier, so remove the oil and
water from the compressed air completely before
cleaning with compressed air.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-307

2. Removing, installing, and drying connectors and wiring har-

nesses
• Disconnecting connectors
a. Hold the connectors when disconnecting.

When disconnecting the connectors, hold the connec-
tors and not the wires. For connectors held by a screw,
loosen the screw fully, then hold the male and female
connectors in each hand and pull apart. For connectors
which have a lock stopper, press down the stopper with
your thumb and pull the connectors apart.
• Never pull with one hand.
b. When removing from clips

When removing a connector from a clip, pull the connec-
tor in a parallel direction to the clip.
• If the connector is twisted up and down or to the left

or right, the housing may break.
c. Action to take after removing connectors

After removing any connector, cover it with a vinyl bag to
prevent any dust, dirt, oil, or water from getting in the
connector portion.
• If the machine is left disassembled for a long time, it

is particularly easy for improper contact to occur, so
always cover the connector.
20-308 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

• Connecting connectors
a. Check the connector visually.
I. Check that there is no oil, dirt, or water stuck to the

connector pins (mating portion).
II. Check that there is no deformation, defective con-

tact, corrosion, or damage to the connector pins. c
III. Check that there is no damage or breakage to the

outside of the connector.
• If there is any oil, water, or dirt stuck to the connec-

tor, wipe it off with a dry cloth. If any water has got
inside the connector, warm the inside of the wiring
with a dryer, but be careful not to make it too hot as
this will cause short circuits.
• If there is any damage or breakage, replace the

connector.
b. Fix the connector securely.

Align the position of the connector correctly, then insert
it securely.
For connectors with lock stopper, push in the connector
until the stopper clicks into position.
c. Correct any protrusion of the boot and any misalignment

of the wiring harness
For connectors fitted with boots, correct any protrusion
of the boot. In addition, if the wiring harness is mis-
aligned, or the clamp is out of position, adjust it to its
correct position.
• If the connector cannot be corrected easily, remove

the clamp and adjust the position.
d. If the connector clamp has been removed, be sure to re-

turn it to its original position. Check also that there are
no loose clamps.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-309

• Drying wiring harness
If there is any oil or dirt on the wiring harness, wipe it off with
a dry cloth. Avoid washing it in water or using steam. If the
connector must be washed in water, do not use high-pres-
sure water or steam directly on the wiring harness.
If water gets directly on the connector, do as follows.
a. Disconnect the connector and wipe off the water with a

dry cloth.
• If the connector is blown dry with compressed air,

there is the risk that oil in the air may cause defec-
tive contact, so remove all oil and water from the
compressed air before blowing with air.
b. Dry the inside of the connector with a dryer.

If water gets inside the connector, use a dryer to dry the
connector.
• Hot air from the dryer can be used, but regulate the
time that the hot air is used in order not to make the
connector or related parts too hot, as this will cause
deformation or damage to the connector.
c. Carry out a continuity test on the connector.

After drying, leave the wiring harness disconnected and
carry out a continuity test to check for any short circuits
between pins caused by water.
• After completely drying the connector, blow it with

contact restorer and reassemble.
20-310 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

3. Handling control box
a. The control box contains a microcomputer and electron-

ic control circuits. These control all of the electronic cir-
cuits on the machine, so be extremely careful when
handling the control box.
b. Do not open the cover of the control box unless neces-

sary.
c. Do not place objects on top of the control box.
d. Cover the control connectors with tape or a vinyl bag.

Never touch the connector contacts with your hand.
e. During rainy weather, do not leave the control box in a

place where it is exposed to rain.
f. Do not place the control box on oil, water, or soil, or in

any hot place, even for a short time.
(Place it on a suitable dry stand).
g. Precautions when carrying out arc welding

When carrying out arc welding on the body, disconnect
all wiring harness connectors connected to the control
box. Fit an arc welding ground close to the welding
point.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-311

Points to remember when troubleshooting elec-

tric circuits
1. Always turn the power OFF before disconnecting or connect
connectors.
2. Before carrying out troubleshooting, check that all the relat-

ed connectors are properly inserted.
• Disconnect and connect the related connectors several

times to check.
3. Always connect any disconnected connectors before going

on to the next step.
• If the power is turned ON with the connectors still dis-

connected, unnecessary abnormality displays will be
generated.
4. When carrying out troubleshooting of circuits (measuring the

voltage, resistance, continuity, or current), move the related
wiring and connectors several times and check that there is
no change in the reading of the tester.
• If there is any change, there is probably defective con-

tact in that circuit.
Points to remember when handling hydraulic

equipment
With the increase in pressure and precision of hydraulic equip-
ment, the most common cause of failure is dirt (foreign material)
in the hydraulic circuit. When adding hydraulic oil, or when dis-
assembling or assembling hydraulic equipment, it is necessary
to be particularly careful.
1. Be careful of the operating environment.

Avoid adding hydraulic oil, replacing filters, or repairing the
machine in rain or high winds, or places where there is a lot
of dust.
2. Disassembly and maintenance work in the field

If disassembly or maintenance work is carried out on hy-
draulic equipment in the field, there is danger of dust enter-
ing the equipment. It is also difficult to confirm the
performance after repairs, so it is desirable to use unit ex-
change. Disassembly and maintenance of hydraulic equip-
ment should be carried out in a specially prepared dustproof
workshop, and the performance should be confirmed with
special test equipment.
20-312 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

3. Sealing openings
After any piping or equipment is removed, the openings
should be sealed with caps, tapes, or vinyl bags to prevent
any dirt or dust from entering. If the opening is left open or is
blocked with a rag, there is danger of dirt entering or of the
surrounding area being made dirty by leaking oil so never do
this.
Do not simply drain oil out on to the ground, collect it and
ask the customer to dispose of it, or take it back with you for
disposal.
4. Do not let any dirt or dust get in during refilling opera-

tions.
Be careful not to let any dirt or dust get in when refilling with
hydraulic oil. Always keep the oil filler and the area around it
clean, and also use clean pumps and oil containers. If an oil
cleaning device is used, it is possible to filter out the dirt that
has collected during storage, so this is an even more effec-
tive method.
5. Change hydraulic oil when the temperature is high.

When hydraulic oil or other oil is warm, it flows easily. In ad-
dition, the sludge can also be drained out easily from the cir-
cuit together with the oil, so it is best to change the oil when
it is still warm. When changing the oil, as much as possible
of the old hydraulic oil must be drained out. (Drain the oil
from the hydraulic tank; also drain the oil from the filter and
from the drain plug in the circuit.) If any old oil is left, the con-
taminants and sludge in it will mix with the new oil and will
shorten the life of the hydraulic oil.
6. Flushing operations
After disassembling and assembling the equipment, or
changing the oil, use flushing oil to remove the contami-
nants, sludge, and old oil from the hydraulic circuit.
Normally, flushing is carried out twice: primary flushing is
carried out with flushing oil, and secondary flushing is car-
ried out with the specified hydraulic oil.
7. Cleaning operations
After repairing the hydraulic equipment (pump, control valve,
etc.) or when running the machine, carry out oil cleaning to
remove the sludge or contaminants in the hydraulic oil cir-
cuit.
The oil cleaning equipment is used to remove the ultrafine
(about 3µ) particles that the filter built into the hydraulic
equipment cannot remove, so it is an extremely effective de-
vice.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-313

Checks before troubleshooting TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Checks before troubleshooting
Judgement
Item Action
value
1. Check fuel level, type of fuel — Add fuel

2. Check for impurities in fuel — Clean, drain
3. Check hydraulic oil level — Add oil
Lubricating oil,
4. Check hydraulic oil strainer — Clean, drain

coolant
5. Check swing machinery oil level — Add oil

6. Check engine oil level (oil pan oil level) — Add oil
7. Check coolant level — Add water
8. Check dust indicator for clogging — Clean or replace
9. Check hydraulic filter — Replace
10. Check final drive oil level — Add oil
1. Check for looseness, corrosion of battery terminal, wiring — Tighten or replace

equipment
Electrical
2. Check for looseness, corrosion of alternator terminal, wiring — Tighten or replace

3. Check for looseness, corrosion of starting motor terminal, wiring — Tighten or replace
1. Check for abnormal noise, smell — Repair

mechanical
equipment
Hydraulic,
2. Check for oil leakage — Repair

3. Carry out air bleeding — Bleed air
1. Check battery voltage (engine stopped) 20 – 30V Replace

2. Check battery electrolyte level — Add or replace
Electrics, electrical equipment
3. Check for discolored, burnt, exposed wiring — Replace

4. Check for missing wiring clamps, hanging wiring — Repair
5. Check for water leaking on wiring (be particularly careful attention to water leak- — Disconnect
ing on connectors or terminals) connector and dry
6. Check for blown, corroded fuses — Replace
7. Check alternator voltage (engine running at 1/2 throttle or above) After Replace
running for
several
minutes :
27.5 – 29.5V
8. Check operating sound of battery relay — Replace
(when switch is turned ON/OFF)
20-314 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Classification and steps for troubleshooting
Classification and steps for troubleshooting

Classification of troubleshooting
Mode Content
Code display Troubleshooting when Service Code (electrical system) and Failure Code (mechanical system) are displayed.
A mode Troubleshooting of electrical system
A mode Troubleshooting of hydraulic and mechanical systems
(Engine) Troubleshooting of engine assembly (refer to the shop manual for engine in 102 series)
Steps for troubleshooting

If some phenomenon occurs on a machine that looks like a fail-
ure, identify the corresponding troubleshooting No. and proceed
to the explanations for diagnosis.
1. Troubleshooting steps when calling User Code display

in the monitor panel
If User Code display, enter service mode on monitor to dis-
play Service Code. Following displayed Service Code for
the electrical system, carry out the troubleshooting along the
corresponding code display.
2. Troubleshooting steps when the electrical system Serv-

ice Code or mechanical system Failure Code is record-
ed in the failure history:
If not calling User Code in the monitor panel, check the elec-
trical system Service Code or mechanical system Failure
Code, using the failure history function of the monitor panel.
• If Service Code in the electrical system is recorded, de-

lete the all codes once and revive the code in the dis-
play again to check if the same abnormality still persists.
• Failure Code in the mechanical system cannot be delet-

ed.
3. Troubleshooting steps without User Code display and

no failure history is available
If there is no display of User Code nor the failure history in
the monitor panel, it is possible that a failure that the monitor
panel cannot diagnose by itself may have occurred in any of
the electrical, hydraulic or mechanical system. In such a
case, re-examine the phenomenon, find out the most similar
phenomenon from among "Failure like Phenomena and
Troubleshooting No." and carry out troubleshooting related
to the phenomenon in question.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-315

Classification and steps for troubleshooting TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure-looking Phenomenon and Troubleshooting No.
Troubleshooting
No. Failure-looking phenomenon Code
E mode H mode (Engine)
display
Action to be taken concerning Service Code, User Code and Failure Code
1 Display User Code in monitor panel

According to
2 Display Service Code in electrical system after checking failure history displayed
code
3 Display Failure Code in mechanical system after checking failure history
Engine-related failure
Engine does not start up easily. (It always takes some time to start up the
4 S-1
engine)
5 Engine does not rotate E-1 S-2 (1)
6 Engine does not start Engine rotates, but there is no exhaust gas S-2 (2)
7 There is exhaust gas, but engine does not start S-2 (3)
8 Engine pickup is poor. (Engine does not follow acceleration) S-3
9 Engine stops while in operation H-2 S-4
10 Engine rotation is irregular. (There is hunting) S-5
11 Engine is short of output, or lacks power H-1 S-6
12 Color of exhaust gas is too dark. (Incomplete combustion) S-7
13 Excessive engine oil consumption, or color of exhaust gas is blue S-8
14 Premature engine oil contamination S-9
15 Excessive fuel consumption S-10
16 Engine cooling water is mixed with engine oil, spurts out or decreases S-11
17 Engine oil amount increases. (Water or fuel gets in) S-13
18 Abnormal noises are heard S-15
19 Excessive vibrations are caused S-16
20 Auto-decelerator does not work E-2 H-5
21 Engine auto warming-up device does not work E-3
22 Engine preheater does not work E-7
Failure related to work equipment, swing and travel
23 Speeds of all work equipment, travel and swing are slow, or they lack power H-1 S-6
24 Engine rotation drops sharply or stalls H-2 S-4
25 All work equipment, travel and swing do not move E-8 H-3
26 There are abnormal noises from around hydraulic pump H-4
27 Fine control mode function works poorly, or shows slow response H-6
20-316 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Troubleshooting
No. Failure-looking phenomenon Code User
H mode (Engine)
display code
Work equipment-related failure
29 Boom moves slowly or lacks power E-21, 22 H-7
30 Arm moves slowly or lacks power E-23, 24 H-8
31 Bucket moves slowly or lacks power E-25, 26 H-9
32 Boom, arm or bucket does not move H-10
33 Natural drift of work equipment is too fast H-11
34 Work equipment time lag is too big H-12
35 Other work equipment moves, when specific work equipment is relieved H-13
36 One-touch power max. switch does not work E-9, 21–26 H-14
Compound operation-related failure
37 In compound operation, work equipment with larger load moves slowly H-15
38 In swing + boom RAISE operation, boom moves slowly H-16
39 In swing + travel operation, travel speed drops sharply H-17
Travel-related failure
40 Machine tends to swerve while in travel
41 Travel speed is slow
42 Machine is difficult to steer, or lacks power
43 Travel speed cannot be shifted or is slow or fast H18
Swing-related failure
44 Machine does not swing E-27 H-23
45 Swing acceleration is poor, or swing speed is slow H-24
46 Upper structure overruns excessively, when stopping swing H-25
47 There is a big shock caused when stopping swing H-26
48 There is abnormal noise generated when stopping swing H-27
49 There is natural drift while in swing H-28
Monitor panel-related failure (Operator's Menu: ordinary display)
50 No display appears in monitor panel at all E-10
51 Part of display is missing in monitor panel E-11
52 Descriptions on monitor panel do not apply to the machine model E-12
In startup inspection, radiator water level caution symbol is displayed on the

53 B@BCZK
monitor panel, when the engine is running
In startup inspection, engine oil level caution symbol is displayed, when the
54 B@BAZK
engine is stopped (with the starting key in the ON position)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-317

Troubleshooting
No. Failure-looking phenomenon Code User
H mode (Engine)
display code
55 In startup inspection, maintenance hour monitor lamp lights up red Refer to Operation and Maintenance Manual
While engine is running, battery charging caution symbol is displayed on the

56 AB00KE
monitor panel.
57 While engine is running, fuel level monitor lamp lights up red E-13
While engine is running, air cleaner clogging charging caution symbol is dis-
58 AA10NX
played on the monitor panel.
While engine is running, engine cooling water temperature gauge is displayed

59 B@BCNS
in red range
While engine is running, hydraulic oil temperature gauge is displayed in red

60 B@HANS
range
61 Engine cooling water temperature gauge does not display correctly E-14
62 Hydraulic oil temperature gauge does not display correctly E-15
63 Fuel gauge does not display correctly E-16
64 Swing lock monitor does not display correctly E-17
65 When operating monitor switch, no display appears E-18
66 Windshield wiper does not work E-19
67 Warning buzzer cannot be stopped E-20
Monitor panel-related failure (Service Menu: Special Function Display)
68 In monitoring function, "Boom RAISE" cannot be displayed correctly E-21
69 In monitoring function, "Boom LOWER" cannot be displayed correctly E-22
70 In monitoring function, "Arm DIGGING" cannot be displayed correctly E-23
71 In monitoring function, "Arm DUMPING" cannot be displayed correctly E-24
72 In monitoring function, "Bucket DIGGING" cannot be displayed correctly E-25
73 In monitoring function, "Bucket DUMPING" cannot be displayed correctly E-26
74 In monitoring function, "Swing" cannot be displayed correctly E-27
75 In monitoring function, "Travel" cannot be displayed correctly E-28
76 In monitoring function, "2 Piece Boom" cannot be displayed correctly E-29
Other failure
77 Air conditioner does not work E-301
78 Travel alarm does not sound E-31
20-318 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

How to read electric wire code

• In this section, electric wire codes specific to PW200/
220-7E0 are explained.
In the electric circuit diagram, the material, thickness, and color

of each electric wire are indicated by symbols. The electric wire
code is helpful in understanding the electric circuit diagram.
Example: AEX 0.85 L --- Indicates blue, heat-resistant, low-voltage wire for automobile, having nominal No. of 0.85
Indicates color of wire by color code.

Color codes are shown in Table 4.
Indicates size of wire by nominal No.

Size (Nominal No.) is shown in Table 2 and Table 3.
Indicates type of wire by symbol.

Type, symbol, and material of wire are shown in Table 1.
(Since AV, AVS, AVSS, and CAVS are classified by size (nominal No.), they are not indi-
cated.)
1. Type, symbol, and material

AV, AVS, and AVSS are different in only thickness and outside
diameter of the cover. AEX is similar to AV in thickness and out-
side diameter of AEX and different from AV, AVS, and AVSS in
material of the cover. CAVS has circularly compressed conduc-
tor and is different from AV and AVS in outside diameter.
(Table 1)
Using tem-
Type Symbol Material perature Example of use for reference
range (°C)
Annealed copper for elec-

Low-voltage wire for Conductor General wiring
AV tric appliance
automobile (Nominal No. 8 and above)
Insulator Soft polyvinyl chloride
–30 to +60
Annealed copper for elec- AVS: General wiring
Conductor
Thin-cover, low-voltage AVS tric appliance (Nominal No. 3 – 5)
wire for automobile AVSS AVSS: General wiring
Insulator Soft polyvinyl chloride (Nominal No. 2)
Annealed copper for elec-

Conductor General wiring in extremely cold
Heat-resistant, low-volt- tric appliance
AEX –50 to +110 district, wiring at high-tempera-
age wire for automobile Heat-resistant crosslinked
Insulator ture place
polyethylene
Thin-cover, low-voltage, Annealed copper for elec-

Conductor General wiring
circularly compressed CAVS tric appliance –30 to +60
(Nominal No. 0.5 – 1.25)
wire for automobile Insulator Soft polyvinyl chloride
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-319

2. Dimensions
AVS, AV, AEX, AVSS

(Table 2)
Nominal No. 0.5f (0.5) 0.75f (0.85) 1.25f (1.25) 2f 2 3f 3 5
Number of strands/
20/0.18 7/0.32 30/0.18 11/0.32 50/0.18 16/0.32 37/0.26 26/0.32 58/0.26 41/0.32 65/0.32
Conductor
Diameter of strand
Sectional area
0.51 0.56 0.76 0.88 1.27 1.29 1.96 2.09 3.08 3.30 5.23
(mm2)
d (Approx.) 1.0 1.2 1.5 1.9 1.9 2.3 2.4 3.0
AVS Standard — — — — — 3.5 3.6 4.4
Cover D
AV Standard — — — — — — — —
AEX Standard 2.0 2.2 2.7 3.0 3.1 — 3.8 4.6
AVSS Standard — — — 2.7 2.7 — — —
Nominal No. 8 15 20 30 40 50 60 85 100

Number of strands/
50/0.45 84/0.45 41/0.80 70/0.80 85/0.80 108/0.80 127/0.80 169/0.80 217/0.80
Diameter of strand
Conductor
Sectional area
7.95 13.36 20.61 35.19 42.73 54.29 63.84 84.96 109.1
(mm2)
d (Approx.) 3.7 4.8 6.0 8.0 8.6 9.8 10.4 12.0 13.6
AVS Standard — — — — — — — — —
AV Standard 5.5 7.0 8.2 10.8 11.4 13.0 13.6 16.0 17.6
Cover D
AEX Standard 5.3 7.0 8.2 10.8 11.4 13.0 13.6 16.0 17.6
AVSS Standard — — — — — — — — —
CAVS
(Table 3)
Nominal No. 0.5 0.85 1.25
Number of strands/
7/Compressed circularly 11/Compressed circularly 16/Compressed circularly
Diameter of strand
Conductor Sectional area
0.56 0.88 1.29
(mm2)
d (Approx.) 0.9 1.1 1.4
Cover D CAVS Standard 1.7 1.9 2.2
"f" of nominal No. denotes "flexible".
20-320 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

3. Color codes table
(Table 4)
Color Code Color of wire Color Code Color of wire
B Black LgW Light green & White
Br Brown LgY Light green & Yellow
BrB Brown & Black LR Blue & Red
BrR Brown & Red LW Blue & White
BrW Brown & White LY Blue & Yellow
BrY Brown & Yellow O Orange
Ch Charcoal P Pink
Dg Dark green R Red
G Green RB Red & Black
GB Green & Black RG Red & Green
GL Green & Blue RL Red & Blue
Gr Gray RW Red & White
GR Green & Red RY Red & Yellow
GW Green & White Sb Sky Blue
GY Green & Yellow Y Yellow
L Blue YB Yellow & Black
LB Blue & Black YG Yellow &Green
Lg Light green YL Yellow & Blue
LgB Light green & Black YR Yellow & Red
LgR Light green & Red YW Yellow & White
Remarks:
In a color code consisting of 2 colors, the first color is the color of
the background and the second color is the color of the marking.
Example: "GW" means that the background is Green and mark-
ing is White.
4. Types of circuits and color codes
(Table 5)
Type of wire AVS or AV AEX
Charge R WG — — — — R —
Ground B — — — — — B —
Start R — — — — — R —
Light RW RB RY RG RL — D —
Instrument Y YR YB YG YL YW Y Gr
Signal G GW GR GY GB GL G Br
L LW LR LY LB — L —
Type of
Br BrW BrR BrY BrB — — —
circuit
Lg LgR LgY LgB LgW — — —
O — — — — — — —
Others Gr — — — — — — —
P — — — — — — —
Sb — — — — — — —
Dg — — — — — — —
Ch — — — — — — —
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-321

Connector location chart and electrical circuit diagram by system TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Connector location chart and electrical circuit diagram by

system
Connector table (All cross references refer to grid on the wiring
diagrams)
Connec- No.of
Type Name of Device Address
tor No. Pin
A01 X 4 Intermediate Connector P-3 BG-2
A02 X 4 Intermediate Connector Q-2 BG-2
A03 DT 12 Intermediate Connector BH-2
A04 SWP 12 Intermediate Connector Q-3
A04 Terminal 1 Ground (Chassis) BH-2
A05 SWP 16 Intermediate connector Q-2 BG-2
A06 SWP 16 Intermediate connector E-5 BH-2
A07 SWP 16 Intermediate connector P-2 BG-2
A08 SWP 8 Intermediate connector Q-2 BH-2
A09 SWP 8 Intermediate connector Q-2 BH-2
A11 DT 3 Swivel Joint Connector V-6
A12 DT 4 Swivel Joint Connector F-5
A13 DT 4 Swivel Joint Connector V-6
A14 DT 3 Swivel Joint Connector F-5
A20 Terminal 1 Battery Relay (E Terminal) K-3
A21 Terminal 1 Battery Relay (BR Terminal) K-3
A22 Terminal 1 Battery Relay (M Terminal) K-3
A23 Terminal 1 Battery Relay (B Terminal) K-2
A24 Terminal 1 Heater relay (Contact) K-3
A25 Terminal 1 Heater Relay (Contact) K-3
A26 Terminal 1 Heater relay (contact) K-2
A27 X 2 Starter Safety Relay (S & R Terminals). K-3
A28 Terminal 1 Starter Safety Relay (B Terminal) K-3
A29 Terminal 1 Starter Safety Relay (C Terminal). K-3
A31 DT 2 Air cleaner clogging system J-3
A33 X 2 Radiator Water Level sensor L-3
A34 L 2 Fusible Link (60A) L-3
A35 L 2 Fusible Link (30A) L-3
A40 Spade 1 Alarm Horn C-7
A41 Spade 1 Alarm Horn D-7
A42 Spade 1 Alarm Horn D-7
A43 Spade 1 Alarm Horn C-7
A50 Spade 1 Washer Motor Connector C-5
A51 JT2 3 Pump hydraulic oil pressure sensor H-6
A52 JT2 3 Pump hydraulic oil pressure sensor H-6
A53 DT 2 Back up alarm (OPT) H-5
20-322 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Connector location chart and electrical circuit diagram by system
Connec- No.of
tor No. Pin
A54 X 1 Fuel Level Sensor C-6
A55 DT 2 Hydraulic Oil Temperature Sensor G-7
A56 JT2 3 Travel PPC oil pressure sensor H-4
A57 DT 2 Transmission Speed Sensor U-5
A59 Spade 1 Washer Motor Connector C-5
A64 Terminal 1 Revolving Frame Grounding Q-5
A65 Terminal 1 Revolving Frame Grounding Q-5
A84 X 4 Rear Work light counterweight harness conn H-7
A85 DT 2 Rear Work Light on Counter weight I-9
A86 DT 2 Work Equipment Lights CV-3
A89 KES1 1 Boom Light RH (OPT) CU-6
A90 KES1 1 Boom light LH (OPT) CT-6
A90 DT 3 Swing proximity switch Q-3
A91 DT 2 Arm Marker Light (OPT) CT-6
A92 DT 2 Spare light D-5
A93 DT 2 Spare light D-5
A99 SWP 8 Intermediate connector BH-2 Q-2
AB Terminal 1 Alternator (B) CN-5
AS1 DT 3 Angle sensor (Japan spec.) AO-2
B Terminal 1 Alternator (B) CL-5
C01 DRC 24 Governor Pump Controller AH-6
C09 S 8 Model selection connector AH-6
CE01 DRC 60 Engine controller (see Engine Manual) –
CE02 DRC 50 Engine controller CO-5
CE03 DT 4 Engine controller CO-4
CR1 Yazaki 2 Cab lamps opt. AB-1 AD-3
CR2 DT 2 Additional worklamps AC-2 AC-3
CR3 DT 2 Additional worklamps AB-2 AC-2
D01 SWP 8 Assembled type diode AH-6
D02 SWP 8 Diode AH-6
D05 KES1 2 Assembled type diode BN-5
D10 KES1 2 Steering column CD-3
D11 KES1 2 Steering column CC-3
E01 Terminal 1 Suction type air heater (Grid Heater) CO-6
E03 DT 2 Engine oil level Switch CM-4
E05 X 1 Air Con comp. Electromagnetic switch CP-6
E06 DT 2 Engine cooling water temperature sensor CO-4
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-323

Connec- No.of
tor No. Pin
E06 M 3 Fuel dial AZ-8
E12 AMP 3 Alternator (B + D) CN-5
F01 KES1 4 Flasher Unit BS-5
F02(A) Yazaki 2 Operator cab beacon AA-7
F02(B) DT 2 Operator cab beacon AA-7
FB1 20 Fuse Box 1 AM-4
FB2 20 Fuse Box 2 AM-3
G01 DRC 40 KOMTRAX controller –
G02 SWP 12 Steering Column BE-6 CD-2
G02 X 1 KOMTRAX controller –
G3 AMP 7 Steering Column switch assy CC-4
G4 AMP 7 Steering Column switch assy CC-4
G05 DT 12 Steering Column BE-6 CD-2
G7 DT 4 Rear Lights L.H L-5
G8 DT 4 Rear Lights R.H H-7
G10 X 2 Harness for licence No. plate J-8
G12 DT 6 Front light connector (R.H) A-5
G13 DT 6 Front light connector (L.H) E-2
G33 DT 4 Heated seat (OPT) AO-3
G51 Bullet 1 Engine compartment lamp (OPT) CL-7
G52 KES0 4 Lower wiper (OPT) D-2
G53 DT 2 Beacon I-8
G70 DT 12 LH Wrist control lever switch AL-4
G71 DT 4 RH Wrist control lever switch AZ-7
G72 DT 12 RH FNR switch AZ-7
G73 DT 2 (Lever option) AM-4
G99 Britax 10 Park Brake switch BA-3
G101 Britax 2 Indicator Switch (Left) CC-7
G103 Britax 2 High beam indicator CC-7
G105 Britax 5 Road lights switch CC-7
G120 Britax 10 Hazard Switch CD-7
G164 JT2 3 Overload Caution Sensor D-4
H08 M 8 Intermediate Connector AB-4 AI-5
H09 S 8 Intermediate Connector AB-4 AI-5
H10 S 16 Intermediate Connector BK-5
H15 090 20 Intermediate Connector AZ-7
J01 J 20 Junction connector (Blue) BM-5
20-324 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Connec- No.of
tor No. Pin
J02 J 20 Junction connector (Orange) BM-5
J03 J 20 Junction connector (Black) BM-5
J04 J 20 Junction connector (Green) BM-5
J05 J 20 Junction connector (Pink) BM-4
J06 J 20 Junction connector (Green) BM-4
J07 J 20 Junction connector (Black) BN-4
J08 J 20 Junction connector (Black) BN-4
J09 J 20 Junction connector (Green) BN-4
J10 J 20 Junction connector (Orange) BN-4
K02 DT 3 Can resistor CO-5
K19 M 2 Pump resistor (for driving emerg. pump) AH-5
K31 DT 3 CAN terminating resistor CI-5
M07 Britax 10 Work Lamp switch BA-3
M13 M 2 Speaker (right) AA-7
M19 Yazaki 2 Cigar lighter AS-5
M26 S 12 Air Con Unit BY-4
M27 Yazaki 18 Air Con Unit BX-4
M29 AMP 20 Air Con control panel AM-5
M30 AMP 16 Air Con control panel AM-5
M31 DT 4 Power supply (Option) BN-4
M33 Sumitomo 4 Air Con Unit BX-5
M33 M 2 Heated seat switch AM-5
M38 Britax 10 Quick coupler switch (Option) BA-3
M40 M 2 Working lamp (LH) AA-5
M40 AMP 8 Radio AA-7
M41 M 2 Working lamp (RH) Z-6
M41 AMP 8 Radio AA-7
M45 DT 12 Network bus (KOMTRAX) AI-6
M50 AMP 8 Intermediate Connector (Radio) AB-7
M51 Amp 8 Intermediate Connector (Radio) AB-7
M71 M 2 Cab Room Lamp AB-6 BL-6
M72 M 4 DC/DC convertor AI-6
M73 M 2 Speaker (left) AB-6
M79 Yazaki 2 12V elec. equip. socket (Phone Socket) BN-7
M80 DT 2 Refueling pump connection B-5
N08 DT 12 Service connector AI-6 BN-6
P01 AMP 070 12 Monitor Panel CI-5
P05 M 2 Beacon Switch (Option) AM-5
P06 M 2 Lower Wiper (Option) AM-5
P10 DT 8 Outrigger Switch CI-5
P15 YO5O 2 Air Conditioner Sunlight sensor CC-7
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-325

Connec- No.of
tor No. Pin
P17 Sumiomo 2 Air Con Hi/Lo pressure sw. BH-5
P47 DT 2 Water in fuel sensor G-7
R10 JDK 6 Light relay AH-5
R11 JDK 6 Starter cut relay AH-5
R13 JDK 6 Starter cut relay (Personal code) BQ-6
R16 JDK 6 Lamp relay BM-5
R17 JDK 6 Relay for grid heater AH-6
R18 JDK 6 Lower wiper relay BS-6
R20 JDK 6 Boom/Outrigger select AI-5
R22 JDK 6 Starter cut relay (Travel N) AH-6
R23 JDK 6 Relay for DM850 (1) BR-6
R24 JDK 6 Relay for DM850 (2) BR-6
R30 Sumitomo 5 Air Con unit (Blower Relay) BX-5
R31 AMP 4 Air Con Unit (Compressor Relay) BX-4
R42 JDK 6 Emergency relay (Drive F) BS-5
R43 JDK 6 Emergency relay (Drive R) BS-5
R44 JDK 6 Horn relay BR-5
R45 JDK 6 PPC lock relay (1) BR-5
R52 JDK 6 Relay for cab light BS-6
R53 JDK 6 Relay for reverse buzzer AI-6
R54 JDK 6 Relay for Quick coupler BA-3
RT1 S 16 Rototilt control BX-5
RT2 DT 4 Rototilt control AM-4
RT3 DT 6 Rototilt control BG-2
S01 X 2 Swing RH oil pressure switch P-6
S02 X 2 Swing LH oil pressure switch Q-6
S03 X 2 Bucket dumping oil pressure switch P-6
S04 X 2 Bucket digging oil pressure switch P-6
S05 X 2 Arm dump oil pressure switch P-6
S06 X 2 Arm digging oil pressure switch P-6
S07 X 2 2PB extend oil pressure switch P-6
S08 X 2 2PB retract oil pressure switch P-6
S09 X 2 Travel reverse oil pressure switch H-4
S10 X 2 Travel forward oil pressure switch H-4
S12 X 2 Stabilizer + boom down oil pressure switch P-6
S13 X 2 Stabilizer + boom up oil pressure switch P-6
S14 M 3 PPC hydraulic lock switch AL-4
S17 DT 2 Park brake oil pressure switch BE-6
S18 DT 2 Low brake oil pressure switch BE-6
S19 DT 2 Stop lights oil pressure switch BE-5
S21 OTAX 6 Pump emergency driving switch BA-3
20-326 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Connec- No.of
tor No. Pin
S22 OTAX 6 Swing and parking brake emergency switch BA-3
S28 090 12 Emergency Prolix switch BA-7
S29 DT 12 Emergency Prolix switch BB-5 BK-4
S30 DT 2 Quick coupler pressure switch E-7
S95 DT 4 Intermediate connector (RH console emergency FNR sw.) BB-5 BK-4
S96 OTAX 9 Emergency travel switch BA-2
SB Terminal 1 Starter (B) CL-5
SC Terminal 1 Starter (C) CL-5
T05 Terminal 1 Earth to floor frame BN-3
T11 Terminal 1 Earth (Cab GND) AC-4
V01 DT 2 PPC Pressure Lock Solenoid I-4
V02 DT 2 2 Stage Relief Solenoid I-4
V03 DT 2 Swing Brake Sol I-4
V04 DT 2 Suspension Lock Solenoid I-4
V05 DT 2 Pump merge/divide solenoid I-4
V06 DT 2 Travel Neutral Solenoid I-4
V07 DT 2 Creep solenoid I-4
V08 DT 2 Travel F/R solenoid I-4
V09 DT 2 Boom / Stabiliser down solenoid I-3
V10 DT 2 Boom / Stabiliser up solenoid H-4
V11 DT 2 Transmission clutch solenoid Q-6
V12 DT 2 Park brake solenoid valve BE-5
V15 DT 2 Transmission back pressure solenoid T-6
V15 DT 2 Front attachment solenoid (LHS) Q-6
V16 DT 2 Quick Coupler solenoid D-7
V16 DT 2 Front attachment solenoid (RHS) T-6
V17 DT 2 Rear attachment solenoid (LHS) X-4
V18 DT 2 Rear attachment solenoid (RHS) X-4
V21 DT 2 PC-EPC solenoid valve G-7
V22 DT 2 LS-EPC solenoid valve G-7
V23 X 2 1st service LH EPC H-4
V24 X 2 1st service RH EPC I-4
V25 X 2 2nd service LH EPC H-4
V26 X 2 2nd service RH EPC I-4
W03 M 2 Rear Limit Switch AA-7
W04 M 6 Wiper Motor Y-4 CG-3
X05 M 4 Swing lock switch BA-3
40 (A) Yazaki 2 Rear lamp (Op cab) option –
40 (B) Yazaki 2 Rear lamp (Op cab) option –
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-327

Connector No. Detailed information
D or DT Product of Deutsch USA DT type connector (08192-XXXXX)
L Product of Yazaki Corporation L type connector (08056-2XXXX)
J Product of Sumitomo Wiring Systems 090 type splice
M Product of Yazaki M type connector (08056-0XXXX)
Grote Product of Grote & Hartmann Germany
S Product of Yazaki S type connector (08056-1XXXX)
X Product of Yazaki X type connector (08055-0XXXX)
PA Product of Yazaki PA type connector
SWP Product of Yazaki SWP type connector (08055-1XXXX)
DRC Product of Deutsch USA DRC type connector
040 Product of Japan AMP 040 type connector
070 Product of Japan AMP 070 type connector
Y050 Product of Yazaki 050 type connector
S090 Product of Sumitomo 090 type connector
Y090 Product of Yazaki 090 type connector
YAZAKI Yazaki-made connector
KES0 KESO type connector (08027-0XXXX)
KES1 KES1 type connector (08027-1XXXX)
Terminal Round pin type single terminal connector
Terminal Round terminal
TD2 Product of Tyco Electronics AMP K.K
DENSO Product of DENSO (Japan)
Sumitomo Sumitomo made connector
JDK Product of JIDSHA DENKI KOGYO
*An affiliated company of Mitsubishi Cable Industries, Ltd.
20-328 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Upper structure
Upper Structure 2
Area A
Upper Structure 1
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-329

Connector location (upper structure – 1)
A40
A43
A41
A42
V16
A54 S30
A92
M80
A93
A14
A12
A06
G12
A59
A50
G164
G52 G13
20-330 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Connector location (upper structure – 2)
A85
G53
G8
G10
A84
V22
V21
P47
A55
A52
A51
V24
A53 V26
G7
V25
V23
S10
S09
A21 A20
V10 A22
A-A A33
A56 V08 V09 V07 A34
A31
V06
V05 A27 A35
V04
V03 A29 A23
V02
V01 A28
A24
A25
A26
A-A
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-331

Area A
V11
S13
S03 V15
S12 S07
S04 S08 S01
S06
S02 A65
S05
A64
B-B
A90
A04
A09
A99
A01
A08
A07
A05
A02 B-B
20-332 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Undercarriage harness
A11
A13
V15
V16
A57
V18
V17
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-333

Operator cab
(connects to
M41 at detail B)
CR1
CR2
CR3
CR2
CR3
CR1
(connects to Additional Worklamps
M40 at detail A)
20-334 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

View E
View A
View F
View C
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-335

View A
20-336 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

View B
View B
M19
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-337

View B
20-338 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

View C
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-339

View D
View D
20-340 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

View D
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-341

View E
20-342 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Steering column
G120
P15 G105
G101 G103
G4 G3
D11 D10
G05
G02
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-343

View F
20-344 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Engine
AB
SC E12
G51
E01
E05
CE02
K02
CE03
SB, B
E06
E03
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-345

Work equipment
20-346 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Connection table for connector pin numbers
Connection table for connector pin numbers

• The terms male and female refer to the pins, while the terms
male housing and female housing refer to the mating portion
of the housing.
X type connector
No.of
pins T-adapter
Male (female housing) Female (male housing)
Part No.
1 Part No.: 08055-00181 Part No.: 08055-00191 799-601-7010
2 799-601-7020
Part No.: 08055-00282 Part No.: 08055-00292
3 799-601-7030
Part No.: 08055-00381 Part No.: 08055-00391
4 799-601-7040
Part No.: 08055-00481 Part No.: 08055-00491
Terminal part No.: 79A-222-3370 Terminal part No.: 79A-222-3390

• Electric wire size: 0.85 • Electric wire size: 0.85
— —
• Grommet: Black • Grommet: Black
• Q’ty: 20 • Q’ty : 20
Terminal part No.: 79A-222-3380 Terminal part No.: 79A-222-3410

— —
• Grommet: Red • Grommet: Red
• Q’ty: 20 • Q’ty: 20
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-347

Connection table for connector pin numbers TESTING AND ADJUSTING
SWP type connector

No.of
pins T-adapter
Part No.
6 799-601-7050
Part No.: 08055-10681 Part No.: 08055-10691
8 799-601-7060
Part No.: 08055-10881 Part No.: 08055-10891
12 799-601-7310
Part No.: 08055-11281 Part No.: 08055-11291
14 799-601-7070
Part No.: 08055-11481 Part No.: 08055-11491
20-348 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

SWP type connector

No. of
pins T-adapter
Part No.
16 799-601-7320
Part No.: 08055-11681 Part No.: 08055-11691
Terminal part No.: Terminal part No.:

— —
• Grommet: Black • Grommet: Black
• Q’ty: 20 • Q’ty: 20
Terminal part No.: Terminal part No.:

— —
• Grommet: Red • Grommet: Red
• Q’ty: 20 • Q’ty: 20
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-349

No.of M type connector

pins Male (female housing) Female (male housing) T-adapter Part No.
1 Part No.: 08056-00171 Part No.: 08056-00181 799-601-7080
2 799-601-7090
Part No.: 08056-00271 Part No.: 08056-00281
3 799-601-7110
Part No.: 08056-00371 Part No.: 08056-00381
4 799-601-7120
Part No.: 08056-00471 Part No.: 08056-00481
6 799-601-7130
Part No.: 08056-00671 Part No.: 08056-00681
8 799-601-7390
Part No.: 08056-00871 Part No.: 08056-00881
20-350 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

S type connector
No.of
pins T-adapter
Part No.
8 799-601-7140
Part No.: 08056-10871 Part No.: 08056-10881
10
(White 799-601-7150
)
Part No.: 08056-11071 Part No.: 08056-11081
12
(White 799-601-7350
)
Part No.: 08056-11271 Part No.: 08056-11281
16
(White 799-601-7330
)
Part No.: 08056-11671 Part No.: 08056-11681
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-351

S type connector
No.of
pins T-adapter
Part No.
10
—
(Blue)
— —
12
799-601-7160
(Blue)
Part No.: 08056-11272 Part No.: 08056-11282
16
799-601-7170
(Blue)
Part No.: 08056-11672 Part No.: 08056-11682
20-352 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

No.of MIC type connector

7 Body part No.: 79A-222-2640 Body part No.: 79A-222-2630 —
11 Body part No.: 79A-222-2680 Body part No.: 79A-222-2670 —
5 799-601-2710
Body part No.: 79A-222-2620 Body part No.: 79A-222-2610
9 799-601-2950
13 799-601-2720
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-353

No.of MIC type connector

17 799-601-2730
21 799-601-2740
Terminal part No.: 79A-222-2770 Terminal part No.: 79A-222-2760 —
20-354 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

No.of AMP040 type connector

8 799-601-7180
— Housing part No.: 79A-222-3430
12 799-601-7190
16 799-601-7210
20 799-601-7220
• Terminal part No.: 79A-222-3470 (No relation with number of

pins)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-355

No.of AMP070 type connector

10 799-601-7510
— Part No.: 08195-10210
12 799-601-7520
— Part No.: 08195-12210
14 799-601-7530
— Part No.: 08195-14210
18 799-601-7540
— Part No.: 08195-18210
20 799-601-7550
— Part No.: 08195-20210
20-356 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

No.of L type connector

2 —
— —
No.of Connector for PA

9 —
— —
No.of Bendix MS connector

10 799-601-3460
— —
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-357

No.of KES 1 (Automobile) connector

2 —
Part No.:08027-10210 (Natural color) Part No.:08027-10260 (Natural color)

08027-10220 (Black) 08027-10270 (Black)
3 —
Part No.:08027-10310 Part No.:08027-10360
4 —

08027-10420 (Black) 08027-10470 (Black)
6 —

08027-10620 (Black) 08027-10670 (Black)
20-358 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

No.of KES 1 (Automobile) connector

8 —

08027-10820 (Black) 08027-10870 (Black)
No.of Connector for relay (Socket type)

5 799-601-7360
— —
6 799-601-7370
— —
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-359

F type connector
No.of
pins T-adapter
Part No.
4 —
— —
20-360 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

[The pin No. is also marked on the connector (electric wire inser-
tion end)]
Type HD30 Series connector

(shell
size T-adapter
Body (plug) Body (receptacle)
code) Part No.
Pin (male terminal) Pin (female terminal)
799-601-9210
Part No.:08191-11201, 08191-11202, Part No.:08191-14101, 08191-14102,

18-8 08191-11205, 08191-11206 08191-14105, 08191-14106
(1) Pin (female terminal) Pin (male terminal)
799-601-9210
Part No.:08191-12201, 08191-12202, Part No.:08191-13101, 08191-13102,

08191-12205, 08191-12206 08191-13105, 08191-13106
799-601-9220
Part No.:08191-21201, 08191-12202, Part No.:08191-24101, 08191-24102,

18-14 08191-21205, 08191-12206 08191-24105, 08191-24106
799-601-9220
Part No.:08191-22201, 08191-22202, Part No.:08191-23101, 08191-23102,

08191-22205, 08191-22206 08191-23105, 08191-23106
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-361

tion end)]

(shell
size T-adapter
code) Part No.
799-601-9230
18-20 Part No.:08191-31201, 08191-31202 Part No.:08191-34101, 08191-34102

799-601-9230
Part No.:08191-32201, 08191-32202 Part No.:08191-33101, 08191-33102
799-601-9240
18-21 Part No.:08191-41201, 08191-42202 Part No.:08191-44101, 08191-44102

799-601-9240
Part No.:08191-42201, 08191-42202 Part No.:08191-43101, 08191-43102
20-362 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

tion end)]

(shell
size T-adapter
code) Part No.
799-601-9250
24-9 Part No.:08191-51201, 08191-51202 Part No.:08191-54101, 08191-54102

799-601-9250
Part No.:08191-52201, 08191-52202 Part No.:08191-53101, 08191-53102
799-601-9260
Part No.:08191-61201, 08191-62202, Part No.:08191-64101, 08191-64102,

24-16 08191-61205, 08191-62206 08191-64105, 08191-64106
799-601-9260
Part No.:08191-62201, 08191-62202, Part No.:08191-63101, 08191-63102,

08191-62205, 08191-62206 08191-63105, 08191-63106
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-363

tion end)]

(shell
size T-adapter
code) Part No.
799-601-9270
Part No.:08191-71201, 08191-71202, Part No.:08191-74101, 08191-74102,

24- 08191-71205, 08191-71206 08191-74105, 08191-74106
21
799-601-9270
Part No.:08191-72201, 08191-72202, Part No.:08191-73101, 08191-73102,

08191-72205, 08191-72206 08191-73105, 08191-73106
799-601-9280
Part No.:08191-81201, 08191-81202 Part No.:08191-84101, 08191-84102

08191-81203, 08191-81204 08191-84103, 08191-84104
24- 08191-81205, 08191-80206 08191-84105, 08191-84106
22
799-601-9280
Part No.:08191-82201, 08191-82202 Part No.:08191-83101, 08191-83102

08191-82203, 08191-82204 08191-83103, 08191-83104
08191-82205, 08191-82206 08191-83105, 08191-83106
20-364 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

tion end)]

(shell
size T-adapter
code) Part No.
799-601-9290
Part No.:08191-91203, 08191-91204, Part No.:08191-94103, 08191-94104,

24- 08191-91205, 08191-91206 08191-94105, 08191-94106
31
799-601-9290
Part No.:08191-92203, 08191-92204, Part No.:08191-93103, 08191-93104,

08191-92205, 08191-92206 08191-93105, 08191-93106
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-365

tion end)]
DT Series connector
No.of
pins Body (receptacle) T-adapter
Body (plug)
Part No.
2 799-601-9020
Part No.:08192-12200 (normal type) Part No.:08192-12100 (normal type)

08192-22200 (fine wire type) 08192-22100 (fine wire type)
3 799-601-9030

4 799-601-9040

6 799-601-9050

20-366 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

tion end)]
No.of DT Series connector

pins Body (plug) Body (receptacle) T-adapter Part No.
8GR:799-601-9060
8B:799-601-9070
8
8G:799-601-9080
8BR:799-601-9090

12GR:799-601-9110
12B:799-601-9120
10
12G:799-601-9130
12BR:799-601-9140

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-367

tion end)]
No.of DTM Series connector

799-601-9010
2
Part No.: 08192-02200 Part No.: 08192-02100
tion end)]
No.of DTHD Series connector

2 —
Part No.:08192-31200 (Contact size#12) Part No.:08192-31100 (Contact size#12)

08192-41200 (Contact size #8) 08192-41100 (Contact size #8)
08192-51200 (Contact size #4) 08192-51100 (Contact size #4)
20-368 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Miscellaneous connectors
No.of
pins Body (receptacle)
Body (plug)
Part No.:20K-06-31960 Part No.:
Part No.:20K-06-K32160 Part No.:
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-369

Miscellaneous connectors
No.of
pins Body (receptacle)
Body (plug)
20
20
20
Part No.: Part No.:
20-370 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

No.
Body (receptacle)
of Body (plug) T-adapter part No.
Pins
24 799-601-9360
- Part No.: 7821-93-3110
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-371

20
Part No.:198-Z11-2650 Part No.:
20-372 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

12
20
Part No.:7821-92-7370 Part No.:
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-373

Part No.:20G-06-K1420 Part No.:
Part No.:7821-92-7360 Part No.:
20-374 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

No.
Body (receptacle)
of Body (plug) T-adapter part No.
Pins
Part No.:20Y-06-13590 Part No.:
40
799-601-9350
(A)
- Part No.: 7821-93-3130
40
799-601-9350
(B)
- Part No.: 7821-93-3120
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-375

T-boxes and T-adapters table

• The Nos. in the columns are the part Nos. of the T-boxes, T-
adapters, and other parts. The Nos. in the lines are the kit
Nos. of the T-adapter kits.
T-adapter kit
Number of pins
799-601-2500
799-601-2700
799-601-2800
799-601-2900
799-601-3000
799-601-5500
799-601-6000
799-601-6500
799-601-7000
799-601-7100
799-601-7400
799-601-7500
799-601-8000
799-601-9000
799-601-9100
799-601-9200
799-601-9300
Out of kit
Identifica-
Part No. Part name
tion symbol
799-601-2600 T-box (for ECONO) 21

799-601-3100 T-box (for MS) 37
799-601-3200 T-box (for MS) 37
799-601-3300 T-box (for ECONO) 24
799-601-3360 • Plate for MS (24-pin)
799-601-3370 • Plate for MS (17-pin)
799-601-3380 • Plate for MS (14-pin)
799-601-3410 Adapter for BENDIX (MS) 24 MS-24P
799-601-3510 Adapter for BENDIX (MS) 5 MS-5S
799-601-3470 Case
799-601-2710 Adapter for MIC 5 MIC-5P
799-601-2750 Adapter for ECONO 2 ECONO2P
ECONO13
799-601-2760 Adapter for ECONO 3
P
ECONO12
799-601-2790 Adapter for ECONO 12
P
799-601-2810 Adapter for DLI 8 DLI-8P
Extension cable ECONO12
799-601-2840 12
(ECONO type) P
799-601-2850 Case
799-601-4210 Adapter for DRC 50 DRC50
799-601-7010 Adapter for X (T-adapter) 1
799-601-7020 Adapter for X 2 X2P
20-376 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

T-adapter kit
Number of pins
799-601-2500
799-601-2700
799-601-2800
799-601-2900
799-601-3000
799-601-5500
799-601-6000
799-601-6500
799-601-7000
799-601-7100
799-601-7400
799-601-7500
799-601-8000
799-601-9000
799-601-9100
799-601-9200
799-601-9300
Out of kit
Identifica-
Part No. Part name
tion symbol
799-601-7050 Adapter for SWP 6 SW6P

799-601-7080 Adapter for M (T-adapter) 1
799-601-7090 Adapter for M 2 M2P
799-601-7140 Adapter for S 8 S8P
799-601-7150 Adapter for S (White) 10 S10P
799-601-7160 Adapter for S (Blue) 12 S12P
799-601-7170 Adapter for S (Blue) 16 S16P
799-601-7330 Adapter for S (White) 16 S16PW
799-601-7350 Adapter for S (White) 12 S12PW
799-601-7180 Adapter for AMP040 8 A8P
799-601-7230 Short connector for X 2
799-601-7240 Case
799-601-7270 Case
799-601-7510 Adapter for 070 10 07-10
799-601-7520 Adapter for 070 12 07-12
799-601-7530 Adapter for 070 14 07-14
799-601-7540 Adapter for 070 18 07-18
799-601-7550 Adapter for 070 20 07-20
799-601-7360 Adapter for relay 5 REL-5P
799-601-7370 Adapter for relay 6 REL-6P
799-601-7380 Adapter for JFC 2
799-601-9010 Adapter for DTM 2 DTM2
799-601-9020 Adapter for DT 2 DT2
799-601-9060 Adapter for DT (Gray) 8 DT8GR
799-601-9070 Adapter for DT (Black) 8 DT8B
799-601-9080 Adapter for DT (Green) 8 DT8G
799-601-9090 Adapter for DT (Brown) 8 DT8BR
799-601-9110 Adapter for DT (Gray) 12 DT12GR
799-601-9120 Adapter for DT (Black) 12 DT12B
799-601-9130 Adapter for DT (Green) 12 DT12G
799-601-9140 Adapter for DT 12 DT12BR
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-377

T-adapter kit
Number of pins
799-601-2500
799-601-2700
799-601-2800
799-601-2900
799-601-3000
799-601-5500
799-601-6000
799-601-6500
799-601-7000
799-601-7100
799-601-7400
799-601-7500
799-601-8000
799-601-9000
799-601-9100
799-601-9200
799-601-9300
Out of kit
Identifica-
Part No. Part name
tion symbol
799-601-9210 Adapter for HD30-18 8 D18-8

799-601-9220 Adapter for HD30-18 14 D18-14
799-601-9230 Adapter for HD30-18 20 D18-20
799-601-9240 Adapter for HD30-18 21 D18-21
799-601-9250 Adapter for HD30-24 9 D24-9
799-601-9260 Adapter for HD30-24 16 D24-16
799-601-9270 Adapter for HD30-24 21 D24-21
799-601-9280 Adapter for HD30-24 23 D24-23
799-601-9290 Adapter for HD30-24 31 D24-31
799-601-9310 Plate for HD30 (24-pin)
799-601-9320 T-box (for DT/HD) 12
799-601-9330 Case
799-601-9340 Case
799-601-9350 Adapter for DRC 40 DRC-40
799-601-9360 Adapter for DRC 24 DRC-24
799-601-9410 Adapter for engine (CRI-T2) 2 G
Adapter for engine (CRI-T2)
799-601-9420 3 A3
799-601-9430 2 P
799-601-9440 Adapter for engine (CRI-T2) 3 1,2,3
795-799-5520 Adapter for engine (HPI-T2) 2 S
Adapter for engine (HPI-T2)
795-799-5530 2 C
Adapter for engine (HPI-T2)
795-799-5540 2 A
795-799-5460 Adapter for engine (HPI-T2) 3
799-601-4160 Adapter for engine (CRI-T3) 2 OIL
799-601-4130 Adapter for engine (CRI-T3) 3 FCIN
799-601-4140 Adapter for engine (CRI-T3) 3 FCIG
799-601-4150 Adapter for engine (CRI-T3) 3 FCIB
799-601-4180 Adapter for engine (CRI-T3) 3 FCIP3
799-601-4230 Adapter for engine (CRI-T3) 4 1,2,3,4
799-601-4260 Adapter for controller (ENG) 4 DTP4
799-601-4210 Adapter for controller (ENG) 50 DRC50
799-601-4220 Adapter for controller (ENG) 60 DRC60
799-601-4280 Box for controller (PUMP) 121
799-601-9720 Adapter for controller (HST) 16 HST16A
799-601-9710 Adapter for controller (HST) 16 HST16B
799-601-9370 Adapter for controller (HST) 26 HST26A
20-378 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Troubleshooting when service code "Electrical system"

and failure code "Mechanical system" are indicated
Information contained in troubleshooting table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-405
Failure code [6B2JMA] – Abnormality in travel PPC switch hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-407
Failure code [989L00] – Engine controller lock caution 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-408
Failure code [989M00] – Engine controller lock caution 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-408
Failure code [989N00] – Engine controller lock caution 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-409
Failure code [AA10NX] – Air cleaner clogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-410
Failure code [AB00KE] – Charging voltage abnormally low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-412
Failure code [B@BAZG] – Abnormally lowered engine oil pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-414
Failure code [B@BAZK] – Abnormally lowered engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-416
Failure code [B@BCNS] – Engine cooling water overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-418
Failure code [B@BCZK] – Abnormally low radiator water level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-420
Failure code [B@HANS] – Hydraulic oil overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-422
Failure code [CA111] – EMC critical internal failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-424
Failure code [CA115] – Engine neutral and backup speed sensor error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-425
Failure code [CA122] – Chg air press sensor high error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-426
Failure code [CA123] – Chg air press sensor low error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-428
Failure code [CA131] – Throttle sensor high error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-430
Failure code [CA132] – Throttle sensor low error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-432
Failure code [CA144] – Coolant temp sens high error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-434
Failure code [CA145] – Coolant temp sens low error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-436
Failure code [CA153] – Chg air temp sensor high error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-438
Failure code [CA154] – Chg air temp sensor low error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-440
Failure code [CA155] – Chg air temp high speed derate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-442
Failure code [CA187] – Sens supply 2 volt low error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-444
Failure code [CA221] – Ambient press sens high error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-446
Failure code [CA222] – Ambient press sens low error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-448
Failure code [CA227] – Sens supply 2 volt high error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-450
Failure code [CA234] – Eng overspeed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-452
Failure code [CA238] – Ne speed sens supply volt error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-454
Failure code [CA271] – IMV/PCV1 short error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-456
Failure code [CA272] – IMV/PCV1 open error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-458
Failure code [CA322] – Inj #1 (L#1) open/short error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-460
Failure code [CA323] – Inj #5 (L#5) open/short error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-462
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-401

Troubleshooting when service code "Electrical system" and failure code "Mechanical system" are indicated TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA324] – Inj #3 (L#3) open/short error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-464

Failure code [CA342] – Calibration code incompatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-472
Failure code [CA351] – Injectors drive circuit error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-474
Failure code [CA352] – Sens supply 1 volt low error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-476
Failure code [CA386] – Sens supply 1 volt high error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-478
Failure code [CA428] – Water in fuel sensor high error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-480
Failure code [CA429] – Water in fuel sensor low error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-482
Failure code [CA435] – Eng oil press sw error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-484
Failure code [CA441] – Battery voltage low error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-486
Failure code [CA442] – Battery voltage high error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-490
Failure code [CA449] – Rail press very high error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-492
Failure code [CA451] – Rail press sensor high error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-494
Failure code [CA452] – Rail press sensor low error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-496
Failure code [CA488] – Chg air temp high torque derate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-498
Failure code [CA553] – Rail press high error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-498
Failure code [CA559] – Rail press low error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-499
Failure code [CA689] – Eng ne speed sensor error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-502
Failure code [CA731] – Eng bkup speed sens phase error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-504
Failure code [CA757] – All continuous data lost error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-506
Failure code [CA778] – Eng G speed sensor error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-508
Failure code [CA1633] – KOMNET datalink timeout error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-510
Failure code [CA2185] – Throttle sensor supply voltage high error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-512
Failure code [CA2186] – Throttle sensor supply voltage low error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-513
Failure code [CA2249] – Rail press very low error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-514
Failure code [CA2311] – IMV solenoid error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-516
Failure code [CA2555] – Grid htr relay volt high error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-518
Failure code [CA2556] – Grid heater relay volt low error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-520
Failure code [D110KB] – Short-circuiting in battery relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-522
Failure code [D19JKZ] – Personal code relay abnormality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-524
Failure code [D862KA] – GPS antenna discon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-526
Failure code [DA25KP] – Press. sensor power abnormality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-528
Failure code [DA2RMC] – Pump comm. abnormality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-530
Failure code [DA2SKA] – Disconnection of S-NET signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-532
Failure code [DA2SKQ] – Abnormality in inputting model code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-534
Failure code [DA2SKQ] – Abnormality in inputting model code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-536
Failure code [DAF0KT] – Abnormal data in error history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-538
20-402 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Troubleshooting when service code "Electrical system" and failure code "Mechanical system" are indicated
Failure code [DAFRMC] – Monitor comm. abnormality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-540

Failure code [DDC3KZ] – Outrigger switch select abnormality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-542
Failure code [DDHPAKP] – Abnormality in pump pressure sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-544
Failure code [DDP4KX] – Abnormality in travel PPC pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-546
Failure code [DDWCKZ] – Abnormality in travel direction control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-548
Failure code [DFB1KZ] – Service lever potentio 1 abnormality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-550
Failure code [DFB2KZ] – Service lever potentio 2 abnormality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-552
Failure code [DFB3L8] – Service lever 1 potentio error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-554
Failure code [DFB4L8] – Service lever 2 potentio error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-555
Failure code [DGH2KB] – Hydr oil sensor short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-557
Failure code [DH10KS] – Abnormality in pressure sensor power source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-558
Failure code [DHPAKP] – Abnormality in F pump pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-560
Failure code [DHPAMA] – Abnormality in F pump pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-562
Failure code [DHPBMA] – Abnormality in R pump pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-564
Failure code [DHS5KX] – Abnormality in travel PPC sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-566
Failure code [DHX1MA] – Abnormality in overload caution sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-568
Failure code [DLE2MA] – Abnormality in engine rotation sensor in governor
(pump controller system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-570
Failure code [DLT4KA] – Disconnection in transmission speed sensor in governor
(pump controller syste)m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-572
Failure code [DW27KA] – Disconnection in transmission clutch solenoid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-574
Failure code [DW27KB] – Short-circuiting in transmission clutch solenoid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-576
Failure code [DW4CKA] – Disconnection in PPC lock solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-578
Failure code [DW4CKB] – PPC lock sol. S/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-580
Failure code [DW44KA] – Disconnection of travel F/R solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-582
Failure code [DW44KB] – Short-circuiting of travel F/R solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-584
Failure code [DW45KA] – Disconnection in swing parking brake solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-586
Failure code [DW4MKA] – Disconnection in creep solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-588
Failure code [DW4MKB] – Short-circuiting in creep solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-590
Failure code [DW91KA] – Disconnection in travel neutral solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-592
Failure code [DW91KB] – Short-circuiting in travel neutral solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-594
Failure code [DWK0KA] – Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-596
Failure code [DWK0KB] – Short-circuiting in 2-stage relief solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-598
Failure code [DWK2KA] – Disconnection in 2-stage back pressure solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-600
Failure code [DWK2KB] – Short circuiting in 2-stage back pressure solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-602
Failure code [DXA0KA] – Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-604
Failure code [DXE0KA] – Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-606
Failure code [DXE0KB] – Short-circuiting in LS-EPC solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-608
Failure code [DXE4KA] – Service current EPC1 discon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-610
Failure code [DXE4KB] – Service current EPC1 short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-612
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-403

Troubleshooting when service code "Electrical system" and failure code "Mechanical system" are indicated TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DXE7KA] – Service current EPC2 disco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-614

Failure code [DXE8KA] – Service current EPC3 discon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-618
Failure code [DXE9KA] – Service current EPC4 discon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-622
Failure code [DY20KA] – Wiper working abnormality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-626
Failure code [DY20MA] – Wiper parking abnormality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-628
Failure code [DY2CKB] – Washer drive S/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-630
Failure code [DY2DKB] – Wiper drive (for) S/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-632
Failure code [DY2EKB] – Wiper drive (rev) S/C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-634
20-404 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Information contained in troubleshooting table
Information contained in troubleshooting table

• The troubleshooting table and the related circuit diagrams
contain the following information. Grasp their contents fully
before proceeding to actual troubleshooting work.
User Code Service Code Failure Code

Failure
Display in Display in Display in Title of failure phenomenon shown in failure history
phenomenon
monitor panel monitor panel monitor panel
Failure content • Failure status as detected by monitor panel or controller
Response from
• Action taken by the monitor panel or controller to protect an affected system or equipment, when they detect some
monitor panel or
failure.
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on • Phenomenon that occurs on the machine, resulting from the above action taken by the monitor panel or controller
machine
Relative
• Information on the failure occurred as well as the troubleshooting
information
Cause Standard value in normal and references for troubleshooting
<Content Included>
• Standard value in normal by which to pass "Good" or "No good" judgement over the presumed
cause
1 • Reference for passing the above "Good" or "No Good" judgement
<Phenomenon of Wiring Harness Failure>

• Disconnection
There is a faulty contact at the connector or disconnection of wiring harness occurred.
Presumed cause and standard value in normal
• Defective grounding
A wiring harness that is not connected with a grounding circuit has a contact with the grounding
2
circuit.
• Short-circuiting
A wiring harness that is not connected with a 24 V electric circuit has a contact with the electric
circuit.
Cause that presumably
<Precaution for Troubleshooting>
triggered failure in question
3 (The assigned No. is for fil- 1. Connector No. display method and handling of T-adapter
ing purpose only. It does Insert or connect T-adapters in the following manner before starting troubleshooting unless oth-
not stand for any priority) erwise instructed.
• If there is no indication of "male" or "female" in a specific connector No., disconnect the connec-
tor and insert the T-adapter into both male and female sides.
• If there is an indication of "male" or "female" in a specific connector No., disconnect the connec-
tor and connect the T-adapter with only one side of either "male" or "female".
4
2. Entry sequence of pin No. and handling of circuit tester lead
Connect the positive (+) lead and the negative (–) lead OFF a circuit tester in the following man-
ner unless otherwise instructed.
• Connect the positive (+) lead with the pin No. indicated at the front or the wiring harness.
• Connect the negative (–) lead with the pin No. indicated at the front or the wiring harness.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-405

Information contained in troubleshooting table TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Relative electrical circuit diagram
This is part of the electrical circuit diagram which shows the portion where the failure occurred.
• Connector No.: Indicates (Type - numbers of a pin) (colour)
• Arrow: Roughly indicates the location in the machine where it is installed.
20-406 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [6B2JMA] – Abnormality in travel PPC switch hydraulics
Failure code [6B2JMA] – Abnormality in travel PPC switch

hydraulics
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Incorrect non-volatile memory data
— E257 6B2JMA phenomenon (in governor – pump controller)
• Hydraulic signal activates one pressure switch (Either forward or reverse but R.H PPC work lever switch selects op-
Failure content
posite travel direction.
Response from
• Error code is displayed on the monitor panel.
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on • Engine speed raises when travel pedal is operated but machine does not travel.
machine
Relative • This error ocurs when hydraulic PPC travel hoses are connected to incorrect ports.
information Countermeasure - Swap hoses.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-407

Failure code [989L00] – Engine controller lock caution 1 TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [989L00] – Engine controller lock caution 1
User code Failure code Engine controller lock caution 1

Trouble
— 989L00 (Machine monitor system)
Contents of
• Engine controller lock is detected (Factor 1).
trouble
Action of • None in particular.

machine monitor • If cause of failure disappears, system resets itself.
Problem that
appears on • Engine cannot be started.
machine
• If this failure code is displayed after machine monitor is replaced, user password must be changed to one before
Related
replacement.
information
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON.
Possible causes Cause Standard value in normal state/Remarks on troubleshooting

and standard
value in normal Replacement of machine moni-
1 This trouble may be caused by replacement of machine monitor.
state tor
Failure code [989M00] – Engine controller lock caution 2

Trouble
— 989M00 (Machine monitor system)
Contents of
trouble

Problem that
appears on • Engine cannot be started.
machine
• If this failure code is displayed after machine monitor is replaced, user password must be changed to one before
Related
replacement.
information
Cause Standard value in normal state/Remarks on troubleshooting
Possible causes Replacement of machine moni-

1 This trouble may be caused by replacement of machine monitor.
and standard tor
value in normal
If this failure code is displayed while machine monitor is not replaced,
state
2 Defective machine monitor machine monitor may be defective. (Since trouble is in system, troubleshoot-
ing cannot be carried out.)
20-408 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [989N00] – Engine controller lock caution 3
Failure code [989N00] – Engine controller lock caution 3

Trouble
— 989N00 (Machine monitor system)
Contents of
trouble
Action of • Tries automatic resetting.

Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
• Method of reproducing failure code: Failure code is not reproduced since system is reset automatically.
information

and standard
value in normal If this failure code is displayed repeatedly, engine controller may be defec-
1 Defective engine controller
state tive. (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out.)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-409

Failure code [AA10NX] – Air cleaner clogging TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [AA10NX] – Air cleaner clogging
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Air cleaner clogged
— — AA10NX phenomenon (in mechanical system)
• While the engine was running, the signal circuit in the air cleaner clogging switch was opened (i.e. dis-
Failure content
connected from grounding circuit).
Response from controller • None in particular
Phenomenon occurring on
• There is a possibility that the engine is damaged, if it is used continuously without corrective action.
machine
• This Failure Code is recorded, when the air cleaner clogging caution symbol is displayed in the monitor
panel while the engine is running.
Relative information
• Input from the air cleaner clogging switch (ON or OFF) can be confirmed in the monitor panel.
(Code No. 046: Monitor input 2)
Air cleaner clogged (when • Check the air cleaner for clogging. If it is clogged, clean or replace it with new one.
1 the system is in normal
condition)
• Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and keep the engine running during the
troubleshooting.
Air cleaner clogging switch
2 defective A31 (male) Air cleaner Resistance value
(Internal disconnection) When in normal condition Below 1 Ω
Between (1) and (2)
When clogged Above 1 MΩ
• Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it running during the trouble-
shooting.
Disconnection of wiring
harness Wiring harness between P02 (female) (5) and A31 (female) (1) Resistance
3 Below 1 Ω
(Disconnection or defective value
contact with connector)
Between wiring harness A31 (female) (2) and grounding Resistance
Below 1 Ω
value
troubleshooting.
4 Monitor panel defective P02 Air cleaner Voltage
When in normal condition Below 1 V

Between (5) and grounding
When clogged 20 – 30 V
20-410 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [AA10NX] – Air cleaner clogging
Electrical circuit for air cleaner clogging switch in monitor panel
Monitor
panel
H10 A06 A31 Air cleaner
P02 (040 - 20) (S - 16) (SWP - 16) (DT-2) clogging switch
Air cleaner
5 11 9 1
clogging switch
2
A65
CAB ENGINE
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-411

Failure code [AB00KE] – Charging voltage abnormally low TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [AB00KE] – Charging voltage abnormally low
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Charging voltage abnormally lowered
— — AB00KE phenomenon (in mechanical system)
Failure content • Generation signal from the alternator is not inputted, while the engine is running.
Response from
• None in particular
controller
Phenomenon
• There is a possibility that the battery may not be charged, if charging is continued without corrective
occurring on
action.
machine
• This Failure Code is recorded, if the charging caution symbol is displayed in the monitor panel, while the engine is
Relative running.
information • Input from the alternator (voltage) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 043: Charging voltage)
shooting.
Alternator defective
1
(short generating output) E12 (male) Engine rotation Voltage
Between D and grounding Above medium speed 27.5 – 29.5 V
Disconnection of wiring • Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the OFF position during
harness the troubleshooting.
2
(Disconnection or defective Wiring harness from P02 (female) (11) to H11 to J01 to A07 to Resistance
contact with connector) Below 1 Ω
E21 to E12 (female) D. value
Grounding fault of wiring • Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the OFF position during
3
(Contact with grounding Wiring harness from P02 (female) (11) to H11 to J01 to A07 to Resistance
circuit) Above 1 MΩ
E21 to E12 (female) D. value
troubleshooting.
4 Monitor panel defective
P02 Engine rotation Voltage
Between (11) and grounding Above medium speed 27.5 – 29.5 V
20-412 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [AB00KE] – Charging voltage abnormally low
Electrical circuit diagram for engine start, stop and charging in monitor
panel
H11
P02 (040-20) (S - 16)
Battery
11 3
Charge level
J01 (J-20)
11
12
13
14
A07
(SWP - 16) (Black)
9
Alternator E12
E21 B
(DT-12)
1 D
AC
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-413

Failure code [B@BAZG] – Abnormally lowered engine oil pressure TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [B@BAZG] – Abnormally lowered engine oil

pressure
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Engine oil pressure abnormally lowered
— — B@BAZG phenomenon (in mechanical system)
• The signal circuit in the engine oil pressure switch was closed (i.e. connected with grounding), while the engine was
Failure content
running.
Response from
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on • There is a possibility that the engine may seize, if the engine is kept running without corrective action.
machine
• This Failure Code is recorded, if the engine oil pressure caution symbol is displayed in the monitor panel, while the
Relative engine is running.
information • Input from the engine oil pressure switch (ON or OFF) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
Engine oil pressure low-

1 ered (the system in normal • Check the failure cause and damage to the engine, and then make repairs.
condition)
troubleshooting.
Engine oil pressure switch
2 defective E02 (on switch side) Engine oil pressure Resistance value
(Internal short-circuiting) When in normal condition Above 1 MΩ
Between terminal and
grounding When lowered Below 1 Ω
3
(Contact with grounding Wiring harness between P02 (female) (7) and E02 (terminal) and Resistance
grounding value
troubleshooting.
4 Monitor panel defective P02 Engine oil pressure Voltage
When in normal condition 20 – 30 V

When lowered Below 1 V
20-414 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [B@BAZG] – Abnormally lowered engine oil pressure
Electrical circuit diagram for engine oil pressure switch in monitor panel
Monitor panel
H10 A03 E21 Engine oil
P02 (040 - 20) (S - 16) (DT - 12) (DT - 12) pressure switch
Engine oil E02
7 13 11 7
pressure switch
CAB ENGINE
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-415

Failure code [B@BAZK] – Abnormally lowered engine oil level TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [B@BAZK] – Abnormally lowered engine oil

level
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Engine oil level abnormally lowered
— — B@BAZK phenomenon (in mechanical system)
• The signal circuit in the engine oil level switch was opened (i.e. disconnected from grounding), when the engine is
Failure content
stopped (with the starting switch in the ON position).
Response from
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on • There is a possibility that the engine seizes if it is kept running without a corrective action.
machine
• This Failure Code is recorded if the engine oil level caution symbol is displayed, when the engine is stopped (with
Relative the starting key in the ON position).
information • Input from the engine oil level switch (ON or OFF) can be confirmed in the monitor function. (Code No. 046: Monitor
input 2)
Engine oil level lowered

• Check the engine oil level, and refill oil.
1 (System in normal condi-
(If the phenomenon occurs frequently, check the cause)
tion)
• Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the OFF position during
the troubleshooting.
Engine oil level switch
2 defective E03 (male) Engine oil level Resistance value
When lowered Above 1 MΩ
3
(Disconnection or defective Resistance
contact with connector) Wiring harness between P02 (female) (8) and E03 (female) (1) Below 1 Ω
value
• Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the ON position during
4 Monitor panel defective P02 Engine oil pressure Voltage

When lowered 20 – 30 V
20-416 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [B@BAZK] – Abnormally lowered engine oil level
Electrical circuit diagram for engine oil level switch in monitor panel
Monitor panel Engine oil

H10 A03 E21 E03 level switch
P02 (040 -20) (S - 16) (DT - 12) (DT - 12) (X - 1)
Engine oil level
8 14 12 8 1
switch
CAB ENGINE
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-417

Failure code [B@BCNS] – Engine cooling water overheating TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [B@BCNS] – Engine cooling water overheat-

ing
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Engine cooling water overheated
— — B@BCNS phenomenon (in mechanical system)
Failure content • The engine cooling water sensor inputted a signal of 102°C, while the engine was running.
Response from
• Response from controller
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on • There is a possibility that the engine seizes, if it is kept running without a corrective action.
machine
• This Failure Code is recorded, if the engine cooling water temperature gauge is displayed in the red range, when
Relative the engine is running.
information • Input from the engine cooling water temperature sensor (temperature) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
(Code No. 041: Engine cooling water temperature)
Engine Overheating (sys-

1 • Check the engine for the cause and damage, and repair it.
tem in normal condition)
Engine cooling water tem- Engine cooling water temper-
2 perature sensor defective E05 (male) Resistance value
ature
(Internal short-circuiting)
Between (1) and (2) 90 – 3.5kΩ
10 – 100 °C
Between (2) and grounding Above 1 MΩ
3
(Contact with grounding Wiring harness between P02 (female) (1) and E05 (female) (2) Resistance
and grounding value
4 Monitor panel defective P02 (female) Engine water temperature Resistance value
Between (1) and (13) 90 – 3.5kΩ

10 – 100 °C
20-418 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [B@BCNS] – Engine cooling water overheating
Electrical circuit diagram for engine cooling water temperature sensor in

monitor panel
Monitor panel
A06 Engine water
H - 10 (SWP - 16) E21 E05
P02 (040 -20) (S - 16) (DT - 12) (DT - 2) temperature sensor
Engine water 12
1 7 4 2
temperature sensor
Sensor GND 13 16 3 1
4
CAB ENGINE
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-419

Failure code [B@BCZK] – Abnormally low radiator water level TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [B@BCZK] – Abnormally low radiator water

level
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Radiator water level abnormally lowered
— — B@BCZK phenomenon (in mechanical system)
Failure content • The signal circuit in the radiator water level switch was opened (i.e. disconnected from grounding).
Response from
controller
Phenomenon
machine
• This Failure Code is recorded, if the radiator water level caution symbol is displayed in the monitor panel, when the
Relative engine is running.
information • Input from the radiator water level switch (ON or OFF) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
Radiator water level low-

• Check the water level and refill cooling water.
1 ered (system in normal
(If this phenomenon occurs frequently, check the cause)
condition)
Radiator water level switch
2 defective A33 (male) Engine cooling water level Resistance value
Between (1) and (2)
When lowered Above 1 MΩ
harness Resistance
3 Wiring harness between P02 (female) (3) and A33 (female) (1) Below 1 Ω
Resistance
Wiring harness between A33 (female) (2) and grounding Below 1 Ω
value
4 Monitor panel defective P02 Engine water temperature Resistance value

When lowered 20 – 30 V
20-420 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [B@BCZK] – Abnormally low radiator water level
Electrical circuit diagram for radiator water level switch in monitor panel
Monitor panel Radiator water

H10 A06 A33 level switch
P02 (040 - 20) (S - 16) (SWP - 16) (X - 2)
Radiator
3 9 6 1
level switch
2
A65
CAB REVOLVING FRAME
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-421

Failure code [B@HANS] – Hydraulic oil overheating TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [B@HANS] – Hydraulic oil overheating

(Multi-monitor only
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Hydraulic oil overheated
— — B@HANS phenomenon (in mechanical system)
Failure content • The hydraulic oil temperature sensor inputted a signal of 102°C, while the engine was running.
Response from
controller
Phenomenon
machine
• This Failure Code is recorded, if the hydraulic oil temperature gauge is displayed in the red range, when the engine
Relative is running.
information • Input from the hydraulic oil temperature sensor (temperature) can be confirmed in the monitor function. (Code No.
044: Hydraulic oil temperature)
Hydraulic oil overheating

1 (system in normal condi- • Check the cause and damage to the hydraulic equipment, and repair it.
tion)
Hydraulic oil temperature
2 sensor defective A55 (male) Hydraulic oil temperature Resistance value
(Internal short-circuiting) Between (1) and (2) 90 – 3.5kΩ
10 – 100 °C
3
(Contact with grounding Wiring harness between P02 (female) (12) and A55 (female) (2) Resistance
and grounding value
4 Monitor panel defective P02 (female) Engine water temperature Resistance value
Between (12) and (13) 90 – 3.5kΩ

10 – 100 °C
20-422 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [B@HANS] – Hydraulic oil overheating
Electrical circuit diagram for hydraulic oil temperature sensor in monitor

panel
H11 A06 E22

Monitor panel (S - 16) (SWP - 16) (DT - 12)
A55 Hydraulic oil
P02 (040 - 20) 4 5 1 (DT - 2) temperature sensor
Hydraulic oil
temperature sensor 12 2
Sensor GND 13 16 4 3 1
H10 E21
(S - 16) (DT - 12)
CAB HYDRAULIC PUMP
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-423

Failure code [CA111] – EMC critical internal failure TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA111] – EMC critical internal failure
User code Failure code Critical internal failure

Trouble
E10 CA111 (Engine controller system)
Contents of
• Memory or power supply circuit in engine controller is defective.
trouble
Action of
• None in particular.
controller
Problem that
appears on • Engine does not start.
machine
Related
information

and standard
value in normal Engine controller may be defective.
state (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out.)
20-424 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA115] – Engine neutral and backup speed sensor error
Failure code [CA115] – Engine neutral and backup speed

sensor error
User code Failure code Engine Neutral and Backup speed sensor error
Trouble
Contents of
• Both signals of engine Neutral speed sensor and engine Backup speed sensor are abnormal.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
• Engine stops.
appears on
• Engine does not start.
machine
Related
• Method of reproducing failure code: Start engine.
information

and standard
value in normal Defective connection of sensor Connectors of Neutral speed sensor and Backup speed sensor may be con-
1
state connector nected defectively (or connected to wrong parts). Check them directly.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-425

Failure code [CA122] – Chg air press sensor high error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA122] – Chg air press sensor high error
User code Failure code Charge air pressure sensor high error
Trouble
Contents of
• Pressure signal circuit of boost pressure/temperature sensor detected high voltage.
trouble
Action of
• Fixes charge pressure value and continues operation.
controller
Problem that
appears on • Engine output lowers.
machine
• Signal voltage on boost pressure side of boost pressure/temperature sensor can be checked with monitoring func-
Related
tion. (Code: 36501 Boost pressure sensor voltage)
information
1 Defective sensor power supply If failure code [CA227] is also indicated, carry out troubleshooting for it first.
2 system
2 ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and carry
out troubleshooting.
Defective boost pressure/tem- BOOST PRESS & IMT Voltage

perature sensor [pressure sig- Between (3) – (1) Power supply 4.75 – 5.25 V
nal system]
Voltage is measured with wiring harness connected. Accordingly, if voltage is
abnormal, check wiring harness and controller, too, for another cause of
trouble, and then judge.
Hot short (Short circuit with 5 V/ out troubleshooting.
24 V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (14) –
Possible causes Voltage Max. 1 V
and standard BOOST PRESS & IMT (female) (4)
value in normal
4 ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without
state turning starting switch ON.
Short circuit in wiring harness Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (44) –
(with another wiring harness) BOOST PRESS & IMT (female) (4) and between Resist- Min.
CE01 (female) (37) – JC01 – BOOST PRESS & ance 100 kΩ
IMT (female) (3)
5 Connecting parts between boost pressure/temperature sensor – engine wir-

ing harness – engine controller may be defective. Check them directly.
Defective wiring harness con-
• Looseness of connector, breakage of lock, or breakage of seal
nector
• Corrosion, bend, breakage, push-in, or expansion of pin
• Moisture or dirt in connector or defective insulation
Defective engine controller
CE01 Voltage
Between (37) – (47) Power supply 4.75 – 5.25 V
20-426 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA122] – Chg air press sensor high error
Circuit diagram related to boost pressure/temperature sensor (combina-

tion sensor)
(Water in Fuel Sensor)
1 2 9 11 1 5 10 12 13
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-427

Failure code [CA123] – Chg air press sensor low error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA123] – Chg air press sensor low error
User code Failure code Charge air pressure sensor low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Pressure signal circuit of boost pressure/temperature sensor detected low voltage.
trouble
Action of
• Fixes charge pressure value and continues operation.
controller
Problem that
machine
• Signal voltage on boost pressure side of boost pressure/temperature sensor can be checked with monitoring func-
Related
tion. (Code: 36501 Boost pressure sensor voltage)
information
Defective sensor power supply If failure code [CA187] is also indicated, carry out troubleshooting for it first.
1
2 system
★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and carry
Defective boost pressure/tem- BOOST PRESS & IMT Voltage

2 perature sensor [pressure sig- Between (3) – (1) Power supply 4.75 – 5.25 V
nal system]
★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without
Ground fault in wiring harness turning starting switch ON.
3
(Short circuit with GND circuit) Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (44) – Resist- Min. 100
Possible causes
and standard BOOST PRESS & IMT (female) (4) ance kΩ
value in normal
4
(with another wiring harness) BOOST PRESS & IMT (female) (4) and between Resist- Min. 100
CE01 (female) (47) – JC02 – BOOST PRESS & ance kΩ
IMT (female) (1)
Connecting parts between boost pressure/temperature sensor – engine wir-

5 • Looseness of connector, breakage of lock, or breakage of seal
nector
CE01 Voltage
20-428 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA123] – Chg air press sensor low error

tion sensor)
1 2 9 11 1 5 10 12 13
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-429

Failure code [CA131] – Throttle sensor high error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA131] – Throttle sensor high error
User code Failure code Throttle sensor high error

Trouble
Contents of
• Signal circuit of fuel control dial detected high voltage.
trouble
• If trouble occurs while starting switch is in ON position, controller fixes voltage value to level just before detection of
Action of trouble and continues operation.
controller • If starting switch is turned ON while voltage is abnormally high, controller continues operation with voltage at 100%
value.
Problem that
appears on • Engine speed cannot be controlled with fuel control dial.
machine
Related • Signal voltage of fuel control dial can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 03000 Fuel control dial voltage)
information • Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON.
Defective throttle sensor power If failure code [CA2185] is also indicated, carry out troubleshooting for it first.
1
supply system
E06 Voltage
2 Defective fuel control dial Between (1) – (3) Power supply 4.75 – 5.25 V

Hot short (Short circuit with 5 V/ out troubleshooting.
3
Possible causes 24 V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (9) – E06
and standard Voltage Max. 1 V
(female) (2)
value in normal
state ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without
turning starting switch ON.
Short circuit in wiring harness
4 Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (9) – E06
(with another wiring harness) Resist- Min.
(female) (2) and between CE02 (female) (22) –
ance 100 kΩ
E06 (female) (1)
Connecting parts between fuel control dial – machine wiring harness –

engine controller may be defective. Check them directly.
nector
CE02 Voltage
20-430 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA131] – Throttle sensor high error
Circuit diagram related to fuel control dial
A03 H15
(DT-12) (090-20) E06 (M-3)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-431

Failure code [CA132] – Throttle sensor low error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA132] – Throttle sensor low error
User code Failure code Throttle sensor low error

Trouble
Contents of
• Signal circuit of fuel control dial detected low voltage.
trouble
value.
Problem that
machine
Related • Signal voltage of fuel control dial can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 03000 Fuel control dial voltage)
information • Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON.
Defective throttle sensor power If failure code [CA2186] is also indicated, carry out troubleshooting for it first.
1
supply system
E06 Voltage
2 Defective fuel control dial Between (1) – (3) Power supply 4.75 – 5.25 V

3
Possible causes (Short circuit with GND circuit) Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (9) – E06 Resist- Min.
and standard (female) (2) ance 100 kΩ
value in normal
4 Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (9) – E06
(female) (2) and between CE02 (female) (23) –
ance 100 kΩ
E06 (female) (3)

nector
CE02 Voltage
20-432 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA132] – Throttle sensor low error
A03 H15
(DT-12) (090-20) E06 (M-3)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-433

Failure code [CA144] – Coolant temp sens high error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA144] – Coolant temp sens high error
User code Failure code Coolant temperature sensor high error

Trouble
Contents of
• Signal circuit of coolant temperature sensor detected high voltage.
trouble
Action of
• Fixes coolant temperature value and continues operation.
controller
Problem that
• Exhaust gas becomes white.
appears on
• Overheat prevention function does not work.
machine
• Signal voltage of coolant temperature sensor can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 04105 Coolant tem-
Related
perature sensor voltage)
information
Defective coolant temperature
1
sensor COOLANT TEMP (male) Resistance
Between (A) – (B) 0.18 – 160 kΩ
Disconnection in wiring harness
Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (15) – Resist- Max. 10
2 (Disconnection in wiring or
COOLANT TEMP (female) (B) ance Ω
defective contact in connector)
Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (38) – Resist- Max. 10
JC03 – COOLANT TEMP (female) (A) ance Ω
Possible causes
and standard ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without
value in normal turning starting switch ON.
state Short circuit in wiring harness
3 Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (15) –
each of CE01 (female) pins (With all wiring har-
ance 100 kΩ
ness connectors disconnected)
Connecting parts between coolant temperature sensor – engine wiring har-

ness – engine controller may be defective. Check them directly.
nector
CE01 (female) Resistance
Between (15) – (38) 0.18 – 160 kΩ
20-434 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA144] – Coolant temp sens high error
Circuit diagram related to coolant temperature sensor
1 9 13
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-435

Failure code [CA145] – Coolant temp sens low error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA145] – Coolant temp sens low error
User code Failure code Coolant temperature sensor low error

Trouble
Contents of
• Signal circuit of coolant temperature sensor detected low voltage.
trouble
Action of
• Fixes coolant temperature value and continues operation.
controller
Problem that
appears on
• Overheat prevention function does not work.
machine
• Signal voltage of coolant temperature sensor can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 04105 Coolant tem-
Related
perature sensor voltage)
information
Defective coolant temperature COOLANT TEMP (male) Resistance
1
sensor
Between (A) – (B) 0.18 – 160 kΩ
Between (B) – chassis ground Min. 100 kΩ
2
(Short circuit with GND circuit) Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (15) – Resist- Min.
COOLANT TEMP (female) (B) ance 100 kΩ
Possible causes ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without
and standard turning starting switch ON.
value in normal 3
(with another wiring harness) Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (15) –
state Resist- Min.
ance 100 kΩ
Connecting parts between coolant temperature sensor – engine wiring har-

nector
5 Defective engine controller CE01 (female) Resistance
Between (15) – (38) 0.18 – 160 kΩ
Between (15) – chassis ground Min. 100 kΩ
20-436 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA145] – Coolant temp sens low error
Circuit diagram related to coolant temperature sensor
1 9 13
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-437

Failure code [CA153] – Chg air temp sensor high error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA153] – Chg air temp sensor high error
User code Failure code Charge air temperature sensor high error
Trouble
Contents of
• Temperature signal circuit of boost pressure/temperature sensor detected high voltage.
trouble
Action of
• Fixes charge temperature value and continues operation.
controller
Problem that
appears on
• Engine protection function based on boost temperature does not work
machine
• Signal voltage on boost temperature side of boost pressure/temperature sensor can be checked with monitoring
Related
function. (Code: 18501 Boost temperature sensor voltage)
information
Defective boost pressure/tem- turning starting switch ON.
1 perature sensor [temperature
BOOST PRESS & IMT (male) Resistance
signal system]
Between (2) – (1) 0.18 – 160 kΩ
Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (23) – Resist- Max.
BOOST PRESS & IMT (female) (2) ance 10 Ω
JC02 – BOOST PRESS & IMT (female) (1) ance 10 Ω
Possible causes
ance 100 kΩ

nector
Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without turn-
ing starting switch ON.
Between (23) – (47) 0.18 – 160 kΩ
20-438 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA153] – Chg air temp sensor high error

tion sensor)
1 2 9 11 1 5 10 12 13
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-43)

Failure code [CA154] – Chg air temp sensor low error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA154] – Chg air temp sensor low error
User code Failure code Charge air temperature sensor low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Temperature signal circuit of boost pressure/temperature sensor detected low voltage.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
• Engine protection function based on boost temperature does not work
machine
• Signal voltage on boost temperature side of boost pressure/temperature sensor can be checked with monitoring
Related
function. (Code: 18501 Boost temperature sensor voltage)
information
Defective boost pressure/tem-
1 perature sensor [temperature BOOST PRESS & IMT (male) Resistance
signal system] Between (2) – (1) 0.18 – 160 kΩ
2
BOOST PRESS & IMT (female) (2) ance 100 kΩ
value in normal Short circuit in wiring harness
state
ance 100 kΩ

nector
Between (23) – (47) 0.18 – 160 kΩ
20-440 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA154] – Chg air temp sensor low error

tion sensor)
1 2 9 11 1 5 10 12 13
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-441

Failure code [CA155] – Chg air temp high speed derate TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA155] – Chg air temp high speed derate
User code Failure code Charge air temperature high speed derate
Trouble
Contents of
• Temperature signal of boost pressure/temperature sensor exceeded control upper temperature limit.
trouble
Action of
• Limits output and continues operation.
controller
Problem that
• Engine output lowers.
appears on
• Engine stops.
machine
Related • Boost temperature can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 18500 Boost temperature)
information • Method of reproducing failure code: Start engine
Cooling performance of aftercooler may be low. Check following points

directly.
Lowering of cooling perform-
Possible causes 1 • Looseness and breakage of fan belt.
ance of aftercooler
and standard • Insufficiency of cooling air
value in normal • Clogging of aftercooler fins
state Abnormal rise of turbocharger Outlet temperature of turbocharger may be abnormally high. Check related
2
outlet temperature parts directly.
If causes 1 – 2 are not detected, engine controller may be defective. (Since

trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out.)
20-442 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA155] – Chg air temp high speed derate
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-443

Failure code [CA187] – Sens supply 2 volt low error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA187] – Sens supply 2 volt low error
User code Failure code Sensor power supply 2 voltage low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in sensor power supply 2 circuit.
trouble
• Fixes boost pressure value and continues operation.

Action of
controller
Problem that
machine
Related
information
Disconnect connector with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON
and carry out troubleshooting.
Disconnect sensors Boost pressure/tem-

and wiring harness at BOOST PRESS & IMT
perature sensor
right in order and carry
out operation to repro-
Defective sensor or wiring har- Common rail pressure
1 duce trouble. If "E" of FUEL RAIL PRESS
ness sensor
failure code goes off
Possible causes when a sensor or wir-
and standard ing harness is discon- G sensor CAM SENSOR
value in normal nected, that sensor or
state wiring harness is
defective. Engine wiring harness CE01
Connecting parts between each sensor – engine wiring harness – engine

controller may be defective. Check them directly.
nector

20-444 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA187] – Sens supply 2 volt low error
Circuit diagram related to sensor power supply 2
(Water in fuel sensor)
1 5 9 11 1 5 10 12 13 6 8
JC01 JC02 JC03

(J-16) (J-16) (J-16)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-445

Failure code [CA221] – Ambient press sens high error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA221] – Ambient press sens high error
User code Failure code Ambient pressure sensor high error

Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in signal circuit of ambient pressure sensor.
trouble
Action of
• Fixes ambient pressure value and continues operation.
controller
Problem that
• Engine does not start easily.
appears on
machine
• Signal voltage of ambient pressure sensor can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 37401 Ambient pres-
Related
sure sensor voltage
information
1
1 system
AMBIENT PRESURE Voltage

Defective ambient pressure
2 Between (1) – (2) Power supply 4.75 – 5.25V
sensor
Hot short (Short circuit with 5V/ out troubleshooting.
3
24V circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (3) –
and standard AMBIENT PRESSURE (female) (3)
value in normal
4
(with another wiring harness) AMBIENT PRESSURE (female) (3) and between Resist- Min.
CE01 (female) (33) – AMBIENT PRESSURE ance 100 kΩ
(female) (1)
Connecting parts between ambient pressure sensor – engine wiring harness

– engine controller may be defective. Check them directly.
nector
CE01 Voltage
Between (33) – (38) Voltage 4.75 – 5.25 V
20-446 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA221] – Ambient press sens high error
Circuit diagram related to ambient pressure sensor
1 9 13
JC03
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-447

Failure code [CA222] – Ambient press sens low error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA222] – Ambient press sens low error
User code Failure code Ambient pressure sensor low error

Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in signal circuit of ambient pressure sensor.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
• Signal voltage of ambient pressure sensor can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 37401 Ambient pres-
Related
sure sensor voltage
information
1
1 system
AMBIENT PRESURE Voltage

Defective ambient pressure
2 Between (1) – (2) Power supply 4.75 – 5.25V
sensor
3
Possible causes
and standard AMBIENT PRESSURE (female) (3) ance 100 kΩ
value in normal
4
(with another wiring harness) AMBIENT PRESSURE (female) (3) and between Resist- Min.
CE01 (female) (38) – JC03 – AMBIENT PRES- ance 100 kΩ
SURE (female) (2)

nector
CE01 Voltage
Between (33) – (38) Voltage 4.75 – 5.25 V
20-448 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA222] – Ambient press sens low error
Circuit diagram related to ambient pressure sensor
1 9 13 JC03
(J-16)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-449

Failure code [CA227] – Sens supply 2 volt high error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA227] – Sens supply 2 volt high error
User code Failure code Sensor power supply 2 voltage high error
Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in sensor power supply 2 circuit.
trouble
• Fixes boost pressure value and continues operation.

Action of
controller
Problem that
machine
Related
information

Possible causes controller may be defective. Check them directly.
and standard 1 • Looseness of connector, breakage of lock, or breakage of seal
nector
value in normal • Corrosion, bend, breakage, push-in, or expansion of pin
state • Moisture or dirt in connector or defective insulation
If cause 1 is not detected, engine controller may be defective. (Since trouble

is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out.)
20-450 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA227] – Sens supply 2 volt high error
1 5 9 11 1 5 10 12 13 6 8
JC01 JC02 JC03

(J-16) (J-16) (J-16)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-451

Failure code [CA234] – Eng overspeed TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA234] – Eng overspeed
User code Failure code Engine overspeed

Trouble
— CA234 (Engine controller system)
Contents of
• Engine speed exceeded control upper speed limit.
trouble
Action of
• Stops injection until engine speed lowers to normal level.
controller
Problem that
appears on • Engine speed fluctuates.
machine
Related • Engine speed can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 01002 Engine speed)
information • Method of reproducing failure code: Run engine at high idle.

Possible causes 1 Use of improper fuel Fuel used may be improper. Check it directly.
and standard
value in normal 2 Improper use Machine may be used improperly. Teach operator proper using method.
state
3 If cause 1 is not detected, engine controller may be defective. (Since trouble
20-452 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA234] – Eng overspeed
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-453

Failure code [CA238] – Ne speed sens supply volt error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA238] – Ne speed sens supply volt error
User code Failure code Ne speed sensor power supply voltage error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in power supply circuit of engine Ne speed sensor.
trouble
Action of
• Continues control with signal from engine Bkup speed sensor.
controller
Problem that
appears on
• Engine hunts.
machine
Related
information
★ Disconnect connector with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch
ON and carry out troubleshooting.
Disconnect sensor and

wiring harness at right
in order and carry out Ne speed sensor CRANK SENSOR
operation to repro-
Defective sensor or wiring har-
1 duce trouble. If "E" of
Possible causes ness
and standard when sensor or wiring
value in normal
harness is discon-
state nected, that sensor or
Engine wiring harness CE01
wiring harness is
defective.

nector
20-454 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA238] – Ne speed sens supply volt error
Circuit diagram related to engine Ne speed sensor
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-455

Failure code [CA271] – IMV/PCV1 short error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA271] – IMV/PCV1 short error
User code Failure code IMV/PCV1 short circuit error

Trouble
Contents of
• Short circuit was detected in drive circuit of supply pump actuator.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that • Engine speed does not rise from low idle.
machine • Common rail fuel pressure rises above command value.
Related
information
• Defective supply pump actu-
1
ator CP3 PUMP REGULATOR (male) Resistance
• Ground fault in wiring har- turning starting switch ON.
2 ness (Short circuit with GND
circuit) Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (2) – CP3 Resist- Min.
PUMP REGULATOR (female) (1) ance 100 kΩ
and standard • Short circuit in wiring har- turning starting switch ON.
value in normal 3 ness (with another wiring Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (2) –
state harness) Resist- Min.
ance 100 kΩ
Connecting parts between supply pump actuator – engine wiring harness –

• Defective wiring harness
connector
5 • Defective engine controller
20-456 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA271] – IMV/PCV1 short error
Circuit diagram related to supply pump actuator (metering unit)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-457

Failure code [CA272] – IMV/PCV1 open error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA272] – IMV/PCV1 open error
User code Failure code IMV/PCV1 open error

Trouble
Contents of
• Opening was detected in drive circuit of supply pump actuator.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
• Engine runs but its operation is unstable.
appears on
• Common rail fuel pressure rises above command value.
machine
Related
information
1 Defective supply pump actuator
CP3 PUMP REGULATOR (male) Resistance
Between (1) – (2) Max. 5 Ω
Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (2) – CP3 Resist- Max.
PUMP REGULATOR (female) (1) ance 10 Ω
CP3 PUMP REGULATOR (female) (2) ance 10 Ω
Hot short (Short circuit with 24V out troubleshooting.
Possible causes 3
and standard circuit) in wiring harness Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (2) – CP3
Voltage Max. 3 V
value in normal PUMP REGULATOR (female) (1)
state
ance 100 kΩ

nector
20-458 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA272] – IMV/PCV1 open error
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-459

Failure code [CA322] – Inj #1 (L#1) open/short error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA322] – Inj #1 (L#1) open/short error
User code Failure code Injector #1 (L#1) open/short circuit error

Trouble
Contents of
• Opening or short circuit was detected in drive circuit of No. 1 injector.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
• Combustion becomes irregular or engine hunts.
appears on
machine
Related
information
If following failure codes are also displayed, trouble is in engine controller.

[CA322], [CA324], [CA331]
2 Defective No. 1 injector INJ CYL 1 (male) Resistance
Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (45) – INJ Resist-
3 (Disconnection in wiring or Max. 2 Ω
CYL 1 (female) (1) ance
Max. 2 Ω
Possible causes 4
(Short circuit with GND circuit) Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (45) – INJ Resist-
and standard Max. 2 Ω
value in normal
Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (45) –

Resist- Min.
Short circuit in wiring harness each of CE01 (female) pins (With all wiring har-
5 ance 100 kΩ
(with another wiring harness) ness connectors disconnected)

Resist- Min.
ance 100 kΩ
Connecting parts between No. 1 injector – engine wiring harness – engine

nector
Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without turn-
ing starting switch ON.
Between (45) – (53) Max. 2 Ω
20-460 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA322] – Inj #1 (L#1) open/short error
Circuit diagram related to no. 1 injector
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-461


Trouble
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information

[CA323], [CA325], [CA332]
Max. 2 Ω
Possible causes 4
value in normal

Resist- Min.
5 ance 100 kΩ

Resist- Min.
ance 100 kΩ

nector
Between (46) – (60) Max. 2 Ω
20-462 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-463


Trouble
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information

[CA322], [CA324], [CA331]
Max. 2 Ω
Possible causes 4
value in normal

Resist- Min.
5 ance 100 kΩ

Resist- Min.
ance 100 kΩ

nector
Between (55) – (52) Max. 2 Ω
20-464 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-465


Trouble
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information

[CA323], [CA325], [CA332]
Max. 2 Ω
Possible causes 4
value in normal

Resist- Min.
5 ance 100 kΩ

Resist- Min.
ance 100 kΩ

nector
Between (57) – (59) Max. 2 Ω
20-466 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

KSP00072
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-467


Trouble
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information

[CA322], [CA324], [CA331]
Max. 2 Ω
Possible causes 4
value in normal

Resist- Min.
5 ance 100 kΩ

Resist- Min.
ance 100 kΩ

nector
Between (54) – (51) Max. 2 Ω
20-468 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-469


Trouble
Contents of
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information

[CA323], [CA325], [CA332]
Max. 2 Ω
Possible causes 4
value in normal

Resist- Min.
5 ance 100 kΩ

Resist- Min.
ance 100 kΩ

nector
Between (56) – (58) Max. 2 Ω
20-470 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-471

Failure code [CA342] – Calibration code incompatibility TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA342] – Calibration code incompatibility
User code Failure code Calibration code incompatibility

Trouble
Contents of
• Incompatibility of data occurred in engine controller.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
• Continues normal operation.
appears on
• Engine stops or does not start.
machine
Related
information

and standard
1 Defect in related system If another failure code is displayed, carry out troubleshooting for it.
value in normal
state 2 Defective engine controller Engine controller may be defective. (Troubleshooting cannot be carried out.)
20-472 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA342] – Calibration code incompatibility
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-473

Failure code [CA351] – Injectors drive circuit error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA351] – Injectors drive circuit error
User code Failure code Injectors Drive Circuit Error

Trouble
Contents of
• There is error in drive power circuit of injector.
trouble
Action of
controller
• Exhaust gas becomes black.

Problem that
• Combustion becomes irregular.
appears on
machine
• Engine cannot be started.
Related
information
2 Defective fuse No. 19 If fuse is broken, circuit probably has ground fault.
Defective relay for engine con-
3 Replace relay (R23, R24) for engine controller with another relay and per-
troller power supply
form reproducing operation. If "E" of failure code goes off at this time,
Possible causes replaced relay is defective.
state
Wiring harness between FB1-19 – R23, R24 Resist- Max.
Disconnection in wiring harness (female) (3) ance 0.5 Ω
defective contact in connector) Wiring harness between R23, R24 (female) (5) – Resist- Max.
CE03 (female) (3) ance 0.5 Ω

chassis ground (T12) ance 10 Ω

20-474 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA351] – Injectors drive circuit error
Circuit diagram related to engine controller
A65
(Blue)
A08
(SWP-8)
A07
(SWP-16)
R23
Engine
Controller
Relay (1) H11
(S-16)
J03 P02 (040-20)
R24
Engine A27
FB1
Controller (X-2)
Relay (2)
R
Starter
Safety
C03 Relay
A35 (L-2)
A01
(X-1)
A20
FB2
A65
A23
A21
A02
(X-4)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-475

Failure code [CA352] – Sens supply 1 volt low error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA352] – Sens supply 1 volt low error
User code Failure code Sensor power supply 1 voltage low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in sensor power supply 1 circuit.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
★ Disconnect connector with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch
ON and carry out troubleshooting.
Disconnect sensor and

wiring harness at right
in order and carry out Ambient pressure sen-
AMBIENT PRESURE
operation to repro- sor
Defective sensor or wiring har-
1 duce trouble. If "E" of
ness
Possible causes when sensor or wiring
and standard harness is discon-
value in normal nected, that sensor or
Engine wiring harness CE01
state wiring harness is
defective.

nector

20-476 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA352] – Sens supply 1 volt low error
1 9 13
JC03
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-477

Failure code [CA386] – Sens supply 1 volt high error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA386] – Sens supply 1 volt high error
User code Failure code Sensor power supply 1 voltage high error
Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in sensor power supply 1 circuit.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information

Possible causes – engine controller may be defective. Check them directly.
and standard 1 • Looseness of connector, breakage of lock, or breakage of seal
nector
value in normal • Corrosion, bend, breakage, push-in, or expansion of pin
state • Moisture or dirt in connector or defective insulation
If cause 1 is not detected, engine controller may be defective. (Since trouble

20-478 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA386] – Sens supply 1 volt high error
1 9 13
JC03
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-479

Failure code [CA428] – Water in fuel sensor high error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA428] – Water in fuel sensor high error
User code Failure code Water-in-fuel sensor high error

Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage was detected in signal circuit of water-in-fuel sensor.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on • Water separator monitor does not display normally.
machine
• Condition water-in-fuel sensor signal can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 18800 Condition of WIF sen-
Related
sor)
information
1 Defective water-in-fuel sensor
P47 (female) Resistance
P47 (male) (1) ance 10 Ω
JC02 – P47 (male) (2) ance 10 Ω
Possible causes
ance 100 kΩ
Connecting parts between water-in-fuel sensor – engine wiring harness –

nector
Between (14) – (47) Max. 10 Ω
20-480 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA428] – Water in fuel sensor high error
Circuit diagram related to water-in-fuel sensor
JC02
1 5 10 12 13 (J-16)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-481

Failure code [CA429] – Water in fuel sensor low error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA429] – Water in fuel sensor low error
User code Failure code Water-in-fuel sensor low error

Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in signal circuit of water-in-fuel sensor.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on • Water separator monitor does not display normally.
machine
• Condition water-in-fuel sensor signal can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 18800 Condition of WIF sen-
Related
sor)
information
1 Defective water-in-fuel sensor P47 (female) Resistance
2
P47 (male) (1) ance 100 kΩ
value in normal 3
(with another wiring harness) Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (14) –
state Resist- Min.
ance 100 kΩ
Connecting parts between water-in-fuel sensor – engine wiring harness –

nector
Between (14) – (47) Max. 10 Ω
20-482 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA429] – Water in fuel sensor low error
Circuit diagram related to water-in-fuel sensor
JC02
1 5 10 12 13 (J-16)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-483

Failure code [CA435] – Eng oil press sw error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA435] – Eng oil press sw error
User code Failure code Engine oil pressure switch error

Trouble
Contents of
• There is error in signal circuit of engine oil pressure switch.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
• Engine protection function based on engine oil pressure does not work.
appears on
• Engine oil pressure monitor does not display normally
machine
Related
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON or start engine.
information
Defective engine oil pressure
1
switch OIL PRESSURE SWITCH (male) Resistance
Between (1) – chassis ground Max. 10 Ω
Disconnection in wiring harness turning starting switch ON.
defective contact in connector) Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (17) – Resist- Max.
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH (male) (1) ance 10 Ω
value in normal 3 Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (17) –
state (with another wiring harness) Resist- Min.
ance 100 kΩ
Connecting parts between engine oil pressure switch – engine wiring har-
nector
Between (17) – chassis ground Max. 10 Ω
20-484 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA435] – Eng oil press sw error
Circuit diagram related to engine oil pressure switch
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-485

Failure code [CA441] – Battery voltage low error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA441] – Battery voltage low error
User code Failure code Battery voltage low error

Trouble
Contents of
• There is low voltage in controller power supply circuit.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
• Engine stops.
appears on
machine
Related
information
Looseness or corrosion of Battery terminal may be loosened or corroded. Check it directly.

1
battery terminal
★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then keep starting switch OFF and start
engine and carry out troubleshooting in each case.
2 Low battery voltage Battery (1 piece) Starting switch Voltage
Between (+) – (–) OFF Min. 12 V

terminals START Min. 6.2 V
3 Defective fuse No. 19 If fuse is broken, circuit probably has ground fault. (See Cause 6)
Defective relay for engine
4 Replace relay (R23, R24) for engine controller with another relay and perform
controller power supply
Possible reproducing operation. If "E" of failure code goes off at this time, replaced relay
causes and is defective.
standard value
in normal state ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without
Disconnection in wiring har- Wiring harness between FB1-19 – R23, R24 (female) Resist- Max.
ness (Disconnection in wiring (3) ance 10 Ω
5
or defective contact in con- Wiring harness between R23, R24 (female) (5) – Resist- Max.
nector) CE03 (female) (3) ance 10 Ω
Wiring harness between CE03 (female) (1) – chassis Resist- Max.

ground (A65) ance 10 Ω
Ground fault in wiring harness
Wiring harness between FB1-19 – R23, R24 (female) Resist- Min.
6 (Short circuit with GND cir-
(3) ance 100 kΩ
cuit)
Wiring harness between R23, R24 (female) (5) – Resist- Max. 10
CE03 (female) (3) ance Ω
20-486 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA441] – Battery voltage low error
Wiring harness between CE03 (female) (3) – CE03 Resist- Min.

(female) (1) pin (with battery terminal disconnected) ance 100 kΩ
Short circuit in wiring harness Wiring harness between CE03 (female) (3) – each of
7 Resist- Min.
(with another wiring harness) CE02 (female) pins (With battery terminal discon-
ance 100 kΩ
nected)
Wiring harness between CE03 (female) (1) – each of

Possible Resist- Min.
CE02 (female) pins (With battery terminal discon-
causes and ance 100 kΩ
nected)
standard value
in normal state Connecting parts between fuse No. 19 – machine wiring harness – engine con-
troller may be defective. Check them directly.
nector
★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and start
9 Defective engine controller CE03 (female) Starting switch Voltage
ON Min. 24 V
Between (3) – (1)
START Min. 12 V
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-487

Failure code [CA441] – Battery voltage low error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Circuit diagram related to engine controller power supply
A65
(Blue)
A08
(SWP-8)
A07
(SWP-16)
R23
Engine
Controller
Relay (1) H11
(S-16)
J03 P02 (040-20)
R24
Engine A27
FB1
Controller (X-2)
Relay (2)
R
Starter
Safety
C03 Relay
A35 (L-2)
A01
(X-1)
A20
FB2
A65
A23
A21
A02
(X-4)
20-488 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA441] – Battery voltage low error
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-489

Failure code [CA442] – Battery voltage high error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA442] – Battery voltage high error
User code Failure code Battery voltage high error

Trouble
Contents of
• There is high voltage (36 V or higher) in controller power supply circuit.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem
that
• Engine may stop.
appears on
machine
Related
information
★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without turning
starting switch ON.
1 Defective battery voltage
Battery Voltage
Possible Between (+) – (–) terminals Max. 32 V

causes and ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then start engine and carry out troubleshooting.
standard
value in E12 (male) Engine speed Voltage
2 Defective alternator
normal
Between (1) – chassis
state Medium or higher 27.5 – 29.5 V
ground
★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and carry out trou-
bleshooting.
CE03 (female) Voltage
Between (3) – (1) Max. 32 V
20-490 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA442] – Battery voltage high error
A65
(Blue)
A08
(SWP-8)
A07
(SWP-16)
R23
Engine
Controller
Relay (1) H11
(S-16)
J03 P02 (040-20)
R24
Engine A27
FB1
Controller (X-2)
Relay (2)
R
Starter
Safety
C03 Relay
A35 (L-2)
A01
(X-1)
A20
FB2
A65
A23
A21
A02
(X-4)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-491

Failure code [CA449] – Rail press very high error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA449] – Rail press very high error
User code Failure code Common rail pressure very high error
Trouble
Contents of
• There is high pressure error in common rail circuit.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
• Engine sound becomes large when no or light load is applied.
appears on
machine
• Common rail pressure can be checked with monitoring function.

Related
(Code: 36400 Common rail pressure)
information
There may be air in low pressure circuit. Check it directly according to the fol-
lowing procedure.
2 Air in low pressure circuit
1. Remove pressure pickup plug (outlet side) of fuel main filter.
2. Operate feed pump of fuel pre-filter.
3. Check pressure pickup plug for leakage of fuel and air.
★ For check of fuel return circuit pressure, see Testing and adjusting,
Checking fuel pressure.
3 Defect in fuel return circuit parts
Fuel return circuit pres- Low idle running or Max. 0.02 MPa
Possible causes sure cranking {Max. 0.19 kg/cm2}
and standard
value in normal ★ Prepare with starting switch ON, then keep starting switch ON and carry
state out troubleshooting in each case.
Monitoring code
Defective common rail pressure Monitoring information
4 (Machine monitor)
sensor
36400
While engine is 0 ± 0.39 MPa
Common rail
pressure
stopped {0 ± 4 kg/cm2}
★ For check of leakage through pressure limiter, see Testing and adjust-
ing, Checking fuel return rate and leakage.
5 Defective pressure limiter
Leakage through pres-
During low idle 0 cc (No leakage)
sure limiter
6 Defective supply pump If causes 1 – 5 are not detected, supply pump may be defective.
20-492 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA449] – Rail press very high error
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-493

Failure code [CA451] – Rail press sensor high error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA451] – Rail press sensor high error
User code Failure code Common rail pressure sensor high error
Trouble
Contents of
• There is high voltage in signal circuit of common rail pressure sensor.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on
• Engine speed or output lowers.
machine
• Signal voltage of common rail pressure sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 36401 Common rail pressure sensor voltage)
information
Defective sensor power supply If failure code [CA227] is also displayed, carry out troubleshooting for it first.
1
2 system
FUEL RAIL PRESS Voltage

Defective common rail pressure
2 Between (3) – (1) Power supply 4.75 – 5.25 V
sensor
Hot short (Short circuit with 5V/ out troubleshooting.
3
and standard FUEL RAIL PRESS (female) (2)
value in normal
4
(with another wiring harness) FUEL RAIL PRESS (female) (2) and between Resist- Min.
CE01 (female) (37) – JC01 – FUEL RAIL PRESS ance 100 kΩ
(female) (3)
Connecting parts between common rail pressure sensor – engine wiring har-
nector
CE01 Voltage
20-494 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA451] – Rail press sensor high error
Circuit diagram related to common rail pressure sensor
JC01 JC02
(J-16) (J-16)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-495

Failure code [CA452] – Rail press sensor low error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA452] – Rail press sensor low error
Action code Failure code Common rail pressure sensor low error
Trouble
Contents of
• There is low voltage in signal circuit of common rail pressure sensor.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that
• Engine speed or output lowers.
appears on
machine
Related
information
1
2 system
FUEL RAIL PRESS Voltage

sensor
3 Wiring harness between ENGINE (female) (25) –
(Short circuit with GND circuit) Resist- Min.
Possible causes FUEL RAIL PRESS (female) (2) and chassis
and standard ance 100 kΩ
ground
value in normal
Short circuit in wiring harness Wiring harness between ENGINE (female) (25) –
4
(with another wiring harness) FUEL RAIL PRESS (female) (2) and between Resist- Min.
ENGINE (female) (47) – FUEL RAIL PRESS ance 100 kΩ
(female) (1)
Connecting parts between common rail pressure sensor – engine wiring har-
nector
ENGINE Voltage
20-496 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA452] – Rail press sensor low error
Circuit diagram related to common rail pressure sensor
JC01 JC02
(J-16) (J-16)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-497

Failure code [CA488] – Chg air temp high torque derate TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA488] – Chg air temp high torque derate
User code Failure code Charge air temperature high torque derate
Trouble
Contents of
• Temperature signal of boost pressure/temperature sensor exceeded control upper temperature limit.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
machine
Related • Boost temperature can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 18500 Boost temperature)
information • Method of reproducing failure code: Start engine.
Cooling performance of aftercooler may be low. Check following points

directly.
Lowering of cooling perform-
Possible causes 1 • Looseness and breakage of fan belt.
ance of aftercooler
and standard • Insufficiency of cooling air
value in normal • Clogging of aftercooler fins
state Abnormal rise of turbocharger Outlet temperature of turbocharger may be abnormally high. Check related
2
outlet temperature parts directly.

Failure code [CA553] – Rail press high error
User code Failure code Common rail pressure high error

Trouble
Contents of
• There is high pressure error in common rail circuit.
trouble
Action of
machine monitor
Problem that
• Engine sound becomes large when no or light load is applied.
appears on
machine

Related
information
Ground terminal may be connected defectively. Check following terminals

Possible causes directly.
and standard Defective connection of ground • Ground terminal of machine ((–) terminal of battery)
value in normal 2
terminal • Ground terminal of engine
state • Ground terminal of engine controller
• Ground terminal of starting motor
Breakage of O-ring of supply

3 O-ring of supply pump actuator may be broken. Check it directly.
pump actuator
20-498 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA559] – Rail press low error
Failure code [CA559] – Rail press low error
Action code Failure code Common rail pressure low error

Trouble
Contents of
• There is low pressure error (1) in common rail circuit.
trouble
Action of con-
troller
Problem that • Engine does not start at all or does not start easily.
appears on • Exhaust gas becomes black.
machine • Engine output lowers.
Related
information
Fuel may be leaking to outside. Check it directly (Check visually while run-
1 Fuel leakage to outside
ning engine at low idle).
★ For check of pressure in fuel low pressure circuit, see Testing and ad-
justing, Checking fuel pressure.
• Measured in fuel filter inlet side.

• Cranking speed: Min. 150 rpm
Pressure in fuel low- Min. 0.14 MPa

During cranking
pressure circuit {Min. 1.4 kg/cm2}
• Measured in fuel filter outlet side.
Pressure in fuel low- Min. 0.48 MPa

During high idle
pressure circuit {Min. 4.9 kg/cm2}
Possible causes
and standard
value in normal • Measured in fuel filter inlet and outlet sides.
state Defect in low pressure circuit • Pressure drop in fuel low-pressure circuit = Fuel filter inlet pressure —
2
parts Fuel filter outlet pressure
Pressure drop in fuel Max. 0.14 MPa

During high idle
low-pressure circuit {Max. 1.4 kg/cm2}
★ For check of fuel suction pressure, see Testing and adjusting, Checking
fuel pressure.
• Measured in gear pump fuel inlet side of supply pump.
Fuel suction circuit

Max. 33.9 kPa
pressure During high idle
{Max. 254 mmHg}
(gear pump side)
★ For check of fuel suction pressure, see Testing and adjusting, Checking
fuel pressure.
• Measured in fuel connector side.
Fuel suction circuit

Max. 27.1 kPa
pressure During high idle
{Max. 203 mmHg}
(fuel connector side)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-499

Failure code [CA559] – Rail press low error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
★ For check of return rate from injector, see Testing and adjusting, Check-
ing fuel return rate and leakage.
During cranking
Defective injector
(if engine cannot be Max. 100 cc/30 sec.
3 (including high pressure piping
Return rate from injec- started)
in head)
tor During low idle
(if engine can be Max. 300 cc/45 sec.
started)
★ For check of return rate from supply pump, see Testing and adjusting,
Checking fuel return rate and leakage.
During cranking
(if engine cannot be Max. 100 cc/30 sec.
4 Defective supply pump
Return rate from sup- started)
Possible causes ply pump During low idle
and standard (if engine can be Max. 300 cc/45 sec.
value in normal started)
state
★ For check of leakage through pressure limiter, see Testing and adjust-
ing, Checking fuel return rate and leakage.
5 Defective pressure limiter
Leakage through pres-
sure limiter
★ Remove the supply pump head, and directly check that the plunger is
6 Defective supply pump plunger
not damaged.
There may be air in low pressure circuit. Check it directly according to the fol-
lowing procedure.
1. Remove pressure pickup plug (outlet side) of fuel main filter.

2. Operate feed pump of fuel pre-filter.
7 Air in low pressure circuit
3. Check pressure pickup plug for leakage of fuel and air.
• If this error occurs during air bleeding after the fuel filter was replaced, air
may remain in the fuel circuit. Keep running the engine at low idle for
about three minutes. As air is bled from the fuel circuit, the engine speed
will be stabilized, erasing the error indication.
20-500 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA559] – Rail press low error
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-501

Failure code [CA689] – Eng ne speed sensor error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA689] – Eng ne speed sensor error
User code Failure code Engine Ne speed sensor error

Trouble
Contents of
• There is error in signal from engine Ne speed sensor.
trouble
Action of
• Continues control with signal from engine Bkup speed sensor.
controller
Problem that • Engine hunts.

appears on • Engine does not start easily.
Related
information
Defective Ne speed sensor If failure code [CA238] is also displayed, carry out troubleshooting for it first.
1
power supply system
★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and car-
ry out troubleshooting.
CRANK SENSOR Voltage

Defective engine Ne speed
sensor
Voltage is measured with wiring harness connected. Accordingly, if voltage
is abnormal, check wiring harness and controller, too, for another cause of
Breakage or improper clear-

Engine Ne speed sensor may be broken or may have improper clearance.
3 ance of engine Ne speed sen-
Check it directly.
sor
Breakage of rotation sensor

4 Rotation sensor wheel may be broken. Check it directly.
wheel
Disconnection in wiring har- ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
Possible causes
ness (Disconnection in wiring out turning starting switch ON.
and standard 5
value in normal or defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (27) – Resist- Max.
state tor) CRANK SENSOR (female) (3) ance 10 Ω
★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
Ground fault in wiring harness out turning starting switch ON.
6
CRANK SENSOR (female) (3) ance 100 kΩ
Hot short (Short circuit with 5V/ ry out troubleshooting.
7
Voltage Max. 1 V
CRANK SENSOR (female) (3)
out turning starting switch ON.

Resist- Min.
Short circuit in wiring harness CRANK SENSOR (female) (3) or between CE01
8 ance 100 kΩ
(with another wiring harness) (female) (16) – CRANK SENSOR (female) (1)

Resist- Min.
CRANK SENSOR (female) (3) or between CE01
ance 100 kΩ
(female) (48) – CRANK SENSOR (female) (2)
20-502 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA689] – Eng ne speed sensor error
9 Connecting parts between engine Ne speed sensor – engine wiring harness

• Looseness of connector, breakage of lock, or breakage of seal
Possible causes nector
and standard
value in normal
state 10 ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and car-
CE01 Voltage
Circuit diagram related to engine ne speed sensor
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-503

Failure code [CA731] – Eng bkup speed sens phase error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA731] – Eng bkup speed sens phase error
User code Failure code Engine G speed sensor phase error

Trouble
Contents of
• Phase error was detected in signals from engine Ne speed sensor and engine Bkup speed sensor
trouble
Action of
• Continues control with signal from engine Ne speed sensor.
controller
Problem that • Engine does not start at all or does not start easily.
appears on • Idle speed is unstable.
machine • Exhaust gas becomes black.
Related
information
Breakage of engine Ne speed Engine Ne speed sensor may be broken. Check it directly.
1
sensor
Breakage of engine G speed Engine G speed sensor may be broken. Check it directly.
2
sensor
Rotation sensor wheel on crankshaft side may be installed defectively or bro-

ken. Check it according to the following procedure.
Defective installation or break-
3 age of rotation sensor wheel on 1. Set No. 1 cylinder at compression top dead center (Match stamped
crankshaft side mark).
2. If center of oblong hole of rotation sensor wheel is at tip of Ne speed sen-
sor, rotation sensor wheel is installed normally.
Possible causes
Rotation sensor ring on camshaft side may be installed defectively or broken.
and standard
Check it according to the following procedure.
value in normal
state Defective installation or break- 1. Set No. 1 cylinder at compression top dead center (Match stamped
4 age of rotation sensor ring on mark).
camshaft side
2. Remove G speed sensor.
3. If 2 grooves (1 crest) of rotation sensor ring are seen through sensor
mounting hole, rotation sensor ring is installed normally.
Defective timing of crankshaft Timing of crankshaft and camshaft may be defective. Check it directly.
5
and camshaft
Ground terminal may be connected defectively. Check following terminals

directly.
Defective connection of ground • Ground terminal of machine ((–) terminal of battery)
6
terminal • Ground terminal of engine
• Ground terminal of engine controller
• Ground terminal of starting motor
20-504 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA731] – Eng bkup speed sens phase error
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-505

Failure code [CA757] – All continuous data lost error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA757] – All continuous data lost error
User code Failure code All continuous data lost error

Trouble
Contents of
• All data in engine controller are lost.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
• Engine may stop and may not be started again.
appears on
• Monitoring function of machine monitor (engine controller system) may not work normally.
machine
Related
information
Looseness or corrosion of bat- Battery terminal may be loosened or corroded. Check it directly.
2
tery terminal
★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then keep starting switch OFF and
start engine and carry out troubleshooting in each case.
3 Low battery voltage Battery (1 piece) Starting switch Voltage
Between (+) – (–) ter- OFF Min. 12 V

minals START Min. 6.2 V
4 Defective fuse No. 19 If fuse is broken, circuit probably has ground fault.
Defective relay for engine con-
5 Replace relay (R23, R24) for engine controller with another relay and per-
troller power supply
form reproducing operation. If "E" of failure code goes off at this time,
replaced relay is defective.
Possible causes
state
Wiring harness between FB1-19 – R23, R24 Resist- Max.
Disconnection in wiring harness (female) (3) ance 10 Ω
defective contact in connector) Wiring harness between R23, R24 (female) (5) – Resist- Max.
CE03 (female) (3) ance 10 Ω

chassis ground (T12) ance 10 Ω
Connecting parts between fuse No. 19 – machine wiring harness – engine

nector
★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and start
8 Defective engine controller CE03 (female) Starting switch Voltage
ON Min. 24 V
Between (3) – (1)
START Min. 12 V
20-506 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA757] – All continuous data lost error
A65
(Blue)
A08
(SWP-8)
A07
(SWP-16)
R23
Engine
Controller
Relay (1) H11
(S-16)
J03 P02 (040-20)
R24
Engine A27
FB1
Controller (X-2)
Relay (2)
R
Starter
Safety
C03 Relay
A35 (L-2)
A01
(X-1)
A20
FB2
A65
A23
A21
A02
(X-4)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-507

Failure code [CA778] – Eng G speed sensor error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA778] – Eng G speed sensor error
User code Failure code Engine G speed sensor error

Trouble
Contents of
• There is error in signal from engine G speed sensor.
trouble
Action of
• Continues control with signal from engine Ne speed sensor.
controller
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related
information
Defective sensor power supply If failure code [CA187] is also displayed, carry out troubleshooting for it first.
1
2 system
CAM SENSOR Voltage

Defective engine G speed sen-
sor
Voltage is measured with wiring harness connected. Accordingly, if voltage
is abnormal, check wiring harness and controller, too, for another cause of
Breakage or improper clear- Engine G speed sensor may be broken or may have improper clearance.
3
ance of engine G speed sensor Check it directly.
Breakage of rotation sensor Rotation sensor ring may be broken. Check it directly.
4
ring
Disconnection in wiring har- ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
ness (Disconnection in wiring out turning starting switch ON.
Possible causes 5
or defective contact in connec- Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (26) – Resist- Max.
and standard tor) JC03 – CAM SENSOR (female) (3) ance 10 Ω
value in normal
state ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting with-
Ground fault in wiring harness out turning starting switch ON.
6
JC03 – CAM SENSOR (female) (3) ance 100 kΩ
Hot short (Short circuit with 5V/ ry out troubleshooting.
7
Voltage Max. 1 V
JC03 – CAM SENSOR (female) (3)
out turning starting switch ON.

JC03 – CAM SENSOR (female) (3) or between Resist- Min.
Short circuit in wiring harness CE01 (female) (37) – JC01 – CAM SENSOR ance 100 kΩ
8
(with another wiring harness) (female) (1)

JC03 – CAM SENSOR (female) (3) or between Resist- Min.
CE01 (female) (47) – JC02 – CAM SENSOR ance 100 kΩ
(female) (2)
20-508 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA778] – Eng G speed sensor error
Connecting parts between engine G speed sensor – engine wiring harness

Possible causes nector
and standard
value in normal
state ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and car-
CE01 Voltage
Circuit diagram related to engine G speed sensor
1 5 9 11 1 5 10 12 13 6 8
JC01 JC02 JC03

(J-16) (J-16) (J-16)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-509

Failure code [CA1633] – KOMNET datalink timeout error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA1633] – KOMNET datalink timeout error
User code Failure code KOMNET Datalink timeout error

Trouble
E0E CA1633 (Engine controller system)
Contents of • Engine controller detected communication error in KOMNET communication circuit between pump controller and
trouble machine monitor.
Action of • Continues operation in default mode.

controller • If cause of failure disappears, system resets itself.
Problem that
• Information may not transmitted normally by KOMNET communication and machine may not operate normally.
appears on
(Trouble phenomenon depends on failed section.)
machine
Related
information
Wiring harness between K31 (female) (A)– C02

Disconnection in wiring harness Resist-
(female) (32), – CE02 (female) (46), – K02 Max. 1 Ω
1 (Disconnection in wiring or ance
(female) (A)
Wiring harness between K31 (female) (B)– C02
Resist-
(female) (22), – CE02 (female) (47), – K02 Max. 1 Ω
ance
(female) (B)
Wiring harness between K31 (female) (A) – C02

Resist- Min.
Ground fault in wiring harness (female) (32), – CE02 (female) (46), – K02
2 ance 1 MΩ
(Short circuit with GND circuit) (female) (A), – N08 (male) (3)
Possible causes Wiring harness between K31 (female) (B) – C02
and standard Resist- Min.
(female) (22), – CE02 (female) (47), – K02
value in normal ance 1 MΩ
(female) (B), – N08 (male) (10)
state
Wiring harness between K31 (female) (A) – C02

Max.
Hot short (Short circuit with 24V (female) (32), – CE02 (female) (46), – K02 Voltage
3 5.5 V
circuit) in wiring harness (female) (A), – N08 (male) (3)
Wiring harness between K31 (female) (B) – C02

Max.
(female) (22), – CE02 (female) (47), – K02 Voltage
5.5 V
(female) (B), – N08 (male) (10)
Defective CAN terminal resist- turning starting switch ON.
4 ance (Internal short circuit or
K02 (male) Resistance
disconnection)
Between (A) – (B) 120 ± 12 Ω

5 Defective pump controller
20-510 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA1633] – KOMNET datalink timeout error
Circuit diagram related to CAN communication
Service
Connector Komtrax
K31 (DT-3) M45

40
32
22
H12
(S-12)
4 5 A08
(SWP-8)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-511

Failure code [CA2185] – Throttle sensor supply voltage high error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA2185] – Throttle sensor supply voltage

high error
User code Failure code Throttle sensor supply voltage high error
Trouble
Contents of
• High voltage (5.25 V or higher) was detected in throttle sensor power supply circuit.
trouble
value.
Problem that
machine
Related
information

Short circuit in wiring harness Resist- Min.
1 each of CE02 (female) pins (With E06 discon-
(with another wiring harness) ance 100 kΩ
nected)
Possible causes
and standard Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (22) – Resist- Min.
value in normal CE03 (female) (3) (With E06 disconnected) ance 100 kΩ
state
nector

Engine Module/ A03 H15 Fuel Dial

CE02 (DRC-50) (DT-12) (090-22) E06 (M-3)
Fuel Dial (+) 9 1 14 1
Fuel Dial (+5V) 22 2 15 2
Fuel Dial (-) 23 3 16 3
CAB
20-512 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA2186] – Throttle sensor supply voltage low error
Failure code [CA2186] – Throttle sensor supply voltage

low error
User code Failure code Throttle sensor supply voltage low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Low voltage was detected in throttle sensor power supply circuit.
trouble
value.
Problem that
machine
Related
information
1
E06 (female) (1) ance 100 kΩ
Possible causes Short circuit in wiring harness
and standard 2 Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (9) –
value in normal each of CE02 (female) pins (With E06 discon-
ance 100 kΩ
state nected)

nector

Engine Module/ A03 H15 Fuel Dial

CE02 (DRC-50) (DT-12) (090-22) E06 (M-3)
Fuel Dial (+) 9 1 14 1
Fuel Dial (+5V) 22 2 15 2
Fuel Dial (-) 23 3 16 3
CAB
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-513

Failure code [CA2249] – Rail press very low error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA2249] – Rail press very low error
User code Failure code Common rail pressure very low error
Trouble
Contents of
• There is low pressure error in common rail circuit.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that • Engine does not start easily.

appears on • Exhaust gas becomes black.

Related
information

and standard
value in normal 1 Carry out troubleshooting for failure code [CA559].
state
20-514 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA2249] – Rail press very low error
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-515

Failure code [CA2311] – IMV solenoid error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA2311] – IMV solenoid error
User code Failure code IMV solenoid error

Trouble
Contents of
• Resistance of supply pump actuator circuit is abnormally high or low.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
machine
Related
information
2 Defective supply pump actuator CP3 PUMP REGULATOR (male) Resistance
Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (2) – CP3 Resist-
PUMP REGULATOR (female) (1) ance
Possible causes Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (32) – Resist-
Max. 5 Ω
and standard CP3 PUMP REGULATOR (female) (2) ance
value in normal
4
(Short circuit with GND circuit) Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (2) – CP3 Resist- Min.
PUMP REGULATOR (female) (1) ance 100 kΩ

nector
20-516 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA2311] – IMV solenoid error
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-517

Failure code [CA2555] – Grid htr relay volt high error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA2555] – Grid htr relay volt high error
User code Failure code Grid heater relay volt high error
Trouble
Contents of
• Disconnection was detected in drive circuit of intake air heater relay.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on • Intake air heater does not work (Engine does not start easily and exhaust gas becomes white at low temperature).
machine
Related
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON when engine coolant temperature is below –4°C.
information
turning starting switch ON. (Troubleshooting for relay unit)
R17 (male) Resistance
Between (1) – (2) 300 – 600 Ω

Defective grid heater relay
1
(Internal disconnection) ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and carry
out troubleshooting. (Troubleshooting by replacement)
Replace grid heater relay (R17) with another relay and perform reproducing
operation. If "E" of failure code goes off at this time, replaced relay is defec-
tive.
Possible causes R17 (female) (1) ance 10 Ω
and standard
value in normal Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (42) – Resist- Max.
state R17 (female) (2) ance 10 Ω
each of CE02 (female) pins (With R17 discon-
ance 100 kΩ
nected)
Connecting parts between grid heater relay – machine wiring harness –

nector
Between (40) – (42) 300 – 600 Ω
20-518 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA2555] – Grid htr relay volt high error
Circuit diagram related to engine preheater/starting motor/charging sys-

tem
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-519

Failure code [CA2556] – Grid heater relay volt low error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [CA2556] – Grid heater relay volt low error
User code Failure code Grid heater relay volt low error
Trouble
Contents of
• Short circuit was detected in drive circuit of intake air heater relay.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that
appears on • Intake air heater does not work (Engine does not start easily and exhaust gas becomes white at low temperature).
machine
Related
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON when engine coolant temperature is below –4°C.
information
Between (1) – (2) 300 – 600 Ω

Defective grid heater relay
1
(Internal disconnection) ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and carry
Replace grid heater relay (R17) with another relay and perform reproducing
operation. If "E" of failure code goes off at this time, replaced relay is defec-
tive.
2
Possible causes (Short circuit with GND circuit) Wiring harness between CE02 (female) (40) – Resist- Min.
and standard R17 (female) (1) ance 100 kΩ
value in normal
each of CE02 (female) pins (With R17 discon-
ance 100 kΩ
nected)
Connecting parts between grid heater relay – machine wiring harness –

nector
Between (40) – (42) 300 – 600 Ω
20-520 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [CA2556] – Grid heater relay volt low error

tem
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-521

Failure code [D110KB] – Short-circuiting in battery relay TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [D110KB] – Short-circuiting in battery relay
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Short-circuiting in battery relay
— E315 D110KB phenomenon (in governor – pump controller)
Failure content • Abnormal current flow to the battery relay drive circuit, when power was supplied to the circuit.
• The controller turns OFF power to the battery drive circuit.

Response from
• Even when the failure cause disappears, the relay does not return to normal, unless the engine starting switch is
controller
once turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on • The engine does not stop.
machine
Relative • It can be confirmed in the monitor function how the battery relay works (ON or OFF).
information (Code No. 037: Controller output)
Battery relay Continuity & Resistance value

Battery relay defective

1
(Internal failure) Between A21 (BR terminal) and A20 (E termi-
100 Ω
nal)
Between A21 (BR terminal) and grounding Above 1 MΩ
2
(Contact with grounding Between wiring harness from C03 (female) (4) to D01 to J01 to Resistance
A02 to A21 (BR terminal) and grounding value
Governor – pump
3 C03 (female) Engine starting switch OFF Voltage
controller defective
20 – 30 V
Between (4) and grounding ON → OFF
(for 4 to 7 seconds)
20-522 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [D110KB] – Short-circuiting in battery relay
Electrical circuit diagram for battery relay in governor – Pump controller
Governor pump Starting switch

controller B BR R1 R2 C ACC
R1
C03 (DRC - 40) OFF
ACC
ST
Battery relay drive 4
H15 (090 - 20)

Monitor panel 2
H11
P02 (040-20) (S - 16) J01 (J-20)
Battery
11 3 1
Charge level
2
CAB
3
D01 (SWP - 8) 4
1
2
5
6 11
12
13
14
A07
(SWP - 16) (Black)
9
Alternator E12
A02
Battery relay (X - 4) B
E21
A20 A21 (DT-12)
E BR
2
A65 1 D
A22 M B A23
BATTERY ROOM ENGINE
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-523

Failure code [D19JKZ] – Personal code relay abnormality TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [D19JKZ] – Personal code relay abnormality
User code Failure code

Trouble Personal code relay abnormality
E01 D19JKZ
Contents of
• Disconnection or short circuit was detected in personal code relay circuit.
trouble
• None in particular (when disconnection is detected).

Action of • Turns output to personal code relay OFF (when short circuit is detected).
controller • If cause of failure disappears, system resets itself (when disconnection is detected).
• Even if cause of failure disappears, system does not reset itself until starting switch is turned OFF.
Problem that
appears on
machine
Related • Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON (Disconnection). Trouble cannot be reproduced on
information machine (Short circuit).
1 Defective fuse No. 3 If fuse is broken, circuit probably has ground fault (See cause 4).
Defective personal code relay Between (1) – (2) (300 – 600 Ω)

2 (Internal disconnection or short
circuit) ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and carry
Replace personal code relay (R13) with another relay and perform reproduc-
ing operation. If "E" of failure code goes off at this time, replaced relay is
defective.
Possible causes
state Disconnection in wiring harness
Wiring harness between FB1 (3) – R13 (female) Resist-
(1) ance
Wiring harness between R13 (female) (2) – P02 Resist-
Max. 1 Ω
(female) (14) ance
Ground fault in wiring harness Wiring harness between FB1 (3) – R13 (female) Resist- Min.
4
(Short circuit with GND circuit) (1) ance 1 MΩ
Wiring harness between R13 (female) (2) – P02 Resist- Min.

(female) (14) ance 1 MΩ
If causes 1 – 4 are not detected, machine monitor may be defective. (Since

5 Defective machine monitor
20-524 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [D19JKZ] – Personal code relay abnormality

tem
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-525

Failure code [D862KA] – GPS antenna discon TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [D862KA] – GPS antenna discon
User code Failure code GPS antenna disconnection

Trouble
— D862KA (KOMTRAX system in machine monitor)
Contents of
• Disconnection was detected in GPS antenna circuit.
trouble

Problem that
appears on • GPS cannot measure position.
machine
Related
information

and standard
value in normal Defective GPS antenna or GPS antenna may be defective and antenna cable may be disconnected or
1
state antenna cable shorted and antenna cable may be connected defectively.
20-526 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [D862KA] – GPS antenna discon
Configuration diagram of KOMTRAX system
GPS
Antenna
Contoller
C02 (DRC-40)
KOMTRAX Modem
22 CANO L
32 CANO R
KSP00051
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-527

Failure code [DA25KP] – Press. sensor power abnormality TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DA25KP] – Press. sensor power abnormality
Action code Failure code Pressure sensor power abnormality

Trouble
E02 DA25KP (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Abnormal current flowed in pressure sensor power supply (5V) circuit.
trouble
Action of • Turns output to power supply (5V) circuit OFF.

controller • Even if phenomenon of failure disappears, system does not reset itself until starting switch is turned OFF.
Problem that
• Signal of pressure sensor is not input normally.
appears on
• Pressure sensor failure code is displayed at the same time.
machine
Related
information
Disconnect connector with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON
and carry out troubleshooting.
Pump pressure sensor A51 connector
Disconnect sensor and Overload caution sen-

Defective pressure sensor G164 connector
1 wiring harness at right sor
(Internal short circuit)
in order. If no failure Travel PPC pressure
code is displayed, that A56 connector
sensor
sensor is defective.
Transmission speed
A57 connector
sensor
Possible causes Wiring harness between C01 (female) (22) – A03
and standard Resist- Min.
– A51 (female) (3) and chassis ground [F pump
value in normal ance 1 MΩ
pressure sensor system]
state
Wiring harness between C01 (female) (22) – A03
Resist- Min.
Ground fault in wiring harness – G164 (female) (3) and chassis ground [R pump
2 ance 1 MΩ
(Short circuit with GND circuit) pressure sensor system]

Resist- Min.
– A56 (female) (3) and chassis ground [Bucket
ance 1 MΩ
CURL pressure sensor system]

Resist- Min.
– A57 (female) (3) and chassis ground [Arm IN
ance 1 MΩ
pressure sensor system]
C01 Voltage
Between (22) – (10) 4.5 – 5.5 V
20-528 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DA25KP] – Press. sensor power abnormality
Circuit diagram related to pressure sensor power supply of pump control-

ler
16
Travel PPC sensor
pressure
Overload caution
sensor
G164 Overload
caution
sensor
C02 (DCR-40)
GND (Pulse GND) 29
Pump
A51 pressure
Speed pick up
30 sensor
sensor
2.2K Ω
A56 Travel PPC

pressure
A14 sensor
(DT-3)
Swivel Joint
A11
(DT-3)
A57
(DT-2)
Transmission
speed sensor
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-529

Failure code [DA2RMC] – Pump comm. abnormality TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DA2RMC] – Pump comm. abnormality
Action code Failure code Pump communication abnormality

Trouble
E0E DA2RMC (Pump controller system)
Contents of • Pump controller detected communication error in CAN communication circuit between machine monitor and engine
trouble controller.
Action of con- • Fix engine output to E-mode, and limit pump absorption torque to about 80%.
troller • If cause of failure disappears, system resets itself.
Problem that
• Output lowers. (Pump absorption torque decreases.)
appears on
• As the working load increases, engine may stall.
machine
Related
information
Wiring harness between P70 (female) (16) – Resist-
CE02 (female) (47), – C02 (female) (22) ance
Max. 1 Ω
Wiring harness between P70 (female) (16) –

Resist- Min.
Ground fault in wiring harness CE02 (female) (47), – C02 (female) (22), – other
2 ance 1 MΩ
(Short circuit with GND circuit) related circuit and chassis ground

Resist- Min.
Possible causes CE02 (female) (46), – C02 (female) (32), – other
ance 1 MΩ
and standard related circuit and chassis ground
value in normal ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and carry
state out troubleshooting.

Hot short (Short circuit with 24V CE02 (female) (47), – C02 (female) (22), – other Voltage Max. 1 V
3
circuit) in wiring harness related circuit and chassis ground

CE02 (female) (46), – C02 (female) (32), – other Voltage Max. 1 V
related circuit and chassis ground
Defective CAN terminal resist-
4
ance K02 (male), K31 (male) Resistance
Between (A) – (B) 40 – 80 Ω
Defective machine monitor, If causes 1 – 4 are not detected, machine monitor, engine controller, or pump
5 engine controller, or pump con- controller may be defective. (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting can-
troller not be carried out.)
20-530 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DA2RMC] – Pump comm. abnormality
Circuit diagram related to CAN communication of pump controller
A08
(SWP-8)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-531

Failure code [DA2SKA] – Disconnection of S-NET signal TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DA2SKA] – Disconnection of S-NET signal
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Disconnection in S-NET signal
E20 E218 DA2SKA phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
• A failure occurred in S-NET communication between the monitor and controller in the past.
Failure content
(The machine operation returned to normal, when the display was resumed)
• While the failure is still continuing, the machine operation is controlled by the following default setting.
1. Working mode: E mode

Response from
2. Travel speed: Lo
controller
3. Auto-deceleration: ON
4. Attachment oil flow rate: Minimum (*)
• When the failure cause disappears of itself, the machine operation returns to normal.
• The working mode cannot be changed. (The display changes normally in the monitor panel)
Phenomenon
• The travel speed cannot be shifted. (The display changes normally in the monitor panel)
occurring on
• The auto-deceleration cannot be released. (The display changes normally in the monitor panel)
machine
• The attachment oil flow rate cannot be changed. (The display changes normally in the monitor panel) (*)
• This Service Code No. is displayed to inform that there was a failure occurred in the past, when S-NET communica-
tion between the monitor panel and the governor – pump controller is returned to normal.
Relative
• The communication has already returned to normal by the time this Service Code No. is displayed. But thoroughly
information
diagnose all the related equipment and circuits, and remove all potential causes for a failure in order to prevent re-
currence of failures.
[*]: The multi-monitor specification machine only.
harness Wiring harness between P02 (female) (9) (10) and C02 (female) Resistance
1 Below 1 Ω
(Disconnection or defective (21) value
Wiring harness between P02 (female) (20) and C02 (female) Resistance
Below 1 Ω
(31) value
2
(Contact with grounding Between wiring harness P02 (female) (9) (10) and C02 (female) Resistance
(21) and grounding value
Short-circuiting of wiring the troubleshooting.
3 harness
(Contact with 24 V circuit) Between wiring harness P02 (female) (9) (10) and C02 (female)
Voltage Below 1 V
(21) and grounding
4 Monitor panel defective
P02 (male) Voltage
Between (9)(10) and (20) 6–9V
Governor – pump
5
controller defective C02 (male) Voltage
Between (21) and (31) 6–9V
20-532 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DA2SKA] – Disconnection of S-NET signal
Electrical circuit diagram for S-NET communication between monitor panel

and governor – Pump controller
Governor pump
Monitor panel controller
H12
P02 (040 - 20) (S - 12) C02 (DRC - 40)
S - NET signal (+) 9 1 21 S_NET

S - NET signal (-) 10 2 31 GND (S_NET)
S - NET GND 20
CAB
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-533

Failure code [DA2SKQ] – Abnormality in inputting model code TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DA2SKQ] – Abnormality in inputting model

code
20/25kph
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Abnormality in inputting model code
— E217 DA2SKQ phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • A model code signal was inputted which indicates another model that is not registered in the controller.
Response from • Even if the failure cause disappears of itself, the machine operation does not return to normal, unless the engine
controller starting switch is once turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on • Hunting may be experienced.
machine
Model selecting connector the troubleshooting.
defective C09 (female) Resistance value
1
(Internal disconnection or
short-circuiting) Between (3) and (8) Below 1 Ω
Between (1), (2), (4), (5), (6) or (7) and (8) Above 1 MΩ
2
contact with connector) Wiring harness between C02 (female) (17) and C09 (male) (3) Below 1 Ω
value
Wiring harness between C02 (female) (7) and C09 (male) (4) Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
and grounding value
Grounding fault of wiring
harness Wiring harness C02 (female) (13) and C09 (male) (7) and Resistance
3 Above 1 MΩ
(Contact with grounding grounding value
circuit)
Wiring harness between C02 (female) (27) and C09 (male) (2) Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
and grounding value
Resistance
Between wiring harness C02 (female) (37) and C09 (male) (1) Below 1 MΩ
value
Governor – pump C02 Voltage
4
Between (7), (13), (27) or (37) and grounding 20 – 30 V
Between (17) and grounding Below 1 V
20-534 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DA2SKQ] – Abnormality in inputting model code
Electrical circuit diagram for model selecting connector in governor –

pump controller
20/25kph
Governor pump
controller Model selection
connector
CO2 (DRC - 40) C09 (S - 8)
Model selection 4 7 1
6
7
J05 (J-20) 8
11 A01 (X - 4)
9 3
A64
(Pink)
CAB REVOLVING FRAME
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-535

Failure code [DA2SKQ] – Abnormality in inputting model code TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DA2SKQ] – Abnormality in inputting model

code
35kph
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Abnormality in inputting model code
— E217 DA2SKQ phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • A model code signal was inputted which indicates another model that is not registered in the controller.
Response from • Even if the failure cause disappears of itself, the machine operation does not return to normal, unless the engine
controller starting switch is once turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on • N/A
machine
Model selecting connector the troubleshooting.
defective C09 (female) Resistance value
1
(Internal disconnection or
short-circuiting) Between (3), (7) and (8) Below 1 Ω
Betwee (1), (2), (4), (5), (6), or (8) Above 1 MΩ
Disconnection of wiring Resistance

Wiring harness between C02 (female) (13) and C09 (male) (7) Below 1 Ω
harness value
2
contact with connector) Wiring harness between C02 (female) (17) and C09 (male)(3) Below 1 Ω
value
Resistance
Between wiring harness C09 (male) (8) and J05 and grounding Below 1 Ω
value
Grounding fault of wiring Between wiring harness C02 (female) (7) and C09 (male) (4) Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
harness and grounding value
3
(Contact with grounding Between wiring harness C02 (female) (27) and C09 (male) (2) Resistance
and grounding value
Between wiring harness C02 (female) (37) and C09 (male) (1) Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
and grounding value
4
Between (7), (27) or (37) and grounding 20 – 30 V
Between (13) or (17), and grounding Below 1 V
20-536 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DA2SKQ] – Abnormality in inputting model code
Electrical circuit diagram for model selecting connector in governor –

Pump controller
35kph
Governor pump
controller Model selection
connector
CO2 (DRC - 40) C09 (S - 8)
6
7
J05 (J-20) 8
11 A01 (X - 4)
9 3
A64
(Pink)
CAB REVOLVING FRAME
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-537

Failure code [DAF0KT] – Abnormal data in error history TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DAF0KT] – Abnormal data in error history
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Abnormal data in the error history
— E101 DAF0KT phenomenon (in Monitor Panel system)
• The voltage in the firm power source circuit for Monitor Panel (battery) has dropped below 12 V or
Failure content
exceeded 36 V.
Response from
Monitor Panel
Phenomenon
occurring on • A display for information on the failure history (in the electrical system) cannot be called.
machine
Fuse No. 12 and/or 17

1 If the fuse is blown, there is a big possibility that the circuit has a grounding fault.
defective
Fusible link No. A34 and/or

2 If the fusible link is blown, there is a big possibility that the circuit has a grounding fault.
A35 defective
• Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the OFF position for the
troubleshooting.

Wiring harness from P01 (female) (8) to FB1-17 outlet Above 1 Ω
harness value
3
(Disconnection or Resistance
connector contact fault) Wiring harness between FB1-17 inlet and A35 (male) (2) Above 1 Ω
value
Resistance
Wiring harness between A35 (male) (1) and A23 (B terminal) Above 1 Ω
value
troubleshooting.
Grounding fault of wiring Between wiring harness between P01 (female) (8) to FB1-17 out- Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
harness let and grounding value
4
(Contact with grounding Between wiring harness between FB1-17 inlet and A35 (male) (2) Resistance
and grounding value
Between wiring harness between A35 (male) (1) and A23 (B termi- Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
nal) and grounding value
troubleshooting.
5 Monitor Panel defective
P01 Voltage
Between (8) and (6) (7) 20 – 30 V
20-538 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DAF0KT] – Abnormal data in error history
Monitor panel power source electric circuit diagram
J04 (J-20)
13
14
15
16
(Green)
65A 30A
Monitor panel Fusible link
H10 A02
P01 (070 - 12) (S - 16) (X - 4) A34 (L - 2) A35 (L - 2)
24V (Switch-key on) 1 1 3

2 A64
24V (Switch-key on) 4
2 1 2 1
GND 6 5 REV FRAME
GND 7
24V (Battery) 8
A22
M B A23
J03 (J - 20) Battery
relay
15 A01
FB1 E BR
16 (X - 4) A20 A21
12
17 1 Battery
17 - + - +
18 4
Fuse
19 box
20
(Green)
CAB BATTERY ROOM
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-539

Failure code [DAFRMC] – Monitor comm. abnormality TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DAFRMC] – Monitor comm. abnormality
Action code Failure code Monitor communication abnormality

Trouble
E0E DAFRMC (Machine monitor)
Contents of • Machine monitor detected communication error in CAN communication circuit between pump controller and engine
trouble controller.
Action of con- • Fix engine output to E-mode, and limit pump absorption torque to about 80%.
Problem that
• Output lowers. (Pump absorption torque decreases.)
appears on
• As the working load increases, engine may stall.
machine
Related
information
Max. 1 Ω

Resist- Min.
Ground fault in wiring harness CE02 (female) (47), – C02 (female) (22), – other
2 ance 1 MΩ
(Short circuit with GND circuit) related circuit and chassis ground

Resist- Min.
Possible causes CE02 (female) (46), – C02 (female) (32), – other
ance 1 MΩ
and standard related circuit and chassis ground
value in normal ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and carry
state out troubleshooting.

Hot short (Short circuit with 24V CE02 (female) (47), – C02 (female) (22), – other Voltage Max. 1 V
3
circuit) in wiring harness related circuit and chassis ground

CE02 (female) (46), – C02 (female) (32), – other Voltage Max. 1 V
related circuit and chassis ground
Defective CAN terminal resist-
4
ance K02 (male), K31 (male) Resistance
Between (A) – (B) 40 – 80 Ω
Defective machine monitor, If causes 1 – 4 are not detected, machine monitor, engine controller, or pump
5 engine controller, or pump con- controller may be defective. (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting can-
troller not be carried out.)
20-540 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DAFRMC] – Monitor comm. abnormality
Circuit diagram related to CAN communication of machine monitor
A08
(SWP-8)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-541

Failure code [DDC3KZ] – Outrigger switch select abnormality TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DDC3KZ] – Outrigger switch select abnor-

mality

Trouble Outrigger Select Switch Abnormality
E20 DDC3KZ
Contents of
• Ground fault connection.
trouble
Action of
controller
Problem that • Control cannot be switched from boom to outrigger.

appears on OR
machine • Control cannot be switched from outrigger to boom.
• Outrigger select switch signal can be checked with monitoring function. (Code: 02301 Condition of Outrigger Select
Related
Switch)
information
Defective Boom/Undercarriage Resistance with Button
1
ATT Switch G71 (Male)
Pressed Not Pressed
Between (1)-(4) Max. 1 Ω Min. 1 MΩ
Wiring harness between G71 (Female) (1) – C01 Resist-

Disconnection in Wiring/Har- Max. 1 Ω
(Female) (24) ance
ness (Disconnection in Wiring
2
or Defective Contacting Con- Connecting ports between Boom/Undercarriage ATT Switch - Controller -
nector) Ground may be defective. Check them directly.
Looseness of connector, breakage of lock or breakage of steel.
Possible causes Corrosion, bend, breakage, push-in or expansion of pin.
and standard Moisture or dirt in connector or defective insulation.
value in normal ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without
Short Circuit in Wiring Harness
3 Wiring harness between C01 (Female) (24) –
(with another Wiring Harness) Resist- Min.
each of C01 (Female) pins (With all wiring har-
ance 1 MΩ
Grounding Fault of Wiring Har-
Wiring harness between C01 (Female) (24) - G71 Resist- Min.
4 ness (Contact with Grounding
(Female) (1) - ground. ance 1 MΩ
Circuit)
Wiring harness between G71 (Female) (4) and Resist-
Max. 1 Ω
ground. ance
5 Pump Controller Defective.
C01 (Female) Resistance
Between (24) and ground. 20 - 60 Ω
20-542 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DDC3KZ] – Outrigger switch select abnormality
Circuit diagram relating to outrigger switch select abnormality
Boom /
Undercarriage
ATT
RH Wrist
Control Lever
Switch Controller
C01 (DRG-24)
24 Boom / Outrigger Select Switch
G71 1 4
(DT-4)
5 6 J08
(Black)
T05
Floor Revo
Frame Frame
KSP00067
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-543

Failure code [DDHPAKP] – Abnormality in pump pressure sensor TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DDHPAKP] – Abnormality in pump pressure

sensor
User Code Failure Code Failure Abnormality in pump pressure sensor

— DDHPAKP phenomenon (pump controller system)
Failure content • Signal voltage from the pump pressure sensor dropped below 0.3 V or exceeded 4.72 V.
Response from • The controller controls the pump pressure at 0 MPa{0 kg/cm2}.
controller • If the failure cause disappears, the sensor returns to normal of itself.
Phenomenon
occurring on • The travel speed does not shift automatically.
machine
Relative • Input from the pump pressure sensor (pressure) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
information (Code No. 01100: pump pressure)
troubleshooting.
Pump pressure sensor
1 defective A51 Voltage
(Internal failure) Between (2) and (1) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (3) and (1) 0.5 – 4.5 V
Disconnection of wiring Between wiring harness from C01 (female) (22) to A51 (female) Resistance
Below 1 Ω
harness (3) value
2
contact with connector) Wiring harness between C01 (female) (10) and A51 (female) (1) Below 1 Ω
value
Resistance
Wiring harness between C01 (female) (8) and A51 (female) (2) Below 1 Ω
value
3
(Contact with grounding Between wiring harness C01 (female) (8) and A51 (female) (2) Resistance
and grounding value
Short-circuiting of wiring
Between wiring harness C01 (female) (22), A51 (female) (3) and
4 harness Voltage Below 1 V
grounding
(Contact with 24 V circuit)
Between wiring harness C01 (female) (8) and A51 (female) (2)
Voltage Below 1 V
and grounding
troubleshooting.
Pump C01 Voltage
5
Between (22) and (10) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (8) and (10) 0.5 – 4.5 V
20-544 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DDHPAKP] – Abnormality in pump pressure sensor
Electrical circuit diagram for pump pressure sensor pump controller
Governor pump
controller Front pump
A06 A51 oil pressure
C01 (DRC - 24) (SWP - 16) (DT - 3) sensor
8 3 A GND
Front pump pressure
sensor signal GND 10 7 B 5V
sensor SV
22 C SIG
A03
(DT - 12)
CAB CONTROL VALVE
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-545

Failure code [DDP4KX] – Abnormality in travel PPC pressure switch TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DDP4KX] – Abnormality in travel PPC pres-

sure switch
User Code Failure Code Failure Disconnection in travel PPC pressure switch (in pump
E20 DDP4KX phenomenon controller system)
Failure content • Error code appears on monitor when travel pedal operated.
Response from
• Defaults travel mode to ’N’ (Neutral).
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on • Machine cannot travel
machine
Relative
information
• Turn starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it OFF during troubleshooting.
standard value in normal
Presumed cause and
Pressure switch defective A56 Voltage

1 (Internal short circuiting or
grounding). Between (1) and (3) 4.5 - 5.5V
Between (1) and (2) 0.5 - 4.5V
harness (disconnection or Between C01-1 and A56-2.
2 Resistance
defective contact with con- Below 1 Ω
Between C01-10 and A56-1.
nector) value
Between C01-22 and A56-3
20-546 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DDP4KX] – Abnormality in travel PPC pressure switch
Electrical circuit diagram for travel ppc pressure switch
A56 A03 Pump Controller

(AMP-3) (DT-12) C01 (DRC-24)
Travel PPC
+5V 3 8 1 Pressure
Sensor
Travel PPC
Pressure ANL A06
2
10 GND
Switch (SWP-16)
GND 1
3
22 Pot. Power
11
AD
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-547

Failure code [DDWCKZ] – Abnormality in travel direction control switch TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DDWCKZ] – Abnormality in travel direction

control switch
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Disconnection in direction control switches (in governor
E20 E247 DDWCKZ phenomenon pump controller system)
Failure content • Error code appears on monitor when travel pedal operated.
Response from
• Defaults travel mode to ’N’ (Neutral).
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on • Machine cannot travel
machine
Relative
information

Presumed cause and standard
Pressure switch defec-
value in normal
S09 and S10 Resistance value

1 tive(Internal short
circuiting or grounding). Between (1) and (2) with oil pressure. Above 1 Ω
Between (1) and (2) without oil pressure. Less than 100 Ω
Disconnection of wirirng • Turn starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it OFF during troubleshooting.
harness (disconnection or
2 Between C01-12 and S09-2. Resistance
deffective contact with Below 1 Ω
connector) Between C02-6 and S10-2. value
20-548 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DDWCKZ] – Abnormality in travel direction control switch
Electrical circuit diagram for travel PPC switch
S09
C01 1
Travel reverse A06 Reverse
12 2
pressure switch (SWP - 16)
16
S10
C02 15
1
Travel forward Forward
6 2
pressure switch
A65
AC
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-549

Failure code [DFB1KZ] – Service lever potentio 1 abnormality TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DFB1KZ] – Service lever potentio 1 abnor-

mality

Trouble RH Lever main potentiometer (for 1st Att.) has failure
— DFB1KZ
Contents of
• Potentiometer’s output voltage is out of range (below 0.4 volts or above 4.6 volts)
trouble
Action of • Turns output to service EPC solenoids (EPC1 & EPC2) OFF.
controller • Even if cause of failure disappears, system does not reset itself until starting switch is turned OFF.
Problem that
appears on • 1st Attachment does not operate.
machine
• Main potentio output voltage can be checked with monitoring function.

(Code: 42008 Lever potentio 1 volt (Main))
• Sub potentio output voltage can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code 42009 Lever potentio 1 volt (Sub))
information
• Potentiometer stroke can be checked with monitoring function.
(Code 42012 Lever potentio 1 stroke)
• Method of reproducing failure code : Turn starting switch to ON + set in attachment mode (ATT)..
Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and carry out troubleshoot-
ing.
Lever slide sw Neutral 2.5 ± 0.3 V
Lever slide sw Upper

4.0 ~ 4.6 V
max.
Monitoring function code :
42008 Lever slide sw Lower
0.4 ~ 1.0 V
Lever potentio 1 max.
Volt (Main)
If voltage is 0V and no movement, disconnection or
Defective RH ground short may be the cause.
1
lever assembly If voltage is 5V and no movement, hot short may be the
cause.
Possible causes G72 (female) Voltage
and standard
value in normal Between (1) - (2) Potentio 5V supply 4.5 ~ 5.5 V
state Lever slide sw Neutral 2.5 ± 0.3 V
Between (4) - (2)
Lever slide sw Upper max. 4.0 ~ 4.6 V
Potentio output
Lever slide sw Lower max. 0.4 ~ 1.0 V
If G72 (1) - (2) voltage 0V, disconnection may be the cause.
Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without turning starting
switch ON.
Disconnection in
wiring harness. Wiring harness between G72 (female) (1) - C01 (female)
Resistance Max.1 Ω
(Disconnection in (22)
2
wiring or defective Wiring harness between G72 (female) (2) - C01 (female)
contact in connec- Resistance Max.1 Ω
(21)
tor).
Wiring harness between G72 (female) (4) - C01 (female)
Resistance Max.1 Ω
(9)
20-550 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DFB1KZ] – Service lever potentio 1 abnormality
3
starting switch ON.
Ground fault in
wiring harness. Wiring harness between G72 (female) (1) - C01 (female) Min.
Resistance
(Short circuit with (22) 100 kΩ
GND circuit)
Wiring harness between G72 (female) (4) - C01 (female) Min.
Resistance
(9) 100 kΩ
Possible causes ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without turning
Hot short
and standard starting switch ON.
(short circuit with 5
value in normal 4
Volts circuit) in wir- Wiring harness between G72 (female) (4) - G72 (female) Min.
state
ing harness. Resistance
(1). (Measure it disconnecting G72 connector). 100 kΩ
Ground fault in ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without turning
wiring harness . starting switch ON.
5 (No secure GND
from pump con- Wiring harness between G72 (female (2) - chassis GND Resistance Max.30 Ω
troller).
Defective pump If cause 1 -5 are not detected, pump controller may be defective.
6
controller. (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out).
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL SWITCH
FB1
15 15A
CONTROLLER
C01 (DRC-24)
9 1st Service Pot
21 Analog GND
22 Pot Power
C03 (DRC-40)
G72 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 st
40 1 Service Neutral
(DT-12)
KSP00052
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-551

Failure code [DFB2KZ] – Service lever potentio 2 abnormality TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DFB2KZ] – Service lever potentio 2 abnor-

mality

Trouble LH Lever main potentiometer (for 2nd Att.) has failure
— DFB2KZ
Contents of
• Potentiometer’s output voltage is out of range (below 0.4 volts or above 4.6 volts)
trouble
Problem that
appears on • 2nd Attachment does not operate.
machine

Related
information
★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and carry out trouble-
shooting.
Lever slide sw Neutral 2.5 ± 0.3 V
Lever slide sw Upper

4.0 ~ 4.6 V
max.
Monitoring function code :
42010 Lever slide sw Lower
0.4 ~ 1.0 V
Lever potentio 2 max.
Volt (Main)
If voltage is 0V and no movement, disconnection or
Defective LH lever ground short may be the cause.
1
assembly If voltage is 5V and no movement, hot short may be the
cause.
Possible causes G70 (female) Voltage
and standard
value in normal Between (7) - (9) Potentio 5V supply 4.5 ~ 5.5 V
state Lever slide sw Neutral 2.5 ± 0.3 V
Between (9) - (17)
Lever slide sw Upper max. 4.0 ~ 4.6 V
Potentio output
Lever slide sw Lower max. 0.4 ~ 1.0 V
If G70 (6) - (7) voltage 0V, disconnection may be the cause.
starting switch ON.
Disconnection in
wiring harness. Wiring harness between G70 (female) (6) - C01 (female)
Resistance Max. 1 Ω
(Disconnection in (22)
2
wiring or defective Wiring harness between G70 (female) (7) - C01 (female)
contact in connec- Resistance Max. 1 Ω
(21)
tor).
Wiring harness between G70 (female) (9) - C01 (female)
Resistance Max. 1 Ω
(3)
20-552 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DFB2KZ] – Service lever potentio 2 abnormality
3 Ground fault in ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without turning
wiring harness. starting switch ON.
(Short circuit with
Wiring harness between G70 (female) (6) - C01 (female) Min.
GND circuit) Resistance
(22) 100 kΩ
Wiring harness between M23 (female) (9) - C01 (female) Min.

Resistance
(3) 100 kΩ
Possible causes 4 Hot short ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without turning
and standard (Short circuit with starting switch ON.
value in normal 5 Volts circuit) in
Wiring harness between G70 (female) (9) - G70 (female)
state wiring harness. Min.
(6). Resistance
100 kΩ
(Measure it disconnecting G70 connector).
5 Ground fault in ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without turning
wiring harness . starting switch ON.
(No secure GND
from pump con- Wiring harness between G70 (female (7) - chassis GND Resistance Max. 30 Ω
troller).
6 Defective pump If cause 1 -5 are not detected, pump controller may be defective.
controller. (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting cannot be carried out).
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL SWITCH
5 10A
CONTROLLER
C01 (DRC-24)
3 2nd Service Pot
21 Analog GND
22 Pot Power
C03 (DRC-40)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 nd
9 2 Service Neutral
G70
(DT-12)
KSP00059
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-553

Failure code [DFB3L8] – Service lever 1 potentio error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DFB3L8] – Service lever 1 potentio error

Trouble RH Lever main potentiometer (for 1st Att.) has failure
— DFB3L8
Contents of
• Summation of Potentiometer’s output voltage is out of range (below 4.5 volts or above 5.5 volts)
trouble
Problem that
appears on • 1st Attachment does not operate.
machine

Related
information
• For troubleshooting, carry out [DFB1KZ].
• Information
Potentiometer’s output voltage

• As shown below, summation of Main and Sub Potentiometer
output to be constant.
• If this value exceeded 5 ± 0.5 V, this Failure code [DFB3L8]

is displayed.
• The cause to be Main or Sub potentiometer’s output error,

so need to carry out troubleshooting in [DFB1KZ].
Output Voltage (V)
4.3
Main Potentio Output
2.5
Sub Potentio Output

0.7
Lower Neutral Upper

max max
(V)
5 ± 0.5 Summation of Main &
Sub Potentio Output
20-554 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DFB4L8] – Service lever 2 potentio error
Failure code [DFB4L8] – Service lever 2 potentio error

Trouble LH Lever main potentiometer (for 2nd Att.) has failure
— DFB4L8
Contents of
• Summation of Potentiometer’s output voltage is out of range (below 4.5 volts or above 5.5 volts)
trouble
Problem that
appears on • 2nd Attachment does not operate.
machine

Related
information
• For troubleshooting, carry out [DFB2KZ].
• Information
Potentiometer's output voltage

• As shown below, summation of Main and Sub Potentiometer
output to be constant.
• If this value exceeded 5 ± 0.5 V, this Failure code [DFB4L8]

is displayed.
• The cause to be Main or Sub potentiometer's output error,

so need to carry out troubleshooting in [DFB2KZ].
Output Voltage (V)
4.3
Main Potentio Output
2.5
Sub Potentio Output

0.7
Lower Neutral Upper

max max
(V)
5 ± 0.5 Summation of Main &
Sub Potentio Output
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-555

Failure code [DFB4L8] – Service lever 2 potentio error TESTING AND ADJUSTING
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL SWITCH PROPORTIONAL CONTROL SWITCH
LH LEVER RH LEVER
(2nd ATT) (1st ATT)
G70
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 G72 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
(DT-12) (DT-12)
C01 (DRC-24)
st
3 1 Service Pot
9 2nd Service Pot
21 Analog GND
22 Pot Power
KSP00060
20-556 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DGH2KB] – Hydr oil sensor short
Failure code [DGH2KB] – Hydr oil sensor short
User code Failure code Hydraulic oil temperature sensor short

Trouble
— DGH2KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Ground fault was detected in hydraulic oil temperature sensor circuit.
trouble
Action of • Fixes hydraulic oil temperature value at 40°C and continues operation.
Problem that
• While hydraulic oil temperature rises normally, hydraulic oil temperature gauge does not move from top of white
appears on
range (bottom of green range).
machine
• Signal voltage of hydraulic oil temperature sensor can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 04402 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor voltage)
information
Defective hydraulic oil tempera-
1 ture sensor (Internal disconnec- A55 (male) Resistance
tion or short circuit) Between (1) – (2) 3.5 – 90 kΩ
Between (1) – chassis ground Min. 1 MΩ
and standard Ground fault in wiring harness turning starting switch ON.
value in normal 2
(Short circuit with GND circuit) Wiring harness between P02 (female) (11) – A55 Resist- Min.
state
★ P02 (female) Resistance

3 Defective Monitor
Between (11) - (13)
3.5 – 90 kΩ
or (11) - (20)
Circuit diagram related to hydraulic oil temperature sensor
H10
(S-16)
16 A06 A55
P02 (040-20) (SWP-16) (DT-2)
Hydraulic Temp. 11 4 2
Hydraulic Oil
GND 13 H11 Temp. Sensor
N/W GND 20 (S-16) 5 1
CAB REVO
KSP00065
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-557

Failure code [DH10KS] – Abnormality in pressure sensor power source TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DH10KS] – Abnormality in pressure sensor

power source
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Abnormality in pressure sensor power source
— E226 DH10KS phenomenon (in governor pump controller system)
Failure content • Abnormal current flow to the power source circuit (5 V) for the pressure sensors and potentiometer.
• The controller turns OFF power supply to the power source circuit (5 V).
Response from
• Even when the failure cause disappears of itself, the current does not return to normal, unless the engine starting
controller
switch is once turned OFF.
Phenomenon • Signals from the pressure sensors and potentiometer are not inputted correctly.
occurring on • The Service Code of "pressure sensor abnormal" and that of "potentiometer abnormal" are displayed at the same
machine time.
Disconnect the following equipment one by one. Equipment that shows no service code is defec-
tive, having an internal failure.
Pressure sensor or potenti- Fuel dial E06 Connector
1 ometer defective
(Internal short-circuit) Governor motor potentiometer E10 Connector
Front pump pressure sensor A51 Connector

Rear pump pressure sensor A52 Connector
Overload caution sensor G164 Connector
Between wiring harness from C01 (female) (22) to E06 (female) Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
(1) and grounding [Fuel dial system] value
Between wiring harness from C01 (female) (22) to E10 (female)

Resistance
(A) and grounding Above 1 MΩ
Grounding fault of wiring value
[Governor potentiometer system]
harness
2 Between wiring harness from C01 (female) (22) to A51 (female)
(Contact with grounding Resistance
circuit) (B) and grounding Above 1 MΩ
value
[Pump pressure sensor system]
Between wiring harness from C01 (female) (22) to A52 (female)

Resistance
(B) and grounding Above 1 MΩ
value
[Pump pressure sensor system]
Between wiring harness C01 (female) (22) to G164 (female) (B) Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
and grounding. value
Governor – pump
3
controller defective C01 Voltage
Between (22) and (10) (21) 4.5 – 5.5 V
20-558 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DH10KS] – Abnormality in pressure sensor power source
Electrical circuit diagram for sensor power source in governor – Pump

controller
Governor pump
controller
C01 (DRC - 24)
R pump press. sensor 2

Overload caution (analogue) 7
F pump press. sensor 8
Signal GND 10
Governor potentiometer 13
Fuel dial 19
CAB
Sensor GND 21
Sensor 5V 22
H15 E06 Fuel

(090-20) (M - 3) dial
14 1
15 2
16 3
A03 3 7 8 10
A06
(DT - 47) (SWP - 16)
6 7 8
G164 F pump oil
(DT - 3) A51 (DT - 3) press. sensor
A A
O/load
caution B B
sensor
C C
R pump oil
A52 (DT - 3)E press. sensor
E21
(DT - 12) A
11 12 10
Governor B
potentiometer E10 (DT - 3)
C
A
B
C
ENGINE CONTROL VALVE
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-559

Failure code [DHPAKP] – Abnormality in F pump pressure sensor TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DHPAKP] – Abnormality in F pump pressure

sensor
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Abnormality in F pump pressure sensor
— E224 DHPAKP phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • Signal voltage from the F pump pressure sensor dropped below 0.3 V or exceeded 4.72 V.
Response from • The controller controls the F pump pressure at 0 MPa{0 kg/cm2}.
Phenomenon
machine
Relative • Input from the F pump pressure sensor (pressure) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
information (Code No. 011: F pump pressure)
1 Sensor power source fault If the Service Code No. [E226] is displayed, troubleshoot the failure first.
troubleshooting.
F pump pressure sensor
(Internal failure) Between (B) and (A) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (C) and (A) 0.5 – 4.5 V
Disconnection of wiring Wiring harness from C01 (female) (22) to A51 (female) Resistance
Below 1 Ω
harness (B) value
3
(Disconnection or defective Wiring harness between C01 (female) (10) and A51 Resistance
contact with connector) Below 1 Ω
(female) (A) value
Wiring harness between C01 (female) (8) and A51 Resistance

Below 1 Ω
(female) (C) value
4
(Contact with grounding Between wiring harness between C01 (female) (8) and Resistance
A51 (female) (C) and grounding value
Between wiring harness between C01 (female) (22), A51
(female) (B) and grounding
Between wiring harness between C01 (female) (8) and
Voltage Below 1 V
A51 (female) (C) and grounding
troubleshooting.
6
Between (22) and (10) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (8) and (10) 0.5 – 4.5 V
20-560 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DHPAKP] – Abnormality in F pump pressure sensor
Electrical circuit diagram for pump pressure sensor in governor – Pump

controller
Governor pump
controller Front pump
8 3 A GND
Front pump pressure
sensor SV
22 C SIG
A03
(DT - 12)
CAB CONTROL VALVE
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-561

Failure code [DHPAMA] – Abnormality in F pump pressure sensor TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DHPAMA] – Abnormality in F pump pressure

sensor
Action code Failure code Pump press sensor abnormality

Trouble
— DHPAMA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Signal voltage from pump pressure sensor is below 0.3 V or above 4.42 V.
trouble
Action of con- • Fixes pump pressure at 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2} and continues control.
Problem that
appears on • No automatic gear shifting
machine
• If 5V circuit (3) and ground circuit (1) of pressure sensor are connected inversely, pressure sensor will be broken.
Related Accordingly, take extreme care when checking.
information • Input from pump pressure sensor (pressure) can be checked with monitoring function.
(Code 01112: pump pressure
Defective sensor power supply If failure code [DA25KP] is also displayed, carry out troubleshooting for it
1
system first.
★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then start engine and carry out trou-
bleshooting.
Defective F pump pressure
2 sensor A51 Voltage
(Internal defect) Between (3) – (1) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (2) – (1) 0.5 – 4.5 V
Wiring harness between C01 (female) (22) – A03 Resist-

Disconnection in wiring harness Max. 1 Ω
– A51 (female) (3) ance
defective contact in connector) Wiring harness between C01 (female) (10) – A06 Resist-
Max. 1 Ω
– A51 (female) (1) ance
Possible causes
Wiring harness between C01 (female) (8) – A06 – Resist-
A51 (female) (2) ance
value in normal
4
(Short circuit with GND circuit) Wiring harness between C01 (female) (8) – A06 – Resist- Min.
A51 (female) (2) and chassis ground ance 1 MΩ
Hot short (Short circuit with 24V Wiring harness between C01 (female) (22) – A03
5 Voltage Max. 1 V
circuit) in wiring harness – A51 (female) (3) and chassis ground
Wiring harness between C01 (female) (8) – A06 –

Voltage Max. 1 V
A51 (female) (2) and chassis ground
bleshooting.
6 Defective pump controller C01 Voltage
Between (22) – (10) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (8) – (10) 0.5 – 4.5 V
20-562 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DHPAMA] – Abnormality in F pump pressure sensor
Circuit diagram related to pump pressure sensor of pump controller
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-563

Failure code [DHPBMA] – Abnormality in R pump pressure sensor TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DHPBMA] – Abnormality in R pump pres-

sure sensor
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Abnormality in R pump pressure sensor
— E225 DHPBMA phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • Signal voltage from the R pump pressure sensor dropped below 0.3 V or exceeded 4.42 V.
Response from • The controller controls the R pump pressure as 0 MPa {0 kg/cm2}.
Phenomenon
machine
Relative • Input from the R pump pressure sensor (pressure) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
information (Code No. 012: R pump pressure)
1 Sensor power source fault If the Service Code No. [E226] is displayed, troubleshoot the failure first.
troubleshooting.
R pump pressure sensor
(Internal failure) Between (B) and (A) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (C) and (A) 0.5 – 4.5 V

Wiring harness from C01 (female) (22) to A52 (female) (B) Below 1 Ω
harness value
3
contact with connector) Wiring harness between C01 (female) (10) and A52 (female) (A) Below 1 Ω
value
Resistance
Wiring harness between C01 (female) (2) and A52 (female) (C) Below 1 Ω
value
4
(Contact with grounding Between wiring harness between C01 (female) (2) and A52 Resistance
(female) (C) and grounding value
Between wiring harness between C01 (female) (22), A52
(female) (B) and grounding
Between wiring harness between C01 (female) (2) and A52
Voltage Below 1 V
(female) (C) and grounding
troubleshooting.
6
Between (22) and (10) 4.5 – 5.5 V
Between (2) and (10) 0.5 – 4.5 V
20-564 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DHPBMA] – Abnormality in R pump pressure sensor
Electrical circuit diagram for R pump pressure sensor in governor – Pump

controller
Governor pump
controller Rear pump
2 3 A GND
Rear pump pressure
sensor SV
22 C SIG
A03
(DT - 12)
CAB CONTROL VALVE
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-565

Failure code [DHS5KX] – Abnormality in travel PPC sensor TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DHS5KX] – Abnormality in travel PPC sen-

sor
User Code Failure Code Failure Abnormality in the travel PPC sensor
E20 DHS5KX phenomenon (in pump controller system)
Failure content • A normal signal is not inputted to the signal circuit from the travel PPC sensor.
Response from • No control of engine speed via throttle pedal during travel operation.
controller • If the failure cause disappears of itself, the signal input returns to normal.
Phenomenon occurring • The machine lacks speed unless engine fuel dial is turned to ’Hi’ position.
on machine
Travel PPC
1 (Internal short-circuiting or A56 (male) Resistance value
disconnection) Between (3) and (2) 500 – 1,000 Ω

harness value
2
contact with connector) Wiring harness between C01 (female) (10) and A56 (female) (1) Below 1 Ω
value
Resistance
value
3 harness
(Contact with circuit) Wiring harness between C01 (female) (22) and A56 (female) (1)
Voltage Below 1 V
and grounding
Pump C01 (female) Resistance value
4
Between (22) and (10) 500 – 1,000 Ω
Between (1) and (10) Above 1 MΩ
20-566 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DHS5KX] – Abnormality in travel PPC sensor
Travel PPC A06 A56

pressure sensor (SWP-16) (DT-3)
Travel 1
3
C01 (DRC - 24)
Travel
GND (SGNL) 10 3 1 PPC
sensor
Potentiometer 22 11 2
Potentiometer power
A03
(DT-12)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-567

Failure code [DHX1MA] – Abnormality in overload caution sensor TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DHX1MA] – Abnormality in overload caution

sensor
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Abnormality in overload caution sensor
— E251 DHX1MA phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • A normal pulse signal is not inputted to the signal circuit in the overload caution sensor.
Response from • The controller exercises a control equivalent to E mode.

Phenomenon
occurring on • Caution may illuminate on monitor
machine
Relative
• Warning buzzer may sound
information
Overload caution sensor the troubleshooting.
fault G164 (male) Resistance value
1
(Internal short-circuiting or
disconnection) Between (A) and (B) 500 – 1,000 Ω
Between (A) and (C) Above 1 MΩ


Wiring harness between C01 (female) (7) and G164 (female) (C) Below 1 Ω
harness value
2
(Disconnection or defective
Wiring harness between C01 (female) (10) and G164 (female)
(A) Resistance
Below 1 Ω
Wiring harness between C01 (female) (22) and G164 (female) value
(B)
3 harness Wiring harness between C02 (female) (22) and G164 (female)
(Contact with 24 V circuit) (B) and grounding
Voltage Below 1 V
Wiring harness between C01 (female) (7) and G164 (C) and
grounding.
Governor – pump C01 (female) Resistance value
4
Between (22) and (10) 500 – 1,000 Ω
20-568 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DHX1MA] – Abnormality in overload caution sensor
Electrical circuit diagram for overload caution
A06
(HDP47)
Overload Caution 3
(Analogue Type) C01 - (DRC - 24)
G164
7 10 (DT - 3)
A
Overload
B Caution
Ground
10 Sensor
(Sig.)
C
22
A03
(HDP47)
Potentionmeter Power
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-569

Failure code [DLE2MA] – Abnormality in engine rotation sensor in governor (pump controller system) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DLE2MA] – Abnormality in engine rotation

sensor in governor (pump controller system)
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Abnormality in engine rotation sensor
— E227 DLE2MA phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • A normal pulse signal is not inputted to the signal circuit in the engine rotation sensor.
Response from • The controller exercises a control equivalent to E mode.

Phenomenon
occurring on • The machine lacks power.
machine
Relative • Input from the engine rotation sensor (rpm) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
information (Code No. 010: Engine RPM)
• Engine rotation sensor the troubleshooting.
fault E04 (male) Resistance value
1
• (Internal short-circuiting
or disconnection) Between (1) and (2) 500 – 1,000 Ω
• Engine rotation sensor For the inspection and adjustment, refer to the section of "Adjusting Engine Rotation Sensor" in this
2
adjustment improper manual.
• Disconnection of wiring the troubleshooting.
harness
Resistance
3 • (Disconnection or defec- Wiring harness between C02 (female) (40) and E04 (female) (1) Below 1 Ω
value
tive contact with connec-
tor) Resistance
Wiring harness between C02 (female) (39) and E04 (female) (2) Below 1 Ω
value
• Short-circuiting of wiring • Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the ON position during
4
• (Contact with 24 V cir- Between wiring harness C02 (female) (40) and E04 (female) (1)
cuit) Voltage Below 1 V
and grounding
• Governor – pump C02 (female) Resistance value
5
Between (40) and (39) 500 – 1,000 Ω
20-570 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DLE2MA] – Abnormality in engine rotation sensor in governor (pump controller system)
Electrical circuit diagram for monitor panel power source
Governor pump
controller
C02 (DRC - 40)

A03 E21 E04 Engine
(DT - 12) (DT - 12) (DT - 12) speed sensor
Speed sensor GND 39 9 5 1

Engine speed sensor 40 10 6 2
CAB ENGINE
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-571

Failure code [DLT4KA] – Disconnection in transmission speed sensor in governor (pump controller syste)m) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DLT4KA] – Disconnection in transmission

speed sensor in governor (pump controller syste)m)
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Disconnection in transmission speed sensor
E20 E254 DLT4KA phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • A normal pulse signal is not inputted to the signal circuit in the transmission speed sensor.
Response from • The machine will default to ’Hi’ travel speed only.
controller • If the failure cause disappears of itself, the signal input returns to normal condition.
Phenomenon
• The machine defaults to ’Hi’ speed travel.
occurring on
• Monitor will not display travel speed.
machine
Relative
• Input from the transmission speed sensor (rpm) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
information
Cause Standard value in normalcy and references for troubleshooting
Transmission speed sen- the troubleshooting.
sor fault A57 (male) Resistance value
1
disconnection) Between (1) and (2) 500 – 1,000 Ω
Transmission speed sen- For the inspection and adjustment, refer to the section of "Adjusting Transmission speed Sensor" in
2
sor adjustment improper this manual.
harness Resistance
3 Wiring harness between C02 (female) (30) and A57 (female) (1) Below 1 Ω
Resistance
Between C02 (female) (29) and A57 (2). Below 1 Ω
value
4 harness
(Contact with 24 V circuit) Wiring harness between C02 (female) (20) and A57 (female) (2)
Voltage Below 1 V
and grounding
5
Betweens C02 (30) and C02 (29) 500 – 1,000 Ω
Between C02 (30) and grounding Above 1 MΩ
20-572 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DLT4KA] – Disconnection in transmission speed sensor in governor (pump controller syste)m)
Electrical circuit diagram for monitor panel power source
C01 (DRC-24)
4 GND (Sig.)
C02(DRC-40)
29 GND (Pulse)
30 Speed pick up sensor
A04
12 11 10 (SWP-12)
Transmission Speed Sensor
N S
1 2
A57
(DT-2)
1 2
A14 A11
(DT-3) (DT-3)
1 1
2
Swivel 2
Joint
3 3
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-573

Failure code [DW27KA] – Disconnection in transmission clutch solenoid TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DW27KA] – Disconnection in transmission

clutch solenoid
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Disconnection in transmission clutch solenoid
E20 E216 DW27KA phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • No current flows to the transmission clutch solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Response from • None in particular (The solenoid does not function as there is no current flowing to it)
controller • When the failure cause disappears of itself, the machine operation returns to normal.
Phenomenon
• The travel speed does not shift to Lo. (Machine defaults to Hi)
occurring on
(The display changes normally in the monitor panel)
machine
• Operation of the transmission clutch solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function. (Code No.
Relative 023: Solenoid 1)
information • The solenoid detects disconnection, when power is ON. Hence be sure to check it with power ON after the repairs.
(For how to turn power ON or OFF, refer to the troubleshooting under Service Code [E216])
Transmission clutch sole- the troubleshooting.
1 noid defective
V11 (male) Resistance value
(Internal disconnection)
Between (1) and (2) 27 – 30 Ω at 20°C
harness Between wiring harness from C03 (female) (27) to A05 to V11 Resistance
2 Below 1 Ω
(Disconnection or defective (female) (1) value
Resistance
Wiring harness between V11 (female) (2) and grounding Below 1 Ω
value
3 harness
(Contact with 24 V circuit) Betwen wiring harness from C03 (female) (27) to A05 to V11
Voltage Below 1 V
(female) (1).
Governor – pump
4
controller defective C03 (female) Resistance value
Between (27) and grounding 20 – 60 Ω
20-574 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DW27KA] – Disconnection in transmission clutch solenoid
Electrical circuit diagram for transmission clutch solenoid in governor –

Pump controller
Governor pump
controller
A05 V11 Transmission clutch
C03 (DRC - 40) (SWP - 14) (DT-2) solenoid valve
T/mission clutch SOL 27 4 1

2
(ON) (OFF)
A65
CAB REVOLVING FRAME
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-575

Failure code [DW27KB] – Short-circuiting in transmission clutch solenoid TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DW27KB] – Short-circuiting in transmission

clutch solenoid
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Disconnection in transmission clutch solenoid
E20 E206 DW27KB phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • Abnormal current flow to the transmission clutch solenoid, when power was supplied to the circuit.
• Power supply to the transmission clutch solenoid circuit is switched OFF.

Response from
• Even after the failure cause disappears of itself, the machine operation does not return to normal,
controller
unless the engine starting switch is once turned OFF.
Phenomenon
• The travel speed does not turn to Hi.
occurring on
(The display in the monitor panel changes correctly)
machine
Relative • Operation of the transmission clutch solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function. (Code No.
information 023: Solenoid 1)
Transmission clutch
solenoid defective V11 (male) Resistance value
1
grounding fault) Between (1) and (2) 27 – 30 Ω at 20°C
2
(Contact with grounding Between wiring harness from C03 (female) (27) to A05 to V11 Resistance
(female) (1). value
shooting.
Governor – pump C03 Travel speed Voltage
3
Lo Below 1 V
Hi + Travel operation 20 – 30 V
20-576 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DW27KB] – Short-circuiting in transmission clutch solenoid
Electrical circuit diagram for transmission clutch solenoid
Governor pump
controller
A05 V11 Transmission clutch
C03 (DRC - 40) (SWP - 14) (DT-2) solenoid valve
T/mission clutch SOL 27 4 1

2
(ON) (OFF)
A65
CAB REVOLVING FRAME
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-577

Failure code [DW4CKA] – Disconnection in PPC lock solenoid TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DW4CKA] – Disconnection in PPC lock sole-

noid
User Code Failure Code Failure Disconnection in PPC lock solenoid

DW4CKA phenomenon (in pump controller system)
Failure content • No current flows to the PPC lock solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Phenomenon
occurring on • None of the machines work equipment functions operate.
machine
• Operation of the PPC lock solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function. (Code No. 02300: So-
Relative
lenoid valve 1)
information
• The solenoid detects disconnection, when power is ON. Hence be sure to check it with power ON after the repairs.
• Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the OFF position during the
PPC lock solenoid troubleshooting.
1 defective (Internal dis- V01 (male) Resistance value
connection)
Between (1) and (2) 27 – 30 Ω at 20°C
R45 (Male) Resistance value
Between (1) - (2) 300 - 600 Ω

Defective PPC lock
2 relay (Internal discon- • Prepare with starting switch OFF, then turn starting switch ON and carry out troubleshooting. (Trou-
nection) bleshooting by replacement)
• Replace PPC lock relay (R45) with another relay and perform reproducing operation. If "E" of failure
code goes off at this time, replaced relay is defective.
troubleshooting.
Wiring harness between C03 (female) (29) to R45 to A05 to V01

Resistance value Below 1 Ω
Disconnection of (female) (1)
wiring harness
Between wiring harness from S14 (male) (2) to R45 (female) (3) Resistance value Below 1 Ω
3 (Disconnection or
defective contact with Between wiring harness from S14 (male) (1) to FB1 (female) (3) Resistance value Below 1 Ω
connector)
Wiring harness between V01 (female) (2) and grounding Resistance value Below 1 Ω
Between wiring harness from S14 (male) (1) to R45 (1) Resistance value Below 1 Ω
Between wiring harness from C02 (female) (9) to R45 (2) Resistance value Below 1 Ω
Short-circuiting of • Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the ON position during the
Wiring harness troubleshooting.
4
(Contact with 24V cir- Between wiring harness C03 (female) (29) and R45 and A05 and
V01 (1) and grounding
• Prepare with starting switch OFF, with PPC lock switch OFF (LH pod down) then carry out trouble-
shooting without turning starting switch ON.
Defective PPC lock S14 (female) Resistance
5
switch
Between (1) and (2) Below 1 Ω
troubleshooting.
Pump
6
Between (29) and grounding Below 1 Ω
20-578 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DW4CKA] – Disconnection in PPC lock solenoid
Electrical circuit diagram for ppc lock solenoid in pump controller
PPC Lock Switch
1 2 3
Pod
OFF down
ON Pod up
1 2 3 S14
(M-3)
CO2 (DRC - 40)

9 PPC Lock
FB1
3 CO3 (DRC - 40)
10A 29 PPC Lock (IN)
PPC Lock
Relay R45
1 2 3 5 6
A05 V01
(SWP-16) (DT-2)
3 1
A65
DW4CKA
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-579

Failure code [DW4CKB] – PPC lock sol. S/C TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DW4CKB] – PPC lock sol. S/C
Action code Failure code PPC lock solenoid short

Trouble
DW4CKB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• Abnormal current flowed at output to PPC lock solenoid circuit.
trouble
Problem that
appears on • None of the machines work equipment functions operate.
machine
Related • Operating condition of PPC lock solenoid (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function. (Code 02301:
information Solenoid valve 1)
Defective PPC lock solenoid
1 (Internal short circuit or V01 (male) Resistance
ground fault) Between (1) – (2) 27 – 30 Ω at 20°C
Wiring harness between C03 (female) (29) –

R45 – A05 – V01 (female) (1) and chassis Resistance Min. 1 MΩ
ground
Possible
Wiring harness between V01 (female) (2) and
causes and Resistance Below 1 Ω
ground.
standard value
in normal state Ground fault in wiring harness
2 Wiring harness between C03 (female) (29) -
(Short circuit with GND circuit) Resistance Min. 1 MΩ
S14 (male) (2) and ground.
Wiring harness between S14 (male) (1) - FB1

Resistance Min. 1 MΩ
(3) and ground.
Wiring harness between S14 (male) (1) - R45

(1) and ground.
Wiring harness between R42 (female) (2) - FB1

(3) and ground.
★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then start engine and carry out trouble-
shooting.
C03 Voltage
Between (29) – chassis ground 20 – 30 V
20-580 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DW4CKB] – PPC lock sol. S/C
Circuit diagram related to swing holding brake solenoid of pump controller
PPC Lock Switch
1 2 3
Pod
OFF down
ON Pod up
1 2 3 S14
(M-3)
CO2 (DRC - 40)

9 PPC Lock
FB1
3 CO3 (DRC - 40)
10A 29 PPC Lock (IN)
PPC Lock
Relay R45
1 2 3 5 6
A05 V01
(SWP-16) (DT-2)
3 1
A65
DW4CKA
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-581

Failure code [DW44KA] – Disconnection of travel F/R solenoid TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DW44KA] – Disconnection of travel F/R sole-

noid
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Disconnection in travel F/R solenoid
Failure content • No current flows to the travel F/R solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Response from • None in particular (The solenoid does not function as there is current flowing to it)
Phenomenon
occurring on • It is difficult to steer the machine while travelling.
machine
• Operation of the travel F/R solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function. (Code No. 024:
Relative Solenoid 2)
Travel F/R the troubleshooting.
1 solenoid defective V08 (male) Resistance value
Between (1) and (2) 27 – 30 Ω at 20°C
harness Between wiring harness from C03 (female) (28) to R40 to A05 to Resistance
2 Below 1 Ω
(Disconnection or defective V08 (female) (4) value
Resistance
value
3 harness
(Contact with 24 V circuit) Between wiring harness from C03 (female) (28) to R40 to A05 to
Voltage Below 1 V
V08 (female) (1), or between wiring harness C03 (female) (28)
Governor – pump
4
20-582 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DW44KA] – Disconnection of travel F/R solenoid
Electrical circuit diagram for travel F/R solenoid
EMERGENCY
TRAVEL
SWITCH EMERGENCY
FNR SWITCH
FNR SWITCH
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 3 4 6
EMERGENCY 1 2 3 4
F F
N NORMAL N
R 2 5 R
S23
G72 S25
(DT-4) 1 2 3 4 (090-16) 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 G73 (DT-4)
R22
J02 (J-20) (BLACK)
FB1
RELAY FOR
3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 STARTER CUT
1 2 3 5 6
(TRAVEL N)
FUSE BOX
R40 R41
RELAY FOR
TRAVEL F 10 RELAY FOR
EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY
TRAVEL N 20 (TRAVEL N)
(TRAVEL F/R) 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 3 5 6
TRAVEL F/R 28
S0L.
TRAVEL R 30
TRAVEL 38
NEUTRAL S0L.
1
C03 (DRC-40) TRAVEL F/R SOL
2
V08 (DT-2) 7
8
1 A05 (SWP-14)
TRAVEL NEUTRAL SOL J06 (J-20) 3 4 5
2
(PINK)
V06 (DT-2)
3 5 10
J04 (J-20)
(GREEN)
A65
A02
4
(X-4)
A64
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-583

Failure code [DW44KB] – Short-circuiting of travel F/R solenoid TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DW44KB] – Short-circuiting of travel F/R so-

lenoid
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Short-circuiting in travel F/R solenoid (in governor – pump
E20 E202 DW44KB phenomenon controller system)
Failure content • Abnormal current flow to the travel F/R solenoid circuit, when power was supplied to the circuit.
• Power supply to the travel F/R solenoid circuit is switched OFF.

Response from
• Even after the failure cause disappears of itself, the solenoid circuit does not return to normal, unless the engine
controller
starting switch is once turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on • Machine will not reverse.
machine
Relative • Operation of the travel F/R solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function. (Code No. 024:
information Solenoid 2)
Swing and parking brake
1
Assembled-type relay R40 the troubleshooting.
2 defective
R40 (male) Resistance value
harness Between wiring harness from C03 (female) (28) to R40 (female)
3
(Contact with grounding (6) and grounding Resistance
Between wiring harness from R40 (female) (3) to A05 to V08 value
(female) (1) and grounding.
20-584 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DW44KB] – Short-circuiting of travel F/R solenoid
Electrical circuit for travel F/R solenoid in governor pump controller
EMERGENCY
TRAVEL
SWITCH EMERGENCY
FNR SWITCH
FNR SWITCH
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 3 4 6
EMERGENCY 1 2 3 4
F F
N NORMAL N
R 2 5 R
S23
G72 S25
(DT-4) 1 2 3 4 (090-16) 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 G73 (DT-4)
R22
J02 (J-20) (BLACK)
FB1
RELAY FOR
3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 STARTER CUT
1 2 3 5 6
(TRAVEL N)
FUSE BOX
R40 R41
RELAY FOR
EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY
(TRAVEL F/R) 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 3 5 6
TRAVEL F/R 28
S0L.
TRAVEL R 30
TRAVEL 38
NEUTRAL S0L.
1
2
V08 (DT-2) 7
8
1 A05 (SWP-14)
2
(PINK)
V06 (DT-2)
3 5 10
J04 (J-20)
(GREEN)
A65
A02
4
(X-4)
A64
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-585

Failure code [DW45KA] – Disconnection in swing parking brake solenoid TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DW45KA] – Disconnection in swing parking

brake solenoid
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Disconnection in swing and parking brake solenoid
Failure content • No current flows to the swing parking brake solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Phenomenon
occurring on • The machine's upper structure does not swing.
machine
• Operation of the swing parking brake solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function. (Code No.
023: Solenoid 1)
• If there is abnormality neither with the solenoid nor with wiring harnesses, the upper structure can swing by moving
the emergency swing brake release switch to the FREE position. (In this case, however, the parking brake does not
Relative
work, when stopping the machine)
information
• While in troubleshooting, hold both the swing lock switch and the emergency swing release switch in the OFF posi-
tion.
Swing parking brake troubleshooting.
solenoid defective
1
(Internal disconnec- V03 (male) Resistance value
tion)
Between (1) and (2) 27 – 30 Ω at 20°C
Swing lock switch troubleshooting.
defective X05 (female) Swing lock switch Resistance value
2
(Internal disconnec-
tion) OFF Below 1 Ω

Between (3) and (4)
LOCK Above 1 MΩ
troubleshooting.
Resistance
Wiring harness between C03 (female) (37) and D05 (female) (2) Below 1 Ω
Disconnection of value
wiring harness
Between wiring harness from D05 (female) (1) to J10 to H15 to X05 Resistance
3 (Disconnection or Below 1 Ω
(female) (3) value
defective contact with
connector) Between wiring harness from X05 (female) (4) to H15 to A05 to V03 Resistance
Below 1 Ω
(female) (1) value
Resistance
value
Short-circuiting of • Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the ON position during the
Wiring harness troubleshooting.
4
(Contact with 24V cir- Between wiring harness C03 (female) (37) and D05 (female) (2) and
grounding
troubleshooting.
Governor – pump
5 C03 (female) Disconnect D05 and connect Resistance value
pins (1) and (2) of the female
Between (37) and grounding side. 20 – 60 Ω
20-586 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DW45KA] – Disconnection in swing parking brake solenoid
Electrical circuit diagram for swing and parking brake solenoid in governor
– Pump controller
Emergency Swing Park Brake Release Swing Lock Switch
S22
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
EMERGENCY OFF
NORMAL ON
1 2 3 4
X05
D05
J10
8 9 10 11 2 1 11 12 13 19 20 8 10
S25
H15
FB1 C02 A05 V03

1 2 EMERGENCY SWING 5 1
SOL
38 SWING LOCK SWITCH 2
C03 SWING LOCK1
1 VB (CONTROLLER PWR)
11 VB (CONTROLLER PWR)
14 KEY_SIG
24 KEY_SIG
37 SWING BRAKE SOL.
P02
17 SWING LOCK
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-587

Failure code [DW4MKA] – Disconnection in creep solenoid TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DW4MKA] – Disconnection in creep sole-

noid
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Disconnection in creep solenoid
E20 E208 DW4MKA phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • No current flows to the creep solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Phenomenon
occurring on • The travel speed does not turn to Creep.
machine
• Operation of the creep solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function. (Code No. 023:
Relative Solenoid 1)
(For how to turn power ON or OFF, refer to the troubleshooting under Service Code [E208].)
Creep solenoid defective
1
(Internal disconnection) V07 (male) Resistance value
Between (1) and (2) 27 – 30 Ω at 20°C
2 Below 1 Ω
Resistance
value
3 harness Between wiring harness from C03 (female) (17) to A05 to V07
(Contact with 24 V circuit) (female) (1), or between wiring harness C03 (female) (17) and Voltage Below 1 V
grounding
20-588 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DW4MKA] – Disconnection in creep solenoid
Electrical circuit diagram for creep solenoid in governor pump controller
Governor pump
controller
A05 V07 Creep
CO3 (DRC - 40) (SWP - 14) (D - 2) solenoid valve
Creep SOL 17 9 1
2
(ON) (OFF)
A65
CAB REVOLVING FRAME
BB
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-589

Failure code [DW4MKB] – Short-circuiting in creep solenoid TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DW4MKB] – Short-circuiting in creep sole-

noid
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Short-circuit in creep solenoid
E20 E207 DW4MKB phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • Abnormal current flow to the creep solenoid, when power was supplied to the circuit.
• Power supply to the creep solenoid circuit is switched OFF.

Response from
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on • The travel speed does not turn to Creep.
machine
Relative • Operation of the creep solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function. (Code No. 023:
information Solenoid 1)
Creep solenoid defective
1 (Internal short-circuiting or V07 (male) Resistance value
2
(female) (1). value
shooting.
Governor – pump C03 Travel speed Voltage
3
Lo Below 1 V
Hi + Travel operation 20 – 30 V
20-590 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DW4MKB] – Short-circuiting in creep solenoid
Electrical circuit diagram for creep solenoid in governor pump controller
Governor pump
controller
A05 V07 Creep
CO3 (DRC - 40) (SWP - 14) (D - 2) solenoid valve
Creep SOL 17 9 1
2
(ON) (OFF)
A65
CAB REVOLVING FRAME
AB
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-591

Failure code [DW91KA] – Disconnection in travel neutral solenoid TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DW91KA] – Disconnection in travel neutral

solenoid
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Disconnection in travel neutral solenoid
Failure content • No current flows to the travel neutral solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Phenomenon
occurring on • Machine will not travel.
machine
• Operation of the travel neutral solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function. (Code No. 024: So-
Relative lenoid 2)
Travel neutral the troubleshooting.
1 solenoid defective
Between (1) and (2) 27 – 30 Ω at 20°C
Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the OFF position during the
troubleshooting.
harness Between wiring harness from C03 (female) (38) to R41 to A05 to Resistance
2 Below 1 Ω
(Disconnection or defective V06 (female) (1) value
Resistance
value
3 harness
(Contact with 24 V circuit) Between wiring harness from C03 (female) (38) to R41 to A05 to
Voltage Below 1 V
V06 (female) (1), or between wiring harness C03 (female) (38)
Governor – pump
4
20-592 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DW91KA] – Disconnection in travel neutral solenoid
Electrical circuit diagram for travel neutral solenoid in governor – Pump

controller
EMERGENCY
TRAVEL
SWITCH EMERGENCY
FNR SWITCH
FNR SWITCH
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 3 4 6
EMERGENCY 1 2 3 4
F F
N NORMAL N
R 2 5 R
S23
G72 S25
(DT-4) 1 2 3 4 (090-16) 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 G73 (DT-4)
R22
J02 (J-20) (BLACK)
FB1
RELAY FOR
3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 STARTER CUT
1 2 3 5 6
(TRAVEL N)
FUSE BOX
R40 R41
RELAY FOR
EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY
(TRAVEL F/R) 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 3 5 6
TRAVEL F/R 28
S0L.
TRAVEL R 30
TRAVEL 38
NEUTRAL S0L.
1
2
V08 (DT-2) 7
8
1 A05 (SWP-14)
2
(PINK)
V06 (DT-2)
3 5 10
J04 (J-20)
(GREEN)
A65
A02
4
(X-4)
A64
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-593

Failure code [DW91KB] – Short-circuiting in travel neutral solenoid TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DW91KB] – Short-circuiting in travel neutral

solenoid
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Short-circuiting in travel neutral solenoid
E20 E201 DW91KB phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • Abnormal current flow to the travel neutral solenoid circuit, when power was supplied to the circuit.
• Power supply to the travel neutral solenoid circuit is switched OFF.

Response from
• Even if the failure cause disappears of itself, the solenoid circuit does not return to normal, unless the engine start-
controller
ing switch is once turned OFF.
Phenomenon
occurring on • Machine will not drive.
machine
Relative • Operation of the travel neutral solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function. (Code No. 024: So-
information lenoid 2)
Travel neutral solenoid
defective V06 (male) Resistance value
1
Assembled-type relay R41 the troubleshooting.
2 defective
R41 (male) Resistance value
harness Between wiring harness from C03 (female) (38) to R41 (female)
3
(Contact with grounding (6) and grounding. Resistance
Between wiring harness from R41 (female) (3) to A05 to V06 value
(female) (1) and grounding.
20-594 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DW91KB] – Short-circuiting in travel neutral solenoid
Electrical circuit for travel neutral solenoid in governor pump controller

EMERGENCY
TRAVEL
SWITCH EMERGENCY
FNR SWITCH
FNR SWITCH
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 3 4 6
EMERGENCY 1 2 3 4
F F
N NORMAL N
R 2 5 R
S23
G72 S25
(DT-4) 1 2 3 4 (090-16) 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 G73 (DT-4)
R22
J02 (J-20) (BLACK)
FB1
RELAY FOR
3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 STARTER CUT
1 2 3 5 6
(TRAVEL N)
FUSE BOX
R40 R41
RELAY FOR
EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY
(TRAVEL F/R) 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 3 5 6
TRAVEL F/R 28
S0L.
TRAVEL R 30
TRAVEL 38
NEUTRAL S0L.
1
2
V08 (DT-2) 7
8
1 A05 (SWP-14)
2
(PINK)
V06 (DT-2)
3 5 10
J04 (J-20)
(GREEN)
A65
A02
4
(X-4)
A64
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-595

Failure code [DWK0KA] – Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DWK0KA] – Disconnection in 2-stage relief

solenoid
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid
— E215 DWK0KA phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • No current flows to the 2-stage relief solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Phenomenon
occurring on • The one-touch power max. switch does not work.
machine
• Operation of the 2-stage relief solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function.
Relative (Code No. 023: Solenoid 1)
(For how to turn power ON or OFF, refer to the troubleshooting under Service Code [E215].)
2-stage relief solenoid the troubleshooting.
1 defective V02 (male) Resistance value
Between (1) and (2) 27 – 30 Ω at 20°C
2 Below 1 Ω
Resistance
value
3 harness
(Contact with 24 V circuit) Between wiring harness from C03 (female) (8) to A05 to V06
Voltage Below 1 V
(female) (1).
Governor – pump
4
20-596 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DWK0KA] – Disconnection in 2-stage relief solenoid
Electrical circuit diagram for 2-stage relief solenoid in governor – Pump

controller
Governor pump
controller
A05 V02 2 - stage relief
C03 (DRC - 40) (SWP - 14) (DT - 2) solenoid valve
2 - stage relief SOL 8 2 1

2
(ON) (0FF)
A65
REVOLVING FRAME
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-597

Failure code [DWK0KB] – Short-circuiting in 2-stage relief solenoid TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DWK0KB] – Short-circuiting in 2-stage relief

solenoid
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Short-circuiting in 2-stage relief solenoid
• — • E205 • DWK0KB phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • Abnormal current flow to the 2-stage relief solenoid circuit, when power was supplied to the circuit.
• Power supply to the 2-stage relief solenoid circuit is switched OFF.

Response from
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on • The one-touch power max. switch does not work.
machine
Relative • Operation of the 2-stage relief solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function.
information (Code No. 023: Solenoid 1)
2-stage relief solenoid
defective V02 (male) Resistance value
1
2
(female) (1). value
Governor – pump C03 Working mode Voltage
3
Other than L mode Below 1 V
L mode 20 – 30 V
20-598 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DWK0KB] – Short-circuiting in 2-stage relief solenoid
Electric circuit diagram for 2-stage relief solenoid in governor – Pump con-
troller
Governor pump
controller
A05 V02 2 - stage relief
C03 (DRC - 40) (SWP - 14) (DT - 2) solenoid valve
2 - stage relief SOL 8 2 1

2
(ON) (0FF)
A65
REVOLVING FRAME
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-599

Failure code [DWK2KA] – Disconnection in 2-stage back pressure solenoid TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DWK2KA] – Disconnection in 2-stage back

pressure solenoid
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Disconnection in 2-stage back pressure solenoid
— E237 DWK2KA phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • No current flows to the 2-stage back pressure solenoid circuit, when power is supplied to the circuit.
Phenomenon
occurring on • Travel may be uncomfortable due to excessive noise from travel motor.
machine
• Operation of the 2-stage back pressure solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function. (Code No.
024: Solenoid 2)
Relative
information
(Operation of the 2 stage back pressure solenoid [ON or OFF] can be checked in the monitoring function [code 024:
solenoid 2]).
2-stage back pressure the troubleshooting.
1 solenoid defective V15 (male) Resistance value
Between (1) and (2) 27 – 30 Ω at 20°C
2 Below 1 Ω
Resistance
value
3 harness Between wiring harness from C03 (female) (36) to A05 to V15
(Contact with 24 V circuit) (female) (1), or between wiring harness C03 (female) (36) and Voltage Below 1 V
grounding
Governor – pump
4
20-600 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DWK2KA] – Disconnection in 2-stage back pressure solenoid
Electrical circuit diagram for 2-stage back pressure solenoid in governor –

Pump controller
Governor pump
controller
A05 V15 2-Stage back pressure
CO3 (DRC - 40) (SWP - 14) (DT - 2) solenoid valve
2-stage back press SOL 36 6 1
2
(ON) (OFF)
A65
CAB REVOLVING FRAME
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-601

Failure code [DWK2KB] – Short circuiting in 2-stage back pressure solenoid TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DWK2KB] – Short circuiting in 2-stage back

pressure solenoid
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Short circuit of 2-stage back pressure solenoid
— E236 DWK2KB phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • Abnormal current flew to the 2-stage relief solenoid circuit, when power was supplied to the circuit.
• Power supply to the 2-stage relief solenoid circuit is switched OFF.

Response from
controller
Phenomenon
occurring on • Travel may be uncomfortable due to excessive noise from travel motor.
machine
Relative • Operation of the 2-stage back pressure solenoid (ON or OFF) can be checked in the monitoring function.
information (Code No. 024: Solenoid 2)
2-stage back pressure
1
2
(female) (1). value
Governor – pump C03 Working mode Voltage
3
Other than L mode Below 1 V
L mode 20 – 30 V
20-602 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DWK2KB] – Short circuiting in 2-stage back pressure solenoid
Electrical circuit diagram for 2-stage back pressure solenoid in governor –

Pump controller
Governor pump
controller
A05 V15 2-Stage back pressure
CO3 (DRC - 40) (SWP - 14) (DT - 2) solenoid valve
2-stage back press SOL 36 6 1
2
(ON) (OFF)
A65
CAB REVOLVING FRAME
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-603

Failure code [DXA0KA] – Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid system TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DXA0KA] – Disconnection in PC-EPC sole-

noid system
User Code Failure Code Failure Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid

E02 DXA0KA phenomenon (in pump controller system)
Failure content • No current flows to the PC-EPC solenoid circuit.
controller • When the failure cause disappears of itself, the current returns to normal.
Phenomenon
occurring on • As load to the pump increases, the engine rotation drops sharply and sometimes the engine stalls.
machine
• Output to PC-EPC solenoid (ampere) can be confirmed in the monitor function.

(Code No. 01300: PC-EPC solenoid current)
Relative
• If there is no abnormality with the solenoid or any of the wiring harnesses, the machine can be operated in a work-
information
ing mode equivalent to E mode by turning the emergency driving switch ON. (At that time the monitor panel contin-
ues to display Failure Code No. [DXA0KA], but this is not abnormal)
• PC-EPC solenoid the troubleshooting.
1 defective
• (Internal short-circuiting)
Between (1) and (2) 7 – 14 Ω
S28 Switch Resistance value

• Emergency pump driv-
2 ing switch defective OFF Below 1 Ω
Between (2) and (3)
• (Internal disconnection) ON Above 1 MΩ
OFF Below 1 Ω
Between (5) and (6)
ON Above 1 MΩ
Resistance
Wiring harness between C03 (female) (16) and S28 (3) Below 1 Ω
• Disconnection of wiring value
harness
Resistance
3 • (Disconnection or defec- Wiring harness between S28 (2) and V21 (female) (1) Below 1 Ω
value
tive contact with connec-
tor) Resistance
Wiring harness between C03 (female) (3), (13), (23) and S28 (6) Below 1 Ω
value
Resistance
Wiring harness between S28 (5) and V21 (female) (2) Below 1 Ω
value
• Short-circuiting of wiring
harness Between wiring harness C03 (female) (16) and S28 (3) and
4 Voltage Below 1 V
• (Contact with 24 V cir- grounding
cuit)
Between wiring harness S28 (2) and V21 (female) (1) and
Voltage Below 1 V
grounding
• Pump controller defec-
5
tive C03 (female) Resistance value
Between (16) and (3), (13), (23). 7 – 14 Ω
20-604 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DXA0KA] – Disconnection in PC-EPC solenoid system
Electrical circuit diagram for PC-EPC solenoid in pump controller
FB1
10A 1 Fuse box

Emergency pump
drive switch
1 2 3 4 5 6 S21
K19 Emergency
Resistor (M - 2)
S28
Normal
1 (090 - 16)
2 1
(30 )
2
Pump 3
controller
4
CAB
C03 (DRC - 40) 5
Solenoid GND 3 6
Solenoid GND 13 J04

(J - 20)
PC - EPC 16
Solenoid GND 23
4
A04 3
(SWP - 14)
1 2 (Green)
A02
(X - 4)
4
HYD PUMP
PC - EPC V21
solenoid valve (DT - 12)
1
2 A64
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-605

Failure code [DXE0KA] – Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid system TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DXE0KA] – Disconnection in LS-EPC sole-

noid system
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid
— E223 DXE0KA phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • No current flows to the LS-EPC solenoid circuit.
Phenomenon
• The travel speed is slow at Lo.
occurring on
• In L mode, speeds of the work equipment and swing are too fast.
machine
Relative • Output to LS-EPC solenoid (ampere) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
information (Code No. 015: LS-EPC solenoid current)
LS-EPC solenoid defective
1
(Internal short-circuiting) V22 (male) Resistance value
Between (1) and (2) 7 – 14 Ω
harness Between wiring harness C03 (female) (6) and V22 (female) (1) Resistance
2 Below 1 Ω
(Disconnection or defective and grounding value
Wiring harness between C03 (female) (3) (13) (23) and V22 Resistance
Below 1 Ω
(female) (2) value
3 harness
(Contact with 24 V circuit) Between wiring harness C03 (female) (6) and V22 (female) (1)
Voltage Below 1 V
and grounding
Governor – pump
4
Between (6) and (3) (13) (23) 7 – 14 Ω
20-606 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DXE0KA] – Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid system
Electrical circuit diagram for LS-EPC solenoid in governor – Pump control-

ler
Governor pump
controller
C03 (DRC - 40)

LS - EPC
Solenoid GND 3 A04 (SWP - 12) E22 (DT - 12) V22 (DT - 2) solenoid
LS - EPC 6 4 5 5 1
Solenoid GND 13 5 6 6 2
Solenoid GND 23
CAB HYDRAULIC PUMP
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-607

Failure code [DXE0KB] – Short-circuiting in LS-EPC solenoid TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DXE0KB] – Short-circuiting in LS-EPC sole-

noid
User Code Service Code Failure Code Failure Disconnection in LS-EPC solenoid
— E222 DXE0KB phenomenon (in governor – pump controller system)
Failure content • Abnormal current flow to the LS-EPC solenoid circuit.
• The controller reduces the output to the LS-EPC solenoid circuit to 0.

Response from
• Even if the failure cause disappears, the current does not return to normal, unless the engine starting switch is once
controller
turned OFF.
Phenomenon
• The travel speed is slow at Lo.
occurring on
• In L mode, speeds of the work equipment and swing are too fast.
machine
Relative • Output to LS-EPC solenoid (ampere) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
information (Code No. 015: LS-EPC solenoid current)
LS-EPC solenoid defective
1 (Internal short-circuiting or V22 (male) Resistance value
grounding fault) Between (1) and (2) 7 – 14 Ω
2
(Contact with grounding Between wiring harness C03 (female) (6) and V22 (female) (1) Resistance
and grounding value
3
Between (6) and (3) (13) (23) 7 – 14 Ω
20-608 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DXE0KB] – Short-circuiting in LS-EPC solenoid
Electrical circuit diagram for LS-EPC solenoid in governor – Pump control-

ler
Governor pump
controller
C03 (DRC - 40)

LS - EPC
Solenoid GND 3 A04 (SWP - 12) E22 (DT - 12) V22 (DT - 2) solenoid
LS - EPC 6 4 5 5 1
Solenoid GND 13 5 6 6 2
Solenoid GND 23
CAB HYDRAULIC PUMP
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-609

Failure code [DXE4KA] – Service current EPC1 discon TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DXE4KA] – Service current EPC1 discon
User code Failure code Service current EPC1 solenoid disconnection

Trouble
— DXE4KA (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When service EPC1 solenoid was driven, disconnection was detected in circuit.
trouble
Action of • None in particular (Since no current flows, solenoid does not operate).
Problem that
appears on • Attachment does not operate.
machine
• Drive current of service EPC1 solenoid can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 01701 service solenoid current)
information
• Method of reproducing failure code: Turn starting switch ON + Set in attachment mode (ATT).
Defective service EPC solenoid
1
(Internal disconnection) V23 (male) Resistance
Between (1) – (2) 7 – 14 Ω
Possible causes turning starting switch ON.
and standard Disconnection in wiring harness
value in normal Wiring harness between C03 (female) (5) – V23 Resist-
state (female) (1) ance
Wiring harness between C03 (female) (3), (13), Resist-
Max. 1 Ω
(23) – V23 (female) (2) ance
C03 (female) Resistance
Between (5) – (3), (13), (23) 7 – 14 Ω
20-610 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DXE4KA] – Service current EPC1 discon
Circuit diagram of service EPC solenoids
V23
(X-2)
A03
(DT-12) 1 Service (1st ATT
2 EPC 1 LH EPC)
5
6 V24
9 (X-2)
10 1 Service (1st ATT
2 EPC 2 RH EPC)
V25
(X-2)
A04
(SWP-14) 1 Service (2nd ATT
2 EPC 3 LH EPC)
7
8 V26
13 (X-2)
14 1 Service (2nd ATT
2 EPC 4 RH EPC)
Revo Frame
Controller
C03 (DRC-40)
3 Sol. Common GND
5 1st Services EPC (Left)
13 Sol. Common GND
15 1st Services EPC (Right)
23 Sol. Common GND
25 2nd Services EPC (Left)
35 2nd Services EPC (Right)
Op Cab
KSP00066
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-611

Failure code [DXE4KB] – Service current EPC1 short TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DXE4KB] – Service current EPC1 short
User code Failure code Service current EPC1 solenoid short

Trouble
— DXE4KB (Pump controller system)
Contents of
• When service EPC1 solenoid was driven, short circuit was detected in circuit.
trouble
Action of • Turns output to service EPC1 solenoid OFF.

Problem that
machine
• Drive current of service EPC solenoid can be checked with monitoring function.
Related
(Code: 01701 service EPC solenoid current)
information
1 (Internal short circuit or ground V23 (male) Resistance
fault) Between (1) – (2) 7 – 14 Ω

Possible causes
and standard
value in normal 3
state (Short circuit with GND circuit) Wiring harness between C03 (female) (95) – V91 Resist- Min.
4 Defective pump controller C02 (female) Resistance
Between (3) – (5), (13), (23) 7 – 14 Ω
20-612 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DXE4KB] – Service current EPC1 short
V23
(X-2)
A03
2 EPC 1 LH EPC)
5
6 V24
9 (X-2)
2 EPC 2 RH EPC)
V25
(X-2)
A04
2 EPC 3 LH EPC)
7
8 V26
13 (X-2)
2 EPC 4 RH EPC)
Revo Frame
Controller
C03 (DRC-40)
3 Sol. Common GND
13 Sol. Common GND
23 Sol. Common GND
Op Cab
KSP00066
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-613

Failure code [DXE7KA] – Service current EPC2 disco TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DXE7KA] – Service current EPC2 disco

Trouble
Contents of
trouble
Problem that
machine
Related
information
1
Between (1) – (2) 7 – 14 Ω
Max. 1 Ω
(23) – V24 (female) (2) ance
Between (15) – (3), (13), (23) 7 – 14 Ω
20-614 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DXE7KA] – Service current EPC2 disco
V23
(X-2)
A03
2 EPC 1 LH EPC)
5
6 V24
9 (X-2)
2 EPC 2 RH EPC)
V25
(X-2)
A04
2 EPC 3 LH EPC)
7
8 V26
13 (X-2)
2 EPC 4 RH EPC)
Revo Frame
Controller
C03 (DRC-40)
3 Sol. Common GND
13 Sol. Common GND
23 Sol. Common GND
Op Cab
KSP00066
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-615


Trouble
Contents of
trouble

Problem that
machine
Related
information
fault) Between (1) – (2) 7 – 14 Ω

Possible causes
and standard
value in normal 3
Between (15) – (3), (13), (20) 7 – 14 Ω
20-616 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

V23
(X-2)
A03
2 EPC 1 LH EPC)
5
6 V24
9 (X-2)
2 EPC 2 RH EPC)
V25
(X-2)
A04
2 EPC 3 LH EPC)
7
8 V26
13 (X-2)
2 EPC 4 RH EPC)
Revo Frame
Controller
C03 (DRC-40)
3 Sol. Common GND
13 Sol. Common GND
23 Sol. Common GND
Op Cab
KSP00066
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-617


Trouble
Contents of
trouble
Problem that
machine
Related
information
1
Between (1) – (2) 7 – 14 Ω
Max. 1 Ω
(23) – V25 (female) (2) ance
Between (25) – (3), (13), (23) 7 – 14 Ω
20-618 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

V23
(X-2)
A03
2 EPC 1 LH EPC)
5
6 V24
9 (X-2)
2 EPC 2 RH EPC)
V25
(X-2)
A04
2 EPC 3 LH EPC)
7
8 V26
13 (X-2)
2 EPC 4 RH EPC)
Revo Frame
Controller
C03 (DRC-40)
3 Sol. Common GND
13 Sol. Common GND
23 Sol. Common GND
Op Cab
KSP00066
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-619


Trouble
Contents of
trouble

Problem that
machine
Related
information
fault) Between (1) – (2) 7 – 14 Ω

Possible causes
and standard
value in normal 3
Between (25) – (3), (13), (23) 7 – 14 Ω
20-620 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

V23
(X-2)
A03
2 EPC 1 LH EPC)
5
6 V24
9 (X-2)
2 EPC 2 RH EPC)
V25
(X-2)
A04
2 EPC 3 LH EPC)
7
8 V26
13 (X-2)
2 EPC 4 RH EPC)
Revo Frame
Controller
C03 (DRC-40)
3 Sol. Common GND
13 Sol. Common GND
23 Sol. Common GND
Op Cab
KSP00066
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-621


Trouble
Contents of
trouble
Problem that
machine
Related
information
1
Between (1) – (2) 7 – 14 Ω
Max. 1 Ω
(23) – V26 (female) (2) ance
Between (35) – (3), (13), (23) 7 – 14 Ω
20-622 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

V23
(X-2)
A03
2 EPC 1 LH EPC)
5
6 V24
9 (X-2)
2 EPC 2 RH EPC)
V25
(X-2)
A04
2 EPC 3 LH EPC)
7
8 V26
13 (X-2)
2 EPC 4 RH EPC)
Revo Frame
Controller
C03 (DRC-40)
3 Sol. Common GND
13 Sol. Common GND
23 Sol. Common GND
Op Cab
KSP00066
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-623


Trouble
Contents of
trouble

Problem that
machine
Related
information
fault) Between (1) – (2) 7 – 14 Ω

Possible causes
and standard
value in normal 3
Between (35) – (3), (13), (23) 7 – 14 Ω
20-624 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

V23
(X-2)
A03
2 EPC 1 LH EPC)
5
6 V24
9 (X-2)
2 EPC 2 RH EPC)
V25
(X-2)
A04
2 EPC 3 LH EPC)
7
8 V26
13 (X-2)
2 EPC 4 RH EPC)
Revo Frame
Controller
C03 (DRC-40)
3 Sol. Common GND
13 Sol. Common GND
23 Sol. Common GND
Op Cab
KSP00066
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-625

Failure code [DY20KA] – Wiper working abnormality TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DY20KA] – Wiper working abnormality
Action code Failure code Wiper working abnormality

Trouble
— DY20KA (Machine monitor system)
Contents of
• When windshield wiper works, W signal of working ends is not input.
trouble
Action of
• Turns working output to wiper motor OFF.
monitor panel
Problem that
appears on • Windshield wiper does not operate.
machine
Related • Input of W signal in wiper working area (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function.
information (Code 04502: Monitor Input 3)
Defective wiper motor W04 (female) Wiper blade Resistance

1
(Internal disconnection) Operating range top Max. 1 Ω
Between (6) – (5) Other than operating
Min. 1 MΩ
range top
value in normal Wiring harness between P01 (female) (5) – W04 Resist-
state (male) (6) ance
Wiring harness between W04 (male) (5) – chassis Resist-
Max. 1 Ω
ground ance
P01 Wiper blade Voltage

Operating range top Max. 1 V
ground Other than operating
20 – 30 V
range top
20-626 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DY20KA] – Wiper working abnormality
Circuit diagram related to wiper motor of machine monitor
A64
J04 (Green)
(J-20)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-627

Failure code [DY20MA] – Wiper parking abnormality TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DY20MA] – Wiper parking abnormality
Action code Failure code Wiper parking abnormality

Trouble
— DY20MA (Machine monitor system)
Contents of
• When windshield wiper parks, P signal of storage area is not input.
trouble
Action of
• Turns parking output to wiper motor OFF.
monitor panel
Problem that
appears on • Windshield wiper does not park.
machine
Related • Input of P signal in wiper parking area (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function.
Defective wiper motor W04 (female) Wiper blade Resistance
1
Storage area Max. 1 Ω
Between (4) – (5)
Working area Min. 1 MΩ
value in normal Wiring harness between P01 (female) (12) – W04 Resist-
state (male) (4) ance
Wiring harness between W04 (female) (5) – chas- Resist-
Max. 1 Ω
sis ground ance
3 Defective machine monitor P01 Wiper blade Voltage
Between (12) – chas- Storage area Max. 1 V

sis ground Working area 20 – 30 V
20-628 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DY20MA] – Wiper parking abnormality
A64
J04 (Green)
(J-20)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-629

Failure code [DY2CKB] – Washer drive S/C TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DY2CKB] – Washer drive S/C
Action code Failure code Window washer drive system short

Trouble
— DY2CKB (Machine monitor system)
Contents of
• When washer drive circuit was connected to GND (when output was turned ON), abnormal current flowed.
trouble
Action of moni-
• Turns output to washer motor circuit OFF.
tor panel
Problem that
appears on • Window washer operation stops.
machine
Related
information
Defective washer motor
1
(Internal short circuit) A50 (male) Resistance
Between (1) – (2) 5 – 20 Ω
Possible causes out troubleshooting.
and standard Hot short (Short circuit with 24V
2 Wiring harnesses between P01 (female) (3) – J08
value in normal circuit) in wiring harness
state – A50 (female) (2), – D01 (female) (8) and chas- Voltage Max. 1 V
sis ground
3 Defective machine monitor P01 Washer switch Voltage
Between (3) – chassis OFF 20 – 30 V

ground ON Max. 1 V
20-630 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DY2CKB] – Washer drive S/C
Circuit diagram related to window washer motor of machine monitor
(Black)
(Black)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-631

Failure code [DY2DKB] – Wiper drive (for) S/C TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DY2DKB] – Wiper drive (for) S/C
Action code Failure code Wiper motor drive forward system short
Trouble
— DY2DKB (Machine monitor system)
Contents of
• Abnormal current flowed at output to wiper motor drive forward circuit.
trouble
Action of moni-
• Turns output to wiper motor drive forward circuit OFF.
tor panel
Problem that
machine
Related
information
Defective wiper motor
1 (Internal short circuit or ground W04 (female) Continuity/Resistance
fault) Between (3) – (1) There is continuity
value in normal 2
(Short circuit with GND circuit) Wiring harness between P01 (female) (9) – W04 Resist- Min.
state
(male) (3) and chassis ground ance 1 MΩ
P01 Wiper switch Voltage

OFF Max. 3 V
ground Max. 3 V ⇔ 20 – 30 V
ON
(Constant cycle)
20-632 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DY2DKB] – Wiper drive (for) S/C
A64
J04 (Green)
(J-20)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-633

Failure code [DY2EKB] – Wiper drive (rev) S/C TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Failure code [DY2EKB] – Wiper drive (rev) S/C
Action code Failure code Wiper motor drive reverse system short
Trouble
— DY2EKB (Machine monitor system)
Contents of
• Abnormal current flowed at output to wiper motor drive reverse circuit.
trouble
Action of
• Turns output to wiper motor drive reverse circuit OFF.
monitor panel
Problem that
machine
Related
information
1 (Internal short circuit or ground W04 (female) Continuity/Resistance
fault) Between (1) – (3) There is continuity
value in normal 2
state

OFF Max. 3 V
Between (10) – chas-
sis ground Max. 3 V ⇔ 20 – 30 V
ON
(Constant cycle)
20-634 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Failure code [DY2EKB] – Wiper drive (rev) S/C
A64
J04 (Green)
(J-20)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-635

Failure code [DY2EKB] – Wiper drive (rev) S/C TESTING AND ADJUSTING
20-636 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Troubleshooting of electrical system (E-Mode)

E-1 – Engine does not start (engine does not rotate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-705
E-5 – Auto-decelerator does not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-709
E-6 – Auto engine warm-up device does not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-711
E-7 – Preheater does not operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-712
E-8 – All work equipment, swing and travel do not move. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-714
E-9 – One-touch power max switch does not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-716
E-10 – No display in monitor panel at all . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-717
E-11 – Part of display on monitor panel is missing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-718
E-12 – Monitor panel displays contents irrelevant to the model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-718
E-13 – Fuel level monitor red lamp lights up while engine is running. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-719
E-14 – Engine coolant temperature gauge does not indicate normally. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-720
E-15 – Hydraulic oil temperature gauge does not display correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-722
E-16 – Fuel gauge does not display correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-723
E-17 – Swing lock monitor does not display correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-724
E-18 – When the monitor switch is operated, no display appears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-726
E-19 – Windshield wiper and window washer do not operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-728
E-20 – Alarm buzzer cannot be stopped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-730
E-21 – "Boom/stabiliser RAISE" is not correctly displayed in monitor function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-731
E-22 – "Boom/stabiliser LOWER" is not correctly displayed in monitor function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-732
E-23 – "Arm DIGGING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-733
E-24 – "Arm DUMPING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-734
E-25 – "Bucket DIGGING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-735
E-26 – "Bucket DUMPING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-736
E-27 – "SWING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-738
E-28 – "TRAVEL" is not correctly displayed in monitor function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-740
E-29 – "2 piece boom" is not correctly displayed in monitor function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-742
E-30 – Air conditioner does not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-744
E-31 – Travel reverse alarm does not sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-746
E-32 – KOMTRAX system does not operate normally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-748
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-701

Troubleshooting of electrical system (E-Mode) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
20-702 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100


• The following information are edited and contained in the
"Information Contained in Troubleshooting Table". You are
required to proceed with troubleshooting after fully grasping
the contents.
Failure
Phenomena occurring on machine
information
Relative
Information on occurred failures and troubleshooting
information
<Contents>
• The standard values in normal by which to judge "good" or "no good" about presumed causes.
• References for making judgement of "good" or "no good"
1
<Phenomena of wiring harness fault>
• Failure due to disconnection
Defective contact with connector or disconnection of wiring harness has occurred.
• Grounding fault
A wiring harness that is not originally connected with a grounding circuit is in contact with it.
2 • Failure due to short-circuiting
A wiring harness that is not originally connected with a power source circuit (24 V) is in contact
with it.
Cause for presumed <Points to remember in troubleshooting>

failure
(The attached No. for 1. Connector denotation method and handling of T-adapters
3 Insert or connect T-adapters in the following manner, unless specifically otherwise instructed.
filing and reference
purpose only. It does not • If there is no indication of (male) or (female) in the connector No., pull off a connector and insert
stand for any priority) a T-adapter into both sides of male and female.
• If there is an indication of (male) and (female) in the connection No., pull off a connector and in-
sert a T-adapter into only one side of (male) or (female).
2. Description sequence of pin No. and handling of circuit tester leads
4 Connect the positive lead (+) and negative lead (–) for troubleshooting in the following manner
unless specifically otherwise instructed.
• Connect the positive lead (+) to a pin No. marked at the front or wiring harness.
• Connect the negative lead (–) to a pin No. marked at the rear or wiring harness.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-703

Information contained in troubleshooting table TESTING AND ADJUSTING
20-704 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-1 – Engine does not start (engine does not rotate)
E-1 – Engine does not start (engine does not rotate)
Failure
• The engine does not start (the engine does not rotate).
information
• The following two engine start locking mechanisms are provided in the engine starting circuit.
Relative
information 1. Engine start locking by means of password in the monitor panel (*)
2. Engine start locking by means of safety lock lever
Shortage in battery Battery voltage Battery electrolyte specific gravity

1
capacity Above 24 V Above 1.26
When a fuse or fusible link is blown, there is a big possibility that grounding fault occurred in the cir-
Fuse box 1 nos. 3 and
cuit.
2 17 and Fusible Links
If a monitor lamp does not light up in the monitor panel, check the power source circuit between the
A34 and A35 fault
battery and the specific fuse.
troubleshooting.
Engine starting switch
fault H15 (male) Position Resistance value
3
(Internal
disconnection) OFF Above 1 MΩ
Between (1) and (4)
Start Below 1 Ω
Safety lock switch troubleshooting.
fault S14 (female) Lock lever Resistance value
4
(Internal
short-circuiting) FREE Above 1 MΩ
Between (1) and (3)
LOCK Below 1 Ω
Engine starting motor troubleshooting.
cut relay, R11, R13
and R22 R11 (male) & R13 (male) & R22 (male) Resistance value
5 defective
Between (1) and (2) 100 – 500 Ω
(Internal
disconnection or Between (3) and (5) Above 1 MΩ
short-circuiting)
troubleshooting. (If all of the power source, grounding (GND), generation signal and engine start
input are normal and yet the engine start output is not normal, the engine starting motor relay is de-
fective)
Engine start-
Safety relay Voltage
Engine starting motor ing switch
fault Power source: Between B terminal and grounding 20 – 30 V
6 (Internal
disconnection or GND (grounding): Between E terminal and grounding Connected
short-circuiting)
Generation signal: Between R terminal (A27 (2)) and
Below 1 V
grounding Start
Engine start input: Between C terminal and grounding 20 – 30 V
Engine start output: Between S terminal (A27 (1)) and

20 – 30 V
grounding
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-705

E-1 – Engine does not start (engine does not rotate) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
troubleshooting. (If all of the power source, grounding (GND), generation signal and engine start
input are normal and yet the engine start output is not normal, the engine starting motor relay is de-
Engine starting motor fective)
7 fault
(Internal disconnec- Engine start-
Engine starting motor Voltage
tion or damage) ing switch
Power source: B terminal and grounding 20 – 30 V

Start
Engine start input: C terminal and grounding 20 – 30 V
• Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the ON position or running
Alternator fault during the troubleshooting.
8 (Internal
E12 (male) Voltage

short-circuit)
Between (1) and grounding Below 1 V
troubleshooting.
Resistance
Wiring harness between FB1-17 outlet and H15 (female) (1) Below 1 Ω
value
Resistance
Wiring harness from H15 (female) (4) to J01 to R11 (female) (5) Below 1 Ω
value
Resistance
Wiring harness between R11 (female) (3) and R22 (female) (3) Below 1 Ω
value
Resistance
Disconnection of wir- value
ing harness
Wiring harness between R13 (female) (3) to A07 to A27 (female) Resistance
(1). value
connector) Wiring harness between engine starting motor relay C terminal and Resistance
Below 1 Ω
engine starting motor C terminal value
Resistance
Wiring harness between FB1-3 and S14 (male) (1) Below 1 Ω
value
Resistance
Wiring harness between S14 (male) (3) and R11 (female) (1) Below 1 Ω
value
Wiring harness between R11 (female) (2) to J04 and R22 (female) Resistance
Below 1 Ω
(2) value
Wiring harness from R11 (female) (2) to J04 to A02 (male) (4) to Resistance
Below 1 Ω
grounding value
20-706 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-1 – Engine does not start (engine does not rotate)
troubleshooting.
Between wiring harness from battery relay B terminal (A23) to A35 Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
to A01 to FB1-17 and grounding value
Wiring harness between FB1-17 outlet and H15 (female) (1) and Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
grounding value
Between wiring harness from H15 (female) (4) to J01 to R11 Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
(female) (5) and grounding value
Wiring harness between R11 (female) (3) and R22 (female) (3) and Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
grounding value
Grounding fault of wir-
10
Presumed cause and
ing harness Resistance

(Contact with ground- value
ing circuit)
Wiring harness between R13 (female) (3) to A07 to A27 (female) Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
(1). value
Wiring harness between engine starting motor relay C terminal and Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
engine starting motor C terminal and grounding value
Resistance
Wiring harness between FB1-3 and S14 (female) (1) and grounding Above 1 MΩ
value
Wiring harness between S14 (female) (3) and R11 (female) (1) and Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
grounding value
Between wiring harness from R13 (female) (2) to J08 to H11 to P02 Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
(female) (14) and grounding value
• Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the ON position during the
Short-circuiting of wir- troubleshooting.
ing harness Wiring harness between A27 (female) (2) and E12 (female) (1), or
11
(Contact with 24 V cir- wiring harness from A27 (female) (2) to A07 to J01 to D01 (female)
(6), or between wiring harness between A27 (female) (2) to J01 to
H11 to P02 (female) (11) and grounding.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-707

E-1 – Engine does not start (engine does not rotate) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Electrical circuit diagram for engine start, stop and battery charging
(Blue)
J08
(Black)
J03
(Black)
Travel N
R11
Starter
Cut
Relay
J02
(J-20)
H15
(Orange)
R13
Starting
Cut
Relay
(Personal
Code)
R22
Starter
Cut
Relay
(Travel N)
A64
SB
A23 A22
A21 A20 C
SC
A65
A34 A35 AB
IG
E12
E
S
B
R
A27 C
(X-2) Starter
Safety
Relay
20-708 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-5 – Auto-decelerator does not work
E-5 – Auto-decelerator does not work
Failure
• The auto-deceleration does not work.
information
• Rotation of the auto-deceleration is set at 1,400 rpm. If the fuel dial is not adjusted above this level, the auto-deceleration
Relative
does not work.
information
• Confirm the display on the monitor panel, when the engine is running.
If the display on the monitor panel is not normal, proceed to section E-21 of this troubleshooting chap-
ter.
Boom RAISE
1 Monitoring code Item Normal display
signal fault
Lever operation: ON
01900 Boom RAISE
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
ter.
Boom LOWER
signal fault
Lever operation: ON
01900 Boom LOWER
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
ter.
Arm DIGGING
signal fault
Lever operation: ON
01900 Arm DIGGING
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
ter.
Arm DUMPING
signal fault
Lever operation: ON
01900 Arm DUMPING
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
ter.
Bucket DIGGING
signal fault
Lever operation: ON
01901 Bucket DIGGING
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
ter.
Bucket DUMPING
signal fault
Lever operation: ON
01901 Bucket DUMPING
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
ter.
7 Swing signal fault Monitoring code Item Normal display
Lever operation: ON
01900 Swing
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
ter.
8 Travel signal fault Monitoring code Item Normal display
Lever operation: ON
01901 Travel
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-709

E-5 – Auto-decelerator does not work TESTING AND ADJUSTING

ter.
Attachment signal
fault
Lever operation: ON
01901 Service
Lever NEUTRAL: OFF
Pump controller As this is an internal failure, troubleshooting cannot be conducted. (If there is none of the causes
10
defective listed in Item 1 through 9, the controller is judged as defective.
20-710 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-6 – Auto engine warm-up device does not work
E-6 – Auto engine warm-up device does not work
Failure
• The auto engine warm-up device does not work.
information
• The auto engine warm-up device is activated, when the engine cooling water temperature is below 30°C, and the
Relative engine speed is below 1,200 rpm.
information • The auto engine warm-up device is canceled by keeping the fuel dial opening at above 70% for more than 3 sec-
onds, when the engine starting switch is in the ON position or after the engine is started.

Presumed cause and standard
If the display on the monitor panel is not normal, proceed to section E-14 of this troubleshooting
value in normal state
chapter.
Engine cooling water
Monitoring code Item Normal display
1 temperature signal
fault Compare with the actual
Engine cooling water temper-
04102 engine cooling water temper-
ature
ature.
Pump controller defec- As this is an internal failure, troubleshooting cannot be conducted.

2
tive (If the fault mentioned in the above item is not found, the pump controller is judged as defective)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-711

E-7 – Preheater does not operate TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-7 – Preheater does not operate
Trouble (1) • When starting switch is turned to HEAT position, preheating monitor does not light up.
Related • Input of preheating signal (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function.
Defective starting switch sys- If preheating fails to operate (the heater does not warm up), refer to Trouble
1
tem (2)
Disconnection in wiring harness turning starting switch ON.
Possible causes
and standard Wiring harness between P02 (female) (18) – J02 Resist-
defective contact in connector) Max. 1 Ω
value in normal (male) (17) ance
state
★ Prepare with starting switch OFF
P02 Starting switch Voltage

Between (18) – chas- OFF Max. 1 V
sis ground HEAT 20 – 30 V
Trouble (2) • When starting switch is turned to HEAT position, preheater does not warm up.
Related • During low temperature (coolant temperature below 30°C), pump controller drives the heater relay for 100 sec. af-
information ter engine start to automatically preheat.
★ Prepare with starting switch OFF
• Defective starting switch H15 (male) Starting switch Resistance

1
(Internal disconnection) OFF Min. 1 MΩ
Between (1) – (3)
HEAT Max. 1 Ω
• Defective heater relay Heater relay Resistance
2
Possible causes (Internal disconnection)
and standard Coil terminal – chassis ground
value in normal
Between contact terminals Min. 1 MΩ
state
• Defective intake air heater turning starting switch ON.
3
(Internal disconnection).
Between heater terminals Normal if conductive
• Disconnection in wiring har- turning starting switch ON.
ness
Wiring harness between H15 (female) (3) – J02 – Resist-
Heater relay terminal A25 ance
defective contact in connec-
tor) Wiring harness between battery relay terminal M Resist-
Max. 1 Ω
(A22) – Heater relay terminal A24. ance
20-712 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-7 – Preheater does not operate
Circuit diagram related to engine preheater
J01 (J-20)
(Blue)
15
16
17
18
19
Grid
C03 Heater
Relay
(DRC-40)
Battery Relay
4
Drive
A07 A08
(SWP-16) 1 2 (SWP-8)
A21 A20
Grid
A23 A22 Heater
Relay Ribbon
Heater
A24 A26
A25 E01
E
S B
R C
Starter
Safety
Relay
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-713

E-8 – All work equipment, swing and travel do not move TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-8 – All work equipment, swing and travel do not move
Failure
• All the work equipment, swing and travel do not move.
information
Relative
—
information
1 Fuse No. 3 fault If the fuse is blown, there is a big possibility that grounding fault occurred in the circuit.
troubleshooting.
Safety switch lock
defective S14 (female) Safety control lever Resistance value
2
tion) OFF Above 1 MΩ
Between (1) and (2)
ON Below 1 Ω
troubleshooting.
PPC lock solenoid
fault V01 (male) Resistance value
3
(Internal disconnection
or short-circuiting) Between (1) and (2) 20 – 60 Ω
troubleshooting.
Disconnection of wir- Resistance
ing harness Wiring harness between FB1 (3) outlet and S14 (male) (1) Below 1 Ω
value
4 (Disconnection or
defective contact with Wiring harness from S14 (male) (2) to R45 to A05 to V01 (female) Resistance
Below 1 Ω
connector) (1) value
Resistance
value
troubleshooting.
Grounding fault of wir-
ing harness Wiring harness between FB1 (3) outlet and S14 (male) (1) and Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
5 (Contact with ground- grounding value
ing (GND)
Wiring harness from C02 (male) (9) to R45 (2) to V01 (female) (1), or
circuit) Resistance
between wiring harness between C02 (male) (9) and Above 1 MΩ
value
R45 (female) (3) and grounding.
20-714 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-8 – All work equipment, swing and travel do not move
Electrical circuit diagram for ppc lock solenoid
PPC hydraulic
lock switch (Tilting Pod))
OFF (Pod Down)
ON (Pod Up)
S14
(M - 3) FB1
3 10A
1 Fuse box 1
2
3
Note:
Monitor communicates
with controller through
the “CAN” network A05 V01 PPC lock
(SWP - 16) (DT - 2) solenoid valve
3 1
2
C02 (DRC-40) (ON) (OFF)
PPC lock (OUT) 9 A65
C03 (DRC-40)
PPC lock (IN) 29
R45
PPC lock
1 2 3 5 6
CAB REVOLVING FRAME
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-715

E-9 – One-touch power max switch does not work TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-9 – One-touch power max switch does not work
Failure
• The one-touch power max. switch does not work.
information
• If the one touch-power max. switch is pressed (during work equipment operation) while the engine is running, the
Relative symbol mark is displayed in the monitor panel.
information • Input from the one-touch power max. switch (left knob switch) can be confirmed in the monitor function. (Code No.
02200: Switch input 1)
1 Fuse No. 5 fault If the fuse is blown, there is a big possibility that grounding fault occurred in the circuit.
One-touch power troubleshooting.
max. switch fault G70 (male) One-touch power max. switch Resistance value
2
tion) Release Above 1 MΩ
Between (3) and (12)

Depress Below 1 Ω
Disconnection of wir- troubleshooting.
ing harness
Resistance
3 (Disconnection or Wiring harness between FB1 (5) outlet and G70 (female) (12) Below 1 Ω
value
connector) Resistance
Wiring harness between G70 (female) (3) and C01 (female) (11) Below 1 Ω
value
Grounding fault of wir- troubleshooting.
ing harness
Wiring harness between FB1 (5) outlet and G70 (female) (12) and Resistance
4 (Contact with ground- Above 1 MΩ
grounding value
ing [GND]
circuit) Wiring harness between G70 (female) (3) and C01 (female) (11) and Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
grounding value
troubleshooting.
Pump controller defec- C01 One-touch power max. switch Voltage
5
tive
Release Below 1 V
Depress 20 – 30 V
Electric circuit diagram for one-touch power max. switch
FBI
Pump
controller Fuse box 10A 5 G70 Power Max
(DT - 12)
knob switch
C01 (DRC - 24) 12
Power Max 11 3
Cab
20-716 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-10 – No display in monitor panel at all
E-10 – No display in monitor panel at all
Failure
• When the engine starting switch is turned ON, there appears no display at all in the monitor panel.
information
Relative
—
information
Fuse No. 12 and 17

1 If the fuse is blown, there is a big possibility that grounding fault occurred in the circuit.
fault
ing harness
Resistance
2 (Disconnection or Wiring harness from P01 (female) (1) (2) to H10 to FB1(12) Below 1 Ω
value
defect contact with
Wiring harness between P01 (female) (8) and grounding Below 1 Ω
value
Grounding fault of wir- • Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the OFF position during the
ing harness troubleshooting.
3 (Contact with ground-
ing (GND) Between wiring harness from P01 (female) (1) (2) to FB1(12) outlet Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
circuit) and grounding value
troubleshooting.
Pump controller defec- P01 Voltage and resistance value
4
tive
Between (1) (2) and grounding Voltage: 20 – 30 V
Between (6) (7) and grounding Resistance value: Below 1 Ω
Electrical circuit diagram for power source in monitor panel
60A 30A
Monitor panel Fusible link
H10
P01 (070 - 12) (S - 16) A34 (L - 2) A35 (L - 2)
24V (Switch-key on) 1 1

24V (Switch-key on) 2 4
2 1 2 1
GND 6 5 REV FRAME
GND 7
(24V) VB+ 8
J03
(J - 20) A22
M B A23
15 J04 (J - 20) Battery
A01
16 (X - 4) relay
17 FB1 E BR
1 A20 A21
18 12 20A
14 2 Battery
19 17 20A - + - +
13 4
20 Fuse
(Green) box
(Black) A02
(X - 4)
3
A64
CAB BATTERY ROOM
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-717

E-11 – Part of display on monitor panel is missing TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-11 – Part of display on monitor panel is missing
Failure
• Part of the display in the monitor panel is missing.
information
Relative
—
information

Presumed cause and
If all the LCD in the monitor panel light up (i.e. the screen becomes totally white) by the following
Monitor panel LCD
1 switching operation, then the monitor panel is normal.
fault
• Switching operation: [ ] + [A] (simultaneous switching operation)
Monitor panel As this is an internal failure, troubleshooting cannot be conducted. (If there is no problem with the
2
defective above switching operation, the monitor panel is judged as defective)
E-12 – Monitor panel displays contents irrelevant to the

model
Failure
• The monitor panels displays contents that have nothing to do with the model on which it is installed.
information
Relative
—
information

Presumed cause and
If the display on the monitor panel is normal, proceed to Service Code [DA2SKQ].
Model code signal
1 fault Monitoring code Item Normal display
(Internal failure)
00200 Controller model select PW200/PW220
Monitor panel As this is an internal failure, troubleshooting cannot be conducted. (If there is no problem with the
2
defective above, the monitor panel is judged as defective)
20-718 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-13 – Fuel level monitor red lamp lights up while engine is running
E-13 – Fuel level monitor red lamp lights up while engine

is running
Failure
• The fuel level monitor red lamp lighted up while the engine was running.
information
• If the fuel gauge shows in a red range on the monitor panel, the fuel level monitor lamp lights up red.
Relative
• Input signal from the fuel level sensor (voltage) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
information
(Code No. 04200: Fuel level sensor)
Fuel level lowered

1 (system in normal con- • Refill fuel.
dition)
troubleshooting.
Fuel level sensor fault
2 (Internal A54 (male) Fuel level Resistance value
disconnection) FULL (Upper limit) Approx. 12 Ω
EMPTY (Lower limit) 85 – 110 Ω
ing (GND) Resistance
Wiring harness between P02 (female) (2) and A54 (female) (1) Below 1 Ω
circuit) value
troubleshooting.
Governor – pump con- P02 (female) Fuel level Resistance value
4
troller defective
FULL (Upper limit) Approx. 12 Ω
Electrical circuit diagram for fuel level sensor
Monitor panel
Fuel level
H10 A06 A54 sensor
P02 (040 - 20) (S - 16) (SWP - 16) (X - 1)
Fuel level sensor 2 8 14 1
CAB FUEL TANK
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-719

E-14 – Engine coolant temperature gauge does not indicate normally TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-14 – Engine coolant temperature gauge does not indi-

cate normally
• While engine coolant temperature is rising normally, temperature gauge does not rise from white range (C).
Trouble
• While engine coolant temperature is stabilized normally, temperature gauge rises to red range (H).
• Input from the engine coolant temperature sensor (temperature) can be checked with monitoring function. (Code:
Related informa- 04105: Engine coolant temperature)
tion • Check if failure code for abnormal communication (machine monitor) system [DAFRMC] is indicated (if yes, diag-
nose that failure first.)
Defective coolant temperature Boost pressure Engine coolant tem-
sensor Resistance
1 sensor (male) perature
(Internal disconnection or short
circuit) Between (2) – (1) 90 – 3.5 kz
Between (2) – chassis 10 – 100°C

Min. 1 Mz
ground
Wiring harness between CE01 (female) (15) – Resist-
2 (Disconnection in wiring or Max. 1 z
Boost pressure sensor (female) (2) ance
Wiring harness between boost pressure sensor Resist-
Max. 1 z
Possible causes (female) (1) – chassis ground ance
and standard
value in normal
state Ground fault in wiring harness
(Short circuit with GND circuit) Resist- Min. 1
Boost pressure sensor (female) (2) and chassis
ance Mz
ground
Hot short (Short circuit with 24V
circuit) in wiring harness
Boost pressure sensor (female) (2) and chassis Voltage Max. 1 V
ground
Engine coolant tem-

perature
Between (15) – chas-

10 – 100°C 90 – 3.5 kz
sis ground
20-720 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-14 – Engine coolant temperature gauge does not indicate normally
Circuit diagram related to engine coolant temperature sensor
JC03
8 9 (J-16)
Engine Water
Temperature Sensor
(DT-3) A
JC02
(J-16)
5
13
10
Coolant temp. input Boost

Intake Manifold Pressure
Temp. 23 +5V Sensor
Engine position
sensor signal 26
Engine position
37
sensor supply (5V)
Boost+pressure
44
sensor
Engine position
47
sensor return
A08
(SWP-8)
4
47 5
(DT-3)
5 11 JC01
(J-16)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-721

E-15 – Hydraulic oil temperature gauge does not display correctly TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-15 – Hydraulic oil temperature gauge does not display

correctly
Failure • Hydraulic oil temperature rises normally, but the display does not exceed the white range (C).
information • Hydraulic oil temperature remains stable, but the display rises up the red range (H).
Relative • Input from the hydraulic oil temperature sensor can be confirmed in the monitor function.
information (Code No. 04402: Hydraulic oil temperature)
Hydraulic oil tempera- troubleshooting.
ture sensor fault A55 Engine cooling water temperature Resistance value
1
tion or short-circuiting) Between (1) and (2) 90 – 3.5 kΩ
10 – 100 °C
troubleshooting.
Disconnection of wir-
ing harness Resist-
2 (Disconnection or ance value
Between
connector) Resist-
Wiring harness between P02 (female) (12) and A55 (female) (1) 1.9 and
ance value
38.2KΩ
ing (GND) Wiring harness between P02 (female) (12) and A55 (female) (2) and Resist- Above
circuit) grounding ance value 1 MΩ
Short-circuiting of wir- • Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the ON position during the
4
(Contact with 24 V cir- Between wiring harness between P02 (female) (12) and A55 (female) (2)
and grounding
troubleshooting.
Pump controller P02 Engine cooling water temperature Resistance value
5
defective
Between (12) and (13) 90 – 3.5 kΩ
10 – 100 °C
Electrical circuit diagram for hydraulic oil temperature sensor
H11 A06 E22

Monitor panel (S - 16) (SWP - 16) (DT - 12)
A55 Hydraulic oil
P02 (010 - 18) 4 5 1 (DT - 2) temperature sensor
Hydraulic oil
temperature sensor 12 2
Sensor GND 13 7 12 3 1
H10 E21
(S - 16) (DT - 12)
CAB HYDRAULIC PUMP
20-722 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-16 – Fuel gauge does not display correctly
E-16 – Fuel gauge does not display correctly
Failure • Though fuel was refilled, the display does not exceed the red range (E).
information • Though the remaining fuel level is low, the display does not drop below the green range (F).
Relative • Input from the fuel level sensor (voltage) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
information (Code No. 04200: Fuel sensor voltage)
troubleshooting.
Fuel level sensor fault
1 (Internal disconnection A54 (male) Fuel level Resistance value
or short-circuiting) FULL (Upper limit) Approx. 12 Ω
Disconnection of wir- • Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparations, and hold it in the OFF position during the
2 (Disconnection or
defective contact with Resistance
connector) value
ing (GND) Wiring harness between P02 (female) (2) and A54 (female) (1) and Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
circuit) grounding value
4
(Contact with 24 V cir- W iring harness between P02 (female) (2) and A54 (female) (1) and
grounding
troubleshooting.
Pump controller defec- P01 Fuel level Resistance value
5
tive
FULL (Upper limit) Approx. 12 Ω
Electrical circuit diagram for fuel level sensor
Monitor panel
Fuel level
H10 A06 A54 sensor
P02 (040 - 20) (S - 16) (SWP - 16) (X - 1)
Fuel level sensor 2 8 14 1
CAB FUEL TANK
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-723

E-17 – Swing lock monitor does not display correctly TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-17 – Swing lock monitor does not display correctly
Failure • Though the swing lock switch was turned ON, the swing lock monitor does not light up.
information • Though the swing lock switch was turned OFF, the swing lock monitor lights up.
Relative • Input from the swing lock switch (ON or OFF) can be confirmed in the monitor function.
information (Code No. 04502: Monitor input 3)
troubleshooting.
X05 (female) Swing lock switch Resistance value

Swing lock switch fault
1 (Internal disconnection OFF Above 1 MΩ
Between (1) and (2)
or short-circuiting) ON Below 1 Ω
OFF Below 1 Ω
Between (3) and (4)
ON Above 1 MΩ
ing harness
Wiring harness from P02 (female) (17) to H11 to H15 to X05 Resistance
(female) (1) value
Wiring harness from X05 (female) (4) to grounding Below 1 Ω
value
ing (GND) Between wiring harness from P02 (female) (17) to H11 to H15 to Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
circuit) X05 (male) (1) and grounding value
4
(Contact with 24 V cir- Between wiring harness from P02 (female) (17) to H11 to H15 to
X05 (male) (1) and grounding
troubleshooting.
Monitor panel P02 Swing lock switch Voltage
5
defective
OFF 20 – 30 V
ON Below 1 V
20-724 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-17 – Swing lock monitor does not display correctly
Electrical circuit diagram for swing lock switch
Emergency Swing Parking

Brake Release Swing Lock Switch
1 2 3 4 5 6 S22 1 2 3 4 5 6
EMERGENCY ON
NORMAL OFF
J04 8 9 10 11 S28 1 2 3 4 X05

(J-20) (DT-12) (M-4)
(Green)
3 4
8 19 20 H15
(090-20)
C02 (DRC-40)
H11 (S-16) 2 Swing Emergency Switch
P02 (040-20)
Swing Lock 17 8 38 Swing Lock Switch
11 12 13 J10
(J-20)
(Orange)
C03 (DRC-40)
FB1 37 Swing Brake Sol.
10A 1
D05
(KES1-2)
2
A05
5 (SWP-16)
V03 (DT-2) Swing
Brake Sol.
1
Sol.
2
4 A02
(X-4)
A64 A65
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-725

E-18 – When the monitor switch is operated, no display appears TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-18 – When the monitor switch is operated, no display

appears
Failure
• When operating the working mode changing switch, the working mode monitor does not appear.
information (1)
Relative
—
information
Presumed Cause Standard value in normal and references for troubleshooting

cause and
standard value Monitor panel
1 As this is an internal failure, troubleshooting cannot be conducted.
in normal defective
Failure
• When operating the auto-deceleration switch, the auto-deceleration monitor does not appear.
information (2)
Relative
• If the auto-deceleration itself does not work, either, proceed to section E-5 of this troubleshooting chapter.
information

cause and
in normal defective
Failure
• When operating the travel speed shifting switch, the travel speed monitor does not appear.
information (3)
Relative
• If the travel speed does not actually change, proceed to section H-18 of this troubleshooting chapter.
information

cause and
in normal defective
Failure
• When operating the windshield wiper switch, the windshield wiper monitor does not appear.
information (4)
Relative
• If the windshield wiper itself does not work, either, proceed to section E-19 of this troubleshooting chapter.
information

cause and
in normal defective
• When operating the select switch, the adjustment display does not appear.
Failure
• When operating the LCD monitor adjusting switch, the adjustment display does not appear.
information (5)
• When operating the maintenance switch, the item display does not appear.
Relative
—
information

cause and
in normal defective
20-726 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-18 – When the monitor switch is operated, no display appears
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-727

E-19 – Windshield wiper and window washer do not operate TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-19 – Windshield wiper and window washer do not oper-

ate
Trouble • Windshield wiper and window washer do not operate (1) Windshield wiper does not operate.
Related informa- • Input from window limit switch (ON/OFF) can be checked with monitoring function.
tion (Code 04502: Monitor Input 3)
Defective window rear limit
switch W03 (male) Front window Resistance
1
(Internal disconnection or short
circuit) When installed to front Min. 1 MΩ
Between (1) – (2)
When retracted to rear Max. 1 Ω
2 (Internal disconnection or short W04 (male) Resistance
circuit) Between (3) – (1)
Between (3), (1) – chassis ground Min. 1 MΩ
Wiring harness between P01 (female) (9) – W04 Resist-
(female) (3) ance
Possible causes defective contact in connector)
and standard Wiring harness between P01 (female) (10) – W04 Resist-
Max. 1 Ω
value in normal (female) (1) ance
state
4
Defective machine monitor P01 Front window Voltage
(window limiter switch system)
Between (15) – chas- When installed to front 20 – 30 V
sis ground When retracted to rear Max. 1 V

Defective machine monitor
(Wiper motor system) Between (9) – chassis OFF Max. 3 V
ground
Between (10) – chas- Max. 3 V ⇔ 20 – 30 V
ON
sis ground (Constant cycle)
20-728 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-19 – Windshield wiper and window washer do not operate
Circuit diagram related to windshield wiper motor
(SWP-16)
(X-4)
A64
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-729

E-20 – Alarm buzzer cannot be stopped TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-20 – Alarm buzzer cannot be stopped
Trouble • Alarm buzzer cannot be stopped.
Related
—
information
Machine monitor may be defective. (Since trouble is in system, troubleshooting

Possible 1 Defective machine monitor
cannot be carried out.)
causes and
standard value Quick coupler grounding fault • Turn the engine starting switch OFF for the preparation and hold it in the OFF
in normal state of wiring harness position during troubleshooting.
2
(Contact with grounding • Wiring harness between C02 (female) (3) Resistance Above
[GND] circuit) and S30 (female) (1) and grounding. Value 1 MΩ
S30 A06
(X-2) (SWP-16) C02 (DRC)
Quick coupler
1 12 3 Low Pres. Sw.
A65
Quick Coupler Circuit
20-730 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-21 – "Boom/stabiliser RAISE" is not correctly displayed in monitor function
E-21 – "Boom/stabiliser RAISE" is not correctly displayed

in monitor function
Failure
• "Boom/Stabiliser RAISE" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function on the monitor panel.
information
Relative
• Monitoring code: 01900 (Pressure switch 1)
information
Boom/Stabiliser troubleshooting.
RAISE PPC hydraulic
1 switch fault S13 (male) Boom control lever Resistance value
(Internal disconnection NEUTRAL Above 1 MΩ
or short-circuiting) Between (1) and (2)
RAISE Below 1 Ω
ing harness
Resistance
2 (Disconnection or Wiring harness between C02 (female) (35) and S13 (female) (2) Below 1 Ω
value
Wiring harness between S13 (female) (1) and grounding Below 1 Ω
value
ing (GND) Wiring harness between C02 (female) (35) and S13 (female) (2) and Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
4
(Contact with 24 V cir- Wiring harness between C02 (female) (35) and S13 (female) (2) and
grounding
troubleshooting.
Pump controller defec- C02 Boom control lever Voltage
5
tive
NEUTRAL 20 – 30 V
RAISE Below 1 V
Electrical circuit diagram for boom RAISE PPC hydraulic switch
Governor pump
controller Boom/Stabiliser
A09 S13 RAISE pressure
C02 (DRC - 40) (SWP - 8) (X- 2) switch
Boom RAISE
35 1 2
pressure switch
1
A65
CAB PPC CONNECTING
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-731

E-22 – "Boom/stabiliser LOWER" is not correctly displayed in monitor function TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-22 – "Boom/stabiliser LOWER" is not correctly dis-

played in monitor function
Failure
• "Boom/Stabiliser LOWER" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function on the monitor panel.
information
Relative
information
Boom/Stabiliser troubleshooting.
LOWER PPC hydrau-
1 lic switch fault S12 (male) Boom control lever Resistance value
LOWER Below 1 Ω
ing harness
Resistance
value
value
Above 1 MΩ
4
grounding
troubleshooting.
Pump controller defec- C02 Boom control lever Voltage
5
tive
NEUTRAL 20 – 30 V
LOWER Below 1 V
Electrical circuit diagram for boom LOWER PPC hydraulic switch
Governor pump
controller Boom/Stabiliser
A09 S12 LOWER pressure
C02 (DRC - 40) (SWP - 8) (X - 2) switch
Boom LOWER
pressure switch 25 2 2
1
A65
CAB PPC CONNECTING BLOCK
20-732 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-23 – "Arm DIGGING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function
E-23 – "Arm DIGGING" is not correctly displayed in moni-

tor function
Failure
• "Arm DIGGING" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function (special function) on the monitor panel.
information
Relative
information
Arm DIGGING PPC troubleshooting.
hydraulic switch fault S06 (male) Arm control lever Resistance value
1
or short-circuiting) NEUTRAL Above 1 MΩ
Between (1) and (2)
DIGGING Below 1 Ω
ing harness
Resistance
value
value
Above 1 MΩ
4
grounding
troubleshooting.
Pump controller defec- C02 Arm control lever Voltage
5
tive
NEUTRAL 20 – 30 V
DIGGING Below 1 V
Electrical circuit diagram for arm DIGGING PPC hydraulic switch
Governor pump
controller
A09 S06 Arm CURL
C02 (DRC - 40) (SWP - 8) (X - 2) pressure switch
Arm CURL
1
A65
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-733

E-24 – "Arm DUMPING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-24 – "Arm DUMPING" is not correctly displayed in moni-

tor function
Failure
• "Arm DUMPING" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function (special function) on the monitor panel.
information
Relative
information
Arm DUMPING PPC troubleshooting.
hydraulic switch defect S05 (male) Arm control lever Resistance value
1
and short-circuiting) NEUTRAL Above 1 MΩ
Between (1) and (2)
DUMPING Below 1 Ω
ing harness
Resistance
value
value
Above 1 MΩ
4
grounding
troubleshooting.
Pump controller defec- C02 Arm control lever Voltage
5
tive
NEUTRAL 20 – 30 V
DUMPING Below 1 V
Electrical circuit diagram for arm DUMPING PPC hydraulic switch
Governor pump
controller
A09 S05 Arm DUMP
Arm DUMP
1
A65
20-734 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-25 – "Bucket DIGGING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function
E-25 – "Bucket DIGGING" is not correctly displayed in

monitor function
Failure
• "Bucket DIGGING" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function (special function) on the monitor panel.
information
Relative
information
troubleshooting.
Bucket DIGGING PPC
hydraulic switch fault S04 (male) Bucket control lever Resistance value
1
and short-circuiting) NEUTRAL Above 1 MΩ
Between (1) and (2)
DIGGING Below 1 Ω
ing harness
Resistance
value
value
Above 1 MΩ
4
grounding
troubleshooting.
Pump controller defec- C02 Bucket control lever Voltage
5
tive
NEUTRAL 20 – 30 V
DIGGING Below 1 V
Electrical circuit diagram for bucket DIGGING PPC hydraulic switch
Governor pump
controller
A09 S04 Bucket CURL
Bucket CURL
36 5 2
pressure switch
1
A65
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-735

E-26 – "Bucket DUMPING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-26 – "Bucket DUMPING" is not correctly displayed in

monitor function
Failure
• "Bucket DUMPING" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function (special function) on the monitor panel.
information
Relative
information
Bucket DUMPING troubleshooting.
PPC hydraulic switch
1 fault S03 (male) Bucket control lever Resistance value
and short-circuiting) Between (1) and (2)
DUMPING Below 1 Ω
ing harness
Resistance
value
value
Above 1 MΩ
4
grounding
troubleshooting.
Pump controller defec- C02 Bucket control lever Voltage
5
tive
NEUTRAL 20 – 30 V
DUMPING Below 1 V
Electrical circuit diagram for bucket DUMPING PPC hydraulic switch
Governor pump
controller
A09 S03 Bucket DUMP
Bucket DUMP
26 6 2
pressure switch
1
A65
20-736 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-26 – "Bucket DUMPING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-737

E-27 – "SWING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-27 – "SWING" is not correctly displayed in monitor func-

tion
Failure
• "SWING" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function (special function) on the monitor panel.
information
Relative
• Monitoring code: 1900 (Pressure switch 1 )
information
Swing PPC hydraulic troubleshooting.
switch, right, fault S01 (male) Swing control lever Resistance value
1
Between (1) and (2)
Right Below 1 Ω
troubleshooting.
Swing PPC hydraulic
switch, left, fault S02 (male) Swing control lever Resistance value
2
Between (1) and (2)
Left Below 1 Ω
troubleshooting.
Disconnection of wir- Wiring harness between C02 (female) (16) and S01 (female) (2), or Resistance
ing harness Below 1 Ω
wiring harness between C02 (female) (16) and S02 (female) (2) value
3 (Disconnection or
connector) value
Resistance
value
4 (Contact with ground- Wiring harness between C02 (female) (16) and S01 (female) (2), or
wiring harness between C02 (female) (16) and S02 (female) (2) and Above 1 MΩ
circuit) value
grounding
ing harness
5 Wiring harness between C02 (female) (16) and S01 (female) (2), or
(Contact with 24 V cir-
cuit) wiring harness between C02 (female) (16) and S02 (female) (2) and Voltage Below 1 V
grounding
troubleshooting.
Pump controller defec- C02 Swing control lever Voltage
6
tive
NEUTRAL 20 – 30 V
Right or left Below 1 V
20-738 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-27 – "SWING" is not correctly displayed in monitor function
Electrical circuit diagram for right and left swing PPC hydraulic switches
Swing RIGHT
S01 (X - 2) pressure switch
2
Governor pump 1
controller
A09 Swing LEFT
C02 (DRC - 40) (SWP - 8) S02 (X - 2) pressure switch
Swing pressure
16 7 2
switch
1
A65
CAB PPC CONNECTING
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-739

E-28 – "TRAVEL" is not correctly displayed in monitor function TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-28 – "TRAVEL" is not correctly displayed in monitor

function
Failure
• "TRAVEL" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function (special function) on the monitor panel.
information
Relative
• —Default travel indication is neutral
information
troubleshooting.
G72 (male) Travel control lever Resistance value

Travel PPC hydraulic
switch fault NEUTRAL Above 1 MΩ
1
(Internal disconnection Between (7) and (8)
or short-circuiting) Forward Below 1 Ω
NEUTRAL Above 1 MΩ
Between (7) and (9)
Reverse Below 1 Ω
troubleshooting.
Disconnection of wir- Resistance
ing harness Wiring harness from C03 (female) (10) to G72 (female) (8) Below 1 Ω
value
2 (Disconnection or
Wiring harness from C03 (female) (20) to J02 to G72 (female) (10) Below 1 Ω
connector) value
Resistance
Wiring harness from C03 (female) (30) to J02 to G72 (9) Below 1 Ω
value
ing (GND) Wiring harness from C03 (female) (10), or C03 (20), or between wir- Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
circuit) ing harness between C03 (female) (30) and grounding value
4
(Contact with 24 V cir- Wiring harness from C03 (female) (10), or C03 (20), or between wir-
ing harness between C03 (female) (30) and grounding.
troubleshooting.
C03 Travel control lever Voltage

Pump controller defec-
5
tive Between (10) and grounding
NEUTRAL 20 – 30 V
Between (30) and grounding Forward or backward Below 1 V
20-740 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-28 – "TRAVEL" is not correctly displayed in monitor function
Electrical circuit diagram for travel PPC hydraulic switch and travel alarm
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-741

E-29 – "2 piece boom" is not correctly displayed in monitor function TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-29 – "2 piece boom" is not correctly displayed in moni-

tor function
Failure
• "2 Piece Boom" is not correctly displayed in the monitor function (special function) on the monitor panel.
information
Relative
—
information
2 Piece Boom troubleshooting.
(Extend) PPC hydrau-
1 lic switch fault S07 (male) Service pedal Resistance value
Front Below 1 Ω
2 Piece Boom troubleshooting.
(Retract) PPC hydrau-
2 lic switch fault S08 (male) Service pedal Resistance value

Rear Below 1 Ω
ing harness
Wiring harness between C01 (female) (6) and S07 (female) (2), or Resistance
wiring harness between C01 (female) (6) and S08 (female) (2) value
connector) Wiring harness between S07 (female) (1) and grounding or Wiring Resistance
Below 1 Ω
harness between S08 (female) (1) and grounding value
4 (Contact with ground- Wiring harness between C01 (female) (6) and S07 (female) (2), or
between wiring harness between C01 (female) (6) and S08 (female) Above 1 MΩ
circuit) value
(2) and grounding
ing harness
5 Wiring harness between C01 (female) (6) and S07 (female) (1), or
(Contact with 24 V cir-
cuit) between wiring harness between C01 (female) (6) and S08 (female) Voltage Below 1 V
(1) and grounding
troubleshooting.
Pump controller defec- C01 Service pedal Voltage
6
tive
NEUTRAL 20 – 30 V
Front or rear Below 1 V
20-742 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-29 – "2 piece boom" is not correctly displayed in monitor function
Electrical circuit diagram for 2 piece boom PPC hydraulic switch
S20 Front service

(X - 2) pressure switch
2
Governor pump 1
controller
A09 S21 Rear service
Service
6 8 2
pressure switch
1
S08 2pc boom retract

2
1
S07 2pc boom extend

2
1
A65
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-743

E-30 – Air conditioner does not work TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-30 – Air conditioner does not work
Failure
• The air conditioner does not work.
information
Relative • For the electrical circuit diagram inside the air conditioner unit, refer to the section of STRUCTURE AND
information FUNCTION - Air Conditioner in this manual.
1 Fuse No. 11 fault When the fuse is blown, there is a big possibility that grounding fault occurred in the circuit.
ing harness
Resistance
2 (Disconnection or Wiring harness between FB1(11) outlet and M26 (male) (5) Below 1 Ω
value
Wiring harness between M26 (male) (8) and grounding Below 1 Ω
value
ing (GND) Between wiring harness between FB1(11) outlet and M26 (male) (5)
Voltage Above 1 MΩ
circuit) and grounding
troubleshooting.
Air conditioner unit
4
defective M26 Voltage
Between (5) and (10) 20 – 30 V
20-744 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-30 – Air conditioner does not work
Electrical circuit diagram for air conditioner

Sunshine
Sensor
Air Conditioner
Hi/Lo
Pressure 1 2
P15
Switch (050-2)
G05
J04 (DT-12)
(J-20) 3
(Green) P17
2 1 4
1 2 11 12
Air Conditioner
FB1 A07 E05 Compressor
20A (SWP-16) (X-1)
11
7 1
A06
(SWP-16)
1
A02
(X-4)
1
A64
M26
(S-12)
2 5 7 8 10 12
Air Conditioner Control Unit

M30 (AMP-16)
Potent. Sig. (Air Mix Damper) 2
Potent. Power Supply 3
High/Low Pressure Switch 4
R30 R31
Power Supply 6
Blower Compressor
Power Transistor Control Sig. 7 Relay Relay
Blower Feedback Sig. 8

Potent. Sig. (Blow Damper) 9
Thermistor Sig. Inside Temp. 12

Thermistor Sig. Blow Air Temp. 13 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
Thermistor Sig. Water Temp. 14

Sunshine Sensor 16
M29 (AMP-20)
Compressor Clutch Relay 2
Blower Main Relay 3
Terminal A Air Mix Damper 4
Terminal B Air Mix Damper 5
Terminal B In/Ex Damper 6
Terminal A In/Ex Damper 7
Terminal B Blow Damper 8
Terminal A Blow Damper 9

Sensor GND 11
GND 12
M27
(Yazaki-18)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
M33
(Sumitomo-4)
1 2 3 4
Air Conditioner Unit
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-745

E-31 – Travel reverse alarm does not sound TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-31 – Travel reverse alarm does not sound
Failure • The travel alarm does not sound while the machine is travelling.
information • The alarm begins to sound when the machine is at a standstill.
Relative
—
information
Fuse box 2 - Fuse No.

1 When the fuse is blown, there is a big possibility that grounding fault occurred in the circuit.
1 fault
If the monitor display is not correct, proceed to section E-21 of this troubleshooting chapter.
Monitoring code Item Normal display

2 Travel signal fault
Control lever operation: ON
02200 Travel Reverse
Control lever NEUTRAL: OFF
troubleshooting. Ensure FNR switch is in reverse position.
Disconnection of wir- Wiring harness between FB2-1 outlet to R53 to A07 and A53 Resistance
ing harness Below 1 MΩ
(female) (1) value
3 (Disconnection or
defective contact with Wiring harness between FB2-1 outlet to S29 to G72 to J02 to R53 Resistance
Below 1 Ω
connector) to J05 and A02 (female) (4). value
Wiring harness between FB2-1 outlet to S29 to G72 to J02 and Resistance
Below 1 MΩ
C03 (female) (30). value
• Turn engine starting switch OFF for the preparations and hold it in the OFF position during the trou-
bleshooting. Ensure FNR switch is in reverse position.
F.N.R switch defective G72 (Male) Resistance value

4 (Internal disconnection
or short-circuiting)
• Turn engine starting switch OFF for the preparations and hold it in the OFF position during the trou-
bleshooting. Ensure FNR switch is in reverse position.
Reversing buzzer
R53 (Male) Resistance value
relay R53 defective
5
(Internal disconnection Between (1) and (2) 100 - 500 Ω
or short-circuiting)
Between (3) and 6) Below 1 Ω
ing harness troubleshooting. Ensure FNR switch is in reverse position.
ing (GND) Between wiring harness between FB1-3 outlet to S25 to S23 to Resistance
Above 1 MΩ
circuit) G72 to J02 to A07 and A53 (female) (1) and grounding value
As this is an internal failure, troubleshooting cannot be conducted. (If none of the causes listed in Item
7 Travel alarm fault
1 through 4 above is found, the travel alarm is judged as defective)
20-746 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-31 – Travel reverse alarm does not sound
Electrical circuit diagram for travel reverse alarm system
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-747

E-32 – KOMTRAX system does not operate normally TESTING AND ADJUSTING
E-32 – KOMTRAX system does not operate normally
Trouble • KOMTRAX system does not operate normally.
• If KOMTRAX system administrator makes request for checking system on machine side for trouble, carry out fol-
Related informa-
lowing troubleshooting.
tion
• Even if KOMTRAX system has trouble, it does not particularly appear on machine.
★ Turn starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting.
LED (1) Normal state
LED-A1 Lighted up
1 Defective power supply ★ Prepare with starting switch OFF, then carry out troubleshooting without
G01 Signal Voltage
Between (39), (40) –

Constant power supply 20 – 30 V
(37), (38)
★ Turn starting switch ON and carry out troubleshooting.
2 Defective GPS LED (2) Normal state
LED-A2 Lighted up
★ Start engine and carry out troubleshooting.
LED-C1 Lighted up
Defective starting switch ACC bleshooting.
3
signal and alternator R signal
Possible causes G01 Signal Voltage
and standard
value in normal Between (36) –
Starting switch ACC 20 – 30 V
state (37), (38)
Between (28) –
Alternator R 20 – 30 V
(37), (38)
LED-C3 Lighted up
Defective S-NET connection
4 out troubleshooting.
and starting switch C signal
G01 Signal Voltage
Between (10) – (9) S-NET 6–9V
Between (27) –
Starting switch C Max. 1 V
(37), (38)
LED-C4 Lighted up
5 State of CAN connection
★ Prepare with starting switch OFF and carry out troubleshooting.
G01 Signal Resistance
Between (7) – (8) CAN 40 – 80 Ω
20-748 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING E-32 – KOMTRAX system does not operate normally

Number of mails not transmit-
6 LED (12) Normal state
ted yet
Possible causes 7-segment 0–9
and standard ★ Turn starting switch ON and carry out troubleshooting (See *)
value in normal
state LED (13) Normal state
7 State of positioning with GPS Dot ON
* In an outdoor location within radio waves' penetration range, it sometimes

takes more than a minute from turning on of the starting switch to completion
of the positioning.
LED display unit
G01 connector
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-749

E-32 – KOMTRAX system does not operate normally TESTING AND ADJUSTING
20-750 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Troubleshooting of electrical system

(Error checking of items without monitor codes)
• This troubleshooting is carried out when there is still an abnormality
• Before carrying out any troubleshooting check all related connectors are properly inserted
• Always connect any disconnected connectors before moving on the next step
Radio cassette and telephone socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-804
PPC lock circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-806
Brake light circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-808
Undercarriage attachments – Mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-810
Undercarriage attachments – Front left outrigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-812
Undercarriage attachments – Front right outrigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-814
Undercarriage attachments – Rear left outrigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-816
Undercarriage attachments – Rear right outrigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-818
Heated seat does not warm up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-820
Suspension lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-822
Lower wiper does not work (optional fitment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-824
Work lights (operator cab front left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-826
Work lights (operator cab front right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-827
Work lights (operator cab rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-828
Work lights (boom, arm and counterweight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-830
Cab and counterweight beacon light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-832
Air seat compressor (option – air suspension seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-834
Operator cab interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-836
Cigar lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-838
Park brake (not activating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-840
Park brake (displayed symbol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-842
RH PPC lever clamshell roller switch pushed to the LH position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-844
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-801

Troubleshooting of electrical system (Error checking of items without monitor codes) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
RH PPC lever clamshell roller switch pushed to the RH position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-846
RH PPC lever clamshell roller switch pushed to the RH or LH position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-848
Horns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-850
Swing lock – Normal operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-852
Swing lock – Emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-854
Neutral start (engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-856
Neutral start (engine) cont’d (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-857
Neutral start (engine) cont’d (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-858
Neutral start (engine) cont’d (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-859
Emergency travel control – Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-862
Emergency travel control - neutral. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-864
Emergency travel control – Reverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-867
Emergency travel control – Reverse cont’d . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-868
Driving lights – Main beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-870
Driving lights – Main beam flash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-872
Driving lights – Main beam dipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-874
Driving lights – Position lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-876
Driving lights – Position lights cont’d (1) and (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-878
Indicators – Right hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-880
Indicators – Left hand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-882
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-884
Hazard warning lights cont’d (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-886
Swing lock proximity switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-888
20-80^2 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100


• The following information are edited and contained in the
"Information Contained in Troubleshooting Table". You are
required to proceed with troubleshooting after fully grasping
the contents.
Failure
Phenomena occurring on machine
information
Relative
Information on occurred failures and troubleshooting
information
<Contents>
• The standard values in normal by which to judge "good" or "no good" about presumed causes.
• References for making judgement of "good" or "no good"
1
<Phenomena of wiring harness fault>
• Failure due to disconnection
Defective contact with connector or disconnection of wiring harness has occurred.
• Grounding fault
A wiring harness that is not originally connected with a grounding circuit is in contact with it.
2 • Failure due to short-circuiting
A wiring harness that is not originally connected with a power source circuit (24 V) is in contact
with it.
Cause for presumed <Points to remember in troubleshooting>

failure
(The attached No. for 1. Connector denotation method and handling of T-adapters
3 Insert or connect T-adapters in the following manner, unless specifically otherwise instructed.
filing and reference
purpose only. It does not • If there is no indication of (male) or (female) in the connector No., pull off a connector and insert
stand for any priority) a T-adapter into both sides of male and female.
• If there is an indication of (male) and (female) in the connection No., pull off a connector and in-
sert a T-adapter into only one side of (male) or (female).
2. Description sequence of pin No. and handling of circuit tester leads
4 Connect the positive lead (+) and negative lead (–) for troubleshooting in the following manner
unless specifically otherwise instructed.
• Connect the positive lead (+) to a pin No. marked at the front or wiring harness.
• Connect the negative lead (–) to a pin No. marked at the rear or wiring harness.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-803

Radio cassette and telephone socket TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Radio cassette and telephone socket
*When fuse no.6 (Fuse box 1) is not blown
START
Does M72
Pin 2 have good NO
Correct poor
connection to ground
ground?
YES
Does M72 NO
Pin 4 have good Replace DC/DC
connection to converter
ground?
YES
Defective
connector or
Does M79 disconnection in
NO
Pin 2 have good wiring between
connection to M79 Pin 2 &
ground? J09 Pin 20 and
J09 Pin 18
YES M72 Pin 4
Is voltage NO
between Replace DC/DC
M72 Pin 3 & converter
Chassis normal?
YES
Defective
Is voltage connector or
NO disconnection in
between
M79 Pin 1 & wiring between
Chassis normal? M72 Pin 3 & J10
Pin 17 & J10 Pin
20 & M79 Pin 1
YES
Is voltage NO
between Replace socket
M79 Pin 2 & M79
Chassis normal?
Defective
YES connector or
disconnection in
wiring between
Is voltage NO M40 Pin 8 & M50
between
Pin 8 & H08 Pin
M40 Pin 8 &
2 & J10 Pin 19 &
Chassis normal?
J10 Pin 20 & M79
Pin 2
Defective
YES connector or
disconnection in
Is voltage NO wiring between
between M72 Pin 3 & J10
M40 Pin 4 & Pin 17 & J10
Chassis normal? Pin 18 & H08
Pin 1 & M50 Pin 4
YES
Defective
Is voltage NO connector or
between disconnection in
M40 Pin 7 & wiring between
Chassis normal? M72 Pin 3 & J10
Pin 17 & J10
Pin 19 & H08
YES Pin 3 & M50 Pin 7
& M40 Pin 7
YES Is voltage NO
Replace Defective
between
damaged radio connector or
M40 Pin 8 &
unit disconnection in
Chassis normal?
wiring between
M72 Pin 4 & J09
Pin 18 & J09
Pin 19 & H08
Pin 2 & M50 Pin 8
& M40 Pin 8
20-804 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Radio cassette and telephone socket
Electrical circuit diagram for radio cassette and telephone socket
LEFT RIGHT
SPEAKER SPEAKER
M72 (M-4)
DC / DC RADIO CASSETTE
CONVERTER
(AMP-8)
1 2 3 4 M40 4 7 8 1 2 7 8 M73 1 2 1 2 M13
M41
(AMP-8) (M-2) (M-2)
M50 4 7 8 3 4 5 6 M51
FB1 (AMP-8) (AMP-8)
10A M79
(M-2)
1 2
6
TELEPHONE
SOCKET
3 10 11 12 13 14 15
J09 T11 (Cab GND)
(J-20) J10
(Pink) 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 8 H08
(J-20) (M-8)
(Orange)
Revo T05 (Floor Frame)

Frame
RADIO CASSETTE & TELEPHONE SOCKET
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-805

PPC lock circuit TESTING AND ADJUSTING
PPC lock circuit
*When Fuse No.3 (Fuse box 1) is not blown

*When bulbs are fitted correctly & fully functional
START
Is voltage Does V01 Pin

YES YES Replace
between V01 2 have good
damaged
Pin 1 & Chassis connection to
solenoid valve
normal? ground?
NO
Defective NO
connector or
Defective
disconnection in Is voltage Correct poor
connector or
wiring between YES between R45 ground
disconnection in
R45 Pin 1 & Pin 6 & Chassis
wiring between
Fuse No. 3 normal?
V01 Pin 1 &
R45 Pin 6
NO
NO
Is voltage Is voltage Does R45 Is voltage
YES between R45 YES between R45 YES YES between R45
Circuit OK Pin 2 have good
Pin 5 & Chassis Pin 1 & Chassis connection to Pin 3 & Chassis
normal? normal? ground when normal?
PPC Lock switch
NO is depressed? NO
Defective
Replace NO Is voltage connector or
damaged relay between S14 YES disconnection in
R45 Pin 2 & Chassis wiring between
Defective
normal? R45 Pin 3 &
connector or
S14 Pin 2
disconnection in NO
wiring between
R45 Pin 2 & Defective
C02 Pin 9 Is voltage
between S14 NO connector or
Pin 1 & Chassis disconnection in
normal? wiring between
S14 Pin 1 &
FB1 Pin 3 (fuse)
YES
Replace
damaged
lock switch
20-806 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING PPC lock circuit
Circuit diagram for PPC lock circuit
Replay For
PPC Lock (2)
R46
Replay For Relay for

PPC Lock (1) Brake Light Cut
R45 R51
1 2 3 5 PPC Hydraulic Lock Switch

6
LOCK
1 2 3 5 6 1 2 3 5 6 FREE
1 2 3 5 6 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 S14
(M-3) C02 (DRC - 40)
FB1 9 PPC Lock (OUT)
10A 3
C03 (DRC - 40)
29 PPC Lock (IN)
A07
(SWP - 16)
15
G8 (DT - 4)
2
S19
A05 (DT-2)
(SWP - 14) 4
3 1
V01 BRAKE
PPC Pressure (DT-2) G7 (DT - 4) LIGHTS
2
Lock Solenoid
1 2
SOL
4
2
A65 A65
A01 (X-4)
1
A64
16 17 18 19 20 J05 3 10 J04 1 3 J06

(J-20) (J-20)
(J-20)
(Green) (Pink)
(Pink)
PPC & BRAKE LIGHT INTERLOCK
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-807

Brake light circuit TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Brake light circuit

*When bulbs are fitted correctly & fully functional
*When brake pedal is depressed
Start 1 Start 2
Does G7 Pin Does G8 Pin Is voltage Replace

NO 2 have good YES between G8 NO
2 have good NO Correct Poor Correct poor damaged lamp
connection to Ground ground connection to Pin 4 & Chassis unit G8
ground? ground? normal?
YES NO
Is voltage Replace
NO YES
between G7 damaged lamp
Pin 4 & Chassis unit G7
normal?
Is voltage Is voltage
between S19 NO between YES Replace damaged
Pin 1 & Chassis S19 Pin 2 & pressure switch
normal? Chassis S19
normal?
YES
Defective NO
connector or
disconnection in
wiring between
S19 Pin 1 &
G7 Pin 4 or G8
Pin 4 Defective
connector or
disconnection in
wiring between
S19 Pin 2 & FB2
Pin 6 (fuse)
20-808 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Brake light circuit
Circuit diagram for brake light circuit
A07
(SWP - 16)
15
G8 (DT - 4)
2
S19
(DT-2)
4
1
BRAKE
G7 (DT - 4) LIGHTS
2
2
A65
FB2
6 10A
BRAKE LIGHT CIRCUIT
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-809

20-810
START 1
Correct poor Correct poor
ground ground
NO NO
Ensure monitor Does V09 Is voltage Is voltage Does V10

Replace YES YES YES YES Replace
panel is clear of Pin 2 have good between V09 between V10 Pin 2 have good
START 2 damaged damaged
error codes connection to Pin 1 & Chassis Pin 1 & Chassis connection to
solenoid valve solenoid valve
ground? normal? normal? ground?
YES
NO NO
Is attachment Is voltage Is voltage Defective
YES NO YES
interlock icon between C01 between G71 connector or
display on Defective
Undercarriage attachments – Mode selection
Pin 24 & Chassis Pin 1 & Chassis disconnection in Is voltage connector or

monitor panel? normal? normal? wiring between YES
between R20 disconnection in
C01 Pin 24 & Pin 5 & Chassis wiring between
NO G71 Pin 1 normal? R20 Pin 5 & V09
NO
Pin 1 or V10 Pin1
NO NO
Defective
connector or
Is voltage Is voltage disconnection in
NO Replace between R20 NO wiring between
between G71
Pin 4 & Chassis damaged PPC Pin 3 & Chassis C01 Pin 5 &/or
normal? Lever normal? C03 Pin 2 &/or
(Right Hand) C03 Pin 12 & R20
Pin 3 &/or R20
YES YES Pin 1
Does G71 Pin 4
NO have a good
Correct poor ground Is voltage
NO NO
connection to between R20
ground Pin 1 & Chassis
normal?
YES
YES
Circuit OK
Replace damaged
boom/outrigger
Undercarriage attachments – Mode selection
relay R20
Is voltage
PW200/PW220-7E0
between C01 Pin 5 Replace damaged
NO
or C03 Pin 2 or C03 controller C01 &/
Pin 12 & chassis or C03
normal
YES
Circuit OK
VEBM949100
TESTING AND ADJUSTING Undercarriage attachments – Mode selection
Circuit diagram for undercarriage attachments – Mode selection
OUTRIGGER SWITCH
Boom/Outrigger FB1
Select Relay 20A 2
R20
H10
(S-16) 3 4
P10
(DT-8)
1 2 3 5 6
J04
(J-20)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13 14 16
(Green)
BOOM / UNDERCARRIAGE SELECT
(RH PPC LEVER)
1 4 G71
(DT-4)
H12
(S-12)
3 4 5 6 7 12
5 6 J08
(J-20)
(Black)
A02 3
(X-4)
T05
A64
V09 (DT-2)
1
BOOM/STABLISER
SOL DOWN SOLENOID
4 5 6 7 A05 10
A99 2
(SWP-8) (SWP-16)
V10 (DT-2)
1
BOOM/STABLISER
SOL UP SOLENOID
A12 2
(DT-4)
P01 1 2 3 4
(070-12) A65
GND 6 SWIVEL JOINT
A13 1 2 3 4 V15 (DT-2)

(DT-4)
1
FRONT L.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
V16 (DT-2)
1
FRONT R.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
V17 (DT-2)
1
REAR L.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
V18 (DT-2)
1
REAR R.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
A04
C01 (DRC)
VIS (Sol Pwr) 5
Boom/outrigger select switch 24
C02 (DRC-4)
Boom/Outrigger Solenoid 18
C03 (DRC-40)
VIS (SOL. POWER) 2
VIS (SOL. POWER) 12
UNDERCARRIAGE ATTACHMENTS B
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-811

Undercarriage attachments – Front left outrigger TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Undercarriage attachments – Front left outrigger

*When attachment ‘Mode Select’ circuit is fully functional
START
Is voltage Does V15

YES YES Replace
between V15 Pin 1 have good
damaged
solenoid valve
normal? ground?
NO
NO
Defective
connector or Is voltage Correct poor
disconnection in YES between P10 ground
wiring between Pin 4 & Chassis
V15 Pin 2 & normal?
P10 Pin 4
NO
Refer to Is voltage
Is voltage between
‘Undercarriage NO NO between P10
C01 Pin 5 & C03
Attachments - Pin 1 & Chassis
Pin 2 & Pin 12 &
Mode Selection’ normal?
chassis Normal
page
YES YES
Defective connector Replace outrigger

or disconnection in switch P10
wiring between C01
Pin 5 & C03 Pin 2 &
Pin 12 & P10 Pin 1
20-812 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Undercarriage attachments – Front left outrigger
Circuit diagram for undercarriage attachments – Front left outrigger
OUTRIGGER SWITCH
Boom/Outrigger FB1
Select Relay 20A 2
R20
H10
(S-16) 3 4
P10
(DT-8)
1 2 3 5 6
J04
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(J-20) 14 16
13
(Green)
(RH PPC LEVER)
1 4 G71
(DT-4)
H12
(S-12)
3 4 5 6 7 12
5 6 J08
(J-20)
(Black)
A02 3
(X-4)
T05
A64
V09 (DT-2)
1
BOOM/STABLISER
SOL DOWN SOLENOID
4 5 6 7 A05 10
A99 2
(SWP-8) (SWP-16)
V10 (DT-2)
1
BOOM/STABLISER
SOL UP SOLENOID
A12 2
(DT-4)
P01 1 2 3 4
(070-12) A65
GND 6 SWIVEL JOINT
A13 1 2 3 4 V15 (DT-2)

(DT-4)
1
FRONT L.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
V16 (DT-2)
1
FRONT R.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
V17 (DT-2)
1
REAR L.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
V18 (DT-2)
1
REAR R.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
A04
C01 (DRC)
VIS (Sol Pwr) 5
C02 (DRC-4)
C03 (DRC-40)
VIS (SOL. POWER) 2
VIS (SOL. POWER) 12
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-813

Undercarriage attachments – Front right outrigger TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Undercarriage attachments – Front right outrigger

START
Is voltage Does V16

YES YES Replace
damaged
solenoid valve
normal? ground?
NO
NO
Defective
V16 Pin 2 & normal?
P10 Pin 4
NO
Refer to Is voltage
Is voltage between
C01 Pin 5 & C03
Pin 2 & Pin 12 &
chassis Normal
page
YES YES

wiring between C01
Pin 5 & C03 Pin 2 &
Pin 12 & P10 Pin 1
20-814 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Undercarriage attachments – Front right outrigger
Circuit diagram for undercarriage attachments – Front right outrigger
OUTRIGGER SWITCH
Boom/Outrigger FB1
Select Relay 20A 2
R20
H10
(S-16) 3 4
P10
(DT-8)
1 2 3 5 6
J04
(J-20)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13 14 16
(Green)
(RH PPC LEVER)
1 4 G71
(DT-4)
H12
(S-12)
3 4 5 6 7 12
5 6 J08
(J-20)
(Black)
A02 3
(X-4)
T05
A64
V09 (DT-2)
1
BOOM/STABLISER
SOL DOWN SOLENOID
4 5 6 7 A05 10
A99 2
(SWP-8) (SWP-16)
V10 (DT-2)
1
BOOM/STABLISER
SOL UP SOLENOID
A12 2
(DT-4)
P01 1 2 3 4
(070-12) A65
GND 6 SWIVEL JOINT
A13 1 2 3 4 V15 (DT-2)

(DT-4)
1
FRONT L.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
V16 (DT-2)
1
FRONT R.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
V17 (DT-2)
1
REAR L.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
V18 (DT-2)
1
REAR R.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
A04
C01 (DRC)
VIS (Sol Pwr) 5
C02 (DRC-4)
C03 (DRC-40)
VIS (SOL. POWER) 2
VIS (SOL. POWER) 12
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-815

Undercarriage attachments – Rear left outrigger TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Undercarriage attachments – Rear left outrigger

START
Is voltage Does V17

YES YES Replace
damaged
solenoid valve
normal? ground?
NO
NO
Defective
V17 Pin 2 & normal?
P10 Pin 4
NO
Refer to Is voltage
Is voltage between
C01 Pin 5 & C03
Pin 2 & Pin 12 &
chassis Normal
page
YES YES

wiring between C01
Pin 5 & C03 Pin 2 &
Pin 12 & P10 Pin 1
20-816 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Undercarriage attachments – Rear left outrigger
Circuit diagram for undercarriage attachments – Rear left outrigger
OUTRIGGER SWITCH
Boom/Outrigger FB1
Select Relay 20A 2
R20
H10
(S-16) 3 4
P10
(DT-8)
1 2 3 5 6
J04
(J-20)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13 14 16
(Green)
(RH PPC LEVER)
1 4 G71
(DT-4)
H12
(S-12)
3 4 5 6 7 12
5 6 J08
(J-20)
(Black)
A02 3
(X-4)
T05
A64
V09 (DT-2)
1
BOOM/STABLISER
SOL DOWN SOLENOID
4 5 6 7 A05 10
A99 2
(SWP-8) (SWP-16)
V10 (DT-2)
1
BOOM/STABLISER
SOL UP SOLENOID
A12 2
(DT-4)
P01 1 2 3 4
(070-12) A65
GND 6 SWIVEL JOINT
A13 1 2 3 4 V15 (DT-2)

(DT-4)
1
FRONT L.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
V16 (DT-2)
1
FRONT R.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
V17 (DT-2)
1
REAR L.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
V18 (DT-2)
1
REAR R.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
A04
C01 (DRC)
VIS (Sol Pwr) 5
C02 (DRC-4)
C03 (DRC-40)
VIS (SOL. POWER) 2
VIS (SOL. POWER) 12
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-817

Undercarriage attachments – Rear right outrigger TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Undercarriage attachments – Rear right outrigger

START
Is voltage Does V18

YES YES Replace
damaged
solenoid valve
normal? ground?
NO
NO
Defective
V18 Pin 2 & normal?
P10 Pin 4
NO
Refer to Is voltage
Is voltage between
C01 Pin 5 & C03
Pin 2 & Pin 12 &
chassis Normal
page
YES YES

wiring between C01
Pin 5 & C03 Pin 2 &
Pin 12 & P10 Pin 1
20-818 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Undercarriage attachments – Rear right outrigger
Circuit diagram for undercarriage attachments – Rear right outrigger
OUTRIGGER SWITCH
Boom/Outrigger FB1
Select Relay 20A 2
R20
H10
(S-16) 3 4
P10
(DT-8)
1 2 3 5 6
J04
(J-20)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13 14 16
(Green)
(RH PPC LEVER)
1 4 G71
(DT-4)
H12
(S-12)
3 4 5 6 7 12
5 6 J08
(J-20)
(Black)
A02 3
(X-4)
T05
A64
V09 (DT-2)
1
BOOM/STABLISER
SOL DOWN SOLENOID
4 5 6 7 A05 10
A99 2
(SWP-8) (SWP-16)
V10 (DT-2)
1
BOOM/STABLISER
SOL UP SOLENOID
A12 2
(DT-4)
P01 1 2 3 4
(070-12) A65
GND 6 SWIVEL JOINT
A13 1 2 3 4 V15 (DT-2)

(DT-4)
1
FRONT L.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
V16 (DT-2)
1
FRONT R.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
V17 (DT-2)
1
REAR L.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
V18 (DT-2)
1
REAR R.H STABLISER
SOL SOLENOID
2
A04
C01 (DRC)
VIS (Sol Pwr) 5
C02 (DRC-4)
C03 (DRC-40)
VIS (SOL. POWER) 2
VIS (SOL. POWER) 12
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-819

Heated seat does not warm up TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Heated seat does not warm up
Defective connector or
NO disconnection in wiring
between M33 Pin 2
& FB1 Pin 14
Is voltage between
NO
M33 Pin 2 & chassis
normal
Is voltage
NO between M33
Pin 1 & Chassis
normal? YES
Is voltage
between G33
Pin 3 & Chassis
normal? Replace seat heater
YES switch M33
YES disconnection in wiring
between M33 Pin 1 &
G33 Pin 3
Replace heating
element
20-820 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Heated seat does not warm up
Circuit diagram for the heated seat
M33 (M-2)
1 2
HEATED
OFF SEAT
ON
1 2
FB1
G33
10A 14 (DT-4)
3
J09 (Green)
(J-20)
7
5
T05
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-821

Suspension lock TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Suspension lock
between C03 Pin 26 &
V04 Pin 1
Is voltage between
C03 Pin 26 &
NO chassis OK when
suspension lock
button is
depressed?
NO Change defective
controller
Is voltage
between
V04 Pin 1 &
Chassis OK?
Does V04
Pin 2 have
YES Replace
YES good
damaged
connection to
solenoid
Chassis
ground?
NO
Poor
connection to
Chassis
ground
20-822 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Suspension lock
Circuit diagram for suspension lock
A05
(SWP-16)
C03 12
(DRC-40) V04 (DT-2) Suspension lock
solenoid
SUSPENSION LOCK SOL. 26 1
SOL
2
A65
SUSPENSION LOCK
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-823

Lower wiper does not work (optional fitment) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Lower wiper does not work (optional fitment)

Poor connection
to Chassis
ground
NO
Does J09 Pin 12 Defective connector or

have good connection
to ground between R18 Pin 2
& J09 Pin 12
NO
Does R18 Pin 2 Replace

have good connection YES
damaged relay
to ground R18
YES
Is voltage
NO disconnection in wiring
between R18
between R18 Pin 5
Pin 5 & Chassis
& FB1 Pin 6
normal?
YES
Is voltage Defective connector or
Is voltage
NO between R18 YES disconnection in wiring
between R18
Pin 3 & Chassis between R18 Pin 3
Pin 1 & Chassis
normal? & G52 Pin 1
normal?
NO NO
Is voltage Is voltage Defective connector Is voltage Between P06 YES
NO NO disconnection in wiring
between G52 between J09 or disconnection in Pin 2 & chassis normal between R18 Pin 1
Pin 3 & Chassis Pin 9 & Chassis wiring between G52
& P06 Pin 2
normal? normal? Pin 3 & FB1 Pin 6 NO
YES YES
Is voltage Between P06 NO disconnection in wiring
Pin 1 & chassis normal between R18 Pin 1
Defective connector & FB1 Pin 6
or disconnection in YES
wiring between G52
Pin 3 & J10 Pin 9 Change defective switch
P06
Is voltage
between G52 NO
Pin 1 & Chassis
normal?
YES YES
Does G52 Replace

Pin 2 have good damaged wiper
connection to motor
Chassis ground?
NO Poor connection
to Chassis
ground
20-824 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Lower wiper does not work (optional fitment)
Circuit diagram for lower wiper
LOWER
WIPER
1 2
Off
On
1 2 P06 LOWER WIPER
Lower Wiper Relay M

R18
G52 (KESO - 4)
1 2 3 5 6
LW
LB
B
L
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 5 6
A07
(SWP-16)
12
16
A64
1 3 7 8 9 10 J10
(J-20)
(Orange)
12 11 J09
(J-20)
(Green)
FB1
J04 3 10 10A 6
(J-20)
(Green)
4 A02
(X-4)
A64
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-825

Work lights (operator cab front left) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Work lights (operator cab front left)
Does M40 pin 2

Start have good No Correct poor
ground?
Yes
Is voltage
Replace
between M40 Yes
damaged work
pin 1 & chassis lamp
normal?
No
Is voltage Is voltage A Does R52 pin 6

between R52 pin No between R52 pin Yes have good No Correct poor
2 & chassis 1 & chassis connection to ground
normal? normal? ground?
Yes No Yes
Disconnection in Disconnection in Is voltage

wiring between wiring between Yes Replace
between R52 pin
damaged relay
R52 pin 2 & M40 FB2 pin 4 & R52 5 & chassis
R52
pin 1 pin 1 normal?
No
Is voltage Defective conenctor or

between M07 pin Yes connection in wiring
1 & chassis between M07 pin 1 &
normal? R52 pin 5
No
Is voltage
Yes Replace
between M07 pin
damaged switch
3 & chassis
M07
normal?
No
Defection in
wiring between
M07 pin 3 & FB2
pin 3
20-826 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Work lights (operator cab front right)
Work lights (operator cab front right)
Does M41 pin 2

ground?
Yes
Is voltage
Replace
between M41 Yes
damaged work
pin 1 & chassis
lamp
normal?
No
Is voltage Is voltage
between R52 No between R52 Yes
A
pin 4 & chassis pin 3 & chassis
normal? normal?
Yes No
Disconnection in Disconnection in
wiring between wiring between
R52 pin 4 & M41 FB2 pin 4 & R52
pin 1 pin 3
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-827

Work lights (operator cab rear) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Work lights (operator cab rear)
Does M40B pin 2

ground?
Yes
Is voltage
Replace
between M40B Yes
damaged work
pin 1 & chassis
lamp
normal?
No

between M07 pin No connection in wiring
1 & chassis between M07 pin 1 &
normal? M40B pin 1
Yes No
Is voltage
Replace
between M07 pin
damaged switch
3 & chassis
M07
normal?
No
Defective conenctor or
connection in wiring
between M07 pin 3 &
FB2 pin 3
20-828 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Work lights (operator cab rear)
Circuit diagram for work lights
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-829

20-830
Start
Arm RH
Arm LH
Counterweight
Boom RH
Boom LH
Does worklight Is voltage Is voltage Is voltage Defective connector Is voltage Does worklight Is voltage Is voltage Does worklight
Replace Replace
Yes have good Yes between A85 pin between A91 pin No between FB2 Yes or disconnection in between A91 Yes have good No Correct between A89 pin No between A90 pin Yes have a good Yes
damaged damaged
ground? 1 & chassis 1 & chassis pin 17 & chassis wiring between FB2 pin 2 & chassis ground? poor ground 1 & chassis 1 & chassis ground?
lamp lamp
Work lights (boom, arm and counterweight)
(counterweight) normal? normal? normal? pin 17 & A91 pin 1 normal? (arm lh) normal? normal? (boom lh)
No
No No Yes No Yes Yes No No
Does worklight Defective connector or Is voltage Is voltage Does worklight Is voltage

Correct Replace Replace Replace
Yes have good disconnection in wiring Yes between D06 No between FB2 pin Yes have a good between A86 pin Yes Correct poor
poor damaged damaged damaged
ground? between D06 pin 1 & pin 1 & chassis 16 & chassis ground? 2 & chassis ground
ground lamp lamp lamp
(arm lh) A91 pin 1 or A91 pin 2 normal? normal? (boom rh) normal?
No No Yes No No
Defective connector Is voltage Is voltage Defective connector Defective connector or

Yes Replace Yes
or disconnection in between M07 Correct between D06 pin or disconnection in Correct poor disconnection in wiring
damaged
wiring between M07 pin 2 & chassis poor ground 2 & chassis wiring between FB2 ground between A86 pin2 & A89
diode D06
pin 2 & A85 pin 1 normal? normal? pin 16 & A91 pin 2 pin 1 or A90 pin 2
No No
Defective connector or Is voltage Is voltage Defective connector or

disconnection in wiring Yes between M07 pin between R10 pin Yes disconnection in wiring
between M07 pin 2 & 2 & chassis 5 & chassis between R10 pin 5 &
A91 pin 1 or A91 pin 2 normal? normal? A86 pin 2
No No
Is voltage
Does R10 pin 2
between R10 pin Yes No Correct
have a good
3 & chassis poor ground
ground?
normal?
No Yes
* When fuse No. 3, 16 and 17 Is voltage

Replace Yes Defective connector Is voltage
(fusebox 2) are not blown between M07 pin Replace
damaged or disconnection in between R10 pin Yes
8 & chassis damaged
switch M07 wiring between FB2 1 & chassis
normal? relay R10
pin 3 & R10 pin 3 normal?
* When all bulbs are fully
functional and fitted correctly No
No
* When lmap switch M07 is Is voltage

switched on Replace Is voltage Defective connector or
Work lights (boom, arm and counterweight)
No between FB2 pin

damaged fuse No between M07 pin Yes disconnection in wiring
3 & chassis
box 2 2 & chassis between R10 pin 1 &
normal?
normal? M07 pin 2
Yes
disconnection in wiring
between FB2 pin 3 &
M07 pin 8
PW200/PW220-7E0
VEBM949100
TESTING AND ADJUSTING Work lights (boom, arm and counterweight)
Circuit diagram for worklights (boom and counterweight)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-831

Cab and counterweight beacon light TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Cab and counterweight beacon light

*When bulb is fitted correctly and fully functional
*With beacon light switch (P05) in the ON position
START 1
YES Does F02B YES Is voltage NO Is voltage YES Defective

Is voltage between
Replace cab beacon YES Pin 2 Have good between H09 between P05 connector or
F02B Pin 1 &
lamp connection to Pin 7 & Chassis Pin 2 & Chassis disconnection
chassis normal
ground? normal? normal? wiring between
NO P05 Pin 2 &
NO NO CN-H09 Pin 7
Defective connector
or disconnection in Correct poor Is voltage
START 2 YES
wiring between F02B ground between P05 Replace switch P05
Pin 1 & H09 Pin 7 Pin 1 & Chassis
normal?
NO
Is voltage Defective
NO between A84 connector or
P05 Pin 1 &
YES FB1 Pin 7
Does G53
Change Is the voltage
YES YES Pin 2 Have good NO
counterweight between G53 Pin 1 Correct poor ground
beacon lamp connection to
& chassis Normal
ground
NO
Defective
connector or
disconnection in
wiring between
A84 Pin 4 &
G53 Pin 1
Defective connector
Is the voltage Is the voltage NO
NO or disconnection in
between P05 Pin 2 between P05 Pin 1
wiring between P05
& chassis Normal & chassis Normal
Pin 1 & FB1 Pin 7
YES YES
Defective connector Replace switch P05

or disconnection in
wiring between P05
Pin 2 & A84 Pin 4
20-832 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Cab and counterweight beacon light
Circuit diagram for cab and counterweight beacon light
CAB BEACON LAMP
F02B
1 2 (DT-2)
F02A
1 2 (M-2)
H09
(S-8)
8
A07 T05
(SWP-16) 4
COUNTERWEIGHT
BEACON LAMP
P05
(M-2)
1 2
Off
On
1 2 FB1 G53
A84 1 2 (DT-2)
7 10A
(X-4)
3
4
A65
BEACON LIGHT
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-833

Air seat compressor (option – air suspension seat) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Air seat compressor (option – air suspension seat)
START
NO
between G33 connector or
G33 Pin 1 &
YES FB1 Pin 16
Does G33
NO
Pin 2 have good Correct poor
ground?
YES
Change
defective seat
20-834 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Air seat compressor (option – air suspension seat)
Circuit diagram for air seat compressor (option – air suspension seat)
FB1
G33 16
1
M 2
20A
T05
5 6 J09
(J-20)
(Green)
AIR SEAT COMPRESSOR
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-835

Operator cab interior light TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Operator cab interior light

*When bulb is fully functional & fitted correctly
START
NO
between connector or
M71 Pin 2 & disconnection in
Chassis normal? wiring between
M71 Pin 2 &
YES FB1 Pin 16
Disconnect lamp
NO
unit & check if good
Correct poor
ground connection
ground
to cab frame
YES
Change
defective lamp
unit
20-836 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Operator cab interior light
Circuit diagram for operator cab interior light
A06
(SWP-16)
2
J04
(J-20)
LAMP UNIT 18 19 (Green)
H11 (S-16)
11
M71 (M-2)
ON
1 A64
OFF
2
FB1
H12 (S-12)
16 20A
11
OPERATOR CAB INTERIOR LIGHT
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-837

Cigar lighter TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Cigar lighter
*When Fuse No.4 is not blown

START
Does M19 Is voltage

Replace YES Pin 2 have good YES between
damaged cigar connection to M19 Pin 1 &
lighter ground? Chassis normal?
NO NO
Correct poor Defective

ground connector or
disconnection in
wiring between
M19 Pin 1 &
FB1 Pin 4
20-838 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Cigar lighter
Circuit diagram for cigar lighter
12 11 J03
(J-20)
CIGAR (Black)
LIGHTER
FB1
4 10A
M19 H11
(YAZAKI-2) (S-16)
1 12
2 11
A06
(SWP-16)
18 19 J04
A64 (J-20)
(Green)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-839

Park brake (not activating) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Park brake (not activating)
START
Does V12 Is voltage

Replace YES Pin 2 have good YES between V12
damaged connection to Pin 1 & Chassis
solenoid valve ground? normal?
NO NO
Correct poor Is voltage Defective

ground between G99 YES connector or
V12 Pin 1 &
NO G99 Pin 6
Is voltage NO
between G99 Defective
Pin 8 & Chassis connector or
normal? disconnection in
wiring between
YES G99 Pin 8 &
FB2 Pin 2
Replace
damaged park
brake switch
20-840 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Park brake (not activating)
Circuit diagram for park brake
G99 Park Brake Switch
6 8 2 4 1 3 5 7 10 9
OFF
ON
PRESSURE
V12 H15 S17 SWITCH
Brake Valve (DT-2) (090-20) (DT-2)
Solenoid
1 9 2
(BRAKE
SOL 10 VALVE)
2
11 1
12
FB2
10A C03 (DRC-40)
2
19 PARK BRAKE PRESSURE SW.
J05
1 4
(J-20)
(Pink)
J09 J04
(J-20) 1 12 4 3 10 (J-20)
(Green) (Green)
4 A02
(X-4)
A64
PARK BRAKE
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-841

Park brake (displayed symbol) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Park brake (displayed symbol)
*When Fuse No.2 (Fuse Box 2) is not blown
START
Is voltage
between C03 YES Replace
Pin 19 & Chassis damaged
normal? controller
NO
Defective
between S17 YES disconnection in
Pin 1 & Chassis wiring between
normal? S17 Pin 1 &
C03 Pin 19
NO
Is voltage
between S17 YES Replace
normal? pressure switch
NO
Defective
between G99 YES disconnection in
normal? S17 Pin 2 &
G99 Pin 2
NO
between G99 NO connector or
G99 Pin 4 &
YES FB2 Pin 2
Change
damaged park
brake switch
20-842 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Park brake (displayed symbol)
Circuit diagram for park brake
G99 Park Brake Switch
6 8 2 4 1 3 5 7 10 9
OFF
ON
PRESSURE
V12 H15 S17 SWITCH
Brake Valve (DT-2) (090-20) (DT-2)
Solenoid
1 9 2
(BRAKE
SOL 10 VALVE)
2
11 1
12
FB2
10A C03 (DRC-40)
2
19 PARK BRAKE PRESSURE SW.
J05
1 4
(J-20)
(Pink)
J09 J04
(J-20) 1 12 4 3 10 (J-20)
(Green) (Green)
4 A02
(X-4)
A64
PARK BRAKE
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-843

RH PPC lever clamshell roller switch pushed to the LH position TESTING AND ADJUSTING
RH PPC lever clamshell roller switch pushed to the LH po-

sition
Start
Does V23 pin Does C03 pin

2 have good No No Replace
23 have good
connection to damaged
connection to
controller
ground? ground?
Yes Yes

Replace Yes between V23 disconnection in wiring
damaged epc
pin 1 & chassis between C03 pin 23 &
solenoid valve
normal? V23 pin 2
No

Replace No Yes
between C03 disconnection in wiring
damaged
controller
normal? V23 pin 1
20-844 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING RH PPC lever clamshell roller switch pushed to the LH position
Circuit diagram for clamshell control
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-845

RH PPC lever clamshell roller switch pushed to the RH position TESTING AND ADJUSTING
RH PPC lever clamshell roller switch pushed to the RH po-

sition
Start
Does V24 pin Does C03 pin

2 have good No No Replace
23 have good
connection to connection to damaged
controller
ground? ground?
Yes Yes

Replace Yes between V24 disconnection in wiring
damaged epc
solenoid valve
normal? V24 pin 2
No

Replace No Yes
between C03 disconnection in wiring
damaged
controller
normal? V24 pin 1
20-846 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING RH PPC lever clamshell roller switch pushed to the RH position
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-847

RH PPC lever clamshell roller switch pushed to the RH or LH position TESTING AND ADJUSTING
RH PPC lever clamshell roller switch pushed to the RH or

LH position
Start

between G72 pin No disconnection in wiring
6 & chassis between FB1 pin 15 &
normal? G72 pin 6
Yes
Does G72 pin 2 Does C01 pin 21

have good No have good No Replace
controller
ground? ground?
Yes Yes

Replace No disconnection in wiring
between G72 pin
damaged rh ppc
2 & chassis between C01 pin 21 &
lever
normal? G72 pin 2
Yes
Defective connector or Is voltage Is voltage

disconnection in wiring Yes between C01 pin No between G72 pin
between C01 pin 22 & 22 & chassis 1 & chassis
G72 pin 1 normal? normal?
No Yes
Is voltage
Replace No Replace
between G72 pin
damaged damaged rh ppc
4 & chassis
controller lever
normal?
Yes
Defective connector or Is voltage

disconnection in wiring No between C01 pin
between C01 pin 9 & 9 & chassis
G72 pin 4 normal?
Yes
Is voltage
Replace No between G72 pin
damaged rh ppc
3 or pin 5 &
lever
chassis normal?
Yes

between C03 pin No disconnection in wiring
40 & chassis between C03 pin 40 &
normal? G72 pin 3 or pin 5
Yes
Circuit ok
20-848 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING RH PPC lever clamshell roller switch pushed to the RH or LH position
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-849

Horns TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Horns
START
YES Does A41 Pin 2 YES Is voltage Is voltage YES Does A40 Pin 2 YES
Change have a good between A41 between A40 have a good Change
damaged horn connection to Pin 1 & Chassis Pin 1 & Chassis connection to damaged horn
ground normal? normal? ground
NO NO NO
Correct poor Correct poor

ground ground
NO
Defective
connector or
Is voltage YES disconnection in
between R44
wiring between
Pin 5 & Chassis
A40 Pin 1,
normal?
A41 Pin 1 &
R44 Pin 5
NO
Defective
between R44 NO disconnection in
normal? R44 Pin 1 &
FB1 Pin 5
YES
Defective
Is voltage NO connector or
between R44 disconnection in
normal? R44 Pin 3 &
FB1 Pin 5
YES
Does G70 NO
Pin 1 have good Correct poor
ground?
YES
Does G70
Pin 2 have good
connection to NO Change
ground when damaged PPC
PPC lever horn lever
switch is
depressed?
YES
Does J09 Pin

15 have good Defective or
Does G3 Pin 6 YES connection to NO disconnection in
NO
Correct poor have good ground when wiring between
ground connection to PPC lever horn G70 Pin 2 &
ground? switch is J09 Pin 15
depressed?
YES
Does G4 Pin 1
have good
Change NO connection to
damaged ground when
steering column steering column
switch horn switch is
depressed
YES
Defective Does J09 Pin

connector or 14 have good
disconnection in NO connection to
wiring between ground when
G4 Pin 1 & steering column
J09 Pin 14 horn switch is
depressed
YES
Does J09
Replace Pin 16 have good
damaged splice NO connection to
header ground when
connector J09 either horn
switch is
depressed
YES
Defective Does R44

connector or Pin 2 have good
disconnection in NO connection to
wiring between ground when
J09 Pin 16 & either horn
R44 Pin 2 switch is
depressed
YES
Replace
damaged relay
R44
20-850 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Horns
Circuit diagram for horn
R44
1 2 3 5 6
FB1 1 2 3 5 6
A07
5 (SWP-16) A40
10A 1
Indicator stalk
Horn Switch HORNS

15 H
LH PPC LEVER A40
On HORN SWITCH
Off
J09
(J-20) 14 15 16 2 1 G70
(Green) (DT-6)
6 1
G3 G4
A64
3
A02
G02
(X - 4)
(DT-12)
1 J08
T05 (J-20)
7 5 7 (Black)
P01 (070-18)
GND 6
J04
(J-20)
13 14 15 16 (Green)
H10
(S-16) 4
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-851

20-852
*Emergency swing switch is in ‘OFF’ position
START
Does P02 Pin 17 Does V03

Does C02 Pin 38 Is voltage Change
YES YES Replace YES Pin 2 have good YES
Swing lock – Normal operation
Change have good connection have good connection between V03

damaged connection to damaged
damaged to ground with C02 to ground with P02 Pin 1 & Chassis
controller ground? solenoid
monitor panel Pin 38 Disconnected Pin 17 disconnected normal?
NO NO NO NO
Does H15 Pin Defective Does H15 Pin Defective Defective
YES connector or YES connector or connector or YES Is voltage Correct poor
8 have good 8 have good
disconnection in disconnection in disconnection in between X05 ground
connection to connection to Pin 4 & Chassis
ground? wiring between ground? wiring between wiring between
P02 Pin 17 & C02 Pin 38 V03 Pin 1 & normal?
H15 Pin 8 & H15 Pin 8 X05 Pin 4
NO NO NO
Is voltage Replace
YES
between X05 damaged swing
Pin 3 & Chassis lock switch
normal?
NO
Defective
Swing lock – Normal operation
Does X05 Pin

NO connector or YES Is voltage
1 have good Correct poor ground disconnection in between D05
connection to
ground?
X05 Pin 3 & normal?
D05 Pin 1
YES
NO
Does X05
Pin 2 have good NO Is voltage
Correct poor ground YES Replace
connection to between D05
Pin 2 & Chassis damaged diode
ground? block D05
normal?
YES
NO
Is voltage between
Defective
X05 Pin 1 & Pin 2 Replace damaged connector or Is voltage
NO YES
normal when switch swing lock switch disconnection in between C03
is ON & not normal X05 wiring between Pin 37 & Chassis
when OFF D05 Pin 2 & normal?
C03 Pin 37
YES NO
PW200/PW220-7E0
Circuit OK Replace
damaged
controller
VEBM949100
TESTING AND ADJUSTING Swing lock – Normal operation
Circuit diagram for swing lock
Emergency Swing Switch Swing Lock Switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
S22
EMERGENCY ON
NORMAL OFF
1 2 3 4
X05
(M-4)
D05
(KES1-2)
J10 (J-20)
(Orange)
J05
(090-20)
11 12 13 8 10 19 20
(DT-12)
8 9 10 11 1 2 1 2 4 5 7 8 9 10
(J-20)
H15
S28
(Pink)
H11 (S-16) P02 (040-20)

8 17 Swing Lock Display
13 GND
A05 V03
Swing Brake
(SWP-16) (DT-2)
Solenoid C02 (DRC - 40)
5 1
SOL 2 Emergency Swing
2 38 Swing Lock Switch
A65
J04 3 4 3 4
A02 C03 (DRC-40)
(J-20) A01
(X-4)
(Green)
21 GND
31 GND
FB1
1 A64 32 GND
10A 33 GND
37 Swing Brake Sol.
SWING LOCK
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-853

Swing lock – Emergency operation TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Swing lock – Emergency operation
*Emergency swing switch is in ‘Emergency’ position

*Fuse No.1 (Fuse box 1) is not blown START
Change Does C02 Is voltage Does V03

YES YES YES Change
damaged Pin 2 have good between V03 Pin 2 have good
connection to Pin 1 & Chassis connection to damaged
controller solenoid
ground? normal? ground?
NO NO NO
Defective Defective
connector or Does S22 Pin 6 have connector or Is voltage Correct poor
YES good connection to
disconnection in disconnection in YES between X05 ground
wiring between ground with wiring between Pin 4 & Chassis
C02 Pin 2 & emergency switch in V03 Pin 1 & normal?
S22 Pin 6 normal position. X05 Pin 4
NO
NO
Is voltage between Is voltage

between X05 YES Replace
Replace NO S22 Pin 6 & S22
damaged switch Pin 3 & Chassis damaged swing
Pin 5 normal with lock switch
S22 emergency switch normal?
in emergency
position NO
Defective
YES Is voltage YES connector or
between S22 disconnection in
Does S22 Pin 6 Does S22 Pin 6 Pin 3 & Chassis
have good wiring between
have good YES normal? X05 Pin 3 &
connection to NO
connection to S22 Pin 3
ground with Circuit OK
ground with NO
emergency switch in emergency switch in
emergency position normal position
Is voltage YES Replace
NO YES between S22 damaged switch
Pin 2 & Chassis S22
Replace damaged normal?
Correct poor
ground switch S22
NO
Defective
connector or
disconnection in
wiring between
S22 Pin 2 &
FB1 Pin 1
20-854 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Swing lock – Emergency operation
Circuit diagram for swing lock – Emergency operation
Emergency Swing Switch Swing Lock Switch

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
S22
EMERGENCY ON
NORMAL OFF
1 2 3 4
X05
(M-4)
D05
(KES1-2)
J10 (J-20)
(Orange)
J05
(090-20)
11 12 13 8 10 19 20
(DT-12)
8 9 10 11 1 2 1 2 4 5 7 8 9 10
(J-20)
H15
S28
(Pink)
H11 (S-16) P02 (040-20)

8 17 Swing Lock Display
13 GND
A05 V03
Swing Brake
(SWP-16) (DT-2)
Solenoid C02 (DRC - 40)
5 1
SOL 2 Emergency Swing
2 38 Swing Lock Switch
A65
J04 3 4 3 4
A02 C03 (DRC-40)
(J-20) A01
(X-4)
(Green)
21 GND
31 GND
FB1
1 A64 32 GND
10A 33 GND
37 Swing Brake Sol.
SWING LOCK
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-855

Neutral start (engine) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Neutral start (engine)
*When Fuses No.3, 15, 17 (Fuse box 1) and fuse No. 1 (Fuse box 2) are not blown Start
*When travel emergency switch is set to Normal

*When FNR switch is set to Neutral
Is voltage between Does starter relay
*When LH pod is raised (PPC hydraulic lock switch) YES body have good
YES Replace damaged
A27 Pin 1 &
*When personal code has been entered (if active) A chassis normal? connection to
ground
starter relay
NO NO
Defective
connector or
disconnection in YES Is voltage between Correct poor
wiring between R13 Pin 3 & ground
A27 Pin 1 & chassis normal?
R13 Pin 3
NO
Replace damaged YES Is voltage between

relay R13 R13 Pin 6 &
chassis normal?
NO
Defective
Is voltage between YES connector or
R22 Pin 5 & disconnection in
chassis normal? wiring between
R22 Pin 5 &
NO A27 Pin 1
YES
Is voltage between
B R22 Pin 3 &
chassis normal?
NO
Defective
Is voltage between YES connector or
R11 Pin 3 & disconnection in
R11 Pin 3 &
NO R22 Pin 3
YES Is voltage between

C R11 Pin 5 &
chassis normal?
NO
Defective
connector or
Is voltage between YES
disconnection in
H15 Pin 4 &
wiring between
chassis normal?
R11 Pin 5 &
NO H15 Pin 4
Is voltage between
YES H15 Pin 1 & Pin 4 YES Is voltage between
Replace Starter switch
normal with starter H15 Pin 1 &
switch in off position chassis normal?
NO NO
Circuit OK Defective
connector or
disconnection in
wiring between
H15 Pin 1 & FB1
Pin 17
20-856 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Neutral start (engine) cont’d (A)
Neutral start (engine) cont’d (A)

between R13 No disconnection in wiring
pin 1 & chassis between R13 pin 1 &
normal? FB1 pin 3
Yes
Does R13 pin 2 Does P02 pin

have good No 14 have good No Replace
monitor
ground? ground?
Yes Yes

Circuit Yes between R13 disconnection in wiring
ok pin 2 & chassis between R13 pin 2 &
normal? P02 pin 14
No
Replace
damaged relay
R13
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-857

Neutral start (engine) cont’d (B) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Neutral start (engine) cont’d (B)
Does R22 Pin 2

NO
Correct poor have good
ground connection to
ground?
YES
YES Is voltage between

Replace damaged
relay R22 R22 Pin 1 &
chassis normal?
NO
Defective
connector or
Is voltage between YES disconnection in
G72 Pin 10 &
wiring between
chassis normal?
R22 Pin 1 &
NO G72 Pin 10

PPC lever (RH) G72 Pin 7 &
chassis normal?
NO
Defective
connector or
Is voltage between YES disconnection in
S29 Pin 1 & wiring between
chassis normal? G72 Pin 7 &
S29 Pin 1
NO

emergency travel S29 Pin 2 &
switch S96 chassis normal?
NO
Defective
connector or
disconnection in
wiring between
S29 Pin 2 & FB2
Pin 1
20-858 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Neutral start (engine) cont’d (C)
Neutral start (engine) cont’d (C)
Does R11 pin

2 have good No Correct
connection to poor ground
ground?
Yes
Is voltage
Replace
between R11 Yes
damaged
pin 1 & chassis relay R11
normal?
No

between S14 pin Yes disconnection in wiring
3 & chassis between S14 pin 3 &
normal? R11 pin 1
No
Is voltage
Yes Replace
between S14 pin
damaged lock
1 & chassis
switch S14
normal?
No
between FB1 pin 3 &
S14 pin 1
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-859

Neutral start (engine) cont’d (C) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Circuit diagram for neutral start (engine)
J06 15 16 17
J03
(J-20) 18 19
(J-20)
(Pink)
STARTER SWITCH
B BR R1 R2 C ACC
R1
RELAY FOR STARTER CUT RELAY FOR STARTER CUT RELAY FOR STARTER CUT OFF
(PERSONAL CODE) (TRAVEL NEUTRAL)
R13 R11 R22 ACC
ST
J01
(J-20) FB1
(Black)
3
1 2 3 5 6 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 3 5 6 10A
H15
2 4 5 7 11 12 1 2 4
(090-20)
1 2 3 5 6 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 3 5 6 FB1 12
20A
18
10A
P02 (040-20) H11
PERSONAL CODE 14 5
A07
FNR SWITCH
(SWP-16)
PPC HYDRAULIC LOCK SWITCH 6 9 1 2 3 4 5 6
FREE F
LOCK N
A27 R
(X-2)
1 2
S14
(M-3) J02
1 2 3 R S 1 2 3 4 12 13 (J-20) EMERGENCY TRAVEL SWITCH
STARTER (Black) 1 2 3 4
S23 5 6
SAFETY
RELAY
E NORMAL
G72
(DT-4)
1 2 3 4 EMERGENCY
S25
(090-16)
12
13
14
15
C03 (DRC-40) 16
D01
3 5 9 (SWP-8)
J04 10 TRAVEL F
(J-20) 2
6 20 TRAVEL N
30 TRAVEL R
4
A02
A64
NEUTRAL START (ENGINE)
20-860 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Neutral start (engine) cont’d (C)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-861

Emergency travel control – Forward TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Emergency travel control – Forward
*When Fuse No. 1 (Fuse box 2) is not blown

*When emergency travel switch is set to ‘Emergency’
Replace
*When emergency FNR switch is set to ‘F’ damaged
solenoid V06 Start
Yes
Does V06 Is voltage

Correct poor No Pin 2 have good Yes between V06
ground connection to Pin 1 & Chassis
ground? normal?
No
Defective
between R42 Yes disconnection in
normal? V06 Pin 1 &
R42 Pin 5
No
Does R42 Is voltage
No Pin 2 have good Yes
Correct poor between R42
ground connection to Pin 3 & Chassis
ground? normal?
Yes
Is voltage
Replace damaged Yes between R42
relay R42 Pin 1 & Chassis
normal?
No
Defective
connector or Is voltage
disconnection in Yes between S95
S95 Pin 2 & normal? No
R42 Pin 1
No
Is voltage
Replace damaged Yes
between S95
emergency FNR
Pin 1 & Chassis
switch S95
normal?
No
Defective
disconnection in Yes between S96
S96 Pin 1 & S95 normal?
Pin 1 or R42 Pin 3
No
Is voltage
Replace damaged Yes
between S96
emergency travel
Pin 2 & Chassis
switch S96
normal?
No
Defective
connector or
disconnection in
wiring between
S96 Pin 2 & FB2
Pin 1
20-862 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Emergency travel control – Forward
Circuit diagram for travel direction control

Emergency
FNR SW
N
R
Emergency
Travel SW
FNR SW. Emergency
S96 S95
Normal (DT-4)
F
N
R
G72 S29
(DT-12) (DT-12)
FB2
5A
J04
(Green) A02 Fuse
(J-20) (X-4) Box 2
J05
(J-20)
A05 (Pink)
(SWP-16)
J02 (J-20) (Orange)
Pump Controller
A07
(SWP-16) C01 (DRC-24)
D02
2 Travel R Pressure SW.
A01
(X-4)
4
C02 (DRC-40)
6
Travel F Pressure SW.
8
C03 (DRC-40)
Travel F
Travel N
Travel F/R Solenoid
Travel R
Travel N Solenoid
V08
Travel F/R Sw. (DT-2)
A06
(SWP-16)
(OFF) (ON)
Travel Reverse
Press. SW.
S09
(X-2)
V06
Travel Neutral Sw. (DT-2)
Travel Forward
Press. SW.
(OFF) (ON) S10
(X-2)
A53
Backup Alarm (DT-2)
A65 A64
DW91KA
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-863

Emergency travel control - neutral TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Emergency travel control - neutral

When emergency travel switch is set to ‘Emergency’ Start
*When emergency FNR switch is set to ‘N’
Is voltage
Go to ‘Neutral Yes between R22
Start’ section on
Pin 1 & Chassis
fault finding
normal?
No
Defective
between S95 Yes disconnection in
normal? R22 Pin 1 &
No S95 Pin 3
Replace Is voltage
damaged Yes between S95
emergency FNR Pin 1 & Chassis
switch S95 normal?
No
Defective
between S96 Yes disconnection in
normal? S96 Pin 1 &
No S95 Pin 1
Is voltage
Replace damaged Yes
between S96
emergency travel
Pin 2 & Chassis
switch S95
normal?
No
Defective
connector or
disconnection in
wiring between
S95 Pin 2 &
FB2 Pin 1
20-864 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Emergency travel control - neutral

Emergency
FNR SW
N
R
Emergency
Travel SW
FNR SW. Emergency
S96 S95
Normal (DT-4)
F
N
R
G72 S29
(DT-12) (DT-12)
FB2
5A
J04
(Green) A02 Fuse
(J-20) (X-4) Box 2
J05
(J-20)
A05 (Pink)
(SWP-16)
J02 (J-20) (Orange)
Pump Controller
A07
(SWP-16) C01 (DRC-24)
D02
A01
(X-4)
4
C02 (DRC-40)
6
8
C03 (DRC-40)
Travel F
Travel N
Travel F/R Solenoid

Travel R
Travel N Solenoid
V08
A06
(SWP-16)
(OFF) (ON)
Travel Reverse
Press. SW.
S09
(X-2)
V06
Travel Forward
Press. SW.
(OFF) (ON) S10
(X-2)
A53
Backup Alarm (DT-2)
A65 A64
DW91KA
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-865

Emergency travel control - neutral TESTING AND ADJUSTING
20-866 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Emergency travel control – Reverse
Emergency travel control – Reverse
*When Fuse No. 1 (Fuse box 2) is not blown Replace

*When emergency travel switch is set to ‘Emergency’ damaged
Start solenoid
*When emergency FNR switch is set to ‘R’
Yes
Is voltage Does V06

Replace Does travel No Yes No
between V06 Pin 2 have good Correct poor
damaged neutral sol.
Pin 1 & Chassis connection to ground
solenoid V08 Operate correctly
normal? ground?
Yes Yes
No
Does V08 Is voltage Defective connector
Correct poor No Pin 2 have good Yes between V08 Is voltage
between D02 Yes or disconnection in
ground connection to Pin 1 & Chassis wiring between
ground? normal? Pin 4 & Chassis
D02 Pin 4 & V06
normal?
No Pin 1
Defective connector No
Is voltage
or disconnection in Yes Is voltage
between D02 Replace
wiring between between D02 Yes
D02 Pin 2 & V08 Pin 8 & Chassis
normal? diode D02
Pin 1 normal?
No
No
Is voltage
Replace Yes Defective connector
between D02 Is voltage
damaged between R43 Yes or disconnection in
Pin 6 & Chassis
diode D02 wiring between
normal? Pin 5 & Chassis
D02 Pin 8 & R43
normal?
No Pin 5
Defective connector
Is voltage
or disconnection in Yes between R43
wiring between
Pin 5 & Chassis
D02 Pin 6 & R43
normal?
Pin 5
No No
Is voltage
Yes between R43
A
Pin 3 & Chassis
normal?
No
Defective connector
Is voltage
or disconnection in Yes between S96
wiring between
Pin 1 & Chassis
S96 Pin 1 & R43
normal?
Pin 3
No
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-867

Emergency travel control – Reverse cont’d TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Emergency travel control – Reverse cont’d
Does R43 pin

2 have good No Correct poor
ground?
Yes
Is voltage
Yes Replace
between R43
damaged relay
pin 1 & chassis
R43
normal?
No

between S95 Yes disconnection in wiring
pin 4 & chassis between S95 pin 4 &
normal? R43 pin 1
No
Is voltage Replace
between S95 Yes damaged
pin 1 & chassis emergency fnr
normal? switch S95
No

between S96 Yes disconnection in wiring
pin 1 & chassis between S96 pin 1 &
normal? S95 pin 1
No
Is voltage
Yes Replace damaged
between S96
B emergency travel
pin 2 & chassis
switch S96
normal?
No
between S96 pin 2 &
FB2 pin 1
20-868 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Emergency travel control – Reverse cont’d

Emergency
FNR SW
N
R
Emergency
Travel SW
FNR SW. Emergency
S96 S95
Normal (DT-4)
F
N
R
G72 S29
(DT-12) (DT-12)
FB2
5A
J04
(Green) A02 Fuse
(J-20) (X-4) Box 2
J05
(J-20)
A05 (Pink)
(SWP-16)
J02 (J-20) (Orange)
Pump Controller
A07
(SWP-16) C01 (DRC-24)
D02
A01
(X-4)
4
C02 (DRC-40)
6
8
C03 (DRC-40)
Travel F
Travel N
Travel F/R Solenoid

Travel R
Travel N Solenoid
V08
A06
(SWP-16)
(OFF) (ON)
Travel Reverse
Press. SW.
S09
(X-2)
V06
Travel Forward
Press. SW.
(OFF) (ON) S10
(X-2)
A53
Backup Alarm (DT-2)
A65 A64
DW91KA
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-869

Driving lights – Main beam TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Driving lights – Main beam
*Standard notes
*When fuse No.15 & 19 (Fuse box 2) are not blown
*When bulbs are fitted correctly and fully functional
Correct poor
Start
ground
No
Yes Does G13 Pin 1 Yes Is voltage between No

Replace damaged have good Does front left main
G13 Pin 3 & Correct poor
lamp unit connection to beam work?
chassis normal? ground
ground?
No No
Yes
Defective
connector or
Yes Is voltage between Does G12 Pin 1
disconnection in No Is voltage between Yes Yes
FB2 Pin 19 & Does front right have good
wiring between G12 Pin 3 & Replace damaged
chassis normal? main beam work? connection to
FB2 Pin 19 & G13 chassis normal? lamp unit
Pin 3 or G12 Pin3 ground?
No
No
Replace damaged Yes Is voltage between

FB2 Pin 39 &
Fuse box 2 FB2
chassis normal?
No
Defective
connector or
Yes Is voltage between
disconnection in
G4 Pin 5 &
wiring between
chassis normal?
FB2 Pin 39 & G4
Pin 5 No

main beam switch G4 Pin 3 &
chassis normal?
No
Defective
connector or
disconnection in
G105 Pin 3 &
wiring between
chassis normal?
G105 Pin 3 &
G4 Pin 3
No
Replace damaged road Yes Is voltage between

lights switch G105 G105 Pin 5 &
chassis normal?
No
Defective
connector or
disconnection in
wiring between
G105 Pin 5 &
FB2 Pin 15
20-870 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
1 2
G103
ROAD LIGHTS MAIN BEAMS
+ 1 2 3 4 30 56 56B 56A
G105
OFF DIPPED BEAM
PW200/PW220-7E0
POSITION MAIN BEAM
DIPPED FLASH
5 1 2 3 4
2 3 4 5
G4
VEBM949100
2 3 4 12 14 15 16 17 J07 6 9 10 11 9 10 11 12
(J-20)
G05
(DT-12)
(Black)
G02
(SWP-14)
Circuit diagram for driving lights
3 13 14
A99
(SWP-8)
A07
(SWP-16)
15 G51
ENGINE ROOM LAMP
1
A05
(SWP-16)
A86
1
G8
FB2 4 (DT-4)
20A G12
15 2
(DT-6)
RH REAR SIDE LIGHT
4 3
SIDE LIGHT
A91 A84 G10
3
(DT-2) (X-4) (X-2)
15A 1 2 3 2
RIGHT
39 19 R.H MAIN BEAM LICENCE PLATE LIGHT
2 1 2 1
ARM DIPPED BEAM
G7
MARKER
5A (DT-4)
LAMPS G13
36 16 3
(DT-6)
L.H DIPPED BEAM LH REAR SIDE LIGHT
1 2
MAIN BEAM
15A
2
LEFT
38 18
3
SIDE LIGHT A65
5A 4 DRIVING LIGHTS
37 17
20-871
Driving lights – Main beam
Driving lights – Main beam flash TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Driving lights – Main beam flash
*Standard notes
Correct poor
Start
ground
No
Yes Does G13 Pin 1 Yes Is voltage between No

Replace damaged have good Does front left main
lamp unit connection to beam work?
chassis normal? ground
ground?
No No
Yes
Defective No Yes Does G12 Pin 1 Yes

Does front right Is voltage between
connector or have good Replace damaged
main beam work? G12 Pin 3 &
disconnection in Yes Is voltage between connection to lamp unit
chassis normal?
wiring between FB2 Pin 19 & ground?
FB2 Pin 19 & chassis normal?
G13 Pin 3 or G12 No
Pin 3 No

Fuse box 2 FB2 FB2 Pin 39 &
chassis normal?
No
Defective
connector or
disconnection in
G4 Pin 5 &
wiring between
chassis normal?
FB2 Pin 39 &
G4 Pin 5 No

main beam (flash) G4 Pin 2 &
switch chassis normal?
No
Defective
connector or
disconnection in
wiring between
G4 Pin 2 &
FB2 Pin 15
20-872 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
1 2
G103
+ 1 2 3 4 30 56 56B 56A
G105
OFF DIPPED BEAM
PW200/PW220-7E0
POSITION MAIN BEAM
DIPPED FLASH
5 1 2 3 4
2 3 4 5
G4
VEBM949100
2 3 4 12 14 15 16 17 J07 6 9 10 11 9 10 11 12
(J-20)
G05
(DT-12)
(Black)
G02
(SWP-14)
3 13 14
A99
(SWP-8)
A07
(SWP-16)
15 G51
ENGINE ROOM LAMP
1
A05
(SWP-16)
A86
1
G8
FB2 4 (DT-4)
20A G12
15 2
(DT-6)
RH REAR SIDE LIGHT
4 3
SIDE LIGHT
A91 A84 G10
3
(DT-2) (X-4) (X-2)
15A 1 2 3 2
RIGHT
2 1 2 1
ARM DIPPED BEAM
G7
MARKER
5A (DT-4)
LAMPS G13
36 16 3
(DT-6)
1 2
MAIN BEAM
15A
2
LEFT
38 18
3
SIDE LIGHT A65
5A 4 DRIVING LIGHTS
37 17
Driving lights – Main beam flash
20-873
Driving lights – Main beam dipped TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Driving lights – Main beam dipped
*When Fuse No.15 & 18 (Fuse box 2) are not blown

*When bulbs are fully functional & fitted correctly
Start
Correct poor
ground
No
Does G13 Pin Yes

No Is voltage between Yes 1 have good Replace damaged
Correct poor Does front left G13 Pin 2 &
ground dipped beam work? connection to lamp unit
chassis normal? ground?
Yes
No
Does G12 Pin

Yes 1 have good Yes Is voltage between No
Replace damaged Does front right
connection to G12 Pin 2 & No
lamp unit dipped beam work?
ground? chassis normal?
No
disconnection in wiring Yes Is voltage between
between FB2 Pin 18 & FB2 Pin 18 &
G13 Pin 2 or G12 Pin 2 chassis normal?
No

Replace damaged
fuse box 2 FB2 FB2 Pin 38 &
chassis normal?
No
G4 Pin 4 &
between FB2 Pin 38 &
chassis normal?
G4 Pin 4
No

main beam G4 Pin 3 &
switch chassis normal?
No
Defective connector
or disconnection in Yes Is voltage between
wiring between G105 Pin 3 &
G4 Pin 3 & chassis normal?
G105 Pin 3
No
Replace damaged Is voltage between

Yes
road lights switch G105 Pin 5 &
G105 chassis normal?
No
Defective connector
or disconnection in
wiring between
G105 Pin 5 & FB2
Pin 15
20-874 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
1 2
G103
+ 1 2 3 4 30 56 56B 56A
G105
OFF DIPPED BEAM
PW200/PW220-7E0
POSITION MAIN BEAM
DIPPED FLASH
5 1 2 3 4
2 3 4 5
G4
VEBM949100
2 3 4 12 14 15 16 17 J07 6 9 10 11 9 10 11 12
(J-20)
G05
(DT-12)
(Black)
G02
(SWP-14)
3 13 14
A99
(SWP-8)
A07
(SWP-16)
15 G51
ENGINE ROOM LAMP
1
A05
(SWP-16)
A86
1
G8
FB2 4 (DT-4)
20A G12
15 2
(DT-6)
RH REAR SIDE LIGHT
4 3
SIDE LIGHT
A91 A84 G10
3
(DT-2) (X-4) (X-2)
15A 1 2 3 2
RIGHT
2 1 2 1
ARM DIPPED BEAM
G7
MARKER
5A (DT-4)
LAMPS G13
36 16 3
(DT-6)
1 2
MAIN BEAM
15A
2
LEFT
38 18
3
SIDE LIGHT A65
5A 4 DRIVING LIGHTS
37 17
Driving lights – Main beam dipped
20-875
Driving lights – Position lights TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Driving lights – Position lights

Correct poor
Start ground
No
No Yes Does G13 Pin 1 Yes

Correct poor Does front left Is voltage between have good Replace damaged
ground sidelight work? G13 Pin 4 & connection to lamp unit
chassis normal? ground?
Yes
No
No
Yes Does G12 Pin 1 Yes

Replace damaged have good No Defective
lamp unit connection to Is voltage between Yes connector or
Does front right Is voltage between
ground? G12 Pin 4 & disconnection in
sidelight work? FB2 Pin 16 &
chassis normal?
G13 Pin 4 &
No Yes FB2 Pin 16
No
Defective
connector or Yes Is voltage between
disconnection in 1
FB2 Pin 16 &
wiring between
chassis normal?
G12 Pin 4 &
FB2 Pin 16
No
Correct poor
ground
1 No
No Yes Does G8 Pin 2 Yes

Is voltage between have good
Does rear right Replace damaged
Correct poor G8 Pin 3 & connection to
sidelight work? lamp unit
ground chassis normal? ground?
No
No
Does G7 Pin 2 Defective

Yes Yes Is voltage between connector or
Replace damaged have good
G7 Pin 3 & Does rear left Is voltage between Yes
lamp unit connection to disconnection in
chassis normal? sidelight work? FB2 Pin 17 &
ground? wiring between
chassis normal? G8 Pin 3 & FB2
No Pin 17
No
Defective
disconnection in
FB2 Pin 17 &
wiring between
chassis normal? 2
G7 Pin 3 & FB2
Pin 17
No
Correct poor
ground
2 No
Does G51
No Is voltage between Yes have good Yes
Does engine room connection to Replace damaged
G51 Pin 1 &
lamp work? ground when lamp unit
Correct poor chassis normal?
switched on?
ground Yes
No
No
Defective
Yes Does G10 Pin 2 have Yes Is voltage between No
Replace damaged connector or
good connection to G10 Pin 1 & Does license plate Yes disconnection in
lamp unit Is voltage between
ground chassis normal? light work? wiring between
FB2 Pin 16 &
chassis normal? G51 Pin 1 &
No FB2 Pin 16
No
Defective
disconnection in
FB2 Pin 17 &
wiring between
chassis normal? 1
G10 Pin 1 &
FB2 Pin 17
No
20-876 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
1 2
G103
+ 1 2 3 4 30 56 56B 56A
G105
OFF DIPPED BEAM
PW200/PW220-7E0
POSITION MAIN BEAM
DIPPED FLASH
5 1 2 3 4
2 3 4 5
G4
VEBM949100
2 3 4 12 14 15 16 17 J07 6 9 10 11 9 10 11 12
(J-20)
G05
(DT-12)
(Black)
G02
(SWP-14)
3 13 14
A99
(SWP-8)
A07
(SWP-16)
15 G51
ENGINE ROOM LAMP
1
A05
(SWP-16)
A86
1
G8
FB2 4 (DT-4)
20A G12
15 2
(DT-6)
RH REAR SIDE LIGHT
4 3
SIDE LIGHT
A91 A84 G10
3
(DT-2) (X-4) (X-2)
15A 1 2 3 2
RIGHT
2 1 2 1
ARM DIPPED BEAM
G7
MARKER
5A (DT-4)
LAMPS G13
36 16 3
(DT-6)
1 2
MAIN BEAM
15A
2
LEFT
38 18
3
SIDE LIGHT A65
5A 4 DRIVING LIGHTS
37 17
20-877
Driving lights – Position lights
Driving lights – Position lights cont’d (1) and (2) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Driving lights – Position lights cont’d (1) and (2)
2 1
Yes Is voltage between Is voltage between Yes

Replace damaged Replace damaged
FB2 Pin 37 & FB2 Pin 36 & fuse box 2 FB2
fuse box FB2
chassis normal? chassis normal?
No
No
Defective
connector or
Yes disconnection in
Is voltage between
wiring between
G105 Pin 1 &
FB2 Pin 36 &
chassis normal?
G105 Pin 1 or FB2
Pin 37
No
Is voltage between Yes Replace damaged

G105 Pin 5 &
road lights switch
chassis normal?
G105
No
Defective
connector or
disconnection in
wiring between
FB2 Pin 15 &
G105 Pin 5
20-878 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

HIGH BEAM
INDICATOR
1 2
G103
+ 1 2 3 4 30 56 56B 56A
G105
OFF DIPPED BEAM
PW200/PW220-7E0
POSITION MAIN BEAM
DIPPED FLASH
5 1 2 3 4
2 3 4 5
G4
VEBM949100
2 3 4 12 14 15 16 17 J07 6 9 10 11 9 10 11 12
(J-20)
G05
(DT-12)
(Black)
G02
(SWP-14)
3 13 14
A99
(SWP-8)
A07
(SWP-16)
15 G51
ENGINE ROOM LAMP
1
A05
(SWP-16)
A86
1
G8
FB2 4 (DT-4)
20A G12
15 2
(DT-6)
RH REAR SIDE LIGHT
4 3
SIDE LIGHT
A91 A84 G10
3
(DT-2) (X-4) (X-2)
15A 1 2 3 2
RIGHT
2 1 2 1
ARM DIPPED BEAM
G7
MARKER
5A (DT-4)
LAMPS G13
36 16 3
(DT-6)
1 2
MAIN BEAM
15A
2
LEFT
38 18
3
SIDE LIGHT A65
5A 4 DRIVING LIGHTS
37 17
20-879
Driving lights – Position lights cont’d (1) and (2)
Indicators – Right hand TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Indicators – Right hand

Correct poor
ground
Start
No
Correct poor Is voltage between Does G12 Pin 6 Replace
ground Does front right No Yes Yes
G12 Pin 5 & Chassis have good connection to damaged lamp
indicator work?
No normal? ground? unit
Yes No
Does G8 Pin Is voltage
Replace Yes Yes No
2 have good between G8 Does rear right
damaged lamp Defective connector or
connection to Pin 1 & Chassis indicator work? Is voltage between
unit Yes disconnection in wiring
ground? normal? G3 Pin 2 & Chassis
between G12 Pin 5
No normal?
& G3 Pin 2
Defective No
Yes
disconnection in between G3
G8 Pin 1 & normal?
G3 Pin 2
No
Replace
damaged
G3 Pin 5 &
indicator stalk
Chassis normal?
switch
No
Defective connector
Is voltage between Yes or disconnection in
F01 Pin 4 & wiring between
Chassis normal? G3 Pin 5 & F01
Pin 4
No
F01 Pin 3 &
flasher unit
Chassis normal?
No
Defective connector
F01 Pin 3 & G120 Chassis normal?
Pin 8
No
Is voltage between Yes Replace

G120 Pin 6 & damaged Hazard
Chassis normal? switch G120
No
Defective connector
or disconnection in
wiring between
G120 Pin 6 & FB1
Pin 9
20-880 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

G120 Hazard Switch
6 8 2 4 1 3 5 7 10 9
OFF
ON
PW200/PW220-7E0
F01 (KES1-4) INDICATOR STALK
FLASHER UNIT 45A L R

4 3 2 1 LEFT
(L) (B) (E)
NEUTRAL
G101
RIGHT
5 3 2
G3
VEBM949100
1 2
G02 4 5 6
FB1 (SWP-14)
1 2 1 2
18
D10 D11
10A 1 2 5 6 8 12
J05 (J-20) G05
(Pink) (DT-12)
16 17 19 20
15A
A07
(SWP-16) 11 10
G12 G8
(DT-6) (DT-4)
6 2
A01 A02
(X-4) (X-4) 5 1
3 4
FRONT REAR
G13 G7
INDICATOR INDICATOR
(DT-6) (DT-4)
LIGHTS LIGHTS
5 1
Circuit diagram for indicators and hazard warning
6 2
A64
A65
J08 (J-20) 2 3 4 12 13 14
(Black)
INDICATORS & HAZARD WARNING

Indicators – Right hand
20-881
Indicators – Left hand TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Indicators – Left hand
*When Fuse No. 9 (Fuse box 1) is not blown Correct poor

*When bulbs are fitted correctly and fully functional ground
Start
No
Correct poor Is voltage between Does G13 Pin 6 Replace
Does front left No Yes Yes
ground G13 Pin 5 & Chassis have good connection to damaged lamp
indicator work?
No normal? ground? unit
Yes
Does G7 Pin Is voltage No
Replace Yes Yes No
2 have good between G7 Does rear left
damaged lamp Defective connector or
connection to Pin 1 & Chassis indicator work? Is voltage between Yes
unit disconnection in wiring
ground? normal? G3 Pin 3 & Chassis
between G13 Pin 5
normal?
No & G3 Pin 3
Defective
No
disconnection in Yes between G3
G7 Pin 1 & normal?
G3 Pin 3
No
Replace
damaged
G3 Pin 5 &
indicator stalk
Chassis normal?
switch
No
Defective connector
Is voltage between Yes or disconnection in
F01 Pin 4 & wiring between
Chassis normal? G3 Pin 5 & F01
Pin 4
No
F01 Pin 3 &
flasher unit
Chassis normal?
No
Defective connector
F01 Pin 3 & G120 Chassis normal?
Pin 8
No
Is voltage between Yes Replace

G120 Pin 6 & damaged Hazard
Chassis normal? switch G120
No
Defective connector
or disconnection in
wiring between
G120 Pin 6 & FB1
Pin 9
20-882 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

G120 Hazard Switch
6 8 2 4 1 3 5 7 10 9
OFF
ON
PW200/PW220-7E0

4 3 2 1 LEFT
(L) (B) (E)
NEUTRAL
G101
RIGHT
5 3 2
G3
VEBM949100
1 2
G02 4 5 6
FB1 (SWP-14)
1 2 1 2
18
D10 D11
10A 1 2 5 6 8 12
J05 (J-20) G05
(Pink) (DT-12)
16 17 19 20
15A
A07
(SWP-16) 11 10
G12 G8
(DT-6) (DT-4)
6 2
A01 A02
(X-4) (X-4) 5 1
3 4
FRONT REAR
G13 G7
INDICATOR INDICATOR
(DT-6) (DT-4)
LIGHTS LIGHTS
5 1
6 2
A64
A65
J08 (J-20) 2 3 4 12 13 14
(Black)

Indicators – Left hand
20-883
Correct poor
ground
20-884
Start
No
Is voltage Does G12
Correct poor Does front No between Yes Pin 6 have Yes Replace
ground right indicator G12 Pin 5 & good damaged
work? Chassis connection to lamp unit
No normal? ground?
Hazard warning lights
Yes
Does G8 Is voltage
Replace Yes Pin 2 have Yes between No Does rear
Defective
damaged good G8 Pin 1 & right indicator Is voltage
connector or
lamp unit connection to Chassis work? between Yes
disconnection in
ground? normal? G120 Pin 5 &
wiring between
Yes Chassis
No G12 Pin 5 &
normal?
Defective G120 Pin 5
Is voltage
connector or No
Yes between
disconnection in
wiring between
Chassis ground
G8 Pin 1 &
normal?
G120 Pin 5 No
Is voltage Does G13
No
Correct poor Does front left No between Yes Pin 6 have Yes Replace
ground indicator G13 Pin 5 & good damaged
work? Chassis connection to lamp unit

No normal? ground?
Yes
Does G7 Is voltage No
Replace Yes Pin 2 have Yes between No Does rear left
damaged good G7 Pin 1 & indicator Is voltage Defective connector
lamp unit connection to Chassis work? between Yes or disconnection in
ground? normal? G120 Pin 3 & wiring between
Chassis G13 Pin 5 & G120
No normal? Pin 3
Defective connector Is voltage No
or disconnection in Yes between
G7 Pin 1 & G120 Chassis
Pin 3 normal?
No
Is voltage
Yes between
Replace damaged
G120 Pin 1 &
Hazard switch G120
Chassis
normal?
No
Defective
Is voltage
connector or
Yes between
disconnection in
F01 Pin 4 &
wiring between
Chassis
F01 Pin 4 &
PW200/PW220-7E0
normal?
G120 Pin 1
No
Is voltage
Replace Yes between
damaged flasher F01 Pin 3 &
unit F01 Chassis
normal?
No
A
VEBM949100
G120 Hazard Switch
6 8 2 4 1 3 5 7 10 9
OFF
ON
PW200/PW220-7E0

4 3 2 1 LEFT
(L) (B) (E)
NEUTRAL
G101
RIGHT
5 3 2
G3
VEBM949100
1 2
G02 4 5 6
FB1 (SWP-14)
1 2 1 2
18
D10 D11
10A 1 2 5 6 8 12
J05 (J-20) G05
(Pink) (DT-12)
16 17 19 20
15A
A07
(SWP-16) 11 10
G12 G8
(DT-6) (DT-4)
6 2
A01 A02
(X-4) (X-4) 5 1
3 4
FRONT REAR
G13 G7
INDICATOR INDICATOR
(DT-6) (DT-4)
LIGHTS LIGHTS
5 1
6 2
A64
A65
J08 (J-20) 2 3 4 12 13 14
(Black)

20-885
Hazard warning lights cont’d (A) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Hazard warning lights cont’d (A)
Defective
connector or
Is voltage between Yes disconnection in
G120 Pin 4 & wiring between
chassis normal
G120 Pin 4 &
F01 Pin 3
Yes
Is voltage
between G120 Yes Replace damaged
Pin 2 & Chassis Hazard switch G120
normal?
No
Defective
connector or
disconnection in
wiring between
G120 Pin 2 &
FB1 Pin 18
20-886 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

G120 Hazard Switch
6 8 2 4 1 3 5 7 10 9
OFF
ON
PW200/PW220-7E0
4 3 2 1 LEFT
(L) (B) (E)
NEUTRAL
G101
RIGHT
5 3 2
G3
VEBM949100
1 2
G02 4 5 6
FB1 (SWP-14)
1 2 1 2
18
D10 D11
10A 1 2 5 6 8 12
J05 (J-20) G05
(Pink) (DT-12)
16 17 19 20
15A
A07
(SWP-16) 11 10
G12 G8
(DT-6) (DT-4)
6 2
A01 A02
(X-4) (X-4) 5 1
3 4
FRONT REAR
G13 G7
INDICATOR INDICATOR
(DT-6) (DT-4)
LIGHTS LIGHTS
5 1
6 2
A64
A65
J08 (J-20) 2 3 4 12 13 14
(Black)

Hazard warning lights cont’d (A)
20-887
Swing lock proximity switch TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Swing lock proximity switch
*With machine upper structure locked in the travel position
Start
Is Voltage between No Is Voltage between No Replace

A90 Pin 1 & chassis C01 Pin 16 & chassis damaged
normal normal controller
Yes
Yes
A90 Pin 1
Is Voltage between No Is Voltage between No Replace

A90 Pin 2 & chassis C02 Pin 28 & chassis damaged
normal normal controller
Yes
Yes
A90 Pin 2
Is Voltage between No Replace damaged

A90 Pin 3 & chassis proximity switch A90
normal
Yes
Does A90 Pin 3 have No Does C01 Pin 10 have No Replace

a good ground a good ground damaged
connection connection controller
Yes Yes
Circuit OK Defective connector or

A90 Pin 3
20-888 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Swing lock proximity switch
Brake and swing lock proximity switches
Main Controller
C01 (DRC-24)
10 GND (Sig)
16 Travel PPC Press. Power
C02 (DRC-40)
28 Swing Proximity
A06 A99
(SWP-16) (SWP-8)
3 13 8
A90
(DT-3) 2 3
1
Swing Proximity Switch
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-889

Swing lock proximity switch TESTING AND ADJUSTING
20-890 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Troubleshooting of hydraulic and mechanical system

(H-Mode)
System chart for hydraulic and mechanical systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-903
H-1 – All work equipment lacks power, or travel and swing speeds are slow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-908
H-2 – Engine speed sharply drops or engine stalls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-909
H-3 – No work equipment, travel or swing move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-910
H-4 – Abnormal noise is heard from around hydraulic pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-911
H-5 – Auto-decelerator does not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-912
H-6 – Fine control mode does not function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-913

H-7 – Boom moves slowly or lacks power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-914
H-8 – Arm moves slowly or lacks power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-915
H-9 – Bucket moves slowly or lacks power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-916
H-10 – Work equipment does not move in its single operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-917
H-11 – Work equipment hydraulic drift is too fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-918
H-12 – Work equipment has big time lag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-919
H-13 – Other work equipment moves when relieving single circuit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-920
H-14 – One-touch power max. switch does not operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-921
H-15 – In compound operation, work equipment with larger load moves slowly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-922
H-16 – In swing and boom RAISE operation, boom moves slowly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-923
H-17 – In swing and travel, travel speed drops sharply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-924
H-18 – Travel speed does not switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-925
H-19 – Travel speed does not shift, or it is too slow or fast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-926
H-20 – Machine does not swing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-927
H-21 – Swing acceleration is poor, or swing speed is slow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-928
H-22 – Excessive overrun when stopping swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-929

H-23 – There is big shock when stopping swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-930
H-24 – There is loud abnormal noise caused when stopping swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-931
H-25 – Swing natural drift is too big . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-932

H-26 – Swing speed is faster than specified swing speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-933
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-901

Troubleshooting of hydraulic and mechanical system (H-Mode) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Troubleshooting of engine (S-mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-934
S-1 – Starting performance is poor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-937
S-2 – Engine does not start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-938
S-3 – Engine does not pick up smoothly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-941

S-4 – Engine stops during operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-942
S-5 – Engine does not rotate smoothly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-943
S-6 – Engine lack output (or lacks power). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-944

S-7 – Exhaust smoke is black (incomplete combustion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-945
S-8 – Oil consumption is excessive (or exhaust smoke is blue). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-946
S-9 – Oil becomes contaminated quickly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-947

S-10 – Fuel consumption is excessive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-948
S-11 – Oil is in coolant (or coolant spurts back or coolant level goes down) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-949
S-12 – Oil pressure drops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-950

S-13 – Oil level rises (entry of coolant/fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-951
S-14 – Coolant temperature becomes too high (overheating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-952
S-15 – Abnormal noise is made . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-953
S-16 – Vibration is excessive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-954
20-902 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING System chart for hydraulic and mechanical systems
System chart for hydraulic and mechanical systems

32 See Detail D
Pressure
relief valve
Travel PPC valve
27 See Detail C
Travel
2P
Boom Travel creep SOL.
PPC
8
Travel neutral SOL.
5 8
18 17
25 See Detail E
Suspension lock valve SOL.
24
Swing brake SOL.
23
1 2 9 12 15 16 2-stage relief SOL.
PPC lock SOL.
34
7
6
5 Travel Forward / Reverse SOL.

Pump pressure
11
36 10
Stabilizer / Boom up SOL.

Pump 9
Gear
Pump 14
13
Stabilizer / Boom down SOL.
12
28
2-stage back pressure SOL.
33
29 See Detail C
Clutch control Hi - Lo SOL.
30
19 20
This is a system chart that has been

drawn up by simplifying the whole hy-
draulic circuit chart. Use it as a reference 21 22
material when troubleshooting the hy-

draulic and mechanical systems.
Proportional
Control
Valve
Block
Ab
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-903

System chart for hydraulic and mechanical systems TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Control Valve
LS
LS
LS
Dump Dig
LS
Dump Dig
LS
Ext. Ret.
LS
Up Down
LS
Fwd. Rev.
LS
Up Down
LS
26
Left Right
LS
LS
AB
20-904 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING System chart for hydraulic and mechanical systems
Detail A Detail B
Up
Down
Up Down
Detail C
29
27 33
B
A
Travel
motor
Powershift
Transmission
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-905

System chart for hydraulic and mechanical systems TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Accumulators
Detail D
35
To Service
32 brakes
Brake valve
30
Detail E
35
LH Steer
Priority
valve
LH Steer
RH Steer
RH Steer
32
25
Orbitrol valve
20-906 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100


• Troubleshooting Table and Related Circuit Diagram collec-
tively carry the following information. Carry out troubleshoot-
ing work after fully grasping their contents.
Failure information Phenomena occurring on machine
Relative information Information on occurred failures and troubleshooting
Cause Standard value in normal condition and references for troubleshooting

Presumed cause and standard value in normal condition
Cause for presumed

failure <Contents>
3 (The attached No. for • The standard values in normal condition by which to judge "good" or "no good" about
filing and reference presumed causes.
purpose only. It does not stand for • References for making judgement of "good" or "no good"
any priority)
4
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-907

H-1 – All work equipment lacks power, or travel and swing speeds are slow TESTING AND ADJUSTING
H-1 – All work equipment lacks power, or travel and swing

speeds are slow
Failure information • All the work equipment lacks power, or their travel and swing speeds are slow.
Relative information • Set the working mode at P mode for troubleshooting.
• Stop engine for preparations. Start troubleshooting at engine high idling.
Control lever Unload pressure

1 Malfunctioning of unload valve
3.38 ± 1.0 MPa
All control levers in NEUTRAL
{34.5 ± 10kg/cm 2}
Control lever Main relief pressure

Improper adjustment or malfunc- 34.8 – 37.3 MPa
2 Arm, DIGGING
tioning of main relief valve
{355 – 380kg/cm2}
If the pressure does not return to normal condition even after the adjustment, malfunction-
ing of main relief valve or its internal failure is suspected. In that case, check the valve itself.
Stop engine for preparations. Start troubleshooting at engine high idling.

Malfunctioning of relief valve on Control lever Control circuit source pressure

3
solenoid block
3.5 – 3.8 MPa
All control levers in NEUTRAL
{35.7 – 38.8kg/cm2}
Oil pressure to be
Measurement condition Oil pressure ratio
measured
Improper adjustment or malfunc-
4 Pump delivery pressure Swing lock: ON 1
tioning of PC valve
PC valve output pressure Arm digging relief Approx. 0.6 (3/5)
If the oil pressure does not return to normal condition even after the adjustment, malfunc-
tioning of PC valve or its internal failure is suspected. In that case, check the valve itself.
Travel speed Travel mode LS-EPC output pressure

5 Malfunctioning of LS-EPC valve 3.5 - 3.8 MPa
Lo NEUTRAL
{35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm2}
Hi Travel F/R lever 0{0}
Oil pressure ratio

Oil pressure to be
measured Travel without load travel
NEUTRAL
Improper adjustment or malfunc- pedal held at half stroke
6
tioning of LS valve Pump delivery pressure 1
Nearly equal pressure
LS valve output pressure Approx. 0.6 (3/5)
tioning of LS valve or its internal failure is suspected. In that case, check the valve itself.
7 Malfunctioning of servo piston Malfunctioning of servo piston is suspected. Check the piston itself.
If none of the above listed causes is detected, the piston pump is suspected of deteriorated
8 Piston pump defective
performance, malfunctioning or internal failure.
20-908 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING H-2 – Engine speed sharply drops or engine stalls
H-2 – Engine speed sharply drops or engine stalls
Failure information • The engine speed sharply drops or the engine stalls.
Relative information • Relative Information
Control lever Main relief pressure

1 Arm, DIGGING
tioning of main relief valve {355 – 380kg/cm2}
tioning of the main relief valve or its internal failure is suspected. In that case, check the
valve itself.
Oil pressure to be measured Measurement condition Oil pressure ratio
Improper adjustment or malfunc- Pump delivery pressure Swing lock: ON 1

2
tioning of PC valve Arm digging relief
PC valve output pressure Approx. 0.6 (3/5)
tioning of the PC valve or its internal failure is suspected. In that case, check the valve itself.
Oil pressure ratio
Oil pressure to be measured Travel without load

Travel
(travel pedal held at half
Improper adjustment or malfunc- NEUTRAL
3 stroke)
tioning of LS valve
Pump delivery pressure 1
Nearly equal pressure
tioning of the LS valve or its internal failure is suspected. In that case, check the valve itself.
Orifice or filter in servo equipment The orifice or filter in the pump servo equipment is suspected of clogging. Check the equip-
4
clogged ment itself.
5 Malfunction of servo piston The servo piston is suspected of malfunction. Check the piston itself.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-909

H-3 – No work equipment, travel or swing move TESTING AND ADJUSTING
H-3 – No work equipment, travel or swing move
Failure information • No work equipment or travel and swing functions can be set in motion.
Relative information • Set the working mode at P mode for the troubleshooting.

Safety lock lever Main relief pressure

Malfunctioning of PPC lock sole-
1 Locked 0{0}
noid valve
3.5 – 3.8 MPa
Released
{35.7 – 38.8kg/cm2}
Malfunction of relief valve in sole- Control lever Control circuit source pressure
2
noid valve block.
3.5 – 3.8 MPa
All control levers in NEUTRAL position
{35.7 – 38.8kg/cm2}
The piston pump is suspected of malfunctioning or an internal failure. Diagnose it in the fol-
lowing manner.
3 Piston pump defective
• Remove the oil pressure measurement plug and crank the engine. If oil flows out, it is in
normal condition.
It is presumed that the pump shaft does not rotate due to some internal failure of the
4 Damper defective
damper. Check the damper itself.
20-910 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING H-4 – Abnormal noise is heard from around hydraulic pump
H-4 – Abnormal noise is heard from around hydraulic

pump
Failure information • An abnormal noise is heard from around the hydraulic pump.
Relative information —

1 Hydraulic oil level lowered Make a visual check.
2 Quality of hydraulic oil bad Air may have mixed with the oil. Make a visual check.
Hydraulic tank cap breather It is presumed that the breather in the cap of hydraulic tanks is clogged, thereby causing
3
clogged negative pressure inside the tank. Make a visual check.
It is presumed that the strainer in the hydraulic tank is clogged, thereby causing negative
4 Hydraulic tank strainer clogged
pressure in the suction circuit. Make a visual check.
5 Piston pump defective The piston pump is suspected of an internal failure. Check the pump itself.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-911

H-5 – Auto-decelerator does not work TESTING AND ADJUSTING
H-5 – Auto-decelerator does not work
Failure information • The auto-decelerator does not work.
• This troubleshooting mode is applied when the auto-decelerator does not work, while operating the travel
control pedal. (A shuttle valve is provided between PPC valve and the hydraulic switch only in the travel cir-
cuit -actually located inside PPC valve)
• Set the working mode at P mode for the troubleshooting.

dard value in normal condition
Presumed cause and stan-
Travel mode PPC valve output pressure
Malfunctioning of NEUTRAL 0{0}

1 travel PPC
(solenoid valve)
3.5 - 3.8 MPa
Operation
{35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm2}
20-912 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING H-6 – Fine control mode does not function
H-6 – Fine control mode does not function
Failure information • The fine control mode poorly functions or its response is slow.
LS-EPC valve output pres-

Travel speed Travel mode
sure
Malfunctioning of LS-
1
EPC valve 3.5 - 3.8 MPa
Lo NEUTRAL
{35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm2}
Hi F/R 0{0}
Orifice in LS circuit
2 The orifice in the LS circuit is presumed to be clogged. Check the orifice itself.
clogged
Oil pressure ratio
Oil pressure to be measured Travel without load

TRAVEL
Improper adjustment (travel pedal held at half
NEUTRAL
3 or malfunctioning of stroke)
LS valve Pump delivery pressure 1
Nearly equal oil pressure
If the oil pressure does not return to normal condition even after the adjustment, malfunctioning
of the LS valve or its internal failure is suspected. In that case, check the valve itself.
Malfunctioning of
4 Malfunctioning of the servo piston is suspected. Check the piston itself.
servo piston
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-913

H-7 – Boom moves slowly or lacks power TESTING AND ADJUSTING
H-7 – Boom moves slowly or lacks power
Failure information • The boom moves slowly or lacks power
Boom lever PPC valve output pressure

Malfunctioning of right PPC valve
1 NEUTRAL 0{0}
(in boom circuit)
3.5 - 3.8 MPa

RAISE or LOWER
{35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm2}
Malfunctioning of boom control

2 The spool in the boom control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself.
valve (spool)

The pressure compensation valve in the boom control valve is presumed to malfunction.
3 valve (pressure compensation
Check the valve itself.
valve)
Malfunctioning of boom control The regeneration valve in the boom control valve or the seal is presumed to malfunction.
4
valve (regeneration valve) Check the valve itself.
Malfunctioning of safety valve or The safety valve is presumed to malfunction, or the seal is suspected to be defective.
5
seal defective Check the valve itself.

The suction valve in the boom control valve is presumed to malfunction, or the seal is sus-
6 valve (suction valve) or seal
pected to be defective.
defective

The safety and suction valves in the boom control valve are presumed to malfunction, or
7 valve (safety and suction valves)
the seal is suspected to be defective. Check those valves themselves.
or seal defective
8 Boom cylinder defective Boom lever Amount oil leakage from cylinder
Raise relief 20 cc/min
20-914 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING H-8 – Arm moves slowly or lacks power
H-8 – Arm moves slowly or lacks power
Failure information • The arm moves slowly, or lacks power.

Arm lever PPC valve output pressure

Malfunctioning of left PPC valve
1 NEUTRAL 0{0}
(arm circuit)
3.5 - 3.8 MPa
DIGGING or DUMPING
{35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm 2}
Malfunctioning of arm control

2 The spool in the arm control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself.
valve (spool)

The pressure compensation valve in the arm control valve is presumed to malfunction.
valve)
Malfunctioning of arm control The generation valve in the arm control valve is presumed to malfunction, or the seal is sus-
4
valve (regeneration valve) pected to be defective. Check the valve itself.

The safety and suction valves in the arm control valve are presumed to malfunction, or the
seal is suspected of defect. Check those valves themselves.
or seal defective
6 Arm cylinder defective Arm lever Amount oil leakage from cylinder
Digging relief 20 cc/min
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-915

H-9 – Bucket moves slowly or lacks power TESTING AND ADJUSTING
H-9 – Bucket moves slowly or lacks power
Failure information • The bucket moves slowly, or lacks power.
Bucket lever PPC valve output pressure

Malfunctioning of right PPC valve
1 NEUTRAL 0{0}
(bucket circuit)
3.5 - 3.8 MPa

DIGGING or DUMPING
{35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm2}
Malfunctioning of bucket control The spool in the bucket control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve
2
valve (spool) itself.
Malfunctioning of bucket control

The pressure compensation valve in the bucket control valve is presumed to malfunc-
tion. Check the valve itself.
valve)
Malfunctioning of bucket control

The safety and suction valves in the bucket control valve are presumed to malfunc-
tion, or the seal is suspected to be defective. Check those valves themselves.
or seal defective
5 Bucket cylinder defective Bucket lever Amount oil leakage from cylinder
20-916 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING H-10 – Work equipment does not move in its single operation
H-10 – Work equipment does not move in its single opera-

tion
• The boom does not move when operated independently.

Failure information • The arm does not move when operated independently.
• The bucket does not move when operated independently.

Work equipment control lever PPC valve output pressure

1 Malfunctioning of PPC valve NEUTRAL 0{0}
3.5 - 3.8 MPa

Operation
{35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm2}
Malfunctioning of work equipment The spool in the work equipment control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the
2
control valve (spool) valve itself.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-917

H-11 – Work equipment hydraulic drift is too fast TESTING AND ADJUSTING
H-11 – Work equipment hydraulic drift is too fast
Failure information (1) Hydraulic drift of the boom is a bit too fast.
Relative information Set the working mode at P mode for the troubleshooting.


dard value in normal
1 Boom cylinder defective Boom control lever Amount oil leakage from cylinder
condition
Raise relief 20 cc/min
Boom control lever (lock valve) The seal at lock valve in the boom control lever is suspected to be defective. Check
2
seal defective the valve itself.
Seal at safety valve for lock valve The seal at the safety valve in the lock valve is suspected to be defective. Check the
3
defective valve itself.
Failure information (2) Hydraulic drift of the arm is a bit too fast.

1 Arm cylinder defective Arm control lever Amount oil leakage from cylinder
The seal for safety and suction valves in the arm control valve is suspected to be
defective. Check the valve itself.
Arm control valve (safety and
2 Whether the seal is defective or not may well be determined by changing for other
suction valves) seal defective
safety and suction valves. (Do not attempt to change them for the safety and suction
valves for the boom LOWER and the lock valve, because the set pressure differs)
Arm control valve (spool) seal The seal for spool in the arm control valve is suspected to be defective. Check the
3
defective seal itself.
Arm control valve (pressure com- The seal for pressure compensation valve in the arm control valve is suspected to be
4
pensation valve) seal defective defective. Check the seal itself.
Failure information (3) Hydraulic drift of the bucket is a bit too fast.
1 Bucket cylinder defective Bucket control lever Amount oil leakage from cylinder
The seal for the safety and suction valves in the bucket control lever is suspected to
be defective. Check the seal itself.
Bucket control valve (safety and
2 Whether the seal is defective or not may well be determined by changing for other
suction valves) seal defective
safety and suction valves. (Do not attempt to change them for the safety and suction
valves for the boom LOWER and the lock valve, because the set pressure differs)
Bucket control valve (spool) seal The seal for spool in the bucket control valve is suspected to be defective. Check the
3
defective seal itself.
Bucket control valve (pressure

The seal for pressure compensation valve in the bucket control valve is suspected to
4 compensation valve) seal defec-
be defective. Check the seal itself.
tive
20-918 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING H-12 – Work equipment has big time lag
H-12 – Work equipment has big time lag
Failure information • The work equipment has a big time lag.
LS-EPC valve output

Travel speed Travel mode
pressure
1 Malfunctioning of LS-EPC valve
3.5 - 3.8 MPa

Lo NEUTRAL
{35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm2}
Hi Operation 0{0}
Malfunctioning of control valve

The regeneration valve in the control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the
2 (regeneration valve) - with boom
valve itself.
and arm only
The safety and suction valves of the control valve are presumed to malfunction.
Check those valves themselves directly.
Malfunctioning of control valves • For the arm and boom, whether they are defective or not may well be determined
3
(safety & suction valve) by changing them for other safety and suction valves. (Do not attempt to change
them for the safety and suction valves for the boom LOWER and the lock valve,
because each set pressure differs)
Malfunctioning of control valve The pressure compensation valve of the control valve is presumed to malfunction.
4
(pressure compensation valve) Check the valve itself directly.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-919

H-13 – Other work equipment moves when relieving single circuit TESTING AND ADJUSTING
H-13 – Other work equipment moves when relieving single

circuit
Failure information • Other work equipment moves when relieving the single circuit of specific work equipment.

Presumed cause and
standard value in
normal condition
Control valve (pressure compen- The seal for pressure compression valve in the control valve is suspected to be
1
sation valve) seal defective defective. Check the seal itself.
20-920 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING H-14 – One-touch power max. switch does not operate
H-14 – One-touch power max. switch does not operate
Failure information • The one-touch power max. switch does not operate.

standard value in normal condition

Presumed cause and
Swing lock switch Solenoid valve output pressure

Malfunctioning of 2-stage sole-
1 OFF 0{0}
noid valve
3.5 - 3.8 MPa
ON
{35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm2}
2 Malfunctioning of main relief valve The main relief valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-921

H-15 – In compound operation, work equipment with larger load moves slowly TESTING AND ADJUSTING
H-15 – In compound operation, work equipment with larg-

er load moves slowly
Failure information • In a compound operation, work equipment with larger load tends to move slowly.
Relative information —

The pressure compensation valve for the work equipment with larger load is pre-
sumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself.
Combination of compound operation Work equipment with larger load
Malfunctioning of pressure com- Boom RAISE + arm DIGGING Boom RAISE

1 pensation valve for work equip-
Boom RAISE + arm DUMPING Arm DUMPING
ment with larger load
Boom RAISE + bucket DIGGING Boom RAISE
Arm DUMPING + bucket DIGGING Arm DUMPING
Boom LOWER + arm DUMPING Arm DUMPING
20-922 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING H-16 – In swing and boom RAISE operation, boom moves slowly
H-16 – In swing and boom RAISE operation, boom moves

slowly
Failure information • In a compound operation of swing + boom RAISE, the boom tends to move slowly.
• If the boom moves slowly in the single operation of boom RAISE, carry out the "Boom moves slowly or
Relative information lacks power" checks first H-7 (See chapter 20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING "H-7 – Boom moves slowly or
lacks power" on page20-914.)

Malfunctioning of swing & boom The swing & boom control valves are presumed to malfunction, or the seal is sus-
1
control valves or seal defective pected to be defective. Check the valves and seals.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-923

H-17 – In swing and travel, travel speed drops sharply TESTING AND ADJUSTING
H-17 – In swing and travel, travel speed drops sharply
Failure information • In a compound operation of swing + travel, the travel speed drops sharply.
• If the travel speed is slow in the single operation of travel, carry out the "Travel speed does not shift or it is
Relative information too slow or fast" checks first H-19 (See chapter 20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING "H-19 – Travel speed does
not shift, or it is too slow or fast" on page20-926.)

Malfunctioning of travel and swing The travel & swing control valves are presumed to malfunction. Check both of them
1
control valves. directly.
20-924 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING H-18 – Travel speed does not switch
H-18 – Travel speed does not switch
Failure information • The machine's travel speed is slow.
Malfunctioning of travel PPC Travel control lever PPC valve output pressure
1
valve
3.5 - 3.8 MPa
Forward or reverse
{35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm 2}

Malfunctioning of self-pressure Control lever Control circuit source pressure

2
decompression valve
All control levers and pedals in 3.5 - 3.8 MPa
NEUTRAL {35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm 2}

Travel speed Travel control pedal
sure
Approx. 2.9 MPa
Lo NEUTRAL
{approx. 30 kg/cm 2}
Hi Travel control pedal 0 {0}
Malfunction of travel control valve

4 The spool in the travel control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the spool itself.
(spool)
Malfunctioning of travel control

The pressure compensation valve in the travel control valve is presumed to malfunction.
valve)
Malfunctioning of travel control The suction valve in the travel control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve
6
valve (suction valve) itself.
7 Malfunction of travel motor Travel control pedal Amount of oil leakage from travel motor
Travel relief 6 l/min
8 Travel speed does not switch Malfunction of speed sensing system
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-925

H-19 – Travel speed does not shift, or it is too slow or fast TESTING AND ADJUSTING
H-19 – Travel speed does not shift, or it is too slow or fast
Failure information • Travel speed does not shift, or it is either too fast or slow.
Travel speed Travel control pedal Monitoring [15]

Lo 940 mA
Fine control
Creep (to the extent that the 583 mA
decelerator is released)
Hi 0 mA

Travel speed Travel control pedal
sure
3.5 - 3.8 MPa

Lo NEUTRAL
{35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm2}
Hi Operation 0 {0}
Transmission clutch con-

Travel speed Park brake valve
trol solenoid feed
Malfunctioning of transmission
2
clutch control solenoid valve ON 0 {0}
Lo or Hi 5 - 5.5 MPa
OFF
{51 - 56 kg/cm2}
Malfunctioning of travel motor The travel motor is presumed to malfunction when shifting speed. Check the speed shifting
3
(speed shifting) portion directly.
20-926 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING H-20 – Machine does not swing
H-20 – Machine does not swing
Failure information (1) • The machine swings neither to the right nor to the left.
Swing Solenoid valve

Malfunctioning of swing parking
1 NEUTRAL 0 {0}
brake solenoid valve
3.5 - 3.8 MPa
Operation
{35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm 2}
Malfunctioning of swing motor The parking brake portion of the swing motor is presumed to malfunction.
2
(parking brake) Check it directly.
Swing lock switch Swing control lever Swing relief pressure

3 tioning of swing motor (safety 28.4 – 28.9 MPa
ON Swing relief
valve) {290 – 295 kg/cm2}
If the oil pressure does not return to normal condition even after the adjustment, the safety
valve is presumed to malfunction, or suspected of an internal failure. Check the valve itself.
4 Swing motor defective Swing control lever Amount of oil leakage from swing motor
Swing relief Below 21 cc/min
The swing machinery is suspected of an internal failure. Check the inside of the swing
machinery directly.
5 Swing machinery defective
• A failure inside the swing machinery may well be determined by an abnormal noise from
within, abnormal heat generated or metal dust or chips contained in the drained oil.
Failure information (2) • The machine does not swing in one direction.

Left control lever PPC valve output pressure

1 Malfunctioning of PPC valve NEUTRAL 0 {0}
3.5 - 3.8 MPa

Swing operation
{35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm 2}
Malfunctioning of swing control

2 The spool in the swing control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the spool itself.
valve (spool)
The seal in the suction valve of the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check the seal
Swing motor (suction valve) seal itself.
3
defective • Whether the seal is defective or not may well be determined by swapping the right and
left suction valves and watching if there is any change.
The seal in the check valve of the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check the seal itself.
Swing motor (check valve) seal
4 • Whether the seal is defective or not may well be determined by swapping the right and
defective
left check valves and watching the result.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-927

H-21 – Swing acceleration is poor, or swing speed is slow TESTING AND ADJUSTING
H-21 – Swing acceleration is poor, or swing speed is slow
Failure information (1) • Swing acceleration is poor, or swing speed is slow.

The LS shuttle valves for all the control valves are presumed to malfunction. Check them
1 Malfunctioning of LS shuttle valve
directly.
Malfunctioning of swing motor

2 The parking brake portion of the swing motor is presumed to malfunction. Check it directly.
(parking brake)

3 tioning of swing motor (safety 28.4 – 28.9 MPa
ON Swing relief
valve) {290 – 295 kg/cm2}
If the oil pressure does not return to normal condition even after the adjustment, the safety
valve is presumed to malfunction, or suspected of an internal failure. Check the valve itself.
Swing control lever Amount of oil leakage from swing motor

4 Swing motor defective
Failure information (2) • Swing acceleration is poor only on one side, or swing speed is slow.

Swing control lever PPC valve output pressure

3.5 - 3.8 MPa

Left or right
{35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm2}

2 • The spool in the swing control valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself.
valve (spool)
Malfunctioning of swing motor • The pressure compensation valve in the swing motor is presumed to malfunction. Check
3
(pressure compensation valve) the valve itself.
The seal in the suction valve of the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check the seal
Swing motor (suction valve) seal itself.
4
defective • Whether the seal is defective or not may well be determined by swapping the right and
left suction valves and watching the result.
The seal in the check valve of the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check the seal itself.
5 • Whether the seal is defective or not may well be determined by swapping the right and
defective
left check valves and watching the result.
20-928 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING H-22 – Excessive overrun when stopping swing
H-22 – Excessive overrun when stopping swing
Failure information (1) • The work equipment overruns excessively when stopping swing.


1 tioning of swing motor (safety ON Swing relief
{290 – 295 kg/cm2}
valve)
If the oil pressure does not return to normal condition even after the adjustment, the
safety valve is presumed to malfunction, or suspected of an internal failure. Check
the valve itself.
2 Swing motor defective Control lever Amount of oil leakage from swing motor
Failure information (2) • Swing acceleration is poor only on one side, or swing speed is slow.

3.5 - 3.8 MPa

Left or right
{35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm2}
The PPC slow return valve is suspected of clogging. Check the valve itself.
Swing PPC slow return valve
2
clogged • Whether the valve is clogged or not may well be determined by swapping the right
and left valves and watching the result.

3 The spool in the swing control valve is resumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself.
valve (spool)
The seal in the suction valve of the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check the
seal itself.
Swing motor (suction valve) seal
4
defective
• Whether the seal is defective or not may well be determined by swapping the right
and left suction valves and watching the result.
The seal in the check valve of the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check the seal
itself.
5
defective
and left check valves and watching the result.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-929

H-23 – There is big shock when stopping swing TESTING AND ADJUSTING
H-23 – There is big shock when stopping swing
Failure information • There is a big shock caused when stopping a swing motion.



Malfunctioning of swing PPC
1 NEUTRAL 0 {0}
valve
3.5 - 3.8 MPa
Left or right
{35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm2}
The swing PPC slow return valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself.
Malfunctioning of swing PPC slow
2
return valve • Whether the valve malfunctions or not may well be determined by swapping the
right and left valves and watching the result.
20-930 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING H-24 – There is loud abnormal noise caused when stopping swing
H-24 – There is loud abnormal noise caused when stop-

ping swing
Failure information • There is a loud abnormal noise caused when stopping a swing motion.
Malfunctioning of back pressure

1 The backpressure valve is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve itself.
valve
Malfunction of swing motor The safety valve in the swing motor is presumed to malfunction. Check the valve
2
(safety valve) itself.
The seal in suction valve of the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check the seal
itself.
Malfunction of swing motor (suc-
3
tion valve)
and left valves and watching the result.
The swing machinery is suspected of an internal failure. Check the inside of the
machinery itself.
4 Swing machinery defective
• A failure inside the swing machinery may well be determined by monitoring abnor-
mal noise, abnormal heat generated or metal dust or chips contained in the
drained oil.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-931

H-25 – Swing natural drift is too big TESTING AND ADJUSTING
H-25 – Swing natural drift is too big
Failure information (1) • Natural drift of the swing is too big (when the parking brake is activated).
• When the emergency swing release switch is in the OFF position (this is a normal condition), the swing and
parking brake is activated and the swing is fixed with a disc brake.

Swing control lever Solenoid valve output pressure

Swing and parking brake solenoid
1 NEUTRAL 0 {0}
valve malfunctioned
3.5 - 3.8 MPa
Left or right
{35.7 - 38.8 kg/cm2}
Swing motor (parking brake por- The parking portion of the swing motor is suspected of malfunctioning and interior
2
tion) malfunctioned failure. Check that portion directly.
Failure information (2) • Natural drift of the swing is too big (when the parking brake is released).
• When the emergency swing release switch is in the ON condition (this is an emergent condition), the swing
and parking brake is released and the swing is retained only hydraulically.
Swing control valve (spool) mal- The seal in the spool of the swing control valve is suspected of defect. Check the
1
functioned spool itself directly.
Swing control valve (pressure

The pressure compensation valve seal in the swing control valve is suspected of
2 compensation valve) malfunc-
defect. Check the valve itself directly.
tioned
Swing motor (safety valve) defec- The safety valve seal in the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check the valve itself
3
tive directly.
Swing motor (suction valve) The suction valve seal in the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check the valve
4
defective itself directly.
Swing motor (check valve) defec- The check valve seal in the swing motor is suspected of defect. Check the valve itself
5
tive directly.
20-932 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING H-26 – Swing speed is faster than specified swing speed
H-26 – Swing speed is faster than specified swing speed
Failure information (1) • Swing speed is greater than specified speed.
Relative information • When operating the swing system.

1 Operation of LS valve defective. Is output of the LS-EPC solenoid valve normal.
Output pressure of the LS-EPC solenoid valve is abnormal.

2 Defective LS-EPC solenoid.
Correct or replace the LS-EPC solenoid.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-933

Troubleshooting of engine (S-mode) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
Troubleshooting of engine (S-mode)
Method of using troubleshooting chart

The troubleshooting chart consists of the "questions", "check
items", "causes", and "troubleshooting" blocks.
The questions and check items are used to pinpoint high proba-
bility causes by simple inspection or from phenomena without
using troubleshooting tools.
Next, troubleshooting tools or direct inspection are applied to

check the narrowed causes in order from the most probable one
to make final confirmation according to the troubleshooting pro-
cedure.
[Questions]
Items to be drawn from the user or operator. They correspond to
A and B in the chart on the right. The items in A are basic ones.
The items in B can be drawn from the user or operator, depend-
ing on their level.
[Check items]
Simple check items used by the serviceman to narrow the caus-
es. They correspond to C in the chart on the right.
[Causes]
Items to be narrowed from the questions and check items. The
serviceman narrows down the probable causes from A, B, and
C.
[Troubleshooting]
Items used to find out the true cause by verifying the narrowed
causes finally in order from the most probable one by applying
troubleshooting tools or direct inspection.
Items listed in the [Questions] and [Check items] and related to

the [Causes] are marked with U, , and .
U: Causes to be referred to for questions and check items
: Causes related to questions and check items
: Causes highly probable among ones marked with .
When narrowing the "causes", apply the items marked with

before those marked with .
When narrowing the causes, do not apply the items marked

with U. (If no items have other marks and the causes cannot
be narrowed, however, you may apply them.)
20-934 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING Troubleshooting of engine (S-mode)
<Example of troubleshooting> Exhaust gas is black

Let us assume that [Clogged air cleaner] is taken to be the
cause of black exhaust gas. Three symptoms have causal rela-
tionship with this problem: [Exhaust gas slowly became black],
[Power slowly became weaker], and [Air cleaner clogging cau-
tion lamp is flashing].
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-935

Troubleshooting of engine (S-mode) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
If we look from these three symptoms to find the causes, we find

that there is a relationship with five causes.
Let us explain here the method of using this causal relationship

to pinpoint the most probable cause.
20-936 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING S-1 – Starting performance is poor
S-1 – Starting performance is poor

General causes why starting performance is poor Causes
• Defective electrical system
Leaking or clogged fuel piping, entry of air

Clogged air breather hole of fuel tank cap
• Insufficient supply of fuel
Defective alternator (generator section)

Defective alternator (regulator section)
• Insufficient intake of air
Defective contact of valve, vale seat
Stuck, seized supply pump plunger

• Improper selection of fuel
Defective intake air heater system

• The common rail fuel injection system (CRI) recognizes the fuel injection tim-
Defective, deteriorated battery

ing electrically. Accordingly, even if the starting operation is carried out, the
Clogged air cleaner element
Clogged fuel filter, element

engine may not start until the crankshaft revolves 2 turns at maximum. This
Worn piston ring, cylinder

phenomenon does not indicate a trouble, however.
Defective injector
Confirm recent repair history
Degree of use of machine Operated for long period U U U
Became worse gradually
Starting performance
Engine starts easily when warm
Questions
Non-specified fuel is being used

Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and Mainte-
nance Manual
Engine oil must be added more frequently
When engine is preheated or when temperature is low, preheating monitor does not
indicate normally
During operation, charge level monitor indicates abnormal charge
Dust indicator is red
Air breather hole of fuel tank cap is clogged
Fuel is leaking from fuel piping
When priming pump is operated, it makes no reaction or it is heavy
Starting motor cranks engine slowly
If air bleeding plug of fuel filter is removed, fuel does not
While engine is cranked flow out
with starting motor
Check items
If spill hose from injector is disconnected, little fuel spills

When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine, temperature of
some cylinders is low
Engine does not pick up smoothly and combustion is irregular
There is hunting from engine (rotation is irregular)
Blow-by gas is excessive
Inspect air cleaner directly

When compression pressure is measured, it is found to be low
When air is bled from fuel system, air comes out
Inspect fuel filter, strainer directly
Troubleshooting
Carry out troubleshooting according to "Rail Press (Very) Low Error (*1)" indicated by
code
When a cylinder is cut out for reduced cylinder mode operation, engine speed does not
change
When starting switch is turned to HEAT, intake air heater mount does not become
warm
Is voltage 20 – 30 V between alternator terminal B and terminal E with Yes
engine at low idle? No
When specific gravity of electrolyte and voltage of battery are measured, they are low
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
correct
Clean
Clean
Clean
*1: Displayed failure codes [CA559] and [CA2249] Remedy
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-937

S-2 – Engine does not start TESTING AND ADJUSTING
S-2 – Engine does not start

1. Engine does not turn Causes
Defective connection of battery terminal
Defective starting motor (motor section)

General causes why engine does not turn
• Internal parts of engine seized
See "S-4 Engine stops during operations
Defective or deteriorated battery
Defective starting circuit wiring

• Defective electrical system
• Problem in drive devices on applicable machine side
Broken flywheel ring gear

Carry out troubleshooting for devices on applicable machine
Defective starting switch

Defective battery relay
Defective safety relay

Questions
Degree of use of machine Operated for long period U U

Condition of horn when Horn does not sound
starting switch is turned ON Horn volume is low
Battery electrolyte is low
Battery terminal is loose
When starting switch is turned ON, there is no operating sound from battery relay
When starting switch is turned to START, starting pinion does not move out
Check items
Speed of rotation is low

When starting switch is Makes grating noise
turned to START, starting
Soon disengages again
pinion moves out, but
Makes rattling noise and does not turn
Inspect flywheel ring gear directly

There is not voltage (20 – 30 V) between battery relay terminal B and
Carry out troubleshooting on

terminal E
Troubleshooting
applicable machine side

When terminal B and terminal C of starting switch are connected,
engine starts
Turn starting switch OFF,
When terminal B and terminal C at safety relay outlet are connected,
connect cord, and carry out
engine starts
troubleshooting at ON
Even if terminal B and terminal C at safety relay outlet are connected,
engine does not start
When safety switch terminal and terminal B of starting motor are con-
nected, engine starts
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Remedy —
20-938 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING S-2 – Engine does not start
2. Engine turns but no exhaust smoke comes out Causes
Defective operation of overflow valve (Does not close)

General causes why engine turns but no exhaust smoke comes out
• Fuel is not being supplied
• Supply of fuel is extremely small
• Improper selection of fuel (particularly in winter)

Defective common rail pressure limiter

Seized, abnormally worn feed pump

Defective supply pump MPROP
Clogged fuel filter element
Broken supply pump shaft

Insufficient fuel in tank
Defective fuel injector

Use of improper fuel
U U
Questions
Degree of use of machine Operated for long period

Exhaust smoke suddenly stopped coming out (when starting again) U
nance Manual
U
When fuel tank is inspected, it is found to be empty
Rust and water are found when fuel tank is drained U U U
When fuel filter is removed, there is not fuel in it
Check items

While engine is cranked
flow out
with starting motor

Inspect fuel filter directly
Inspect feed pump directly
Troubleshooting
code
Carry out troubleshooting according to "IMV/PCV1 Short (Open) Error (*2)" indicated
by code
Inspect overflow valve directly
Engine can be started in reduced cylinder mode.
If pressure limiter return pipe is disconnected, fuel flows out
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct

Add
*2: Displayed failure codes [CA271] and [CA272]
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-939

S-2 – Engine does not start TESTING AND ADJUSTING
3. Exhaust smoke comes but engine does not start (fuel Causes
is being injected)
Worn dynamic valve system (Valve, rocker lever, etc.)
Defective coolant temperature sensor, wiring harness

General causes why exhaust smoke comes out but engine does not start
• Lack of rotating force due to defective electrical system
Leaking or clogged fuel system, entry of air

Defective intake air heater system

Clogged injector, defective spray
Worn piston ring, cylinder liner
Defective, deteriorated battery

Use of improper fuel
Clogged fuel filter

Suddenly failed to start
Questions

nance Manual
When engine is preheated or when temperature is low, preheating monitor does not
indicate normally
Rust and water are found when fuel tank is drained
When fuel filter is removed, there is not fuel in it
Starting motor cranks engine slowly
When engine is cranked, abnormal sound is generated around cylinder head
Check items

While engine is cranked
flow out
with starting motor,
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine, temperature of
some cylinders is low

Inspect dynamic valve system directly
Troubleshooting
Inspect fuel filter directly

code
Engine can be started in reduced cylinder mode.
Coolant temperature gauge does not indicate normally
When starting switch is turned to HEAT, intake air heater mount does not become
warm
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Clean
Clean
Clean
20-940 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING S-3 – Engine does not pick up smoothly
S-3 – Engine does not pick up smoothly

General causes why engine does not pick up smoothly Causes
Seized turbocharger, interference of turbocharger

• Defective condition of fuel spray


Defective contact of valve and valve seat
• Controller is controlling in derate mode (limiting injection rate (output) because of an
error in electrical system)

Clogged injector, defective spray
Improper valve clearance
Clogged fuel filter

Degree of use of machine Operated for long period U U U U
Questions
Engine pick-up suddenly became worse

Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and Maintenance Man-
ual
Oil must be added more frequently
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine, temperature of some cyl-
inders is low
Blue under light load
Color of exhaust gas
Check items
Black
When engine is cranked, interference sound is generated around turbocharger
High idle speed under no load is normal, but speed suddenly drops when load is applied

Troubleshooting
Inspect valve clearance directly

When turbocharger is rotated by hand, it is found to be heavy
Carry out troubleshooting according to "Rail Press (Very) Low Error (*1)" indicated by code
When a cylinder is cut out for reduced cylinder mode operation, engine speed does not change
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Adjust
Clean
Clean
Clean
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-941

S-4 – Engine stops during operations TESTING AND ADJUSTING
S-4 – Engine stops during operations

General causes why engine stops during operations Causes
• Seized parts inside engine
Broken dynamic valve system (valve, rocker arm, etc.)
Broken auxiliary equipment (pump, compressor, etc.)
Problem in drive devices on applicable machine side

• There is overheating
• Problem in drive devices on applicable machine side
Carry out troubleshooting for devices on applicable machine

Broken, seized piston, connecting rod

Broken, seized crankshaft bearing
Leaking, clogged fuel piping
Broken, seized feed pump

Broken supply pump shaft
Broken, seized gear train
Clogged fuel filter

Degree of use of
machine
Operated for long period U
Abnormal noise was heard and engine stopped
suddenly
Questions
Condition when engine Engine overheated and stopped

stopped
Engine stopped slowly
There was hunting and engine stopped
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Fuel level monitor indicates low level (if monitor is installed)
Check items
Metal particles are found when oil is drained

Does not turn at all
When engine is cranked Turns in opposite direction
by hand Moves by amount of gear backlash
Supply pump shaft does not turn
Engine turns, but stops when load is applied to machine

Inspect piston, connecting rod directly
Carry out troubleshooting
Inspect crankshaft bearing directly

Troubleshooting
on applicable machine
Inspect gear train directly

Inspect feed pump directly
Carry out troubleshooting according to "Rail Press (Very) Low Error (*1)" indi-
cated by code
Engine rotates when pump auxiliary equipment (pump, compressor, etc.) is
removed
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Clean
Clean
*1: Displayed failure codes [CA559] and [CA2249] Remedy —

Add
20-942 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING S-5 – Engine does not rotate smoothly
S-5 – Engine does not rotate smoothly

General causes why engine does not rotate smoothly Causes
• Air in fuel system
Clogged injector, defective spray (dirt in injector)

• Defective speed sensor (Error at degree that it is not indicated)
Defective Bkup speed sensor, wiring harness

Defective Ne speed sensor, wiring harness
Clogged fuel filter

Degree of use of machine Operated for long period U
Questions
Occurs at a certain speed range

Occurs at low idle
Condition of hunting
Occurs even when speed is raised
Occurs on slopes
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and Maintenance Manual
Check items


Troubleshooting

Carry out troubleshooting according to "Eng Ne Speed Sensor Error (*1)" indicated by code
Carry out troubleshooting according to "Eng Bkup Speed Sensor Error (*2)" indicated by code
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
*1: Displayed failure codes [CA689] Replace
Clean
Remedy
Add
*2: Displayed failure code [CA778]
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-943

S-6 – Engine lack output (or lacks power) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
S-6 – Engine lack output (or lacks power)

General causes why engine lacks output Causes
Clogged injector, defective spray (dirt in injector)
Defective boost pressure sensor, wiring harness

Defective installation of boost pressure sensor

• Defective spray condition of fuel
Defective drive of injector (signal, solenoid)


See "S-14 Coolant temperature becomes too high

(Overheating)".
Air leakage from air intake piping

• Controller is controlling in derate mode (limiting injection rate (output)

Leaking, clogged fuel piping

because of an error in electrical system)
Clogged spill piping

Clogged fuel filter
Suddenly
Questions
Power was lost

Gradually
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and
Maintenance Manual
Output becomes insufficient after short stop of operation
Black
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine, tempera-
ture of some cylinders is low
Check items

High idle speed is too high
High idle speed under no load is normal, but speed suddenly drops when load is
applied

Inspect air intake piping directly
When boost pressure is measured, it is found to be low
Troubleshooting
Inspect fuel piping

Inspect spill port check valve directly
Carry out troubleshooting according to "Rail Press (Very) Low Error (*1)" indi-
cated by code
When a cylinder is cut out for reduced cylinder mode operation, engine speed
does not change
Inspect boost pressure sensor mount directly
Carry out troubleshooting according to "Chg Air Press Sensor High (Low) Error
(*2)" indicated by code
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct
Adjust

Clean
Clean
Remedy
20-944 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100
TESTING AND ADJUSTING S-7 – Exhaust smoke is black (incomplete combustion)
S-7 – Exhaust smoke is black (incomplete combustion)

General causes why exhaust smoke is black Causes
Leakage of air between turbocharger and cylinder head

• Defective condition of fuel injection


See "S-14 Coolant temperature becomes too high
(Overheating)".

• Controller is controlling in derate mode (limiting injection rate (output) be-
cause of an error in electrical system)
Improper fuel injection pressure

Improper fuel injection timing

Crushed, clogged muffler
Abnormally worn injector

Clogged, seized injector
Degree of use of
machine
Operated for long period U U U U
Suddenly became black
Questions
Color of exhaust gas Gradually became black

Suddenly
Power was lost
Gradually
Muffler is crushed
Air leaks between turbocharger and cylinder head, clamp is loosened
Engine is operated in low-temperature mode at normal temperature
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine, temperature
of some cylinders is low
Check items

Pump relief speed is high (Fuel is injected excessively)
Exhaust noise is abnormal
If spill hose from injector is disconnected, abnormally much fuel spills

When turbocharger is rotated by hand, it is found to be heavy
Troubleshooting
When muffler is removed, exhaust sound improves

Carry out troubleshooting according to "Rail Press (Very) Low Error (*1)" indicated
by code
When a cylinder is cut out for reduced cylinder mode operation, engine speed
does not change
Carry out troubleshooting according to "Coolant Temp Sens High (Low) Error (*2)"
indicated by code
Check with monitoring function
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Adjust

Clean
Remedy
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-945

S-8 – Oil consumption is excessive (or exhaust smoke is blue) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
S-8 – Oil consumption is excessive (or exhaust smoke is

blue)
General causes why oil consumption is excessive Causes
• Abnormal consumption of oil
Turbocharger
• Long-time operation of engine at low idle or high idle (Do not run en-
Oil leakage from oil pan, cylinder head, etc.

Worn, damaged valve (stem, guide, seal)
gine at idle for more than 20 minutes continuously)
• External leakage of oil
• Wear of pats in lubrication system
Dust sucked in from intake system
Clogged breather, breather hose

Worn seal at turbocharger end
Oil leakage from oil drain plug

Worn, damaged rear oil seal
Oil leakage from oil cooler
Oil leakage from oil piping

Worn seal at blower end
Oil leakage from oil filter

Broken piston ring
Broken oil cooler

Degree of use of
U U U U
Questions
Operated for long period

machine
Oil consumption suddenly increased
Oil becomes contaminated quickly
Outside of engine is dirty with oil
There are loose piping clamps in intake system
Inside of turbocharger intake outlet pipe is dirty with oil
Inside of turbocharger exhaust outlet pipe is dirty with oil
Check items
There is oil in coolant

Oil level in damper chamber of applicable machine is high
Exhaust smoke is blue under light load
Excessive
Amount of blow-by gas
None
When intake manifold is removed, dust is found inside

When intake manifold is removed, inside is found to be dirty abnormally
Troubleshooting
Excessive play of turbocharger shaft

Check breather and breather hose directly
Inspect rear oil seal directly
Pressure-tightness test of oil cooler shows there is leakage
There is external leakage of oil from engine
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct
Correct
Correct
Correct
Correct
Clean
Remedy
20-946 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING S-9 – Oil becomes contaminated quickly
S-9 – Oil becomes contaminated quickly

General causes why oil becomes contaminated quickly Causes
• Entry of exhaust gas into oil due to internal wear
Clogged turbocharger lubrication drain tube

Defective seal at turbocharger turbine end
• Clogging of lubrication passage
• Use of improper fuel
• Use of improper oil
• Operation under excessive load
Clogged breather, breather hose

Defective oil filter safety valve

Worn valve, valve guide
Exhaust smoke is bad

Clogged oil cooler
Clogged oil filter
Questions

Metal particles are found when oil is drained
Inside of exhaust pipe is dirty with oil
Engine oil temperature rises quickly
Check items
Color of exhaust gas color

Black
Excessive
Amount of blow-by gas
None
Excessive play of turbocharger shaft

Troubleshooting

Check breather and breather hose directly
Inspect oil cooler directly
Inspect oil filter directly
See S-7
Spring of oil filter safety valve is hitched or broken
Inspect turbocharger lubrication drain tube directly
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Clean
Clean
Remedy Clean —
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-947

S-10 – Fuel consumption is excessive TESTING AND ADJUSTING
S-10 – Fuel consumption is excessive

General causes why fuel consumption is excessive Causes
• Leakage of fuel

• Defective condition of fuel injection (fuel pressure, injection timing)
• Excessive injection of fuel
Fuel leakage from fuel filter, piping, etc.

Fuel leakage inside head cover
Defective supply pump plunger
Defective operation of injector

Improper fuel injection timing
Defective feed pump oil seal
Defective spray by injector

Questions
More than for other machines of same model

Condition of fuel con-
Gradually increased
sumption
Suddenly increased
There is external leakage of fuel from engine
Combustion is irregular
Engine oil level rises and oil smells of diesel fuel
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine, temperature of some cylin-
ders is low
Check items
Low idle speed is high

Pump relief speed is high
Black
Exhaust smoke color
White
Remove and inspect head cover directly

Inspect feed pump oil seal directly
Carry out troubleshooting according to "Rail Press (Very) Low Error (*1)" indicated by code
Troubleshooting
If spill hose from injector is disconnected, much fuel spills
Carry out troubleshooting according to "Coolant Temp Sens High (Low) Error (*2)" indicated by
code
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct

20-948 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING S-11 – Oil is in coolant (or coolant spurts back or coolant level goes down)
S-11 – Oil is in coolant (or coolant spurts back or coolant

level goes down)
General causes why oil is in coolant Causes
• Internal leakage in lubrication system
Broken hydraulic oil cooler on applicable machine side

• Internal leakage in cooling system
Broken cylinder head, head gasket

Internal cracks in cylinder block
Broken oil cooler core, O-ring

Holes caused by pitting
U U
Questions

Suddenly increased
Oil level
Gradually increased
Hard water is being used as coolant
Oil level has risen, oil is milky
There are excessive air bubbles in radiator, coolant spurts back
Check items
Hydraulic oil on applicable machine side is milky
When hydraulic oil on applicable machine side is drained, water is found
Pressure-tightness test of cylinder head shows there is leakage Carry out

Trouble-
Inspect cylinder block, liner directly troubleshooting

on applicable
Pressure-tightness test of oil cooler shows there is leakage machine side
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Remedy —
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-949

S-12 – Oil pressure drops TESTING AND ADJUSTING
S-12 – Oil pressure drops
General causes why oil pressure drops Causes

• Leakage, clogging, wear of lubrication system
Leaking, crushed, clogged hydraulic piping

• Defective oil pressure control
Defective oil level sensor, wiring harness

• Improper selection of fuel (improper viscosity)
• Deterioration of oil due to overheating
Clogged, broken pipe in oil pan

Clogged strainer in oil pan
Defective regulator valve

Worn journal of bearing
Lack of oil in oil pan
Defective oil pump

Coolant, fuel in oil
Clogged oil filter

Questions
Oil pressure monitor indicates low oil pressure

Non-specified oil is being used
Replacement of filters has not been carried out according to Operation and Maintenance Man-
ual
Indicates pressure drop at low idle
Oil pressure monitor Indicates pressure drop at low, high idle
(if installed) Indicates pressure drop on slopes
Sometimes indicates pressure drop
Oil level monitor indicates oil level drop
Oil level in oil pan is low
External hydraulic piping is leaking, crushed
Check items
Oil is milky or smells of diesel oil

Metal particles are found when oil pan is drained
Metal particles are found when oil filter is drained
Metal particles are found in oil filter

Troubleshooting
Inspect oil pan strainer, pipe directly

Oil pump rotation is heavy, there is play in oil pump
See S-13
Valve spring of regulator valve is fatigued, damaged

Inspect oil filter directly
If oil level sensor is replaced, oil pressure monitor indicates normally
Replace
Replace
Correct
Adjust
Clean
Clean
Clean
Clean
Remedy —
Add
20-950 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING S-13 – Oil level rises (entry of coolant/fuel)
S-13 – Oil level rises (entry of coolant/fuel)

General causes why oil level rises Causes
• Coolant in oil (milky)
Defective seal of auxiliary equipment (pump, compressor)

• Fuel in oil (smells diluted diesel fuel)
• If oil is in coolant, carry out troubleshooting for "S-11 Oil is in coolant"
Broken oil cooler core, O-ring

Worn, damaged rear oil seal
Cracks inside cylinder block
Defects in supply pump

Broken injector O-ring
Questions

Fuel must be added more frequently
Coolant must be added more frequently
There is oil in coolant
Oil smells of diesel fuel
Oil is milky
When engine is started, drops of water come from muffler
When radiator cap is removed and engine is run at low idle, an abnormal number of bubbles appear, or
Check items
coolant spurts back

Exhaust smoke is white
Oil level in damper chamber of applicable machine is low
Oil level in hydraulic tank of applicable machine is low

Troubleshooting
Remove injector and inspect O-ring

Inspect cylinder block, liner directly
Inspect rear oil seal directly
Pressure-tightness test of oil cooler shows there is leakage
Remove and inspect supply pump directly
Inspect seal of auxiliary equipment directly
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Remedy
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-951

S-14 – Coolant temperature becomes too high (overheating) TESTING AND ADJUSTING
S-14 – Coolant temperature becomes too high (overheat-

ing)
General causes why coolant temperature becomes too high Causes
• Lack of cooling air (deformation, damage of fan)
Rise of hydraulic oil temperature on applicable machine side

• Drop in heat dissipation efficiency
• Problem in coolant circulation system
• Rise in oil temperature in power train
Carry out troubleshooting for machine
Defective radiator cap (pressure valve)
Defective coolant temperature gauge

Defective operation of thermostat
Slipping fan belt, worn fan pulley

Clogged, crushed radiator fins
Clogged, broken oil cooler
Clogged radiator core

Broken water pump
Lack of coolant
Questions
Sudden overheated
Condition of overheating
Always tends to overheat
Coolant temperature Rises quickly
gauge (if installed) Does not go down from red range
Radiator coolant level monitor indicates drop of coolant level (if monitor is installed)
Engine oil level has risen and oil is milky
Fan belt tension is low
When fan belt is turned, it has play
Milky oil is floating on coolant
There are excessive air bubbles in radiator, coolant spurts back
Check items
When light bulb is held behind radiator core, no light passes through
Radiator shroud, inside of underguard on applicable machine side are clogged with
dirt or mud
Coolant is leaking because of cracks in hose or loose clamps
Coolant flows out from radiator overflow hose
Fan belt whines under sudden acceleration
Hydraulic oil temperature enters red range faster than engine coolant temperature

Inspect cylinder liner directly
Inspect oil cooler directly
on applicable machine side
Troubleshooting
Carry out troubleshooting
Temperature difference between upper and lower tanks of radiator is large

When operation of thermostat is carried out, it does not open at cracking tempera-
ture
Temperature difference between upper and lower tanks of radiator is slight
Inspect radiator core directly
When operation of radiator cap is carried out, its cracking pressure is low
Inspect fan belt, pulley directly
When coolant temperature is measured, it is fount to be normal
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Correct
Remedy —
Add
20-9527 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

TESTING AND ADJUSTING S-15 – Abnormal noise is made
S-15 – Abnormal noise is made

General causes why abnormal noise is made Causes
• Abnormality due to defective parts
Deformed cooling fan, loose fan belt, interference of fan belt

• Abnormal combustion
Defective inside of muffler (dividing board out of position)

Leakage of air between turbocharger and cylinder head
• Air sucked in from intake system
• Judge if the noise is an internal noise or an external noise before starting
Improper fuel injection timing (abnormality in coolant

low temperature sensor, boost temperature sensor)
Broken dynamic valve system (valve, rocker lever)
troubleshooting.
Interference of turbocharger, seized turbocharger

• The engine is operated in the low-temperature mode while it is not
warmed up sufficiently. Accordingly, the engine sound becomes a little
Excessive wear of piston ring, cylinder liner

larger. This does not indicate abnormality, however.
• When the engine is accelerated, it is operated in the acceleration mode
and its sound becomes a little larger for up to about 3 seconds. This does
not indicate abnormality, however.
Improper gear train backlash

Removed, seized bushing
Clogged, seized injector

Dirt caught in injector
Degree of use of machine Operated for long period U
Questions
Condition of abnormal Gradually occurred

noise Sudden occurred
Air leaks between turbocharger and cylinder head
When engine is cranked, beat noise is generated around muffler
Check items
When exhaust manifold is touched immediately after starting engine, temperature

of some cylinders is low
Black
Abnormal noise is loud when engine is accelerated
When turbocharger is rotated by hand, it is fount to be heavy

When muffler is removed, abnormal noise disappears
Troubleshooting

Inspect fan and fan belt directly
When a cylinder is cut out for reduced cylinder mode operation, engine speed does
not change
Abnormal noise is heard only when engine is started
Confirm with INSITE or monitoring function on applicable machine side
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Correct
Correct
Remedy
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 20-953

S-16 – Vibration is excessive TESTING AND ADJUSTING
S-16 – Vibration is excessive

General causes why vibration is excessive Causes
• Defective parts (abnormal wear, breakage)
Improper injection timing (Abnormality in coolant temperature sensor, boost temperature sensor)
• Misalignment between engine and chassis
• Abnormal combustion
• If abnormal noise is made and vibration is excessive, carry out troubleshooting for "S-15 Ab-
normal noise is made", too.
Misalignment between engine and devices on applicable machine side

Broken output shaft, parts in damper on applicable machine side
Stuck dynamic valve system (valve, rocker lever)
Loose engine mounting bolts, broken cushions

Worn main bearing, connecting rod bearing
Improper gear train backlash
Confirm recent repair history Worn camshaft bushing

U U U
Questions

Suddenly increased
Condition of vibration
Gradually increased
Non-specified oil is being used
Metal particles are found when oil pan is drained
Oil pressure is low at low idle
Check items
Vibration occurs at mid-range speed

Vibration follows engine speed
Exhaust smoke is black

Inspect main bearing and connecting rod bearing directly
Troubleshooting

Inspect camshaft bushing directly
Inspect engine mounting bolts and cushions directly
When alignment is checked, radial runout or facial runout is detected
Inspect inside of damper directly
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Adjust
Remedy
20-954 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

30 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
How to read this manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-5
Removal and installation of assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-5
Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-5
Removal of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-6
Installation of parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-6
Sketches of special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-6
Coating materials list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7
Special Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-10
Sketches of special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-13
E1 push tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-13
E5 push tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-13
F2 push tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-14
List of tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-15
Precautions when performing operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-16
Removal and installation of starting motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-20
Removal and installation of fuel pump assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-21
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-21
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-24
Removal and installation of fuel injector assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-25
Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-25
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-25
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-30
Removal and installation of engine front seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-34
Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-34
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-34
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-36
Removing and installation of engine rear seal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-37
Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-37
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-37
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-38
Removal and installation of cylinder head assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40
Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-40
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-48
Removal and installation of combination cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-55
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-55
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-58
Removal and installation of engine and hydraulic pump assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-59
Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-59
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-59
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-64
Removal and installation of fuel cooler assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-66
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-66
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-66
Removal and installation of transmission and travel motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-67
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-67
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-69
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-1

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and assembly of transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-70

Special tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-70
Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-70
Removal of travel motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-70
Installation of travel motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-71
Removal of transmission input shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-72
Installation of transmission input shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-82
Removal of output shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-83
Installation of output shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-86
Removal of pump shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-87
Installation of pump shaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-89
Disassembly and assembly of travel motor assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-90
Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-91
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-93
Removal and installation of swing motor and swing machinery assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-95
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-95
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-96
Disassembly and assembly of swing motor and swing machinery assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-97
Special tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-97
Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-97
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-100
Removal and installation of front axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-106
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-106
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-107
Disassembly and assembly of front axle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-108
Disassembly of steering cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-108
Assembly of steering cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-113
Disassembly of epicyclic reduction gear and brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-120
Assembly of epicyclic reduction gear and brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-126
Disassembly of joint box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-135
Assembly of joint box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-142
Disassembly of beam trumpet and differential unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-150
Assembly of beam trumpet and differential unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-155
Disassembly of pinion group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-162
Assembly of pinion group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-165
Toe-in adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-174
Removal and installation of rear axle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-176
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-176
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-177
Disassembly and assembly of rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-178
Special tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-178
Removal of epicyclic reduction gear and brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-178
Installation of epicyclic reduction gear and brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-185
Disassembly of beam trumpet and differential unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-195
Installation of beam trumpet and differential unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-199
Disassembly of pinion group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-200
Installation of pinion group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-204
Removal and installation of propshaft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-212
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-212
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-212
Removal and installation of wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-213
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-213
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-213
30-2 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Removal and installation of suspension lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-214

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-214
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-214
Disassembly and assembly of suspension lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-215
Change rod seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-215
Removal and installation of outrigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-216
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-216
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-217
Disassembly and assembly of outrigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-218
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-218
Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-219
Removal and installation of dozer blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-220
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-220
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-220
Disassembly and assembly of dozer blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-221
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-221
Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-222
Removal and installation of swing circle assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-223
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-223
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-223
Removal and installation of revolving frame assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-225
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-225
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-228
Removal and installation of centre swivel joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-229
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-229
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-232
Disassembly and assembly of centre swivel joint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-233
Special tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-233
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-233
Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-234
Removal and installation of hydraulic tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-235
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-235
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-238
Removal and installation of fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-239
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-239
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-240
Removal and installation of control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-241
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-241
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-245
Removal and installation of LS select valve assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-246
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-246
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-246
Removal and installation of LS shuttle valve assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-247
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-247
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-247
Removal and installation of pressure compensation valve assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-248
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-248
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-248
Removal and installation of main relief valve assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-249
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-249
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-249
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-3

Removal and installation of LS control EPC valve assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-250

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-250
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-250
Removal and installation of EPC solenoid valve assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-251
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-251
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-251
Removal and installation of PPC valve block assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-252
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-252
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-252
Removal and installation of manifold block assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-253
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-253
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-253
Removal and installation of oil seal in hydraulic pump input shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-254
Special tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-254
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-254
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-254
Disassembly and assembly of work equipment ÜPPC valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-255
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-256
Disassembly and assembly of hydraulic cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-257
Special tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-257
Disassembly of arm and bucket cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-258
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-260
Removal and installation of monoboom work equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-265
Special tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-265
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-265
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-267
Removal and installation of 2 piece boom work equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-268
Special tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-268
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-268
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-270
Removal and installation of air conditioner unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-271
Special tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-271
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-271
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-275
Removal and installation of counterweight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-276
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-276
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-277
Removal and installation of operator cab assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-278
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-278
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-280
Removal and installation of monitor assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-281
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-281
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-282
Removal and installation of governor/pump controller assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-283
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-283
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-284
Removal and Installation of KOMTRAX terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-285
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-285
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-285
30-4 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY How to read this manual
How to read this manual
Removal and installation of assemblies
Special tools
• Special tools that are deemed necessary for removal or in-
stallation of parts are listed.
• List of the special tools contains the following kind of infor-

mation.
1. Necessity
:
Special tools which cannot be substituted, should always be
used.
:
Special tools which are very useful if available, can be sub-
stituted with commercially available tools.
2. Distinction of new and existing special tools

N:
Tools with new part numbers, newly developed for this mod-
el.
R:
Tools with upgraded part numbers, remodeled from already
available tools for other models.
Blank:
Tools already available for other models, used without any
modification.
3. Circle mark ( ) in sketch column:

A circle mark means that a sketch of the special tool is pre-
sented in the section of Sketches for Special Tools.
★ Part No. of special tools starting with 79*T means that they
are locally made parts and as such not interchangeable with
those made by Komatsu in Japan e.g. 79*T--- xxx --- xxxx.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-5

How to read this manual DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal of parts
• The REMOVAL Section contains procedures, precautions
and the amount of oil or water to be drained.
• Various symbols used in the REMOVAL Section are ex-

plained and listed below.
This mark indicates safety-related precautions which

must be followed when doing the work.
★ This mark gives guidance or precautions when doing

the procedure.
[*1] This mark shows that there are instructions or precau-

tions for installing parts.
6 This mark shows oil or water to be drained.
Installation of parts
• Except where otherwise instructed, install parts is the re-
verse order of removal.
• Instructions and precautions for installing parts are shown

with [*1] mark in the INSTALLATION Section, identifying
which step the instructions are intended for.
• Marks shown in the INSTALLATION Section stand for the

following.
This mark indicates safety-related precautions which

must be followed when doing the work.
★ This mark gives guidance or precautions when doing

the procedure.
 This mark stands for a specific coating agent to be used.
 This mark indicates the specified torque.
This mark indicates an amount of oil or water to be add-

5 ed.
Sketches of special tools

• Various special tools are illustrated for the convenience of
local manufacture.
30-6 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Coating materials list

• The recommended coating materials such as adhesives,
gasket sealants, and greases used for disassembly and as-
sembly are listed below.
• For coating materials not listed below, use the equivalent of

products shown in this manual.
Cate- Komatsu Part number Q'ty Container Main features and applications
gory code
LT-1A 790-129-9030 150 g Tube • Used to prevent rubber gaskets, rubber cushions,
and cork plugs from coming out.
LT-1B 790-129-9050 20 g Polyethylene • Used for plastic (except polyethylene, polypropyl-

(2 pcs.) container ene, tetrafluoroethylene and vinyl chloride), rub-
ber, metal, and non-metal parts which require
immediate and strong adhesion.
LT-2 09940-00030 50 g Polyethylene • Features: Resistance to heat and chemicals.

container • Used to fix and seal bolts and plugs.
LT-3 790-129-9060 Adhesive: 1 kg Can • Used to stick and seal metal, glass, and plastics.
(Set of adhesive Hardener: 500 g
and hardener)
Adhesive
LT-4 790-129-9040 250 g Polyethylene • Used to seal plugs.

container
Holtz MH 705 790-129-9120 75 g Tube • Heat-resistant seal used to repair engines.
ThreeBond 790-129-9140 50 g Polyethylene • Quick-setting adhesive.

1735 container • Setting time: Within 5 sec. to 3 min.
• Used mainly to stick metals, rubbers, plastics, and
woods.
Aron-alpha 790-129-9130 2g Polyethylene • Quick-setting adhesive.

201 container • Quick-setting type.
(max. strength is obtained after 30 minutes)
• Used mainly to stick rubbers, plastics, and metals.
Loctite 79A-129-9110 50 cc Polyethylene • Features: Resistance to heat and chemicals.

648-50 container • Used for fitted portions used at high temperatures.
LG-1 790-129-9010 200 g Tube • Used to stick or seal gaskets and packing of power
train case, etc.
LG-5 790-129-9080 1 kg Polyethylene • Used to seal various threaded portions, pipe joints,
container and flanges.
• Used to seal tapered plugs, elbows, and nipples of
hydraulic piping.
LG-6 790-129-9020 200 g Tube • Features: Silicon-based heat and cold-resistant

Gasket sealant
sealant.
• Used to seal flange surfaces and threaded por-
tions.
• Used to seal oil pan, final drive case, etc.
LG-7 790-129-9070 1 kg Tube • Features: Silicon-based quick-setting sealant.

• Used to seal flywheel housing, intake manifold, oil
pan, thermostat housing, etc.
ThreeBond 790-129-9090 100 g Tube • Gasket sealant used to repair engine.

1211
ThreeBond 419-15-18131 100 g Tube • Features: Silicon-based, heat and cold-resistant,

1207B vibration-resistant, impact-resistant sealant.
• Used to seal transfer case, etc.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-7

Cate- Komatsu code Part number Q'ty Container Main features and applications
gory
LM-G 09940-00051 60 g Can • Used to lubricate sliding portions.

disulfide lubricant
Molybdenum
(to prevent squeaking)
LM-P 09940-00040 200 g Tube • Used to prevent scuffing and seizure of press-fitted
portions, shrink-fitted portions, and threaded portions.
• Used to lubricate linkages, bearings, etc.
G2-LI SYG2-400LI Various Various • General purpose type.

SYG2-350LI
SYG2-400LI-A
SYG2-160LI
SYGA-160CNLI
G2-CA SYG2-400CA Various Various • Used for bearings used at normal temperature under
SYG2-350CA light load in contact with water or steam.
SYG2-400CA-A
SYG2-160CA
SYGA-160CNCA
Molybdenum SYG2-400M 400 g x Bellows- • Used for parts under heavy load.
disulfide grease SYG2-400M-A 10 type con-
Grease
LM-G (G2-M) SYGA-16CNM 400 g x tainer

20 Can
16 kg
Hyper White SYG2-400T-A 400 g Bellows- • Seizure resistance and heat resistance higher than
Grease G2-T, SYG2-16CNT type con- molybdenum disulfide grease.
G0-T (*) SYG0-400T-A (*) 16 kg tainer • Not conspicuous on machine since color is white.
*: For cold dis- SYG0-16CNT (*) Can
trict
Bio-grease SYG2-400B 400 g Bellows- • Since this grease is decomposed by natural bacteria
G2-B, G2-BT (*) SYGA-16CNB type con- in short period, it has less effects on microorganisms,
*: For use at SYG2-400BT (*) 16 kg tainer animals, and plants.
high tempera- SYGA-16CNBT Can
ture and under (*)
high load
SUNSTAR 417-926-3910 20 ml Glass con- • Used as primer for cab side.

PAINT PRIMER tainer (Using limit: 4 months after date of manufacture)
580 SUPER
SUNSTAR 20 ml Glass con- • Used as primer for glass side.

GLASS tainer (Using limit: 4 months after date of manufacture)
Adhesive for cab glass
PRIMER 580
SUPER
SUNSTAR 22M-54-27230 20 ml Glass con- • Used as primer for painted surface on cab side.
Primer
PAINT PRIMER tainer (Using limit: 4 months after date of manufacture)

435-95
SUNSTAR 22M-54-27240 150 ml Can • Used as primer for black ceramic-coated sur-
GLASS face on glass side and for hard polycarbonate-
PRIMER coated surface.
435-41 (Using limit: 4 months after date of manufacture)
SUNSTAR 22M-54-27250 20 ml Glass con- • Used as primer for sash (Almite).

SASH PRIMER tainer (Using limit: 4 months after date of manufacture)
GP-402
30-8 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Cate- Komatsu code Part number Q'ty Container Main features and applications
gory
SUNSTAR 417-926-3910 320 ml Polyethyl- “S” is used for high-temperature season and “W”
PENGUINE ene con- for low-temperature season as adhesive for glass.
SEAL 580 tainer (Using limit: 4 months after date of manufacture)
SUPER “S” or
“W”
Adhesive
Sika Japan, 20Y-54-39850 310 ml Polyethyl- Used as adhesive for glass.

Sikaflex 256HV ene con- (Using limit: 6 months after date of manufacture)
tainer
SUNSTAR 22M-54-27210 320 ml Ecocart Used as adhesive for glass.

PENGUINE (Special (Using limit: 6 months after date of manufacture)
SUPER 560 container)
SUNSTAR 417-926-3920 320 ml Polyethyl- Used to seal joints of glass parts.

PENGUINE ene con- (Using limit: 4 months after date of manufacture)
Adhesive for cab glass

Caulking material
SEAL No. 2505 tainer
SEKISUI SILI- 20Y-54-55130 333 ml Polyethyl- Used to seal front window.

CONE SEAL- ene con- (Using limit: 6 months after date of manufacture)
ANT tainer
GE TOSHIBA 22M-54-27220 333 ml Cartridge Used to seal joint of glasses.

SILICONES Translucent white seal.
TOSSEAL 381 (Using limit: 12 months after date of manufacture)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-9

Special Tools
Symbol
Component Part number Part name Nature of work, remarks
Engine front seal 1 795-799-6400 Seal puller Installation of engine front seal
Engine rear seal 2 795-799-6500 Seal puller Installation of engine rear seal
3 795-799-6700 Primer Removal of fuel injector

Cylinder head
795-799-1131 Gear Positioning with 3RD and 4TH cyl-
assembly, fuel injec- 4
inder Top
tor assembly
5 795-799-8150 Remover Removal of inlet connector
790-331-1120 Wrench
6 Angle tightening of bolt
Cylinder head (Angle)
assembly 795-790-4510 Gauge Judgment of cylinder head bolt
A
7
length
Engine and hydrau- 8 796T-401-1110 Plate Removal and installation of engine

lic pump assembly 9 795-790-9300 Lifting tool and hydraulic pump assembly
Hydraulic pump 1 796-460-1210 Oil stopper

assembly, Engine 0
and hydraulic pump
796-770-1320 Adaptor
assembly, Control Stopping oil
valve assembly, 1
Center swivel joint 1
assembly
1 796T-626-1110 Push tool Press fitting of bearing
3 790-201-2480 Push tool Press fitting of bearing
790-101-5401 Push tool kit

Swing motor and
swing machinery E 790-101-5521 • Plate
assembly 4 Press fitting of oil seal
790-101-5421 • Grip
01010-51240 • Bolt
5 793T-815-1110 Push tool Press fitting of bearing
790-101-2501 Push puller
790-101-2510 • Block
790-101-2520 • Screw
791-112-1180 • Nut
Center swivel joint Disassembly and assembly of
L 790-101-2540 • Washer
assembly center swivel joint assembly
790-101-2630 • Leg
790-101-2570 • Plate
790-101-2560 • Nut
790-101-2650 • Adapter
30-10 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Symbol
796-946-1310 Guide
(For 723-46-40100, 723-46-40601)
796-946-1810 Guide
(For 723-46-43100, 723-46-43400)

1
796-946-2110 Guide
(For 723-46-44100)
796-946-2210 Guide
(For 723-46-45100)
796-946-1320 Guide
(For 723-46-40100, 723-46-40601)
796-946-1820 Guide
(For 723-46-43100, 723-46-43400)
796-946-2120 Guide
2
Control valve (For 723-46-44100) • Replacement of pressure com-
M
assembly 796-946-2220 Guide pensation valve seal
(For 723-46-45100)
796-946-1420 Guide
(For 723-46-42800)
796-946-1330 Sleeve
(For 723-46-40100, 723-46-40601)
796-946-1830 Sleeve
(For 723-46-43100, 723-46-43400)
796-946-2130 Sleeve
3
(For 723-46-44100)
796-946-2230 Sleeve
(For 723-46-45100)
796-946-1430 Sleeve
(For 723-46-42800)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-11

Symbol
790-502-1003 Cylinder repair stand Disassembly and assembly of

1
hydraulic cylinder assembly
790-102-4300 Wrench assembly Removal and installation of piston

2
790-102-4310 Pin assembly
3 790-720-1000 Expander
796-720-1680 Ring Installation of bearing

4
07281-01589 Clamp
790-201-1851 Push tool

Hydraulic cylinder (for bucket and boom)
N
assembly 5 Press fitting of bushing
790-201-1861 Push tool (for arm)
790-101-5021 Grip
01010-50816 Bolt
790-101-5021 Grip
01010-50816 Bolt Press fitting of dust seal

6
790-201-1660 Push tool
(for boom and bucket)
790-201-1670 Plate (for arm)
796-670-1100 Remover
796-670-1110 • Sleeve
796-670-1120 • Plate
796-670-1130 • Screw
Work equipment 791-775-1150 • Adapter Removal of foot pin

P
assembly
01643-33080 • Washer
01803-13034 • Nut
790-101-4000 Puller
(490 kN {50 t} long)
790-101-1102 Pump (294 kN {30 t})
799-703-1200 Service tool kit
799-703-1100 Vacuum pump (100 V)

Air conditioner
Q 799-703-1111 Vacuum pump (220 V) Refilling of gas for air conditioner
assembly
799-703-1121 Vacuum pump (240 V)
799-703-1401 Gas leak detector
1 793-498-1210 Lifter (Suction cup) Removal and installation of opera-

Operator’s cab glass Y
2 20Y-54-13180 Adapter tor’s cab glass
30-12 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Sketches of special tools
Sketches of special tools
NOTE
Komatsu cannot accept any responsibility for special tools man-
ufactured according to these sketches.
E1 push tool
E5 push tool
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-13

Sketches of special tools DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
F2 push tool
30-14 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Sketches of special tools
List of tools
Part Number Part Name Area Used on Machine
799-203-8001 Multi Tachometer Setting of engine revs
799-201-2202 Boost Gauge Kit Air boost pressure
799-101-5210 Fitting (PT 1/4) Air boost pressure
799-201-9000 Handy Smoke Checker Measurement of exhaust colour
795-799-1131 Gear Adjustment of valve clearance
795-799-1900 Pin Assembly Adjustment of valve clearance
799-201-1504 Blow By Kit Measurement of blow by
795-790-1950 Tool (Nozzle) Measurement of blow by
795-799-1131 Gear Adjustment of fuel injection timing
795-799-1900 Pin Assembly Adjustment of fuel injection timing
795-799-1950 Lock Pin Adjustment of fuel injection timing
799-101-5002 Hydraulic Tester Measurement of engine oil pressure
790-261-1203 Digital Type Hydraulic Tester Measurement of engine oil pressure
799-401-2320 Hydraulic Tester Measurement of engine oil pressure
673-281-3170 Joint Measurement of engine oil pressure
621-581-9710 O-Ring Measurement of engine oil pressure
796-627-1130 Wear Gauge Inspection of wear on the sprocket
799-101-5220 Nipple (10 x 1.25mm) Hydraulic testing
799-101-1340 Differential Pressure Gauge Hydraulic testing
799-401-2910 Nipple (Size 02) Solenoid valve output
799-401-2920 Nipple (Size 03) Measurement of solenoid valve output
795-502-1205 Compression Gauge Cylinder compression
795-502-1700 Adapter Cylinder compression
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-15

Precautions when performing operation DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Precautions when performing operation

Be sure to follow the general precautions given below when per-
forming removal or installation (disassembly or assembly) of
units.
1. Precautions when performing removal work

• If the engine coolant water contains antifreeze, dispose of it
correctly.
• After disconnecting hoses or tubes, cover them or install

blind plugs to prevent dirt or dust from entering.
• When draining oil, prepare a container of adequate size to

catch the oil.
• Confirm the match marks showing the installation position,

and make match marks in the necessary places before re-
moval to prevent any mistake when assembling.
• To avoid loosening any wire contacts, do not pull on the

wires. In-order to prevent excessive force to the wiring, hold
onto the connectors when disconnecting them.
• Fasten tags to wires and hoses to identify and show their in-
stallation position and help prevent any mistakes when re-in-
stalling.
• Count and check the number and thickness of the shims,

and keep them in a safe place.
• When raising or lifting components, be sure to use proper

lifting equipment of ample strength and safety.
• When using forcing screws to remove any components,

tighten the forcing screws uniformly in turn.
• Before removing any unit, clean the surrounding area and

install a cover to prevent any dust or dirt from entering after
removal.
★ Precautions when handling piping during disassembling
Fit the following blind plugs into the piping after disconnect-
ing it during disassembly operations.
1. Hoses and tubes using sleeve nuts
Nominal number Plug (nut end) Sleeve nut (elbow end) Use the two items below as a set
02 07376-50210 07221-20210 (Nut), 07222-00210 (Plug)
03 07376-50315 07221-20315 (Nut), 07222-00312 (Plug)
04 07376-50422 07221-20422 (Nut), 07222-00414 (Plug)
05 07376-50522 07221-20522 (Nut), 07222-00515 (Plug)
06 07376-50628 07221-20628 (Nut), 07222-00616 (Plug)
10 07376-51034 07221-21034 (Nut), 07222-01018 (Plug)
12 07376-51234 07221-21234 (Nut), 07222-01219 (Plug)
30-16 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Precautions when performing operation
2. Split flange type hoses and tubes
Nominal number Flange (hose end) Sleeve head (tube end) Split flange
04 07379-00400 07378-10400 07371-30400
05 07379-00500 07378-10500 07371-30500
3. If the part is not under hydraulic pressure, the following

corks can be used:
Nominal Dimensions
Part Number
number D d L
06 07049-00608 6 5 8
08 07049-00811 8 6.5 11
10 07049-01012 10 8.5 12
12 07049-01215 12 10 15
14 07049-01418 14 11.5 18
16 07049-01620 16 13.5 20
18 07049-01822 18 15 22
20 07049-02025 20 17 25
22 07049-02228 22 18.5 28
24 07049-02430 24 20 30
27 07049-02734 27 22.5 34
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-17

Precautions when performing operation DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
2. Precautions when carrying out installation work

• Tighten all bolts and nuts (sleeve nuts) to the specified
(KES) torque.
• Install the hoses without twisting or interference.
• Replace all gaskets, O-rings, cotter pins, and lock plates

with new parts.
• Bend the cotter pin or lock plate securely.
• When coating with adhesive, clean the part and remove all
oil and grease, then coat the threaded portion with two or
three drops of adhesive.
• When coating with gasket sealant, clean the surface and re-
move all oil and grease, check that there is no dirt or dam-
age, then coat uniformly with gasket sealant.
• Clean all parts, and correct any damage, dents, burrs, or

rust.
• Coat rotating parts and sliding parts with engine oil.
• When press-fitting parts, coat the surface with anti-friction

compound (LM-P).
• After installing snap rings, check that the snap ring is in-
stalled securely in the ring groove.
• When connecting wiring connectors, clean the connector to

remove all oil, dirt, or water, then connect securely.
• When using eye bolts, check that there is no deformation or

deterioration, screw them in fully, and align the direction of
the hook.
• When tightening split flanges, tighten uniformly in turn to

prevent excessive tightening on one side.
★ When operating the hydraulic cylinders for the first time after
reassembling cylinders, pumps and other hydraulic equip-
ment removed for repair, bleed the air as follows:
a. Start the engine and run it at low idle.
b. Operate the work equipment control lever to operate the

hydraulic cylinders, 4 - 5 times, stopping the cylinders
100 mm from the end of their stroke.
c. Next operate the hydraulic cylinder 3 - 4 times to the

end of its stroke.
d. After doing this run the engine at normal speed.
★ When using the machine for the first time after repair or
long storage, follow the same procedure.
30-18 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Precautions when performing operation
3. Precautions when completing the operations

• If the engine coolant water has been drained, tighten the
drain valve, and add coolant water to the specified level.
Run the engine to circulate the coolant water through the
system. Then check the coolant water level again.
• If the hydraulic equipment has been removed and installed

again, add engine oil to the specified level. Run the engine
to circulate the oil through the system. Then check the oil
level again.
• If the piping or hydraulic equipment, have been removed for

repair, Bleed the air from the system after reassembling the
parts.
★ For details, see TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Bleeding air.
• Add the specified amount of grease (molybdenum disul-

phide grease) to the work equipment related parts.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-19

Removal and installation of starting motor DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of starting motor
Removal
Disconnect the cable from the negative (-) terminal of the

battery.
1. Open up the engine hood.
2. Disconnect the three wires from the engine starting motor 4 5

at: [*1]
• Wire (1) and (2) from terminal B.
• Wire (3) from terminal C.
3. Remove three mounting bolts (4) to detach engine starting

motor assembly (5). [*2]
1 2 3
Installation
• Install in reverse order of removal.
[*1]
 Engine starting motor Terminal B Securing nut:

17.7 to 24.5 Nm (1.8 to 2.5 kgm)
[*2]
 Both faces of engine starting motor gasket:

Gasket sealant (LG-1)
 Engine starting motor Terminal B Securing nut:

43 ± 6 Nm (4.38 ± 0.61 kgm)
30-20 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of fuel pump assembly
Removal and installation of fuel pump assembly
Removal
Disconnect the cable from the negative terminal (- ) of bat-

tery.
1. Turn the upper structure by 90 degrees.
2. Close the fuel stop valve located on the base of the fuel tank
(1).
3. Remove cover (1A).
4. Open the engine hood.
5. Disconnect fuel filter hoses (2) and (3) from fuel supply
pump (16). 1A
• Remove dirt on the connector in advance. (Because dirt

sometimes makes lock (L) fit tight.)
• Pull out the hose while pushing lock (L) from both sides.
• When disconnecting the hoses, oil will flow out. Stop the
flow by inserting plugs into the mouthpieces.
• Wooden plugs should not be used because wood chips

may get into the fuel line.
6. Disconnect fuel return hose (4).
7. Remove bellows (8). [*1]
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-21

Removal and installation of fuel pump assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
8. Disconnect high-pressure pipe (9). [*1]
10. Disconnect high-pressure pipe (9). [*1]
11. Disconnect two tube clamps (10). [*1]
12. Disconnect fuel return tube (11).[*2]
13. Disconnect bracket (12).
15. Remove fuel block (14). [*3]
16. Remove bellows (15).
17. Disconnect tube (9). [*1]
30-22 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of fuel pump assembly
18. Remove three nuts (A parts) and remove fuel injection pump
assembly (16). [*4]
• Fuel injection pump assembly (16) comes off in one

piece with the gear. No treatment (tooth thinning etc.)
has been given to the gear teeth for aligning the 1st and
6th cylinder tops.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-23

Removal and installation of fuel pump assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Installation
• Installation is done in the reverse order of removal.
• Figure: Refer to Removal.
[*1]
• How to install high-pressure pipe (9)
1. Tighten the sleeve nuts by hand. (both sides)
2. Tighten the sleeve nuts in the order of firstly the pump side,
then the common rail side
 Sleeve nut:
35 ± 3.5 Nm {3.57 ± 0.36 kgm}
3. Install two tube clamps (10)
 Clamp mounting bolt:

24 ± 4 Nm {2.45 ± 0.41 kgm}
4. Install bellows (8) and (15).
• Set the slits of each bellows out and down.
• The bellows are installed so that fuel will not spout over
the hot parts of the engine and catch fire when it leaks
for some reason.
[*2]
 Fuel return tube (11) mounting bolt:

24 ± 4 Nm {2.45 ± 0.41 kgm}
[*3]
 Fuel block mounting bolt:

32 ± 4 Nm {3.26 ± 0.41 kgm}
[*4]
 Fuel supply pump mounting nut:

24 ± 4 Nm {2.45 ± 0.41 kgm}
• Air bleeding
Bleed air from the fuel injection system.
• Refer to the Testing and adjustment chapter.
30-24 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of fuel injector assembly
Removal and installation of fuel injector assembly
Special tools
Symbol Part number Part name
3 795-799-6700 Primer
A 4 795-799-1131 Gear
5 795-799-8150 Remover
Removal
Disconnect the cable from the negative terminal (- ) of bat-

tery.
1. Turn the upper structure by 90 degrees.
2. Close the fuel stop valve located on the base of the fuel tank
(1).
3. Remove cover (1A).
pump (FSP).
• Pull out the hose while pushing lock (L) from both sides. 1A
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-25

Removal and installation of fuel injector assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
6. Disconnect dipstick bracket (6). [*1]
7. Remove hose, tube and air intake connector assembly (7).

[*2]
• Remove it without separating from the bracket.
• Mark the hose edge and tube to show the original hose
installation positions. (See figure opposite.)
• When removing the cylinder head cover only, it is not

necessary to remove hose, tube and air intake connec-
tor assembly (7).
8. Remove fan guard (8). 6

8
• Remove it for checking the 3rd and 4th cylinder tops.
• (9) – (13): Unused numbers
9. Disconnect fuel return hose (14). [*3]
11. Disconnect bracket (16). [*4]
30-26 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

13. Disconnect connector (18).
• Pull out connector (18) in the direction of the arrow while

pushing up its lock with flat-head screwdriver [1].
14. Disconnect connectors (19).
• As you cannot hold the connector, remove it as follows, us-

ing two flat-head screwdrivers.
a. Keep pushing the lock of connector (19) with flat-had

screwdriver [1].
b. Insert flat-head screwdriver [2] to the gap between the

left or right side of the lock and the connector. Then twist
the screwdriver from side to side gently to remove the
connector gradually.
• Keep electrical intake air heater (H) drawn to the coun-

terweight side.
• Keep the harness drawn to the counterweight side. [*6]
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-27

16. Remove clamp (21) from the cylinder block and disconnect
fuel supply tube (22). [*8]
• FSP: Fuel supply pump
17. Remove six bellows (23). [*9]
• Cylinder head side only
18. Disconnect six high-pressure pipes (24) at the cylinder head

side. [*10]
19. Remove common rail and high-pressure pipe assembly

(25). [*11]
• Secure space to remove blow-by duct (26).
20. Remove blow-by duct (26). [*12]
21. Remove head cover (27). [*13]
22. By cranking, align mark 1 (M1) at the damper side with mark
2 (M2) at the engine speed sensor side.
• Be careful that the aligning position is not the 1st and

6th cylinder top position but the 3rd and 4th cylinder top
position.
• Mark 1 (M1) corresponds to wide-width slit (WS).
• Refer to the Adjusting of Valve Clearance section in the

Testing and adjusting chapter of this manual.
• Use tool A4 (refer to the tool list) for cranking.
30-28 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

23. Remove nuts (28) for the harnesses from the injector. [*14]
Harness color Cylinder No.
White 1, 3, 5
Black 2, 4, 6
24. Remove 12 mounting bolts and remove six rocker arm and
crosshead assemblies (31).
• Loosen locknut (29) and then loosen adjustment screw

(30) a few turns so that excessive force is not put on the
push rod when the rocker arm is installed.
• Keep records of installation position and direction of the

crosshead (hole shape of a and b parts) (Install it in the
same direction when reinstalling.)
25. Remove retainers (32) and then remove six inlet connectors
(33).
• Remove and flush dirt etc., off the surrounding area in

advance to prevent them from entering the connector
holes.
• Tool A5: remover is adopted for removing inlet connec-

tors (33). (Refer to the tool list.)
26. Remove two mounting bolts (34) for fuel injector assembly
(35).
27. Remove fuel injector assembly (35) using tool A3.
• Be careful not to let any dust or foreign materials enter

the fuel injector assembly mounting portion.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-29

Installation
1. Fuel injector assembly
• Check that there is no damage or dust on the fuel injec-

tor sleeve.
a. Install O-ring (42) and gasket (43) to fuel injector (41).
b. Coat O-ring (42) and the head side of fuel injector (41)
with engine oil (EO15W-40).
 O-ring (42) and the head side of fuel injector (41):

engine oil (EO15W-40)
c. Install holder (44) to fuel injector (41) with concavity and

convexity (A) fitted together.
d. Assemble fuel injector assembly (35) to the cylinder

head with its fuel inlet hole facing the intake manifold
side.
e. Tighten bolts (34) three or four turns.
f. Coat the head side (B part) of inlet connector (33) with

engine oil (EO15W-40).
g. Coat O-ring (C) of inlet connector (33) with engine oil

(EO15W-40). Then insert inlet connector (33) complete-
ly, aligning (D part) with the side groove of the head.
h. Tighten inlet connector (33) with retainer (32) by hand.

(Push it into the injector hole.)
i. Tighten mounting bolts (34) for fuel injector assembly

(35) alternately.
 Bolt:
8 ± 0.8 Nm {0.81 ± 0.08 kgm}
30-30 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

j. Tighten retainer (32).
 Retainer:
50 ± 5 Nm {5.1 ± 0.5 kgm}
2. Rocker arm and crosshead assembly
a. Install rocker arm and crosshead assembly (31).
• When reusing the crosshead, install the same intake

and exhaust valves in the same direction because the
shapes of its holes a and b are different,
• Tighten the mounting bolt after checking that the ball

portion of adjustment screw (30) is well seated in the
push rod socket.
 Mounting bolt:
36 ± 5 Nm {3.7 ± 0.5 kgm}
b. Adjust the valve clearances.

 Locknut (29)
24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
• Carry out the rest of installation in the reverse order to

removal.
[*1]
 Bracket mounting bolt:

43 ± 6 Nm {4.4 ± 0.6 kgm}
[*2]
 Air intake connector mounting bolt:

24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
• MIKALOR clamp
• Use a new clamp.
• Align the hose to the original position (marking position).
• Reference
• Depth of insertion: 60mm (aftercooler side)
• Set bridge (BR) under the clamp tightening bolt as the

lap with band (BR) is Min.5mm.
• Align the clamp to the original position.
• Impact wrench is not applicable to use.
 Clamp:
16 – 18 Nm {1.6 – 1.8 kgm}
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-31

• When the tightening torque force is less than

16Nm{1.6kgm}, tighten it until the hand gap is adhered
(BDG size is 0).
[*3]
 Joint bolt: 24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
[*4]
 Mounting bolt: 24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
[*5]

32 ± 4 Nm {3.3 ± 0.4 kgm}
[*6]
When installing, keep a distance of more than 10mm be-

tween the high pressure pipe and the harness.
[*7], [*8], [*9], [*10], [*11]
• High-pressure pipes and common rail
• Do not use high-pressure pipes with bending modifica-

tion.
• Be sure to use a genuine high-pressure pipe fixing clamp
and observe strictly the tightening torque.
• A high-pressure pipe which has depressions such as visible

vertical slit scar (b), patchy scars (c) etc. on the taper seal
section of its connector ((a) part: within 2mm from the tip), or
a high-pressure pipe whose (d) part (end of the taper seal
section: 2mm from the tip) catches on a finger nail due to fa-
tigue, may cause fuel leakage. In these cases, replace the
high-pressure pipe.
c. Assemble common rail (25) and high-pressure pipes

(51) -(56) temporarily.
 Sleeve nut and mounting bolt:

0.2 – 0.8 Nm {0.02 – 0.08 kgm}
d. Tighten high-pressure pipes (51) - (56) according to the

 Sleeve nut:
35 ± 3.5 Nm {3.6 ± 0.4 kgm}
I. Head side of high-pressure pipes (51) and (56)
30-32 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

II. Common rail (25) side of high-pressure pipes (51)

and (56)
III. Head side of high-pressure pipes (52), (53), (54)

and (55)
IV. Common rail (25) side of high-pressure pipes (52),

(53), (54) and (55)
e. Tighten the sleeve nut of high-pressure pipe (22) tempo-

rarily.
f. Tighten high-pressure pipe (22) in the order of firstly

pump (FSP) side, then common rail (25) side.
 Sleeve nut: 35 ± 3.5 Nm {3.6 ± 0.4 kgm}
g. Tighten clamp (21) of high-pressure pipe (22).
h. Tighten common rail (25) with four bolts.
• Coat the two bolt threads on the inner side of the engine
with sealant (LG-7).
i. Install bellows (23) to each high-pressure pipe. (14 piec-

es)
• The bellows are installed so that fuel will not spout over
the hot parts of the engine and catch fire when it leaks
for some reason.
[*12]
 Blow-by duct mounting bolt:

10 ± 2 Nm {1.0 ± 0.2 kgm}
[*13]
 Head cover mounting nut:

24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
[*14]
★ Harness installation position
White 1, 3, 5
Black 2, 4, 6
 Harness mounting nut:

1.5 ± 0.25 Nm {0.15 ± 0.03 kgm}
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-33

Removal and installation of engine front seal DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of engine front seal
Special tools
1 795-799-6400 Seal puller

A
6 790-331-1120 Wrench (Angle)
Removal
1. Remove the radiator assembly referring to the section of Re-
moving Radiator Assembly.
2. Remove the hydraulic oil cooler assembly referring to the

section of Removing Hydraulic Oil Cooler Assembly.
3. Remove the aftercooler assembly referring to the section of

Removing Aftercooler Assembly.
4. Remove mounting bolts for air conditioner condenser (1)

and put aside air conditioner condenser (1).
5. Remove cover (3).

H1
• Hydraulic oil cooler hoses H1 and H2 have already been
removed with removal of oil cooler. 3
H2
6. Remove fan guards (6).
7. Remove fan (8). [*1]
8. Loosen air conditioner compressor bracket adjustment bolts

(9).
• There is another bolt behind. 6

9. Move air conditioner compressor assembly (10).
30-34 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of engine front seal
10. Remove air conditioner compressor drive belt (11). [*2]
11. Loosen tension by inserting a wrench to A part, and remove

alternator belt (12).
12. Remove six mounting bolts and remove vibration damper

(13).
13. Remove seal (14).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-35

Removal and installation of engine front seal DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Installation
1. Install front seal (14) using tool A1.
• Before installing the seal, check that the end corners

and lip sliding surfaces of the crankshaft are free from
flaw, burr, and rust of the housing.
• When installing the seal, do not coat the shaft and seal
lip with oil, grease etc. Also, wipe off grease from the
shaft completely.
• From cover (C) of seal (14)
• Extrusion
x: less than 0.38 mm
• Facial run out (TIR: total indicator reading)

y: less than 0.25 mm
2. Vibration damper
a. Install vibration damper (13), aligning its dowel hole with

dowel pin a of the crankshaft.
b. Tightening procedure of bolts (15)
I. Tighten to a torque of 55 ± 5 Nm {5.6 ± 0.5 kgm} in

diagonal order.
II. Loosen the bolts 180°.
III. Tighten to a torque of 55 ± 5 Nm {5.6 ± 0.5 kgm} in

diagonal order.
IV. 90° ± 5°
• Tool A6: wrench is adopted for angle tightening.

(Refer to the tool list.) (Refer to the tool list.)
• When an angle tightening tool is not used:

Put marks on the vibration damper and bolts with a
felt-tip pen, and then tighten the bolts an additional
90° ± 5°.
• Carry out the rest of installation in the reverse order

to removal.
[*1]
 Fan mounting bolt:

43 ± 6 Nm {4.4 ± 0.6 kgm}
[*2]
a. Refer to the Inspection and Adjustment of Air Compres-

sor Belt Tension section in the Testing and adjusting
chapter in this manual.
30-36 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removing and installation of engine rear seal
Removing and installation of engine rear seal
Special tools
A 2 795-799-6500 Seal puller
Removal
1. Remove the hydraulic pump assembly referring to the sec-
tion of Removing Hydraulic Pump Assembly.
2. Remove mounting bolt (1) and set guide bolt [1].
3. Remove damper assembly (2).
4. Remove mounting bolt (3) and insert guide bolts [2]. [*1]
• Width across flats: 18 mm
5. Lift temporarily flywheel assembly (4) and pull out flywheel

assembly (4).
• Be careful not to let the guide bolts drop out.
6. Lift off flywheel assembly (4) to remove it.
4 Flywheel assembly: 35 kg
7. Remove seal (5) as follows.
• Use care in the removal so that the crank shaft may not
be damaged.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-37

Removing and installation of engine rear seal DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Installation
1. Install the oil seal according to the following procedure.
• Do not remove pilot [5] which is attached to oil seal (5)

until oil seal (5) is inserted to the crankshaft.
• Before installing the oil seal, de-grease, clean and dry

the crankshaft sealing face and the seal lip face to pre-
vent oil leakage.
2. Insert pilot [5] to crankshaft (6) and push oil seal (5) into fly-
wheel housing (7).
3. Push in oil seal (5) further and pull out pilot [5].
4. Install oil seal (5) on flywheel housing (7) to the proper depth
by using tool A2.
• Push in oil seal (5) taking care that there are no bend
etc. on it.
• Extrusion of oil seal (5) from flywheel housing (7)

X: less than 0.38 mm
30-38 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removing and installation of engine rear seal
• Carry out the rest of installation in the reverse order to

removal.
[*1]
• Tighten the eight flywheel mounting bolts in the order of

(1) through (8) as shown in the figure below.
 Flywheel assembly mounting bolt:

137 ± 7 Nm {13.97 ± 0.71 kgm}
• Tighten the bolts using bar [3] for preventing rotation of

the flywheel assembly.
• Measurement of radial run out
• Radial run out: less than 0.13 mm
a. Set dial gauge [4] to the stand, and set it to flywheel

housing (7).
b. Bring the dial gauge probe into contact with faucet joint
portion a or the outer perimeter surface of the flywheel
at a right angle.
c. Rotate the flywheel 360°and measure the difference of

the maximum swing of the dial gauge indicator.
• Check that the dial gauge indicator is back in the

original position after the flywheel is rotated 360°.
• Measurement of facial run out
• Facial run out: less than 0.20 mm
d. As in the case of measurement of radial run out, bring

the dial gauge probe into contact with end surface b
near the outer perimeter of the flywheel at a right angle.
• Conduct measurement pulling the crankshaft to ei-

ther the front or rear side to prevent errors caused
by shakiness.
e. Rotate the flywheel 360° and measure the difference of

the maximum swing of the dial gauge indicator.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-39

Removal and installation of cylinder head assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of cylinder head assembly
Special tools
3 795-799-6700 Primer
4 795-799-1131 Gear
A 5 795-799-8150 Remover
6 790-331-1120 Wrench (Angle)
7 795-790-4510 Gauge
Removal
Disconnect the cable from the negative terminal (-) of bat-

tery.
2. Drain the engine cooling water.

6 Coolant: Approx. 16.1l 1
3. Remove the following referring to the section of Removing

Engine and Hydraulic Pump Assembly.
• Engine hood
• Top cover on control valve
• Remove muffler guard plate.
• Centre partition between control valve and engine
pump (FSP).
• Remove dirt on the connector in advance. (Because dirt

sometimes makes lock (L) fit tight.)
• Pull out the hose while pushing lock (L) from both sides.
30-40 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of cylinder head assembly
7. Remove clamp (7).
8. Remove the two mounting bolts (8) and lift off muffler as-
sembly (8a).
• Space for winding the lifting tool is small.
4 Muffler assembly: 35 kg 8a
8 8
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-41

9. Disconnect dipstick bracket (9). [*2]
10. Remove hose, tube and air intake connector assembly (10).
9 10 13 11
[*3]
• Remove it without separating from the bracket.
• Mark the hose edge and tube to show the original hose
installation positions. (See figure below.)
12 10
11. Disconnect radiator hose (11). [*4]
12. Disconnect heater hose (12).
13. Remove fan guard (13).
14. Disconnect fuel return hose (14). [*5]
16. Disconnect bracket (16). [*6]
• Pull out connector (18) in the direction of the arrow while

pushing up its lock with flat-head screwdriver [1].
• As you cannot hold the connector, remove it as follows,

using two flat-head screwdrivers.
a. Keep pushing the lock of connector (19) with flat-had

screwdriver [1].
b. Insert flat-head screwdriver [2] to the gap between the

left or right side of the lock and the connector. Then twist
the screwdriver from side to side gently to remove the
connector gradually.
30-42 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

20. Disconnect connector with boost pressure and intake air

temperature sensor (20).
• Keep electrical intake air heater (H) drawn to the coun-

terweight side.
• Keep the harness drawn to the counterweight side. [*8]
21. Remove clamp (21) from the cylinder block and disconnect
high-pressure pipe (22). [*9]
• Remove the bellows from the sleeve nut portions.
22. Remove six bellows (23).
• Cylinder head side only
23. Disconnect six high-pressure pipes (24) at the cylinder head

side. [*9]
24. Remove common rail and high-pressure pipe assembly

(25). [*10]
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-43

25. Remove protection cover (26).
26. Loosen air tube clamp (27). [*11]
27. Loosen hose clamp (28). [*12]
28. Disconnect lubrication inlet hose (29) and lubrication outlet

hose (30).[*13]
29. Remove all the mounting bolts for exhaust manifold (31) ex-
cept a few pieces. [*14]
30. Lift temporarily exhaust manifold and turbo charger assem-

bly (80), and remove the remaining mounting bolts. [*14]
31. Lift off exhaust manifold and turbo charger assembly (80) to
remove it.
4 Exhaust manifold and turbo charger assembly:

25 kg
32. Remove fan (32).[*15]
• Keep the fan dropped down.
30-44 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

33. Loosen air conditioner compressor bracket mounting bolts

(33) and (34).
34. Remove air conditioner compressor drive belt (35). [*16]
35. Disconnect connector E05 (36).
36. Remove air conditioner compressor assembly (37).
• Remove air conditioner compressor assembly in one

piece with the bracket and put them on the counter
weight.
37. Insert a wrench to A part and remove fan belt (38) from al-
ternator (39).
38. Disconnect connectors AB (40) and E12 (41).
39. Remove alternator (39).
40. Disconnect clamp (42).
41. Disconnect connector with water temperature sensor (43)

and air intake pressure sensor (44).
• Connector with water temperature sensor (43)
• Pull the lock (female side) to the outside.
• Air intake pressure sensor (44):
• 1) Push lock (L1) and slide it.
• 2) Pull out the connector while pushing lock (L2).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-45

42. Remove blow-by duct (45).
43. Disconnect fuel return tube (46).
44. Remove head cover (48).
45. By cranking, align mark 1 (M1) at the damper side with mark
2 (M2) at the engine speed sensor side.
• Be careful that the aligning position is not the 1st and

6th cylinder top position but the 3rd and 4th cylinder top
position.
• Mark 1 (M1) corresponds to wide-width slit (WS).

• Use tool A4 (refer to the tool list) for cranking.
46. Remove nuts (49) for the harnesses from the injector.
White 1, 3, 5
Black 2, 4, 6
30-46 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

47. Remove 12 mounting bolts and remove six rocker arm and
crosshead assemblies (52).
• Loosen locknut (50) and then loosen adjustment screw

(51) a few turns so that excessive force is not put on the
push rod when the rocker arm is installed.
• Keep records of installation position and direction of the

crosshead (hole shape of a and b parts) (Install it in the
same direction when reinstalling.)
48. Remove retainers (53) and then remove six inlet connectors
(54).
• Remove and flush dirt etc., off the surrounding area in

advance to prevent them from entering the connector
holes.
• Tool A5: remover is adopted for removing inlet connec-

tors (54). (Refer to the tool list.)
49. Remove two mounting bolts (55) for injector assembly (56).
50. Remove injector assembly (56) using tool A3.
• Be careful not to let any dust or foreign materials enter

the fuel injector assembly mounting portion.
51. Remove push rods (57).
52. Remove rocker arm support (58).
53. Remove rocker housing assembly (59).
54. Remove 26 mounting bolts (60) and lift off cylinder head as-
sembly (61) to remove it.
4 Cylinder head assembly: 75 kg
55. Remove cylinder head gasket (62).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-47

Installation
1. Cylinder head assembly
a. Measure under head length a of all the cylinder head

mounting bolts to check that they are within the length
limit.
• Bolt length limit: less than 132.1 mm
• If a bolt is longer than the using limit, do not reuse it

but replace it.
• Tool A7: gauge is adopted for the measurement.

(Refer to the tool list.)
b. Set head cylinder gasket (62) after checking that there is

no dust or foreign material on the cylinder head mount-
ing face and inside the cylinders.
• Check that the gasket is properly matched with the

cylinder head holes.
c. Set cylinder head assembly (61) on the cylinder block,

screw in mounting bolts (60) by hand a few turns, and
tighten them according to the following procedure.
 Coat the threads and seat surface of the mounting

bolts with engine oil (EO15W-40).
• How to tighten mounting bolts (60)
• Tighten the bolts in the order shown below.
1]
 90 ± 3 Nm {9.2 ± 0.3 kgm}
2]
 Recheck the torque:

90 ± 3 Nm {9.2 ± 0.3 kgm}
3]
 90° ± 5° (Tighten with an angle tightening tool.)
I. Tool A6: wrench is adopted for angle tightening.
30-48 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

(Refer to the tool list.)
• When an angle tightening tool is not used:

Put marks on the cylinder head and bolts with a felt-
tip pen, and then tighten the bolts an additional 90°
± 5°.
2. Install rocker housing assembly (59).
3. Install push rods (57).
4. Install rocker arm support (58).
5. Fuel injector assembly
• Check that there is no damage or dust on the fuel injec-

tor sleeve.
a. Install O-ring (63) and gasket (64) to fuel injector (62).
b. Coat O-ring (63) and the head side of fuel injector (62)
with engine oil (EO15W-40).
 O-ring (63) and the head side of fuel injector (62):

engine oil (EO15W-40)
c. Install holder (65) to fuel injector (62) with concavity and

convexity (A) fitted together.
d. Assemble fuel injector assembly (56) to the cylinder

head with its fuel inlet hole facing the intake manifold
side.
e. Tighten bolts (55) three or four turns.
f. Coat the head side (B part) of inlet connector (54) with

engine oil (EO15W-40).
g. Coat O-ring (C) of inlet connector (54) with engine oil

(EO15W-40). Then insert inlet connector (54) complete-
ly, aligning (D part) with the side groove of the head.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-49

h. Tighten inlet connector (54) with retainer (53) by hand.

(Push it into the injector hole.)
i. Tighten mounting bolts (55) for fuel injector assembly

(56) alternately.
 Bolt: 8 ± 0.8 Nm {0.81 ± 0.08 kgm}
j. Tighten retainer (53).
 Retainer: 50 ± 5 Nm {5.1 ± 0.5 kgm}
6. Rocker arm and crosshead assembly
a. Install rocker arm and crosshead assembly (52).
• When reusing the crosshead, install the same intake

and exhaust valves in the same direction because the
shapes of its holes a and b are different,
• Tighten the mounting bolt after checking that the ball

portion of adjustment screw (51) is well seated in the
push rod socket.
b. Adjust the valve clearances.
I. Refer to the Adjusting of Valve Clearance section in

the TESTING AND ADJUSTING chapter of this
manual.
 Locknut (50): 24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
7. Install harnesses (49).
• Harness installation position
White 1, 3, 5
Black 2, 4, 6
 Mounting nut: 1.5 ± 0.25 Nm {0.15 ± 0.03 kgm}
30-50 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

8. Fit the O-ring and install head cover (48).
 Mounting nut: 24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
9. Install blow-by duct (45).
 Blow-by duct mounting bolt:

10 ± 2 Nm {1.0 ± 0.2 kgm}
10. Install fuel drain hose (46).
 Joint bolt: 24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
• Carry out the following installation in the reverse order to

removal.
[*1]
Install muffler (8) after coating it with thermosetting sealant.
 Entire perimeter of E section:

8
 thermosetting sealant (equivalent of Holts Firegum)
[*2] E
 Bracket mounting bolt:
43 ± 6 Nm {4.4 ± 0.6 kgm}
[*3]
 Air intake connector mounting bolt:

24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
• MIKALOR clamp
• Use a new clamp.
• Align the hose to the original position (marking position).
• Reference
Depth of insertion: 60mm (aftercooler side)
• Set bridge (BR) under the clamp tightening bolt as the

lap with band (BR) is Min.5mm.
• Align the clamp to the original position.
• Impact wrench is not applicable to use.
 Clamp: 16 – 18 Nm {1.6 – 1.8 kgm}
• When the tightening torque force is less than 16 Nm {1.6

kgm}, tighten it until the hand gap is adhered (BDG size
is 0).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-51

[*4]
 Radiator hose clamp:

10.8 – 11.8 Nm {1.1 – 1.2 kgm}
[*5]
 Joint bolt:
24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
[*6]
 Mounting bolt:
24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
[*7]

32 ± 4 Nm {3.3 ± 0.4 kgm}
[*8]
When installing, keep the distance of more than 10 mm be-

tween the high-pressure pipe and the harness.
[*9], [*10]
• High-pressure pipes and common rail
• Do not use high-pressure pipes with bending modifica-

tion.
• Be sure to use a genuine high-pressure pipe fixing clamp
and observe strictly the tightening torque.
• A high-pressure pipe which has depressions such as visible

vertical slit scar (b), patchy scars (c) etc. on the taper seal
section of its connector ((a) part: within 2 mm from the tip),
or a high-pressure pipe whose (d) part (end of the taper seal
section: 2 mm from the tip) catches on a finger nail due to fa-
tigue, may cause fuel leakage. In these cases, replace the
high-pressure pipe.
30-52 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

a. Assemble common rail (25) and high-pressure pipes

(71) – (76) temporarily.
 Sleeve nut and mounting bolt:

0.2 – 0.8 Nm {0.02 – 0.08 kgm}
b. Tighten high-pressure pipes (71) – (76) according to the

 Sleeve nut: 35 ± 3.5 Nm {3.6 ± 0.4 kgm}
I. Head side of high-pressure pipes (71) and (76)
II. Common rail side of high-pressure pipes (76) and

(71)
III. Head side of high-pressure pipes (72), (73), (74)

and (75)
IV. Common rail side of high-pressure pipes (72), (73),

(74) and (75)
c. Tighten the sleeve nut of high-pressure pipe (22) tempo-

rarily.
d. Tighten high-pressure pipe (22) in the order of firstly

pump (FSP) side, then common rail (25) side.
 Sleeve nut: 35 ± 3.5 Nm {3.6 ± 0.4 kgm}
e. Tighten clamp (21) of high-pressure pipe (22).
f. Tighten common rail (25) with four bolts.
• Coat the two bolt threads on the inner side of the

engine with sealant (LG-7).
g. Install bellows (23) to each high-pressure pipe. (14 piec-

es)
• The bellows are installed so that fuel will not spout

over the hot parts of the engine and catch fire when
it leaks for some reason.
[*11]
 Air tube clamp:

10.0 – 11.0 Nm {1.02 – 1.12 kgm}
[*12]
• MIKALOR clamp
• Reference
Length of insertion: 40 mm (turbocharger side)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-53

• Refer to [*3].
[*13]
 Lubrication inlet hose tightening nut:

35 ± 5 Nm {3.5 ± 0.5 kgm}
 Lubrication outlet hose mounting bolt:

24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}
[*14]
• Tighten the bolts in the order shown below
 Exhaust manifold mounting bolt:

First time:in the order of [1] – [12]
Tighten to a torque of
24 ± 4 Nm {2.4 ± 0.4 kgm}.
Second time: in the order of [2] – [12]
53 ± 6 Nm {5.4 ± 0.6 kgm}.
Third time: in the order of [1] – [4]
53 ± 6 Nm {5.4 ± 0.6 kgm}.
[*15]
 Fan mounting bolt:

43 ± 6 Nm {4.4 ± 0.6 kgm}
[*16]
• Refer to the Inspection and Adjustment of Air Compres-

sor Belt Tension section in the Testing and adjusting
chapter of this manual.
• Refilling engine coolant

Refill water through the water filler port up to the speci-
fied level. Start the engine and circulate the water, and
then check the water level.
5 Coolant: Approx. 16.1l
30-54 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of combination cooler
Removal and installation of combination cooler
Removal
Lower the work equipment completely to the ground and

stop the engine. Then loosen the oil filter cap slowly to re-
lease the pressure inside the hydraulic tank.
• Remove the hydraulic tank strainer, and using tool B stop

the oil.
• When not using tool B, remove the drain plug, and drain the
oil from the hydraulic tank and inside the system.
1. Drain the engine cooling water.

6 Engine cooling water: Approx. 16.1l
2. Open up the engine hood and remove

(See chapter 20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING "Removal and
installation of engine and hydraulic pump assemblies" on
page 20-59.).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-55

Removal and installation of combination cooler DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
5. Disconnect oil cooler inlet (3) and outlet (4) hoses.
4 3
6. Disconnect reservoir tank (5).

5
7. Leave hoses attached to condensor. Remove mounting

bolts (6) and lie condensor (7) securely inside compartment.
6
8. Remove guards (8).

8
30-56 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of combination cooler
9. Remove 4 hoses (9).
9
9
10. Sling radiator assembly with two lifting hooks.
11. Remove four support stay mounting bolts (10), two mounting
bolts (11) and lift radiator assembly out.
10 10
10
10
11
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-57

Removal and installation of combination cooler DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Installation
 Radiator hose clamp bolt:

0.55 - 0.65 kgm
★ To maintain the heat balance, make sure that sponge sheets

are assembled in the original position.
Centre of
★ Adjust clearance A between the cooling fan circumference Fan
D
C
and the shroud, adjuster ring using oblong hole B for mount-
ing the bell mouth shroud, adjuster ring so that the clear- B
ance may be even all around the circumference. A
★ Check that clearance A shows the following value, meas-

ured at four points on the right, left, top and bottom sides.
• Standard clearance A (on all the circumference): More

than 10 mm
• Fan diameter C: ∅720
• Shroud inner diameter D: ∅740
• Refilling engine cooling water

Refill engine cooling water through the water filler port up to
the specified level. Let the water circulate to release any air
pockets by starting the engine. Check the water level again.
30-58 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of engine and hydraulic pump assemblies
Removal and installation of engine and hydraulic pump

assemblies
Special tools
Part Distinc-
Mark Part No. Necessity Qty Sketch
Name tion*
Oil
D 796-460-1210 n 1
Stopper
*Distinction between new and existing part.
Removal
Lower the work equipment to the ground for safety and stop
the engine. Disconnect the cable from the negative terminal
(- ) of the battery.
To release the internal pressure, gradually loosen the oil fill-

er cap on the hydraulic tank.
★ Attach an identification tag to each pipe. This will avoid a

possible mistake when reinstalling.
1. Remove the hydraulic tank strainer and stop the flow of oil,
using Tool D.
★ When not using tool D, remove the drain plug to drain oil
from the hydraulic tank and piping.
6 Hydraulic tank: Approx. 200l
2. Drain engine cooling water.
3. Lift up engine hood (1).
Support the engine hood with an appropriate strap and lift-

ing device.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-59

Removal and installation of engine and hydraulic pump assemblies DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
4. Remove pin (2) and mounting bolt (3). Lift off the hood and
set it aside.
4 Engine hood assembly: 48 kg

3
5. Remove bolts (5) and radiator fan guards (6) and (7).
7 6
6. Loosen air compressor belt tension adjusting bolt (8) and re-
move belt (9).
7. Disconnect E06 air conditioner wiring connector (10) and 13

E01 ribbon heater wiring connector (11).
8 11
8. Displace air compressor assembly (12). [*1]
★ Remove air compressor assembly (12) in one piece with 9

the bracket, and set them aside near the counter weight. 10
9. Disconnect air intake hose (13). [*2] 12
10. Disconnect fuel inlet hose (14) and fuel outlet hose (15). [*3]
14 15 16
30-60 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

12. Disconnect engine wiring connector at the following point.
• (17): E02 (Engine oil temperature switch)
17
13. Remove the combination cooler (21)

(See chapter 20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING "Removal and 22
installation of combination cooler" on page 20-55.) 22a
21
14. Disconnect two radiator hoses (22) and CAC hoses (22a) on
the upper and lower sides. [*4]
15. Disconnect engine starting motor wiring (23) and connectors

(24), (25) and (26).
• (23): Engine starting motor terminal B (red)
• (24): E08 (Intermediate connector)
• (25): T13 (Engine starting motor terminal C)
• (26): E03 (Engine oil level sensor)
16. Disconnect engine ground (27).
27
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-61

17. Remove cover (28) and plate (29).

30
19. Disconnect eight hoses. [*5]

35
• (32): Front pump delivery port hose 34
36
38
• (33): Rear pump delivery port hose 37
32
• (34): Pump pressure input port hose 33
39
• (35): Case drain port hose
• (36): PPC basic pressure input port hose
• (37): Rear load pressure input port hose
• (38): Front load pressure input port hose
• (39): Pump suction port hose
20. Remove clamp (40).
21. Disconnect the pump wiring connectors at the following

three points.
• (41): A61 (Hydraulic oil temperature sensor)

Color band, white
• (42): V21 (PC-EPC solenoid valve)

Color band, white
• (43): V22 (LS-EPC solenoid valve)

Color band, red
30-62 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

22. Disconnect exhaust muffler drain tube (44).
44
42
43
41
23. Disconnect engine oil filter outlet hose (45) and engine oil fil-
ter inlet hose (46).
45
46
24. Remove water separator wiring clamp (48).
25. Remove four engine mounting bolts (49) at the front and
rear. [*6]
★ Check that there is no wiring or piping still connected.
26. Lift out engine and hydraulic pump assembly (50).
4 Engine and hydraulic pump assembly: 770 kg
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-63

Installation
[*1]
★ Refer to the Inspection and Adjustment of Air Compres-

sor Belt Tension section in the TESTING AND ADJUST-
ING chapter of this manual.
[*2]
 Air intake hose clamp screw:

5.4 - 6.4 Nm (0.55 - 0.65 kgm)
[*3]
 Fuel inlet hose clamp screw:

29.4 ± 4.9 Nm (3.0 ± 0.5 kgm)
[*4]
 Radiator hose clamp screw:

8.3 - 9.3 Nm (0.85 - 0.95 kgm)
[*5]
★ After tightening the suction hose clamp screw, check

that the screw is in the position as illustrated below.
 Suction hose clamp screw:

8.8 ± 0.5 Nm (90 ± 5 kgm)
★ Install the hose clamp and tighten the clamp screw as

30-64 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

[*6]
★ The engine mounting rubber pads differ in shape at the

front and rear. Place them as illustrated below, and in-
stall the engine and hydraulic pump assembly.
 Engine mounting bolt:

245 - 308.7 Nm (25 - 31.5 kgm)
• Refilling engine cooling water

Refill engine cooling water through the water filler port
up to the specified level.
5 Engine cooling water: Approx. 16.1 l
• Refilling hydraulic oil (hydraulic tank)

Refill hydraulic oil through oil filler port up to the speci-
fied level.
5 Hydraulic tank: Approx. 200 l
★ Let the water circulate to release any air pockets by

starting the engine. Check the water level again.
★ Circulate oil in the hydraulic system by starting the en-

gine. Then check the oil level again.
• Air bleeding
Refer to the Air Bleeding of Various Part section in the
TESTING AND ADJUSTING chapter of this manual.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-65

Removal and installation of fuel cooler assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of fuel cooler assembly
Removal
• If the fuel is too much, drain the fuel in order to stop the fuel
flow from the fuel tank return hose.
1. Disconnect fuel hose (1) and (2) with the precaution de-
scribed below.
• To prevent undue force being exerted on the fuel cooler,

use two wrenches to disconnect the hoses. One to hold
the elbow the other to disconnect the hose.
• Be sure to use the two wrenches, otherwise the force is

loaded to the cooler body and the weld portion (M) may
be separated.
2. Remove fuel cooler assembly (3) by removing 4 bolts (4).
4 3 4
1 4 4 2
Installation
• Installation is done in the reverse order of removal.
30-66 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of transmission and travel motor
Removal and installation of transmission and travel motor
Removal
1. Drain oil out of transmission and travel motor.
2. Remove covers (1).
1
1
1
1
1
3. Remove hoses (2) from travel motor.
2 2
4. Remove drain piping (3).
5. Remove drain piping connector valve (4).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-67

Removal and installation of transmission and travel motor DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
6. Remove piping (5).
7. Remove elbow (6).
8. Remove piping (7, 8).
7
8
9. Remove propshaft nuts (9). Once all nuts are removed, re-
tract end of the propshaft (10) away from the transmission. 9
10
30-68 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of transmission and travel motor
10. Support transmission and travel motor in shown location.
11. Remove bolts (11).
12. Lower until clear of undercarriage.
11 11
Installation
• Tightening torque for propshaft nuts is: 58.8-73.5 Nm
• Refilling hydraulic oil

Refill hydraulic oil through the oil filler port to the specified
level, and let the oil circulate in the hydraulic system by
starting the engine. Then check the oil level again.
• Air bleeding
Refer to the Air Bleeding of Various Part section in the
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-69

Disassembly and assembly of transmission DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and assembly of transmission
Special tools
Part Number Part Name Quantity
796-H70-0060 Seal Assembly 1
796-H70-0090 Snap Ring Assembly 1
796-H70-0170 Handle 1
Disassembly
Removal of travel motor

1. Remove drain plug and drain oil from transmission and trav-
el motor.
6 Transmission: Approx. 2.9 l
2. Remove screws (1).
3. Remove the motor (2).
30-70 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly and assembly of transmission
4. Remove O-ring (3).
5. Remove screws (4) and flange (5).
6. Remove O-ring (6) from flange (5).
Installation of travel motor

• Tightening torque for bolt (1): 117 Nm.
• Tightening torque for bolt (4+5): 117 Nm.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-71

Removal of transmission input shaft

1. Remove spring (1).
2. Remove springs sets (3) and (4).
3. Remove piston (2).
4. Remove the piston gasket (5).
30-72 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

5. Remove the piston gasket (7).
6. Remove spacer (6).
8. Remove sintered discs (10).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-73

9. Remove discs shim (11).
10. Remove steel disc (12).
11. Remove fastening screws (13).
12. Remove flange assembly (14).
30-74 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

13. Remove steel disc (20).
14. Remove sintered discs (19).
15. Remove shim (17).
16. Remove snap ring (16).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-75

18. Remove hollow wheel assembly.
19. Remove the ring (24).
20. Remove bearing (25) from hollow wheel assembly.
30-76 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

21. Remove safety ring (22).
22. Disassemble gear (21) and hollow wheel (23).
23. Disassemble gear assembly (27).
24. Disassemble gear (27), stop (28) and ring (29).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-77

25. Remove planetary gears carrier assembly (34).
26. Remove screws (55).
27. Remove oil tank (56).
30-78 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

29. Remove shaft (30) and gear (31) from planetary gears carri-
er (34).
30. By means of an extractor remove bearing (32).
31. Remove the gear (39).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-79

33. Remove pin (35) from planetary gears carrier (34).
34. Remove spacers (36), bearings (37) and side gears (38).
35. Remove snap ring (40) using tool 796-H70-0090.
36. Remove bearing (41).
30-80 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

37. Remove piston (47) assembly.
39. Remove the gasket (51).
40. Remove pin (53) and disc (52).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-81

41. Remove spring sets (48) and (49).
42. Disassemble piston (47), gasket (43), ring (42), bearing

(46), spacer (45) and bushing (44).
Installation of transmission input shaft

• When installing planetary gears apply loctite 638, flange ap-

ply loctite 510, screws apply loctite 242.
• When installing sintered discs pay attention to discs align-

ment.
30-82 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Removal of output shaft

1. Loosen screws(1). (both sides)
2. Remove screw (1), washer (2) and flange (3) from both
sides.
3. Remove seal ring (4) from both sides.
4. Remove pin (5).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-83

5. Remove pin (7) with O-ring (6).
6. Remove screw (10), spring (9) and ball (8).
7. Remove snap ring (11) from both sides.
8. Remove shims (12) only from motor opposite side.
30-84 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

9. Remove shaft assembly (15).
10. Remove the gear (16).
11. Remove gear (17) and (18).
12. Remove the bearing (13).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-85

13. Remove oil tank (19).
14. By means of an extractor remove bearing (13) from shaft

(15).
15. By means of an extractor remove the spacer (14) from the

shaft (15).
Installation of output shaft

• Install in reverse order to removal.
• When fitting seal ring use tool 796-H70-0060.
• Apply loctite 510 to seal ring.
• Apply loctite 242 to screws.
30-86 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Removal of pump shaft

1. Remove the ring (1).
2. Remove O-ring (1) from ring (2).
3. Remove O-ring (3) from ring (2).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-87

5. Remove pin (12) complete with gear by striking.
7. Strike to remove the bush (10) complete with bearings.
8. Strike to remove from the box (10) the bearings and the
spacer.
30-88 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

9. Disassemble the following components:

O-rings (11) and (9), bearings (6) and (8), spacer (7), snap
rings (13) and (15) and gear (14).
Installation of pump shaft

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-89

Disassembly and assembly of travel motor assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and assembly of travel motor assembly
Counterbalance Qmax Adjustment

Valve Assembly Screw
Port Plate Qmin Adjustment Rotary Group

Assembly Screw Assembly
30-90 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly and assembly of travel motor assembly
Disassembly
1. Put the unit in a bench with a hole or place it on a fixture for
assembly.
2. Remove the counterbalance valve by loosening the six fix-

ing bolts. Counter
balance
valve
Fixing
bolt
3. Before removing the port plate measure and record dimen-

sion X of the Qmin adjustment screw and dimension Y of the X
Qmax adjustment screw. Y
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-91

4. Remove the adjustment screws completely from the motor

casing.
Qmin
screw
Qmax
screw
5. Insert the Qmin adjustment screw into the Qmax threaded

hole and turn screw until the rotary group is at the zero dis- Port
Plate
placement position (should be vertical).
Insert
Qmin
screw
6. Remove the port plate by loosen the eight fixing bolts. Port Plate
Fixing bolt
30-92 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly and assembly of travel motor assembly
Assembly
1. Do not remove rotary group from casing, just check for signs
of damage or wear.
Replace O-ring and install into position using grease.
New
O-ring
2. Apply grease to control lens sliding surface.
Control Sliding
lens surface
3. Assemble the port plate by locating the lens plate onto the Port plate
rotary group.
Secure the port plate by tightening the eight fixing bolts. Fixing
bolt
Tightening torque - 310 Nm
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-93

4. Insert the Qmin and Qmax adjustment screws and set at di-
mensions X and Y which were recorded during the disas-
sembly procedure.
5. Assemble the counterbalance valve assembly using the six

fixing bolts.
Counterbalance
valve Fixing
Tightening torque - 205 Nm. bolt
30-94 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of swing motor and swing machinery assembly
Removal and installation of swing motor and swing ma-

chinery assembly
Removal
Release the residual pressure in the hydraulic circuit. Refer

to the Release of Remaining Pressure in Hydraulic Circuit
section in the TESTING AND ADJUSTING chapter of this
manual.
Lower the work equipment to the ground for safety. After

stopping the engine, loosen the oil filler cap on the fuel tank
to release the residual pressure inside the tank and move
the safety lock lever to the LOCK position.
1. Remove clip for hose (1).

2
★ Keep the removed clip away from the swing motor and 6
swing machinery assembly. 3
2. Disconnect six swing motor hoses (2) through (7). 4
• (2): Between the swing motor and control 5

valve (MA port)
1
8
• (3): Between the swing motor and control
valve (MB port)
• (4): Suction hose (S port)
• (5): Pilot hose for relieving swing brake

(B port)
• (6): Between drain hose and swing motor,

and hydraulic tank (T port)
3. Remove 12 mounting bolts (8). [*1]
4. Lift off swing motor and swing machinery assembly (9) to re-
move.
9
★ When lifting off the swing motor and swing machinery
assembly for removal, do so slowly so that the hoses
and other parts may not be damaged
4 Swing motor and swing machinery assembly:

230 kg
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-95

Removal and installation of swing motor and swing machinery assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Installation
[*1]
 Swing motor and swing machinery assembly

mounting bolt:
490 - 608 Nm (50 - 62 kgm)

level. Let the oil circulate in the hydraulic system by starting
the engine. Then check the oil level again.
• Air bleeding
Refer to the Air Bleeding of Various Parts section in the
30-96 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly and assembly of swing motor and swing machinery assembly
Disassembly and assembly of swing motor and swing ma-

chinery assembly
Special tools
Part Nece Distinc-
Mark Part No. Qty Sketch
Name ssity tion*
Push
1 796-426-1120 ■ 1
tool
Push
790-101-5401 tool ■ 1
G kit
2 • 790-101-5471 • Plate 1
• 790-101-5421 • Grip 1
• 01010-51240 • Bolt 1
Disassembly
1. Draining oil
Loosen the drain plug and drain oil from the swing machin-
ery case.
6 Swing machinery case: Approx. 6.6 l
2. Swing motor assembly

a. Place swing motor and swing machinery assembly on
block (1).
b. Remove the six mounting bolts to disconnect swing mo-

tor assembly (1).
4 Swing motor assembly: 70 kg
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-97

Disassembly and assembly of swing motor and swing machinery assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
3. No. 1 Sun gear

a. Remove No. 1 sun gear (2).
4. No. 1 carrier assembly
a. Disassemble No. 1 carrier assembly (3).
b. Disassemble the No. 1 carrier assembly in the following

manner.
Remove snap ring (4) first and then remove shaft (5),
gear (6), bearing (7), thrust washer (8) and plate (9).
5. Ring gear
Remove the mounting bolts and remove ring gear (10).
30-98 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

6. No. 2 sun gear

Remove No. 2 sun gear (11).
7. Bolt
Remove the holder mounting bolt (12).

a. Remove No. 1 carrier assembly (13).
b. Disassemble the No. 2 carrier assembly by hand in the

following manner.
Insert pin (14) and drive shaft (15) out of carrier (16).
★ Pull out pin (14) after removing the shaft.

Remove thrust washer (17), gear (18), bearing (19)
and thrust washer (20).
Remove plate (21).
9. Shaft assembly
a. Set the shaft case assembly to a press, and push shaft
assembly (22) out of shaft case assembly (23), using
push tool c.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-99

b. Disassemble the shaft assembly in the following man-

ner. Detach bearing (24) and plate (25) from shaft (26),
using push tool d.
10. Bearing
Take bearing (27) and oil seal (28) out of case (29), using a
push tool.
Assembly
★ Clean all related parts and check that there is no dust or
damage on the surface. Coat sliding surfaces with engine oil
and then assemble the parts.
1. Bearing
a. Fill the hatched area (Part a) with grease (G2-LI).
 Injected grease amount:

Approx. 115 - 190 g
b. Press-fit bearing (24) into case (29), using push tool G1.
30-100 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

2. Oil seal
Press-fit oil seal (28), using tool G2.
 Oil seal circumference:

★ When press-fitting, take care so that gasket sealant

(LG-6) will not stick to the lip surface of the oil seal.
 Oil seal lip surface: Grease (G2-LI)
3. Case assembly
a. Set plate (25) onto shaft (26).
b. Set case assembly (23) onto shaft (26), and press-fit the
bearing inner rail portion, using push tool e.
4. Bearing
Press-fit bearing (27), using tool f.
★ When press-fitting the bearing, press both inner and

outer races of the bearing at the same time. Avoid
pressing the inner race only.
★ After the bearing is press-fitted, check that the case will

turn freely.

a. Reassemble the No. 2 carrier assembly in the following
manner.
★ There are traces of expansion on the end surface of car-

rier side hole h which were originally caused when the
pin was inserted. Make such the end surfaces are
smooth enough before reassembly.
Assemble plate (21) in carrier (16).
Assemble bearing (19) in gear (18), then fit upper and lower
thrust washers (17) and (20) to the gear and set the gear as-
sembly to carrier (16).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-101

Align both pin holes of the shaft and the gear, and install
shaft (15), tapping it with a plastic hammer.
★ Install the shaft, rotating the planetary gear. Take care

so the thrust washer is not damaged.
Insert pin (14).
★ When inserting the pin, take care so that any of the

three pawls provided on the circumference (Portion a)
will not come to the slender side of the carrier (Portion
b). Take note, however, that the slender side is likely to
be on the opposite side of the carrier, depending on ac-
tual individual items. Pay attention so that a pin pawl will
not come to the slender side of the carrier any way.
★ Expand the pin of the carrier after inserting.
b. Assemble No. 2 carrier assembly (13).
6. Bolt
Tighten bolt (12).
 Mounting bolt thread:

Adhesive compound (LT-2)
 Mounting bolt:
157 - 196 Nm (16 - 20 kgm)
7. No. 2 sun gear

Install No. 2 sun gear (11).
30-102 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

8. Ring gear
Fit an O-ring to case (29) and install ring gear (10), using an
eyebolt (M10 x 1.5).
★ Bring a counter mark on the ring gear (Portion c) and a

convex portion on the case flange (Portion d) to the po-
sitions illustrated at right, and install the ring gear.
★ Degrease the mating faces of ring gear (10) and case

(29)
★ Never allow gasket sealant to stick to the mating faces

of ring gear (10) and case (29).
 Ring gear mounting bolt:

157 - 196 Nm (16 - 20 kgm)
★ Do not install a washer.

a. Assemble the No. 1 carrier in the following manner.
Press-fit shaft (5) into the carrier in the direction of the
arrow until the snap ring groove can be seen.
After installing snap ring (4), push it back from the oppo-
site side until it comes to contact p face on the carrier.
Take care not to push it back excessively.
After installing plate (9), install thrust washer (8), bearing
(7), gear (6) and snap ring (5).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-103

b. Install No. 1 carrier assembly (3).
10. No. 1 sun gear assembly

Install No. 1 sun gear (2).
★ When installing the No. 1 sun gear, be careful not to in-

stall it upside down.
★ Install the No. 1 sun gear with the tooth portion (Portion
e) facing down.
11. Swing motor assembly

After installing an O-ring to ring gear (10), mount the swing 1
motor assembly (1).
4 Swing motor assembly: 70 kg

10
30-104 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

★ Align the motor port position (Portion f) and the case

convex portion (Portion g) as illustrated at right.
g
★ Degrease both mating surfaces of swing motor assem-
bly (1) and ring gear (10).
★ Never allow gasket sealant to stick to the mating surfac-

es of swing motor assembly (1) and ring gear (10).
 Swing motor mounting bolt:

59 - 74 Nm (6 - 7.5 kgm)
12. Refilling hydraulic oil f

Screw in the drain plug and refill hydraulic oil through the oil
filler port to the specified level.
5 Swing machinery case: Approx. 6.6 l
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-105

Removal and installation of front axle DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of front axle
Removal
1. Drain oil out of front axle and hub
6 Front Axle: Approx. 11.5 l
Hubs: Approx.2.85 l
2. Retract front attachment fully.
3. Remove 6 hoses (1).
1
1
1
1
1 1
4. Remove hose (2).
5. Remove all nuts (3) from propshaft (4), then retract prop-
shaft (4).
30-106 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of front axle
6. Remove pin (5).
7. Use work equipment to lift undercarriage above the axle.
8. Roll axle out on wheels.
9. Place supports in place of axle.
Installation
• Grease all cylinders before installation
• Tightening torque for propshaft nuts (3): 58.8 - 73.5 Nm.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-107

Disassembly and assembly of front axle DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and assembly of front axle
Disassembly of steering cylinder

1. Remove the safety split pins (1).
Reject the used split pins.
2. Remove the joint pivots (2) and the thicknesses (4).
3. Remove the steering bars (3).
4. Remove the screws (5).
30-108 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly and assembly of front axle
5. Unscrew the heads of the steering cylinder (6).
6. Remove the screws (7) of the steering cylinder.
7. Remove the head of the cylinder (8). Strike by means of a

plastic hammer.
8. Remove the gaskets (11), (12) and the scraper ring.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-109

9. Remove the O-rings (9) and (10).
10. Remove the rod complete with cylinder (16) and cylinder lin-
er (17).
11. Remove the head of the cylinder (14).
30-110 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

13. Lock the rod of the cylinder (16) on a vice after having
screwed the head (6).
14. Remove the cylinder liner (17).
15. Remove the piston gaskets (18) and (19).
16. Remove the O-ring (20) and the setting thicknesses (24).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-111

17. Remove the gaskets (21), (22) and the scraper ring (23).
30-112 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Assembly of steering cylinder

1. Fit the gaskets (21) and (22) and the scraper ring.
2. Fit the piston gaskets (18) and (19).
The gasket cuts (18) should not coincide.
3. Thicknesses to be fitted.
4. Measuring of value F1.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-113

8. Assemble the thicknesses x (24) and the O-ring (20).
30-114 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

9. Assemble the O-rings (9) and (10).
10. Assemble the gaskets (11), (12) and the scraper ring (13).
11. Assemble the O-ring (15).
12. Lubricate with grease the contact surface.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-115

13. Assemble the head of the cylinder (14).
14. Lock the rod of the cylinder (16) in a vice after having
screwed the head (6) and assemble the cylinder liner (17).
15. Lubricate with grease the gaskets of the right cylinder rod.
16. Assemble the rod complete with cylinder (16) and the cylin-
der liner (17).
30-116 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

17. Lubricate with grease the gaskets of the left cylinder rod.
18. Assemble head of cylinder (8). Strike by means of a plastic

hammer. Apply Loctite 510.
19. Assemble screws (7) of steering cylinder.

Torque = 560Nm (57.1 kgf-m) Apply Loctite 242.
20. Lubricate the threads of the steering cylinder with grease.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-117

21. Screw heads of steering cylinder (6).
22. Fit screws (5). Torque = 117Nm (12 kgf-m)
23. Assemble steering bars (3).
24. Assemble joint pivots (2) and thicknesses (4).
30-118 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

25. Assemble safety split pins (1).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-119

Disassembly of epicyclic reduction gear

and brake
1. Before draining the oil, position the wheel hub (1) with the
plug on the upper part and loosen it off some turns in order
to eliminate any possible inner pressure, then remove it
completely. Turn the wheel hub upside down till the hole is in
the lowest point.
Drain the oil completely.
2. Remove fastening screws (2) from the cover of the planetary

gears carrier.
3. Use the levers inside the preset slots to detach the planetary
gear carrier cover.
4. Remove the planetary gear carrier cover (3) and O-ring (30).
30-120 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

5. Remove split ring (4).
6. Remove ring bevel gear (5) complete with carrier (28) and
split ring (29).
7. Remove brake discs (6).
8. Remove fastening screws of piston (7) and springs (15).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-121

10. Remove seal rings (9) and (10) from piston (8).
30-122 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

13. Remove screws (11) and washers (21) from brake carrier
(12).
14. Fit ring bevel gear (5) complete with carrier (28) and with
split ring (29). Fit split ring (4) and remove brake carrier (12)
with three-position extractor.
15. Remove bushes (22).
16. Remove seal rings (13) and (14) from brake carrier (12).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-123

17. Remove shims (26).
18. Remove wheel hub (16) with bearings (19) and (20) and
seal ring (19).
19. Remove the drain valve (17).
20. Remove seal ring (19).
30-124 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

21. Remove inner cup of bearing (18).
22. Remove outer cup of bearing (20).
24. Remove planetary gears (23) from planetary gear carrier

cover (3).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-125

Assembly of epicyclic reduction gear and

brake
1. Fit outer cup of bearing (18) wheel hub (16).
3. Fit the remaining part of bearing (18) on wheel hub (16).
4. Apply loctite510 on seal ring (19).
30-126 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

5. Fill seal ring (19) on wheelhub (16). Use tool 796-H70-0040.
6. Lubricate axle shaft to assemble the wheel hub.
Polish hub and oil holes.
7. Assemble the whole wheel hub (16). Alternately strike bear-

ings (18).
The roller bearing should be rested on the beam trumpet.
8. Preheat bearing (20) on proper plate up to 100°C.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-127

9. Fit bearing (20) inside beam trumpet.
Wear gloves to avoid getting burnt.
10. Assemble the tool 796-H70-0120, 3 draw plates M10 x 285

and 3 nuts M10.
11. Use a depth gauge to measure dimension (g) of wheel hub.
12. Use a depth gauge to measure dimension F of brake carrier

(12).
30-128 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

13. Calculate shims X1 of adjustment shims by using the follow-

ing procedure: X1 (G-F) + 0.05.
14. Assemble previously calculated shims (26) X1.
15. Assemble O-rings (9) and (10) on piston (8).
16. Assemble O-rings (13) and (14) on brake carrier (12).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-129

17. Fit piston (8) on brake carrier (12) with springs (15) and
screws (7). Apply loctite 638 on the screws (7).
18. Fit the whole unit of the brake carrier on wheel hub.
The brake carrier and beam trumpet holes should coincide.
19. Assemble brake discs (6).
During assembly operations all the inner disc slots should

coincide.
During assembly operations all the outer disc slots should

coincide.
30-130 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

21. Fit ring bevel gear (5) with carrier (28) and split ring (29).
22. Test the brake by temporarily fitting two screws (11).
Do not assemble bushes (22).
23. Fit snap ring (4).
24. Remove plug (27).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-131

25. Fit an adapter instead of the plug.
26. Test the brakes by considering that pressure should be 100-

50 bar for about one minute.
27. Fit bushes (22).
Pay attention to the assembly direction of bushes.
28. Apply loctite 242 inside slots.
30-132 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

29. Fit screws (11) and shims (21).

Tightening torque: 68Nm
30. Line up brake discs. Use tool 796-H70-0130.
A tooth should coincide with a brake fastening screw (7).
31. Put brakes under pressure to avoid outer disc misalignment.
32. Lubricate with grease and fit O-ring (30).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-133

33. Fit planetary gears (23) on planetary gear carrier cover (3).
Use tool 796-H70-0100.
34. Lubricate with grease the contact surface of planetary gear

cover (3). Apply loctite 510 in the holes.
35. Fit the planetary gear cover (3) and discharge pressure from
the hydraulic pump.
36. Fit screws (2) according to the proper tightening torque

(48Nm).
30-134 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Disassembly of joint box

the lowest point.

gears carrier.
gear carrier cover.
4. Remove the planetary gear carrier cover (3) and O-ring.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-135

5. Remove split ring.
7. Remove the screw (7).
8. Remove the screw (8).
30-136 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

9. Secure the joint box to a hoisting equipment.
10. Screw two screws M12 x 100 and remove the pivot.
11. Screw screws M12 x 100 and remove the pivot.
12. Remove the complete joint group.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-137

13. Remove the complete joint (11).
16. Remove snap ring (14) and extract the shaft (15).
30-138 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

17. Remove snap ring (16) and extract the shaft (17).
18. Remove the bush (18).
19. Remove the O-ring (20).
20. Remove the disk (20).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-139

22. Remove the O-ring (22) and the disk (23).
30-140 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

25. Remove pins (26).
26. Remove the spacer (27).
27. Remove gaskets (28).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-141

Assembly of joint box

1. Assemble the disk (20).
Pay attention to assembling direction.
2. Assemble the O-ring (19).
3. Assemble the bush (18).
Use tool 796-H70-0160.
4. Assemble the O-ring (22) and the disk (23). Pay attention to
assembling direction.
30-142 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100


Use tool 796-H70-0160.

Use tool 796-H70-0160.
7. Apply Loctite 510 on the gasket (24).
8. Assemble the gasket (24).

Use tool 796-H70-0160.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-143


Use tool 796-H70-0150.
10. Apply Loctite 510 on the gasket (28).
11. Assemble the gasket (28).

Use tool 796-H70-0160.
12. Assemble the pins (26).
30-144 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

13. Grease and assemble the spacer (27).
14. Lubricate the shaft (17), fit the snap ring (16) and assemble
in the joint (11).
15. Lubricate the shaft (15), fit the snap ring (14) and assemble
in the joint (11).
16. Assemble the gasket (12). Pay attention to assembling di-

rection.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-145

17. Assemble the gasket (13). Pay attention to assembling di-

rection.
18. Assemble the complete joint (11).
19. Grease tabs of the joint group and assemble.
20. Lubricate and assemble the pivot.
30-146 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

21. Lubricate and assemble the pivot (9).
22. Apply Loctite 242 and assemble the screw (7).

Torque - 285Nm (29 kgf-m)
23. Apply Loctite 242 and assemble the screw (8).

Torque - 285 (29kgf-m)
24. Assemble the snap ring (4).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-147

25. Assemble the snap ring (4).
A tooth should coincide with a brake fastening screw (7)
27. Put brakes under pressure to avoid outer discs misalign-

ment.
30-148 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100


cover (3).
Apply Loctite 510 in the holes.
the hydraulic pump.
31. Apply Loctite® 242 on screw (2).
32. Fit screws (2).

Torque - 55 Nm (6 kgf-m)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-149

Disassembly of beam trumpet and differ-

ential unit
1. Remove the axle unit. Sling and slightly tension the rope.
Turn and then fix it in vertical position.
2. Loosen and remove screws (1) fixating beam trumpet (3) to

the body (4).
3. Sling the beam trumpet (3) and slightly lift it.
30-150 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

5. Lift the whole differential unit.
6. Use an extractor and remove from housing (4) the outer cup
of bearing (5).
of bearing (7).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-151

10. Use an extractor to remove bearing (7) from differential unit.
12. Unscrew all fastening screws (10) of bevel gear crown (2).
This operation makes both differential half boxes free, so

take care not to drop the inner components.
30-152 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

13. Remove ring bevel gear (2) by means a mallet.
14. Check marking points (11) and (12) that will be useful during
the assembly.
15. Remove planetary gear (23) and shim (25).
16. Remove differential pins (13 and (14), planetary gears (15),
(16), (17) and (18) and spheric washers (19), (20), (21), and
(22).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-153

30-154 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Assembly of beam trumpet and differential

unit
1. Apply a thin layer of molicote G-n plus paste on half boxes of
differential (11) and (12).
Remove rests do dope.
2. Apply a thin layer of molicote G-n plus paste on planetary

gears (15), (16), (17) and (18) and on crown wheels (23)
and (24).
3. Set crown Wheel (24) and washer (26).
4. Fit the differential unit pin (13) and planetary gears (15) and
(16) and washers (19) and (20).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-155

5. Fit the differential unit pin (14) and planetary gears (17) and
(18) and washers (21) and (22).
6. Fit ring bevel gear (23) and washer (25).
7. Fit the two half boxes of differential unit (11) and (12).
Carefully check that the marks of both differential half box-

es coincide.
8. Fit ring bevel gear (2) by using a hammer.
30-156 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

9. Apply Loctite 242 on thread of screws (10).
10. Tighten screws (10)

NOTE
Fix differential housing in the vice.
11. Press bearing (7) or assemble after preheating.
12. Press bearing (5) assemble after the preheating.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-157

13. Fit adjustment shims (6) X1 = 1.8 on beam trumpet (4).
14. Use tool 796-H70-0050 to fit bearing washer (5) on beam

trumpet (4).
15. Fit O-ring (9) on beam trumpet (3). Lubricate O-ring (9)with
grease.
16. Position adjusting shims (8) X2 on beam trumpet (3).
30-158 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

17. Use tool 796-H70-0050 to fit the bearing outer washer (7) on
beam trumpet (3).
18. Position the differential unit beam trumpet (4).
19. Position tool 796-H70-0020 for 20K-23-31000. Position tool

796-H70-0030 for 20K-23-32000. Assemble half bearing (7)
inside tool.
20. While Screwing the tool nut until the value of 10Nm has
been reached turn the ring bevel gear and strike it with a
hammer to fix whole unit.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-159

21. Measuring of value G.
22. Value written on beam trumpet (3) F1
23. Drawing used to determine backlashes between the bevel

gear pair teeth for 20K-23-31000.
X1 = 1.8
Check adjusting shims X2 through the suggested procedure
for 20K-23-31000 axles
X2 = G - (19 + F1) + 0.15 / 0.1
F1 = addition of the dimensions printed on the housings 19 +
0.1 / 0.15 is the bearing preloading
24. Drawing used to determine backlashes between the bevel

gear pair teeth for 20K-23-32000.
X1 = 1.8
Check adjusting shims X2 through the suggested procedure
for 20K-23-32000 axles
X2 = G - (22 + F1) + 0.15 / 0.1
F1 = addition of the dimensions printed on the housings 22 +
0.1 / 0.15 is the bearing preloading
30-160 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

25. Move alternately the pinion tag and take note of the back-
lash between pinion and ring bevel gear (detected through a
compactor). Make sure that the feeler touches the screw
head mounted on the flange and is located at 90 degrees.
Check if the value of the detected backlash is within the pre-
set field: 0.15/0.25 mm.
Should the backlash be insufficient or excessive, adjust
shim X1=1.8 by increasing or decreasing.
26. Apply Loctite 510 on contact surface of beam trumpet (4).
27. Apply loctite 242 on screws (1).
28. Assemble screws (1).

Torque - 560Nm (57 kgf-m)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-161

Disassembly of pinion group

2. Loosen and remove screws (1) fixing beam trumpet (3) to

the body (4).
30-162 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

6. Loosen the nut (6).
7. Remove the nut (6) and the flange (10).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-163

9. Take the bevel pinion out of its housing, by beating with

hammer made of soft material on the splined end.
10. Once the bevel pinion (2) has been removed, collect shims
(9) and spacer (8).
11. Take the bearing cone (13) out of the bevel pinion end, using
a suitable extractor.
12. Take the cup of the taper roller bearing (11) out of the central
body, using a chisel and hammer.
30-164 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

13. Remove the outer cup of the taper roller bearing (13) and
shims (9) from the central body. Use a chisel and a hammer.
Assembly of pinion group

1. Bevel pinion adjustment for 20K-23-31000.
X 155.50 155.50 155.70
B 29.25 29.45 29.45
V 125.00 125.20 124.80
A 154.25 154.65 154.05
S 1.25 0.85 1.65
Bevel pinion adjustment for 20K-23-32000.
X 163.50 163.50 163.70
B 29.25 29.45 29.25
V 133.00 133.20 132.80
A 162.25 162.65 162.05
S 1.25 0.85 1.65
2. Value stamped on beam trumpet.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-165

3. To determine shim (S) between pinion and bearing it is

enough to add value (V) printed on pinion head (V = pre-
scribed conical distance) to value B - bearing width - and
subtract X from the value printed on beam
S = X - (V+B)
Example:shim S = 163.6 - (132.80 + 29.25) =1.55 mm
4. Bearings adjustment for 20K-23-31000.
G 30.50 30.00 30.60
S 1.25 0.85 1.65
L1 2.25 2.25 2.57
L2 2.25 2.25 2.57
S1 36.25 35.35 37.39
B1 34.40 34.50 34.40
S2 1.85 0.85 2.99
Preloading reduction ca. 0.02 - 0.04 for a 2-3 Nm torque.
Bearings adjustment for 20K-23-32000.
G 49.50 49.30 49.80
S 1.25 0.85 1.65
L1 2.25 2.25 2.57
L2 2.25 2.25 2.57
S1 55.25 54.65 56.59
B1 54.50 54.50 54.40
S2 0.75 0.15 2.19
Preloading reduction ca. 0.02 - 0.04 for a 2-3 Nm torque.
5. To determine shim S2.

S2 = B1 - (L1 - S - G - L2)
S = previously detected shims
G = beam value
30-166 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

6. B1 = spacer eight (8).

Alternative procedure, use starting spacer S = 1.5.
7. B1 = spacer eight (8).

Alternative procedure, use starting spacer S = 1.5.
8. Position half bearing (11) on beam trumpet (4).
9. Position adjusting shims (9) and inner bearing washer (13)

on beam trumpet (4).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-167

10. Insert the cups of the taper roller bearings on their housings
using the special tools included on the kit 796-H70-0070
(20K-23-31000) 796-H70-0220 (20K-23-32000).
11. Press inner bearing (13) on pinion (2).

Use tool 796-H70-0100
12. Fit the whole pinion of the bearing on beam trumpet (4)
spacer (8) and shims (12).
13. Preheat bearing (11) on proper plate up to 100ºC.
30-168 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

14. Fit bearing (11) in relevant housing on beam trumpet (4).
Use a special glove to protect fromscorching.
15. Grease shaft pinion (2).
16. Fit oil seal (7) inside tool 796-H70-0140.

Apply Loctite 510 on the oil seal outer edge.
17. Assemble the oil seal by slightly striking with a plastic ham-
mer.
NOTE
Clean the box with a rolling brush.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-169

18. Apply Loctite 242 on nut (6).
19. Use a hammer to assemble flange (10) together with guard

(14).
20. Assemble the flange (10) and the nut (6).
21. Apply tool 796-H70-0210.

30-170 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

22. Drive the nut (6) with a tool.
23. Carry out the preloading measurement (P) of the pinion ta-
per roller using a dynamometer whose cord is wound on the
flange diameter. The adjustment is performed by gradually
increasing shims (12) mounted under bearing (11).
All preloadings should be measured without the seal ring.

P = 2/3 Nm
24. Assemble the whole differential unit.
25. Assemble O-ring (5) on beam trumpet (3). Grease the O-

ring (5)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-171

26. Apply Loctite 510 on contact surface of beam trumpet (4).
27. Fit screws (1) and tighten.

28. To test the marks of the bevel gear teeth, paint the ring gear
with red lead paint and detect the contact. The marking test
should always be carried out on the ring bevel gear teeth
and on both sides.
29. OK - Correct contact.

If the bevel gear is well adjusted, the mark on the teeth sur-
faces will be regular
Z - Excessive contact on the tooth tip

Approach the pinion to the ring bevel gear and then move
the ring bevel gear away from the pinion in order to adjust
the backlash.
X - Excessive contact at the tooth base

Move the pinion away from the ring bevel gear and then ap-
proach the ring bevel gear to the pinion in order to adjust the
backlash.
30-172 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

30. Movements to correct
1 - Move the pinion for type X contact adjustment.
2 - Move the pinion for type Z contact adjustment.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-173

Toe-in adjustment
1. Put 2 equal one meter long linear bars on the wheel sides
and lock them with two nuts on the wheel hub stud bolt.
The 2 bars should be fixed on their middle so that they are

perpendicular to the supporting surface and parallel to the
pinion shaft. Align the 2 bars.
2. Measure the distance in mm between the bar ends with a

tapeline (M).
NOTE
Keep the minimum value, swinging the measurement point.
3. Check that the difference of the measurements between the

wheel hubs diameters ends is within the requested toler-
ance range (Tolerance = 0)
The nominal toe-in (A) value is referred to the external diam-
eter of the wheel hubs flange, therefore the measured toe-in
value (M) at the bars ends must be related to the ratio be-
tween length of the bar and flange diameter.
Nominal toe-in Measured

(Tolerance = 0) = A±1 Toe-in = M±3
30-174 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

4. If toe-in is incorrect, remove the pivots of the steering cylin-

der heads, screw them in and out equally till the toe-in is
within the requested tolerance.
5. After adjusting, screw in the lock nuts. (Tightening torque =

117Nm)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-175

Removal and installation of rear axle DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of rear axle
Removal
Blanking Kit
Description Part Number Qty Where Used
Cap Plug 07376-70210 1

Rear Clutch Hose
O-ring 02896-11008 1
Cap Plug 07376-70210 1

Top Clutch Hose
O-ring 02896-11008 1
Plug 02789-00210 2 Brake fittings
Cap Plug 07376-70210 2

Hub Brake Lines
O-ring 02896-11008 2
1. Drain oil from axle and hubs.

6 Rear Axle: Approx. 12 l
Hubs: Approx.2 l
2. Remove tube (1).
3. Remove tube (2).

2
30-176 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of rear axle
4. Remove all nuts (3) from propshaft (4). Once removed re-
tract propshaft (4).

5 5
6. Lower work equipment to raise undercarriage above rear

axle.
7. Roll axle out on wheels.
8. Place supports in place of axle.
Installation
• Grease all cylinders before installation
• Tightening torque for axle mounting bolts (5):661.9-828.5

Nm.
• Tightening torque for propshaft nuts (3): 58.8-73.5 Nm.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-177

Disassembly and assembly of rear axle DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and assembly of rear axle
Special tools
Part Number Part Name Quantity
796-H70-0030 Toque control device 1
796-H70-0040 Chuck for bushings 1
796-H70-0050 Chuck for bushings 1
796-H70-0080 Assemle pin 1
796-H70-0100 Pin 1
796-H70-0110 Assemble device 1
796-H70-0130 Brake centring 1
796-H70-0140 Assemble pin 1
796-H70-0170 Assemble pin 1
Removal of epicyclic reduction gear and

brake
the lowest point.

gears carrier.
30-178 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly and assembly of rear axle
gear carrier cover.
4. Remove the planetary gear carrier cover (3) and O-ring (30).
5. Remove split ring (4).
6. Remove ring bevel gear (5) complete with carrier (28) and
split ring (29).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-179

7. Remove brake discs (6).
8. Remove fastening screws of piston (7) and springs (15).
10. Remove seal rings (9) and (10) from piston (8).
30-180 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

11. Remove screws (11) and washers (21) from brake carrier
(12).
12. Fit ring bevel gear (5) complete with carrier (28) and with
split ring (29). Fit split ring (4) and remove brake carrier (12)
with three-position extractor.
13. Remove bushes (22).
14. Remove seal rings (13) and (14) from brake carrier (12).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-181

16. Remove wheel hub (16) with bearings (19) and (20) and
seal ring (19).
17. Remove the drain valve (17).
18. Remove seal ring (19).
30-182 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

19. Remove inner cup of bearing (18).
22. Remove sleeve (25).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-183

23. Remove shaft and pinion (24).
24. Remove planetary gears (23) from planetary gear carrier

cover (3).
25. Remove axle shaft (31).
30-184 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Installation of epicyclic reduction gear and

brake
1. Assemble universal joint (31).
3. Fit the remaining part of bearing 18) on wheel hub (16).
4. Apply loctite510 on seal ring (19).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-185

5. Fill seal ring (19) on wheelhub (16). Use tool 796-H70-0040.
6. Lubricate axle shaft to assemble the wheel hub.
Polish hub and oil holes.
7. Assemble the whole wheel hub (16). Alternately strike bear-

ings (18).
The roller bearing should be rested on the beam trumpet.
30-186 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

9. Fit bearing (20) inside beam trumpet.
Wear gloves to avoid getting burnt.
10. Assemble the tool 796-H70-0110, 3 draw plates M10 x 285

and 3 nuts M10.
11. Use a depth gauge to measure dimension (g) of wheel hub.
12. Use a depth gauge to measure dimension F of brake carrier

(12).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-187

13. Calculate shims X1 of adjustment shims by using the follow-

ing procedure: X1 (G-F) + 0.05.
14. Assemble previously calculated shims (26) X1.
15. Assemble O-rings (9) and (10) on piston (8).
16. Assemble O-rings (13) and (14) on brake carrier (12).
30-188 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

17. Fit piston (8) on brake carrier (12) with springs (15) and
screws (7). Apply loctite 638 on the screws (7).
18. Fit the whole unit of the brake carrier on wheel hub.
The brake carrier and beam trumpet holes should coincide.
During assembly operations all the inner disc slots should

coincide.
During assembly operations all the outer disc slots should

coincide.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-189

21. Fit ring bevel gear (5) with carrier (28) and split ring (29).
22. Test the brake by temporarily fitting two screws (11).
Do not assemble bushes (22).
23. Fit snap ring (4).
24. Remove plug (27).
30-190 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

25. Fit an adapter instead of the plug.
26. Test the brakes by considering that pressure should be 100-

50 bar for about one minute.
27. Fit bushes (22).
Pay attention to the assembly direction of bushes.
28. Apply loctite 242 inside slots.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-191

29. Fit screws (11) and shims (21).

Tightening torque: 68Nm
A tooth should coincide with a brake fastening screw (7).
31. Put brakes under pressure to avoid outer disc misalignment.
30-192 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

33. Fit planetary gears (23) on planetary gear carrier cover (3).
Use tool 796-H70-0100.
34. Fit pinion shaft (24).
35. Fit sleeve (25).

cover (3). Apply loctite 510 in the holes.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-193

37. Assemble axle shaft (31).
the hydraulic pump.
39. Fit screws (2) according to the proper tightening torque

(48Nm).
30-194 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Disassembly of beam trumpet and differ-

ential unit

the body (4).
3. Remove plug, lock axle shaft, use a pivot M8x250 with

screw nut and washer.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-195

of bearing (5).
30-196 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

of bearing (7).
11. Use and extractor to remove bearing (7) from differential

unit.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-197

13. Unscrew all fastening screws (10) of bevel gear crown (2).
This operation makes both differential half boxes free, so

take care not to drop the inner components.
14. Remove ring bevel gear (2) by means of a mallet.
15. Check marking points (11) and (12) that will be useful during
the assemblage.
30-198 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

17. Remove differential pins (13) and (14), planetary gears (15),
(16), (17) and (18) and spheric washers (19), (20), (21) and
(22).
Installation of beam trumpet and differen-

tial unit
• When installing screws apply loctite 242.
• Apply a thin layer of Molicote G-n plus paste on all planetary

gears, crown wheels and half boxes of differential unit.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-199

Disassembly of pinion group


the body (4).
3. Remove plug, lock axle shaft by means of a drawbench

M8x250 and a washer.
30-200 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

7. Unloose the nut (6).
8. Remove the nut (6) and the flange (10).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-201

10. Take the bevel pinion out of its housing, by beating with a
hammer made of soft material on the splined end.
11. Once the bevel pinion (2) has been removed, collect shims
(9) and spacer (8).
12. Take the bearing cone (13) out of the bevel pinion end, using
a suitable extractor.
30-202 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

13. Take the cup of the taper roller bearing (11) out of the central
body using a chisel and hammer.
14. Remove the outer cup of the taper roller bearing (13) and
shims (9) from the central body. Use a chisel and hammer.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-202

Installation of pinion group

1. Bevel pinion adjustment ASP125.
X 163.50 163.50 163.70
B 29.25 29.45 29.25
V 133.00 133.20 132.80
A 162.25 162.65 162.05
S 1.25 0.85 1.65
2. Value stamped on beam trumpet X.
3. To determine shim (S) between pinion and bearing it is

enough to add value (V) printed on pinion head (V = pre-
scribed conical distance) to value B - bearing width - and
subtract X from the value printed on beam.
S=X - (V+B)
Example: shim S = 163.6 - (132.80 + 29.25) = 1.55mm.
30-204 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

4. Bearings adjustment ASP125.
G 49.50 49.30 49.80
S 1.25 0.85 1.65
L1 2.25 2.25 2.57
L2 2.25 2.25 2.57
S1 55.25 54.65 56.59
B1 54.50 54.50 54.40
S2 0.75 0.15 2.19
Preloading reduction ca. 0.02 - 0.04mm for a 2-3 Nm torque.
5. To determine shim S2
S2 = B1 - (L1 - S - G - L2)
S = previously detected shims
G = beam value
6. L1 = bearing height
L2 = bearing height
7. B1= spacer (8) height.
Alternative procedure, use starting spacer S= 1.5.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-205

8. Position half bearing (11) on beam trumpet (4).
9. Position adjusting shims (9) and inner bearing washer (13)

on beam trumpet (4).
10. Insert the cups of the taper roller bearings on their housings
using the special tool included on the kit 796-H70-0080.
11. Press inner bearing (13) on pinion (2). Use tool 796-H70-
0100.
30-206 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

12. Fit the whole pinion of bearing on beam trumpet (4), spacer
(14) and shims (12).
14. Fit bearing (11) in revelant housing on beam trumpet (4).
Use a special glove to protect from scorching.
15. Grease shaft pinion.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-207

16. Fit oil seal (7) inside tool 796-H70-0140.

Apply loctite 510 on the oil seal outer edge.
17. Assemble the oil seal by slightly striking with a plastic ham-
mer.
NOTE
Clean the box with a rolling brush.
18. Apply loctite 242 on nut (6).
19. Use a hammer to assemble flange (10) together with guard

(8).
30-208 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

20. Assemble the flange (10) and the nut (6).
21. Apply tool 796-H70-0020.

Torque: 400Nm
22. Carry out the preloading measurement (P) of pinion taper

roller using a dynamometer whose cord is wound on the
flange diameter. The adjustment is performed by gradually
increasing shims mounted under bearing.
All preloadings should be measured without the seal ring.

P = 2 / 3 Nm
23. Offset the nut (6) by means of a heading tool.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-209

24. Assemble whole differential unit.
25. Assemble the O-ring (5) on beam trumpet (3). Grease the
O-ring (5).
26. Apply loctite 242 on contact surface of beam trumpet (4).
27. Fit screws (1) and tighten according to the prescribed

torque: 560 Nm
30-210 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

NOTE
To test the marks of the bevel gear teeth, paint the ring gear with
red lead paint and detect the contact.
28. The markinking test should be always carried out on the ring
bevel gear teeth and on both sides.
29. OK - Correct contact

If bevel gear is well adjusted, the mark on teeth surfaces will
be regular.
Z - Excessive contact on the tooth tip.
Approach the pinion to the ring bevel gear and then move
the ring bevel gear away from the pinion in order to adjust
the backlash.
X - Excessive contact at the tooth base.
Move the pinion away from the ring bevel gear and then ap-
proach the ring gear to the pinion in order to adjust the back-
lash.
30. Movements to correct.

1 - Move the pinion for type X contact adjustment.
2 - Move the pinion for type Z contact adjustment.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-211

Removal and installation of propshaft DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of propshaft
Removal
1. Remove plate (1).
2. Remove nuts (2), then retract propshaft (3) away from sur-
face (4). 4
3. Remove nuts (5), then remove propshaft (3).
• Removal of front propshaft follow same procedure.
Installation
• Tightening torque of propshaft nuts (58.8-73.5 Nm)
30-212 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of wheel
Removal and installation of wheel
Removal
1. Stop engine and ensure brake pedal is engaged.
2. Raise the chassis with the boom so that the tyres are raised
above the ground. Then, place axle stands below the front
(1) and rear (2) axles.
1 2
3. Lower onto stands and deflate tyre completely by removing

valve (3) with appropriate tool.
3
Always stand to the side while deflating the tyre.
4. Release 8 of the wheel retaining nuts leaving 2 diagonally

opposite each other remaining (1+2). Once you have
checked there is no pressure on the remaining 2 nuts re-
move these as well.
Installation
• When inflating tyres, inflate to:
Tyre Tyre Pressure (bar)
10.00 - 20 16 ply 7.25
11.00 - 20 16 ply 7.00
• Check there is no damage to wheel and rims.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-213

Removal and installation of suspension lock cylinder DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of suspension lock cylinder
Removal
1. Remove front wheels
installation of wheel" on page 20-213.)
2. Remove tube (1).

1
3. Remove the 4 bolts (2) attaching the suspension lock cylin-

ders to the chassis. 2 2
4 Suspension cylinder assembly: 57Kg
Installation
• Be sure to grease axle pads when installing cylinders.
30-214 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly and assembly of suspension lock cylinder
Disassembly and assembly of suspension lock cylinder
Change rod seal

1. Remove screw plug position 10.
2. Press rod position 2 downwards.
Do not damage rod surface!
3. Take out U-ring position 7 using aa tool without sharp edges.
Do not damage groove!
4. Insert new U-ring in a reniform squeezed state and press it

into the groove ensuring that there are no kinks.
5. Investigate wiper ring position 6 with respect to damages, if

necessary replace it.
6. Grease the seals.
7. Mount the rod.
With all repairs pay attention to extreme cleanliness!
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-215

Removal and installation of outrigger DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of outrigger
Removal
1. Lower outriggers untill they just touch the ground but do not
take any of the weight of the machine.
2. Turn off engine.
3. Depressurise the outrigger hydraulic circuit.
5. Remove 2 pipes (2).
30-216 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of outrigger
7. Sling outrigger assembly at points marked (4).
8. Remove all bolts (5) and remove outriggers.

5
Installation
• Grease all pins and cylinders before installing.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-217

Disassembly and assembly of outrigger DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and assembly of outrigger
Disassembly
1. Insert plugs into oil connectors to prevent dirt blocking con-
nectors.
2. Insert support block below cylinder at (1).
3. Remove pin (2).
4. Attach sling to cylinder at location (3).
30-218 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly and assembly of outrigger
5. Remove pin (4).
6. Slowly sling cylinder and remove from outrigger.
Assembly
• Grease bearing points after assembly.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-219

Removal and installation of dozer blade DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of dozer blade
Removal
1. Sling at shown points (1).
1
1 1
2. Lower dozer blade until it just touches the ground, but don’t
take any of the weight of the machine.
3. Turn off engine.

2
2
4. Depressurise dozer blade circuit.
6. Attach lifting tackle.
7. Remove bolts (3) and remove dozer blade assembly.
Installation
• Grease all pins and cylinders.
30-220 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly and assembly of dozer blade
Disassembly and assembly of dozer blade
Disassembly
3. Remove pin (3).
4. Attach lifting tackle to cylinder at location (4).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-221

Disassembly and assembly of dozer blade DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
5. Remove pin (5).

5
6. Slowly sling cylinder and remove from dozer.
Assembly
• Grease bearing points after assembly.
30-222 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of swing circle assembly
Removal and installation of swing circle assembly
Removal
1. Remove revolving frame assembly. For details, see RE-
MOVAL OF REVOLVING FRAME ASSEMBLY.
2. Remove 36 mounting bolts (1) to remove the swing circle

assembly. [*1]
3. Lift off swing circle assembly (2). [*2]

2
4 Swing circle assembly: 270 kg
Installation
[*1]
 Thread of swing circle mounting bolt:

Thread tightener (LT-2)
 Swing circle mounting bolt:
1st pass:
Tighten to 191.2 ± 19.6 Nm {19.5 ± 2 kgm}
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-223

Removal and installation of swing circle assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
2nd pass:
I. Using the angle of the bolt head as the base, make

start marks on the swing circle and socket.
II. Make an end mark at a point (on swing circle) 48 ±

5° from the start mark.
III. Tighten so that the start mark on the socket is

aligned with the end mark on the swing circle at the
48 ± 5° position.
[*2]
Outer race
soft zone
★ Set the soft zone S mark on the inside ring of the inner
Front of machine
race facing the right side as shown in the diagram. Then
install to the chassis.
 Swing circle:
Grease (G2-L1) 14.6 l
Inner race
soft zone
30-224 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of revolving frame assembly
Removal and installation of revolving frame assembly
Removal
Extend the arm and bucket fully, then lower the work equip-
ment to the ground and move the safety lock lever to the
LOCK position.
1. Remove oil from hydraulic tank.
2. Remove work equipment. See See chapter 30 DISASSEM-

BLY AND ASSEMBLY "Removal and installation of mono-
boom work equipment" on page 30-265.
3. Remove the counter weight. See See chapter 30 DISAS-

SEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY "Removal and installation of
counterweight" on page 30-276.
4. Disconnect boom cylinder hoses (1) and plug the hoses to

prevent flow of oil.
1
5. Sling boom cylinders (2).
6. Remove plate (3) and pin (4) and lift off boom cylinder as-
sembly (2) to remove it.
★ Remove the boom cylinder assembly on the opposite 4

side in the same manner.
4 Boom cylinder assembly: 180 kg 3
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-225

Removal and installation of revolving frame assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
7. Disconnect the 13 hoses on the swivel joint assembly at the

swivel joint side. 9 8 5
(5): Suspension lock
(6): Brake 2
(7): Attachment bottom
(8): 2nd clutch
(9): 1st clutch
(10): Steer right
(11): Brake 1 10 11 7 6
(12): Travel B 12
(13): Travel A
(14): Attachment Head
(15): Drain
(16): Motor volume pilot
(17): Steer left
13 14
15 16 17
30-226 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of revolving frame assembly
8. Remove 4 bolts (18) from revolving frame.

18

19
10. Remove the 32 revolving frame mounting bolts and remove

revolving frame assembly (20) by lifting it off.
20
★ Attain fore and aft balance and right and left balance of
the revolving frame assembly without two mounting
bolts at the front and rear being removed and using a le-
ver block. Only when the right balance is obtained, re-
move the remaining two bolts.
When removing the revolving frame assembly, take care so

that it does not hit the swivel joint assembly.
4 Revolving frame assembly
Revolving frame only (Reference

Assembly
value)
PW200-7
6,052 kg 2,070 kg
PW220-7
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-227

Removal and installation of revolving frame assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Installation
 Air intake hose clamp screw:

5.4 - 6.4 Nm (0.55 - 0.65 kgm)
 Swivel circle mating surface:

 Threads of revolving frame mounting bolt:

 Revolving frame mounting bolt

1st step: 294.2 ± 29.4 Nm (30 ± 3 kgm)
2nd step: Retightening by 60° or
588 - 677 Nm (60 - 69 kgm)

level, and let the oil circulate in the hydraulic system by
starting the engine. Then check the level again.
• Air bleeding
Bleed air from the travel motor, refer to the Air Bleeding of
Various Parts section in the TESTING AND ADJUSTING
chapter of this manual.
30-228 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of centre swivel joint
Removal and installation of centre swivel joint
Removal
Release the remaining pressure in the hydraulic circuit. For

details, see TESTING AND ADJUSTING, release of remain-
ing pressure in hydraulic circuit.
1. Remove oil from hydraulic tank and drain oil from system.
2. Remove transmission and travel motor.

installation of transmission and travel motor" on page 20-
67.)
3. Disconnect 13 hoses (1) through (13).
★ When removing hoses mark all hoses with tags to pre-

vent mistakes when installing. 1
2
3
4
(1): Travel B
13
(2): Brake 1 12
11
10
(4): 1st clutch 6
9
7
(5): Drain
(6): 2nd clutch 8
(7): Travel A
(8): Suspension lock
(9): Steer left
(10): Steer right
(11): Brake 2
(12): Attachment head
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-229

Removal and installation of centre swivel joint DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
4. Disconnect connector (14)
14
5. Disconnect 13 hoses (15) through (27).

19 18 15
20 21 17 16
(15): Suspension lock 22

(16): Brake 2
(18): 2nd clutch
(19): 1st clutch
(20): Steer right
(21): Brake 1
(22): Travel B
23 24
(23): Travel A
(24): Attachment Head
(25): Drain
(27): Steer left
30-230 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of centre swivel joint
25 26 27

28
7. Remove 4 bolts attached to revolving frame (29). 29
8. Remove 4 of the 6 mounting bolts (30).
9. Sling centre swivel joint then remove 2 remaining mounting

bolts (30) and remove.
4 Center swivel joint assembly: 95 kg
30
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-231

Removal and installation of centre swivel joint DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Installation
Install the center swivel joint facing in the direction shown in

the diagram.
FRONT
(The diagram shows the machine as seen from above)
• Refilling with oil (hydraulic tank)
★ Add oil through the oil filter to the specified level. Run
the engine to circulate the oil through the system. Then
check the oil level again.
• Bleeding air Centre swivel joint
★ Bleed the air from the travel motor. For details see
TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Air Bleeding of Various
Parts.
30-232 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly and assembly of centre swivel joint
Disassembly and assembly of centre swivel joint
Special tools
Neces- Distinc-
Mark Part No. Part Name Qty Sketch
sity tion*
790-101-2501 Push puller • 1
• 790-101-2510 • Block 1
• 790-101-2520 • Screw 1
• 791-112-1180 • Nut 1
E • 790-101-2540 • Washer 1
• 790-101-2630 • Leg 2
• 790-101-2570 • Plate 4
• 790-101-2560 • Nut 2
• 790-101-2650 • Adapter 2
Disassembly
1. Remove the electric slipring (1) on the enclosure flange.
1
2. Remove all 4 screws (2) TE M10 x 30 on enclosure flange.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-233

Disassembly and assembly of centre swivel joint DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
3. Remove the end cover and protection seal (3) VA130.
4. Remove housing (4) with appropiate tools.
5. Prevent any possibility of damage on chromium plated sur-

face of spool.
6. Remove all of the wearing (5) seals from the grove of hous-
ing.
7. Remove the seals (6) from the end and top grove of hous-
ing.
6 6
Assembly
• Assemble in reverse order of disassembly.
• Clean all surfaces before assembly.
• Grease shaft before assembly.
 Contact surface of rotor, shaft:

Grease (G2-L1)
 Mounting bolt: 31.4 ± 2.9 Nm

{3.2 ± 0.3 kgm)
30-234 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of hydraulic tank
Removal and installation of hydraulic tank
Removal
1. Drain oil from hydraulic tank. [*1]
6 Hydraulic oil: 200 l
2. Open up the engine hood.
3. Remove engine hood (1) (see page 30- 47) and covers (2) 1
and (3).
4. Remove covers (4) and (5).
5. Remove cover (6) by removing 2 bolts (7).

7
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-235

Removal and installation of hydraulic tank DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
7. To remove cover (9) remove bolts (10).

10
8. Disconnect the 3 hoses (11, 12, 13).
11
12
13
9. Remove jubilee clips (14), then remove hose (15).
14
14
15
30-236 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of hydraulic tank
10. Disconnect hose (16).
16
11. Remove 4 of 6 mounting bolts (17)
17
17
12. Sling at point (18).
18 18
13. Remove remaining 2 mounting bolts (17).
14. Remove hydraulic tank.
4 Hydraulic tank assembly: 271.94 kg

17
17
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-237

Removal and installation of hydraulic tank DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Installation
[*1]
 Hydraulic tank drain plug:

58.8 - 78.5 Nm {6.0 - 8.0 kgm}
[*2]
★ After tightening the suction hose clamp screw, check

that the screw is located within the range shown in the
diagram.
 Hose clamp screw:

8.8 ± 0.5 Nm {90 ± 5 kgm}
★ Install the hose clamp and tighten the clamp screw as

[*3]

245.2 - 308.9 Nm {25 - 31.5 kgm}
★ Add oil through the oil filler to the specified level.

Run the engine to circulate the oil through the system.
Then check the oil level again.
5 Hydraulic tank: Approx. 200 l
• Bleeding air
★ Bleed the air.

For details, see TESTING AND ADJUSTING.
Air Bleeding of Various Parts.
30-238 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of fuel tank
Removal and installation of fuel tank
Removal
1. Drain the fuel tank.
6 Fuel Tank: 370 l
2. Disconnect hoses (1) and (2).
3. Remove handrail at points (3) and (4).

3
4. Remove cover (5) by removing bolts (6). 6
5. Open compartment (7) remove hose (8) from refuel pump

(9). 7
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-239

Removal and installation of fuel tank DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
6. Remove cover (10) by first removing 2 bolts (11) and then

removing bolts (12).
11
10
12 10
7. Sling at points (13) and (14).
14 13
8. Remove mounting bolts (15).
9. Remove fuel tank. 15 15

4 Fuel tank assembly: 114.26 kg
Installation
• Refilling with fuel (fuel tank)
★ Add fuel through the fuel filler to the specified level.
5 Fuel tank: Approx. 370 l
30-240 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of control valve
Removal and installation of control valve
Removal
Lower the work equipment to the ground for safety and stop
the engine. Unscrew the oil filler cap on the hydraulic tank
slowly to release pressure inside the tank. Then move the
safety lock lever to the LOCK position.
★ Remove pressure from all circuits.
★ Attach an identification tag to each piping to avoid a mistake

in the position of installation later.
1. Drain oil from the hydraulic tank and then drain oil out of the
system.
2. Disconnect 4 pipes (1, 2, 3, 4). 3
1 4
2
3. Disconnect 4 pipes (5, 6, 7, 8). 7
8
5
6
4. Disconnect 3 pipes (9, 10, 11).
9 10
11
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-241

Removal and installation of control valve DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
5. Disconnect 7 hoses (12 through 18).

15
16
12 17
13
18
14
6. Open hood (29) and emove cover (30).

29 30
7. Remove covers (31), (32) and remove foam (33).

31
32
33
8. Disconnect 10 hoses (19 through 28).
19
20 24
21 25
22 26
23 27
28
30-242 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

9. Remove 6 hoses (34 through 39). 34

35 38
36 39
37
10. Remove hoses (40, 41, 42). 40

41
42
11. Remove cover (43, 44).

43
44
12. Remove step (45) by removing 3 bolts (46) and lift step (45)
out.
46
45
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-243

Removal and installation of control valve DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
47
14. Sling using frame (48).

48
15. Remove remaining 2 bolts (49) and remove control valve.
4 Control valve assembly: 271 kg
49
16. To remove piping (50 through 57) first disconnect from con-
trol valve, then remove bolts (58) so you can remove piping 50
54
(50 through 57). 51
55
52
53 56
57
58
30-244 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Installation
★ Add oil through the oil filler to the specified level.

Run the engine to circulate the oil through the system.
Then check the oil level again.
• Bleeding air
★ Bleed the air from the circuit between the valve and the
hydraulic cylinder.
For details, see TESTING AND ADJUSTING, Air Bleed-
ing of Various Parts.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-245

Removal and installation of LS select valve assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of LS select valve assembly
Removal
1. Remove required hose (1) from this area.
2. Remove LS select valve (2) from control valve.

1
Installation
• Tightening torque for LS select valve (2): 107.9 - 147.1 Nm.
30-246 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of LS shuttle valve assembly
Removal and installation of LS shuttle valve assembly
Removal
1. Remove hoses that interfere with removal of LS shuttle
valve.
2. Remove bolts (1) from LS shuttle valve.
3. Remove LS shuttle valve from control valve.

1
Installation
• Tightening torque for bolts (1): 58.8 - 73.6 Nm
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-247

Removal and installation of pressure compensation valve assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of pressure compensation valve

assembly
Removal
1. Remove any hoses that interfere with the removal of pres-
sure compensation valve.
2. Remove cap (1).
3. Remove pressure compensation valve (2).
Installation
• Tightening torque for cap (1) is: 372.7~411.9Nm
30-248 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of main relief valve assembly
Removal and installation of main relief valve assembly
Removal
1. Remove hose (1).
2. Remove main relief valve (2).
1
2
Installation
• Tightening torque for main relief valve (2): 49 - 58.8.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-249

Removal and installation of LS control EPC valve assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of LS control EPC valve assem-

bly
Removal
2. Carefully remove LS control EPC valve (2) without stretch-

ing wire (3).
3 1
Installation
• Tightening torque for LS control EPC valve bolts (1): 11.8 -

14.7 Nm.
30-250 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of EPC solenoid valve assembly
Removal and installation of EPC solenoid valve assembly
Removal
2. Carefully remove EPC solenoid valve (2) without stretching

wire (3).
2
1
Installation
• Tightening torque for EPC solenoid valve bolts (1): 11.8 -

14.7 Nm.
• When installing apply loctite.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-251

Removal and installation of PPC valve block assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of PPC valve block assembly
Removal
1. Disconnect all hoses from the PPC valve block.
2. Remove four bolts (1).
3. Remove PPC valve block (2) and also mounting plate locat-
ed underneath 4 station solenoid.
2
Installation
30-252 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of manifold block assembly
Removal and installation of manifold block assembly
Removal
1. Disconnect all hoses from manifold block.
2. Remove two bolts (1) and remove manifold block (2). 1

2
Installation
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-253

Removal and installation of oil seal in hydraulic pump input shaft DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of oil seal in hydraulic pump in-

put shaft
Special tools
Dis-
Part Neces-
Mark Part No. Qty tinc- Sketch
Name sity
tion*
Push
791-463-1141 ■ 1
N tool
790-201-2740 Spacer ■ 1
Removal
1. Remove the hydraulic pump assembly, referring to the sec-
tion of Removing Hydraulic Pump Assembly.
2. Remove snap ring (1) and then remove spacer (2).
3. Pry off oil seal (3) with a screwdriver. [*3]
★ When attempting to pry off the seal, do not damage the

shaft.
Installation
[*1]
 Oil seal lip portion: Grease (G2-LI)
 Oil seal outer circumference:

Grease (G2-LI)
★ Coat the oil seal outer circumference thinly with grease.
★ Press-fit oil seal (3), using tool N.
30-254 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly and assembly of work equipment ÜPPC valve
Disassembly and assembly of work equipment ÜPPC

valve
★ This section deals with only precautions to be followed when
reassembling the PPC valve assembly for work equipment.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-255

Disassembly and assembly of work equipment ÜPPC valve DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Assembly
• Reassembling work equipment PPC valve assembly
★ Install spring (11) so that the end surface of smaller end

coil diameter (inner diameter) will face the shim (12)
side.
★ Springs (10) in use differ in the number of turns accord-

ing to hydraulic ports as classified in the table below.
Hence take care when installing one.
Port location Spring free length
P1, P2 44.4 mm
P3, P4 42.4 mm
★ The location of each port is stamped in the lower part of

the valve body.
 Piston (8): Grease (G2-LI)
★ When assembling piston (8), coat the piston outer pe-

riphery and body hole inner periphery with grease.
 Plate (5) mounting bolt:

11.8 - 14.7 Nm (1.2 -1.5 kgm)
 Joint (4) sliding surface:

Grease 2 - 4 cc (G2-LI)
 Body female screw portion:

★ Coat the female screw body with Loctite at two spots as

shown in the diagram below. Each spot is to be coated
with a drop (approx. 0.02 g).
 Joint (4): 39 - 49 Nm (4 - 5 kgm)
★ Strictly follow the specified torque for the joint.
 Contact surfaces of piston and disc (2):

Grease 0.3 - 0.8 cc (G2-LI)
 Nut (1): 98 - 127 Nm (10 - 13 kgm)
★ After assembling the disc, refer to the Adjustment of

Work Equipment and Swing PPC Valve section of the
30-256 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly and assembly of hydraulic cylinder
Disassembly and assembly of hydraulic cylinder
Special tools
Mark Part No. Part Name Necessity Qty Distinction* Sketch
790-502-1003 Cylinder repair stand ● 1

1
790-101-1102 Pump ●
790-102-4300 Wrench Assembly ■ 1

2
790-102-4310 Pin ■ 2
3 790-720-1000 Expander ● 1
Rubber Band
796-720-1670 ● 1
(for boom and arm)
07281-01279 Clamp ● 1
4
Rubber band
796-720-1660 ● 1
(for bucket)
07281-01159 Clamp ● 1
790-201-1702 Push tool kit ■ 1
Push tool
• 790-201-1830 1
(for bucket)
Q Push tool
• 790-201-1930 11
5 (for arm)
Push tool
• 790-201-1940 1
(for boom)
• 790-101-5021 Grip 1
• 01010-50816 Bolt 1
Push tool kit

790-201-1500 ● 1
(for bucket)
• 790-201-1640 Push tool 1
• 790-101-5021 Grip 1
6 • 01010-50816 bolt 1
790-201-1980 Plate (for boom) ● 1
790-201-1990 Plate (for arm) ● 1
790-101-5021 Grip ● 1
01010-50816 Bolt ● 1
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-257

Disassembly and assembly of hydraulic cylinder DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Disassembly of arm and bucket cylinders
1. Piston rod assembly

a. Remove piping from cylinder assembly.
b. Remove mounting bolts and disconnect head assembly

(1).
c. Pull out piston rod assembly (2).
★ Place a container under the cylinder to catch the oil.
d. Disassemble piston rod assembly as follows.
Set piston rod assembly (2) in tool Q1.
Remove stopper screw (3) of piston assembly.
★ Common screw size for boom, arm, and bucket cyl-

inder: M12 x Pitch 1.75.
30-258 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

★ If the caulking of screw (3) is too strong and it can-

not be removed, tighten the screw fully, then fit a tap
to the thread and remove the screw.
Using tool Q2, remove piston assembly (4).
• When not using tool Q2, use the drill holes (∅ 10, 4
places) and loosen the piston assembly.
Remove plunger (5).
• Boom and arm cylinder only
Remove collar (6).
Remove head assembly (7).
Remove cap (8), and pull 12 balls (9), then remove plunger
(10).
• Arm cylinder only
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-259

2. Disassembly of piston assembly

a. Remove rings (11).
b. Remove wear rings (12).
c. Remove piston ring (13).
d. Remove O-ring and backup ring (14).
3. Disassembly of cylinder head assembly

a. Remove O-ring and backup ring (15).
b. Remove snap ring (16), then remove dust seal (17).
c. Remove rod packing (18).
d. Remove buffer ring (19).
e. Remove busing (20).
Assembly
★ Be careful not to damage the packing, dust seals, and O-
rings.
★ Clean each part, then cover the piping ports and pin-insert-
ing hole to prevent dust from entering them.
★ Do not try to force the backup ring into position.

Warm it in warm water (50 - 60°C) before installing it.
1. Assembly of head assembly

a. Using tool Q5, press fit bushing (20).
b. Assemble buffer ring (19).
c. Assemble rod packing (18).
d. Using tool Q6, install dust seal (17), and secure with
snap ring (16).
e. Install backup ring and O-ring (15).
30-260 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

2. Assembly of piston assembly

a. Using tool Q3, expand piston ring (13).
★ Set the piston ring on tool Q3, and turn the handle 8
- 10 times to expand the ring.
b. Set tool Q4 in position, and compress piston ring (13).
c. Install backup ring and O-ring (14).
d. Assemble wear ring (12).
e. Assemble ring (11).
★ Be careful not to open the end gap of the ring too

wide.
 Ring grove: Grease (G2-L1)
3. Piston rod assembly

a. Set piston rod assembly (2) to tool Q1.
b. Assemble head assembly (7).
c. Fit O-ring and backup ring to collar (6), then assemble.
d. Assemble plunger (5).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-261

e. Set cushion plunger (10) to piston rod, then assemble

12 balls (9) and secure with cap (8).
★ Check that there is a small amount of play at the tip

of the plunger.
f. Assemble piston assembly (4) as follows.
• When using rod piston (2) again:
★ Wash thoroughly and remove all metal particles and

dirt.
I. Screw in piston assembly (4), then use tool Q2 to

tighten piston assembly (2) so the position of the
screw thread hole matches
★ Remove all burrs and flashes with a file.
II. Tighten screw (3).
 Screw thread: Loctite No. 262
 Screw: 58.9 - 73.6 Nm

{6 - 7.5 kgm}
III. Caulk thread at 2 places with punch.
• When using a new part for either or both of rod piston

assembly (2)
★ For the rod with bottom cushion, mark the cushion

plug position on the end of the rod.
I. Screw in until piston assembly (4) contacts end face

of rod, then use tool to tighten.
 Piston assembly: 294 ± 29.4 Nm

{30 ± 3.0 kgm)
★ After tightening the piston, check that there is play in

plunger (5).
• Boom, arm cylinder only
30-262 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

II. Machine one of the holes used to install screw (3).
★ Align a drill horizontal with the V-groove of the

thread of rod (2) and piston (4), then carry out ma-
chining.
★ For the cylinder with bottom cushion (arm cylinder),

avoid the cushion plug position when machining.
• Screw machining dimension (mm)
Drill Bottom hole

Tap used Tap depth
diameter depth
10.3 27 12 x 1.75 20
III. After machining, wash thoroughly to remove all met-

al particles and dust.
IV. Tighten screw (3).
 Screw: 58.9 - 73.6 Nm {6 - 7 kgm}
V. Caulk thread at 4 places with punch.
g. Assemble piston rod assembly (2).
★ Set the end gap of the ring horizontally (at the side posi-
tion), align axial center of cylinder tube, then insert.
★ After inserting, check that the ring is not broken and has
not come out, then push in fully.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-263

h. Tighten head assembly (1) with mounting bolts.
 Mounting bolt:
Cylinder Tightening torque
Bucket 270 ± 39 Nm {27.5 ± 4.0 kgm}
Arm 373 ± 54 Nm {38.0 ± 5.5 kgm}
Boom 270 ± 39 Nm {27.5 ± 4.0 kgm}
i. Install piping.
30-264 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of monoboom work equipment
Removal and installation of monoboom work equipment
Special tools
796-900-1200 Remover ■ 1
Puller
790-101-4000 ■ 1
R (490 kN 50-T-long)
Pump
790-101-1102 ■ 1
(294 kN 30 T)
Removal
• Extend the arm and bucket fully. Lower the work equip-
ment to the ground and set the safety lock lever to the
lock position.
• Release the residual pressure in the hydraulic circuit. Re-
fer to the Release of Remaining Pressure in Hydraulic Cir-
cuit section in the TESTING AND ADJUSTING chapter of
this manual.
1. Disconnect grease hose (1).
2. Sling boom cylinder assembly (2), and remove lock bolt (3)
on both sides of the boom.
3. Remove plate (4), then remove head pin (5). [*1]

1
4
★ There are shims installed, so check the number and
thickness, and keep them in a safe place. 5
4. Start the engine and retract the piston rod. 3
2
★ Fasten the piston rod with wire so that it will not slip out
and lower the cylinder onto a stand, or place a support
under the bottom of the cylinder to support it. In the lat-
ter case, remove the grease fitting on the bottom side
first.
★ Remove the boom cylinder on the other side in the

same manner.
5. Disconnect stabilizer hoses (6), arm cylinder hoses (7),

boom cylinder hoses (8) two for each.
★ Plug the hoses to prevent oil flow-out, and fasten them

on the valve side.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-265

Removal and installation of monoboom work equipment DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
6. Disconnect intermediate connector CN-A86 (9) for a working

lamp.
6
7 6
7
8
8
7. Sling the work equipment and remove plate (10) and then
pin (11) at the foot. [*2]
11
• When removing them, first remove plate (10) and then
remove pin (11) at the foot, using Tool R. 10
★ Shims are installed, so do not forget to check their

number and each location of installation.
12
8. Lift off work equipment assembly (13) and disassemble it.
4 Work equipment assembly

PW200: 3,300 kg
PW220: 3,360 kg
13
30-266 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of monoboom work equipment
Installation
[*1]
★ When tightening the locknut, tighten so that clearance a

between the plate and nut is 0.5 - 1.5 mm.
 Inside surface of bushing when assembling pin:

Anti-friction compound (LM-P)
 Grease after assembling pin:

Grease (LM-G)
When aligning the position of the pin hole, never insert your
fingers into the pin hole.
★ Adjust the shim thickness so that clearance a between

cylinder rod (13) and plate (4) is below 1 mm.
★ Standard shim thickness: 1.0 mm and 2.0 mm.


Grease (LM-G)
14
• Bleeding air
★ Bleed the air from the cylinder. For details, see TEST-
ING AND ADJUSTING, Air Bleeding of Various Parts.
★ Add oil through the oil filler to the specified level. Run
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-267

Removal and installation of 2 piece boom work equipment DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of 2 piece boom work equipment
Special tools
796-900-1200 Remover ■ 1
Puller
790-101-4000 ■ 1
R (490 kN 50-T-long)
Pump
790-101-1102 ■ 1
(294 kN 30 T)
Removal
• Extend the arm and bucket fully. Lower the work equip-
ment to the ground and set the safety lock lever to the
lock position.
• Release the residual pressure in the hydraulic circuit. Re-
fer to the Release of Remaining Pressure in Hydraulic Cir-
cuit section in the TESTING AND ADJUSTING chapter of
this manual.
1. Disconnect grease hose (1).
2. Sling boom cylinder assembly (2), and remove lock bolt (3).
3. Remove plate (4), then remove head pin (5). [*1]

1 4
★ There are shims installed, so check the number and
thickness, and keep them in a safe place. 5
4. Start the engine and retract the piston rod. 3
★ Fasten the piston rod with wire so that it will not slip out
and lower the cylinder onto a stand, or place a support
under the bottom of the cylinder to support it. In the lat-
2
ter case, remove the grease fitting on the bottom side
first.
★ Remove the boom cylinder on the other side in the

same manner.
5. Disconnect arm cylinder (6), boom cylinder hoses (7), adjust

cylinder hoses (8), stabilizer hose (9) two for each.
★ Plug the hoses to prevent oil flow-out, and fasten them

on the valve side.
30-268 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of 2 piece boom work equipment
6. Disconnect intermediate connector CN-A86 (10) for a work-

ing lamp.
7
7 8
6 8
6 9
9
10
7. Lift off the work equipment and remove plate (11) and then
12
pin (12) at the foot. [*2]
• When removing them, first remove plate (11) and then 11

remove pin (12) at the foot, using Tool R.
★ Shims are installed, so do not forget to check their

number and each location of installation.
12
8. Lift off work equipment assembly (13) and disassemble it.
4 Work equipment assembly

PW200: 4,054 kg
PW220: 4,190 kg
13
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-269

Removal and installation of 2 piece boom work equipment DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Installation
[*1]
★ When tightening the locknut, tighten so that clearance a

between the plate and nut is 0.5 - 1.5 mm.


Grease (LM-G)
★ Adjust the shim thickness so that clearance a between

cylinder rod (14) and plate (4) is below 1 mm.
★ Standard shim thickness: 1.0 mm and 2.0 mm.


Grease (LM-G)
14
• Bleeding air
★ Bleed the air from the cylinder. For details, see TEST-
ING AND ADJUSTING, Air Bleeding of Various Parts.
★ Add oil through the oil filler to the specified level. Run
30-270 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of air conditioner unit
Removal and installation of air conditioner unit
Special tools
799-703-1200 Service tool kit ■ 1
799-703-1100 Vacuum Pump (100 V) ■ 1
S 799-703-1110 Vacuum Pump (220 V) ■ 1
799-703-1120 Vacuum Pump (240 V) ■ 1
799-703-1400 Gas leak tester ■ 1
Removal
First, disconnect the cable from the negative terminal (- ) of

the battery.
1. Drain cooling water.
6 Cooling water: Approx. 16.1 l
2. Bleed gas from the air conditioner, using tool S.
3. Remove floor mat (1).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-271

Removal and installation of air conditioner unit DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
4. Pull down outside air filter cover opening-closing lever (2).
5. Remove outside air filter (3).
6. Remove monitor panel lower covers (4) and (5).
★ When removing cover (4), first remove the M19 wiring 5

for cigarette lighter.
7. Remove duct (6) on the right side.
30-272 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

8. Remove operator seat by removing 4 mounting bolts (7).

When removing the seat be sure to disconnect connector
G33 (if fitted), then remove carefully.
9. Remove rear covers (8), (9) and (10).

9
10
8
11
11. Remove plate (12) and then remove duct (13).
12. Remove plate (14) and right duct (15). 12
13. Disconnect cab intermediate connectors at the following two

points. (Refer to TROUBLESHOOTING section on “CON-
NECTOR LOCATION CHART AND ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT 15
DIAGRAM BY SYSTEM” on page 20-220)
13
• H09: Upper side
14
• H08: Lower side
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-273

Removal and installation of air conditioner unit DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
14. Remove duct (16).
16. Disconnect connectors at the following seven points. (Refer

to TROUBLESHOOTING section on “CONNECTOR LOCA- 17
TION CHART AND ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM BY
SYSTEM” on page 20-220) 16
• D01
(Assembled-type diode connector)
• D02
(Assembled-type diode connector)
• C09 (Model selection switch connector)
• Air conditioner unit connector

From top to bottom, M26, M27, M28 and M33 option
power source connector
17. Remove 2 hoses (18) and remove connector (19).
19
18
18. Remove the 8 mounting bolts (20) and remove air condition- 20 20 20 20
er unit assembly (21) carefully.
★ When removing the air conditioner unit assembly, do not

forget to disconnect the two air conditioner hoses con-
nected to the bottom.
21
20
20
30-274 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Installation
★ Install hoses in the air conditioner circuit with care so that

dirt, dust, water, etc. may not enter them.
★ Install air conditioner hoses only after checking that an O-

ring is in place at the connecting part.
★ Check that there is no damage on O-rings, or that they have

not deteriorated.
[*1]
★ Coat the threads of the refrigerant piping at the connect-

ing part with compressor oil (ND-OIL8), and then tighten
the piping with a double-ended spanner.

8.83 - 14.7 Nm (0.9 - 1.5 kgm)
 Hose screw M16 x 1.5:

11.8 - 14.7 Nm (1.2 - 1.5 kgm)
 Hose screw M24 x 1.5:

29.4 - 34.3 Nm (3.0 - 3.5 kgm)
• Filling air conditioner gas

Fill the air conditioner circuit with air conditioner gas
(R134a), using tool S.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-275

Removal and installation of counterweight DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of counterweight
Removal
1. Open hood (1) and remove (see page 30- 47).
1
2. Remove covers (2) and attach eyebolts to points shown.

The lifting eye’s required are:
Thread - 48 x 3
Must have safe working load of :
PW200: 3,740 kg
PW220 (Standard): 3,740kg
2
PW220 (Heavy Duty): 4,500 kg
3. Attach slings to counterweight.
5. Ensure lifting equipment is supporting the weight of the

counterweight.
6. Remove counterweight in the direction shown.
★ Be careful not to hit the engine or cooler.
4 Counterweight assembly
PW200: 3,740 kg
PW220 (Standard): 3,740 kg
PW220 (Heavy Duty): 4,500 kg
30-276 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of counterweight
Installation
 Thread of counterweight mounting bolt:

Thread tightener (LT-2)
 Counterweight mounting bolt:

1,180 - 1,470 Nm {120 - 150 kgm}
[*2]
★ Installing and adjusting counterweight.
Sling counterweight with crane and place in position on the

frame.
Push counterweight, install mounting bolts, and adjust to the fol-

lowing dimensions.
• Clearance from revolving frame:

10 ± 5 mm (left and right)
• Clearance from bodywork door:

10 ± 5 mm (left and right)
• Stepped difference b from revolving frame in left-to right di-

rection: Max. 5 mm
• Stepped difference a from bodywork door in left-to right di-

rection: 10 ± 4
• Stepped difference c from bodywork top cover in up-down

right direction: Max. 5 mm
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-277

Removal and installation of operator cab assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Removal and installation of operator cab assembly
Removal
First, disconnect the cable from the negative terminal (-) of

the battery.
Release the residual pressure in the hydraulic circuit. Refer
to the Release of Remaining Pressure in Hydraulic Circuit
section in the TESTING AND ADJUSTING chapter of this
manual.
1. Remove floor mat (1).
2. Remove covers (2) and (3) under the monitor panel.
• When removing cover (2), first disconnect the M19 wir-

ing for cigarette lighter.
3. Remove air conditioner unit

(See chapter 20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING "Removal and 2
installation of air conditioner unit" on page 20-271.)
4. Disconnect all hoses at (4).

4
30-278 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of operator cab assembly
5. Remove plate (5) by removing bolts (6).
6
5 5
6. Disconnect hoses (7) from orbitrol valve.
7
7
7. Disconnect hoses (8) from brake valve.

8
8
8
8. Remove 3 hoses (9) from engine and 1 hose from the dryer
(10).
9. Ensure cab door is securely fastened.
10. Ensure all hoses are loose and all clips have been removed.
9 9 10
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-279

Removal and installation of operator cab assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
11. Attach lifting equipment at points (11).
11
11
12. Loosen off 4 mounting bolts (12) inside the cab.

12
13. Have lifting equipment take the weight of the operator cab.
Remove mounting bolts (12) and lift operator cab off.
4 Operator cab assembly: 662 kg
12
Installation
30-280 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of monitor assembly
Removal and installation of monitor assembly
Removal

the battery.
1. Remove 2 bolts (1) from cab wall to remove monitor assem-

bly (2). 2

3
★ To remove cover just lift the top of the cover to unclip.
3. Remove 2 bolts (4) then slide monitor panel (5) down to re-
move from bracket. Remove 3 connectors from the back of
the monitor panel assembly (5) to completely remove moni- 5
tor panel assembly (5).
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-281

Removal and installation of monitor assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Installation
30-282 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and installation of governor/pump controller assembly
Removal and installation of governor/pump controller as-

sembly
Removal

the battery. Then disconnect the cable from positive termi-
nal (+) of the battery.
1. Remove covers (1) by removing bolts (2).

2
1
2
1
1
1
3. Disconnect 3 electrical connectors C01 (4), C02 (5), C03

(6).
4. Make sure controller is fully supported. 4

5
6
4 5
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-283

Removal and installation of governor/pump controller assembly DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
5. Remove bolts (7) then remove bolts (8).

7
6. Carefully remove controller from cab.
Installation
30-284 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Removal and Installation of KOMTRAX terminal
Removal and Installation of KOMTRAX terminal
Removal
Disconnect the cable from the negative (–) terminal of the

battery.
1. Remove covers (1), (2) and (3).
2. Disconnect GPS connector (4) and antenna wire (5).
3. Disconnect connector G01 (6).
4. Remove the 4 bolts and KOMTRAX terminal assembly (7).
Installation
Install in reverse order of removal.
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 30-285

Removal and Installation of KOMTRAX terminal DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
30-286 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

90 OTHER
Lubrication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-3
PW200/PW220 – Mono-Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-3
PW200/PW220 – Mono-Boom with grease pump. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-4
PW200/PW220 – 2-Piece-Boom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-5
PW200/PW220 – 2-Piece-Boom with grease pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-6
Hydraulic circuit diagram (1/3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-7
Electrical circuit diagram (1/7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90-10
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 90-1

OTHER
´
90-2 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100
OTHER Lubrication
Lubrication
PW200/PW220 – Mono-Boom
B=
A=
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 90-3

Lubrication OTHER
PW200/PW220 – Mono-Boom with grease pump
Grease pump
´
90-4 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100
OTHER Lubrication
PW200/PW220 – 2-Piece-Boom
A=
B=
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 90-5

Lubrication OTHER
PW200/PW220 – 2-Piece-Boom with grease pump
Grease pump
´
90-6 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100
Hydraulic circuit diagram (1/3)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 90-7

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 90-8

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 90-9

Electrical circuit diagram (1/7)
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 90-10

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 90-11

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 90-12

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 90-13

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 90-14

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 90-15

EMERGENCY PROLIX SWITCHES (RIGHT CONSOLE)
EMERGENCY
EMERGENCY FNR SW
RH WRIST CONTROL
TRAVEL SW LEVER SWITCHES
1 2 3 4
CN-S96 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 F
EMERGENCY N SUNSHINE SENSOR WIPER INDICATORS MAIN BEAM / FLASH
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL SW. FNR SW HORN WASH
NORMAL R BOOM/CARRIAGE BREAKER SPARE 050
1 2 3 4 15 H 15 53C 15 J 53 31B 49A L R 30 56 56B 56A
ATT SW HAZARD SWITCH TELL-TALE ROAD LIGHTS
F
0.75GW
0.75WB
0.75GR
0.75YG
0.75YB
0.75W
1.25W
1.25G
1.25R
0.75Y
1.25Y
EMERGENCY PUMP EMERGENCY INDICATORS ON OFF
INDICATOR RIGHT/LEFT
OFF LEFT DIPPED BEAM
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

N CN-G120
DRIVE SWITCH SWING SW + 1 2 3 4 OFF ON
R 6 8 2 4 1 3 5 7 10 9
CN-S21 1 2 3 4 5 6 CN-S22 1 2 3 4 5 6 I NEUTRAL MAIN BEAM
UP UP OFF OFF
NORMAL EMERGENCY
0.75WG
0.75RL
0.75W
0.75R
ON II RIGHT FLASH
CN-S95
CN-G101
CN-G103
DOWN EMERGENCY NORMAL DOWN
1
2
3
4
1 2 1 2 1 2 POSITION
DT
1
2
3
4
1 2 1 2 1 2
0.75GR
0.75RL
0.75LY
0.75W
0.75W
CN-P15
0.75B
0.75B
0.75B
0.75B
0.75L
DIPPED
CN-G120
6 8 2 4 1 3 5 7 10 9
CN-G105
0.75WG
0.75RL
0.75G
0.75Y
PP2
5
1
2
3
4
BWG
BW
WB
BG
BR
BY
S07
W
B
Y
B
Y
COLUMN SWITCH ASSEMBLY L.H.
S06
S01 6 7 1 4 5 3 2 7 1 6 2 3 4 5
C
S05
CN-G3 6 7 1 4 5 3 2 7 1 6 2 3 4 5
CN-G4
S02
0.5Gr
0.5Br
0.5W
0.5W
0.5O
0.5O
0.5G
0.5R
0.5R
0.5Y
0.5B
0.5Y
0.5B
0.5P
0.75BrW
0.75BrG
0.75RW
0.75WB
0.75WY
0.75GY
0.75YR
0.75RB
0.75GL
0.75Br
0.75R
0.75Y
0.75L
DT DT
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CN-G71 CN-G72
S04
(FROM ) 14 E S03
1
2
1
2
CN-D10
CN-D11
KES1
KES1
1
2
1
2
STEERING COLUMN
0.75BrW
0.75RW
0.75WB
0.75WY
0.75YG
0.75GY
0.75YR
0.75RB
0.5BW
0.75Br
1.0GY
1.0LW
0.5YR
1.0BR
0.5RY
0.5GL
0.5BY
0.75G
0.75B
0.75P
0.75Y
0.75L
0.75L
1.0P
DT SWP
0.75GW
0.75WG
0.75WB
0.75WB
0.75GR
0.75GR
10
12
10
12
13
14
0.75YG
11
11
0.75YB
0.75RL
0.75RL
0.75W
0.75W
0.75W
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0.75G
0.75B
0.75B
0.75B
0.75B
0.75Y
0.75L
CN-G05 CN-G02
10
12
10
12
11
11
CN-S28
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN-S29
DT DT
SWING LOCK
SWITCH
(FROM ) 24 T
(FROM ) 14 D
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 PARK BRAKE SWITCH WORK LAMP SWITCH QUICK COUPLER SWITCH
ON ON: LOCK ON: LOCK ON: LOCK

OFF: RELEASE OFF: RELEASE OFF: RELEASE
MODEL SELECTION SWITCH INFORMATION
CN-G99 CN-M07 CN-M38 PW140-7 PW160-7 E0 PW180-7 E0 PW200/220-7 E0
PARK BRAKE WORK LAMPS QUICK COUPLER
STARTER SWITCH 20E-06-31280 20G-06-31430 20J-06-11350 20K-06-32880
6 8 2 4 1 3 5 7 10 9 6 8 2 4 1 3 5 10 9
EXCEPT GERMANY, FRANCE AND AUSTRIA

6 8 2 4 1 3 5 7 10 9
B BR R1 R2 C ACC OFF OFF OFF
R1 ON I ON
CN-E06
OFF II
CN-X05
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
ACC
6 8 2 4 1 3 5 7 10 9 6 8 2 4 1 3 5 7 10 9 6 8 2 4 1 3 5 10 9
ST
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
CN-M07
CN-M38
CN-G99
M
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
M
0.85RW
0.5WB
0.85RB
0.85RY
0.85LR
0.85RW
0.5LW
0.5WR
0.5RW
0.85R
0.85Y
0.85Y
0.85B
0.5B
0.85GL
0.85GL
0.5L
0.85LR
0.85YL
0.5YL
0.5RB
0.85G
0.5GL
0.85R
0.85R
0.85B
0.5B
0.5B
0.5L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PW140-7 PW160-7 E0 PW180-7 E0 PW200/220-7 E0

20E-06-31290 20G-06-31420 20J-06-11340 20K-06-32890
FOR GERMANY, FRANCE AND AUSTRIA

O/R SWITCH
WIPER MOTOR
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
0.5W
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
D
DT M
CN-P10
CN-W04
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A F
0.85BW
0.85YL
0.85Br
0.85W
0.5LW
0.85G
0.85R
0.5LR
0.85Y
1.25B
0.85L
0.85L
CN-P01 070 B
1.25L
KEY SW(BATTERY) 1 MG
1.25L
KEY SW(BATTERY) 2
0.85GW
WASHER MOTER POWER 3
(FROM ) 14
0.5RW E
KEY SW(C TERMINAL) 4 F
0.5LR
WIPER W LIMIT SW 5
1.25B ME 1.25B
GND 6
1.25B
GND 7
0.85RY
VB+(24V) 8
0.85YL
WIPER MOTER(+) 9
0.85L S CN-H10
WIPER MOTER(-) 10
0.5LW 1.25L
(BUZZER ON SIGNAL) 11 1
WIPER P LIMIT SW 12
0.5LW 0.5RW
2 A/C CONTROL PANEL
0.85BW
3
1.25B CN-M30
4 COMPRESSOR
0.85RY
5 --- 1 BLOWER RELAY
CN-P02 040 0.5LW 0.5WB RELAY
6 POTENTIOMETER SIG.(AIR MIX DAMPER) 2
0.5GB 0.5GB 0.5RB
COOLANT TEMP 1 7 DRC POTENTIOMETER POWER SUPPLY 3 1
(FROM )4
0.5Y 0.5Y CN-G01 0.5GB
FUEL LEVEL 2 8 REFRIGERANT HIGH / LOW PRESSURE SW. 4 Q
0.85WR
0.85RW
1 232C (0CH) i
0.85RB
0.85RY
0.85GL
0.85LR
0.85YL
0.5WR
0.5RW
0.5WB
0.5LW
0.85G
0.5GL
0.85R
0.85B
0.5YL
0.5GL 0.5GL
0.5B
0.5Y
0.5L
0.5L
COOLANT LEVEL 3 9 2 232C (0CH) O (LIGHT SWITCH SIGNAL) 5
0.85L 0.85L 0.5R
WIPER Hi 4 10 CN-H15 3 232C (0CH) i POWER SUPPLY 6
0.5LR 0.5LR 0.5BrB
ɸɷɿɭɺTRANSISTOR CONTROL SIGNAL 7
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
11
AIR CLEANER 5 11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
090 4 232C (1CH) i 0.5LB

0.85GW BLOWER FEED BACK SIGNAL 8
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
--- 6 12 5 232C (0CH) O 0.5GrB
0.5YG 0.5YG 0.75W
CN-M26
WIPER INT 7 13 6 CAN_SHIELD POTENTIOMETER SIGNAL(BLOW DAMPER 1) 9
10
12
0.5YB 0.5YB
11
0.75LR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
ENG OIL LEVEL 14 MANUAL Hi 10
CN-R30
CN-R31
8 7 CAN_L i/o
N/W(signal) 0.75GL --- 11 S
9 15 8 CAN_H i/o 0.5PB
0.5B
1 0.75Y
0.5BrW
N/W(signal) 12
(FROM )
10 16 9 S_NET_GND THERMISTER SIGNAL(INSIDE TEMP)
0.5YW
0.85W
0.85W
0.5GB
0.5RB
0.5LW
0.5OB
0.5R
0.5R
A
2RY
0.5L
2R
2R
2R
2B
BATTERY CHARGE 0.5W THERMISTER SIGNAL(BLOW AIR TEMP) 13
11 10 S_NET_A i/o
HYD.OIL TEMP 12
0.5LY S CN-H11 4 11 232C (0CH) GND THERMISTER SIGNAL(WATER TEMP) 14
0.5RW
0.5B THERMISTER SIGNAL(OUTSIDE TEMP) 15
GND 13 1 12 W_SW i 0.5YW D
0.5BR SUNSHINE SENSOR SIGNAL 16
PERSONAL CODE RELAY 14 2 13 232C (1CH) i B
0.5YR 0.5L
WINDOW LIMIT SW 15 3 14 232C (1CH) O
0.5BrW 0.5LY CN-M29
WINDSCREEN WASHER 16 4 15 232C (1CH) GND A
0.5RW 0.5BR --- 1
SWING LOCK 17 5 16 AIN5 i 0.5LG
0.5RY 0.5YR 1
(FROM )
PREHEAT 18 6 17 AIN4 i COMPRESSOR CLUTH RELAY SIGNAL 2
0.5GL 0.5BrW 0.5LW
LAMP SW 19 7 BLOWER MAIN RELAY 3
N/W(GND) 20
0.5B 0.5RW
8
4 18 DOUT2
19 DOUT1
O
TERMINAL A OF AIR MIX DAMPER SERVO 4
0.5PW
0.5RY 0.5WG
O 0.5OW
MA 9 CN-G02 CN-G03 TERMINAL B OF AIR MIX DAMPER SERVO 5
20 DOUT0 O
0.5B 0.5GL
10 C 1.0B
1 1
1.0B
21 CHK1_A i TERMINAL B OF IN/EX DAMPER SERVO 6
0.5BR
0.5WR
0.85BR 0.75B TERMINAL A OF IN/EX DAMPER SERVO 7
CN-P70 040
11 22 CHK0_A i 0.5GR
0.85WL TERMINAL B OF BLOW DAMPER 1 SERVO 8
12 CN-M45 23 (N.C.) 0.5YR
--- 1 CIGAR 13 1
CN-G04 CN-G05
24 DIN3 TERMINAL A OF BLOW DAMPER 1 SERVO 9
0.75B
i
--- 2 LIGHTER 14 2 1 1 25 DIN2 i --- 10
0.5B
--- 3 15 3 26 DIN1 i SENSER GND. 11
0.85B 0.75R 0.5B E
--- 4 16 4 27 DIN0 i GND. 12
KOMTRAX CONTROLLER
--- 0.75YB TEST TERMINAL 13
5 S CN-H12 5 28 AIN0 i
1 RAM MONITOR (INDICATE CHANGE) 14
(FROM )
--- 6 CN-M19 6 29 GND
(SERIAL) 7 1 7 30 GND --- 15
(SERIAL) 8 1 1
0.85WL
2 4 8 31 AIN3 i --- 16
0.85BR MB 0.85R
(SERIAL) 9 2 2 3 9 32 AIN2 i RAM MONITOR (DATA) 17
0.85G --- 18
(SERIAL) 10 4
(BOOT SWITCH) 11
0.85Y
5
G 10
11
33 (N.C.)
34 AIN1 --- 19
0.85L i
--- 12 6 12 35 DOUT3 O --- 20
0.85Br B 0.75G
GND 13 7 36 ACC i
ɟϔɤɪr ɪ
CAN_SHIELD 0.5B 0.5W DT 0.75WR
0.5BrW
8
0.5GrB
14
0.5OW
0.5WR
0.5RW
0.5PW
0.5WB
0.5GR
0.5OB
0.5YR
0.5BR
0.5RB
0.5PB
0.5LG
37 GND
0.5LB
0.5R
0.5B
2RY
0.5W 0.5B 0.75RL
2R
2B
CAN_H 15 9 38 GND
CAN_L 0.5B SHIELD 0.5GL
16 10 39 POWER (12/24V) i
0.85LW A 0.5GL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4
11 40 POWER (12/24V) i
0.85Y
12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 1 2 3 4
CN-M27
CN-M33
DT CN-K31
0.5W
A A
0.5B MH
B B 1 1 GPS ANTENNA A/C UNIT
0.5B MJ
C C
MK
1 1 TELECOMS SIGNAL
ROOM TNC :DoPa
LAMP M CN-M71 BMC :Orbcomm
0.85BR
1 1
CAB ON 0.85LW
2 2
GND OFF
PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 90-16

Shop Manual: PW200-7E0 PW220-7E0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Shop Manual: PW200-7E0 PW220-7E0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Shop Manual: PW200-7E0 PW220-7E0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Shop Manual VEBM949100

• Materials and specifications are subject to change without notice.

• PW200/PW220-7E0 mount the SAA6D107E-1 engine.

10 STRUCTURE, FUNCTION AND MAINTENANCE

20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-101

20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

20 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

30 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 TOC-1

TOC-2 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

List of revised pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-7

How to read the shop manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-14

Hoisting instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-16

Coating materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-18

Standard tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-20

Electric wire code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-24

Conversion tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 00-25

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-1

Blank for technical reason

00-2 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

2. When carrying out any operation, always wear safety shoes

• Always wear safety glasses when hitting parts with a

• Always wear safety glasses when grinding parts with a

3. If welding repairs are needed, always have a trained, experi-

4. When carrying out any operation with two or more workers,

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-3

6. Decide a place in the repair workshop to keep tools and re-

Preparations for work

2. Before starting work, lower blade, ripper, bucket or any other

3. When disassembling or assembling, support the machine

Precautions during work

4. When raising heavy components, use a hoist or crane.

5. When removing covers which are under internal pressure or

00-4 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

6. When removing components, be careful not to break or

8. As a general rule, do not use gasoline to wash parts. In par-

9. Be sure to assemble all parts again in their original places.

• When installing hoses and wires, be sure that they will

11. When assembling or installing parts, always use the speci-

13. When measuring hydraulic pressure, check that the measur-

14. Take care when removing or installing the tracks of track-

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-5

Blank for technical reason

00-6 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

List of revised pages

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-7

Time of Time of Time of Time of Time of

00-1 10-7 10-62 10-117 10-172

00-8 PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100

Time of Time of Time of Time of Time of

10-227 20-124 20-179 20-309 20-364

PW200/PW220-7E0 VEBM949100 00-9

Time of Time of Time of Time of Time of

20-440 20-495 20-550 20-605 20-723